### 406 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) Pt. 173

where the material is relinquished to another entity. Railroad facilities are railroadproperty including, but not limited to, classification and switching yards, storage facilities, and non-private sidings; however,they do not include an offeror’s facility, private track, private siding, or consignee’s facility. Each rail carrier must use best effortsto communicate with its shippers, consignees, and interlining partners to ensure the safety and security of shipments during all stages of transportation.

C. Because of the varying operating environments and interconnected nature of the rail system, each carrier must select and document the analysis method/model used and identify the routes to be analyzed.

D. The safety and security risk analysis
must consider current data and information as well as changes that may reasonably be anticipated to occur during the analysisyear. Factors to be considered in the performance of this safety and security risk analysis include:

1. Volume of hazardous material transported;

2. Rail traffic density; 3. Trip length for route;
4. Presence and characteristics of railroad facilities;

5. Track type, class, and maintenance schedule;

6. Track grade and curvature; 7. Presence or absence of signals and train control systems along the route (‘‘dark’’ versus signaled territory);

8. Presence or absence of wayside hazard detectors;

9. Number and types of grade crossings; 10. Single versus double track territory;11. Frequency and location of track turnouts;

12. Proximity to iconic targets;13. Environmentally sensitive or significant areas;

14. Population density along the route; 15. Venues along the route (stations, events, places of congregation);

16. Emergency response capability along the route;

17. Areas of high consequence along the route, including high consequence targets as defined in §172.820(c);

18. Presence of passenger traffic along route (shared track);

19. Speed of train operations; 20. Proximity to en-route storage or repair facilities;

21. Known threats, including any non-public threat scenarios provided by the Department of Homeland Security or the Department of Transportation for carrier use in the development of the route assessment;

22. Measures in place to address apparent safety and security risks;

23. Availability of practicable alternative

routes; 24. Past incidents; 25. Overall times in transit; 26. Training and skill level of crews; and27. Impact on rail network traffic and congestion.

[73 FR 20772, April 16, 2008]



### PART 173—SHIPPERS—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHIPMENTS AND PACKAGINGS

Subpart A—General

Sec. 173.1 Purpose and scope.
173.2 Hazardous materials classes and index
to hazard class definitions. 173.2a Classification of a material having
more than one hazard. 173.3 Packaging and exceptions. 173.4 Small quantity exceptions. 173.4a Excepted quantities. 173.5 Agricultural operations.
173.5a Oilfield service vehicles and mechanical displacement meter provers. 173.5b Portable and mobile refrigeration systems. 173.6 Materials of trade exceptions. 173.7 Government operations and materials.173.8 Exceptions for non-specification packagings used in intrastate transportation.173.9 Transport vehicles or freight containers containing lading which has been fumigated. 173.10 Tank car shipments.173.12 Exceptions for shipment of waste materials. 173.13 Exceptions for Class 3, Divisions 4.1,4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, and Classes 8 and 9 materials.

Subpart B—Preparation of Hazardous Materials for Transportation

173.21 Forbidden materials and packages. 173.22 Shipper’s responsibility. 173.22a Use of packagings authorized under special permits. 173.23 Previously authorized packaging. 173.24 General requirements for packagings and packages. 173.24a Additional general requirements for non-bulk packagings and packages. 173.24b Additional general requirements for bulk packagings.173.25 Authorized packagings and overpacks. 173.26 Quantity limitations.173.27 General requirements for transportation by aircraft.173.28 Reuse, reconditioning and remanufacture of packagings. 173.29 Empty packagings. 173.30 Loading and unloading of transport
vehicles.


### 407 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 173

173.31 Use of tank cars. 173.32 Requirements for the use of portable
tanks. 173.33 Hazardous materials in cargo tank
motor vehicles. 173.34 [Reserved]
173.35 Hazardous materials in intermediate bulk containers (IBCs).173.36 Hazardous materials in Large Packagings. 173.40 General packaging requirements for toxic materials packaged in cylinders.

Subpart C—Definitions, Classification and Packaging for Class 1

173.50 Class 1—Definitions. 173.51 Authorization to offer and transport explosives.173.52 Classification codes and compatibility groups of explosives.173.53 Provisions for using old classifications of explosives. 173.54 Forbidden explosives. 173.55 [Reserved]173.56 New explosives—Definition and procedures for classification and approval.173.57 Acceptance criteria for new explosives. 173.58 Assignment of class and division for new explosives. 173.59 Description of terms for explosives. 173.60 General packaging requirements for explosives. 173.61 Mixed packaging requirements. 173.62 Specific packaging requirements for explosives. 173.63 Packaging exceptions.

Subpart D—Definitions, Classification,Packing Group Assignments and Exceptions for Hazardous Material Other Than Class 1 and Class 7

173.115 Class 2, Divisions 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3—
Definitions. 173.116 Class 2—Assignment of hazard zone. 173.117–173.119 [Reserved]
173.120 Class 3—Definitions. 173.121 Class 3—Assignment of packing

group. 173.124 Class 4, Divisions 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3—
Definitions. 173.125 Class 4—Assignment of packing

group. 173.127 Class 5, Division 5.1—Definition and assignment of packing groups. 173.128 Class 5, Division 5.2—Definitions and types. 173.129 Class 5, Division 5.2—Assignment of packing group. 173.132 Class 6, Division 6.1—Definitions. 173.133 Assignment of packing group and
hazard zones for Division 6.1 materials. 173.134 Class 6, Division 6.2—Definitions and exceptions. 173.136 Class 8—Definitions. 173.137 Class 8—Assignment of packing

group. 173.140 Class 9—Definitions. 173.141 Class 9—Assignment of packing

group. 173.144 Other Regulated Materials (ORM)—
Definitions.173.145 Other Regulated Materials—Assignment of packing group. 173.150 Exceptions for Class 3 (flammable and combustible liquids). 173.151 Exceptions for Class 4. 173.152 Exceptions for Division 5.1(oxidizers) and Division 5.2 (organic peroxides).173.153 Exceptions for Division 6.1 (poisonous materials).173.154 Exceptions for Class 8 (corrosive materials).173.155 Exceptions for Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous materials). 173.156 Exceptions for ORM materials.

Subpart E—Non-bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and Class 7

173.158 Nitric acid. 173.159 Batteries, wet.173.159a Exceptions for non-spillable batteries.173.160 Bombs, smoke, non-explosive (corrosive).
173.161 Chemical kits and first aid kits.
173.162 Gallium. 173.163 Hydrogen fluoride.173.164 Mercury (metallic and articles containing mercury). 173.166 Air bag inflators, air bag modules and seat-belt pretensioners. 173.168 Chemical oxygen generators. 173.170 Black powder for small arms. 173.171 Smokeless powder for small arms. 173.172 Aircraft hydraulic power unit fuel
tank.173.173 Paint, paint-related material, adhesives and ink and resins. 173.174 Refrigerating machines. 173.181 Pyrophoric materials (liquids). 173.182 Barium azide—50 percent or more

water wet. 173.183 Nitrocellulose base film. 173.184 Highway or rail fusee.
173.185 Lithium batteries and cells.
173.186 Matches. 173.187 Pyrophoric solids, metals or alloys,

n.o.s. 173.188 White or yellow phosphorous. 173.189 Batteries containing sodium or cells containing sodium. 173.192 Packaging for certain toxic gases in
Hazard Zone A. 173.193 Bromoacetone, methyl bromide, chloropicrin and methyl bromide or methyl chloride mixtures, etc.
173.194 Gas identification sets.


### 408 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) Pt. 173

173.195 Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous, stabilized (hydrocyanic acid, aqueous solution). 173.196 Category A infectious substances. 173.197 Regulated medical waste. 173.198 Nickel carbonyl. 173.199 Category B infectious substances.173.201 Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group I.173.202 Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group II.173.203 Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group III.173.204 Non-bulk, non-specification packagings for certain hazardous materials. 173.205 Specification cylinders for liquid
hazardous materials. 173.206 Packaging requirements for
chlorosilanes.173.211 Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group I.173.212 Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group II.173.213 Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group III. 173.214 Packagings which require approval by the Associate Administrator. 173.216 Asbestos, blue, brown, or white. 173.217 Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice). 173.218 Fish meal or fish scrap. 173.219 Life-saving appliances.173.220 Internal combustion engines, selfpropelled vehicles, mechanical equipment containing internal combustion engines, and battery powered vehicles or equipment. 173.221 Polymeric beads, expandable and Plastic molding compound.173.222 Dangerous good in machinery or apparatus. 173.223 Packagings for certain flammable
solids.173.224 Packaging and control and emergency temperatures for self-reactive materials. 173.225 Packaging requirements and other provisions for organic peroxides. 173.226 Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard
Zone A. 173.227 Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard
Zone B. 173.228 Bromine pentaflouride or bromine
trifluoride.
173.229 Chloric acid solution or chlorine dioxide hydrate, frozen.173.230 Fuel cell cartridges containing hazardous material.

Subpart F—Bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and Class 7

173.240 Bulk packaging for certain low hazard solid materials.173.241 Bulk packagings for certain low hazard liquid and solid materials. 173.242 Bulk packagings for certain medium hazard liquids and solids, including solids
with dual hazards.173.243 Bulk packaging for certain high hazard liquids and dual hazard materials which pose a moderate hazard. 173.244 Bulk packaging for certainpyrophoric liquids (Division 4.2), dangerous when wet (Division 4.3) materials, and poisonous liquids with inhalation hazards (Division 6.1).173.245 Bulk packaging for extremely hazardous materials such as poisonous gases (Division 2.3). 173.247 Bulk packaging for certain elevated temperature materials.
173.249 Bromine.

Subpart G—Gases; Preparation and Packaging

173.300 [Reserved] 173.301 General requirements for shipment of compressed gases and other hazardousmaterials in cylinders, UN pressure receptacles and spherical pressure vessels. 173.301a Additional general requirements for shipment of specification cylinders. 173.301b Additional general requirements for shipment of UN pressure receptacles.173.302 Filling of cylinders with nonliquefied (permanent) compressed gases.173.302a Additional requirements for shipment nonliquefied (permanent) compressed gases in specification cylinders.173.302b Additional requirements for shipment of non-liquefied (permanent) compressed gases in UN pressure receptacles.173.303 Charging of cylinders with compressed gas in solution (acetylene). 173.304 Filling of cylinders with liquefied compressed gases.173.304a Additional requirements for shipment of liquefied compressed gases in specification cylinders.173.304b Additional requirements for shipment of liquefied compressed gases in UN pressure receptacles. 173.305 Charging of cylinders with a mixture of compressed gas and other material. 173.306 Limited quantities of compressed

gases. 173.307 Exceptions for compressed gases.173.308 Cigarette lighter or other similar device charged with fuel. 173.309 Fire extinguishers. 173.310 Exceptions for radiation detectors. 173.312 Requirements for shipment of
MEGCs.173.313 UN Portable Tank Table for Liquefied Compressed Gases. 173.314 Compressed gases in tank cars and
multi-unit tank cars. 173.315 Compressed gases in cargo tanks and portable tanks. 173.316 Cryogenic liquids in cylinders. 173.318 Cryogenic liquids in cargo tanks.


### 409 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 173

173.319 Cryogenic liquids in tank cars. 173.320 Cryogenic liquids; exceptions. 173.321 Ethylamine. 173.322 Ethyl chloride. 173.323 Ethylene oxide.173.334 Organic phosphates mixed with compressed gas. 173.335 [Reserved] 173.336 Nitrogen dioxide, liquefied, or dinitrogen tetroxide, liquefied.
173.337 Nitric oxide. 173.338 Tungsten hexafluoride. 173.340 Tear gas devices.

Subpart H [ Reserved ]

Subpart I—Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials

173.401 Scope.
173.403 Definitions. 173.410 General design requirements. 173.411 Industrial packagings. 173.412 Additional design requirements for Type A packages. 173.413 Requirements for Type B packages. 173.415 Authorized Type A packages. 173.416 Authorized Type B packages.173.417 Authorized fissile materials packages. 173.418 Authorized packages—pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 173.419 Authorized packages—oxidizing Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 173.420 Uranium hexafluoride (fissile, fissile excepted and non-fissile).173.421 Excepted packages for limited quantities of Class 7 (radioactive) materials.173.422 Additional requirements for excepted packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 173.423 Requirements for multiple hazard limited quantity Class 7 (radioactive)
materials. 173.424 Excepted packages for radioactive
instruments and articles. 173.425 Table of activity limits—excepted quantities and articles.173.426 Excepted packages for articles containing natural uranium or thorium.173.427 Transport requirements for low specific activity (LSA) Class 7 (radioactive)
materials and surface contaminated objects (SCO).173.428 Empty Class 7 (radioactive) materials packaging. 173.431 Activity limits for Type A and Type B packages. 173.433 Requirements for determining basic radionuclide values, and for the listing ofradionuclides on shipping papers and labels.173.434 Activity-mass relationships for uranium and natural thorium.
173.435 Table of A 1 and A 2 values for radionuclides. 173.436 Exempt material activity concentrations and exempt consignment activity
limits for radionuclides.
173.441 Radiation level limitations and exclusive use provisions.
173.442 Thermal limitations.
173.443 Contamination control. 173.447 Storage incident to transportation— general requirements.173.448 General transportation requirements. 173.453 Fissile materials—exceptions. 173.457 Transportation of fissile material packages—specific requirements. 173.459 Mixing of fissile material packageswith non-fissile or fissile-excepted material packages. 173.461 Demonstration of compliance with

tests. 173.462 Preparation of specimens for testing. 173.465 Type A packaging tests.173.466 Additional tests for Type A packagings designed for liquids and gases. 173.467 Tests for demonstrating the abilityof Type B and fissile materials packagings to withstand accident conditions in transportation.
173.468 Test for LSA-III material.173.469 Tests for special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials.173.471 Requirements for U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission approved packages. 173.472 Requirements for exporting DOTSpecification Type B and fissile packages. 173.473 Requirements for foreign-made packages. 173.474 Quality control for construction of packaging. 173.475 Quality control requirements prior to each shipment of Class 7 (radioactive)
materials.173.476 Approval of special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 173.477 Approval of packagings containing greater than 0.1 kg of non-fissile or fissile-excepted uranium hexafluoride.

Subparts J–O [ Reserved ]

A PPENDIX A TO P ART 173 [R ESERVED ]

A PPENDIX B TO P ART 173—P ROCEDURE FOR T ESTING C HEMICAL C OMPATIBILITY AND R ATE OF P ERMEATION IN P LASTIC P ACK

AGING AND R ECEPTACLES A PPENDIX C TO P ART 173—P ROCEDURE FOR B ASE

- LEVEL V IBRATION T ESTING A PPENDIX D TO P ART 173—T EST M ETHODS FOR D YNAMITE (E XPLOSIVE , B LASTING , T YPE A)

A PPENDIXES E–G TO P ART 173 [R ESERVED ]

A PPENDIX H TO P ART 173—M ETHOD OF T EST

ING FOR S USTAINED C OMBUSTIBILITY

A UTHORITY : 49 U.S.C. 5101–5128, 44701; 49 CFR 1.45, 1.53.


### 410 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.1

E DITORIAL N OTE : Nomenclature changes to part 173 appear at 70 FR 56098, Sept. 23, 2005.



### Subpart A—General

§ 173.1 Purpose and scope.

(a) This part includes: (1) Definitions of hazardous materials for transportation purposes;

(2) Requirements to be observed inpreparing hazardous materials for shipment by air, highway, rail, or water, or any combination thereof; and

(3) Inspection, testing, and retesting responsibilities for persons who retest,recondition, maintain, repair and rebuild containers used or intended for use in the transportation of hazardous
materials.

(b) A shipment of hazardous materials that is not prepared in accordancewith this subchapter may not be offered for transportation by air, highway, rail, or water. It is the responsibility of each hazmat employer subject to the requirements of this subchapter to ensure that each hazmat employee
is trained in accordance with the requirements prescribed in this subchapter. It is the duty of each person
who offers hazardous materials for transportation to instruct each of his officers, agents, and employees havingany responsibility for preparing hazardous materials for shipment as to applicable regulations in this subchapter. (c) In general, the Hazardous Materials Regulations (HMR) contained in this subchapter are based on the UN
Recommendations and are consistent with international regulations issuedby the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO Technical Instructions) and the International Maritime Organization (IMDG Code). However,
the HMR are not consistent in all respects with the UN Recommendations,
the ICAO Technical Instructions or the IMDG Code, and compliance with the HMR will not guarantee acceptance by regulatory bodies outside of the United
States.

[Amdt. 173–94, 41 FR 16062, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173–100, 41 FR 40476, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 173–161, 48 FR 2655, Jan. 20, 1983; Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52606, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 20953, May 15, 1992; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 1999; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003]

§ 173.2 Hazardous materials classesand index to hazard class definitions.

The hazard class of a hazardous material is indicated either by its class (or division) number, its class name, or by the letters ‘‘ORM-D’’. The followingtable lists class numbers, division numbers, class or division names and thosesections of this subchapter which contain definitions for classifying hazardous materials, including forbidden
materials.

Class No. Division No. (if any) Name of class or division 49 CFR reference for definitions

None .................... Forbidden materials ................................................................................... ........................... 173.21 None .................... Forbidden explosives .................................................................................. .......................... 173.54 1 1.1 Explosives (with a mass explosion hazard) .......................................................................... 173.50 1 1.2 Explosives (with a projection hazard) ................................................................................... 1 73.50 1 1.3 Explosives (with predominately a fire hazard) ...................................................................... 173.50 1 1.4 Explosives (with no significant blast hazard) ........................................................................ 173. 50 1 1.5 Very insensitive explosives; blasting agents ........................................................................ 173.5 0 1 1.6 Extremely insensitive detonating substances ....................................................................... 173.50 2 2.1 Flammable gas ............................................................................................................ .......... 173.115 2 2.2 Non-flammable compressed gas .......................................................................................... 173 .115 2 2.3 Poisonous gas ............................................................................................................ ........... 173.115 3 .................... Flammable and combustible liquid ......................................................................... .............. 173.120
4 4.1 Flammable solid .......................................................................................................... .......... 173.124 4 4.2 Spontaneously combustible material .................................................................................... 173 .124 4 4.3 Dangerous when wet material .............................................................................................. 173.124
5 5.1 Oxidizer ................................................................................................................. ................ 173.127 5 5.2 Organic peroxide ......................................................................................................... .......... 173.128
6 6.1 Poisonous materials ...................................................................................................... ........ 173.132 6 6.2 Infectious substance (Etiologic agent) .................................................................................. 1 73.134
7 .................... Radioactive material ..................................................................................... ......................... 173.403
8 .................... Corrosive material ....................................................................................... .......................... 173.136
9 .................... Miscellaneous hazardous material ......................................................................... ............... 173.140 None .................... Other regulated material: ORM-D ....................................................................... .................. 173.144


### 411 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.2a

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52606, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 57 FR 45460, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173– 234, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993]

§ 173.2a Classification of a material having more than one hazard.

(a) Classification of a material having
more than one hazard. Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, a material not specifically listed in the §172.101 table that meets the definition
of more than one hazard class or division as defined in this part, shall beclassed according to the highest applicable hazard class of the following hazard classes, which are listed in descending order of hazard:

(1) Class 7 (radioactive materials, other than limited quantities).

(2) Division 2.3 (poisonous gases). (3) Division 2.1 (flammable gases). (4) Division 2.2 (nonflammable gases). (5) Division 6.1 (poisonous liquids),Packing Group I, poisonous-by-inhalation only.

(6) A material that meets the definition of a pyrophoric material in§173.124(b)(1) of this subchapter (Division 4.2). (7) A material that meets the definition of a self-reactive material in§173.124(a)(2) of this subchapter (Division 4.1).

(8) Class 3 (flammable liquids), Class 8 (corrosive materials), Division 4.1(flammable solids), Division 4.2 (spontaneously combustible materials), Division 4.3 (dangerous when wet materials), Division 5.1 (oxidizers) or Division 6.1 (poisonous liquids or solidsother than Packing Group I, poisonousby-inhalation). The hazard class and packing group for a material meeting
more than one of these hazards shall be determined using the precedence table in paragraph (b) of this section.

(9) Combustible liquids. (10) Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous materials).

(b) Precedence of hazard table for Classes 3 and 8 and Divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3,
5.1 and 6.1. The following table ranks
those materials that meet the definition of Classes 3 and 8 and Divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1 and 6.1:

P RECEDENCE OF H AZARD T ABLE

[ Hazard class or division and packing group ]

4.2 4.3 5.1 I 1 5.1 II 1 5.1 III 1 6.1, I dermal 6.1, I oral 6.1 II 6.1 III 8, I liquid 8, I solid 8, II liquid 8, II solid 8, III liquid 8, III solid

3 I 2 ...................... ...... 4 .3 ...... ...... ...... 3 3 3 3 3 ( 3 ) 3 ( 3 ) 3 ( 3 )
3 II 2 ..................... ...... 4 .3 ...... ...... ...... 3 3 3 3 8 ( 3 ) 3 ( 3 ) 3 ( 3 )
3 III 2 .................... ...... 4 .3 ...... ...... ...... 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 3 4 8 ( 3 ) 8 ( 3 ) 3 ( 3 )

4.1 II 2 ............... 4 .2 4 .3 5 .1 4 .1 4 .1 6 .1 6 .1 4 .1 4 .1 ( 3 ) 8 ( 3 ) 4 .1 ( 3 ) 4 .1
4.1 III 2 .............. 4 .2 4 .3 5 .1 4 .1 4 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 4 .1 ( 3 ) 8 ( 3 ) 8 ( 3 ) 4 .1
4.2 II ................. ...... 4 .3 5 .1 4 .2 4 .2 6 .1 6 .1 4 .2 4 .2 8 8 4 .2 4 .2 4 .2 4 .2
4.2 III ................ ...... 4 .3 5 .1 5 .1 4 .2 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 4 .2 8 8 8 8 4 .2 4 .2
4.3 I .................. ...... ...... 5 .1 4 .3 4 .3 6 .1 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3
4.3 II ................. ...... ...... 5 .1 4 .3 4 .3 6 .1 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 8 8 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3
4.3 III ................ ...... ...... 5 .1 5 .1 4 .3 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 4 .3 8 8 8 8 4 .3 4 .3
5.1 I 1 ................ ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1
5.1 II 1 ............... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 6 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 8 8 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1
5.1 III 1 .............. ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 5 .1 8 8 8 8 5 .1 5 .1 6.1 I, Dermal .... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............ ........ ...... ........ 8 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6.1 I, Oral ......... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............ ........ ...... ........ 8 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6.1 II, Inhalation ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............ ........ ...... ........ 8 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6.1 II, Dermal ... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............ ........ ...... ........ 8 6 .1 8 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6.1 II, Oral ........ ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............ ........ ...... ........ 8 8 8 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1
6.1 III ................ ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............ ........ ...... ........ 8 8 8 8 8 8

1 See § 173.127.

2 Materials of Division 4.1 other than self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives, and materials of Class 3 other than liquid desensitized explosives.

3 Denotes an impossible combination.

4 For pesticides only, where a material has the hazards of Class 3, Packing Group III, and Division 6.1, Packing Group III, the primary hazard is Division 6.1, Packing Group III.

N OTE 1: The most stringent packing group assigned to a hazard of the material takes precedence over other packing groups; for example, a material meeting Class 3 PG II


### 412 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.3

and Division 6.1 PG I (oral toxicity) is classified as Class 3 PG I.

N OTE 2: A material which meets the definition of Class 8 and has an inhalation toxicity by dusts and mists which meets criteria for Packing Group I specified in §173.133(a)(1)
must be classed as Division 6.1 if the oral or dermal toxicity meets criteria for Packing Group I or II. If the oral or dermal toxicity meets criteria for Packing Group III or less,
the material must be classed as Class 8.

(c) The following materials are not subject to the provisions of paragraph (a) of this section because of their unique properties:

(1) A Class 1 (explosive) material thatmeets any other hazard class or division as defined in this part shall be assigned a division in Class 1. Class 1 materials shall be classed and approved in accordance with §173.56 of this part;

(2) A Division 5.2 (organic peroxide)
material that meets the definition of any other hazard class or division as defined in this part, shall be classed as Division 5.2;

(3) A Division 6.2 (infectious substance) material that also meets the
definition of another hazard class or division, other than Class 7, or that also is a limited quantity Class 7 material, shall be classed as Division 6.2;

(4) A material that meets the definition of a wetted explosive in§173.124(a)(1) of this subchapter (Division 4.1). Wetted explosives are either specifically listed in the §172.101 tableor are approved by the Associate Administrator (see §173.124(a)(1) of this subchapter); and

(5) A limited quantity of a Class 7 (radioactive) material that meets the
definition for more than one hazard
class or division shall be classed in accordance with §173.423.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52606, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66264, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67490, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 247, 60 FR 48787, Sept. 20, 1995; Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 33426, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45182, 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45032, July 31, 2003]

§ 173.3 Packaging and exceptions.

(a) The packaging of hazardous materials for transportation by air, highway, rail, or water must be as specified in this part. Methods of manufacture,packing, and storage of hazardous materials, that affect safety in transportation, must be open to inspection by a duly authorized representative of the initial carrier or of the Department.
Methods of manufacture and related functions necessary for completion of a DOT specification or U.N. standard packaging must be open to inspection by a representative of the Department.

(b) The regulations setting forth packaging requirements for a specificmaterial apply to all modes of transportation unless otherwise stated, orunless exceptions from packaging requirements are authorized.

(c) Salvage drums. Packages of hazardous materials that are damaged, defective, or leaking; packages found to be not conforming to the requirements of this subchapter after having beenplaced in transportation; and, hazardous materials that have spilled or leaked may be placed in a metal or plastic removable head salvage drum that is compatible with the lading and shipped for repackaging or disposal under the following conditions:

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(7) of this section, the drum must be a UN 1A2, 1B2, 1N2 or 1H2 tested and marked for Packing Group III or higher performance standards for liquids or solids and a leakproofness test of 20 kPa (3 psig). Alternatively, a drummanufactured and marked prior to October 1, 1993 as a salvage drum, in accordance with the provisions of this section in effect on September 30, 1991, is authorized. Capacity of the drum may not exceed 450 L (119 gallons).

(2) Each drum shall be provided when necessary with sufficient cushioningand absorption material to prevent excessive shifting of the damaged package and to eliminate the presence of any free liquid at the time the salvagedrum is closed. All cushioning and absorbent material used in the drum must be compatible with the hazardous
material.

(3) Each salvage packaging must be marked with the proper shipping name
of the hazardous material inside the packaging and the name and address ofthe consignee. In addition, the packaging must be marked ‘‘SALVAGE’’ or
‘‘SALVAGE DRUM’’.

(4) Each drum shall be labeled as prescribed for the respective material.


### 413 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.3

(5) The shipper shall prepare shipping papers in accordance with subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter.

(6) Transportation is authorized by motor vehicle and cargo vessel only.

(7) A salvage packaging marked ‘‘T’’in accordance with applicable provisions in the UN Recommendations may
be used.

(d) Salvage cylinders . Cylinders of hazardous materials that are damaged orleaking may be overpacked in a nonDOT specification full opening hingedhead or fully removable head steel salvage cylinder under the following conditions:

(1) Only a cylinder containing a Division 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3, 6.1, or a Class 8 material may be overpacked in a salvagecylinder. A cylinder containing acetylene may not be overpacked in a salvage cylinder.

(2) Each salvage cylinder— (i) Must be designed, constructed and
marked in accordance with Section VIII, Division I of the ASME Code (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) with a minimum design margin of 4 to 1. Salvage cylinders may not be equipped with a pressure relief device. Damaged cylinders must be securely positionedin the salvage cylinder to prevent excessive movement. The overpack requirements of §173.25 of this part do not apply to salvage cylinders used in
accordance with this section.

(ii) Must have a maximum water capacity of 450 L (119 gallons).

(iii) Except for liquefied nitrous oxide and carbon dioxide, contents of the damaged or leaking cylinder must be limited in pressure and volume sothat if totally discharged into the salvage cylinder, the pressure in the salvage cylinder will not exceed 5 ⁄ 4 of the
MAWP at 55 ° C (131 ° F).

(iv) Must have gaskets, valves and fittings that are compatible with the
hazardous materials contained within.

(3) Each salvage cylinder must be plainly and durably marked. Unless otherwise specified, the markings below must be in the same area on any portion of the upper end:

(i) The proper shipping name of the
hazardous material contained inside the packaging;

(ii) The name and address of the consignee or consignor; (iii) The name and address or registered symbol of the manufacturer;
and

(iv) The words ‘‘SALVAGE CYLINDER’’ in letters at least 50 mm (2.0 inches) high on opposite sides near the middle of the cylinder; stamping on the
sidewall is not authorized.

(4) Each salvage cylinder must be labeled for the hazardous material contained inside the packaging.

(5) The shipper must prepare shipping papers in accordance with subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter.

(6) Transportation is authorized by motor vehicle only.

(7) Each salvage cylinder must be cleaned and purged after each use.

(8) In addition to the training requirements of §§172.700 through 172.704 of this subchapter, a person who loads,unloads or transports a salvage cylinder must be trained in handling,loading and unloading the salvage cylinder.

(9) Cylinder Requalification: At least once every five years, each cylinder must be visually inspected (internally and externally) in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C–6 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) and pressure tested. A minimum test pressure of at least 1 1 ⁄ 2 times MAWP must be maintained for at least 30 seconds. The cylinder must be examined under test pressure and
removed from service if a leak or a defect is found.

(i) The retest and inspection must be performed by a person familiar withsalvage cylinders and trained and experienced in the use of the inspection and testing equipment.

(ii) Each salvage cylinder that is successfully requalified must be durably and legibly marked with the word‘‘Tested’’ followed by the requalification date (month/year), e.g. , ‘‘Tested 9/ 04.’’ The marking must be in letters and numbers at least 12 mm (0.5 inches) high. The requalification marking may be placed on any portion of the upper end of the cylinder near the marking required in (d)(3) of this section or on a metal plate permanently secured to the cylinder. Stamping on the cylinder
sidewall is not authorized.

(10) Record retention: The owner of each salvage cylinder or his authorized agent shall retain a record of the most


### 414 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.4

recent visual inspection and pressuretest until the salvage cylinder is requalified. The records must be made available to a DOT representative upon request.

(e) Emergency transportation of DOT 3A480 or 3AA480 cylinders and DOT
106A500 multi-unit tank car tanks. (1) ADOT 3A480 or DOT 3AA480 cylinder containing chlorine or sulphur dioxide that has developed a leak in a valve orfusible plug may be repaired temporarily by trained personnel using a Chlorine Institute Kit ‘‘A’’ (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). The repairedcylinder is authorized to be transported by private or contract carrier one time, one way, from the point ofdiscovery to a proper facility for discharge and examination.

(2) A DOT 106A500 multi-unit tankcar tank containing chlorine or sulphur dioxide that has developed a leak in the valve or fusible plug may betemporarily repaired by trained personnel using a Chlorine Institute Kit ‘‘B’’ (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). The repaired tank is authorized to betransported by private or contract carrier one time, one way, from the pointof discovery to a proper facility for discharge and examination.

(3) Training for personnel making the repairs in paragraphs (d)(1) and (d)(2) of
this section must include:

(i) Proper use of the devices and tools in the applicable kits;

(ii) Use of respiratory equipment and all other safety equipment; and

(iii) Knowledge of the properties of chlorine and sulphur dioxide.

(4) Packagings repaired with ‘‘A’’ or ‘‘B’’ kits must be properly blocked andbraced to ensure the packagings are secured in the transport vehicle.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52607, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173– 261, 62 FR 24719, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003; 69 FR 76154, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 3307, Jan. 24, 2005; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 70 FR 34397, June 14, 2005; 70 FR 56098, Sept. 23, 2005; 75 FR 27213, May 14, 2010]

§ 173.4 Small quantities for highway and rail. (a) When transported domestically by highway or rail in conformance with this section, small quantities of Class 3, Division 4.1, Division 4.2 (PG II andIII), Division 4.3 (PG II and III), Division 5.1, Division 5.2, Division 6.1, Class 7, Class 8, and Class 9 materials that
also meet the definition of one or more of these hazard classes, are not subjectto any other requirements of this subchapter when—

(1) The maximum quantity of material per inner receptacle or article is
limited to—

(i) Thirty (30) mL (1 ounce) for authorized liquids, other than Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A or B materials;

(ii) Thirty (30) g (1 ounce) for authorized solid materials;

(iii) One (1) g (0.04 ounce) for authorized materials meeting the definitionof a Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A or B material; and

(iv) An activity level not exceeding that specified in §§173.421, 173.424, 173.425 or 173.426, as appropriate, for apackage containing a Class 7 (radioactive) material.

(2) With the exception of temperature sensing devices, each inner receptacle:

(i) Is not liquid-full at 55 ° C (131 ° F),
and

(ii) Is constructed of plastic having a
minimum thickness of no less than 0.2 mm (0.008 inch), or earthenware, glass, or metal;

(3) Each inner receptacle with a removable closure has its closure held securely in place with wire, tape, or other positive means;

(4) Unless equivalent cushioning and
absorbent material surrounds the inside packaging, each inner receptacleis securely packed in an inside packaging with cushioning and absorbent
material that:

(i) Will not react chemically with the material, and

(ii) Is capable of absorbing the entire contents (if a liquid) of the receptacle;

(5) The inside packaging is securely packed in a strong outer packaging;

(6) The completed package, as demonstrated by prototype testing, is capable of sustaining—

(i) Each of the following free drops made from a height of 1.8 m (5.9 feet) directly onto a solid unyielding surface without breakage or leakage from any


### 415 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.4a

inner receptacle and without a substantial reduction in the effectiveness of the package:

(A) One drop flat on bottom; (B) One drop flat on top; (C) One drop flat on the long side; (D) One drop flat on the short side;
and

(E) One drop on a corner at the junction of three intersecting edges; and

(ii) A compressive load as specified in §178.606(c) of this subchapter.

N OTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(6): Each of the tests in paragraph (a)(6) of this section may be performed on a different but identical package; i.e. , all tests need not be performed on the same package.

(7) Placement of the material in the package or packing different materialsin the package does not result in a violation of §173.21;

(8) The gross mass of the completed package does not exceed 29 kg (64 pounds);

(9) The package is not opened or otherwise altered until it is no longer in commerce; and

(10) The shipper certifies conformance with this section by marking theoutside of the package with the statement ‘‘This package conforms to 49 CFR 173.4 for domestic highway or rail transport only.’’

(b) A package containing a Class 7(radioactive) material also must conform to the requirements of §173.421(a)(1) through (a)(5) or §173.424(a) through (g), as appropriate.

(c) Packages which contain a Class 2, Division 4.2 (PG I), or Division 4.3 (PG I) material conforming to paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(10) of this section may be offered for transportation or transported if specifically approved by
the Associate Administrator.

(d) Lithium batteries and cells are not eligible for the exceptions provided
in this section.

74 FR 2253, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 FR 5393, Feb. 2, 2010]

§ 173.4a Excepted quantities.

(a) Excepted quantities of materialsother than articles transported in accordance with this section are not subject to any additional requirements of this subchapter except for: (1) The shipper’s responsibilities toproperly class their material in accordance with §173.22 of this subchapter;

(2) Sections 171.15 and 171.16 of this subchapter pertaining to the reporting of incidents; and

(3) For a Class 7 (Radioactive) material the requirements for an excepted package.

(b) Authorized materials . Only materials authorized for transport aboard passenger aircraft and appropriatelyclassed within one of the following hazard classes or divisions may be transported in accordance with this section:

(1) Division 2.2 materials with no subsidiary hazard;

(2) Class 3 materials; (3) Class 4 (PG II and III) materials except for self-reactive materials;

(4) Division 5.1 (PG II and III); (5) Division 5.2 materials only when
contained in a chemical kit or a first aid kit;

(6) Division 6.1, other than PG I, Hazard Zone A or B material;

(7) Class 7, Radioactive material in excepted packages

(8) Class 8 (PG II and III), except forUN2803 (Gallium) and UN2809 (Mercury); and

(9) Class 9, except for UN1845 (Carbon dioxide, solid or Dry ice), and lithium
batteries and cells.

(c) Inner packaging limits . The maximum quantity of hazardous materials in each inner packaging is limited to:

(1) For toxic material with a Division 6.1 primary or subsidiary hazard, PG I
or II—

(i) 1 g (0.04 ounce) for solids; or (ii) 1 mL (0.03 ounce) for liquids; (2) 30 g (1 ounce) or 30 mL (1 ounce) for solids or liquids other than thosecovered in paragraph (c)(1) of this section; and

(3) For gases a water capacity of 30 mL (1.8 cubic inches) or less.

(d) Outer packaging aggregate quantity
limits . The maximum aggregate quantity of hazardous material contained in each outer packaging must not exceed the limits provided in the followingparagraphs. For outer packagings containing more than one hazardous material, the aggregate quantity of hazardous material must not exceed the lowest permitted maximum aggregate quantity. The limits are as follows:


### 416 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.4a

(1) For other than a Division 2.2 or
Division 5.2 material:

(i) Packing Group I—300 g (0.66pounds) for solids or 300 mL (0.08 gallons) for liquids;

(ii) Packing Group II—500 g (1.1pounds) for solids or 500 mL (0.1 gallons) for liquids;

(iii) Packing Group III—1 kg (2.2 pounds) for solids or 1 L (0.2 gallons) for liquids;

(2) For Division 2.2 material, 1 L (61 cubic inches); or

(3) For Division 5.2 material, 500 g (1.1 pounds) for solids or 250 mL (0.05 gallons) for liquids.

(e) Packaging materials . Packagings used for the transport of excepted quantities must meet the following:

(1) Each inner receptacle must beconstructed of plastic, or of glass, porcelain, stoneware, earthenware or metal. When used for liquid hazardous materials, plastic inner packagings
must have a thickness of not less than 0.2 mm (0.008 inch).

(2) Each inner packaging with a removable closure must have its closure held securely in place with wire, tapeor other positive means. Each inner receptacle having a neck with molded screw threads must have a leak proof, threaded type cap. The closure mustnot react chemically with the material.

(3) Each inner packaging must be securely packed in an intermediate packaging with cushioning material in such a way that, under normal conditions oftransport, it cannot break, be punctured or leak its contents. The intermediate packaging must completely
contain the contents in case of breakage or leakage, regardless of packageorientation. For liquid hazardous materials, the intermediate packaging
must contain sufficient absorbent material that:

(i) Will absorb the entire contents of the inner packaging.

(ii) Will not react dangerously with the material or reduce the integrity or function of the packaging materials.

(iii) The absorbent material may be the cushioning material.

(4) The intermediate packaging must be securely packed in a strong, rigid outer packaging. (5) Placement of the material in the package or packing different materials in the package must not result in a violation of §173.21.

(6) Each package must be of such a size that there is adequate space to apply all necessary markings.

(7) The package is not opened or otherwise altered until it is no longer in

commerce.

(8) Overpacks may be used and mayalso contain packages of hazardous material or other materials not subject to the HMR subject to the requirements of §173.25.

(f) Package tests . The completed package as prepared for transport, with inner packagings filled to not less than 95% of their capacity for solids or 98%for liquids, must be capable of withstanding, as demonstrated by testing which is appropriately documented, without breakage or leakage of anyinner packaging and without significant reduction in effectiveness:

(1) Drops onto a solid unyielding surface from a height of 1.8 m (5.9 feet):

(i) Where the sample is in the shape of a box, it must be dropped in each of the following orientations:

(A) One drop flat on the bottom; (B) One drop flat on the top; (C) One drop flat on the longest side; (D) One drop flat on the shortest side;
and

(E) One drop on a corner at the junction of three intersecting edges.

(ii) Where the sample is in the shape of a drum, it must be dropped in each of the following orientations:

(A) One drop diagonally on the topchime, with the center of gravity directly above the point of impact;

(B) One drop diagonally on the base chime; and

(C) One drop flat on the side. (2) A compressive load as specified in §178.606(c) of this subchapter. Each of the tests in this paragraph (f) of thissection may be performed on a different but identical package; that is, all tests need not be performed on the same package.

(g) Marking . Excepted quantities of hazardous materials packaged, marked, and otherwise offered and transported in accordance with this section must be durably and legibly marked with the following marking:


### 417 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.4b

(1) The ‘‘*’’ must be replaced by theprimary hazard class, or when assigned, the division of each of the hazardous materials contained in the package. The ‘‘**’’ must be replaced by the name of the shipper or consignee if not shown elsewhere on the package.

(2) The marking must not be less than 100 mm (3.9 inches) by 100 mm (3.9inches), and must be durable and clearly visible.

(h) Documentation . (1) For transportation by highway or rail, no shipping paper is required.

(2) For transport by air, a shipping paper is not required, except that, if adocument such as an air waybill accompanies a shipment, the document
must include the statement ‘‘Dangerous Goods in Excepted Quantities’’ and indicate the number of packages.

(3) For transport by vessel, a shipping paper is required and must include the statement ‘‘Dangerous Goods in Excepted Quantities’’ and indicate the number of packages.

(i) Training . Each person who offers or transports excepted quantities of
hazardous materials must know about the requirements of this section.

(j) Restrictions . Hazardous materialpackaged in accordance with this section may not be carried in checked or carry-on baggage.

[74 FR 2254, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 FR 72, Jan. 4, 2010] § 173.4b De minimis exceptions.(a) Packing Group II and III materials in Class 3, Division 4.1, Division 4.2, Division 4.3, Division 5.1, Division 6.1, Class 8, and Class 9 do not meet the
definition of a hazardous material in§171.8 of this subchapter when packaged in accordance with this section and, therefore, are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.

(1) The maximum quantity of material per inner receptacle or article is
limited to—

(i) One (1) mL (0.03 ounce) for authorized liquids; and

(ii) One (1) g (0.04 ounce) for authorized solid materials;

(2) Each inner receptacle with a removable closure has its closure held securely in place with wire, tape, or other positive means;

(3) Unless equivalent cushioning and
absorbent material surrounds the inside packaging, each inner receptacleis securely packed in an inside packaging with cushioning and absorbent
material that:

(i) Will not react chemically with the material, and

(ii) Is capable of absorbing the entire contents (if a liquid) of the receptacle;

(4) The inside packaging is securely packed in a strong outer packaging;

(5) The completed package is capable of sustaining—

(i) Each of the following free drops made from a height of 1.8 m (5.9 feet) directly onto a solid unyielding surface without breakage or leakage from anyinner receptacle and without a substantial reduction in the effectiveness of the package:

(A) One drop flat on bottom; (B) One drop flat on top; (C) One drop flat on the long side; (D) One drop flat on the short side;
and

(E) One drop on a corner at the junction of three intersecting edges; and

(ii) A compressive load as specified in §178.606(c) of this subchapter. Each of the tests in this paragraph (a)(5) maybe performed on a different but identical package; that is, all tests need not be performed on the same package.

(6) Placement of the material in the package or packing different materialsin the package does not result in a violation of §173.21;


### 418 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.5

(7) The aggregate quantity of hazardous material per package does not exceed 100 g (0.22 pounds) for solids or 100 mL (3.38 ounces) for liquids;

(8) The gross mass of the completed package does not exceed 29 kg (64 pounds);

(9) The package is not opened or otherwise altered until it is no longer in commerce; and

(10) For transportation by aircraft:(i) The hazardous material is authorized to be carried aboard passenger-carrying aircraft in Column 9A of the §172.101 Hazardous Materials Table;
and

(ii) Material packed in accordance with this section may not be carried in checked or carry-on baggage.

(b) [Reserved]

[74 FR 2255, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 FR 5393, Feb. 2, 2010]

§ 173.5 Agricultural operations.

(a) For other than a Class 2 material, the transportation of an agricultural product over local roads between fields of the same farm is excepted from the requirements of this subchapter. A Class 2 material transported over local
roads between fields of the same farm is excepted from subparts G and H of part 172 of this subchapter. In eitherinstance, transportation of the hazardous material is subject to the following conditions:

(1) It is transported by a farmer who is an intrastate private motor carrier; and

(2) The movement of the agricultural product conforms to requirements of the State in which it is transported and is specifically authorized by aState statute or regulation in effect before October 1, 1998.

(b) The transportation of an agricultural product to or from a farm, within 150 miles of the farm, is excepted from the requirements in subparts G and H of part 172 of this subchapter and from the specific packaging requirements of this subchapter when:

(1) It is transported by a farmer who is an intrastate private motor carrier;

(2) The total amount of agricultural product being transported on a single
motor vehicle does not exceed:

(i) 7,300 kg (16,094 lbs.) of ammonium nitrate fertilizer properly classed as Division 5.1, PG III, in a bulk packaging, or

(ii) 1900 L (502 gallons) for liquids or gases, or 2,300 kg (5,070 lbs.) for solids, of any other agricultural product;

(3) The movement and packaging of the agricultural product conform to the requirements of the State in which it is transported and are specificallyauthorized by a State statute or regulation in effect before October 1, 1998;
and

(4) Each person having any responsibility for transporting the agricultural product or preparing the agriculturalproduct for shipment has been instructed in the applicable requirements of this subchapter.

(c) Formulated liquid agricultural products in specification packagings of 220 L (58 gallons) capacity, or less, with closures manifolded to a closed mixing system and equipped with positive dry disconnect devices may be transported by a private motor carrier between afinal distribution point and an ultimate point of application or for loading aboard an airplane for aerial application.

(d) See §173.315(m) pertaining to nurse tanks of anhydrous ammonia.

(e) See §173.6 pertaining to materials
of trade.

(f) See §172.800(b) pertaining to security plans.

[Amdt. 173–259, 62 FR 1215, Jan. 8, 1997, as amended by Amdt. 173–262, 62 FR 49566, Sept. 22, 1997; Amdt. 173–259, 63 FR 8142, Feb. 18, 1998; 65 FR 50460, Aug. 18, 2000; 70 FR 73165, Dec. 9, 2005; 73 FR 4717, Jan. 28, 2008]

§ 173.5a Oilfield service vehicles and mechanical displacement meter

provers. (a) Oilfield service vehicles. Notwithstanding §173.29 of this subchapter, acargo tank motor vehicle used in oilfield servicing operations is not subject to the specification requirements of this subchapter provided—

(1) The cargo tank and equipment contains only residual amounts ( i.e. , it is emptied so far as practicable) of aflammable liquid alone or in combination with water,

(2) No flame producing device is operated during transportation, and


### 419 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.5a

(3) The proper shipping name is preceded by ‘‘RESIDUE: LAST CONTAINED * * *’’ on the shipping paperfor each movement on a public highway.

(b) Mechanical displacement meter

provers. (1) A mechanical displacement meter prover, as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, permanently mounted
on a truck chassis or trailer and transported by motor vehicle is exceptedfrom the specification packaging requirements in part 178 of this subchapter provided it—

(i) Contains only the residue of a Division 2.1 (flammable gas) or Class 3(flammable liquid) material. For liquids, the meter prover must be drained to not exceed 10% of its capacity or, to the extent that draining of the meterprover is impracticable, to the maximum extent practicable. For gases, the meter prover must not exceed 25% of the marked pressure rating;

(ii) Has a water capacity of 3,785 L (1,000 gallons) or less;

(iii) Is designed and constructed in accordance with chapters II, III, IV, V and VI of ASME Standard B31.4 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter);

(iv) Is marked with the MAWP determined from the pipe component with the lowest pressure rating; and

(v) Is equipped with rear-end protection as prescribed in §178.337–10(c) of this subchapter and 49 CFR 393.86 of theFederal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations.

(2) The description on the shipping paper for a meter prover containing the
residue of a hazardous material must include the phrase ‘‘RESIDUE: LAST
CONTAINED * * * ’’ before the basic description.

(3) Periodic test and inspection. (i) Each meter prover must be externallyvisually inspected once a year. The external visual inspection must include at a minimum: checking for leakage, defective fittings and welds, defective closures, significant dents and other
defects or abnormalities which indicate a potential or actual weakness that could render the meter prover unsafe for transportation; and

(ii) Each meter prover must be pressure tested once every 5 years at not less than 75% of design pressure. The pressure must be held for a period of time sufficiently long to assure detection of leaks, but in no case less than
5 minutes.

(4) In addition to the training requirements in subpart H, the person who performs the visual inspection orpressure test and/or signs the inspection report must have the knowledgeand ability to perform them as required by this section.

(5) A meter prover that fails the periodic test and inspection must be rejected and removed from hazardous
materials service unless the meter prover is adequately repaired, andthereafter, a successful test is conducted in accordance with the requirements of this section.

(6) Prior to any repair work, the meter prover must be emptied of any hazardous material. A meter prover containing flammable lading must be purged.

(7) Each meter prover successfullycompleting the external visual inspection and the pressure test must be marked with the test date (month/year), and the type of test or inspection as follows:

(i) V for external visual inspection;
and

(ii) P for pressure test. The marking must be on the side of a tank or the largest piping component in letters 32 mm (1.25 inches) high on a contrasting background.

(8) The owner must retain a record ofthe most recent external visual inspection and pressure test until the next test or inspection of the same type issuccessfully completed. The test or inspection report must include the following:

(i) Serial number or other meter prover identifier;

(ii) Type of test or inspection performed;

(iii) Test date (month/year); (iv) Location of defects found, if any, and method used to repair each defect;

(v) Name and address of person performing the test or inspection;

(vi) Disposition statement, such as
‘‘Meter Prover returned to service’’ or
‘‘Meter Prover removed from service’’.

[70 FR 3308, Jan. 24, 2005, as amended at 75 FR 27213, May 14, 2010]


### 420 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.5b

§ 173.5b Portable and mobile refrigeration systems.
This section authorizes the highway transportation of residual amounts ofDivision 2.2 refrigerant gases or anhydrous ammonia contained in non-specification pressure vessels that are components of refrigeration systems, which may or may not be permanently mounted to a transport vehicle, usedfor agricultural operations. These refrigeration systems are used at field sites to cool (pre-cool) produce before the produce is loaded into trucks orrailcars for market or used to supplement stationary refrigeration systemsduring peak harvest times. The components of these refrigeration systems are commonly known as vacuum tubes, accumulators, refrigeration units, icemakers, pressure coolers, or evaporators.

(a) General packaging requirements. Each non-specification pressure vessel must conform to the following:

(1) Each pressure vessel must be designed, manufactured, and maintainedin accordance with applicable requirements of the ASME Code (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(2) Except as authorized in this section, each pressure vessel and associated piping must be rated at a maximum allowable work pressure (MAWP)of 250 psig. The pressure in these components may not exceed MAWP.

(3) Any part of the piping or pressurevessel separated from another component of the refrigeration system by means of a valve, blank flange, or otherdevice must be equipped with a pressure relief valve set at MAWP. All lines
that must be disconnected for transportation purposes must be closed by means of a cap, plug or blank flange,
and valves at the end of disconnected lines must be tightly closed.

(4) The aggregate total volumetriccapacity of components within the refrigeration system authorized for highway transportation in accordance withthis section may not exceed 2,500 gallons per vehicle.

(5) Each pressure vessel and associated piping containing anhydrous ammonia must conform to the following:

(i) Piping with a diameter of 2 inches
or more must conform to ASTM A 53 Schedule 40 or ASTM A106 Schedule 40 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(ii) Piping with a diameter of less
than 2 inches must conform to ASTM A
53 Schedule 80 or ASTM A 106 Schedule 80 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(iii) The words ‘‘Inhalation Hazard’’ must be marked as required in specialprovision 13 in §172.102 of this subchapter and, when practicable, within 24 inches of the placard.

(b) Refrigeration systems placed into service prior to June 1, 1991. (1) For refrigeration systems placed into serviceprior to June 1, 1991, each pressure vessel and associated piping for the condensing line (‘‘high side’’) must be
rated at an MAWP of not less than 250psig. Each pressure vessel and associated piping for the evaporating line (‘‘low side’’) must be rated at an MAWP of not less than 150 psig, except that each pressure vessel or associated piping that will contain refrigerant gas during transportation must be rated at an MAWP of not less than 250 psig. During transportation, pressure in the components that are part of the evaporating line may not exceed 150 psig.

(2) Each pressure vessel and associated piping that is part of the evaporating line must be marked‘‘LOW SIDE’’ in a permanent and clearly visible manner. The evaporating linemust have a pressure gauge with corresponding temperature markings mounted so as to be easily readable when standing on the ground. The gauge must be permanently marked or tagged ‘‘SATURATION GAUGE’’.

(3) Each pressure vessel and associated piping with an MAWP of 250 psig or greater containing liquid anhydrousammonia must be isolated using appropriate means from piping and components marked ‘‘LOW SIDE’’.

(4) Liquid lading is only authorized in system components with a rated MAWP of not less than 250 psig.

(5) Prior to transportation, each pressure vessel and associated piping with a rated MAWP of less than 250 psigmust be relieved of enough gaseous lading to ensure that the MAWP is not exceeded at transport temperatures up to

54 ° C (130 ° F).


### 421 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.6

(6) Refrigeration systems placed intoservice prior to June 1, 1991, may continue in service until October 1, 2017.

(c) Prior to transportation over public highways, each pressure vessel and associated piping must be drained ofrefrigerant gas or liquid anhydrous ammonia to the extent practicable.
Drained contents must be recovered inconformance with all applicable environmental regulations. Residual liquidanhydrous ammonia in each component may not exceed one percent of the component’s total volumetric capacity or 10 gallons, whichever is less.

(d) System inspection and testing. (1) Each refrigeration system authorizedunder this section must be visually inspected every year. The visual inspection must include items listed in§180.407(d)(2) of this subchapter applicable to refrigeration systems. A certificate of the annual visual inspection must be dated and signed by the person performing the inspection and mustcontain that person’s company affiliation. The certificate must remain at the equipment owner’s office.

(2) Each refrigeration system authorized under this section must be proofpressure tested every two years beginning with the initial pressure test performed after manufacture. Additional pressure tests must be performed after any modification, repair or damage to a part of the system pressurized with refrigerant gas. System test pressures may not be less than one-and-one-half(1.50) times the rated MAWP of the system component or piping.

(3) Pressure relief valves must be successfully tested every two years at the MAWP for the components or piping towhich they are attached. Pressure relief valves may be replaced and marked every 5 years with valves certified at the appropriate MAWP, in which case the valves need not be tested every two years. Valves that do not pass the test must be repaired or replaced.

(e) Test markings and reports. (1) Evidence of testing specified in paragraph (d) of this section must be marked onthe right forward side of the refrigeration system with 2 inch high letters indicating type of last test (V = visual; P = pressure: hydrostatic or pneumatic) and the month/year in which it wasperformed. Reports and all of the requirements for records of inspections including markings must be completed as specified in part 180.

(2) Pressure relief valves must be durably marked with either the date oflast test, set-pressure and testing company or the date of last replacement, set-pressure, and certifying company, as applicable.

[74 FR 16142, Apr. 9, 2009]

§ 173.6 Materials of trade exceptions.

When transported by motor vehicle in conformance with this section, amaterial of trade (see §171.8 of this subchapter) is not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter besides
those set forth or referenced in this

section.

(a) Materials and amounts. A material of trade is limited to the following:

(1) A Class 3, 8, 9, Division 4.1, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, or ORM-D material contained in apackaging having a gross mass or capacity not over—

(i) 0.5 kg (1 pound) or 0.5 L (1 pint) for a Packing Group I material;

(ii) 30 kg (66 pounds) or 30 L (8 gallons) for a Packing Group II, Packing Group III, or ORM-D material;

(iii) 1500 L (400 gallons) for a dilutedmixture, not to exceed 2 percent concentration, of a Class 9 material.

(2) A Division 2.1 or 2.2 material in a cylinder with a gross weight not over 100 kg (220 pounds), or a permanently
mounted tank manufactured to the ASME Code of not more than 70 gallonwater capacity for a non-liquefied Division 2.2 material with no subsidiary
hazard.

(3) A Division 4.3 material in PackingGroup II or III contained in a packaging having a gross capacity not exceeding 30 mL (1 ounce).

(4) A Division 6.2 material, otherthan a Category A infectious substance, contained in human or animal samples (including, but not limited to,secreta, excreta, blood and its components, tissue and tissue fluids, andbody parts) being transported for research, diagnosis, investigational activities, or disease treatment or prevention, or is a biological product or regulated medical waste. The material
must be contained in a combinationpackaging. For liquids, the inner packaging must be leakproof, and the outer


### 422 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.6

packaging must contain sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire contents of the inner packaging. For sharps, the inner packaging (sharps container) must be constructed of a rigid material resistant to punctures and securely closed to prevent leaks or punctures, and the outer packaging must be securely closed to prevent leaks or punctures. For solids, liquids, and sharps, the outer packaging must be a strong, tight packaging securelyclosed and secured against shifting, including relative motion between packages, within the vehicle on which it is being transported.

(i) For other than a regulated medical waste, the amount of Division 6.2 material in a combination packagingmust conform to the following limitations:

(A) One or more inner packagings, each of which may not contain more than 0.5 kg (1.1 lbs) or 0.5 L (17 ounces), and an outer packaging containing notmore than 4 kg (8.8 lbs) or 4 L (1 gallon); or

(B) A single inner packaging containing not more than 16 kg (35.2 lbs) or16 L (4.2 gallons) in a single outer packaging.

(ii) For a regulated medical waste, a combination packaging must consist of one or more inner packagings, each of which may not contain more than 4 kg (8.8 lbs) or 4 L (1 gallon), and an outer packaging containing not more than 16 kg (35.2 lbs) or 16 L (4.2 gallons).

(5) This section does not apply to a
hazardous material that is self-reactive (see §173.124), poisonous by inhalation (see §173.133), or a hazardous waste.

(b) Packaging. (1) Packagings must be leak tight for liquids and gases, sift proof for solids, and be securely closed, secured against shifting, and protected against damage.

(2) Each material must be packagedin the manufacturer’s original packaging, or a packaging of equal or greater strength and integrity.

(3) Outer packagings are not required for receptacles (e.g., cans and bottles) that are secured against shifting incages, carts, bins, boxes or compartments.

(4) For gasoline, a packaging must be made of metal or plastic and conform to the requirements of this subchapter or to the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the Department of Labor contained in 29 CFR 1910.106(d)(2) or 1926.152(a)(1).

(5) A cylinder or other pressure vesselcontaining a Division 2.1 or 2.2 material must conform to packaging, qualification, maintenance, and use requirements of this subchapter, except that outer packagings are not required. Manifolding of cylinders is authorized provided all valves are tightly closed.

(c) Hazard communication. (1) A nonbulk packaging other than a cylinder (including a receptacle transported without an outer packaging) must be marked with a common name or proper shipping name to identify the material it contains, including the letters ‘‘RQ’’ if it contains a reportable quantity of a
hazardous substance.

(2) A bulk packaging containing a diluted mixture of a Class 9 material must be marked on two opposing sideswith the four-digit identification number of the material. The identification number must be displayed on placards, orange panels or, alternatively, a white square-on-point configuration having
the same outside dimensions as a placard (at least 273 mm (10.8 inches) on a side), in the manner specified in §172.332 (b) and (c) of this subchapter.

(3) A DOT specification cylinder (except DOT specification 39) must be marked and labeled as prescribed in this subchapter. Each DOT-39 cylinder must display the markings specified in 178.65(i).

(4) The operator of a motor vehicle
that contains a material of trade mustbe informed of the presence of the hazardous material (including whether thepackage contains a reportable quantity) and must be informed of the requirements of this section.

(d) Aggregate gross weight. Except fora material of trade authorized by paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section, the aggregate gross weight of all materials oftrade on a motor vehicle may not exceed 200 kg (440 pounds).

(e) Other exceptions. A material of trade may be transported on a motorvehicle under the provisions of this section with other hazardous materials


### 423 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.7

without affecting its eligibility for exceptions provided by this section.

[Amdt. 173–259, 62 FR 1216, Jan. 8, 1997, as amended by Amdt. 173–262, 62 FR 49566, Sept. 22, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; Amdt. 173– 259, 63 FR 8142, Feb. 18, 1998; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 53137, Aug. 14, 2002; 68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 71 FR 32258, June 2, 2006; 72 FR 55692, Oct. 1, 2007]

§ 173.7 Government operations and materials.
(a) Hazardous materials offered fortransportation by, for, or to the Department of Defense (DOD) of the U.S. Government, including commercial shipments pursuant to a DOD contract, must be packaged in accordance with the regulations in this subchapter or in packagings of equal or greater strength and efficiency as certified by DOD inaccordance with the procedures prescribed by ‘‘Packaging of Hazardous Material, DLAD 4145.41/AR 700–143/AFJI
24–210/NAVSUPINST 4030.55B/MCO4030.40B (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).’’ Hazardous materials offered for transportation by DOD under this provision may be reshipped by any shipper to any consignee provided theoriginal packaging has not been damaged or altered in any manner.

(1) Hazardous materials sold by the DOD in packagings that are notmarked in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter may be shipped from DOD installations if theDOD certifies in writing that the packagings are equal to or greater instrength and efficiency than the packaging prescribed in this subchapter.The shipper shall obtain such a certification in duplicate for each shipment.He shall give one copy to the originating carrier and retain the other for no less than 1 year.

(2) [Reserved](b) Shipments of hazardous materials, made by or under the direction or supervision of the U.S. Department ofEnergy (DOE) or the Department of Defense (DOD), for the purpose of national security, and which are escorted by personnel specifically designated byor under the authority of those agencies, are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter. For transportation by a motor vehicle or a rail car,the escorts must be in a separate transport vehicle from the transport vehicle carrying the hazardous materials thatare excepted by this paragraph. A document certifying that the shipment is for the purpose of national security must be in the possession of the person in charge of providing security during transportation.

(c) Shipments of explosive samples, not exceeding 1 g net weight, offered byand consigned to the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms (ATF) of the Department of the Treasury arenot otherwise subject to the regulations in parts 110–189 of this subchapter when placed in a specifically designed multi-unit assembly packed in a strong outer packaging. The packaging mustbe of a type accepted by ATF as capable of precluding a propagation of any explosion outside the packaging. The second component from the outside of the packaging must be marked or tagged to indicate the presence of an explosive.

(d) Notwithstanding the requirements of §§173.416 and 173.417 of this subchapter, packagings made by orunder the direction of the U.S. Department of Energy may be used for the transportation of Class 7 materials when evaluated, approved, and certified by the Department of Energy against packaging standards equivalent tothose specified in 10 CFR part 71. Packages shipped in accordance with thisparagraph shall be marked and otherwise prepared for shipment in a mannerequivalent to that required by this subchapter for packagings approved by the Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

(e) Class 1 (explosive) materials owned by the Department of Defense and packaged prior to January 1, 1990, in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter in effect at that time,are excepted from the marking and labeling requirements of part 172 of this subchapter and the packaging and package marking requirements of part 178 of this subchapter, provided thepackagings have maintained their integrity and the explosive material is declared as ‘‘government-owned goods packaged prior to January 1, 1990’’ onthe shipping papers. In addition, packages of these materials owned by the Department of Defense that are
marked and labeled in conformance


### 424 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.8

with the requirements of the HMR that were in effect at the time they wereoriginally marked and labeled are excepted from the current marking and labeling requirements.

(f) The requirements of this subchapter do not apply to shipments of
hazardous materials carried aboard anaircraft that is not owned by a government or engaged in carrying persons or property for commercial purposes, but
is under the exclusive direction and control of the government for a period of not less than 90 days as specified in
a written contract or lease. An aircraft
is under the exclusive direction andcontrol of a government when the government exercises responsibility for:

(1) Approving crew members and determining they are qualified to operate the aircraft;

(2) Determining the airworthinessand directing maintenance of the aircraft; and

(3) Dispatching the aircraft, including the times of departure, airports to be used, and type and amount of cargo
to be carried.

[29 FR 18671, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.7, see the List of CFRSections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and
on GPO Access.

§ 173.8 Exceptions for non-specification packagings used in intrastate transportation.
(a) Non-specification bulk packagings. Notwithstanding requirements for specification packagings in subpart F of this part and parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter, a non-specification bulkpackaging may be used for transportation of a hazardous material by an intrastate motor carrier until July 1, 2000, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section.

(b) Non-specification cargo tanks for petroleum products. Notwithstanding requirements for specification packagings in subpart F of this part and parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter, anon-specification cargo tank motor vehicle having a capacity of less than 13,250 L (3,500 gallons) may be used by
an intrastate motor carrier for transportation of a flammable liquid petroleum product in accordance with theprovisions of paragraph (d) of this section.

(c) Permanently secured non-bulk tanks for petroleum products. Notwithstandingrequirements for specification packagings in subpart F of this part 173 and parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter, anon-specification metal tank permanently secured to a transport vehicleand protected against leakage or damage in the event of a turnover, havinga capacity of less than 450 L (119 gallons), may be used by an intrastate motor carrier for transportation of a flammable liquid petroleum product inaccordance with the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section.

(d) Additional requirements. A packaging used under the provisions of paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) of this section

must—

(1) Be operated by an intrastatemotor carrier and in use as a packaging for hazardous material before October 1, 1998;

(2) Be operated in conformance with the requirements of the State in which it is authorized;

(3) Be specifically authorized by aState statute or regulation in effect before October 1, 1998, for use as a packaging for the hazardous material being transported;

(4) Be offered for transportation and transported in conformance with all other applicable requirements of this subchapter;

(5) Not be used to transport a flammable cryogenic liquid, hazardous substance, hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant (except for gasoline); and

(6) On and after July 1, 2000, for a tank authorized under paragraph (b) or(c) of this section, conform to all requirements in part 180 (except for §180.405(g)) of this subchapter in the same manner as required for a DOT specification MC 306 cargo tank motor
vehicle.

[Amdt. 173–259, 62 FR 1216, Jan. 8, 1997, as amended by Amdt. 172–262, 62 FR 49567, Sept. 22, 1997; Amdt. 173–259, 63 FR 8142, Feb. 18, 1998; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]


### 425 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.9

§ 173.9 Transport vehicles or freight containers containing lading which has been fumigated.
(a) For the purpose of this section, not including 49 CFR part 387, a rail car, freight container, truck body, ortrailer in which the lading has been fumigated with any material, or is undergoing fumigation, is a package containing a hazardous material.

(b) No person may offer for transportation or transport a rail car, freight container, truck body, or trailer in which the lading has been fumigated ortreated with any material, or is undergoing fumigation, unless the FUMIGANT marking specified in paragraph(e) of this section is prominently displayed so that it can be seen by any person attempting to enter the interiorof the transport vehicle or freight container. For domestic transportation, a hazard warning label authorized by EPA under 40 CFR part 156 may be used
as an alternative to the FUMIGANT marking. (c) No person may affix or display on a rail car, freight container, truckbody, or trailer the FUMIGANT marking specified in paragraph (e) of thissection, unless the lading has been fumigated or is undergoing fumigation.

(d) The FUMIGANT marking required by paragraph (b) of this section must remain on the rail car, freight container, truck body, or trailer until the rail car, freight container, truck body, or trailer has been completely ventilated either by opening the doorsof the unit or by mechanical ventilation to ensure no harmful concentration of gas remains after fumigation has been completed.

(e) FUMIGANT marking. (1) The FUMIGANT marking must consist of red or black letters on a white background that is at least 30 cm (11.8 inches) wideand at least 25 cm (9.8 inches) high. Except for size and color, the FUMIGANT marking must be as follows:


### 426 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.9

(2) The ‘‘*’’ shall be replaced with the technical name of the fumigant.

(f) A closed cargo transport unit that has been fumigated is not subject to any other provisions of this subchapter
if it— (1) Has been completely ventilated either by opening the doors of the unit orby mechanical ventilation after fumigation, and

(2) Displays the FUMIGANT marking, including the date of ventilation.


### 427 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.10

(g) For international shipments, transport documents should indicate the date of fumigation, type andamount of fumigant used, and instructions for disposal of any residual fumigant, including fumigation devices.

(h) Any person subject to the requirements of this section, solely due to the fumigated lading, must be informed of the requirements of this section and the safety precautions necessary to protect themselves and others in the
event of an incident or accident involving the fumigated lading.

(i) Any person who offers for transportation or transports a rail car, freight container, truck body or trailerthat is subject to this subchapter solely because of the hazardous materials designation specified in paragraph (a)of this section is not subject to any requirements of this subchapter other
than those contained in this section.

[71 FR 78629, Dec. 29, 2006]

§ 173.10 Tank car shipments.

(a) Tank cars containing any 2.1 material (including a cryogenic liquid) or Class 3 material with a flash point
below 38 ° C (100 ° F), except liquid road asphalt or tar, may not be offered fortransportation unless originally consigned or subsequently reconsigned to parties having private-siding (see Note 1 of this section) or to parties using railroad siding facilities which have been equipped for piping the liquid from tank cars to permanent storage tanks of sufficient capacity to receive
contents of car.

(b) A tank car containing any Class 2
material must not be offered for transportation unless the car is consigned for delivery (see paragraph (c) of this section) and unloading on a private track (see Note 1 of this section) exceptthat where no private track is available, delivery and unloading on carriertracks is permitted provided the following conditions are complied with:

(1) Any tank car of DOT-106A or 110A type (see §§179.300 and 179.301 of thissubchapter) may be offered for transportation and the loaded unit tanksmay be removed from car frame on carrier tracks, provided the shipper has obtained from the delivering carrierand filed with originating carrier, written permission (see Note 2 of this section) for such removal. The consigneemust furnish adequately safe mechanical hoist, obtained from the carrier if desirable, by which the tanks shall belifted from the car and deposited directly upon vehicles furnished by the consignee for immediate removal fromcarrier property or tanks must be lifted by adequately safe mechanical hoist from car directly to vessels for further transportation.

(c) Any tank car of other than DOT106A or 110A type (see §§179.300 and 179.301 of this subchapter), containinganhydrous ammonia, liquefied hydrocarbon or liquefied petroleum gas, and having interior pipes of liquid and gas discharge valves equipped with check valves, may be consigned for delivery and unloading on carrier tracks, if the lading is piped directly from the car to permanent storage tanks of sufficient capacity to receive the entire contentsof the car. Such cars may also be consigned for storage on a private track or on a carrier track when designated by the carrier for such storage.

(d) For cars of the DOT-106A or 110A type (see §§179.300 and 179.301 of this subchapter), the tanks must be placed in position and attached to the car structure by the shipper.

(e) Class 3 materials with a flash point below 38 ° C (100 ° F) and Division 2.1 materials (including a cryogenic liquid) may not be loaded into tank cars on carrier property from tank
trucks or drums.

N OTE 1: For this purpose, a private track is a track outside of carrier’s right-of-way, yard, and terminals, and of which the carrier does not own either the rails, ties, roadbed or right-of-way; or a track or portion of a track which is devoted to the purpose of its user, either by lease or written agreement; in which case the lease or written agreementwill be considered as equivalent to ownership.

N OTE 2: Carriers should give permission for the unloading of these containers on carriertracks only where no private siding is available within reasonable trucking distance of final destination. The danger involved is the release of compressed gases due to accidental


### 428 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.12

damage to container in handling. The exposure to this danger decreases directly with the isolation of the unloading point.

[29 FR 18773, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and by Amdt. 173–162, 48 FR 10226, Mar. 10, 1983, and amended by Amdt. 173–180, 49 FR 42735, Oct. 24, 1984; Amdt. 173–207, 53 FR 38274, Sept. 29, 1988; Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52608, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 67 FR 61013, Sept. 27, 2002]

§ 173.12 Exceptions for shipment of waste materials.
(a) Open head drums. If a hazardous
material that is a hazardous waste is required by this subchapter to be shipped in a closed head drum (i.e., a drum with a 7.0 cm (3 inches) or less bung opening) and the hazardous waste
contains solids or semisolids that make its placement in a closed head drum impracticable, an equivalent (except for closure) open head drum may be
used for the hazardous waste.

(b) Lab packs. (1) Waste materials prohibited by paragraph (b)(3) of this
section are not authorized for transport in packages authorized by this paragraph (b). Waste materials classed as Class or Division 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 8, or 9 are excepted from the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter for combination packagings if packaged in accordance with this paragraph (b) and transported for disposal or recovery by highway,rail or cargo vessel. In addition, a generic description from the §172.101 Hazardous Materials Table may be used in place of specific chemical names, when two or more chemically compatible
waste materials in the same hazard class are packaged in the same outside packaging.

(2) Combination packaging requirements:

(i) Inner packagings. The inner packagings must be either glass, not exceeding 4 L (1 gallon) rated capacity, or metal or plastic, not exceeding 20 L (5.3gallons) rated capacity. Inner packagings containing liquid must be surrounded by a chemically compatibleabsorbent material in sufficient quantity to absorb the total liquid contents.

(ii) Outer packaging. Each outer packaging may contain only one class of waste material. The following outer packagings are authorized except that Division 4.2 Packing Group I materials must be packaged using UN standard steel or plastic drums tested andmarked to the Packing Group I performance level for liquids or solids; and bromine pentafluoride and bromine trifluoride may not be packaged using
UN 4G fiberboard boxes:

(A) A UN 1A2 or UN 1B2 metal drum, a UN 1D plywood drum, a UN 1G fiber drum, or a UN 1H2 plastic drum, tested and marked to at least the Packing Group III performance level for liquids or solids;

(B) At a minimum, a double-walled
UN 4G fiberboard box made out of 500 pound burst-strength fiberboard fitted with a polyethylene liner at least 3 mils (0.12 inches) thick and when filled during testing to 95 percent capacity with a solid material, successfully passes the tests prescribed in §§178.603(drop) and 178.606 (stacking), and is capable of passing the tests prescribed in §178.608 (vibration) to at least the Packing Group II performance level for liquids or solids; or

(C) A UN 11G fiberboard intermediate bulk container (IBC) or a UN 11HH2composite IBC, fitted with a polyethylene liner at least 6 mils (0.24 inches) thick, that successfully passes the tests prescribed in Subpart O of Part 178 and §178.603 to at least the Packing Group II performance level forliquids or solids; a UN 11HH2 is composed of multiple layers of encapsulated corrugated fiberboard between inner and outer layers of woven coated polypropylene.

(iii) The gross weight of each completed combination package may not exceed 205 kg (452 lbs).

(3) Prohibited materials. The following waste materials may not be packaged or described under the provisions ofthis paragraph (b): a material poisonous-by-inhalation, a Division 6.1 Packing Group I material, chloric acid, and oleum (fuming sulfuric acid).

(c) Reuse of packagings. A previously used packaging may be reused for theshipment of waste material transported for disposal or recovery, not subject to the reconditioning and reuse provisions contained in §173.28 and part178 of this subchapter, under the following conditions:


### 429 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.12

(1) Except as authorized by this paragraph, the waste must be packaged in accordance with this part and offered for transportation in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.

(2) Transportation is performed by highway only.

(3) A package is not offered for transportation less than 24 hours after it is finally closed for transportation, and each package is inspected for leakage
and is found to be free from leaks immediately prior to being offered for transportation.

(4) Each package is loaded by the shipper and unloaded by the consignee, unless the motor carrier is a private or

contract carrier.

(5) The packaging may be used only once under this paragraph and may notbe used again for shipment of hazardous materials except in accordance with §173.28.

(d) Technical names for n.o.s. descriptions. The requirements for the inclusion of technical names for n.o.s. descriptions on shipping papers and package markings, §§172.203 and 172.301 of this subchapter, respectively, do notapply to packages prepared in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section,except that packages containing materials meeting the definition of a hazardous substance must be described as required in §172.203 of this subchapter and marked as required in §172.324 of this subchapter.

(e) Segregation requirements. Wastematerials packaged according to paragraph (b) of this section and transported in conformance with this paragraph (e) are not subject to the segregation requirements in §§174.81(d), 176.83(b), and 177.848(d) if blocked and braced in such a manner that they are separated from incompatible materials by a minimum horizontal distance of 1.2 m (4 feet) and the packages are loaded at least 100 mm (4 inches) off the floor of the freight container, unit load device, transport vehicle, or rail car. The following conditions specific to incompatible materials also apply:

(1) General restrictions. The freight container, unit load device, transport vehicle, or rail car may not containany Class 1 explosives, Class 7 radioactive material, or uncontainerized hazardous materials; (2) Waste cyanides and waste acids. For waste cyanides stored, loaded, and transported with waste acids:

(i) The cyanide or a cyanide mixture may not exceed 2 kg (4.4 pounds) net weight per inner packaging and may not exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) net weight per outer packaging; a cyanide solution may not exceed 2 L (0.6 gallon) per inner packaging and may not exceed 10 L (3.0 gallons) per outer packaging; and

(ii) The acids must be packaged in lab packs in accordance paragraph (b) of this section or in single packagings authorized for the acid in Column (8B) of the §172.101 Hazardous Materials Table of this subchapter not to exceed 208 L (55 gallons) capacity.

(3) Waste Division 4.2 materials and waste Class 8 liquids. For waste Division4.2 materials stored, loaded, and transported with waste Class 8 liquids:

(i) The Division 4.2 material may not exceed 2 kg (4.4 pounds) net weight per inner packaging and may not exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) net weight per outer packaging; and

(ii) The Class 8 liquid must be packaged in lab packs in accordance withparagraph (b) of this section or in single packagings authorized for the material in Column (8B) of the §172.101
Hazardous Materials Table of this subchapter not to exceed 208 L (55 gallons) capacity.

(4) Waste Division 6.1 Packing Group I,
Hazard Zone A material and waste Class 3, Class 8 liquids, or Division 4.1, 4.2, 4.3,
5.1 and 5.2 materials. For waste Division 6.1 Packing Group I, Hazard Zone Amaterial stored, loaded, and transported with waste Class 8 liquids, or Division 4.2, 4.3, 5.1 and 5.2 materials:

(i) The Division 6.1 Packing Group I,Hazard Zone A material must be packaged in accordance with §173.226(c) of this subchapter and overpacked in a UN standard steel or plastic drummeeting the Packing Group I performance level;

(ii) The Class 8 liquid must be packaged in lab packs in accordance withparagraph (b) of this section or in single packagings authorized for the material in Column (8B) of the §172.101
Hazardous Materials Table of this subchapter not to exceed 208 L (55 gallons) capacity.


### 430 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.13

(iii) The Division 4.2 material may not exceed 2 kg (4.4 pounds) net weightper inner packaging and may not exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) net weight per outer packaging;

(iv) The Division 5.1 materials may not exceed 2 kg (4.4 pounds) net weightper inner packaging and may not exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) net weight per outer packaging. The aggregate net weight per freight container, unit load device, transport vehicle, or rail car may not exceed 100 kg (220 pounds);

(v) The Division 5.2 material may not exceed 1 kg (2.2 pounds) net weight per inner packaging and may not exceed 5 kg (11 pounds) net weight per outer packaging. Organic Peroxide, Type B material may not exceed 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) net weight per inner packaging and may not exceed 2.5 kg (5.5 pounds) net weight per outer packaging. Theaggregate net weight per freight container, unit load device, transport vehicle, or rail car may not exceed 50 kg (110 pounds).

(f) Additional exceptions. Lab packs conforming to the requirements of thissection are not subject to the following:

(1) The overpack marking and labeling requirements in §173.25(a)(2) of this subchapter when secured to a palletwith shrink-wrap or stretch-wrap except that labels representative of each
Hazard Class or Division in the overpack must be visibly displayed on two opposing sides.

(2) The restrictions for overpacks containing Class 8, Packing Group I material and Division 5.1, Packing Group I material in §173.25(a)(5) of this subchapter. These waste materials may be overpacked with other materials.

(g) Household waste. Household waste, as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter when transported in accordance with applicable state, local, or tribal requirements.

(f) Household waste . Household waste, as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter when transported in accordance with applicable state, local, or tribal requirements.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52609, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52939, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173– 138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; 65 FR 50460, Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003; 70 FR 3309, Jan. 24, 2005; 73 FR 4717, Jan. 28, 2008; 74 FR 2255, Jan. 14, 2009; 75 FR 27214, May 14, 2010]

§ 173.13 Exceptions for Class 3, Divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, and Classes 8 and 9 materials.

(a) A Class 3, 8 or 9, or Division 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, or 6.1 material is excepted from the labeling (except for the CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label),placarding and segregation requirements of this subchapter if prepared for transportation in accordance with therequirements of this section. A material that meets the definition of a material poisonous by inhalation may notbe offered for transportation or transported under provisions of this section.

(b) A hazardous material conforming to the requirements of this section may be transported by motor vehicleand rail car. In addition, packages prepared in accordance with this section may be transported by aircraft under the following conditions:

(1) Cargo-only aircraft . Only hazardous materials permitted to be transported aboard either a passenger or cargo-only aircraft by column (9A) or (9B) of the Hazardous Materials Table in §172.101 of this subchapter are authorized aboard cargo-only aircraft.

(2) Passenger carrying aircraft . Only hazardous materials permitted to be transported aboard a passenger aircraftby column (9A) of the Hazardous Materials Table in §172.101 of this subchapter are authorized aboard passenger aircraft. The completed package, assembled as for transportation,must be successfully tested in accordance with part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I level. A hazardous
material which meets the definition of a Division 5.1 (oxidizer) at the Packing Group I level in accordance with §173.127(b)(1)(i) of this subchapter may not be transported aboard a passenger
aircraft.

(3) Packages offered for transportation aboard either passenger or


### 431 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.21

cargo-only aircraft must meet the requirements for transportation by aircraft specified in §173.27 of this subchapter.

(c) A hazardous material permitted by paragraph (a) of this section must be packaged as follows:

(1) For liquids: (i) The hazardous material must be placed in a tightly closed glass, plasticor metal inner packaging with a maximum capacity not exceeding 1.2 L. Sufficient outage must be provided such that the inner packaging will not become liquid full at 55 ° C (130 ° F). The net quantity (measured at 20 ° C (68 ° F)) of liquid in any inner packaging may not exceed 1 L. For transportation byaircraft, the net quantity in one package may not exceed the quantity specified in columns (9A) or (9B), as appropriate.

(ii) The inner packaging must be placed in a hermetically sealed barrier bag which is impervious to the lading,and then wrapped in a non-reactive absorbent material in sufficient quantity to completely absorb the contents of the inner packaging. Alternatively, the inner packaging may first be wrapped
in a non-reactive absorbent material and then placed in the hermetically sealed barrier bag. The combination of inner packaging, absorbent material,and bag must be placed in a snugly fitting metal can.

(iii) The metal can must be securely closed. For liquids that are in Division4.2 or 4.3, the metal can must be hermetically sealed. For Division 4.2 materials in Packing Group I, the metal
can must be tested in accordance withpart 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level.

(iv) The metal can must be placed ina fiberboard box that is placed in a hermetically sealed barrier bag which is impervious to the lading.

(v) The intermediate packaging must be placed inside a securely closed, outer packaging conforming to §173.201.

(vi) Not more than four intermediate packagings are permitted in an outer packaging.

(2) For solids: (i) The hazardous material must be placed in a tightly closed glass, plastic or metal inner packaging. The net quantity of material in any inner packaging may not exceed 2.85kg (6.25pounds). For transportation by aircraft, the net quantity in one package may not exceed the quantity specified in columns (9A) or (9B), as appropriate.

(ii) The inner packaging must be placed in a hermetically sealed barrier bag which is impervious to the lading.

(iii) The barrier bag and its contents must be placed in a fiberboard box thatis placed in a hermetically-sealed barrier bag which is impervious to the lading.

(iv) The intermediate packagingmust be placed inside an outer packaging conforming to §173.211.

(v) Not more than four intermediate packagings are permitted in an outer packaging.

(d) The outside of the package must be marked, in association with theproper shipping name, with the statement: ‘‘This package conforms to 49
CFR 173.13.’’

[Amdt. 173–253, 61 FR 27173, May 30, 1996, as amended at 65 FR 50460, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 70 FR 3309, Jan. 24, 2005; 71 FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006; 75 FR 27215, May 14, 2010]



### Subpart B—Preparation of Hazardous Materials for Transportation

§ 173.21 Forbidden materials and packages. Unless otherwise provided in thissubchapter, the offering for transportation or transportation of the following is forbidden:

(a) Materials that are designated
‘‘Forbidden’’ in Column 3 of the §172.101 table.

(b) Forbidden explosives as defined in §173.54 of this part.

(c) Electrical devices, such as batteries and battery-powered devices, which are likely to create sparks or generate a dangerous evolution of heat, unless packaged in a manner which precludes such an occurrence.

(d) For carriage by aircraft, any package which has a magnetic field of more than 0.00525 gauss measured at 4.5 m (15 feet) from any surface of the package.

(e) A material in the same packaging, freight container, or overpack


### 432 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.21

with another material, the mixing of which is likely to cause a dangerousevolution of heat, or flammable or poisonous gases or vapors, or to produce
corrosive materials.

(f) A package containing a material which is likely to decompose with aself-accelerated decomposition temperature (SADT) of 50 ° C (122 ° F) or less, or polymerize at a temperature of
54 ° C (130 ° F) or less with an evolution of a dangerous quantity of heat or gaswhen decomposing or polymerizing, unless the material is stabilized or inhibited in a manner to preclude such evolution. The SADT may be determined by any of the test methods described in
Part II of the UN Manual of Tests andCriteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(1) A package meeting the criteria ofparagraph (f) of this section may be required to be shipped under controlled temperature conditions. The controltemperature and emergency temperature for a package shall be as specified in the table in this paragraph based upon the SADT of the material. The control temperature is the temperature above which a package of the material may not be offered for transportationor transported. The emergency temperature is the temperature at which, due to imminent danger, emergency
measures must be initiated.

§ 173.21 T ABLE : M ETHOD OF D ETERMINING C ONTROL AND E MERGENCY T EMPERATURE

.

SADT 1 Control tempera-
tures Emergency temperature

SADT ≤ 20 ° C (68

° F). 20 ° C (36 ° F)
below SADT. 10 ° C (18 ° F)
below SADT.

20 ° C (68 ° F) <

SADT ≤ 35 ° C (95 ° F). 15 ° C (27 ° F)
below SADT. 10 ° C (18 ° F)
below SADT.

35 ° C (95 ° F) <

SADT ≤ 50 ° C (122 ° F). 10 ° C (18 ° F)
below SADT. 5 ° C (9 ° F) below
SADT.

50 ° C (122 ° F) <

SADT. ( 2 ) ( 2 )

1 Self-accelerating decomposition temperature.

2 Temperature control not required.
(2) For self-reactive materials listedin §173.224(b) table control and emergency temperatures, where requiredare shown in Columns 5 and 6, respectively. For organic peroxides listed in The Organic Peroxides Table in §173.225 control and emergency temperatures, where required, are shown in Columns 7a and 7b, respectively.

(3) Refrigeration may be used as ameans of stabilization only when approved by the Associate Administrator.Approvals issued by the Bureau of Explosives are no longer valid (see §171.19of this subchapter). Methods of stabilization approved by the Associate
Administrator are as follows:

(i) For highway transportation: (A) A material meeting the criteriaof this paragraph (f) may be transported only in a transport vehicle, freight container, or motor vehicleequipped with a mechanical refrigeration unit, or loaded with a consumable refrigerant, capable of maintaining the inside temperature of the hazardous
material at or below the control temperature required for the material during transportation.

(B) Each package containing a material meeting the criteria of this paragraph (f) must be loaded and maintained at or below the control temperature required for the material. The temperature of the material must be determined by appropriate means and
entered on a written record at the time the packaging is loaded.

(C) The vehicle operator shall monitor the inside temperature of the transport vehicle, freight container, ormotor vehicle and enter that temperature on a written record at the time the package is loaded and thereafter atintervals not exceeding two hours. Alternatively, a transport vehicle, freight container, or motor vehicle may be equipped with a visible or audible warning device that activates when theinside temperature of the transport vehicle, freight container, or motor vehicle exceeds the control temperature required for the material. The warningdevice must be readily visible or audible, as appropriate, from the vehicle operator’s seat in the vehicle.

(D) The carrier shall advise the vehicle operator of the emergency temperature for the material, and provide thevehicle operator with written procedures that must be followed to assuremaintenance of the control temperature inside the transport vehicle, freight container, or motor vehicle. The written procedures must include


### 433 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.22

instructions for the vehicle operator onactions to take if the inside temperature exceeds the control temperatureand approaches or reaches the emergency temperature for the material. Inaddition, the written temperature-control procedures must identify enroutepoints where the consumable refrigerant may be procured, or where repairs to, or replacement of, the mechanical refrigeration unit may be accomplished.

(E) The vehicle operator shall maintain the written temperature-control procedures, and the written record of temperature measurements specified in paragraph (f)(3)(i)(C) of this section, ifapplicable, in the same manner as specified in §177.817 of this subchapter for shipping papers.

(F) If the control temperature ismaintained by use of a consumable refrigerant (e.g., dry ice or liquid nitrogen), the quantity of consumable refrigerant must be sufficient to maintain the control temperature for twice the average transit time under normal conditions of transportation.

(G) A material that has a control temperature of 40 ° C (104 ° F) or highermay be transported by common carrier. A material that has a control temperature below 40 ° C (104 ° F) must be transported by a private or contract

carrier.

(ii) For transportation by vessel, shipments are authorized in accordancewith the control temperature requirements in Chapter 7.7 of the IMDG Code (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(g) Packages which give off a flammable gas or vapor, released from a material not otherwise subject to thissubchapter, likely to create a flammable mixture with air in a transport
vehicle.

(h) Packages containing materials (other than those classed as explosive)
which will detonate in a fire.

(1) For purposes of this paragraph, ‘‘detonate’’ means an explosion in which the shock wave travels through the material at a speed greater than the speed of sound.

(2) When tests are required to evaluate the performance of a package under the provisions of this paragraph, the testing must be done or approved by one of the agencies specified in §173.56. (i) Except for a package containing a lighter design sample that meets therequirements of §173.308(b)(2), a package containing a lighter (see §171.8 of this subchapter) containing a Division 2.1 material, of a design that has not been examined and successfully testedby an authorized person under the criteria specified in §173.308(a)(4) or, alighter design containing a Class 3 material, that has not been approved by
the Associate Administrator.

(j) An organic peroxide of the ‘‘ketone peroxide’’ category which contains more than 9 percent available oxygen as calculated using the equationin §173.128(a)(4)(ii). The category, ketone peroxide, includes, but is not limited to:

Acetyl acetone peroxide Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) Diacetone alcohol peroxides Methylcyclohexanone peroxide(s) Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s) Methyl isobutyl ketone peroxide(s)

(k) Notwithstanding any other provision of this subchapter, including subpart C of part 171 and 175.10(a)(2) of this subchapter, an oxygen generator(chemical) as cargo on a passenger-carrying aircraft. This prohibition does not apply to an oxygen generator for medical or personal use of a passenger that meets the requirements of §175.10(a)(7) of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52609, Dec. 21, 1990]

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.21, see the List of CFRSections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and
on GPO Access.

§ 173.22 Shipper’s responsibility.

(a) Except as otherwise provided inthis part, a person may offer a hazardous material for transportation in a packaging or container required by this part only in accordance with the following:

(1) The person shall class and describe the hazardous material in accordance with parts 172 and 173 of this subchapter, and

(2) The person shall determine thatthe packaging or container is an authorized packaging, including part 173 requirements, and that it has been manufactured, assembled, and marked
in accordance with:


### 434 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.22a

(i) Section 173.7(a) and parts 173, 178, or 179 of this subchapter;

(ii) A specification of the Department
in effect at the date of manufacture of the packaging or container;

(iii) National or international regulations based on the UN Recommendations (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), as authorized in §173.24(d)(2);

(iv) An approval issued under this subchapter; or

(v) An exemption or special permitissued under subchapter A of this chapter.

(3) In making the determination under paragraph (a)(2) of this section, the person may accept:

(i) Except for the marking on the bottom of a metal or plastic drum with a capacity over 100 L which has beenreconditioned, remanufactured or otherwise converted, the manufacturer’s certification, specification, approval,or exemption or special permit marking (see §§178.2 and 179.1 of this subchapter); or

(ii) With respect to cargo tanks provided by a carrier, the manufacturer’sidentification plate or a written certification of specification or exemptionor special permit provided by the carrier.

(4) For a DOT Specification or UNstandard packaging subject to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter, a person must perform allfunctions necessary to bring the package into compliance with parts 173 and 178 of this subchapter, as identified bythe packaging manufacturer or subsequent distributor (for example, applying closures consistent with the manufacturer’s closure instructions) in accordance with §178.2 of this subchapter. A person must maintain a copy of the manufacturer’s notification, including closure instructions ( see §178.2(c) of this subchapter) unless permanently embossed or printed on the packaging.When applicable, a person must maintain a copy of any supporting documentation for an equivalent level ofperformance under the selective testing variation in §178.601(g)(1) of this subchapter. A copy of the notification,unless permanently embossed or printed on the packaging, and supporting documentation, when applicable, must be made available for inspection by a representative of the Department uponrequest for the time period of the packaging’s periodic retest date, i.e., every12 months for single or composite packagings and every 24 months for combination packagings.

(b) No person may offer a motor carrier any hazardous material specified
in 49 CFR 385.403 unless that motor carrier holds a safety permit issued by theFederal Motor Carrier Safety Administration.

(c) Prior to each shipment of fissile radioactive materials, and Type B or highway route controlled quantity packages of radioactive materials (see §173.403), the shipper shall notify the consignee of the dates of shipment and expected arrival. The shipper shall also notify each consignee of any special loading/unloading instructions prior to his first shipment. For any shipment of irradiated reactor fuel, the shipper shall provide physical protection in compliance with a plan established
under:

(1) Requirements prescribed by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission,

or (2) Equivalent requirements approved by the Associate Administrator.

[Amdt. 173–100, 42 FR 2689, Jan. 13, 1977]

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.22, see the List of CFRSections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and
on GPO Access.

§ 173.22a Use of packagings authorized under special permits. (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, no person may offera hazardous material for transportation in a packaging the use of whichis dependent upon an exemption or special permit issued under subpart B of part 107 of this title, unless that personis the holder of or a party to the exemption or special permit.

(b) If an exemption or special permit authorizes the use of a packaging forthe transportation of a hazardous material by any person or class of persons
other than or in addition to the holder of the exemption or special permit, that person or a member of that class of persons may use the packaging forthe purposes authorized in the exemption or special permit subject to the


### 435 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.24

terms specified therein. Copies of exemptions and special permits may be obtained by accessing the Hazardous Materials Safety Web site at http:// hazmat.dot.gov/specialpermits

l index.htmor by writing to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, U.S. Department of Transportation, East Building, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,SE., Washington, DC 20590–0001, Attention: Records Center.

(c) When an exemption or special permit issued to a person who offers a hazardous material contains requirements that apply to a carrier of the hazardous material, the offeror shall furnish acopy of the current exemption or special permit to the carrier before or at the time a shipment is tendered.

[70 FR 73165, Dec. 9, 2005, as amended at 72 FR 55692, Oct. 1, 2007]

§ 173.23 Previously authorized packaging. (a) When the regulations specify apackaging with a specification marking prefix of ‘‘DOT,’’ a packaging marked prior to January 1, 1970, with the prefix of ‘‘ICC’’ may be used in itsplace if the packaging otherwise conforms to applicable specification requirements.

(b) [Reserved](c) After July 2, 1982, a seamless aluminum cylinder manufactured in conformance with and for use under DOT special permit (SP) or exemption (E)6498, 7042, 8107, 8364 or 8422 may be continued in use if marked before or at the
time of the next retest with either thespecification identification ‘‘3AL’’ immediately above the special permit or exemption number, or the DOT mark (e.g., DOT 3AL 1800) in proximity tothe special permit or exemption marking.

(d) Cylinders (spheres) manufactured and marked under DOT special permit(SP) or exemption (E) 6616 prior to January 1, 1983, may be continued in use if
marked before or at the time of thenext retest with the specification identification ‘‘4BA’’ near the special permit or exemption marking.

(e) After October 1, 1984, cylindersmanufactured for use under special permit (SP) or exemption (E) 6668 or 8404 may be continued in use, and must be marked ‘‘DOT-4LXXXYY’’ (XXX to be replaced by the service pressure, YY tobe replaced by the letters ‘‘AL’’, if applicable) in compliance with Specification 4L (§178.57 of this subchapter) onor before January 1, 1986. The ‘‘DOT4LXXXYY’’ must appear in proximityto other required special permit or exemption markings.

(f) An MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicle must conform to structural integrity requirements in §178.337–3 or to corresponding requirements in effect at
the time of manufacture.

(g) A non-bulk packaging manufactured, tested, marked, and certified onor before September 30, 1996, in accordance with the applicable provisions of subparts L and M of part 178 of this subchapter in effect on September 30, 1995, may be used as authorized by this subchapter if the packaging conforms to all requirements applicable at the time of manufacture. In addition, sucha packaging may be reused as authorized by §173.28 without a nominal thickness marking, if it conforms tothe minimum thickness criteria prescribed in §173.28(b)(4).

(h) An exemption packaging or shipping paper that is permanently marked ‘‘DOT-E’’ prior to October 1, 2007, maycontinue in use as long as the exemption or special permit remains valid,unless otherwise specified in the exemption or special permit.

[Amdt. 173–3, 33 FR 14921, Oct. 4, 1968]

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.23, see the List of CFRSections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and
on GPO Access.

§ 173.24 General requirements for packagings and packages. (a) Applicability. Except as otherwiseprovided in this subchapter, the provisions of this section apply to—

(1) Bulk and non-bulk packagings; (2) New packagings and packagings which are reused; and

(3) Specification and non-specification packagings.

(b) Each package used for the shipment of hazardous materials under thissubchapter shall be designed, constructed, maintained, filled, its contents so limited, and closed, so that under conditions normally incident to transportation—


### 436 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.24

(1) Except as otherwise provided inthis subchapter, there will be no identifiable (without the use of instruments)
release of hazardous materials to the
environment;

(2) The effectiveness of the package will not be substantially reduced; for example, impact resistance, strength, packaging compatibility, etc. must be
maintained for the minimum and maximum temperatures, changes in humidity and pressure, and shocks, loadings and vibrations, normally encountered during transportation;

(3) There will be no mixture of gases or vapors in the package which could,through any credible spontaneous increase of heat or pressure, significantlyreduce the effectiveness of the packaging;

(4) There will be no hazardous material residue adhering to the outside of the package during transport.

(c) Authorized packagings. A packaging is authorized for a hazardous material only if—

(1) The packaging is prescribed or permitted for the hazardous material in a packaging section specified for
that material in Column 8 of the§172.101 table and conforms to applicable requirements in the special provisions of Column 7 of the §172.101 table and, for specification packagings (but not including UN standard packagings
manufactured outside the United States), the specification requirements in parts 178 and 179 of this subchapter;

or (2) The packaging is permitted under, and conforms to, provisions contained in subparts B or C of part 171 of this subchapter or §§173.3, 173.4, 173.4a, 173.4b, 173.5, 173.5a, 173.6, 173.7, 173.8, 173.27, or §176.11 of this subchapter.

(d) Specification packagings and UNstandard packagings manufactured outside the U.S. —(1) Specification packagings. A specification packaging, including a UN standard packaging manufactured in the United States, must conform in all details to the applicable specification or standard in part 178 or part 179 of this subchapter.

(2) UN standard packagings manufactured outside the United States. A UNstandard packaging manufactured outside the United States, in accordancewith national or international regulations based on the UN Recommendations (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), may be imported and used
and is considered to be an authorizedpackaging under the provisions of paragraph (c)(1) of this section, subject tothe following conditions and limitations:

(i) The packaging fully conforms toapplicable provisions in the UN Recommendations and the requirements ofthis subpart, including reuse provisions;

(ii) The packaging is capable of passing the prescribed tests in part 178 of this subchapter applicable to that standard; and

(iii) The competent authority of thecountry of manufacture provides reciprocal treatment for UN standard packagings manufactured in the U.S.

(e) Compatibility. (1) Even though certain packagings are specified in thispart, it is, nevertheless, the responsibility of the person offering a hazardous material for transportation toensure that such packagings are compatible with their lading. This particularly applies to corrosivity, permeability, softening, premature aging and
embrittlement.

(2) Packaging materials and contentsmust be such that there will be no significant chemical or galvanic reaction
between the materials and contents of the package.

(3) Plastic packagings and receptacles. (i) Plastic used in packagingsand receptacles must be of a type compatible with the lading and may not bepermeable to an extent that a hazardous condition is likely to occur during transportation, handling or refilling.

(ii) Each plastic packaging or receptacle which is used for liquid hazardousmaterials must be capable of withstanding without failure the procedure specified in appendix B of this part(‘‘Procedure for Testing Chemical Compatibility and Rate of Permeation in Plastic Packagings and Receptacles’’). The procedure specified in appendix B of this part must be performed on each plastic packaging or receptacle used for Packing Group I materials. Themaximum rate of permeation of hazardous lading through or into the plastic packaging or receptacles may not


### 437 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.24

exceed 0.5 percent for materials meeting the definition of a Division 6.1 material according to §173.132 and 2.0 percent for other hazardous materials, when subjected to a temperature no
lower than—

(A) 18 ° C (64 ° F) for 180 days in accordance with Test Method 1 in appendix B of this part;

(B) 50 ° C (122 ° F) for 28 days in accordance with Test Method 2 in appendix B of this part; or

(C) 60 ° C (140 ° F) for 14 days in accordance with Test Method 3 in appendix B of this part.

(iii) Alternative procedures or rates of permeation are permitted if they yield a level of safety equivalent to orgreater than that provided by paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section and are specifically approved by the Associate
Administrator.

(4) Mixed contents. Hazardous materials may not be packed or mixed together in the same outer packaging
with other hazardous or nonhazardous materials if such materials are capable of reacting dangerously with each other and causing—

(i) Combustion or dangerous evolution of heat;

(ii) Evolution of flammable, poisonous, or asphyxiant gases; or

(iii) Formation of unstable or corrosive materials.

(5) Packagings used for solids, which may become liquid at temperatureslikely to be encountered during transportation, must be capable of containing the hazardous material in the liquid state.

(f) Closures. (1) Closures on packagings shall be so designed and closedthat under conditions (including the effects of temperature, pressure and vibration) normally incident to transportation—

(i) Except as provided in paragraph(g) of this section, there is no identifiable release of hazardous materials to the environment from the opening to which the closure is applied; and

(ii) The closure is leakproof and secured against loosening. For air transport, stoppers, corks or other such friction closures must be held in place by positive means.

(2) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, a closure (including gaskets or other closure components, if any) used on a specification packagingmust conform to all applicable requirements of the specification and must be closed in accordance with information,as applicable, provided by the manufacturer’s notification required by §178.2 of this subchapter.

(g) Venting. Venting of packagings, toreduce internal pressure which may develop by the evolution of gas from the contents, is permitted only when—

(1) Except for shipments of cryogenic liquids as specified in §173.320(c) and ofcarbon dioxide, solid (dry ice), transportation by aircraft is not involved;

(2) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, the evolved gases arenot poisonous, likely to create a flammable mixture with air or be an asphyxiant under normal conditions of transportation;

(3) The packaging is designed so as to preclude an unintentional release ofhazardous materials from the receptacle;

(4) For bulk packagings, other thanIBCs, venting is authorized for the specific hazardous material by a special provision in the §172.101 table or by the applicable bulk packaging specification in part 178 of this subchapter; and

(5) Intermediate bulk packagings (IBCs) may be vented when required toreduce internal pressure that may develop by the evolution of gas subject to the requirements of paragraphs (g)(1) through (g)(3) of this section. The IBC must be of a type that has successfullypassed (with the vent in place) the applicable design qualification tests with
no release of hazardous material.

(h) Outage and filling limits—(1) General. When filling packagings and receptacles for liquids, sufficient ullage (outage) must be left to ensure thatneither leakage nor permanent distortion of the packaging or receptacle will occur as a result of an expansion of the liquid caused by temperatures likely to be encountered during transportation. Requirements for outage and fillinglimits for non-bulk and bulk packagings are specified in §§173.24a(d) and 173.24b(a), respectively.

(2) Compressed gases and cryogenic liquids. Filling limits for compressed


### 438 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.24a

gases and cryogenic liquids are specified in §§173.301 through 173.306 for cylinders and §§173.314 through 173.319 for bulk packagings.

(i) Air transportation. Except as provided in subpart C of part 171 of thissubchapter, packages offered or intended for transportation by aircraftmust conform to the general requirements for transportation by aircraft in §173.27.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52610, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–227, 56 FR 49989, Oct. 2, 1991; 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173– 238, 59 FR 38064, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67491, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–242, 60 FR 26805, May 18, 1995; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 45379, 81, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45032, July 31, 2003; 68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 76154, Dec. 20, 2004; 72 FR 25176, May 3, 2007; 73 FR 4717, Jan. 28, 2008; 74 FR 2255, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.24a Additional general requirements for non-bulk packagings and packages.
(a) Packaging design. Except as provided in §172.312 of this subchapter:

(1) Inner packaging closures. A combination packaging containing liquid hazardous materials must be packed so that closures on inner packagings are upright.

(2) Friction. The nature and thickness of the outer packaging must be such that friction during transportation is not likely to generate an amount of heat sufficient to alter dangerously the chemical stability of the contents.

(3) Securing and cushioning. Inner packagings of combination packagingsmust be so packed, secured and cushioned to prevent their breakage or leakage and to control their shiftingwithin the outer packaging under conditions normally incident to transportation. Cushioning material must not be capable of reacting dangerouslywith the contents of the inner packagings or having its protective properties significantly weakened in the event of leakage.

(4) Metallic devices. Nails, staples andother metallic devices shall not protrude into the interior of the outer packaging in such a manner as to be likely to damage inner packagings or receptacles.

(5) Vibration. Each non-bulk packagemust be capable of withstanding, without rupture or leakage, the vibration test procedure specified in §178.608 of this subchapter.

(b) Non-bulk packaging filling limits. (1)A single or composite non-bulk packaging may be filled with a liquid hazardous material only when the specific gravity of the material does not exceed that marked on the packaging, or a specific gravity of 1.2 if not marked, except as follows:

(i) A Packing Group I packaging maybe used for a Packing Group II material with a specific gravity not exceeding the greater of 1.8, or 1.5 times thespecific gravity marked on the packaging, provided all the performancecriteria can still be met with the higher specific gravity material;

(ii) A Packing Group I packaging may be used for a Packing Group IIImaterial with a specific gravity not exceeding the greater of 2.7, or 2.25 times the specific gravity marked on thepackaging, provided all the performance criteria can still be met with the higher specific gravity material; and

(iii) A Packing Group II packaging may be used for a Packing Group IIImaterial with a specific gravity not exceeding the greater of 1.8, or 1.5 times the specific gravity marked on thepackaging, provided all the performance criteria can still be met with the higher specific gravity material.

(2) Except as otherwise provided in this section, a non-bulk packaging may
not be filled with a hazardous materialto a gross mass greater than the maximum gross mass marked on the packaging.

(3) A single or composite non-bulk packaging which is tested and marked for liquid hazardous materials may be
filled with a solid hazardous materialto a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on the packaging,
or 1.2 if not marked. In addition:

(i) A single or composite non-bulk packaging which is tested and marked for Packing Group I liquid hazardous materials may be filled with a solid Packing Group II hazardous material


### 439 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.24a

to a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by 1.5, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on the packaging, or 1.2 if not marked.

(ii) A single or composite non-bulk packaging which is tested and marked for Packing Group I liquid hazardous materials may be filled with a solid Packing Group III hazardous materialto a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by 2.25, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on the packaging, or 1.2 if not marked.

(iii) A single or composite non-bulk packaging which is tested and marked for Packing Group II liquid hazardous materials may be filled with a solid Packing Group III hazardous materialto a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by 1.5, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on the packaging, or 1.2 if not marked.

(4) Packagings tested as prescribed in §178.605 of this subchapter and marked with the hydrostatic test pressure asprescribed in §178.503(a)(5) of this subchapter may be used for liquids only when the vapor pressure of the liquid conforms to one of the following:

(i) The vapor pressure must be suchthat the total pressure in the packaging (i.e., the vapor pressure of the liquid plus the partial pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa (15 psia))
at 55 ° C (131 ° F), determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section and a filling temperature of 15

° C (59 ° F)), will not exceed two-thirds of the marked test pressure;

(ii) The vapor pressure at 50 ° C (122

° F) must be less than four-sevenths of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa (15 psia); or

(iii) The vapor pressure at 55 ° C (131

° F) must be less than two-thirds of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa (15 psia).

(5) No hazardous material may remain on the outside of a package after filling.

(c) Mixed contents. (1) An outer nonbulk packaging may contain more than one hazardous material only when—

(i) The inner and outer packagings
used for each hazardous material conform to the relevant packaging sections of this part applicable to that hazardous material;

(ii) The package as prepared for shipment meets the performance tests prescribed in part 178 of this subchapter for the packing group indicating thehighest order of hazard for the hazardous materials contained in the package;

(iii) Corrosive materials (except ORM-D) in bottles are further packedin securely closed inner receptacles before packing in outer packagings; and

(iv) For transportation by aircraft, the total net quantity does not exceed the lowest permitted maximum netquantity per package as shown in Column 9a or 9b, as appropriate, of the §172.101 table. The permitted maximum net quantity must be calculated in kilograms if a package contains both a liquid and a solid.

(2) A packaging containing inner packagings of Division 6.2 materialsmay not contain other hazardous materials except—

(i) Refrigerants, such as dry ice or liquid nitrogen, as authorized under the HMR;

(ii) Anticoagulants used to stabilize blood or plasma; or

(iii) Small quantities of Class 3, Class8, Class 9, or other materials in Packing Groups II or III used to stabilize orprevent degradation of the sample, provided the quantity of such materials does not exceed 30 mL (1 ounce) or 30 g (1 ounce) in each inner packaging. Themaximum quantity in an outer package, including a hazardous material used to preserve or stabilize a sample, may not exceed 4 L (1 gallon) or 4 kg (8.8 pounds). Such preservatives are notsubject to the requirements of this subchapter.

(d) Liquids must not completely fill a receptacle at a temperature of 55 ° C (131 ° F) or less.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52611, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45460, Oct. 1, 1992; 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50624, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 71 FR 32258, June 2, 2006]


### 440 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.24b

§ 173.24b Additional general requirements for bulk packagings.

(a) Outage and filling limits. (1) Exceptas otherwise provided in this subchapter, liquids and liquefied gases must be so loaded that the outage is atleast five percent for materials poisonous by inhalation, or at least one percent for all other materials, of the total capacity of a cargo tank, portabletank, tank car (including dome capacity), multi-unit tank car tank, or any compartment thereof, at the following reference temperatures—

(i) 46 ° C (115 ° F) for a noninsulated tank;

(ii) 43 ° C (110 ° F) for a tank car having a thermal protection system, incorporating a metal jacket that provides
an overall thermal conductance at 15.5

° C (60 ° F) of no more than 10.22 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/ per degree F) temperature differential; or

(iii) 41 ° C (105 ° F) for an insulated
tank.

(2) Hazardous materials may not be
loaded into the dome of a tank car. Ifthe dome of the tank car does not provide sufficient outage, vacant space must be left in the shell to provide the required outage.

(b) Equivalent steel. For the purposes of this section, the reference stainlesssteel is stainless steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 51.7 deka newtons per square millimeter (75,000 psi) and a guaranteed elongationof 40 percent or greater. Where the regulations permit steel other than stainless steel to be used in place of a specified stainless steel (for example, as in§172.102 of this subchapter, special provision B30), the minimum thickness for
the steel must be obtained from one of the following formulas, as appropriate:

Formula for metric units

e 1 = (12.74e 0 ) / (Rm 1 A 1 ) 1 ⁄ 3

Formula for non-metric units

e 1 = (144.2e 0 ) / (Rm 1 A 1 ) 1 ⁄ 3

where:

e 0 = Required thickness of the reference

stainless steel in mm or inches respectively; e 1 = Equivalent thickness of the steel used in mm or inches respectively;

Rm 1 = Specified minimum tensile strength of

the steel used in deka-newtons per squaremillimeter or pounds per square inch respectively; and
A 1 = Specified minimum percentage elongation of the steel used multiplied by 100 (for example, 20 percent times 100 equals20). Elongation values used must be determined from a 50 mm or 2 inch test specimen. (c) Air pressure in excess of ambient atmospheric pressure may not be used to load or unload any lading which may create an air-enriched mixture within the flammability range of the lading in the vapor space of the tank.

(d) A bulk packaging may not be
loaded with a hazardous material that:

(1) Is at a temperature outside of the packaging’s design temperature range;

or (2) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, exceeds the maximumweight of lading marked on the specification plate.

(e) Stacking of IBCs and Large Packagings. (1) IBCs and Large Packagings not designed and tested to be stacked. No packages or freight (hazardous or otherwise) may be stacked upon an IBCor a Large Packaging that was not designed and tested to be stacked upon.

(2) IBCs and Large Packagings designed and tested to be stacked. The superimposed weight placed upon an IBC or a Large Packaging designed tobe stacked may not exceed the maximum permissible stacking test mass marked on the packaging.

(f) UN portable tanks. (1) A UN portable tank manufactured in the United
States must conform in all details to the applicable requirements in parts 172, 173, 178 and 180 of this subchapter.

(2) UN portable tanks manufactured
outside the United States. A UN portable
tank manufactured outside the United States, in accordance with national or international regulations based on the UN Recommendations (IBR, see §171.7of this subchapter), which is an authorized packaging under §173.24 of this subchapter, may be filled, offered and transported in the United States, if the§172.101 Table of this subchapter authorizes the hazardous material for transportation in the UN portable tank and it conforms to the applicable T


### 441 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.26

codes, and tank provision codes, or other special provisions assigned to the hazardous material in Column (7) of the Table. In addition, the portable
tank must—

(i) Conform to applicable provisions in the UN Recommendations (IBR, see§171.7 of this subchapter) and the requirements of this subpart;

(ii) Be capable of passing the prescribed tests and inspections in part 180 of this subchapter applicable to the UN portable tank specification;

(iii) Be designed and manufactured according to the ASME Code (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) or a pressurevessel design code approved by the Associate Administrator;

(iv) Be approved by the Associate Administrator when the portable tank is designed and constructed under theprovisions of an alternative arrangement (see §178.274(a)(2) of this subchapter); and

(v) The competent authority of the country of manufacture must provide reciprocal treatment for UN portable
tanks manufactured in the United
States.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52612, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66266, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173– 243, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 173–252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50624, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 FR 33426, June 21, 2001; 67 15743, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 74 FR 2255, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.25 Authorized packagings and overpacks. (a) Authorized packages containing hazardous materials may be offered fortransportation in an overpack as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, if all of the following conditions are met:

(1) The package meets the requirements of §§173.21 and 173.24 of this subchapter.

(2) The overpack is marked with theproper shipping name and identification number, when applicable, and is labeled as required by this subchapter
for each hazardous material containedtherein, unless marking and labels representative of each hazardous material in the overpack are visible.

(3) Each package subject to the orientation marking requirements of §172.312 of this subchapter is packed in the overpack with its filling holes up and the overpack is marked with package orientation marking arrows on two opposite vertical sides of the overpack with the arrows pointing in the correct
direction of orientation.

(4) The overpack is marked with the word ‘‘OVERPACK’’ when specificationpackagings are required, unless specification markings on the inside packages are visible.

(5) Packages containing Class 8 (corrosive) materials in Packing Group I or Division 5.1 (oxidizing) materials inPacking Group I may not be overpacked with any other materials.

(b) Shrink-wrapped or stretchwrapped trays may be used as outerpackagings for inner packagings prepared in accordance with the limitedquantity provisions or consumer commodity provisions of this subchapter, provided that—

(1) Inner packagings are not fragile, liable to break or be easily punctured, such as those made of glass, porcelain, stoneware or certain plastics; and

(2) Each complete package does not exceed 20 kg (44 lbs) gross weight.

(c) Hazardous materials which are required to be labeled POISON may be transported in the same motor vehicle
with material that is marked or knownto be foodstuffs, feed or any edible material intended for consumption by humans or animals provided the hazardous material is marked, labeled, and packaged in accordance with thissubchapter, conforms to the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section and is overpacked as specified in §177.841(e) of this subchapter or in an overpack which is a UN 1A2, 1B2, or 1N2 drum tested and marked for a Packing Group II or higher performance level.

[Amdt. 173–165, 48 FR 28099, June 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52612 Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66266, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173– 234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173–214, 59 FR 67491, Dec. 29, 1994; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 1999; 68 FR 45032, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 76155, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34397, June 14, 2005; 73 FR 57005, Oct. 1, 2008]

§ 173.26 Quantity limitations.

When quantity limitations do not appear in the packaging requirements of this subchapter, the permitted gross weight or capacity authorized for a packaging is as shown in the packaging


### 442 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.27

specification or standard in part 178 or 179, as applicable, of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52612, Dec. 21, 1990]

§ 173.27 General requirements for transportation by aircraft.
(a) The requirements of this section are in addition to the requirements in §173.24 and apply to packages offered orintended for transportation aboard aircraft. Except for materials not subjectto performance packaging requirements in subpart E of this part, a packaging containing a Packing Group III material with a primary or subsidiary risk of Division 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, or Class8 must meet the Packing Group II performance level when offered or intended for transportation by aircraft.

(b) Packages authorized onboard aircraft. (1) When Column 9a of the §172.101 table indicates that a material is ‘‘Forbidden’’, that material may notbe offered for transportation or transported aboard passenger-carrying aircraft.

(2) When Column 9b of the §172.101
table indicates that a material is ‘‘Forbidden’’, that material may not beoffered for transportation or transported aboard aircraft.

(3) The maximum quantity of hazardous material in a package that maybe offered for transportation or transported aboard a passenger-carrying aircraft or cargo aircraft may not exceedthat quantity prescribed for the material in Column 9a or 9b, respectively, of the §172.101 table.

(4) A package containing a hazardous
material which is authorized aboard cargo aircraft but not aboard passenger
aircraft must be labeled with the
CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label required by §172.402(c) of this subchapterand may not be offered for transportation or transported aboard passenger-carrying aircraft.

(c) Pressure requirements. (1) Packagings must be designed and constructed to prevent leakage that may be caused by changes in altitude and temperature during transportation
aboard aircraft.

(2) Packagings for which retention ofliquid is a basic function must be capable of withstanding without leakage the greater of— (i) An internal pressure which produces a gauge pressure of not less than 75 kPa (11 psig) for liquids in Packing Group III of Class 3 or Division 6.1; or 95 kPa (14 psig) for other liquids; or

(ii) A pressure related to the vapor pressure of the liquid to be conveyed, determined by one of the following:

(A) The total gauge pressure measured in the receptacle (i.e., the vapor pressure of the material and the partial pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa (15 psia)) at 55 ° C (131 ° F), multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5; determined on the basis of a filling temperature of 15 ° C (59 ° F) and a degree of filling such that the receptacle is not completely liquid full at a temperature
of 55 ° C (131 ° F) or less;

(B) 1.75 times the vapor pressure at 50

° C (122 ° F) less 100 kPa (15 psia); or

(C) 1.5 times the vapor pressure at 55

° C (131 ° ) less 100 kPa (15 psia).

(3) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (c)(2) of this section—

(i) Hazardous materials may be contained in an inner packaging whichdoes not itself meet the pressure requirement provided that the innerpackaging is packed within a supplementary packaging which does meetthe pressure requirement and other applicable packaging requirements of this subchapter.

(ii) Packagings which are subject to the hydrostatic pressure test and marking requirements of §§178.605 and178.503(a)(5), respectively, of this subchapter must have a marked test pressure of not less than 250 kPa (36 psig) for liquids in Packing Group I, 80 kPa (12 psig) for liquids in Packing Group III of Class 3 or Division 6.1, and 100 kPa (15 psig) for other liquids.

(d) Closures. Stoppers, corks or other such friction-type closures must be held securely, tightly and effectively inplace by positive means. Each screwtype closure on any packaging must besecured to prevent closure from loosening due to vibration or substantial change in temperature.

(e) Absorbent materials. Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, liquid hazardous materials of Class 3, 4, or 8, or Division 5.1, 5.2 or 6.1 that are packaged and offered for transport in glass, earthenware, plastic or metal


### 443 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.27

inner packagings must be packaged using absorbent material as follows:

(1) Packing Group I liquids on passenger aircraft must be packaged usingmaterials capable of absorbing the entire contents of the inner packagings.

(2) Packing Group I liquids on cargo aircraft, and Packing Group II liquidsincluding Division 5.2 liquids on passenger and cargo aircraft, must be packaged using a sufficient quantity of
absorbent material to absorb the entirecontents of any one of the inner packagings containing such liquids. When the inner packagings are of differentsizes and quantities, sufficient absorbent material must be used to absorbthe entire contents of the inner packaging with the greatest volume of liquid.

(3) When absorbent materials are required and the outer packaging is not liquid tight, a means of containing the liquid in the event of a leakage must be provided in the form of a leakproofliner, plastic bag or other equally efficient means of containment.

(4) Absorbent material must not react dangerously with the liquid (see §§173.24 and 173.24a.).

(5) Absorbent material is not required if the inner packagings are so protected that they are unlikely to
break and leak their contents from theouter packaging under normal conditions of transportation.

(f) Combination packaging. Unless otherwise specified in this part, or in§171.22 of this subchapter, when combination packaging are offered for transportation aboard aircraft, innerpackaging must conform to the quantity limitations set forth in table 1 of this paragraph for transport aboard passenger-carrying aircraft and table 2 of this paragraph for transport aboard cargo aircraft only, as follows:

T ABLE 1—M AXIMUM N ET C APACITY OF I NNER P ACKAGING FOR T RANSPORTATION ON P ASSENGER

C ARRYING A IRCRAFT

Maximum net quantity per package from Column 9a of the § 172.101 table Maximum authorized net capacity of each inner packaging

Glass, earthenware or fiber inner packagings Metal or plastic inner packagings

Liquids: Not greater than 0.5L ............................................................... 0.5L ................................... 0.5L

. Greater than 0.5L. not greater than lL ..................................... 0.5L ................................... lL. Greater than 1L, not greater than 5L ....................................... 1L ...................................... 5L. Greater than 5L, not greater than 60L ..................................... 2.5L ................................... 10L. Greater than 60L, not greater than 220L ................................. 5L ...................................... 25L.

Greater than 220L .................................................................... No limit .............................. No l imit.
Solids: Not greater than 5 kg ............................................................... 0.5 kg ................................ 1 kg. Greater than 5 kg, not greater than 25 kg ............................... 1 kg ................................... 2.5 kg. Greater than 25 kg, not greater than 200 kg ........................... 5 kg ................................... 10 kg. Greater than 200 kg ................................................................. No limit .............................. No li mit.

T ABLE 2—M AXIMUM N ET C APACITY OF I NNER P ACKAGING FOR T RANSPORTATION ON C ARGO A IRCRAFT

Maximum net quantity per package from Column 9b of the § 172.101 table Maximum authorized net capacity of each inner packaging

Glass, earthenware or fiber inner packagings Metal or plastic inner packagings

Liquids: Not greater than 2.5L ............................................................... 1L ...................................... 1L. Greater than 2.5L, not greater than 30L .................................. 2.5L ................................... 2.5L. Greater than 30L, not greater than 60L ................................... 5L ...................................... 10L. Greater than 60L, not greater than 220L ................................. 5L ...................................... 25L.

Greater than 220L .................................................................... No limit .............................. No l imit.
Solids: Not greater than 15 kg ............................................................. 1 kg ................................... 2.5 k g. Greater than 15 kg, not greater than 50 kg ............................. 2.5 kg ................................ 5 kg. Greater than 50 kg, not greater than 200 kg ........................... 5 kg ................................... 10 kg. Greater than 200 kg ................................................................. No limit .............................. No li mit.


### 444 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.28

(g) Cylinders. For any cylinder containing hazardous materials and incorporating valves, sufficient protection must be provided to prevent operation of, and damage to, the valves during transportation, by one of the following
methods:

(1) By equipping each cylinder withsecurely attached valve caps or protective headrings; or

(2) By boxing or crating the cylinder. (h) Tank cars and cargo tanks. Any tank car or cargo tank containing ahazardous material may not be transported aboard aircraft.

(i) Effective October 1, 2006, each person who offers a hazardous material fortransportation by aircraft must include the certification statement specified in §172.204(c)(3).

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52612, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66266, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45032, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 76155, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 14602, Mar. 22, 2006; 73 FR 57006, Oct. 1, 2008; 75 FR 53597, Sept. 1, 2010]

§ 173.28 Reuse, reconditioning and remanufacture of packagings.

(a) General. Packagings and receptacles used more than once must be insuch condition, including closure devices and cushioning materials, thatthey conform in all respects to the prescribed requirements of this subchapter. Before reuse, each packagingmust be inspected and may not be reused unless free from incompatible residue, rupture, or other damage whichreduces its structural integrity. Packagings not meeting the minimum thickness requirements prescribed in paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section may
not be reused or reconditioned for

reuse.

(b) Reuse of non-bulk packaging. A non-bulk packaging used more than once must conform to the following provisions and limitations:

(1) A non-bulk packaging which, uponinspection, shows evidence of a reduction in integrity may not be reused unless it is reconditioned in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.

(2) Before reuse, packagings subjectto the leakproofness test with air prescribed in §178.604 of this subchapter
shall be— (i) Retested without failure in accordance with §178.604 of this subchapter using an internal air pressure (gauge) of at least 48 kPa (7.0 psig) for Packing Group I and 20 kPa (3.0 psig) for Packing Group II and Packing Group III; and

(ii) Marked with the letter ‘‘L’’, with the name and address or symbol of the person conducting the test, and the last two digits of the year the test was conducted. Symbols, if used, must beregistered with the Associate Administrator.

(3) Packagings made of paper (otherthan fiberboard), plastic film, or textile are not authorized for reuse;

(4) Metal and plastic drums and jerricans used as single packagings or the outer packagings of composite packagings are authorized for reuseonly when they are marked in a permanent manner (e.g., embossed) in mmwith the nominal (for metal packagings) or minimum (for plastic packagings) thickness of the packaging material, as required by §178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter, and—

(i) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section, conform to the following minimum thickness criteria:

Maximum capacity not

over Minimum thickness of packaging material

Metal drum or

jerrican Plastic drum or jerrican

20 L ............. 0.63 mm (0.025 inch) 1.1 mm (0.043 inch). 30 L ............. 0.73 mm (0.029 inch) 1.1 mm (0.043 inch). 40 L ............. 0.73 mm (0.029 inch) 1.8 mm (0.071 inch). 60 L ............. 0.92 mm (0.036 inch) 1.8 mm (0.071 inch). 120 L ........... 0.92 mm (0.036 inch) 2.2 mm (0.087 inch). 220 L ........... 0.92 mm (0.036 inch) 1

. 2.2 mm (0.087 inch).

450 L ........... 1.77 mm (0.070 inch) 5.0 mm (0.197 inch).

1 Metal drums or jerricans with a minimum thickness of 0.82 mm body
and 1.09 mm heads which are manufactured and marked prior to January 1, 1997 may be reused. Metal drums or jerricans manufactured and marked on or after January 1, 1997, and intended for reuse, must be constructed with a minimum thickness of 0.82 mm body
and 1.11 mm heads.

(ii) For stainless steel drums and jerricans, conform to a minimum wallthickness as determined by the following equivalence formula:


### 445 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.28

F ORMULA FOR 

### M ETRIC 

### U NITS



### e e

Rm A 1 0

3

1 1



### 21 4

= ×

× .

F ORMULA FOR 

### U.S. S TANDARD 

### U NITS



### e e

Rm A 1 0

3

1 1 

### 21 4

145 = ×

× 

# ( ) .

/

where:

e 1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the

metal to be used (in mm or, for U.S. Standard units, use inches).

e 0 = required minimum wall thickness for

the reference steel (in mm or, for U.S. Standard units, use inches).

Rm 1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength

of the metal to be used (in N/mm 2 or for U.S. Standard units, use psi).
A 1 = guaranteed minimum elongation (as a

percentage) of the metal to be used on fracture under tensile stress (see paragraph (c)(1) of this section).
(5) Plastic inner receptacles of composite packagings must have a minimum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 inch).

(6) A previously used non-bulk packaging may be reused for the shipment of hazardous waste, not subject to the reconditioning and reuse provisions of this section, in accordance with §173.12(c).

(7) Notwithstanding the provisions ofparagraph (b)(2) of this section, a packaging otherwise authorized for reuse may be reused without being leakproofness tested with air provided the packaging—

(i) Is refilled with a material which is compatible with the previous lading:

(ii) Is refilled and offered for transportation by the original filler;

(iii) Is transported in a transport vehicle or freight container under the exclusive use of the refiller of the packaging; and

(iv) Is constructed of— (A) Stainless steel, monel or nickel
with a thickness not less than one and
one-half times the minimum thickness prescribed in paragraph (b)(4) of this
section;

(B) Plastic, provided the packaging is
not refilled for reuse on a date morethan five years from the date of manufacture marked on the packaging in accordance with §178.503(a)(6) of this subchapter; or

(C) Another material or thicknesswhen approved under the conditions established by the Associate Administrator for reuse without retesting.

(c) Reconditioning of non-bulk packaging. (1) For the purpose of this subchapter, reconditioning of metal drums

is: (i) Cleaning to base material of construction, with all former contents, internal and external corrosion, and any external coatings and labels removed;

(ii) Restoring to original shape andcontour, with chimes (if any) straightened and sealed, and all non-integral gaskets replaced: and

(iii) Inspecting after cleaning but before painting, Packagings that have visible pitting, significant reduction in material thickness, metal fatigue, damaged threads or closures, or other significant defects, must be rejected.

(2) For the purpose of this subchapter, reconditioning of a non-bulkpackaging other than a metal drum includes:

(i) Removal of all former contents,external coatings and labels, and cleaning to the original materials of construction;

(ii) Inspection after cleaning with rejection of packagings with visible damage such as tears, creases or cracks, or damaged threads or closures, or other significant defects;

(iii) Replacement of all non-integral gaskets and closure devices with new or refurbished parts, and cushioningand cushioning materials; and components including gaskets, closure devices and cushioning and cushioning material. (For a UN 1H1 plastic drum,replacing a removable gasket or closure device with another of the same design and material that providesequivalent performance does not constitute reconditioning); and

(iv) Ensuring that the packagings are
restored to a condition that conformsin all respects with the prescribed requirements of this subchapter.

(3) A person who reconditions a packaging manufactured and marked under the provisions of subpart L of part 178 of this subchapter, shall mark that packaging as required by §178.503(c)


### 446 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.29

and (d) of this subchapter. The marking is the certification of the reconditioner that the packaging conforms to
the standard for which it is marked and that all functions performed by the reconditioner which are prescribed by this subchapter have been performed in compliance with this subchapter.

(4) The markings applied by the reconditioner may be different from those applied by the manufacturer at the time of original manufacture, but may not identify a greater performance capability than that for which the original design type had been tested (for example, the reconditioner may mark a drum which was originally
marked as 1A1/Y1.8 as 1A1/Y1.2 or 1A1/ Z2.0).

(5) Packagings which have significant defects which cannot be repaired may
not be reused.

(d) Remanufacture of non-bulk packagings. For the purpose of this subchapter, remanufacture is the conversion of a non-specification, non-bulk packaging to a DOT specification or U.N. standard, the conversion of a packaging meeting one specification or standard to another specification or standard (for example, conversion of
1A1 non-removable head drums to 1A2removable head drums) or the replacement of integral structural packaging components (such as non-removableheads on drums). A person who remanufactures a non-bulk packaging to conform to a specification or standard in part 178 of this subchapter is subject to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter as a manufacturer.

(e) Non-reusable containers. A packaging marked as NRC according to theDOT specification or UN standard requirements of part 178 of this subchapter may be reused for the shipment of any material not required by this subchapter to be shipped in a DOTspecification or UN standard packaging.

(f) A Division 6.2 packaging to be reused must be disinfected prior to reuse by any means effective for neutralizing the infectious substance the packaging previously contained. A secondarypackaging or outer packaging conforming to the requirements of §173.196 or §173.199 need not be disinfected prior to reuse if no leakage from the primary receptacle has occurred. Drums or jerricans not meeting the minimum thickness requirements prescribed in paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section may
not be reused or reconditioned for

reuse.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52614, Dec. 21, 1990]

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.28, see the List of CFRSections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and
on GPO Access.

§ 173.29 Empty packagings.

(a) General. Except as otherwise provided in this section, an empty packaging containing only the residue of a
hazardous material shall be offered for transportation and transported in the same manner as when it previously contained a greater quantity of that
hazardous material.

(b) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, an empty packaging is not subject toany other requirements of this subchapter if it conforms to the following provisions:

(1) Any hazardous material shipping
name and identification number markings, any hazard warning labels orplacards, and any other markings indicating that the material is hazardous (e.g., RQ, INHALATION HAZARD) areremoved, obliterated, or securely covered in transportation. This provision does not apply to transportation in a transport vehicle or a freight containerif the packaging is not visible in transportation and the packaging is loaded by the shipper and unloaded by the shipper or consignee;

(2) The packaging— (i) Is unused; (ii) Is sufficiently cleaned of residueand purged of vapors to remove any potential hazard;

(iii) Is refilled with a material which
is not hazardous to such an extent thatany residue remaining in the packaging no longer poses a hazard; or

(iv) Contains only the residue of— (A) An ORM-D material; or (B) A Division 2.2 non-flammable gas, other than ammonia, anhydrous, and with no subsidiary hazard, at a gauge pressure less than 200 kPa (29.0 psig); at
20 ° C (68 ° F); and


### 447 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.31

(3) Any material contained in thepackaging does not meet the definitions in §171.8 of this subchapter for a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant.

(c) A non-bulk packaging containingonly the residue of a hazardous material covered by Table 2 of §172.504 of this subchapter that is not a material poisonous by inhalation or its residue shipped under the subsidiary placarding provisions of §172.505—

(1) Does not have to be included in determining the applicability of the placarding requirements of subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter; and

(2) Is not subject to the shipping paper requirements of this subchapter when collected and transported by acontract or private carrier for reconditioning, remanufacture or reuse.

(d) Notwithstanding the stowage requirements in Column 10a of the§172.101 table for transportation by vessel, an empty drum or cylinder may be
stowed on deck or under deck.

(e) Specific provisions for describing an empty packaging on a shippingpaper appear in §172.203(e) of this subchapter.

(f) [Reserved](g) A package which contains a residue of an elevated temperature material may remain marked in the same manner as when it contained a greater quantity of the material even though it no longer meets the definition in §171.8of this subchapter for an elevated temperature material.

(h) A package that contains a residue of a hazardous substance, Class 9, listed in the §172.101 Table, Appendix A,Table I, that does not meet the definition of another hazard class and is not a hazardous waste or marine pollutant,may remain marked, labeled and, if applicable, placarded in the same manneras when it contained a greater quantity of the material even though it no longer meets the definition in §171.8 ofthis subchapter for a hazardous substance.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52614, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–227, 56 FR 49989, Oct. 2, 1991; Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52939, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173–251, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; Amdt. 173–260, 62 FR 1236, Jan. 8, 1997; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 1999; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003; 69 FR 64473, Nov. 4, 2004; 75 FR 72, Jan. 4, 2010] § 173.30 Loading and unloading of transport vehicles.
A person who is subject to the loading and unloading regulations in thissubchapter must load or unload hazardous materials into or from a transport vehicle or vessel in conformancewith the applicable loading and unloading requirements of parts 174, 175, 176, and 177 of this subchapter.

[68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003]

§ 173.31 Use of tank cars.

(a) General. (1) No person may offer a hazardous material for transportation
in a tank car unless the tank car meetsthe applicable specification and packaging requirements of this subchapter or, when this subchapter authorizes the use of a non-DOT specification tank car, the applicable specification to
which the tank was constructed.

(2) Tank cars and appurtenances may be used for the transportation of anycommodity for which they are authorized in this part and specified on the certificate of construction (AAR Form 4–2 or by addendum on Form R–1). See §179.5 of this subchapter. Transfer of a tank car from one specified service on
its certificate of construction to another may be made only by the owner
or with the owner’s authorization. A tank car proposed for a commodityservice other than specified on its certificate of construction must be approved for such service by the AAR’s
Tank Car Committee.

(3) No person may fill a tank car overdue for periodic inspection with a
hazardous material and then offer it for transportation. Any tank car marked as meeting a DOT specification and any non-specification tank car transporting a hazardous material must have a periodic inspection and test conforming to subpart F of part 180 of this subchapter.

(4) No railroad tank car, regardless of its construction date, may be used for the transportation in commerce of any
hazardous material unless the air brake equipment support attachments
of such tank car conform to the standards for attachments set forth in§§179.100–16 and 179.200–19 of this subchapter.


### 448 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.31

(5) No railroad tank car, regardless of its construction date, may be used for the transportation in commerce of any
hazardous material with a self-energized manway located below the liquid level of the lading.

(6) Unless otherwise specifically provided in this part:

(i) When the tank car delimiter is an ‘‘A,’’ offerors may also use tank cars with a delimiter ‘‘S,’’ ‘‘J’’ or ‘‘T’’.

(ii) When the tank car delimiter is an ‘‘S,’’ offerors may also use tank cars
with a delimiter ‘‘J’’ or ‘‘T’’.

(iii) When a tank car delimiter is a ‘‘T’’ offerors may also use tank cars
with a delimiter of ‘‘J’’.

(iv) When a tank car delimiter is a ‘‘J’’, offerors may not use a tank car with any other delimiter.

(7) A class DOT-103 or DOT-104 tank car may continue to be used for the transportation of a hazardous material if it meets the requirements of thissubchapter and the design requirements in Part 179 of this subchapter in effect on September 30, 2003; however,
no new construction is authorized.

(8) A tank car authorized by the Transport Canada TDG Regulations (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) maybe used provided it conforms to the applicable requirements in §171.12 of this subchapter.

(b) Safety systems —(1) Coupler vertical

restraint. Each tank car conforming to a DOT specification and any other tankcar used for transportation of a hazardous material must be equipped with a coupler vertical restraint system that meets the requirements of §179.14 of this subchapter.

(2) Pressure relief devices. (i) Pressure
relief devices on tank cars must conform to part 179 of this subchapter.

(ii) A single-unit tank car transporting a Division 6.1 PG I or II, orClass 2, 3, or 4 material must have a reclosing pressure relief device. However,a single-unit tank car built before January 1, 1991, and equipped with a nonreclosing pressure relief device may be used to transport a Division 6.1 PG I or II material or a Class 4 liquid provided
such materials do not meet the definition of a material poisonous by inhalation.

(3) Tank-head puncture-resistance requirements. The following tank cars must have a tank-head puncture-resistance system that conforms to the requirements in §179.16 of this subchapter, or to the corresponding requirements in effect at the time of installation:

(i) Tank cars transporting a Class 2
material.

(ii) Tank cars constructed from aluminum or nickel plate that are used to transport hazardous material.

(iii) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section, those tank cars specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section not requiring a tank-head puncture resistance systemprior to July 1, 1996, must have a tankhead puncture resistance system installed no later than July 1, 2006.

(iv) Class DOT 105A tank cars built prior to September 1, 1981, having a tank capacity less than 70 kl (18,500gallons), and used to transport a Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material, must have a tank-head puncture-resistant system installed no later than July 1,
2001.

(4) Thermal protection requirements. The following tank cars must have thermal protection that conforms tothe requirements of §179.18 of this subchapter:

(i) Tank cars transporting a Class 2 material, except for a class 106, 107A, 110, and 113 tank car. A tank car equipped with a thermal protection system conforming to §179.18 of this subchapter, or that has an insulationsystem having an overall thermal conductance of no more than 0.613 kilojoules per hour, per square meter,per degree Celsius temperature differential (0.03 B.t.u. per square foot,per hour, per degree Fahrenheit temperature differential), conforms to this requirement.

(ii) A tank car transporting a Class 2 material that was not required to have thermal protection prior to July 1, 1996, must be equipped with thermal protection no later than July 1, 2006.

(5) Bottom-discontinuity protection requirements. No person may offer for transportation a hazardous material in a tank car with bottom-discontinuityprotection unless the tank car has bottom-discontinuity protection that conforms to the requirements of E9.00 and E10.00 of the AAR Specifications for


### 449 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.31

Tank Cars (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). Tank cars not requiring bottom-discontinuity protection under theterms of Appendix Y of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars as of July 1,1996, must conform to these requirements no later than July 1, 2006, except that tank cars transporting a material that is hazardous only because it meetsthe definition of an elevated temperature material or because it is moltensulfur do not require bottom discontinuity protection.

(6) Scheduling of modifications and progress reporting. The date of conformance for the continued use of tank cars subject to paragraphs (b)(4), (b)(5), and(f) of this section and §173.314(j) is subject to the following conditions and
limitations.

(i) Each tank car owner shall modify, reassign, retire, or remove at least 50 percent of their in-service tank car
fleet within the first half of the compliance period and the remainder of their in-service tank car fleet duringthe second half of the compliance period.

(ii) By October 1 of each year, each owner of a tank car subject to this paragraph (b)(6) shall submit to theFederal Railroad Administration, Hazardous Materials Division, Office of Safety Assurance and Compliance, 1120Vermont Avenue, Mail Stop 25, Washington, DC 20590, a progress report that
shows the total number of in-service tank cars that need head protection,thermal protection, or bottom-discontinuity protection; the number of new or different tank cars acquired to replace those tank cars required to be upgraded to a higher service pressure;
and the total number of tank cars modified, reassigned, acquired, retired, or removed from service the previous

year.

(c) Tank car test pressure. A tank carused for the transportation of a hazardous material must have a tank test pressure equal to or greater than the greatest of the following:

(1) Except for shipments of carbon dioxide, anhydrous hydrogen chloride, vinyl fluoride, ethylene, or hydrogen, 133 percent of the sum of lading vapor pressure at the reference temperature
of 46 ° C (115 ° F) for non-insulated tank

cars or 41 ° C (105 ° F) for insulated tank cars plus static head, plus gas padding pressure in the vacant space of a tank

car;

(2) 133 percent of the maximum loading or unloading pressure, whichever is greater;

(3) 20.7 Bar (300 psig) for materials that are poisonous by inhalation (see §173.31(e)(2)(ii) for compliance dates);

(4) The minimum pressure prescribed by the specification in part 179 of this subchapter; or

(5) The minimum test pressure prescribed for the specific hazardous material in the applicable packaging section in subpart F or G of this part.

(d) Examination before shipping. (1) No person may offer for transportation atank car containing a hazardous material or a residue of a hazardous material unless that person determines that the tank car is in proper condition and safe for transportation. As a minimum, each person offering a tank car fortransportation must perform an external visual inspection that includes:

(i) Except where insulation or a thermal protection system precludes an inspection, the tank shell and heads forabrasion, corrosion, cracks, dents, distortions, defects in welds, or any other
condition that makes the tank car unsafe for transportation;

(ii) The piping, valves, fittings, and gaskets for corrosion, damage, or any
other condition that makes the tank car unsafe for transportation;

(iii) For missing or loose bolts, nuts,
or elements that make the tank car unsafe for transportation;

(iv) All closures on tank cars and determine that the closures and all fastenings securing them are properly tightened in place by the use of a bar, wrench, or other suitable tool;

(v) Protective housings for proper securement;

(vi) The pressure relief device, including a careful inspection of the rupture disc in non-reclosing pressure relief devices, for corrosion or damage that may alter the intended operation of the device. The rupture disc is not required to be removed prior to visual inspection if the tank car contains theresidue, as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, of a Class 8, PG II or PG III material with no subsidiary hazard or


### 450 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.31

the residue of a Class 9 elevated temperature material;

(vii) Each tell-tale indicator after filling and prior to transportation to ensure the integrity of the rupture disc;

(viii) The external thermal protection system, tank-head puncture resistance system, coupler vertical restraint system, and bottom discontinuity protection for conditions thatmake the tank car unsafe for transportation;

(ix) The required markings on the tank car for legibility; and

(x) The periodic inspection date markings to ensure that the inspectionand test intervals are within the prescribed intervals.

(2) Closures on tank cars are required, in accordance with this subchapter, to be designed and closed sothat under conditions normally incident to transportation, including the effects of temperature and vibration,
there will be no identifiable release of
a hazardous material to the environment. ln any action brought to enforce this section, the lack of securement of any closure to a tool-tight condition, detected at any point, will establish a rebuttable presumption that a properinspection was not performed by the offeror of the car. That presumption may be rebutted by any evidence indicating
that the lack of securement resulted from a specific cause not within the
control of the offeror.

(e) Special requirements for materials poisonous by inhalation —(1) Interior heater coils. Tank cars used for materials poisonous by inhalation may not
have interior heater coils.

(2) Tank car specifications. A tankcar used for a material poisonous by inhalation must have a tank test pressure of 20.7 Bar (300 psig) or greater, head protection, and a metal jacket (e.g., DOT 105S300W), except that—

(i) A higher test pressure is requiredif otherwise specified in this subchapter; and

(ii) Each tank car constructed on or after March 16, 2009, and used for the transportation of PIH materials must meet the applicable authorized tank car specifications and standards listed in §173.244(a)(2) or (3) and §173.314(c) or (d). (iii) A tank car meeting the applicable authorized tank car specifications listed in §173.244(a)(2) or (3), or §173.314(c) or (d) is authorized for the transportation of a material poisonous by inhalation for a period of 20 years after the date of original construction.

(iv) A tank car owner retiring or otherwise removing a tank car from service transporting materials poisonous by inhalation, other than because ofdamage to the car, must retire or remove cars constructed of non-normalized steel in the head or shell before removing any car in service transportingmaterials poisonous by inhalation constructed of normalized steel meeting the applicable DOT specification.

(f) Special requirements for hazardous
substances. (1) A tank car used for ahazardous substance listed in paragraph (f)(2) of this section must have a tank test pressure of at least 13.8 Bar (200 psig), head protection and a metal jacket, except that—

(i) No metal jacket is required if— (A) The tank test pressure is 23.4 Bar (340 psig) or higher; or

(B) The tank shell and heads aremanufactured from AAR steel specification TC–128, normalized;

(ii) A higher test pressure is requiredif otherwise specified in this subchapter; and

(iii) Other than as provided in paragraph (b)(6) of this section, a tank carwhich does not conform to the requirements of this paragraph (f)(1), and was
authorized for a hazardous substance under the regulations in effect on June 30, 1996, may continue in use until July 1, 2006.

(2) List of hazardous substances. Hazardous substances for which the provisions of this paragraph (f) apply are as
follows:

Aldrin Allyl chloride alpha-BHC
beta-BHC
delta-BHC gamma-BHC Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
Bromoform
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlordane p-Chloroaniline
Chlorobenzene
Chlorobenzilate p-Chloro-m-cresol


### 451 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.32

2-Chloroethyl vinyl ether
Chloroform 2-Chloronapthalene o-Chlorophenol 3-Chloropropionitrile

DDE
DDT 1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane
m-Dichlorobenzene
o-Dichlorobenzene p-Dichlorobenzene 3,3

′ -Dichlorobenzidine 1,4-Dichloro-2-butene 1,1-Dichloroethane 1,2-Dichloroethane 1,1-Dichloroethylene Dichloroisopropyl ether
Dichloromethane @ 2,4-Dichlorophenol 2,6-Dichlorophenol 1,2-Dichloropropane 1,3-Dichloropropene
Dieldrin alpha-Endosulfan
beta-Endosulfan
Endrin Endrin aldehyde Heptachlor Heptachlor epoxide
Hexachlorobenzene
Hexachlorobutadiene
Hexachloroethane Hexachlorophene Hexachloropropene
Isodrin Kepone Methoxychlor 4,4

′ -Methylenebis(2-chloroaniline) Methylene bromide
Pentachlorobenzene
Pentachloroethane Pentachloronitrobenzene (PCNB) Pentachlorophenol Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs)
Pronamide Silvex (2,4,5-TP) 2,4,5-T
TDE 1,2,4,5-Tetrachlorobenzene 2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (TCDD)
Tetrachloroethane Tetrachloroethylene 2,3,4,6-Tetrachlorophenol Toxaphene 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene 1,1,1-Trichloroethane 1,1,2-Trichloroethane Trichloroethylene 2,4,5-Trichlorophenol 2,4,6-Trichlorophenol Tris(2,3-dibromopropyl) phosphate

(g) Tank car loading and unloading. When placed for loading or unloading and before unsecuring any closure, a tank car must be protected against movement or coupling as follows: (1) Each hazmat employee who is responsible for loading or unloading a
tank car must secure access to the track to prevent entry by other rail equipment, including motorized service vehicles. Derails, lined and locked switches, portable bumper blocks, or other equipment that provides an equivalent level of security may be used to satisfy this requirement.

(2) Caution signs must be displayed
on the track or on the tank cars to warn persons approaching the cars from the open end of the track and must be left up until after all closures are secured and the cars are in propercondition for transportation. The caution signs must be of metal or other durable material, rectangular, at 30.48 cm (12 inches) high by 38.10 cm (15 inches) wide, and bear the word‘‘STOP.’’ The word ‘‘STOP’’ must appear in letters at least 10.16 cm (4 inches) high. The letters must be white on a blue background. Additional words, such as ‘‘Tank Car Connected’’ or ‘‘Crew at Work,’’ may also appear in
white letters under the word ‘‘STOP.’’

(3) At least one wheel on the tank car must be blocked against movement in both directions, and the hand brakes must be set. If multiple tank cars are coupled together, sufficient hand
brakes must be set and wheels blockedto prevent movement in both directions.

[Amdt. 173–245, 60 FR 49072, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173–245, 61 FR 33254, June 26, 1996; Amdt. 173–256, 61 FR 51338, Oct. 1, 1996; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 33427, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45379, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR 75743, Dec. 31, 2003; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 70 FR 34075, June 13, 2005; 72 FR 25176, May 3, 2007; 72 FR 55692, Oct. 1, 2007; 74 FR 1799, Jan. 13, 2009; 75 FR 27215, May 14, 2010]

§ 173.32 Requirements for the use of portable tanks.
(a) General requirements. No person may offer a hazardous material fortransportation in a portable tank except as authorized by this subchapter.

(1) Except as otherwise provided inthis subpart, no person may use a portable tank for the transportation of a
hazardous material unless it meets the requirements of this subchapter.

(2) No person may fill and offer for transportation a portable tank when


### 452 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.32

the prescribed periodic test or inspection under subpart G of part 180 of this subchapter has become due until the test or inspection has been successfully completed. This requirement does not apply to any portable tank filled prior to the test or inspection due date.

(3) When a portable tank is used as acargo tank motor vehicle, it must conform to all the requirements prescribed for cargo tank motor vehicles. (See §173.33.)

(b) Substitute packagings. A particular Specification portable tank may be substituted for another portable tank
as follows:

(1) An IM or UN portable tank may be used whenever an IM or UN portabletank having less stringent requirements is authorized provided the portable tank meets or exceeds the requirements for pressure-relief devices, bottom outlets and any other special provisions specified in §172.102(c)(7)(vi) of this subchapter.

(2) Where a Specification IM101 or IM102 portable tank is prescribed, a UNportable tank or Specification 51 portable tank otherwise conforming to the special commodity requirements of §172.102(c)(7) of this subchapter for the material to be transported may be
used.

(3) A DOT Specification 51 portable tank may be used whenever a DOT Specification 56, 57, or 60 portable tank is authorized. A DOT Specification 60 portable tank may be used whenever a DOT Specification 56 or 57 portable tank is authorized. A higher integritytank used instead of a specified portable tank must meet the same designprofile; for example, a DOT Specification 51 portable tank must be lined ifused instead of a lined DOT Specification 60 portable tank.

(4) A portable tank authorized by the Transport Canada TDG Regulations (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) maybe used provided it conforms to the applicable requirements in §171.12 of this subchapter.

(c) Grandfather provisions for portable
tanks —(1) Continued use of Specification 56 and 57 portable tanks. Continued useof an existing portable tank constructed to DOT Specification 56 or 57 is authorized only for a portable tank constructed before October 1, 1996. A stainless steel portable tank internallylined with polyethylene that was constructed on or before October 1, 1996, and that meets all requirements of DOT Specification 57 except for beingequipped with a polypropylene discharge ball valve and polypropylene secondary discharge opening closure, may be marked as a Specification 57 portable tank and used in accordance with the provisions of this section.

(2) A DOT Specification 51, IM 101, orIM 102 portable tank may not be manufactured after January 1, 2003; however, such tanks may continue to be used forthe transportation of a hazardous material provided they meet the requirements of this subchapter, including thespecification requirements and the requirements of this subchapter for thetransportation of the particular hazardous material according to the T codes in effect on September 30, 2001 or the new T codes in §172.102(c)(7)(i) (see §171.14(d)(4) for transitional provisions applicable to T codes), and providedthe portable tanks conform to the periodic inspection and tests specified for the particular portable tank in subpart G of part 180 of this subchapter. AfterJanuary 1, 2003, all newly manufactured portable tanks must conform tothe requirements for the design, construction and approval of UN portable tanks as specified in §§178.273, 178.274,178.275, 178.276, 178.277 and part 180, subpart G, of this subchapter.

(3) A DOT Specification portable tank manufactured prior to January 1,1992 that is equipped with a non-reclosing pressure relief device may continue in service for the hazardous materials for which it is authorized. Except for a DOT Specification 56 or 57 portable tank, a DOT Specificationportable tank manufactured after January 1, 1992, used for materials meeting the definition for Division 6.1 liquids, Packing Group I or II, Class 2 gases, or Class 3 or 4 liquids, must be equipped with a reclosing pressure relief valvehaving adequately sized venting capacity unless otherwise specified in this subchapter (see §§178.275(f)(1) and 178.277 of this subchapter).

(4) Any portable tank container constructed prior to May 15, 1950, complying with the requirements of either
the ASME Code for Unfired Pressure


### 453 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.32

Vessels, 1946 Edition, or the API ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1943Edition, may be used for the transportation of liquefied compressed gas, provided it fulfills all the requirements ofthe part and specifications for the particular gas or gases to be transported. Such portable tanks must be marked ‘‘ICC Specification 51X’’ on the plate required by the specification, except as modified by any or all of the following:

(i) Portable tanks designed and constructed in accordance with Pars. U–68, U–69, or U–201 of the ASME Code, 1943and 1946 editions, may be used. Portable tanks designed and constructed in
accordance with Par. U–68 or Par. U–69 may be re-rated at a working pressure25 percent in excess of the design pressure for which the portable tank was originally constructed. If the portable tank is re-rated, the re-rated pressuremust be marked on the plate as follows: ‘‘Re-rated working pressure— psig’’.

(ii) Loading and unloading accessories, valves, piping, fittings, safety and gauging devices, do not have to comply with the requirements for the particular location on the portable
tank.

(5) Any ICC Specification 50 portable tank fulfilling the requirements of thatspecification may be continued in service for transportation of a liquefied petroleum gas if it is retested every fiveyears in accordance with the requirements in §180.605 of this subchapter.Use of existing portable tanks is authorized. New construction is not authorized.

(d) Determination of an authorized portable tank. Prior to filling and offering a portable tank for transportation,the shipper must ensure that the portable tank conforms to the authorized specification and meets the applicable requirements in this subchapter for the hazardous material. The shipper must ensure that the MAWP, design pressure or test pressure of the portable tank, as applicable, is appropriate for the hazardous material being transported.Determination of the applicable pressure must take into account the maximum pressure used to load or unloadthe hazardous material, the vapor pressure, static head and surge pressures of
the hazardous material and the temperatures that the hazardous material will experience during transportation.

(e) External inspection prior to filling. Each portable tank must be given a complete external inspection prior to filling. Any unsafe condition must be corrected prior to its being filled andoffered for transportation. The external inspection shall include a visual inspection of:

(1) The shell, piping, valves and other appurtenances for corroded areas,dents, defects in welds and other defects such as missing, damaged, or leaking gaskets;

(2) All flanged connections or blank flanges for missing or loose nuts and bolts;

(3) All emergency devices for corrosion, distortion, or any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation;

(4) All required markings on the tank for legibility; and

(5) Any device for tightening manhole covers to ensure such devices are operative and adequate to prevent leakage at the manhole cover.

(f) Loading requirements. (1) A hazardous material may not be loaded intoa portable tank if the hazardous material would:

(i) Damage the portable tank; (ii) React with the portable tank; or(iii) Otherwise compromise its product retention capability.

(2) A hazardous material may not be loaded in a DOT Specification 51, DOT Specification 60, an IM or UN portable tank unless the portable tank has a pressure relief device that provides total relieving capacity meeting the requirements of this subchapter.

(3) Except during a pressure test, a portable tank may not be subjected to a pressure greater than its marked maximum allowable working pressureor, when appropriate, its marked design pressure.

(4) A portable tank may not be loaded to a gross mass greater than themaximum allowable gross mass specified on its identification plate.

(5) Except for a non-flowable solid or a liquid with a viscosity of 2,680 centistokes (millimeters squared per second) or greater at 20 ° C (68 ° F), anIM or UN portable tank, or compartment thereof, having a volume greater


### 454 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.32

than 7,500 L (1,980 gallons) may not be loaded to a filling density of more than 20% and less than 80% by volume. This filling restriction does not apply if a portable tank is divided by partitions or surge plates into compartments ofnot more than 7,500 L (1,980 gallons) capacity; this portable tank must not be offered for transportation in an ullagecondition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge.

(6) The outage for a portable tankmay not be less than 2% at a temperature of 50 ° C (122 ° F) unless otherwise specified in this subchapter. For UNportable tanks, the applicable maximum filling limits apply as specified according to the assigned TP codes in Column (7) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter except when transported domestically.

(7) Each tell-tale indicator or pressure gauge located in the space between a frangible disc and a safety relief valve mounted in series must be
checked after the tank is filled and prior to transportation to ensure that the frangible disc is leak free. Any leakage through the frangible disc must be corrected prior to offering the tank for transportation.

(8) During filling, the temperature of
the hazardous materials shall not exceed the limits of the design temperature range of the portable tank.

(9) The maximum mass of liquefied compressed gas per liter (gallon) of shell capacity (kg/L or lbs./gal.) may not exceed the density of the liquefied compressed gas at 50 ° C (122 ° F). The portable tank must not be liquid full at
60 ° C (140 ° F).

(g) Additional requirements for specific modal transport. In addition to other applicable requirements, the following apply:

(1) A portable tank containing a hazardous material may not be loadedonto a highway or rail transport vehicle unless loaded entirely within thehorizontal outline of the vehicle, without overhang or projection of any part of the tank assembly.

(2) An IM or UN portable tank used for the transportation of flammable liquids by rail may not be fitted with non-reclosing pressure relief devices except in series with reclosing pressure
relief valves. (3) A portable tank or Specification
106A or 110A multi-unit tank car containing a hazardous material may not be offered for transportation aboard a passenger vessel unless:

(i) The vessel is operating under achange to its character of vessel certification as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter; and

(ii) The material is permitted to be transported aboard a passenger vessel in the §172.101 Table of this subchapter.

(h) Additional general commodity-specific requirements. In addition to other applicable requirements, the following requirements apply:

(1) Each uninsulated portable tankused for the transportation of a liquefied compressed gas must have an exterior surface finish that is significantly reflective, such as a light-reflecting color if painted, or a bright reflective metal or other material if unpainted.

(2) If a hazardous material is beingtransported in a molten state, the portable tank must be thermally insulated
with suitable insulation material of
sufficient thickness that the overall
thermal conductance is not more than 0.080 Btu per hour per square foot per degree Fahrenheit differential.

(3) No person may offer a liquid hazardous material of Class 3, PG I or II, or PG III with a flash point of less than
100 ° F (38 ° C); Division 5.1, PG I or II; or Division 6.1, PG I or II, in an IM or UN portable tank that is equipped with a
bottom outlet as authorized in Column(7) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter by assignment of a T Code in the appropriate proper shipping name entry, for unloading to a facility while it remains on a transport vehicle with the power unit attached unless—

(i) The tank outlets conform to §178.275(d)(3) of this subchapter; or

(ii) The facility at which the IM or UN portable tank is to be unloaded conforms to the requirements in §177.834(o) of this subchapter.

(i) Additional requirements for portable tanks other than IM specification and UN portable tanks. (1) The bursting strength of any piping and fittings must be at least four times the design pressure of the tank, and at least fourtimes the pressure to which, in any instance, it may be subjected in service by the action of a pump or other device


### 455 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.32

(not including safety relief valves) that may subject piping to pressures greater than the design pressure of the tank.

(2) Pipe joints must be threaded, welded or flanged. If threaded pipe is used, the pipe and pipe fittings must not be lighter than Schedule 80 weight. Where copper tubing is permitted, joints must be brazed or be of equally strong metal union type. The melting point of brazing material may not be lower than 1,000 ° F (537.8 ° C). The method of joining tubing must not decrease the strength of the tubing such as by the cutting of threads.

(3) Non-malleable metals may not be
used in the construction of valves or fittings.

(4) Suitable provision must be made in every case to allow for expansion, contraction, jarring and vibration of all pipe. Slip joints may not be used for this purpose.

(5) Piping and fittings must be grouped in the smallest practicablespace and must be protected from damage as required by the specification.

(6) All piping, valves and fittings on every portable tank must be leakage tested with gas or air after installation and proved tight at not less than the design pressure of the portable tank onwhich they are used. In the event of replacement, all such piping, valves, or fittings must be tested in accordance with the requirements of this section before the portable tank is returned totransportation service. The requirements of this section apply to all hoses used on portable tanks, except that hoses may be tested either before or after installation on the portable tank.

(7) All materials used in the construction of portable tanks and their appurtenances may not be subject to destructive attack by the contents of the portable tank.

(8) No aluminum, copper, silver, zinc nor their alloys may be used. Brazed joints may not be used. All parts of a portable tank and its appurtenances used for anhydrous ammonia must be
steel.

(9) Each outlet of a portable tankused for the transportation of non-refrigerated liquefied compressed gases,except carbon dioxide, must be provided with a suitable automatic excessflow valve (see definition in §178.337– 1(g) of this subchapter). The valve must be located inside the portable tank or at a point outside the portable tank
where the line enters or leaves the portable tank. The valve seat must be located inside the portable tank or may be located within a welded flange or its companion flange, or within anozzle or within a coupling. The installation must be made in such a manner as to reasonably assure that any undue strain which causes failure requiring functioning of the valve shall cause
failure in such a manner that it will not impair the operation of the valve.

(i) A safety device connection or liquid level gauging device that is constructed so that the outward flow of
the tank contents will not exceed that passed by an opening of 0.1397 cm (0.0550 inches) is not required to be equipped with excess-flow valves.

(ii) An excess-flow valve must close automatically if the flow reaches the rated flow of gas or liquid specified by the original valve manufacturer when piping mounted directly on the valve is sheared off before the first valve, pump, or fitting downstream from the
excess flow valve.

(iii) An excess-flow valve may be designed with a by-pass, not to exceed a0.1016 cm (0.040 inches) diameter opening to allow equalization of pressure.

(iv) Filling and discharge lines must be provided with manually operated
shut-off valves located as close to the tank as practical. Unless this valve is manually operable at the valve, the
line must also have a manual shut-off valve. The use of ‘‘Stop-Check’’ valvesto satisfy with one valve the requirements of this section is forbidden. For portable tanks used for refrigerated liquefied gases, a ‘‘stop check’’ valve may be used on the vapor side of the pressure buildup circuit.

(10) Each portable tank used for carbon dioxide or nitrous oxide must belagged with a suitable insulation material of such thickness that the overall
thermal conductance is not more than 0.08 Btu per square foot per degree Fahrenheit differential in temperatureper hour. The conductance must be determined at 60 ° Fahrenheit. Insulationmaterial used on portable tanks for nitrous oxide must be noncombustible.


### 456 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.33

(11) Refrigerating or heating coils must be installed in portable tanks
used for carbon dioxide and nitrous
oxide. Such coils must be tested externally to at least the same pressure as the test pressure of the portable tank.
The coils must also be tested internally to at least twice the working pressure of the heating or refrigerating system to be used, but in no case less than the test pressure of the portabletank. Such coils must be securely anchored. In the event of leakage, the refrigerant or heating medium to be circulated through the coil or coils must
have no adverse chemical reaction with the portable tank or its contents.

(12) Excess flow valves are not required for portable tanks used for the transport of refrigerated liquefied

gases.

[66 FR 33427, June 21, 2001, as amended at 67 FR 15743, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR 32413, May 30, 2003; 68 FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75742, 75743, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 54046, Sept. 7, 2004; 72 FR 25176, May 3, 2007]

§ 173.33 Hazardous materials in cargo tank motor vehicles.

(a) General requirements. (1) No personmay offer or accept a hazardous material for transportation in a cargo tank motor vehicle except as authorized by this subchapter.

(2) Two or more materials may not be loaded or accepted for transportation in the same cargo tank motor vehicleif, as a result of any mixture of the materials, an unsafe condition wouldoccur, such as an explosion, fire, excessive increase in pressure or heat, or the release of toxic vapors.

(3) No person may fill and offer for transportation a specification cargotank motor vehicle for which the prescribed periodic retest or reinspectionunder subpart E of part 180 of this subchapter is past due until the retest orinspection has been successfully completed. This requirement does not apply to a cargo tank supplied by a
motor carrier who is other than the person offering the hazardous material for transportation (see §180.407(a)(1) of this subchapter), or to any cargo tank filled prior to the retest or inspection
due date.

(b) Loading requirements. (1) A hazardous material may not be loaded in a cargo tank if during transportation any part of the tank in contact with the hazardous material lading would have a dangerous reaction with the
hazardous material.

(2) A cargo tank may not be loaded
with a hazardous material that will
have an adverse effect on the tank’s integrity or—

(i) May combine chemically with any
residue or contaminants in the tank toproduce an explosion, fire, excessive increase in pressure, release of toxic vapors or other unsafe condition.

(ii)–(iii) [Reserved] (iv) May severely corrode or reactwith the tank material at any concentration and temperature that will exist during transportation.

(v) Is prohibited by §173.21 or §173.24 of this subchapter.

(3) Air pressure in excess of ambient atmospheric pressure may not be used to load or unload any lading which may create an air-enriched mixture within the flammability range of the lading in the vapor space of the tank.

(4) To prevent cargo tank rupture in a loading or unloading accident, the loading or unloading rate used must be less than or equal to that indicated onthe cargo tank specification plate, except as specified in §173.318(b)(6). If no loading or unloading rate is marked on the specification plate, the loading or unloading rate and pressure used must be limited such that the pressure in the tank may not exceed 130% of the
MAWP.

(c) Maximum Lading Pressure. (1) Prior to loading and offering a cargo tank motor vehicle for transportation with material that requires the use of a specification cargo tank, the person must confirm that the cargo tankmotor vehicle conforms to the specification required for the lading and that the MAWP of the cargo tank is greater than or equal to the largest pressure obtained under the following
conditions:

(i) For compressed gases and certainrefrigerated liquids that are not cryogenic liquids, the pressure prescribed in §173.315 of this subchapter.

(ii) For cryogenic liquids, the pressure prescribed in §173.318 of this subchapter.


### 457 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.33

(iii) For liquid hazardous materials loaded in DOT specification cargo tanks equipped with a 1 psig normal vent, the sum of the tank static head plus 1 psig. In addition, for hazardous materials loaded in these cargo tanks, the vapor pressure of the lading at 115

° F must be not greater than 1 psig, except for gasoline transported in accordance with Special Provision B33 in §172.102(c)(3) of this subchapter.

(iv) For liquid hazardous materials not covered in paragraph (c)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section, the sum of the vapor pressure of the lading at 115 ° F, plus the tank static head exerted by the lading, plus any pressure exerted by the gas padding, including air in the ullage space or dome.

(v) The pressure prescribed in subpartB, D, E, F, G, or H of this part, as applicable.

(vi) The maximum pressure in the tank during loading or unloading.

(2) Any Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, MC 306 or MC 312, cargo tank motor vehicle with no marked design pressure or marked with a design pressure of 3 psig or less may be used for an authorized lading where the pressure derived from §173.33(c)(1)is less than or equal to 3 psig. After December 31, 1990, a cargo tank may notbe loaded and offered for transportation unless marked or remarked withan MAWP or design pressure in accordance with 49 CFR 180.405(k).

(3) Any Specification MC 310 or MC 311 cargo tank motor vehicle may be used for an authorized lading where the pressure derived from §173.33(c)(1) is less than or equal to the MAWP or MWP, respectively, as marked on the specification plate.

(4) Any cargo tank marked or certified before August 31, 1995, marked with a design pressure rather than an MAWP may be used for an authorizedlading where the largest pressure derived from §173.33(c)(1) is less than or equal to the design pressure marked on the cargo tank.

(5) Any material that meets the definition of a Division 6.1, Packing Group I or II (poisonous liquid) material mustbe loaded in a cargo tank motor vehicle having a MAWP of 25 psig or greater. (6) Substitute packagings. Unless otherwise specified, where MC 307, MC 312,DOT 407 or DOT 412 cargo tanks are authorized, minimum tank design pressure is 172.4 kPa (25 psig) for any Packing Group I or Packing Group II liquidlading that meets more than one hazard class definition.

(d) Relief system. (1) Non-reclosingpressure relief devices are not authorized in any cargo tank except when in series with a reclosing pressure relief device. However, a cargo tank marked or certified before August 31, 1995which is fitted with non-reclosing pressure relief devices may continue to be used in any hazardous material servicefor which it is authorized. The requirements in this paragraph do not apply to MC 330, MC 331 and MC 338 cargo
tanks.

(2) Each cargo tank motor vehicle used to transport a liquid hazardous material with a gas pad must have a pressure relief system that provides the venting capacity prescribed in §178.345–10(e) of this subchapter. The requirements in this paragraph do not apply to MC 330, MC 331 and MC 338 cargo tanks.

(3) A cargo tank motor vehicle made to a specification listed in column 1 may have pressure relief devices or outlets conforming to the applicable specification to which the tank wasconstructed, or the pressure relief devices or outlets may be modified to meet the applicable requirement for the specification listed in column 2 without changing the markings on the tank specification plate. The venting capacity requirements of the original DOT cargo tank specification must be met whenever a pressure relief valve is
modified.

Column 1 Column 2

MC 300, MC 301, MC 302,

MC 303, MC 305. MC 306 or DOT 406.

MC 306 .................................. DOT 406.
MC 304 .................................. MC 307 or DOT 407.
MC 307 .................................. DOT 407. MC 310, MC 311 ................... MC 312 or DOT 412.
MC 312 .................................. DOT 412.
MC 330 .................................. MC 331.

(e) Retention of hazardous materials in product piping during transportation. DOT specification cargo tanks used for the transportation of any material that is a Division 6.1 (poisonous liquid)


### 458 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.34

material, oxidizer liquid, liquid organic peroxide or corrosive liquid (corrosive to skin only) may not be transportedwith hazardous materials lading retained in the piping, unless the cargo tank motor vehicle is equipped with bottom damage protection devices meeting the requirements of §178.337–10 or §178.345–8(b) of this subchapter, orthe accident damage protection requirements of the specification under
which it was manufactured. This requirement does not apply to a residue which remains after the piping is drained. A sacrificial device (see §178.345–1 of this subchapter) may not be used to satisfy the accident damageprotection requirements of this paragraph.

(f) An MC 331 type cargo tank may be used where MC 306, MC 307, MC 312, DOT 406, DOT 407 or DOT 412 type cargo tanks are authorized. An MC 307, MC 312, DOT 407 or DOT 412 type cargo tank may be used where MC 306 or DOT 406 type cargo tanks are authorized. A higher integrity tank used instead of aspecified tank must meet the same design profile (for example, an MC 331 cargo tank must be lined if used in place of a lined MC 312 cargo tank.)

(g) Remote control of self-closing stop valves—MC 330, MC 331 and MC 338 cargo
tanks. Each liquid or vapor discharge opening in an MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank and each liquid filling and liquid discharge line in an MC 338 cargo tankmust be provided with a remotely controlled internal self-closing stop valve, except when an MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank is marked and used exclusively to transport carbon dioxide, or except when an MC 338 is used to transportargon, carbon dioxide, helium, krypton, neon, nitrogen, and xenon. However, if the cargo tank motor vehicle was certified before January 1, 1995, this requirement is applicable only when an MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank is used to transport a flammable liquid,flammable gas, hydrogen chloride (refrigerated liquid), or anhydrous ammonia; or when an MC 338 cargo tank is used to transport flammable ladings.

(h) A cargo tank motor vehicle authorized by the Transport Canada TDGRegulations (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) may be used provided it conforms to the applicable requirements in §171.12 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–212, 54 FR 25005, June 12, 1989]

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.33, see the List of CFRSections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and
on GPO Access.

§ 173.34 [Reserved]

§ 173.35 Hazardous materials in IBCs.

(a) No person may offer or accept a hazardous material for transportation in an IBC except as authorized by this subchapter. Each IBC used for the transportation of hazardous materials must conform to the requirements of its specification and regulations for thetransportation of the particular commodity. A specification IBC, for whichthe prescribed periodic retest or inspection under subpart D of part 180 of this subchapter is past due, may not be filled and offered for transportation until the retest or inspection have beensuccessfully completed. This requirement does not apply to any IBC filled prior to the retest or inspection due
date.

(b) Initial use and reuse of IBCs. (Also see §180.352 of this subchapter.) An IBC other than a multiwall paper IBC (13M1 and 13M2) may be reused. If an inner liner is required, the inner liner must be replaced before each reuse. Before
an IBC is filled and offered for transportation, the IBC and its service equipment must be given an external visual inspection, by the person filling the IBC, to ensure that:

(1) The IBC is free from corrosion, contamination, cracks, cuts, or other damage which would render it unable to pass the prescribed design type test to which it is certified and marked; and

(2) The IBC is marked in accordance with requirements in §178.703 of thissubchapter. Additional marking allowed for each design type may be present. Required markings that are missing, damaged or difficult to readmust be restored or returned to original condition.

(c) A metal IBC, or a part thereof,subject to thinning by mechanical abrasion or corrosion due to the lading,must be protected by providing a suitable increase in thickness of material,


### 459 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.35

a lining or some other suitable method of protection. Increased thickness for corrosion or abrasion protection must be added to the wall thickness specified in §178.705(c)(1)(iv) of this subchapter.

(d) Notwithstanding requirements in §173.24b of this subpart, when filling an IBC with liquids, sufficient ullage must be left to ensure that, at the mean bulk temperature of 50 ° C (122 ° F), the IBC is not filled to more than 98 percent of its water capacity.

(e) Where two or more closure systems are fitted in series, the system
nearest to the hazardous material being carried must be closed first.

(f) During transportation—(1) No hazardous material may remain on the outside of the IBC; and

(2) Each IBC must be securely fastened to or contained within the transport unit.

(g) Each IBC used for transportation of solids which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be encounteredduring transportation must also be capable of containing the substance in the liquid state.

(2) Liquids having a vapor pressure greater than 110 kPa (16 psig) at 50 ° C (122 ° F) or 130 kPa (18.9 psig) at 55 ° C (131 ° F) may not be transported in
metal IBCs.

(1) A rigid plastic or composite IBC may only be filled with a liquid having a vapor pressure less than or equal to the greater of the following two values: the first value is determined from any of the methods in paragraphs (h)(1) (i), (ii) or (iii) of this section. The second value is determined by the method in paragraph (h)(1)(iv) of this section.

(i) The gauge pressure (pressure in the IBC above ambient atmospheric pressure) measured in the IBC at 55 ° C (131 ° F). This gauge pressure must not
exceed two-thirds of the marked test pressure and must be determined after
the IBC was filled and closed at 15 ° C (60 ° F) to less than or equal to 98 percent of its capacity.

(ii) The absolute pressure (vapor pressure of the hazardous material plus atmospheric pressure) in the IBC at 50

° C (122 ° F). This absolute pressure must
not exceed four-sevenths of the sum of the marked test pressure and 100 kPa (14.5 psia). (iii) The absolute pressure (vapor pressure of the hazardous material plus atmospheric pressure) in the IBC at 55

° C (131 ° F). This absolute pressure must
not exceed two-thirds of the sum of the marked test pressure and 100 kPa (14.5 psia).

(iv) Twice the static pressure of the substance, measured at the bottom of
the IBC. This value must not be less than twice the static pressure of water.

(2) Gauge pressure (pressure in theIBC above ambient atmospheric pressure) in metal IBC must not exceed 110 kPa (16 psig) at 50 ° C (122 ° F) or 130 kPa (18.9 psig) at 55 ° C (131 ° F).

(i) The requirements in this section do not apply to DOT-56 or –57 portable
tanks.

(j) No IBC may be filled with a Packing Group I liquid. Rigid plastic, composite, flexible, wooden or fiberboard IBC used to transport Packing Group I solid materials may not exceed 1.5 cubic meters (53 cubic feet) capacity. For Packing Group I solids, a metal IBC may not exceed 3 cubic meters (106 cubic feet) capacity.

(k) When an IBC is used for the transportation of liquids with a flash point
of 60 ° C (140 ° F) (closed cup) or lower, orpowders with the potential for dust explosion, measures must be taken during product loading and unloading toprevent a dangerous electrostatic discharge.

(l) IBC filling limits. (1) Except as provided in this section, an IBC may not
be filled with a hazardous material in excess of the maximum gross mass
marked on that container.

(2) An IBC which is tested and marked for Packing Group II liquid materials may be filled with a Packing Group III liquid material to a grossmass not exceeding 1.5 times the maximum gross mass marked on that container, if all the performance criteria can still be met at the higher gross

mass.

(3) An IBC which is tested and marked for liquid hazardous materials may be filled with a solid hazardous material to a gross mass not exceeding the maximum gross mass marked onthat container. In addition, an IBC intended for the transport of liquids
which is tested and marked for Packing Group II liquid materials may be


### 460 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.36

filled with a Packing Group III solid hazardous material to a gross mass not exceeding the marked maximum grossmass multiplied by 1.5 if all the performance criteria can still be met at the higher gross mass.

(4) An IBC which is tested andmarked for Packing Group I solid materials may be filled with a Packing Group II solid material to a gross mass not exceeding the maximum gross mass marked on that container, multiplied by 1.5, if all the performance criteria can be met at the higher gross mass; or a Packing Group III solid material to a gross mass not exceeding the maximumgross mass marked on the IBC, multiplied by 2.25, if all the performance criteria can be met at the higher gross
mass. An IBC which is tested andmarked for Packing Group II solid materials may be filled with a Packing Group III solid material to a gross mass not exceeding the maximum gross mass marked on the IBC, multiplied by
1.5.

[Amdt. 173–238, 59 FR 38064, July 26, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 173–243, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; 64 FR 10777, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45380, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006; 75 FR 5393, Feb. 2, 2010]

§ 173.36 Hazardous materials in Large Packagings.
(a) No person may offer or accept a hazardous material for transportationin a Large Packaging except as authorized by this subchapter. Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, no Large Packaging may be filled with a Packing Group I or II material. EachLarge Packaging used for the transportation of hazardous materials must conform to the requirements of its specification and regulations for thetransportation of the particular commodity.

(b) Packaging design. (1) Inner packaging closures. A Large Packaging containing liquid hazardous materials must be packed so that closures on inner packagings are upright.

(2) Flexible Large Packagings. Flexible Large Packagings ( e.g., 51H) are only
authorized for use with flexible inner packagings.

(3) Friction. The nature and thickness of the outer packaging must be such that friction during transportation is not likely to generate an amount of heat sufficient to dangerously alter the chemical stability of the contents.

(4) Securing and cushioning. Inner packagings of Large Packagings must be packed, secured and cushioned to prevent their breakage or leakage and to control their shifting within theouter packaging under conditions normally incident to transportation. Cushioning material must not be capable of reacting dangerously with the contents of the inner packagings or having its protective properties significantly weakened in the event of leakage.

(5) Metallic devices. Nails, staples andother metallic devices must not protrude into the interior of the outer packaging in such a manner as to be likely to damage inner packagings or receptacles.

(c) Initial use and reuse of Large Packagings. A Large Packaging may be reused. If an inner packaging is constructed of paper or flexible plastic, the inner packaging must be replacedbefore each reuse. Before a Large Packaging is filled and offered for transportation, the Large Packaging must be given an external visual inspection, by the person filling the Large Packaging,

to ensure:

(1) The Large Packaging is free from corrosion, contamination, cracks, cuts, or other damage which would render it unable to pass the prescribed design type test to which it is certified and marked; and

(2) The Large Packaging is marked in accordance with requirements in §178.910 of this subchapter. Additional marking allowed for each design type may be present. Required markings that are missing, damaged or difficult
to read must be restored or returned to original condition.

(d) During transportation—(1) No hazardous material may remain on the outside of the Large Packaging; and

(2) Each Large Packaging must be securely fastened to or contained within the transport unit.

(e) Each Large Packaging used fortransportation of solids which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during transportation may not be transported in paper or


### 461 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.40

fiber inner packagings. The inner packagings must be capable of containing the substance in the liquid state.

(f) Liquid hazardous materials may only be offered for transportation ininner packagings appropriately resistant to an increase of internal pressurelikely to develop during transportation.

(g) A Large Packaging used to transport hazardous materials may not exceed 3 cubic meters (106 cubic feet) capacity.

(h) Mixed contents. (1) An outer Large Packaging may contain more than one hazardous material only when—

(i) The inner and outer packagings
used for each hazardous material conform to the relevant packaging sections of this part applicable to that hazardous material, and not result in a violation of §173.21;

(ii) The package as prepared for shipment meets the performance tests prescribed in part 178 of this subchapter
for the hazardous materials contained in the package;

(iii) Corrosive materials (except ORM–D) in bottles are further packedin securely closed inner receptacles before packing in outer packagings; and

(iv) For transportation by aircraft, the total net quantity does not exceed the lowest permitted maximum netquantity per package as shown in Column 9a or 9b, as appropriate, of the §172.101 table. The permitted maximum net quantity must be calculated in kilograms if a package contains both a liquid and a solid.

(2) A packaging containing inner packagings of Division 6.2 materialsmay not contain other hazardous materials, except dry ice.

(i) When a Large Packaging is used for the transportation of liquids with a flash point of 60.5 ° C (141 ° F) (closedcup) or lower, or powders with the potential for dust explosion, measures must be taken during product loading and unloading to prevent a dangerous electrostatic discharge.

[75 FR 5393, Feb. 2, 2010]

§ 173.40 General packaging requirements for toxic materials packaged in cylinders.

When this section is referenced for a
Hazard Zone A or B hazardous material elsewhere in this subchapter, the requirements in this section are applicable to cylinders used for that material.

(a) Authorized cylinders. (1) A cylinder must conform to a DOT specification or a UN standard prescribed in subpart C of part 178 of this subchapter, exceptthat acetylene cylinders and non-refillable cylinders are not authorized. Theuse of UN tubes and MEGCs is prohibited for Hazard Zone A materials.

(2) The use of a specification 3AL cylinder made of aluminum alloy 6351–T6 is prohibited for a Division 2.3 Hazard
Zone A material or a Division 6.1 Hazard Zone A material.

(3) A UN composite cylinder certified
to ISO–11119–3 is not authorized for a
Division 2.3 Hazard Zone A or B material.

(4) For UN seamless cylinders usedfor Hazard Zone A materials, the maximum water capacity is 85 L.

(b) Outage and pressure requirements. For DOT specification cylinders, the pressure at 55 ° C (131 ° F) of Hazard
Zone A and Hazard Zone B materials may not exceed the service pressure of the cylinder. Sufficient outage must be provided so that the cylinder will not be liquid full at 55 ° C (131 ° F).

(c) Closures. Each cylinder containing
a Hazard Zone A material must be closed with a plug or valve conforming to the following:

(1) Each plug or valve must have a taper-threaded connection directly tothe cylinder and be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the cylinder without damage or leakage.

(2) Each valve must be of thepackless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive materials, a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap with gasketed joint attached to the valve body or the cylinder to prevent loss of material through or past the packing.

(3) Each valve outlet must be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasketing material.

(4) The materials of construction for the cylinder, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting, and gaskets must be compatible with each other and with the lading.

(d) Additional handling protection. Each cylinder or cylinder overpack combination offered for transportation


### 462 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.50

containing a Division 2.3 or 6.1 Hazard
Zone A or B material must conform tothe valve damage protection performance requirements of this section. In addition to the requirements of this section, overpacks must conform to the overpack provisions of §173.25.

(1) DOT specification cylinders must conform to the following:

(i) Each cylinder with a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.03 mm (0.08 inch) and each cylinder that does not have fitted valve protection must be overpacked in a box. The box must conform to overpack provisions in §173.25. Box and valve protection must be of sufficient strength to protect all parts of the cylinder and valve, if any,from deformation and breakage resulting from a drop of 2.0 m (7 ft) or more onto a non-yielding surface, such asconcrete or steel, impacting at an orientation most likely to cause damage. ‘‘Deformation’’means a cylinder or valve that is bent, distorted, mangled, misshapen, twisted, warped, or in a
similar condition.

(ii) Each cylinder with a valve must be equipped with a protective metal cap, other valve protection device, oran overpack which is sufficient to protect the valve from breakage or leakage resulting from a drop of 2.0 m (7 ft) onto a non-yielding surface, such as concrete or steel. Impact must be at anorientation most likely to cause damage.

(2) Each UN cylinder containing a
Hazard Zone A or Hazard Zone B material must have a minimum test pressure in accordance with P200 of the UN Recommendations (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). For Hazard Zone Agases, the cylinder must have a minimum wall thickness of 3.5 mm if made of aluminum alloy or 2 mm if made of steel or, alternatively, cylinders may be packed in a rigid outer packagingthat meets the Packing Group I performance level when tested as prepared for transport, and that is designed and constructed to protect the cylinder and valve from puncture or damage that may result in release of the gas.

(e) Interconnection. Cylinders may notbe manifolded or connected. This provision does not apply to MEGCs containing Hazard Zone B materials in accordance with §173.312.

[67 FR 51642, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002; 68 FR 24660, May 8, 2003; 71 FR 33880, June 12, 2006]



### Subpart C—Definitions, Classification and Packaging for Class 1

S OURCE : Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise noted.

§ 173.50 Class 1—Definitions.

(a) Explosive. For the purposes of this subchapter, an explosive means any substance or article, including a device,which is designed to function by explosion ( i.e., an extremely rapid release ofgas and heat) or which, by chemical reaction within itself, is able to function
in a similar manner even if not designed to function by explosion, unless
the substance or article is otherwise classed under the provisions of thissubchapter. The term includes a pyrotechnic substance or article, unless the
substance or article is otherwise classed under the provisions of this subchapter.

(b) Explosives in Class 1 are divided
into six divisions as follows:

(1) Division 1.1 consists of explosives that have a mass explosion hazard. Amass explosion is one which affects almost the entire load instantaneously.

(2) Division 1.2 consists of explosives that have a projection hazard but not a mass explosion hazard.

(3) Division 1.3 consists of explosives
that have a fire hazard and either aminor blast hazard or a minor projection hazard or both, but not a mass explosion hazard.

(4) Division 1.4 consists of explosives that present a minor explosion hazard.The explosive effects are largely confined to the package and no projection of fragments of appreciable size or range is to be expected. An externalfire must not cause virtually instantaneous explosion of almost the entire contents of the package.


### 463 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.52

1 The probability of transition from burning to detonation is greater when large quantities are transported in a vessel. 2 The risk from articles of Division 1.6 is limited to the explosion of a single article. (5) Division 1.5 1 consists of very insensitive explosives. This division is comprised of substances which have amass explosion hazard but are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation or of transitionfrom burning to detonation under normal conditions of transport.

(6) Division 1.6 2 consists of extremely
insensitive articles which do not have a mass explosive hazard. This division is comprised of articles which contain only extremely insensitive detonating
substances and which demonstrate anegligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45183, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003]

§ 173.51 Authorization to offer and transport explosives.
(a) Unless otherwise provided in thissubpart, no person may offer for transportation or transport an explosive,
unless it has been tested and classedand approved by the Associate Administrator (§173.56).

(b) Reports of explosives approved bythe Department of Defense or the Department of Energy must be filed with,and receive acknowledgement in writing by, the Associate Administrator prior to such explosives being offered for transportation.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]

§ 173.52 Classification codes and compatibility groups of explosives.

(a) The classification code for an explosive, which is assigned by the Associate Administrator in accordance with this subpart, consists of the division number followed by the compatibilitygroup letter. Compatibility group letters are used to specify the controls for the transportation, and storage related thereto, of explosives and to prevent an increase in hazard that might result if certain types of explosives were storedor transported together. Transportation compatibility requirements for carriers are prescribed in §§174.81,
175.78. 176.83 and 177.848 of this subchapter for transportation by rail, air,vessel, and public highway, respectively, and storage incidental thereto.

(b) Compatibility groups and classification codes for the various types of explosives are set forth in the following tables. Table 1 sets forth compatibilitygroups and classification codes for substances and articles described in the
first column of table 1. Table 2 shows
the number of classification codes thatare possible within each explosive division. Altogether, there are 35 possible classification codes for explosives.

T ABLE 1—C LASSIFICATION C ODES

Description of substances or article to be classified Compatibility
group Classification code

Primary explosive substance .................................................................................................... ........................ A 1.1AArticle containing a primary explosive substance and not containing two or more effective protective features. Some articles, such as detonators for blasting, detonator assemblies for blasting and primers, cap-type, are included, even though they do not contain primary explosives.. B 1.1B
1.2B
1.4BPropellant explosive substance or other deflagrating explosive substance or article containing such explosive substance. C 1.1C
1.2C
1.3C
1.4C Secondary detonating explosive substance or black powder or article containing a secondary detonating

explosive substance, in each case without means of initiation and without a propelling charge, or article containing a primary explosive substance and containing two or more effective protective features. D 1.1D
1.2D
1.4D
1.5DArticle containing a secondary detonating explosive substance, without means of initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing flammable liquid or gel or hypergolic liquid). E 1.1E
1.2E
1.4E


### 464 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.53

T ABLE 1—C LASSIFICATION C ODES —Continued

Description of substances or article to be classified Compatibility
group Classification code

Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance with its means of initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing flammable liquid or gel or hypergolic liquid) or without a propelling charge. F 1.1F
1.2F
1.3F
1.4FPyrotechnic substance or article containing a pyrotechnic substance, or article containing both an explosive substance and an illuminating, incendiary, tear-producing or smoke-producing substance (other than a water-activated article or one containing white phosphorus, phosphide or flammable liquid or gel or hypergolic liquid). G 1.1G
1.2G
1.3G
1.4G Article containing both an explosive substance and white phosphorus .......................................................... H 1.2H
1.3H Article containing both an explosive substance and flammable liquid or gel .................................................. J 1 .1J
1.2J
1.3J Article containing both an explosive substance and a toxic chemical agent .................................................. K 1. 2K
1.3K Explosive substance or article containing an explosive substance and presenting a special risk (e.g., due

to water-activation or presence of hybergolic liquids, phosphides or pyrophoric substances) needing isolation of each type. L 1.1L
1.2L
1.3L Articles containing only extremely insensitive detonating substances. .......................................................... . N 1.6N Substance or article so packed or designed that any hazardous effects arising from accidental functioning

are limited to the extent that they do not significantly hinder or prohibit fire fighting or other emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity of the package. S 1.4S

T ABLE 2—S CHEME OF C LASSIFICATION OF E XPLOSIVES , C OMBINATION OF H AZARD DIVISION W ITH C OMPATIBILITY G ROUP

Compatibility group

Hazard division A B C D E F G H J K L N S A-S

1.1 1.1A 1.1B 1.1C 1.1D 1.1E 1.1F 1.1G .......... 1.1J .......... 1.1L .......... .......... 9
1.2 .......... 1.2B 1.2C 1.2D 1.2E 1.2F 1.2G 1.2H 1.2J 1.2K 1.2L .......... .......... 10
1.3 .......... .......... 1.3C .......... .......... 1.3F 1.3G 1.3H 1.3J 1.3K 1.3L .......... .......... 7
1.4 .......... 1.4B 1.4C 1.4D 1.4E 1.4F 1.4G .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 1.4S 7
1.5 .......... .......... .......... 1.5D .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ........ .. 1
1.6 .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 1.6N ........ .. 1

1.6 1 3 4 4 3 4 4 2 3 2 3 1 1 35

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67492, Dec. 29, 1994; 64 FR 51918, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]

§ 173.53 Provisions for using old classifications of explosives.
Where the classification system in effect prior to January 1, 1991, is referenced in State or local laws, ordinances or regulations not pertaining tothe transportation of hazardous materials, the following table may be used to compare old and new hazard class

names:

Current classification Class name prior to Jan. 1, 1991

Division 1.1 ....................... Class A explosives. Division 1.2 ....................... Class A or Class B explosives. Division 1 3 ....................... Class B explosive. Division 1.4 ....................... Class C explosives. Division 1.5 ....................... Blasting agents. Division 1.6 ....................... No applicable hazard class. § 173.54 Forbidden explosives.
Unless otherwise provided in this subchapter, the following explosives shall not be offered for transportation or transported:

(a) An explosive that has not been approved in accordance with §173.56 of this subpart.

(b) An explosive mixture or devicecontaining a chlorate and also containing:

(1) An ammonium salt, including a substituted ammonium or quaternary ammonium salt; or

(2) An acidic substance, including a salt of a weak base and a strong acid.

(c) A leaking or damaged package or article containing an explosive.


### 465 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.56

(d) Propellants that are unstable,
condemned or deteriorated.

(e) Nitroglycerin, diethylene glycoldinitrate, or any other liquid explosives not specifically authorized by this subchapter.

(f) A loaded firearm (except as provided in 49 CFR 1544.219).

(g) Fireworks that combine an explosive and a detonator.

(h) Fireworks containing yellow or white phosphorus.

(i) A toy torpedo, the maximum outside dimension of which exceeds 23 mm (0.906 inch), or a toy torpedo containing a mixture of potassium chlorate, blackantimony (antimony sulfide), and sulfur, if the weight of the explosive material in the device exceeds 0.26 g (0.01 ounce).

(j) Explosives specifically forbidden in the §172.101 table of this subchapter.

(k) Explosives not meeting the acceptance criteria specified in §173.57 of this subchapter.

(l) An explosive article with itsmeans of initiation or ignition installed, unless approved in accordance with §173.56.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–236, 58 FR 50236, Sept. 24, 1993; 67 FR 61013, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003]

§ 173.55 [Reserved]

§ 173.56 New explosives—definition and procedures for classification and approval.
(a) Definition of new explosive. For the purposes of this subchapter a new explosive means an explosive produced by a person who:

(1) Has not previously produced that explosive; or

(2) Has previously produced that explosive but has made a change in the formulation, design or process so as toalter any of the properties of the explosive. An explosive will not be considered a ‘‘new explosive’’ if an agency listed in paragraph (b) of this sectionhas determined, and confirmed in writing to the Associate Administrator,that there are no significant differences in hazard characteristics from the explosive previously approved.

(b) Examination, classing and approval. Except as provided in paragraph (j) of this section, no person may offer a new explosive for transportation unless that person has specified to theexamining agency the ranges of composition of ingredients and compounds, showing the intended manufacturingtolerances in the composition of substances or design of articles which will be allowed in that material or device, and unless it has been examined, classed and approved as follows:

(1) Except for an explosive made by or under the direction or supervision of the Department of Defense (DOD) or the Department of Energy (DOE), a new explosive must be examined andassigned a recommended shipping description, division and compatibility group, based on the tests and criteria prescribed in §§173.52, 173.57 and 173.58. The person requesting approval of thenew explosive must submit to the Associate Administrator a report of the examination and assignment of a recommended shipping description, division, and compatibility group. If theAssociate Administrator finds the approval request meets the regulatorycriteria, the new explosive will be approved in writing and assigned an EXnumber. The examination must be performed by a person who is approved by
the Associate Administrator under the provisions of subpart H of part 107 of this chapter and who—

(i) Has (directly, or through an employee involved in the examination) atleast ten years of experience in the examination, testing and evaluation of explosives;

(ii) Does not manufacture or market explosives, and is not controlled by or financially dependent on any entitythat manufactures or markets explosives, and whose work with respect to explosives is limited to examination, testing and evaluation; and

(iii) Is a resident of the United
States.

(2) A new explosive made by or underthe direction or supervision of a component of the DOD may be examined, classed, and concurred in by:

(i) U.S. Army Technical Center for Explosives Safety (SMCAC-EST), Naval Sea Systems Command (SEA–9934), or Air Force Safety Agency (SEW), whenapproved by the Chairman, DOD Explosives Board, in accordance with the DOD Explosives Hazard Classification


### 466 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.56

Procedures (IBR, see §171.7 of the subchapter); or

(ii) The agencies and procedures specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.

(3) A new explosive made by or underthe direction or supervision of the Department of Energy (DOE) may be—

(i) Examined by the DOE in accordance with the DOD Explosives Hazard Classification Procedures, and must be classed and approved by DOE; or

(ii) Examined, classed, and approved in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of
this section.

(4) For a material shipped under the description of ‘‘ammonium nitrate-fueloil mixture (ANFO)’’, the only test required for classification purposes is the Cap Sensitivity Test—Test Method 5(a)prescribed in the Explosive Test Manual (UN Manual of Tests and Criteria) (IBR, see §171.7 of the subchapter). The test must be performed by an agency listed in paragraph (b)(1), (b)(2), or (b)(3) of this section, the manufacturer,or the shipper. A copy of the test report must be submitted to the Associate Administrator before the material is offered for transportation, and acopy of the test report must be retained by the shipper for as long asthat material is shipped. At a minimum, the test report must contain thename and address of the person or organization conducting the test, date of the test, quantitative description of the mixture, including prill size and porosity, and a description of the test
results.

(c) Filing DOD or DOE approval report. DOD or DOE must file a copy ofeach approval, accompanied by supporting laboratory data, with the Associate Administrator and receive acknowledgement in writing before offering the new explosive for transportation, unless the new explosive is:

(1) Being transported under paragraph (d) or (e) of this section; or

(2) Covered by a national security classification currently in effect.

(d) Transportation of explosive samples for examination. Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (b) ofthis section with regard to the transportation of a new explosive that has not been approved, a person may offera sample of a new explosive for transportation, by railroad, highway, or vessel from the place where it was produced to an agency identified in paragraph (b) of this section, for examination if—

(1) The new explosive has been assigned a tentative shipping description and class in writing by the testing

agency;

(2) The new explosive is packaged as required by this part according to thetentative description and class assigned, unless otherwise specified in writing by the testing agency; and,

(3) The package is labeled as required by this subchapter and the following is marked on the package:

(i) The words ‘‘SAMPLE FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION’’;

(ii) The net weight of the new explosive; and

(iii) The tentative shipping name and
identification number.

(e) Transportation of unapproved explosives for developmental testing. Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section, the owner of a new explosive that has not been examined or approved may transport that new explosive from the place where it was produced to an explosives testing range if—

(1) It is not a primary (a 1.1A initiating) explosive or a forbidden explosive according to this subchapter;

(2) It is described as a Division 1.1 explosive (substance or article) and is packed, marked, labeled, described onshipping papers and is otherwise offered for transportation in conformance with the requirements of this subchapter applicable to Division 1.1;

(3) It is transported in a motor vehicle operated by the owner of the explosive; and

(4) It is accompanied by a person, in addition to the operator of the motor vehicle, who is qualified by training and experience to handle the explosive.

(f) Notwithstanding the requirementsof paragraphs (b) and (d) of this section, the Associate Administrator may approve a new explosive on the basis of an approval issued for the explosive by the competent authority of a foreign government, or when examination of the explosive by a person approved bythe Associate Administrator is impracticable, on the basis of reports of tests


### 467 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.57

conducted by disinterested third parties, or may approve the transportation of an explosives sample for thepurpose of examination by a person approved by the Associate Administrator.

(g) An explosive may be transported under subparts B or C of part 171 or §176.11 of this subchapter without theapproval of the Associate Administrator as required by paragraph (b) of
this section if the Associate Administrator has acknowledged in writing the acceptability of an approval issued by the competent authority of a foreign government pursuant to the provisions of the UN Recommendations, the ICAO Technical Instructions, the IMDG Code (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), orother national or international regulations based on the UN Recommendations. In such a case, a copy of the foreign competent authority approval,and a copy of the written acknowledgement of its acceptance must accompany each shipment of that explosive.

(h) The requirements of this section do not apply to cartridges, small arms
which are:

(1) Not a forbidden explosive under §173.54 of this subchapter;

(2) Ammunition for rifle, pistol, or shotgun;

(3) Ammunition with inert projectile or blank ammunition; and

(4) Ammunition not exceeding 50 caliber for rifle or pistol cartridges or 8 gauge for shotgun shells.
Cartridges, small arms meeting the criteria of this paragraph (h) may be assigned a classification code of 1.4S by
the manufacturer.

(i) If experience or other data indicate that the hazard of a material or adevice containing an explosive composition is greater or less than indicated according to the definition and criteria specified in §§173.50, 173.56, and 173.58 of this subchapter, the AssociateAdministrator may specify a classification or except the material or devicefrom the requirements of this subchapter.

(j) Fireworks. Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section, Division 1.3 and 1.4 fireworksmay be classed and approved by the Associate Administrator without priorexamination and offered for transportation if the following conditions are

met:

(1) The fireworks are manufacturedin accordance with the applicable requirements in APA Standard 87–1 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter);

(2) A thermal stability test is conducted on the device by the BOE, the BOM, or the manufacturer. The test must be performed by maintaining the device, or a representative prototype of a large device such as a display shell, at a temperature of 75 ° C (167 ° F) for 48
consecutive hours. When a device contains more than one component, those components which could be in physical
contact with each other in the finished device must be placed in contact with each other during the thermal stability test; and

(3) The manufacturer applies in writing to the Associate Administrator following the applicable requirements in APA Standard 87–1, and is notified in writing by the Associate Administrator that the fireworks have been classed, approved, and assigned an EX-number.Each application must be complete, including all relevant background data and copies of all applicable drawings, test results, and any other pertinent
information on each device for whichapproval is being requested. The manufacturer must sign the application andcertify that the device for which approval is requested conforms to APA Standard 87–1 and that the descriptions
and technical information contained inthe application are complete and accurate. If the application is denied, the
manufacturer will be notified in writing of the reasons for the denial. The Associate Administrator may require that the fireworks be examined by an agency listed in paragraph (b)(1) of this

section.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998; 64 FR 10777, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75743, Dec. 31, 2003; 72 FR 25177, May 3, 2007]

§ 173.57 Acceptance criteria for new explosives.
(a) Unless otherwise excepted, an explosive substance must be subjected to the Drop Weight Impact Sensitivity


### 468 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.58

Test (Test Method 3(a)(i)), the Friction Sensitivity Test (Test Method 3(b)(iii)),the Thermal Stability Test (Test Method 3(c)) at 75 ° C (167 ° F) and the SmallScale Burning Test (Test Method3(d)(i)), each as described in the Explosive Test Manual (UN Manual of Tests and Criteria) (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). A substance is forbiddenfor transportation if any one of the following occurs:

(1) For a liquid, failure to pass the test criteria when tested in the DropWeight Impact Sensitivity Test apparatus for liquids;

(2) For a solid, failure to pass the test criteria when tested in the DropWeight Impact Sensitivity Test apparatus for solids;

(3) The substance has a friction sensitiveness equal to or greater than that of dry pentaerythrite tetranitrate (PETN) when tested in the Friction Sensitivity Test;

(4) The substance fails to pass the test criteria specified in the Thermal Stability Test at 75 ° C (167 ° F); or

(5) Explosion occurs when tested in the Small-Scale Burning Test.

(b) An explosive article, packaged or unpackaged, or a packaged explosive substance must be subjected to the Thermal Stability Test for Articles and Packaged Articles (Test method 4(a)(i)) and the Twelve Meter Drop Test (Test Method 4(b)(ii)), when appropriate, in the Explosive Test Manual. An article or packaged substance is forbidden for transportation if evidence of thermalinstability or excessive impact sensitivity is found in those tests according
to the criteria and methods of assessing results prescribed therein.

(c) Dynamite (explosive, blasting, type A) is forbidden for transportation if any of the following occurs:

(1) It does not have uniformly mixed
with the absorbent material a satisfactory antacid in a quantity sufficient to have the acid neutralizing power of an amount of magnesium carbonate equal to one percent of the nitroglycerin or other liquid explosive ingredient;

(2) During the centrifuge test (Test Method D–2, in appendix D to this part) or the compression test (Test MethodD–3 in appendix D to this part), a nongelatin dynamite loses more than 3percent by weight of the liquid explosive or a gelatin dynamite loses more than 10 percent by weight of the liquid explosive; or

(3) During the leakage test (Test Method D–1 in appendix D to this part), there is any loss of liquid.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 64 FR 51918, Sept. 27, 1999; 68 FR 75743, Dec. 31, 2003]

§ 173.58 Assignment of class and division for new explosives.

(a) Division 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 1.4 explosives. In addition to the test prescribedin §173.57 of this subchapter, a substance or article in these divisions must be subjected to Test Methods 6(a), 6(b), and 6(c), as described in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see§171.7 of this subchapter), for assignment to an appropriate division. Thecriteria for assignment of class and division are as follows:

(1) Division 1.1 if the major hazard is mass explosion;

(2) Division 1.2 if the major hazard is dangerous projections;

(3) Division 1.3 if the major hazard is radiant heat or violent burning, or both, but there is no blast or projection hazard;

(4) Division 1.4 if there is a small hazard with no mass explosion and no projection of fragments of appreciable size

or range;

(5) Division 1.4 Compatibility Group S (1.4S) if the hazardous effects are confined within the package or theblast and projection effects do not significantly hinder emergency response efforts; or

(6) Not in the explosive class if thesubstance or article does not have significant explosive hazard or if the effects of explosion are completely confined within the article.

(b) Division 1.5 explosive. Except forANFO, a substance that has been examined in accordance with the provisions §173.57(a) of this subchapter,must be subjected to the following additional tests: Cap Sensitivity Test, Princess Incendiary Spark Test, DDT Test, and External Fire Test, each asdescribed in the Explosive Test Manual. A material may not be classed as a Division 1.5 explosive if any of the following occurs:


### 469 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.59

(1) Detonation occurs in the Cap Sensitivity Test (Test Method 5(a));

(2) Detonation occurs in the DDT Test (Test Method 5(b)(ii));

(3) An explosion, evidenced by a loudnoise and projection of fragments, occurs in the External Fire Test (Test Method 5(c), or

(4) Ignition or explosion occurs in the Princess Incendiary Spark Test (Test Method 5(d)).

(c) Division 1.6 explosive. (1) In orderto be classed as a 1.6 explosive, an article must pass all of the following tests, as prescribed in the Explosive Test
Manual:

(i) The 1.6 Article External Fire Test; (ii) The 1.6 Article Slow Cook-off Test;

(iii) The 1.6 Article Propagation Test;
and

(iv) The 1.6 Article Bullet Impact
Test.

(2) A substance intended for use asthe explosive load in an article of Division 1.6 must be an extremely insensitive detonating substance (EIDS). In
order to determine if a substance is an EIDS, it must be subjected to the tests in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (c)(2)(x) of this section, which are described inthe Explosive Test Manual. The substance must be tested in the form (i.e., composition, granulation, density, etc.)
in which it is to be used in the article.
A substance is not an EIDS if it fails any of the following tests:

(i) The Drop Weight Impact Sensitivity Test;

(ii) The Friction Sensitivity Test; (iii) The Thermal Sensitivity Test at
75 ° C (167 ° F);

(iv) The Small Scale Burning Test; (v) The EIDS Cap Test; (vi) The EIDS Gap Test; (vii) The Susan Test; (viii) The EIDS Bullet Impact Test; (ix) The EIDS External Fire Test;
and

(x) The EIDS Slow Cook-off Test. (d) The Associate Administrator maywaive or modify certain test(s) identified in §§173.57 and 173.58 of this subchapter, or require additional testing,if appropriate. In addition, the Associate Administrator may limit the quantity of explosive in a device.

(e) Each explosive is assigned a compatibility group letter by the Associate Administrator based on the criteriaprescribed in §173.52(b) of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75743, Dec. 31, 2003]

§ 173.59 Description of terms for explosives.
For the purpose of this subchapter, a description of the following terms is provided for information only. Theymust not be used for purposes of classification or to replace proper shipping names prescribed in §172.101 of this subchapter.

Ammonium-nitrate—fuel oil mixture (ANFO). A blasting explosive containing no essential ingredients other than prilled ammonium nitrate and
fuel oil.

Ammunition. Generic term relatedmainly to articles of military application consisting of all types of bombs, grenades, rockets, mines, projectiles
and other similar devices or contrivances.

Ammunition, illuminating, with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge. Ammunition designed to produce a single source of intense lightfor lighting up an area. The term includes illuminating cartridges, grenades and projectiles, and illuminating and target identification bombs. The term excludes the following articles which are listed separately: cartridges,signal; signal devices; hand signals; distress flares, aerial and flares, surface.

Ammunition, incendiary. Ammunition containing an incendiary substancewhich may be a solid, liquid or gel including white phosphorus. Except when the composition is an explosive per se,it also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge, or a fuze with burster or expelling charge. The term
includes: Ammunition, incendiary, liquid or gel, with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; Ammunition, incendiary with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; andAmmunition, incendiary, white phosphorus, with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge.


### 470 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.59

Ammunition, practice. Ammunitionwithout a main bursting charge, containing a burster or expelling charge. Normally it also contains a fuze and propelling charge. The term excludes the following article which is listed separately: Grenades, practice.

Ammunition, proof. Ammunition containing pyrotechnic substance, used to test the performance or strength of new ammunition, weapon component or assemblies.

Ammunition, smoke. Ammunition containing a smoke-producing substance such as chlorosulphonic acid mixture (CSAM), titanium tetrachloride (FM), white phosphorus, or smoke-producing substance whose composition is basedon hexachlorothannol (HC) or red phosphorus. Except when the substance is an explosive per se, the ammunition
also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge, or a fuze with burster or expelling charge. The term
includes: Ammunition, smoke, with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; Ammunition, smoke, white phosphorus with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge.

Ammunition, tear-producing with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge. Ammunition containing tear-producing substance. It may also contain one or more of the following: a pyrotechnic substance, a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge, or a fuze with burster or expelling charge.

Ammunition, toxic. Ammunition containing toxic agent. It may also contain one or more of the following: a pyrotechnic substance, a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge, or a fuze with burster or expelling charge.

Articles, explosive, extremely insensitive (Articles, EEI). Articles that contain only extremely insensitive detonating
substances and which demonstrate anegligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation under normal conditions of transport and which have passed Test Series 7.

Articles, pyrophoric. Articles whichcontain a pyrophoric substance (capable of spontaneous ignition when exposed to air) and an explosive substance or component. The term excludes articles containing white phosphorus.

Articles, pyrotechnic for technical purposes. Articles which contain pyrotechnic substances and are used fortechnical purposes, such as heat generation, gas generation, theatrical effects, etc. The term excludes the following articles which are listed separately: all ammunition; cartridges, signal; cutters, cable, explosive; fireworks;flares, aerial; flares, surface; release devices, explosives; rivets, explosive; signal devices, hand; signals, distress; signals, railway track, explosive ; and signals,
smoke.

Black powder (gunpowder). Substance consisting of an intimate mixture ofcharcoal or other carbon and either potassium or sodium nitrate, and sulphur. It may be meal, granular, compressed, or pelletized.

Bombs. Explosive articles which aredropped from aircraft. They may contain a flammable liquid with bursting charge, a photo-flash composition or bursting charge. The term excludes torpedoes (aerial) and includes bombs, photo-flash; bombs with bursting charge; bombs with flammable liquids, with bursting charge.

Boosters. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive without means of initiation. They are used toincrease the initiating power of detonators or detonating cord.

Bursters, explosive. Articles consisting of a small charge of explosive to open projectiles or other ammunition in order to disperse their contents.

Cartridges, blank. Articles which consist of a cartridge case with a center or rim fire primer and a confined charge of smokeless or black powder, but no projectile. Used in training, saluting, or in starter pistols, etc.

Cartridges, flash. Articles consisting of a casing, a primer and flash powder, all assembled in one piece for firing.

Cartridges for weapons. (1) Fixed (assembled) or semi-fixed (partially assembled) ammunition designed to befired from weapons. Each cartridge includes all the components necessary to function the weapon once. The nameand description should be used for military small arms cartridges that cannot be described as cartridges, small arms.


### 471 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.59

Separate loading ammunition is included under this name and descriptionwhen the propelling charge and projectile are packed together (see also Cartridges, blank).

(2) Incendiary, smoke, toxic, and tear-producing cartridges are described
under ammunition, incendiary, etc.

Cartridges for weapons, inert projectile. Ammunition consisting of a casing with propelling charge and a solid or empty projectile.

Cartridges, oil well. Articles consisting of a casing of thin fiber, metal or other material containing only propellant explosive. The term excludes charges, shaped, commercial.

Cartridges, power device. Articles designed to accomplish mechanical actions. They consist of a casing with a charge of deflagrating explosive and ameans of ignition. The gaseous products of the deflagration produce inflation, linear or rotary motion; activate diaphragms, valves or switches, orproject fastening devices or extinguishing agents.

Cartridges, signal. Articles designed to fire colored flares or other signals from signal pistols or devices.

Cartridges, small arms. Ammunition consisting of a cartridge case fitted with a center or rim fire primer and containing both a propelling chargeand solid projectile(s). They are designed to be fired in weapons of calibernot larger than 19.1 mm. Shotgun cartridges of any caliber are included in this description. The term excludes: Cartridges, small arms, blank, and some military small arms cartridges
listed under Cartridges for weapons, inert projectile.

Cases, cartridge, empty with primer. Articles consisting of a cartridge case made from metal, plastics or other non-flammable materials, in which only the explosive component is the primer.

Cases, combustible, empty, without primer. Articles consisting of cartridgecases made partly or entirely from nitrocellulose.

Charges, bursting. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosivesuch as hexolite, octolite, or plasticsbonded explosive designed to produce effect by blast or fragmentation. Charges, demolition. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive in a casing of fiberboard, plastics,
metal or other material. The term excludes articles identified as bombs,
mines, etc.

Charges, depth. Articles consisting ofa charge of detonating explosive contained in a drum or projectile. They are designed to detonate under water.

Charges, expelling. A charge of deflagrating explosive designed to eject the payload from the parent article without damage.

Charges, explosive, without detonator.Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive without means of initiation, used for explosive welding, joining, forming, and other processes.

Charges, propelling. Articles consisting of propellant charge in anyphysical form, with or without a casing, for use in cannon or for reducing drag for projectiles or as a component
of rocket motors.

Charges, propelling for cannon. Articles consisting of a propellant charge in any physical form, with or without a casing, for use in a cannon.

Charges, shaped, without detonator.Articles consisting of a casing containing a charge of detonating explosive with a cavity lined with rigid material, without means of initiation.They are designed to produce a powerful, penetrating jet effect.

Charges, shaped, flexible, linear. Articles consisting of a V-shaped core of a detonating explosive clad by a flexible
metal sheath.

Charges, supplementary, explosive. Articles consisting of a small removablebooster used in the cavity of a projectile between the fuze and the bursting charge.

Components, explosive train, n.o.s. Articles containing an explosive designedto transmit a detonation or deflagration within an explosive train.

Contrivance, water-activated with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge. Articles whose functioning depends of physico-chemical reaction of
their contents with water.

Cord, detonating, flexible. Articles consisting of a core of detonating explosive enclosed in spun fabric with plastics or other covering.


### 472 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.59

Cord (fuse) detonating, metal clad. Articles consisting of a core of detonating explosive clad by a soft metal tube with or without protective covering. When the core contains a sufficiently small quantity of explosive, the words
‘‘mild effect’’ are added.

Cord igniter. Articles consisting oftextile yarns covered with black powder or another fast-burning pyrotechnic composition and a flexible protective covering, or consisting of a coreof black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric. It burns progressively along its length with an external flame and is used to transmit ignition from a device to a charge or primer.

Cutters, cable, explosive. Articles consisting of a knife-edged device which is driven by a small charge of deflagrating explosive into an anvil.

Detonator assemblies, non-electric, for blasting. Non-electric detonators assembled with and activated by such means as safety fuse, shock tube, flash tube, or detonating cord. They may be of instantaneous design or incorporatedelay elements. Detonating relays incorporating detonating cord are included. Other detonating relays are included in Detonators, nonelectric.

Detonators. Articles consisting of a small metal or plastic tube containing explosives such as lead azide, PETN, or combinations of explosives. They are designed to start a detonation train. They may be constructed to detonate instantaneously, or may contain a delay element. They may contain no more than 10 g of total explosives weight, excluding ignition and delay charges, per unit. The term includes: detonators for ammunition; detonatorsfor blasting, both electric and non-electric; and detonating relays without flexible detonating cord.

Dynamite. A detonating explosivecontaining a liquid explosive ingredient (generally nitroglycerin, similar organic nitrate esters, or both) that is uniformly mixed with an absorbentmaterial, such as wood pulp, and usually contains materials such as nitrocellulose, sodium and ammonium nitrate.

Entire load and total contents. Thephrase means such a substantial portion of the material explodes that the practical hazard should be assessed by assuming simultaneous explosion of the whole of the explosive content of the load or package.

Explode. The term indicates those explosive effects capable of endangering life and property through blast, heat,and projection of missiles. It encompasses both deflagration and detonation.

Explosion of the total contents. Thephrase is used in testing a single article or package or a small stack of articles or packages.

Explosive, blasting. Detonating explosive substances used in mining, construction, and similar tasks. Blasting explosives are assigned to one of five types. In addition to the ingredientslisted below for each type, blasting explosives may also contain inert components, such as kieselguhr, and other minor ingredients, such as coloring agents and stabilizers.

Explosive, blasting, type A. Substances consisting of liquid organic nitrates, such as nitroglycerin, or a mixture of such ingredients with one or more ofthe following: nitrocellulose, ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates, aromatic nitro-derivatives, orcombustible materials, such as woodmeal and aluminum powder. Such explosives must be in powdery, gelatinous, plastic or elastic form. The term includes dynamite, blasting gelatine and gelatine dynamites.

Explosive, blasting, type B. Substances consisting of a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrateswith an explosive, such as trinitrotoluene, with or without other substances, such as wood-meal or aluminum powder, or a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. Such explosives may not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, or chlorates.

Explosive, blasting, type C. Substancesconsisting of a mixture of either potassium or sodium chlorate or potassium, sodium or ammonium perchlorate withorganic nitro-derivatives or combustible materials, such as wood-meal or aluminum powder, or a hydrocarbon.Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerin or any similar liquid organic nitrate.


### 473 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.59

Explosive, blasting, type D. Substancesconsisting of a mixture of organic nitrate compounds and combustible materials, such as hydrocarbons and aluminum powder. Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerin, any similarliquid organic nitrate, chlorate or ammonium-nitrate. The term generally includes plastic explosives.

Explosive, blasting, type E. Substancesconsisting of water as an essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizer, some
or all of which are in solution. Theother constituents may include nitroderivatives, such as trinitrotoluene, hydrocarbons or aluminum powder.The term includes: explosives, emulsion; explosives, slurry; and explosives, watergel.

Explosive, deflagrating. A substance,e.g., propellant, which reacts by deflagration rather than detonation when ignited and used in its normal manner.

Explosive, detonating. A substance which reacts by detonation rather than deflagration when initiated and used in
its normal manner.

Explosive, extremely insensitive detonating substance (EIDS). A substance which, although capable of sustaining a detonation, has demonstrated through
tests that it is so insensitive that there is very little probability of accidental

initiation.

Explosive, primary. Explosive substance which is manufactured with a view to producing a practical effect byexplosion, is very sensitive to heat, impact, or friction, and even in very small quantities, detonates. The majorprimary explosives are mercury fulminate, lead azide, and lead styphnate.

Explosive, secondary. An explosivesubstance which is relatively insensitive (when compared to primary explosives) and is usually initiated by primary explosives with or without the aid of boosters or supplementary charges. Such an explosive may reactas a deflagrating or as a detonating explosive.

Fireworks. Pyrotechnic articles designed for entertainment.

Flares. Articles containing pyrotechnic substances which are designed to illuminate, identify, signal, or warn. The term includes: flares, aerial and flares, surface. Flash powder. Pyrotechnic substancewhich, when ignited, produces an intense light.

Fracturing devices, explosive, for oil wells, without detonators. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive contained in a casing without the means of initiation. They are used to
fracture the rock around a drill shaft
to assist the flow of crude oil from the
rock.

Fuse/Fuze. Although these two words have a common origin (French fusee, fusil) and are sometimes considered to be different spellings, it is useful to
maintain the convention that fuse refers to a cord-like igniting device,
whereas fuze refers to a device used inammunition which incorporates mechanical, electrical, chemical, or hydrostatic components to initiate a train by deflagration or detonation.

Fuse, igniter. Articles consisting of a metal tube with a core of deflagrating explosives.

Fuse, instantaneous, non-detonating (Quickmatch). Article consisting of cotton yarns impregnated with fine black powder. It burns with an external flame and is used in ignition trains for fireworks, etc.

Fuse, safety. Article consisting of acore of fine-grained black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric with one or more protective outer coverings.When ignited, it burns at a predetermined rate without any explosive effect.

Fuzes. Articles designed to start adetonation or deflagration in ammunition. They incorporate mechanical, electrical, chemical, or hydrostatic components and generally protectivefeatures. The term includes: Fuzes, detonating; fuzes detonating with protective features; and fuzes igniting.

Grenades, hand or rifle. Articles which are designed to be thrown by hand or to be projected by rifle. The term includes: grenades, hand or rifle, with bursting charge; and grenades,practice, hand or rifle. The term excludes: grenades, smoke.

Igniters. Articles containing one or more explosive substance used to start deflagration of an explosive train. Theymay be actuated chemically, electrically, or mechanically. The term excludes: cord, igniter; fuse, igniter; fuse,


### 474 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.59

instantaneous, non-detonating; fuze, igniting; lighters, fuse, instantaneous,non-detonating; fuzes, igniting; lighters, fuse; primers, cap type; and primers, tubular.

Ignition, means of. A general term
used in connection with the method employed to ignite a deflagrating train of explosive or pyrotechnic substances (for example: a primer for propelling charge, an igniter for a rocket motor or an igniting fuze).

Initiation, means of. (1) A device intended to cause the detonation of anexplosive (for example: detonator, detonator for ammunition, or detonating fuze).

(2) The term with its own means of initiation means that the contrivance has its normal initiating device assembled
to it and this device is considered topresent a significant risk during transport but not one great enough to be unacceptable. The term does not apply,however, to a contrivance packed together with its means of initiation, provided the device is packaged so asto eliminate the risk of causing detonation of the contrivance in the event of functioning of the initiating device.The initiating device can even be assembled in the contrivance provided there are protective features ensuring that the device is very unlikely to
cause detonation of the contrivance
under conditions which are associated with transport.

(3) For the purposes of classification,any means of initiation without two effective protective features should be regarded as Compatibility Group B; an
article with its own means of initiation, without two effective protective features, is Compatibility Group F. Ameans of initiation which itself possesses two effective protective featuresis Compatibility Group D, and an article with its own means of initiation which possesses two effective features is Compatibility Group D or E. A means of initiation, adjudged as having two effective protective features, mustbe approved by the Associate Administrator. A common and effective way ofachieving the necessary degree of protection is to use a means of initiationwhich incorporates two or more independent safety features. Jet perforating guns, charged, oil well,
without detonator. Articles consisting of a steel tube or metallic strip, intowhich are inserted shaped charges connected by detonating cord, without
means of initiation.

Lighters, fuse. Articles of various design actuated by friction, percussion, or electricity and used to ignite safety
fuse.

Mass explosion. Explosion which affects almost the entire load virtually instantaneously.

Mines. Articles consisting normally of metal or composition receptacles and bursting charge. They are designed to be operated by the passage of ships,vehicles, or personnel. The term includes Bangalore torpedoes.

Powder cake (powder paste). Substanceconsisting of nitrocellulose impregnated with not more than 60 percent of nitroglycerin or other liquid organic
nitrates or a mixture of these.

Powder, smokeless. Substance based on nitrocellulose used as propellant. The term includes propellants with a single base (nitrocellulose (NC) alone), thosewith a double base (such as NC and nitroglycerin (NG)) and those with a triple base (such as NC/NG/nitroguanidine). Cast pressed or bagcharges of smokeless powder are listed
under charges, propelling and charges, propelling for cannon.

Primers, cap type. Articles consisting of a metal or plastic cap containing a small amount of primary explosivemixture that is readily ignited by impact. They serve as igniting elementsin small arms cartridges and in percussion primers for propelling charges.

Primers, tubular. Articles consistingof a primer for ignition and an auxiliary charge of deflagrating explosive, such as black powder, used to ignite the propelling charge in a cartridge case for cannon, etc.

Projectiles. Articles, such as a shell orbullet, which are projected from a cannon or other artillery gun, rifle, or other small arm. They may be inert, with or without tracer, or may contain a burster, expelling charge or bursting charge. The term includes: projectiles, inert, with tracer; projectiles, withburster or expelling charge; and projectiles, with bursting charge.


### 475 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.60

Propellant, liquid. Substances consisting of a deflagrating liquid explosive, used for propulsion.

Propellant, solid. Substances consisting of a deflagrating solid explosive, used for propulsion.

Propellants. Deflagrating explosives used for propulsion or for reducing the drag of projectiles.

Release devices, explosive. Articlesconsisting of a small charge of explosive with means of initiation. Theysever rods or links to release equipment quickly.

Rocket motors. Articles consisting of a solid, liquid, or hypergolic propellant contained in a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles. They are designed to propel a rocket or guided missile. The term includes: rocket motors; rocket motors with hypergolic liquids with orwithout an expelling charge; and rocket motors, liquid fuelled.

Rockets. Articles containing a rocket motor and a payload which may be an explosive warhead or other device. The term includes: guided missiles; rockets, line-throwing; rockets, liquid fuelled, with bursting charge; rockets, withbursting charge; rockets, with expelling charge; and rockets, with inert
head.

Signals. Articles consisting of pyrotechnic substances designed to produce signals by means of sound, flame, or smoke or any combination thereof. The term includes: signal devices, hand; signals, distress ship; signals, railway track, explosive; signals, smoke.

Sounding devices, explosive. Articlesconsisting of a charge of detonating explosive. They are dropped from shipsand function when they reach a predetermined depth or the sea bed.

Substance, explosive, very insensitive (Substance, EVI) N.O.S. Substances which present a mass explosive hazard
but which are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation,or of transition from burning to detonation under normal conditions of transport and which have passed test
series 5.

Torpedoes. Articles containing an explosive or non-explosive propulsion system and designed to be propelled through water. They may contain an
inert head or warhead. The term includes: torpedoes, liquid fuelled, with inert head; torpedoes, liquid fuelled, with or without bursting charge; and torpedoes, with bursting charge.

Tracers for ammunition. Sealed articles containing pyrotechnic substances, designed to reveal the trajectory of a projectile.

Warheads. Articles containing detonating explosives, designed to be fitted to a rocket, guided missile, or torpedo.They may contain a burster or expelling charge or bursting charge. The
term includes: warhead rocket withbursting charge; and warheads, torpedo, with bursting charge.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67492, Dec. 29, 1994; 64 FR 10777, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]

§ 173.60 General packaging requirements for explosives.
(a) Unless otherwise provided in this subpart and in §173.7(a), packaging used for Class 1 (explosives) materialsmust meet Packing Group II requirements. Each packaging used for an explosive must be capable of meeting the test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter, at the specifiedlevel of performance, and the applicable general packaging requirements of paragraph (b) of this section.

(b) The general requirements for packaging of explosives are as follows:

(1) Nails, staples, and other closuredevices, made of metal, having no protective covering may not penetrate tothe inside of the outer packaging unless the inner packaging adequately protects the explosive against contact
with the metal.

(2) The closure device of containersfor liquid explosives must provide double protection against leakage, such as a screw cap secured in place with tape.

(3) Inner packagings, fittings, and cushioning materials, and the placing of explosive substances or articles inpackages, must be such that the explosive substance is prevented from becoming loose in the outer packagingduring transportation. Metallic components of articles must be preventedfrom making contact with metal packagings. Articles containing explosive
substances not enclosed in an outer casing must be separated from each other in order to prevent friction and


### 476 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.61

impact. Padding, trays, partitioning in the inner or outer packaging, molded plastics or receptacles may be used for this purpose.

(4) When the packaging includeswater that could freeze during transportation, a sufficient amount of antifreeze, such as denatured ethyl alcohol, must be added to the water to prevent freezing. If the anti-freeze creates a fire hazard, it may not be used. When a percentage of water in the substance is specified, the combined weight of water and anti-freeze may be substituted.

(5) If an article is fitted with its own means of ignition or initiation, it mustbe effectively protected from accidental actuation during normal conditions of transportation.

(6) The entry of explosive substances
into the recesses of double-seamed metal packagings must be prevented.

(7) The closure device of a metal drum must include a suitable gasket; if
the closure device includes metal-tometal screw-threads, the ingress of explosive substances into the threading must be prevented.

(8) Whenever loose explosive substances or the explosive substance of an uncased or partly cased article may
come into contact with the inner surface of metal packagings (1A2, 1B2, 4A, 4B and metal receptacles), the metal packaging should be provided with an inner liner or coating.

(9) Packagings must be made of materials compatible with, and impermeable to, the explosives contained inthe package, so that neither interaction between the explosives and the packaging materials, nor leakage, causes the explosive to become unsafein transportation, or the hazard division or compatibility group to change ( see §173.24(e)(2)).

(10) An explosive article containing
an electrical means of initiation that
is sensitive to external electromagnetic radiation, must have itsmeans of initiation effectively protected from electromagnetic radiation sources (for example, radar or radio transmitters) through either design of the packaging or of the article, or
both.

(11) Plastic packagings may not beable to generate or accumulate sufficient static electricity to cause the packaged explosive substances or articles to initiate, ignite or inadvertently function. Metal packagings must becompatible with the explosive substance they contain.

(12) Explosive substances may not be packed in inner or outer packagings
where the differences in internal and external pressures, due to thermal or other effects, could cause an explosion or rupture of the package.

(13) Packagings for water soluble substances must be water resistant. Packagings for desensitized or phlegmatized substances must be closed to preventchanges in concentration during transport. When containing less alcohol, water, or phlegmatizer than specified in its proper shipping description, the
substance is a ‘‘forbidden’’ material.

(14) Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation
or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be carried unpackaged provided that a negative
result was obtained in Test Series 4 of
the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria onan unpackaged article. When such articles have propelling charges or are selfpropelled, their ignition systems shallbe protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of transport. Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained incrates or other suitable handling, storage or launching devices in such a way that they will not become loose during normal conditions of transport and arein accordance with DOD-approved procedures.

[Amdt. 173–260, 62 FR 24719, May 6, 1997, as amended at 65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000]

§ 173.61 Mixed packaging requirements. (a) An explosive may not be packed in the same outside packaging with any other material that could, under normal conditions of transportation, adversely affect the explosive or its packaging unless packaged by DOD or DOE in accordance with §173.7(a).

(b) Hardware necessary for assembly of explosive articles at the point-of-use may be packed in the same outside packaging with the explosive articles. The hardware must be securely packed


### 477 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62

in a separate inside packaging. Sufficient cushioning materials must beused to ensure that all inside packagings are securely packed in the outside packaging.

(c) The following explosives may not be packed together with other Class 1 explosives: UN 0029, UN 0030, UN 0073, UN 0106, UN 0107, UN 0255, UN 0257, UN 0267, UN 0350, UN 0360, UN 0361, UN 0364, UN 0365, UN 0366, UN 0367, UN 0408, UN 0409, UN 0410, UN 0455, UN 0456, and UN0500. These explosives may be mixpacked with each other in accordance with the compatibility requirementsprescribed in paragraph (e) of this section.

(d) Division 1.1 and 1.2 explosives may not be packed with the following explosives: UN 0333, UN 0334, UN 0335, UN 0336, and UN 0337.

(e) Except as prescribed in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, different explosives may be packed in one outside packaging in accordance withthe following compatibility requirements:

(1) Explosives of the same compatibility group and same division number may be packed together.

(2) Explosives of the same compatibility group or authorized combination of compatibility group but different division number may be packed together, provided that the whole package is treated as though its entire contents were comprised of the lower division number. For example, a mixed package of Division 1.2 explosives and Division 1.4 explosives, compatibilitygroup D, must be treated as 1.2D explosives. However, when 1.5D explosivesare packed together with 1.2D explosives, the whole package must be treated as 1.1D explosives.

(3) Explosives of compatibility groupS may be packaged together with explosives of any other compatibility group except A or L, and the combined package may be treated as belonging to any of the packaged compatibility groups except S.

(4) Explosives of compatibility groupL shall only be packed with an identical explosive.

(5) Explosives articles of compatibility groups C, D, or E may be packed together and the entire package shall be treated as belonging to compatibility group E.

(6) Explosives articles of compatibility groups C, D, E, or N may be packed together and the entire packageshall be treated as belonging to compatibility group D.

(7) Explosives substances of compatibility groups C and D may be packaged together and the entire packageshall be treated as belonging to compatibility group D.

(8) Explosive articles of compatibility group G, except for fireworksand articles requiring special packaging, may be packaged together with explosive articles of compatibility groups C, D or E and the combined package shall be treated as belonging to compatibility group E.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; 65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 33429, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 69 FR 54046, Sept. 7, 2004; 73 FR 4717, Jan. 28 2008]

§ 173.62 Specific packaging requirements for explosives.
(a) Except as provided in §173.7 of this subchapter, when the §172.101 Table specifies that an explosive must be packaged in accordance with thissection, only packagings which conform to the provisions of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section or §173.7(e) ofthis subchapter and the applicable requirements in §§173.60 and 173.61 may be used unless otherwise approved by
the Associate Administrator.

(b) Explosives Table. The ExplosivesTable specifies the Packing Instructions assigned to each explosive. Explosives are identified in the first columnin numerical sequence by their identification number (ID #), which is listed in column 4 of the §172.101 table, of this subchapter. The second column of the Explosives Table specifies the Packing Instruction (PI) which must be used forpackaging the explosive. The Explosives Packing Method Table in paragraph (c) of this section defines themethods of packaging. The Packing Instructions are identified using a 3 digit designation. The Packing Instructionprefixed by the letters ‘‘US’’ is particular to the United States and notfound in applicable international regulations.


### 478 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.62

E XPLOSIVES T ABLE

ID# PI

UN0004 .................................. 112
UN0005 .................................. 130
UN0006 .................................. 130
UN0007 .................................. 130
UN0009 .................................. 130
UN0010 .................................. 130
UN0012 .................................. 130
UN0014 .................................. 130
UN0015 .................................. 130
UN0016 .................................. 130
UN0018 .................................. 130
UN0019 .................................. 130
UN0020 .................................. 101
UN0021 .................................. 101
UN0027 .................................. 113
UN0028 .................................. 113
UN0029 .................................. 131
UN0030 .................................. 131
UN0033 .................................. 130
UN0034 .................................. 130
UN0035 .................................. 130
UN0037 .................................. 130
UN0038 .................................. 130
UN0039 .................................. 130
UN0042 .................................. 132
UN0043 .................................. 133
UN0044 .................................. 133
UN0048 .................................. 130
UN0049 .................................. 135
UN0050 .................................. 135
UN0054 .................................. 135
UN0055 .................................. 136
UN0056 .................................. 130
UN0059 .................................. 137
UN0060 .................................. 132
UN0065 .................................. 139
UN0066 .................................. 140
UN0070 .................................. 134 UN0072 .................................. 112(a)
UN0073 .................................. 133 UN0074 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b)
UN0075 .................................. 115
UN0076 .................................. 112 UN0077 .................................. 114(a) or 114(b)
UN0078 .................................. 112 UN0079 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0081 .................................. 116
UN0082 .................................. 116 or 117
UN0083 .................................. 116
UN0084 .................................. 116
UN0092 .................................. 135
UN0093 .................................. 135
UN0094 .................................. 113
UN0099 .................................. 134
UN0101 .................................. 140
UN0102 .................................. 139
UN0103 .................................. 140
UN0104 .................................. 139
UN0105 .................................. 140
UN0106 .................................. 141
UN0107 .................................. 141
UN0110 .................................. 141 UN0113 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b) UN0114 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b)
UN0118 .................................. 112
UN0121 .................................. 142
UN0124 .................................. US1 UN0129 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b) UN0130 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b)
UN0131 .................................. 142 UN0132 .................................. 114(b) UN0133 .................................. 112(a) E XPLOSIVES T ABLE —Continued

ID# PI

UN0135 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b)
UN0136 .................................. 130
UN0137 .................................. 130
UN0138 .................................. 130
UN0143 .................................. 115
UN0144 .................................. 115
UN0146 .................................. 112 UN0147 .................................. 112(b) UN0150 .................................. 112(a) or 112(b)
UN0151 .................................. 112 UN0153 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0154 .................................. 112 UN0155 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0159 .................................. 111 UN0160 .................................. 114(b) UN0161 .................................. 114(b)
UN0167 .................................. 130
UN0168 .................................. 130
UN0169 .................................. 130
UN0171 .................................. 130
UN0173 .................................. 134
UN0174 .................................. 134
UN0180 .................................. 130
UN0181 .................................. 130
UN0182 .................................. 130
UN0183 .................................. 130
UN0186 .................................. 130
UN0190 .................................. 101
UN0191 .................................. 135
UN0192 .................................. 135
UN0193 .................................. 135
UN0194 .................................. 135
UN0195 .................................. 135
UN0196 .................................. 135
UN0197 .................................. 135
UN0204 .................................. 134 UN0207 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0208 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0209 .................................. 112
UN0212 .................................. 133 UN0213 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0214 .................................. 112
UN0215 .................................. 112 UN0216 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0217 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0218 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0219 .................................. 112
UN0220 .................................. 112
UN0221 .................................. 130 UN0222 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0224 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b)
UN0225 .................................. 133 UN0226 .................................. 112(a) UN0234 .................................. 114(a) or 114(b) UN0235 .................................. 114(a) or 114(b) UN0236 .................................. 114(a) or 114(b)
UN0237 .................................. 138
UN0238 .................................. 130
UN0240 .................................. 130
UN0241 .................................. 116 or 117
UN0242 .................................. 130
UN0243 .................................. 130
UN0244 .................................. 130
UN0245 .................................. 130
UN0246 .................................. 130
UN0247 .................................. 101
UN0248 .................................. 144
UN0249 .................................. 144
UN0250 .................................. 101
UN0254 .................................. 130
UN0255 .................................. 131
UN0257 .................................. 141


### 479 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62

E XPLOSIVES T ABLE —Continued

ID# PI

UN0266 .................................. 112
UN0267 .................................. 131
UN0268 .................................. 133
UN0271 .................................. 143
UN0272 .................................. 143
UN0275 .................................. 134
UN0276 .................................. 134
UN0277 .................................. 134
UN0278 .................................. 134
UN0279 .................................. 130
UN0280 .................................. 130
UN0281 .................................. 130
UN0282 .................................. 112
UN0283 .................................. 132
UN0284 .................................. 141
UN0285 .................................. 141
UN0286 .................................. 130
UN0287 .................................. 130
UN0288 .................................. 138
UN0289 .................................. 139
UN0290 .................................. 139
UN0291 .................................. 130
UN0292 .................................. 141
UN0293 .................................. 141
UN0294 .................................. 130
UN0295 .................................. 130
UN0296 .................................. 134
UN0297 .................................. 130
UN0299 .................................. 130
UN0300 .................................. 130
UN0301 .................................. 130
UN0303 .................................. 130
UN0305 .................................. 113
UN0306 .................................. 133
UN0312 .................................. 135
UN0313 .................................. 135
UN0314 .................................. 142
UN0315 .................................. 142
UN0316 .................................. 141
UN0317 .................................. 141
UN0318 .................................. 141
UN0319 .................................. 133
UN0320 .................................. 133
UN0321 .................................. 130
UN0322 .................................. 101
UN0323 .................................. 134
UN0324 .................................. 130
UN0325 .................................. 142
UN0326 .................................. 130
UN0327 .................................. 130
UN0328 .................................. 130
UN0329 .................................. 130
UN0330 .................................. 130
UN0331 .................................. 116 or 117
UN0332 .................................. 116 or 117
UN0333 .................................. 135
UN0334 .................................. 135
UN0335 .................................. 135
UN0336 .................................. 135
UN0337 .................................. 135
UN0338 .................................. 130
UN0339 .................................. 130 UN0340 .................................. 112(a) or 112(b) UN0341 .................................. 112(b) UN0342 .................................. 114(a)
UN0343 .................................. 111
UN0344 .................................. 130
UN0345 .................................. 130
UN0346 .................................. 130
UN0347 .................................. 130
UN0348 .................................. 130
UN0349 .................................. 101 E XPLOSIVES T ABLE —Continued

ID# PI

UN0350 .................................. 101
UN0351 .................................. 101
UN0352 .................................. 101
UN0353 .................................. 101
UN0354 .................................. 101
UN0355 .................................. 101
UN0356 .................................. 101
UN0357 .................................. 101
UN0358 .................................. 101
UN0359 .................................. 101
UN0360 .................................. 131
UN0361 .................................. 131
UN0362 .................................. 130
UN0363 .................................. 130
UN0364 .................................. 133
UN0365 .................................. 133
UN0366 .................................. 133
UN0367 .................................. 141
UN0368 .................................. 141
UN0369 .................................. 130
UN0370 .................................. 130
UN0371 .................................. 130
UN0372 .................................. 141
UN0373 .................................. 135
UN0374 .................................. 134
UN0375 .................................. 134
UN0376 .................................. 133
UN0377 .................................. 133
UN0378 .................................. 133
UN0379 .................................. 136
UN0380 .................................. 101
UN0381 .................................. 134
UN0382 .................................. 101
UN0383 .................................. 101
UN0384 .................................. 101 UN0385 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0386 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0387 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0388 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0389 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0390 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0391 .................................. 112(a) UN0392 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0393 .................................. 112(b) UN0394 .................................. 112(a)
UN0395 .................................. 101
UN0396 .................................. 101
UN0397 .................................. 101
UN0398 .................................. 101
UN0399 .................................. 101
UN0400 .................................. 101
UN0401 .................................. 112 UN0402 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0403 .................................. 135
UN0404 .................................. 135
UN0405 .................................. 135 UN0406 .................................. 114(b) UN0407 .................................. 114(b)
UN0408 .................................. 141
UN0409 .................................. 141
UN0410 .................................. 141 UN0411 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0412 .................................. 130
UN0413 .................................. 130
UN0414 .................................. 130
UN0415 .................................. 143
UN0417 .................................. 130
UN0418 .................................. 135
UN0419 .................................. 135
UN0420 .................................. 135
UN0421 .................................. 135
UN0424 .................................. 130


### 480 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.62

E XPLOSIVES T ABLE —Continued

ID# PI

UN0425 .................................. 130
UN0426 .................................. 130
UN0427 .................................. 130
UN0428 .................................. 135
UN0429 .................................. 135
UN0430 .................................. 135
UN0431 .................................. 135
UN0432 .................................. 135
UN0433 .................................. 111
UN0434 .................................. 130
UN0435 .................................. 130
UN0436 .................................. 130
UN0437 .................................. 130
UN0438 .................................. 130
UN0439 .................................. 137
UN0440 .................................. 137
UN0441 .................................. 137
UN0442 .................................. 137
UN0443 .................................. 137
UN0444 .................................. 137
UN0445 .................................. 137
UN0446 .................................. 136
UN0447 .................................. 136 UN0448 .................................. 114(b)
UN0449 .................................. 101
UN0450 .................................. 101
UN0451 .................................. 130
UN0452 .................................. 141
UN0453 .................................. 130
UN0454 .................................. 142
UN0455 .................................. 131
UN0456 .................................. 131
UN0457 .................................. 130
UN0458 .................................. 130
UN0459 .................................. 130
UN0460 .................................. 130
UN0461 .................................. 101
UN0462 .................................. 101
UN0463 .................................. 101
UN0464 .................................. 101
UN0465 .................................. 101
UN0466 .................................. 101
UN0467 .................................. 101
UN0468 .................................. 101
UN0469 .................................. 101
UN0470 .................................. 101
UN0471 .................................. 101
UN0472 .................................. 101
UN0473 .................................. 101
UN0474 .................................. 101
UN0475 .................................. 101
UN0476 .................................. 101
UN0477 .................................. 101
UN0478 .................................. 101
UN0479 .................................. 101
UN0480 .................................. 101
UN0481 .................................. 101
UN0482 .................................. 101 UN0483 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0484 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0486 .................................. 101
UN0487 .................................. 135
UN0488 .................................. 130 UN0489 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) UN0490 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0491 .................................. 143
UN0492 .................................. 135
UN0493 .................................. 135
UN0494 .................................. US1
UN0495 .................................. 115 E XPLOSIVES T ABLE —Continued

ID# PI

UN0496 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c)

UN0497 .................................. 115 UN0498 .................................. 114(b) UN0499 .................................. 114(b)

UN0500 .................................. 131
UN0502 .................................. 130
UN0503 .................................. 135 UN0504 .................................. 112(c)

UN0505 .................................. 135
UN0506 .................................. 135
UN0507 .................................. 135 UN0508 .................................. 114(b) UN0509 .................................. 114(b)
NA0124 .................................. US1

NA0276 .................................. 134
NA0323 .................................. 134
NA0331 .................................. 116 or 117
NA0337 .................................. 135
NA0349 .................................. 133
NA0494 .................................. US1

(c) Explosives must be packaged in accordance with the following table:

(1) The first column lists, in alphanumeric sequence, the packing methods prescribed for explosives in the Explosives Table of paragraph (b) of this

section.

(2) The second column specifies the inner packagings that are required. If inner packagings are not required, a notation of ‘‘Not necessary’’ appears in the column. The term ‘‘Not necessary’’ means that a suitable inner packaging may be used but is not required.

(3) The third column specifies the intermediate packagings that are required. If intermediate packagings arenot required, a notation of ‘‘Not necessary’’ appears in the column. The term ‘‘Not necessary’’ means that a suitable intermediate packaging may be used but is not required.

(4) The fourth column specifies the outer packagings which are required. If inner packagings and/or intermediate packagings are specified in the second and third columns, then the packaging specified in the fourth column must beused as the outer packaging of a combination packaging; otherwise it may be used as a single packaging.

(5) Packing Instruction 101 may beused for any explosive substance or article if an equivalent level of safety is shown to be maintained subject to theapproval of the Associate Administrator.


### 481 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62

T ABLE OF P ACKING M ETHODS

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings

101 ................................................................................. This Packing Instruction may be used as an alternative to a specificallyassigned packing method with the approval of the Associate Administrator prior to transportation. When this packing instruction is used, the following must be marked on the shipping documents: ‘‘Packaging approved by the competent authority of the United States of

America (USA)’’.

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. Samples of new or existing explosive substancesor articles may be transported as directed by the Associate Administrator for purposes including: testing,classification, research and development, quality control, or as a commercial sample. Explosive samples
which are wetted or desensitized must be limited to 25kg. Explosive samples which are not wetted or desensitized must be limited to 10 kg in small packages asspecified by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety 110(a) ............................................................................ Bags .......................... Bags ........... ............... Drums.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. The Intermediate packagings must be filled with
water saturated material such as an anti-freeze solution or wetted cushioning

2. Outer packagings must be filled with water saturated material such as an anti-freeze solution orwetted cushioning. Outer packagings must be constructed and sealed to prevent evaporation of the wetting solution, except when 0224 is being carried dry plastics ...................textile, plastic coated or lined.
rubber ..................... textile, rubberized ..
textile ...................... plastics ...................textile, plastic coated or lined.
rubber ..................... textile, rubberized .. Receptacles ...............

plastics ...................
metal ...................... steel, removable head (1A2). plastics, removable

head (1H2)

110(b) ............................................................................ Bags .......................... Dividing partit ions ...... Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS

For UN 0074, 0113, 0114, 0129, 0130, 0135 and

0224, the following conditions must be satisfied:

a. inner packagings must not contain more

than 50 g of explosive substance (quantity corresponding to dry substance); b. each inner packaging must be separated

from other inner packagings by dividing partitions; andc. the outer packaging must not be partitioned with more than 25 compartments rubber, conductive plastics, conductive Receptacles ...............

metal ......................
wood ...................... rubber, conductive plastics, conductive metal ......................
wood ...................... plastics ...................
fibreboard ............... natural wood, siftproof wall (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F).

111 .................................................................................PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:.

For UN 0159, inner packagings are not required

when metal (1A2 or 1B2) or plastics (1H2) drums are used as outer packagings. Bags .......................... paper, waterproofed plastics ................... textile, rubberized ..
Sheets .......................

plastics ................... textile, rubberized .. Not necessary ........... Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B).natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift

proof (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, expanded

(4H1). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminum, removable head (1B2). plywood (1D). fibreboard (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2).112(a) This packing instruction applies to wetted solids. Bags .......................... Bags .......................... Boxes.


### 482 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.62

T ABLE OF P ACKING M ETHODS —Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0219

and 0394, packagings must be lead free 2. Intermediate packagings are not required if

leakproof drums are used as the outer packaging3. For UN 0072 and UN 0226, intermediate packagings are not required paper, multiwall,
water resistant. plastics ...................
textile ...................... textile, rubberized .. woven plastics ....... Receptacles ...............

metal ...................... plastics ................... plastics ...................textile, plastic coated or lined. Receptacles ...............

metal ...................... plastics ................... steel (4A). aluminium (4B).natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift

proof (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, expanded

(4H1). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). Plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2). 112(b) This packing instruction applies to dry solids

other than powders.PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:.

1. For UN 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219

and 0386, packagings must be lead free.2. For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a maximum net mass of 30 kg..3. For UN 0222, inner packagings are not required. Bags .......................... paper, Kraft ............ paper, multiwall,

water resistant. plastics ...................
textile ...................... textile, rubberized

plastics. woven plastics ....... Bags (for UN 0150 only). plastics ...................textile, plastic coated or lined. Bags.woven plastics siftproof (5H2/3). plastics, film (5H4). textile, sift-proof

(5L2).textile, water resistant (5L3). paper, multiwall,

water resistant (5M2).
Boxes

steel (4A). aluminium (4B).natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift

proof (4C2). plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, expanded

(4H1). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). Plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2). 112(c) This packing instruction applies to solid dry

powders. Bags .......................... Bags .......................... Boxes.


### 483 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62

T ABLE OF P ACKING M ETHODS —Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219

and 0386, packagings must be lead free2. For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state. Bags must not exceed a maximum net mass of 30 kg. 3. Inner packagings are not required if drums are

used as the outer packaging.4. At least one of the packagings must be siftproof paper, multiwall,
water resistant. plastics ................... woven plastics ....... Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............
metal ...................... plastics ...................
wood ...................... paper, multiwall,
water resistant with inner lining. plastics ................... Receptacles ...............

metal ...................... plastics ................... steel (4A). natural wood, aluminum (4B). ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift proof (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums.

plastics, removable

head (1H2). steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). Plywood (1D). fibre (1G). 113 ................................................................................. Bags .......................... Not necessary ........... Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0094 and UN 0305, no more than 50 g

of substance must be packed in an inner packaging2. For UN 0027, inner packagings are not necessary when drums are used as the outer packaging3. At least one of the packagings must be siftproof 4. Sheets must only be used for UN 0028 paper ...................... plastics ................... textile, rubberized .. Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............
metal ...................... plastics ...................
wood ......................
Sheets .......................

paper, kraft ............. paper, waxed ......... .................................... steel (4A). aluminum (4B).natural wood, ordinary (4C1).natural wood, siftproof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums

plastics, removable

head (1H2). steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). Plywood (1D). fibre (1G).114(a) This packing instruction applies to wetted solids.PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:.

1. For UN 0077, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings must be lead free.2. For UN 0342, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A2 or 1B2) or plastics (1H2) drums are used as outer packagings. 3. Intermediate packagings are not required if

leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging. Bags .......................... plastics ...................
textile ...................... woven plastics ....... Receptacles ...............

metal ...................... plastics ................... Bags .......................... plastics ...................textile, plastic coated or lined. Receptacles ...............

metal ...................... plastics ................... Boxes. steel (4A).natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums.

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics,
removable head

(1H2). 114(b) This packing instruction applies to dry solids.


### 484 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.62

T ABLE OF P ACKING M ETHODS —Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:1. For UN 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings must be lead free 2. For UN 0160 and UN 0161, when metal drums

(1A2 or 1B2) are used as the outer packaging, metal packagings must be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increased internalpressure from internal or external causes, is prevented3. For UN 0160, UN 0161, and UN 0508, inner packagings are not necessary if drums are used as the outer packaging 4. For UN 0508 and UN 0509, metal packagings must

not be used Bags .......................... paper, kraft plastics textile, sift-proofwoven plastics, siftproof.

Receptacles ...................
fiberboard
metal

paper plasticswoven plastics, siftproof. Not necessary ...........

.................................... Boxes. natural wood, ordinary

(4C1).natural wood, siftproof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fiberboard (4G).

Drums. steel, removable head

(1A2). aluminum, removable

head (1B2). plywood (1D). fiber (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2). 115 ................................................................................. Receptacles Bags .......................... B oxes.PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For liquid explosives, inner packagings must be

surrounded with non-combustible absorbentcushioning material in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire liquid content. Metal receptacles
should be cushioned from each other. The net mass of explosive per package may not exceed30 kg when boxes are used as outer packaging. The net volume of explosive in each package other than boxes must not exceed 120
litres 2. For UN 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497 when

boxes are used as the outer packaging, innerpackagings must have taped screw cap closures and be not more than 5 litres capacity each. A composite packaging consisting of a plastic receptacle in a metal drum (6HA1) maybe used in lieu of combination packagings. Liquid substances must not freeze at temperatures
above

¥ 15 ° C (+5 ° F) 3. For UN 0144, intermediate packagings are not

necessary. metal plastics plastics in metal receptacles.
Drums ........................

metal ...................... natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G).
Drums.

plastics, removable

head (1H2). steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). plywood (1D). fibre (1G). Specification MC–200

containers may be used for transport by motor vehicle.

116 ................................................................................. Bags Not necessary ........... Bags.


### 485 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62

T ABLE OF P ACKING M ETHODS —Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner

packagings are not necessary if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging 2. For UN 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner

packagings are not required when the explosive is contained in a material impervious to liquid3. For UN 0081, inner packagings are not required when contained in rigid plastic which is impervious to nitric esters4. For UN 0331, inner packagings are not required when bags (5H2), (5H3) or (5H4) are used as outer packagings 5. Bags (5H2 or 5H3) must be used only for UN

0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332 6. For UN 0081, bags must not be used as outer

packagings paper, water and oil ..
resistant ................. plastics ...................texitile, plasic coated or.
lined .......................woven plasics, siftproof. Receptacles ...............

fibreboard, water

resistant.
metal ...................... plastics ................... wood, sift-proof ......
Sheets .......................

paper, water resistant. paper, waxed ......... plastics ................... .................................... woven plastics (5H1/2/3). paper, mulitwall,

water resistant (5M2). plastics, film (5H4). textile, sift-proof

(5L2).textile, water resistant (5L3).
Boxes.

steel (4A). aluminium (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums.

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). Plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2).
Jerricans.

steel, removable

head (3A2). plastics, removable

head (3H2). 117 ................................................................................. Not necessary ........... Not necessary ...... ..... IBCs.

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. This packing instruction may only be used for

explosives of 0082 when they are mixtures of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates
with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organicnitrates, liquid or solid nitrocarbons, or chlorates. 2. This packing instruction may only be used for

explosives of UN 0241 which consist of water as an essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizers, some
or all of which are in solution. The other constituents may include hydrocarbons or aluminium powder, but must not include nitro-derivatives such as trinitrotoluene.
3. Metal IBCs must not be used for UN 0082 and

0241. 4. Flexible IBCs may only be used for solids. .................................... .................................... metal (11A), (11B), (11N), (21A), (21B), (21N), (31A), (31B), (31N). flexible (13H2),

(13H3), (13H4), (13L2), (13L3), (13L4), (13M2). rigid plastics

(11H1), (11H2), (21H1), (21H2), (31H1), (31H2). composite (11HZ1),

(11HZ2), (21HZ1), (21HZ2), (31HZ1), (31HZ2).

130 ................................................................................. Not necessary ........... Not necessary ......

..... Particular Packaging Requirements:


### 486 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.62

T ABLE OF P ACKING M ETHODS —Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings

The following applies to UN 0006, 0009,

0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138, 0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0238, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434, 0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0459and 0488. Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use,
without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least twoeffective protective features, may be carried unpackaged. When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems must be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of transport. A negative result inTest Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for transport unpackaged. Suchunpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling devices. .................................... .................................... Boxes. Steel (4A).Wood natural, ordinary (4C1). Plywood (4D).
Reconstituted wood

(4F). Fiberboard (4G). Plastics, expanded

(4H1). Plastics, solid (4H2).
Drums. Steel, removable

head (1A2). Aluminum, removable

head (1B2). Plywood (1D). Fiber (1G). Plastics, removable

head (1H2). Large Packagings. Steel (50A). Aluminum (50B).
Metal other than steel

or aluminum (50N). Rigid plastics (50H). Natural wood (50C). Plywood (50D).
Reconstituted wood

(50F). Rigid fiberboard

(50G). 131 ................................................................................. Bags .......................... Not necessary ........... Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0029, 0267 and 0455, bags and reels

may not be used as inner packagings2. For UN 0030, 0255 and 0456, inner packagings are not required when detonators are packed in pasteboard tubes, or when their leg wires are wound on spools with the caps either placed inside the spool or securely taped to the wire on the spool, so as to restrict free moving of the caps and to protect them from impact
forces 3. For UN 0360, 0361 and 0500, detonators are

not required to be attached to the safety fuse, metal-clad mild detonating cord, detonating cord, or shock tube. Inner packagings are not required if the packing configuration restricts free moving of the caps and protects them from impact forces . paper. plastics ................... Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............
metal ...................... plastics ...................
wood ......................
Reels ......................... .................................... steel (4A). aluminium (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G).
Drums.

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). Plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2). 132(a) For articles consisting of closed metal, plastic

or fiberboard casings that contian detonating explosives, or consisting of plastics-bonded detonating explosives. Not necessary ........... Not necessary ........... Boxes. steel (4A). aluminum (4B).wood, natural; ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fiberboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).


### 487 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62

T ABLE OF P ACKING M ETHODS —Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings

132(b) For articles without closed casings ................... Receptacles fiberboard metal plastics. Sheets paper plastics. Not necessary ........... Boxes.steel (4A); aluminum (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fiberboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2). 133 ................................................................................. Receptacles ............... Receptacles ...... ......... Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0043, 0212, 0225, 0268 and 0306

trays are not authorized as inner packagings Intermediate packagings are only required when trays
are used as inner packagings.
fibreboard ..................

metal ...................... plastics ...................
wood ......................Trays, fitted with dividing. partitions ....................
fibreboard .................. plastics .......................
wood .......................... fibreboard ...............
metal ...................... plastics ...................
wood ...................... steel (4A). aluminium (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).

134 ................................................................................. Bags ..........................
water resistant Receptacles
fibreboard
metal plastics
wood
Sheetsfibreboard, corrugated
Tubes
fibreboard Not necessary ........... Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).

wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2).

plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood (4F).

fibreboard (4G).plastics, expanded (4H1).

plastics, solid (4H2).
Drums. fibreboard (1G).plastics, removable head (1H2).

steel, removable head (1A2).

aluminium, removable head (1B2).

plywood (1D).


### 488 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.62

T ABLE OF P ACKING M ETHODS —Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings

135 ................................................................................. Bags ..........................

paper ...................... plastics ................... Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............
metal ...................... plastics ...................
wood ......................
Sheets .......................

paper ...................... plastics ................... Not necessary ........... Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, expanded

(4H1). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums.

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). Plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2). 136 ................................................................................. Bags .......................... plastics ...................
textile ......................
Boxes. ........................

fibreboard ............... plastics ...................
wood ...................... Dividing partitions in

the. outer packagings ....... Not necessary ........... Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B)wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums.

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). Plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2).

137 PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR

EXCEPTIONS: For UN 0059, 0439, 0440 and 0441, when the shaped charges are packed singly, theconical cavity must face downwards and the package marked ‘‘THIS SIDE UP’’. When the shaped charges are packed in pairs, the conical cavities must face inwards to minimize the jetting effect in
the event of accidental initiation. Bags .......................... plastics ...................
Boxes .........................

fibreboard ...............
Tubes .........................

fibreboard ...............
metal ...................... plastics ................... Dividing partitions in

the outer packagings. Not necessary ........... Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). 138 ................................................................................. Bags .......................... Not necessary ........... Boxes.


### 489 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62

T ABLE OF P ACKING M ETHODS —Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

If the ends of the articles are sealed, inner packagings are not necessary plastics ................... .................................... steel (4A). aluminium (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums.

fiberboard (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2). steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). 139 ................................................................................. Bags .......................... Not necessary ........... Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0065, 0102, 0104, 0289 and 0290, the

ends of the detonating cord must be sealed, forexample, by a plug firmly fixed so that the explosive cannot escape. The ends of CORD
DETONATING flexible must be fastened securely 2. For UN 0065 and UN 0289, inner packagings

are not required when they are fastened securely in coils plastics ................... Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............
metal ...................... plastics ...................
wood ......................
Reels .........................

............................... Sheets .......................

paper ...................... plastics ................... .................................... steel (4A). aluminium (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums.

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2). 140 ................................................................................. Bags .......................... Not necessary ........... Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. If the ends of UN 0105 are sealed, no inner

packagings are required 2. For UN 0101, the packaging must be sift-proof

except when the fuse is covered by a paper
tube and both ends of the tube are covered with removable caps 3. For UN 0101, steel or aluminium boxes or

drums must not be used plastics ...................
Reels .........................
Sheets .......................

paper, kraft ............. plastics ................... .................................... steel (4A). aluminium (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums.

plastics, removable

head (1H2). steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). Plywood (1D). fibre (1G).


### 490 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.62

T ABLE OF P ACKING M ETHODS —Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings

141 ................................................................................. Receptacles ...............
fibreboard ...............
metal ...................... plastics ...................
wood ......................

...............................Trays, fitted with dividing partitions. plastics ...................
wood ...................... Dividing partitions in

the outer packagings. Not necessary ........... Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums.

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). Plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2). 142 ................................................................................. Bags ..........................

paper ...................... plastics ................... Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............
metal ...................... plastics ...................
wood ......................
Sheets .......................

paper ......................Trays, fitted with dividing partitions. plastics ................... Not necessary ........... Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums.

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). Plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2). 143 ................................................................................. Bag ............................ Not necessar y ........... Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0271, 0272, 0415 and 0491 when

metal packagings are used, metal packagingsmust be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increase in internal pressure from internal or external causes is prevented2. Composite packagings (6HH2) (plastic receptacle with outer solid box) may be used in lieu of combination packagings paper, kraft ............. plastics ...................
textile ...................... textile, rubberized .. Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............
metal ...................... plastics ...................Trays, fitted with dividing partitions. plastics ...................
wood ...................... .................................... steel (4A). aluminum (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift

proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D).
reconstituted wood

(4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid

(4H2).
Drums.

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable

head (1H2).


### 491 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.63

T ABLE OF P ACKING M ETHODS —Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings

144 ................................................................................. Receptacles ............... Not necessary .... ....... Boxes.
Drums.

steel, removable

head (1A2).aluminium, removable head (1B2). plastics, removable

head (1H2). Plywood (1D).PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

For UN 0248 and UN 0249, packagings must be

protected against the ingress of water. When CONTRIVANCES, WATER ACTIVATED are transported unpackaged, they must be providedwith at least two independent protective features which prevent the ingress of water fibreboard ...............
metal ...................... plastics ................... Dividing partitions in

the outer packagings. .................................... 2steel (4A). aluminum (4B).wood, natural, ordinary (4C1) with
metal liner. plywood (4D) with

metal liner.
reconstituted wood

(4F) with metal
liner. plastics, expanded

(4H1). plastics, solid

(4H2).
US 1 1. A jet perforating gun, charged, oil well may be transported under the following conditions: a. Initiation devices carried on the same motor vehicle or offshore supply vessel must be segregated; each kind from every

other kind, and from any gun, tool or other supplies, unless approved in accordance with § 173.56. Segregated initiationdevices must be carried in a container having individual pockets for each such device or in a fully enclosed steel container lined with a non-sparking material. No more than two segregated initiation devices per gun may be carried on the
same motor vehicle. b. Each shaped charge affixed to the gun may not contain more than 112 g (4 ounces) of explosives.c. Each shaped charge if not completely enclosed in glass or metal, must be fully protected by a metal cover after installation in the gun. d. A jet perforating gun classed as 1.1D or 1.4D may be transported by highway by private or contract carriers engaged in

oil well operations. (i) A motor vehicle transporting a gun must have specially built racks or carrying cases designed and constructed so that

the gun is securely held in place during transportation and is not subject to damage by contact, one to the other or any other article or material carried in the vehicle; and (ii) The assembled gun packed on the vehicle may not extend beyond the body of the motor vehicle.e. A jet perforating gun classed as 1.4D may be transported by a private offshore supply vessel only when the gun is carried in a motor vehicle as specified in paragraph (d) of this packing method or on offshore well tool pallets provided that: (i) All the conditions specified in paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this packing method are met; (ii) The total explosive contents do not exceed 90.8 kg (200 pounds) per tool pallet;(iii) Each cargo vessel compartment may contain up to 90.8 kg (200 pounds) of explosive content if the segregation requirements in § 176.83(b) of this subchapter are met; and (iv) When more than one vehicle or tool pallet is stowed ‘‘on deck’’ a minimum horizontal separation of 3 m (9.8 feet) must

be provided.

[Amdt. 173–260, 62 FR 24720, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 45702, Aug. 28, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 1884, Jan. 12, 1998; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 64 FR 51918, Sept. 27, 1999; 65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 65 FR 60383, Oct. 11, 2000; 66 FR 33429, 33430, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45183, 45379, 45382, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45033, July 31, 2003; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 73 FR 4717, Jan. 28, 2008; 74 FR 53188, Oct. 16, 2009; 75 FR 72, Jan. 4, 2010; 75 FR 5394, Feb. 2, 2010]

§ 173.63 Packaging exceptions.

(a) Cord, detonating (UN 0065), having an explosive content not exceeding 6.5 g (0.23 ounces) per 30 centimeter length (one linear foot) may be offered fortransportation domestically and transported as Cord, detonating (UN 0289), Division 1.4 Compatibility Group D (1.4D) explosives, if the gross weight ofall packages containing Cord, detonating (UN 0065), does not exceed 45 kg (99 pounds) per:

(1) Transport vehicle, freight container, or cargo-only aircraft;

(2) Off-shore down-hole tool pallet carried on an off-shore supply vessel;

(3) Cargo compartment of a cargo vessel; or


### 492 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.115

(4) Passenger-carrying aircraft used to transport personnel to remote work sites, such as offshore drilling units.

(b) Cartridges, small arms, and cartridges power devices. (1) Cartridges,small arms, and cartridges power devices (which are used to project fastening devices) which have been classed as a Division 1.4S explosivemay be reclassed, offered for transportation, and transported as ORM–D material when packaged in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section. For transportation by aircraft, thepackage must also comply with the applicable requirements of §173.27 of thissubchapter. Such transportation is excepted from the requirements of subparts E (Labeling) and F (Placarding)of part 172 of this subchapter. Cartridges, small arms, and cartridges power devices that may be shipped as
ORM–D material are limited to:

(i) Ammunition for rifle, pistol or shotgun;

(ii) Ammunition with inert projectiles or blank ammunition;

(iii) Ammunition having no tear gas, incendiary, or detonating explosive projectiles;

(iv) Ammunition not exceeding 12.7 mm (50 caliber or 0.5 inch) for rifle or pistol, cartridges or 8 gauge for shotshells; and

(v) Cartridges, power devices which are used to project fastening devices.

(2) Packaging for cartridges, small arms, and cartridges power devices as
ORM-D material must be as follows:

(i) Ammunition must be packed in inside boxes, or in partitions which fit snugly in the outside packaging, or in metal clips;

(ii) Primers must be protected from accidental initiation;

(iii) Inside boxes, partitions or metal clips must be packed in securely-closed strong outside packagings;

(iv) Maximum gross weight is limited to 30 kg (66 pounds) per package; and

(v) Cartridges, power devices which are used to project fastening devices and 22 caliber rim-fire cartridges may be packaged loose in strong outside packagings.

(c)–(e) [Reserved] (f) Detonators containing no more than 1 g explosive (excluding ignition and delay charges) that are electric blasting caps with leg wires 4 feet long or longer, delay connectors in plastic sheaths, or blasting caps with empty plastic tubing 12 feet long or longer may be packed as follows in which case they are excepted from the packaging requirements of §173.62:

(1) No more than 50 detonators in one inner packaging;

(2) IME Standard 22 container (IBR,see §171.7 of this subchapter) or compartment is used as the outer packaging;

(3) No more than 1000 detonators in one outer packaging; and

(4) No material may be loaded on top
of the IME Standard 22 container and no material may be loaded against the
outside door of the IME Standard 22 compartment.

(g) Detonators that are classed as
1.4B or 1.4S and contain no more than 1 g of explosive (excluding ignition anddelay charges) may be packed as follows in which case they are excepted from the packaging requirements of §173.62:

(1) No more than 50 detonators in one inner packaging;

(2) IME Standard 22 container is used as the outer packaging;

(3) No more than 1000 detonators in one outer packaging; and

(4) Each inner packaging is marked
‘‘l.4B Detonators’’ or ‘‘1.4S Detonators’’, as appropriate.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–236, 58 FR 50536, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173– 253, 61 FR 27175, May 30, 1996; 68 FR 75743, Dec. 31, 2003; 71 FR 14602, Mar. 22, 2006]



### Subpart D—Definitions Classification, Packing Group Assignments and Exceptions for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and Class 7

S OURCE : Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634 Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise noted.

§ 173.115 Class 2, Divisions 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3—Definitions.

(a) Division 2.1 (Flammable gas). For the purpose of this subchapter, a flammable gas (Division 2.1) means any material which is a gas at 20 ° C (68 ° F) or less and 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) of pressure


### 493 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.115

(a material which has a boiling point of

20 ° C (68 ° F) or less at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia)) which—

(1) Is ignitable at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) when in a mixture of 13 percent or less by volume with air; or

(2) Has a flammable range at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) with air of at least 12 percent regardless of the lower limit. Except for aerosols, the limits specified in paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2) of this
section shall be determined at 101.3kPa (14.7 psia) of pressure and a temperature of 20 ° C (68 ° F) in accordance with the ASTM E681–85, Standard Test
Method for Concentration Limits of Flammability of Chemicals or otherequivalent method approved by the Associate Administrator. The flammability of aerosols is determined by the tests specified in §173.115 (k) of this

section.

(b) Division 2.2 ( non-flammable, nonpoisonous compressed gas—including compressed gas, liquefied gas, pressurized cryogenic gas, compressed gas in solution, asphyxiant gas and oxidizing gas ). Forthe purpose of this subchapter, a nonflammable, nonpoisonous compressed gas (Division 2.2) means any material (or mixture) which—

(1) Exerts in the packaging a gauge pressure of 200 kPa (29.0 psig/43.8 psia) or greater at 20 ° C (68 ° F), is a liquefied gas or is a cryogenic liquid, and

(2) Does not meet the definition of
Division 2.1 or 2.3.

(c) Division 2.3 (Gas poisonous by inhalation). For the purpose of this subchapter, a gas poisonous by inhalation (Division 2.3) means a material which is a gas at 20 ° C (68 ° F) or less and apressure of 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) (a material which has a boiling point of 20 ° C (68 ° F) or less at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia))
and which—

(1) Is known to be so toxic to humans as to pose a hazard to health during transportation, or

(2) In the absence of adequate data on human toxicity, is presumed to be
toxic to humans because when tested on laboratory animals it has an LC 50 value of not more than 5000 mL/m 3 (see§173.116(a) of this subpart for assignment of Hazard Zones A, B, C or D).
LC 50 values for mixtures may be determined using the formula in §173.133(b)(1)(i) or CGA P–20 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(d) Non-liquefied compressed gas. Agas, which when packaged under pressure for transportation is entirely gaseous at

¥ 50 ° C (

¥ 58 ° F) with a critical temperature less than or equal to

¥ 50

° C (

¥ 58 ° F), is considered to be a nonliquefied compressed gas.

(e) Liquefied compressed gas. A gas, which when packaged under pressure for transportation is partially liquid at temperatures above

¥ 50 ° C (

¥ 58 ° F), is considered to be a liquefied compressedgas. A liquefied compressed gas is further categorized as follows:

(1) High pressure liquefied gas which isa gas with a critical temperature between

¥ 50 ° C (

¥ 58 ° F) and + 65 ° C (149

° F), and

(2) Low pressure liquefied gas which is a gas with a critical temperature above
+ 65 ° C (149 ° F).

(f) Compressed gas in solution. A compressed gas in solution is a non-liquefied compressed gas which is dissolved in a
solvent.

(g) Cryogenic liquid. A cryogenic liquidmeans a refrigerated liquefied gas having a boiling point colder than

¥ 90 ° C (

¥ 130 ° F) at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) absolute. A material meeting this definition is subject to requirements of this subchapter without regard to whether
it meets the definition of a non-flammable, non-poisonous compressed gas in paragraph (b) of this section.

(h) Flammable range. The term flammable range means the difference between the minimum and maximum volume percentages of the material in air
that forms a flammable mixture.

(i) Service pressure. The term service

pressure means the authorized pressuremarking on the packaging. For example, for a cylinder marked ‘‘DOT 3A1800’’, the service pressure is 12410 kPa (1800 psig).

(j) Refrigerant gas or Dispersant gas.
The terms Refrigerant gas and Dispersant gas apply to all nonpoisonous refrigerant gases; dispersant gases (fluorocarbons) listed in §172.101 of this subchapter and §§173.304, 173.314(c), 173.315(a), and 173.315(h) and mixtures thereof; and any other compressed gas having a vapor pressure not exceeding 260 psia at 54 ° C(130 ° F), used only as a


### 494 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.116

refrigerant, dispersant, or blowing
agent.

(k) For Division 2.2 gases, the oxidizing ability shall be determined by tests or by calculation in accordance
with ISO 10156:1996 and ISO 10156–2:2005 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(l) The following applies to aerosols (see §171.8 of this subchapter):

(1) An aerosol must be assigned to Division 2.1 if the contents include 85%by mass or more flammable components and the chemical heat of combustion is 30 kJ/g or more;

(2) An aerosol must be assigned to Division 2.2 if the contents contain 1% by mass or less flammable components
and the heat of combustion is less than 20 kJ/g.

(3) Aerosols not meeting the provisions of paragraphs (a) or (b) of this
section must be classed in accordance with the appropriate tests of the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). An aerosol
which was tested in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter ineffect on December 31, 2005, is not required to be retested.

(4) Division 2.3 gases may not be transported in an aerosol container.

(5) When the contents are classified as Division 6.1, PG III or Class 8, PG II or III, the aerosol must be assigned a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1 or Class 8, as appropriate.

(6) Substances of Division 6.1, PG I or II, and substances of Class 8, PG I are forbidden from transportation in an
aerosol container.

(7) Flammable components are Class3 flammable liquids, Division 4.1 flammable solids, or Division 2.1 flammablegases. The chemical heat of combustion must be determined in accordance
with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–236, 58 FR 50236, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67506, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 FR 45379, 45380, 45382, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51642, Aug. 8, 2002; 67 FR 16013, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 45033, July 31, 2003; 68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 76155, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34398, June 14, 2005; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006; 74 FR 2256, Jan. 14, 2009; 74 FR 16143, Apr. 9, 2009; 75 FR 72, Jan. 4, 2010]

§ 173.116 Class 2—Assignment of hazard zone.
(a) The hazard zone of a Class 2, Division 2.3 material is assigned in column 7 of the §172.101 table. There are no
hazard zones for Divisions 2.1 and 2.2. When the §172.101 table provides more
than one hazard zone for a Division 2.3 material, or indicates that the hazard
zone be determined on the basis of the grouping criteria for Division 2.3, thehazard zone shall be determined by applying the following criteria:

Hazard

zone Inhalation toxicity

A .............. LC 50 less than or equal to 200 ppm.
B .............. LC 50 greater than 200 ppm and less than or equal to 1000 ppm.
C .............. LC 50 greater than 1000 ppm and less than or equal to 3000 ppm.
D .............. LC 50 greater than 3000 ppm or less than or equal to 5000 ppm.

(b) The criteria specified in paragraph (a) of this section are represented graphically in §173.133, Figure

1.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; 67 FR 61013, Sept. 27, 2002]

§§ 173.117–173.119 [Reserved]

§ 173.120 Class 3—Definitions.

(a) Flammable liquid. For the purpose of this subchapter, a flammable liquid (Class 3) means a liquid having a flash point of not more than 60 ° C (140 ° F), or any material in a liquid phase with a flash point at or above 37.8 ° C (100 ° F) that is intentionally heated and offered for transportation or transported at orabove its flash point in a bulk packaging, with the following exceptions:


### 495 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.120

(1) Any liquid meeting one of the definitions specified in §173.115.

(2) Any mixture having one or more components with a flash point of 60 ° C (140 ° F) or higher, that make up at least 99 percent of the total volume ofthe mixture, if the mixture is not offered for transportation or transported at or above its flash point.

(3) Any liquid with a flash point greater than 35 ° C (95 ° F) that does not sustain combustion according to ASTMD 4206 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) or the procedure in appendix H of this part.

(4) Any liquid with a flash point greater than 35 ° C (95 ° F) and with a fire point greater than 100 ° C (212 ° F) according to ISO 2592 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(5) Any liquid with a flash point greater than 35 ° C (95 ° F) which is in a
water-miscible solution with a water content of more than 90 percent by

mass.

(b) Combustible liquid. (1) For the purpose of this subchapter, a combustible liquid means any liquid that does not meet the definition of any otherhazard class specified in this subchapter and has a flash point above 60

° C (140 ° F) and below 93 ° C (200 ° F).

(2) A flammable liquid with a flash point at or above 38 ° C (100 ° F) that does not meet the definition of any other hazard class may be reclassed as a combustible liquid. This provision does not apply to transportation by vessel or aircraft, except where othermeans of transportation is impracticable. An elevated temperature material that meets the definition of a Class 3 material because it is intentionally heated and offered for transportation or transported at or above its flashpoint may not be reclassed as a combustible liquid.

(3) A combustible liquid that does not sustain combustion is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter as a combustible liquid. Either the test method specified in ASTM D 4206 or the procedure in appendix H of this part may be used to determine if a material
sustains combustion when heated under test conditions and exposed to an
external source of flame.

(c) Flash point. (1) Flash point means the minimum temperature at which a liquid gives off vapor within a test vessel in sufficient concentration to form an ignitable mixture with air near thesurface of the liquid. It shall be determined as follows:

(i) For a homogeneous, single-phase, liquid having a viscosity less than 45
S.U.S. at 38 ° C (100 ° F) that does not form a surface film while under test, one of the following test procedures
shall be used:

(A) Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by Tag Closed Tester, (ASTM D 56);

(B) Standard Methods of Test for Flash Point of Liquids by Setaflash Closed Tester, (ASTM D 3278); or

(C) Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Small Scale Closed Tester, (ASTM D 3828).

(ii) For a liquid other than one meeting all of the criteria of paragraph(c)(1)(i) of this section, one of the following test procedures shall be used:

(A) Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by Pensky—MartensClosed Tester, (ASTM D 93). For cutback asphalt, use Method B of ASTM D
93 or alternate tests authorized in this standard; or

(B) Standard Methods of Test for Flash Point of Liquids by Setaflash Closed Tester (ASTM D 3278).

(2) For a liquid that is a mixture ofcompounds that have different volatility and flash points, its flash point shall be determined as specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, on the
material in the form in which it is to be shipped. If it is determined by this test that the flash point is higher than

¥ 7 ° C (20 ° F) a second test shall bemade as follows: a portion of the mixture shall be placed in an open beaker(or similar container) of such dimensions that the height of the liquid canbe adjusted so that the ratio of the volume of the liquid to the exposed surface area is 6 to one. The liquid shall be allowed to evaporate under ambient pressure and temperature (20 to 25 ° C (68 to 77 ° F)) for a period of 4 hours oruntil 10 percent by volume has evaporated, whichever comes first. A flash point is then run on a portion of the liquid remaining in the evaporation
container and the lower of the two flash points shall be the flash point of
the material.


### 496 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.121

(3) For flash point determinations bySetaflash closed tester, the glass syringe specified need not be used as the
method of measurement of the test sample if a minimum quantity of 2 mL (0.1 ounce) is assured in the test cup.

(d) If experience or other data indicate that the hazard of a material is greater or less than indicated by the criteria specified in paragraphs (a) and(b) of this section, the Associate Administrator may revise the classification or make the material subject or not subject to the requirements of parts 170–189 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–227, 56 FR 49989, Oct. 2, 1991; 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67506, 67507, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24731, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 45379, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75743, Dec. 31, 2003; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006]

§ 173.121 Class 3—Assignment of packing group. (a) The packing group of a Class 3 material is as assigned in column 5 of the §172.101 table. When the §172.101 table provides more than one packing group for a hazardous material, the packing group shall be determined by applying the following criteria:

Packing
group Flash point (closed-cup) Initial boiling point

I ........... ....................................................... ≤ 35 ° C (95 ° F)
II .......... <23 ° C (73 ° F) ............................... >35 ° C (95 ° F)
III ......... ≥ 23 ° C, ≤ 60 ° C ( ≥ 73 ° F, ≤ 140 ° F) >35 ° C (95 ° F)

(b) Criteria for inclusion of viscous Class 3 materials in Packing Group III. (1) Viscous Class 3 materials in Packing Group II with a flash point of less than
23 ° C (73 ° F) may be grouped in Packing Group III provided that—

(i) Less than 3 percent of the clear solvent layer separates in the solvent separation test;

(ii) The mixture does not contain anysubstances with a primary or a subsidiary risk of Division 6.1 or Class 8;

(iii) The capacity of the packaging is not more than 30 L (7.9 gallons); and

(iv) The viscosity and flash point are in accordance with the following table:

Flow time t in

seconds Jet diameter in mm Flash point c.c.

20<t ≤ 60 ............. 4 above 17 ° C (62.6 ° F).
60<t ≤ 100 ........... 4 above 10 ° C (50 ° F). Flow time t in seconds Jet diameter in mm Flash point c.c.

20<t ≤ 32 ............. 6 above 5 ° C (41 ° F).
32<t ≤ 44 ............. 6 above

¥ 1 ° C (31.2 ° F).

44<t ≤ 100 ........... 6 above

¥ 5 ° C (23 ° F).
100<t ................. 6

¥ 5 ° C (23 ° F) and below.

(2) The methods by which the tests referred to in paragraph (b)(1) of thissection shall be performed are as follows:

(i) Viscosity test. The flow time in seconds is determined at 23 ° C (73.4 ° F) using the ISO standard cup with a 4 mm (0.16 inch) jet as set forth in ISO 2431 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).
Where the flow time exceeds 100 seconds, a further test is carried out using the ISO standard cup with a 6 mm (0.24 inch) jet.

(ii) Solvent Separation Test. This test
is carried out at 23 ° C (73 ° F) using a 100.0 mL(3 ounces) measuring cylinder of the stoppered type of approximately 25.0 cm (9.8 inches) total height and ofa uniform internal diameter of approximately 30 mm (1.2 inches) over the calibrated section. The sample should be
stirred to obtain a uniform consistency, and poured in up to the 100 mL (3 ounces) mark. The stopper should be inserted and the cylinder left standing
undisturbed for 24 hours. After 24hours, the height of the upper separated layer should be measured and the percentage of this layer as comparedwith the total height of the sample calculated.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67507, Dec. 29, 1994 Amdt. 173– 255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996; 64 FR 10777, Mar. 5, 1999; 64 FR 51918, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006]

§ 173.124 Class 4, Divisions 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3—Definitions.
(a) Division 4.1 (Flammable Solid). For the purposes of this subchapter, flammable solid (Division 4.1) means any of the following three types of materials:

(1) Desensitized explosives that— (i) When dry are Explosives of Class 1 other than those of compatibilitygroup A, which are wetted with sufficient water, alcohol, or plasticizer to suppress explosive properties; and

(ii) Are specifically authorized by name either in the §172.101Table or


### 497 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.124

have been assigned a shipping nameand hazard class by the Associate Administrator under the provisions of—

(A) A special permit issued under subchapter A of this chapter; or

(B) An approval issued under §173.56(i) of this part.

(2)(i) Self-reactive materials are materials that are thermally unstable and that can undergo a stronglyexothermic decomposition even without participation of oxygen (air). A material is excluded from this definition if any of the following applies:

(A) The material meets the definition of an explosive as prescribed in subpart C of this part, in which case it must be classed as an explosive;

(B) The material is forbidden frombeing offered for transportation according to §172.101 of this subchapter or §173.21;

(C) The material meets the definition of an oxidizer or organic peroxide as prescribed in subpart D of this part, in which case it must be so classed;

(D) The material meets one of the following conditions:

( 1 ) Its heat of decomposition is less than 300 J/g; or

( 2

) Its self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) is greater
than 75 ° C (167 ° F) for a 50 kg package;

or ( 3) It is an oxidizing substance in Division 5.1 containing less than 5.0% combustible organic substances; or

(E) The Associate Administrator has
determined that the material does not present a hazard which is associated
with a Division 4.1 material.

(ii) Generic types. Division 4.1 self-reactive materials are assigned to a generic system consisting of seven types. A self-reactive substance identified by
technical name in the Self-Reactive Materials Table in §173.224 is assigned to a generic type in accordance with
that table. Self-reactive materials not
identified in the Self-Reactive Materials Table in §173.224 are assigned to generic types under the procedures of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section.

(A) Type A. Self-reactive material type A is a self-reactive material which, as packaged for transportation, can detonate or deflagrate rapidly. Transportation of type A self-reactive
material is forbidden. (B) Type B. Self-reactive material type B is a self-reactive material which, as packaged for transportation,neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but is liable to undergo a thermal explosion in a package.

(C) Type C. Self-reactive material type C is a self-reactive material which, as packaged for transportation,neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly and cannot undergo a thermal explosion.

(D) Type D. Self-reactive material type D is a self-reactive material
which—

( 1 ) Detonates partially, does not deflagrate rapidly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement;

( 2

) Does not detonate at all, deflagrates slowly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement;

or ( 3 ) Does not detonate or deflagrate at
all and shows a medium effect when
heated under confinement.

(E) Type E. Self-reactive material type E is a self-reactive material which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates nor deflagrates at all and shows only a low or no effect when
heated under confinement.

(F) Type F. Self-reactive material type F is a self-reactive material which, in laboratory testing, neither
detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows only a low
or no effect when heated under confinement as well as low or no explosive

power.

(G) Type G. Self-reactive material type G is a self-reactive material which, in laboratory testing, does not detonate in the cavitated state, will not deflagrate at all, shows no effect when heated under confinement, nor shows any explosive power. A type G self-reactive material is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter for
self-reactive material of Division 4.1 provided that it is thermally stable(self-accelerating decomposition temperature is 50 ° C (122 ° F) or higher fora 50 kg (110 pounds) package). A self-reactive material meeting all characteristics of type G except thermal stability is classed as a type F self-reactive, temperature control material.

(iii) Procedures for assigning a self-reactive material to a generic type. A selfVerDate Mar<15>2010 15:30 Dec 30, 2010 Jkt 220213 PO 00000 Frm 00507 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\49\X49\220213.XXX ofr150 PsN: PC150

### 498 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.125

reactive material must be assigned to a generic type based on—

(A) Its physical state (i.e. liquid orsolid), in accordance with the definition of liquid and solid in §171.8 of this subchapter;

(B) A determination as to its controltemperature and emergency temperature, if any, under the provisions of §173.21(f);

(C) Performance of the self-reactive material under the test procedures specified in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of thissubchapter) and the provisions of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section; and

(D) Except for a self-reactive material which is identified by technical
name in the Self-Reactive Materials Table in §173.224(b) or a self-reactive material which may be shipped as a sample under the provisions of §173.224, the self-reactive material is approvedin writing by the Associate Administrator. The person requesting approval
shall submit to the Associate Administrator the tentative shipping description and generic type and—

( 1 ) All relevant data concerning physical state, temperature controls, and tests results; or

( 2

) An approval issued for the self-reactive material by the competent authority of a foreign government.

(iv) Tests. The generic type for a selfreactive material must be determined using the testing protocol from Figure14.2 (Flow Chart for Assigning Self-Reactive Substances to Division 4.1) from
the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.

(3) Readily combustible solids are
materials that—

(i) Are solids which may cause a fire through friction, such as matches;

(ii) Show a burning rate faster than 2.2 mm (0.087 inches) per second when
tested in accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter); or

(iii) Any metal powders that can be ignited and react over the whole length of a sample in 10 minutes or less, when
tested in accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.

(b) Division 4.2 (Spontaneously Combustible Material). For the purposes of this subchapter, spontaneously combustible
material (Division 4.2) means— (1) A pyrophoric material. A pyrophoric material is a liquid or solid that, even in small quantities and without an external ignition source, can ignite within five (5) minutes after coming in contact with air when tested according to UN Manual of Tests and
Criteria.

(2) A self-heating material. A selfheating material is a material that,
when in contact with air and without an energy supply, is liable to self-heat. A material of this type which exhibitsspontaneous ignition or if the temperature of the sample exceeds 200 ° C (392

° F) during the 24-hour test period when
tested in accordance with UN Manualof Tests and Criteria, is classed as a Division 4.2 material.

(c) Division 4.3 (Dangerous when wet material). For the purposes of this chapter, dangerous when wet material (Division 4.3) means a material that, by contact with water, is liable to become spontaneously flammable or to give offflammable or toxic gas at a rate greater than 1 L per kilogram of the material, per hour, when tested in accordance with UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–233, 58 FR 33305, June 16, 1993; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67507, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24731, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR 73165, Dec. 9, 2005; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006; 74 FR 53188, Oct. 16, 2009]

§ 173.125 Class 4—Assignment of packing group. (a) The packing group of a Class 4 material is assigned in column (5) of the §172.101 Table. When the §172.101 Table provides more than one packing group for a hazardous material, the packing group shall be determined on the basis of test results following test methods given in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) and by applying theappropriate criteria given in this section.

(b) Packing group criteria for readily
combustible materials of Division 4.1
are as follows:

(1) Powdered, granular or pasty materials must be classified in Division


### 499 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.127

4.1 when the time of burning of one or more of the test runs, in accordance
with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, is less than 45 seconds or the rateof burning is more than 2.2 mm/s. Powders of metals or metal alloys must be classified in Division 4.1 when they can be ignited and the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in
10 minutes or less.

(2) Packing group criteria for readily
combustible materials of Division 4.1 are assigned as follows:

(i) For readily combustible solids (other than metal powders), Packing Group II if the burning time is less than 45 seconds and the flame passes the wetted zone. Packing Group II must be assigned to powders of metal or metal alloys if the zone of reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in 5 minutes or less.

(ii) For readily combustible solids (other than metal powders), PackingGroup III must be assigned if the burning rate time is less than 45 seconds and the wetted zone stops the flame propagation for at least 4 minutes. Packing Group III must be assigned to metal powders if the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in
more than 5 minutes but not more than
10 minutes.

(c) Packing group criteria for Division 4.2 materials is as follows:

(1) Pyrophoric liquids and solids of Division 4.2 are assigned to Packing Group I.

(2) A self-heating material is assigned to—

(i) Packing Group II, if the material gives a positive test result when tested with a 25 mm cube size sample at 140

° C; or

(ii) Packing Group III, if— (A) A positive test result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm sample cube at
140 ° C and a negative test result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm sample
cube at 140 ° C and the substance istransported in packagings with a volume of more than 3 cubic meters; or

(B) A positive test result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm sample cube at
120 ° C and a negative result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm sample cube at
140 ° C and the substance is transported in packagings with a volume of more than 450 L; or (C) A positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm sample cube at 100

° C and a negative result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm sample cube at 140

° C and the substance is transported in packagings with a volume of less than
450 L.

(d) A Division 4.3 dangerous when wet material is assigned to—

(1) Packing Group I, if the materialreacts vigorously with water at ambient temperatures and demonstrates a tendency for the gas produced to ignite spontaneously, or which reacts readily with water at ambient temperatures
such that the rate of evolution of flammable gases is equal or greater than 10 L per kilogram of material over any
one minute;

(2) Packing Group II, if the material reacts readily with water at ambient temperatures such that the maximum rate of evolution of flammable gases isequal to or greater than 20 L per kilogram of material per hour, and which does not meet the criteria for Packing Group I; or

(3) Packing Group III, if the material reacts slowly with water at ambient temperatures such that the maximum rate of evolution of flammable gases isgreater than 1 L per kilogram of material per hour, and which does not meet the criteria for Packing Group I or II.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24731, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003]

§ 173.127 Class 5, Division 5.1—Definition and assignment of packing
groups. (a) Definition. For the purpose of this subchapter, oxidizer (Division 5.1) means a material that may, generally by yielding oxygen, cause or enhance
the combustion of other materials.

(1) A solid material is classed as a Division 5.1 material if, when tested in
accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), its mean burningtime is less than or equal to the burning time of a 3:7 potassium bromate/
cellulose mixture.

(2) A liquid material is classed as a Division 5.1 material if, when tested in
accordance with the UN Manual of


### 500 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.128

Tests and Criteria, it spontaneously ignites or its mean time for a pressure rise from 690 kPa to 2070 kPa gauge is
less then the time of a 1:1 nitric acid (65 percent)/cellulose mixture.

(b) Assignment of packing groups. (1)The packing group of a Division 5.1 material which is a solid shall be assigned using the following criteria:

(i) Packing Group I, for any material which, in either concentration tested, exhibits a mean burning time less thanthe mean burning time of a 3:2 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture.

(ii) Packing Group II, for any material which, in either concentration tested, exhibits a mean burning time less than or equal to the mean burningtime of a 2:3 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture and the criteria for Packing Group I are not met.

(iii) Packing Group III for any material which, in either concentration tested, exhibits a mean burning time less than or equal to the mean burningtime of a 3:7 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture and the criteria for Packing Group I and II are not met.

(2) The packing group of a Division 5.1 material which is a liquid shall be assigned using the following criteria:

(i) Packing Group I for:(A) Any material which spontaneously ignites when mixed with cellulose in a 1:1 ratio; or

(B) Any material which exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than the pressure rise time of a 1:1 perchloric acid (50 percent)/cellulose mixture.

(ii) Packing Group II, any material which exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the pressurerise time of a 1:1 aqueous sodium chlorate solution (40 percent)/cellulose mixture and the criteria for Packing Group
I are not met.

(iii) Packing Group III, any material which exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the pressurerise time of a 1:1 nitric acid (65 percent)/cellulose mixture and the criteria for Packing Group I and II are not met.

[Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997, as amended at 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003]

§ 173.128 Class 5, Division 5.2—Definitions and types.
(a) Definitions. For the purposes of this subchapter, organic peroxide (Division 5.2) means any organic compound containing oxygen (O) in the bivalent-O-O- structure and which may be considered a derivative of hydrogen peroxide, where one or more of the hydrogen atoms have been replaced by organic radicals, unless any of the following paragraphs applies:

(1) The material meets the definition of an explosive as prescribed in subpart C of this part, in which case it must be classed as an explosive;

(2) The material is forbidden frombeing offered for transportation according to §172.101 of this subchapter or §173.21;

(3) The Associate Administrator has
determined that the material does not present a hazard which is associated with a Division 5.2 material; or

(4) The material meets one of the following conditions:

(i) For materials containing no more than 1.0 percent hydrogen peroxide, the available oxygen, as calculated using the equation in paragraph (a)(4)(ii) ofthis section, is not more than 1.0 percent, or

(ii) For materials containing more than 1.0 percent but not more than 7.0percent hydrogen peroxide, the available oxygen, content (O

a ) is not more than 0.5 percent, when determined using the equation:



### O n c

m a i i

i i k



### = ×

= 

# ∑ 16

1 where, for a material containing k species of

organic peroxides:

n i = number of -O-O- groups per molecule of

the i th species

c i = concentration (mass percent) of the i th

species

m i = molecular mass of the i th species

(b) Generic types. Division 5.2 organicperoxides are assigned to a generic system which consists of seven types. Anorganic peroxide identified by technical name in the Organic PeroxidesTable in §173.225 is assigned to a generic type in accordance with that table. Organic peroxides not identifiedin the Organic Peroxides table are assigned to generic types under the procedures of paragraph (c) of this section.

(1) Type A. Organic peroxide type A is an organic peroxide which can detonate or deflagrate rapidly as packaged for


### 501 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.132

transport. Transportation of type A organic peroxides is forbidden.

(2) Type B. Organic peroxide type B is an organic peroxide which, as packaged for transport, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but can undergo a thermal explosion.

(3) Type C. Organic peroxide type C is an organic peroxide which, as packaged for transport, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly and cannot undergo a thermal explosion.

(4) Type D. Organic peroxide type D is an organic peroxide which—

(i) Detonates only partially, but doesnot deflagrate rapidly and is not affected by heat when confined;

(ii) Does not detonate, deflagrates slowly, and shows no violent effect if heated when confined; or

(iii) Does not detonate or deflagrate,
and shows a medium effect when heated under confinement.

(5) Type E. Organic peroxide type E isan organic peroxide which neither detonates nor deflagrates and shows low,or no, effect when heated under confinement.

(6) Type F. Organic peroxide type F isan organic peroxide which will not detonate in a cavitated state, does notdeflagrate, shows only a low, or no, effect if heated when confined, and has low, or no, explosive power.

(7) Type G. Organic peroxide type G isan organic peroxide which will not detonate in a cavitated state, will not deflagrate at all, shows no effect when heated under confinement, and shows no explosive power. A type G organicperoxide is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter for organic peroxides of Division 5.2 provided that it is thermally stable (self-accelerating decomposition temperature is 50 ° C (122

° F) or higher for a 50 kg (110 pounds) package). An organic peroxide meeting all characteristics of type G exceptthermal stability and requiring temperature control is classed as a type F, temperature control organic peroxide.

(c) Procedure for assigning an organic peroxide to a generic type. An organic peroxide shall be assigned to a generic type based on—

(1) Its physical state (i.e., liquid orsolid), in accordance with the definitions for liquid and solid in §171.8 of this subchapter; (2) A determination as to its controltemperature and emergency temperature, if any, under the provisions of §173.21(f); and

(3) Performance of the organic peroxide under the test procedures specified in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), and the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section.

(d) Approvals. (1) An organic peroxide must be approved, in writing, by the Associate Administrator, before beingoffered for transportation or transported, including assignment of a generic type and shipping description, except for—

(i) An organic peroxide which is identified by technical name in the Organic Peroxides Table in §173.225(c);

(ii) A mixture of organic peroxides prepared according to §173.225(b); or

(iii) An organic peroxide which maybe shipped as a sample under the provisions of §173.225(b).

(2) A person applying for an approval
must submit all relevant data concerning physical state, temperaturecontrols, and tests results or an approval issued for the organic peroxideby the competent authority of a foreign government.

(e) Tests. The generic type for an organic peroxide shall be determined using the testing protocol from Figure 20.1(a) (Classification and Flow Chart Scheme for Organic Peroxides) from
the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173– 241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 76155, Dec. 20, 2004]

§ 173.129 Class 5, Division 5.2—Assignment of packing group.

All Division 5.2 materials are assigned to Packing Group II in column 5 of the §172.101 table.

§ 173.132 Class 6, Division 6.1—Definitions.
(a) For the purpose of this subchapter, poisonous material (Division 6.1) means a material, other than a gas,


### 502 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.132

which is known to be so toxic to humans as to afford a hazard to health during transportation, or which, in the absence of adequate data on human toxicity:

(1) Is presumed to be toxic to humans because it falls within any one of the following categories when tested on laboratory animals (whenever possible,
animal test data that has been reported in the chemical literature should be used):

(i) Oral Toxicity. A liquid or solid
with an LD 50 for acute oral toxicity of not more than 300 mg/kg.

(ii) Dermal Toxicity. A material with
an LD 50 for acute dermal toxicity of not more than 1000 mg/kg.

(iii) Inhalation Toxicity. (A) A dust or
mist with an LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of not more than 4 mg/L; or

(B) A material with a saturated vapor concentration in air at 20 ° C (68

° F) greater than or equal to one-fifth of
the LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of vapors and with an LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of vapors
of not more than 5000 mL/m 3 ; or (2) Is an irritating material, with properties similar to tear gas, which causes extreme irritation, especially in confined spaces.

(b) For the purposes of this subchapter—

(1) LD 50 (median lethal dose) for acute oral toxicity is the statistically derived single dose of a substance that can be expected to cause death within 14 days in 50% of young adult albino rats when administered by the oral
route. The LD 50 value is expressed in terms of mass of test substance per mass of test animal (mg/kg).

(2) LD 50 for acute dermal toxicity means that dose of the material which, administered by continuous contact for
24 hours with the shaved intact skin (avoiding abrading) of an albino rabbit, causes death within 14 days in half of
the animals tested. The number of animals tested must be sufficient to give statistically valid results and be in conformity with good pharmacological practices. The result is expressed in mg/kg body mass.

(3) LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation means that concentration ofvapor, mist, or dust which, administered by continuous inhalation for one hour to both male and female young adult albino rats, causes death within 14 days in half of the animals tested. If
the material is administered to the animals as a dust or mist, more than 90 percent of the particles available for
inhalation in the test must have a diameter of 10 microns or less if it is reasonably foreseeable that such concentrations could be encountered by a human during transport. The result is expressed in mg/L of air for dusts and
mists or in mL/m 3 of air (parts per million) for vapors. See §173.133(b) for LC 50 determination for mixtures and for
limit tests.

(i) When provisions of this subchapter require the use of the LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of dusts and mists based on a one-hour exposure and such data is not available, the LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation basedon a four-hour exposure may be multiplied by four and the product substituted for the one-hour LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation.

(ii) When the provisions of this subchapter require the use of the LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of vapors based on a one-hour exposure and such data is not available, the LC 50 for acutetoxicity on inhalation based on a fourhour exposure may be multiplied by two and the product substituted for the
one-hour LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation.

(iii) A solid substance should be tested if at least 10 percent of its total mass is likely to be dust in a respirable range, e.g. the aerodynamic diameter of that particle-fraction is 10 microns or less. A liquid substance should betested if a mist is likely to be generated in a leakage of the transport containment. In carrying out the test both for solid and liquid substances, more than 90% (by mass) of a specimen prepared for inhalation toxicity testingmust be in the respirable range as defined in this paragraph (b)(3)(iii).

(c) For purposes of classifying and assigning packing groups to mixturespossessing oral or dermal toxicity hazards according to the criteria in§173.133(a)(1), it is necessary to determine the acute LD 50 of the mixture. If
a mixture contains more than one active constituent, one of the following


### 503 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.133

methods may be used to determine the
oral or dermal LD 50 of the mixture:

(1) Obtain reliable acute oral and dermal toxicity data on the actual mixture to be transported;

(2) If reliable, accurate data is notavailable, classify the formulation according to the most hazardous constituent of the mixture as if that constituent were present in the same concentration as the total concentration of all active constituents; or

(3) If reliable, accurate data is not available, apply the formula:



### C

T C

T C

T T A

A B

B Z

Z M + 

### ++= 100

where:

C = the % concentration of constituent A, B

... Z in the mixture;
T = the oral LD 50 values of constituent A, B

... Z;

T M = the oral LD 50 value of the mixture.

N OTE TO FORMULA IN PARAGRAPH (c)(3): This formula also may be used for dermal toxicities provided that this information isavailable on the same species for all constituents. The use of this formula does nottake into account any potentiation or protective phenomena. (d) The foregoing categories shall not apply if the Associate Administratorhas determined that the physical characteristics of the material or its probable hazards to humans as shown by documented experience indicate that
the material will not cause serious
sickness or death.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 45702, August 28, 1997; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45379, 45382, Aug. 28, 2001; 69 FR 76155, Dec. 20, 2004; 72 FR 55692, Oct. 1, 2007]

§ 173.133 Assignment of packing group and hazard zones for Division 6.1 materials.
(a) The packing group of Division 6.1materials shall be as assigned in column 5 of the §172.101 table. When the §172.101 table provides more than onepacking group or hazard zone for a hazardous material, the packing group andhazard zone shall be determined by applying the following criteria:

(1) The packing group assignment for
routes of administration other than inhalation of vapors shall be in accordance with the following table:

Packing group Oral toxicity LD 50 (mg/kg) Dermal toxicity LD 50 (mg/kg) Inhalation toxicity by dusts and mists LC 50 (mg/L)

I ............................... ≤ 5.0 .......................................................... ≤ 50 ≤ 0.2
II .............................. >5.0 and ≤ 50 ............................................ >50 and ≤ 200 >0.2 and ≤ 2.0
III ............................. >50 and ≤ 300 ........................................... >200 and ≤ 1000 >2.0 and ≤ 4.0

(2)(i) The packing group and hazard zone assignments for liquids (see §173.115(c) of this subpart for gases) based on inhalation of vapors shall be in accordance with the following table:

Packing Group Vapor concentration and toxicity

I (Hazard Zone A) ...................................... V ≥ 500 LC 50 and LC 50 ≤ 200 mL/M 3

. I (Hazard Zone B) ...................................... V ≥ 10 LC 50 ; LC 50 ≤ 1000 mL/m 3 ; and the criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zone
A are not met.
II ................................................................. V ≥ LC 50 ; LC 50 ≤ 3000 mL/m 3 ; and the criteria for Packing Group I, are not met.

III ................................................................ V ≥ .2 LC 50 ; LC 50 ≤ 5000 mL/m 3 ; and the criteria for Packing Groups I and II, are

not met.

N OTE 1: V is the saturated vapor concentration in air of the material in mL/m 3 at 20 ° C and standard atmospheric pressure. N OTE 2: A liquid in Division 6.1 meeting criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zones A or B stated in paragraph (a)(2) of this section is a material poisonous by inhalation subject to the additional hazard communication requirements in §§ 172.203(m), 172.313 and table 1 of § 172.504(e) of this subchapter.

(ii) These criteria are represented graphically in Figure 1:


### 504 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.133

(3) When the packing group determined by applying these criteria is different for two or more (oral, dermal or inhalation) routes of administration, the packing group assigned to the material shall be that indicated for the highest degree of toxicity for any of
the routes of administration.


### 505 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.133

(4) Notwithstanding the provisions of this paragraph, the packing group and hazard zone of a tear gas substance is as assigned in column 5 of the §172.101
table.

(b) The packing group and hazard
zone for Division 6.1 mixtures that are poisonous (toxic) by inhalation may be determined by one of the following
methods:

(1) Where LC 50 data is available oneach of the poisonous (toxic) substances comprising the mixture—

(i) The LC 50 of the mixture is estimated using the formula:



### LC mixture f

LC i

i i n 50

50 1 

### 1 ( ) =

= 

# ∑

where

f i = mole fraction of the i th component substance of the liquid.

LC 50i = mean lethal concentration of the i th

component substance in mL/m 3
(ii) The volatility of each componentsubstance is estimated using the formula:



### V P mL m i i 

### = × 10

1013 6 3



### . /

where:

P i = partial pressure of the i th component

substance in kPa at 20 ° C and one atmospheric pressure. Pi may be calculated according to Raoult’s Law using appropriateactivity coefficients. Where activity coefficients are not available, the coefficient may be assumed to be 1.0.
(iii) The ratio of the volatility to the
LC 50 is calculated using the formula:



### R V

LC i

i i n



### =

=



# ∑

50

1 (iv) Using the calculated values LC 50 (mixture) and R, the packing group for
the mixture is determined as follows:

Packaging group (hazard zone) Ratio of volatility and LC 50

I (Hazard Zone A) .. R ≥ 500 and LC 50 (mixture) ≤ 200 mL/

m 3

. I (Hazard Zone B) .. R ≥ 10 and LC 50 (mixture) ≤ 1000 mL/

m 3 ; and the criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A are not met.

II ............................. R ≥ 1 and LC 50 (mixture) ≤ 3000 mL/

m 3 ; and the criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zones A and B are

not met. Packaging group (hazard zone) Ratio of volatility and LC 50

III ............................ R ≥ 1/5 and LC 50 (mixture) ≤ 5000 mL/

m 3 ; and the criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zones A and B and Packing Group II are not met.

(2) In the absence of LC 50 data on thepoisonous (toxic) constituent substances, the mixture may be assigned a packing group and hazard zone based on the following simplified threshold toxicity tests. When these threshold tests are used, the most restrictive packing group and hazard zone must bedetermined and used for the transportation of the mixture.

(i) A mixture is assigned to Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A only if both the following criteria are met:

(A) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 200 mL/m 3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere as determined by an analytical method appropriate for the material being classified for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If
five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an
LC 50 equal to or less than 200 mL/m 3

.(B) A sample of the vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is diluted with 499 equal volumes of air to form a test atmosphere. Ten albinorats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If
five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period,the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 500
times the mixture LC 50

.

(ii) A mixture is assigned to Packing Group I, Hazard Zone B only if both the following criteria are met, and the
mixture does not meet the criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A:

(A) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 1000 mL/m 3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five
or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the


### 506 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.134

mixture is presumed to have an LC 50 equal to or less than 1000 mL/m 3

.(B) A sample of the vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is diluted with 9 equal volumes of air to form a test atmosphere. Ten albinorats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If
five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period,the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 10
times the mixture LC 50

.

(iii) A mixture is assigned to PackingGroup II only if both the following criteria are met, and the mixture does not meet the criteria for Packing Group I (Hazard Zones A or B):

(A) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 3000 mL/m 3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five
or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC 50 equal to or less than 3000 mL/m 3

.(B) A sample of the vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is used to form a test atmosphere. Ten albinorats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If
five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period,the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than the
mixture LC 50

.

(iv) A mixture is assigned to PackingGroup III only if both the following criteria are met, and the mixture does not meet the criteria for Packing Groups I (Hazard Zones A or B) or Packing Group II (Hazard Zone C):

(A) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 5000 mL/m 3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five
or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC 50 equal to or less than 5000 mL/m 3

. (B) The vapor pressure of the liquid mixture is measured and if the vapor concentration is equal to or greater
than 1000 mL/m 3, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 1 ⁄ 5 the mixture LC 50

. [Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268–66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461–45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173–138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 FR 45183, 45380, Aug. 28, 2001; 66 FR 49556, Sept. 28, 2001; 69 FR 54046, Sept. 7, 2004; 71 FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006; 74 FR 53188, Oct. 16, 2009]

§ 173.134 Class 6, Division 6.2—Definitions and exceptions.
(a) Definitions and classification criteria. For the purposes of this subchapter, the following definitions and classification criteria apply to Division
6.2 materials.

(1) Division 6.2 (Infectious substance) means a material known or reasonably expected to contain a pathogen. Apathogen is a microorganism (including bacteria, viruses, rickettsiae, parasites, fungi) or other agent, such as a proteinaceous infectious particle(prion), that can cause disease in humans or animals. An infectious substance must be assigned the identification number UN 2814, UN 2900, UN 3373, or UN 3291 as appropriate, and must beassigned to one of the following categories:

(i) Category A: An infectious substance in a form capable of causingpermanent disability or life-threatening or fatal disease in otherwisehealthy humans or animals when exposure to it occurs. An exposure occurs
when an infectious substance is released outside of its protective packaging, resulting in physical contact with humans or animals. A Category A infectious substance must be assigned
to identification number UN 2814 or UN 2900, as appropriate. Assignment to UN
2814 or UN 2900 must be based on the known medical history or symptoms of the source patient or animal, endemiclocal conditions, or professional judgment concerning the individual circumstances of the source human or
animal.

(ii) Category B: An infectious substance that is not in a form generally


### 507 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.134

capable of causing permanent disability or life-threatening or fatal disease in otherwise healthy humans or animals when exposure to it occurs. This includes Category B infectious substances transported for diagnosticor investigational purposes. A Category B infectious substance must be described as ‘‘Biological substance,Category B’’ and assigned identification number UN 3373. This does not include regulated medical waste, which must be assigned identification number
UN 3291.

(2) Biological product means a virus, therapeutic serum, toxin, antitoxin,vaccine, blood, blood component or derivative, allergenic product, or analogous product, or arsphenamine or derivative of arsphenamine (or any other trivalent arsenic compound) applicable to the prevention, treatment, or cure
of a disease or condition of human beings or animals. A biological productincludes a material subject to regulation under 42 U.S.C. 262 or 21 U.S.C. 151–159. Unless otherwise excepted, a biological product known or reasonably expected to contain a pathogen that meets the definition of a Category A or
B infectious substance must be assigned the identification number UN2814, UN 2900, or UN 3373, as appropriate.

(3) Culture means an infectious substance containing a pathogen that is intentionally propagated. Culture does not include a human or animal patient specimen as defined in paragraph (a)(4)
of this section.

(4) Patient specimen means human or animal material collected directly
from humans or animals and transported for research, diagnosis, investigational activities, or disease treatment or prevention. Patient specimen includes excreta, secreta, blood and its components, tissue and tissue swabs, body parts, and specimens in transport media ( e.g. , transwabs, culture media, and blood culture bottles).

(5) Regulated medical waste or clinical waste or (bio) medical waste means a waste or reusable material derived
from the medical treatment of an animal or human, which includes diagnosis and immunization, or from biomedical research, which includes the production and testing of biological products. Regulated medical waste or clinical waste or (bio) medical waste containing a Category A infectious
substance must be classed as an infectious substance, and assigned to UN2814 or UN2900, as appropriate.

(6) Sharps means any object contaminated with a pathogen or that may become contaminated with a pathogenthrough handling or during transportation and also capable of cutting orpenetrating skin or a packaging material. Sharps includes needles, syringes, scalpels, broken glass, culture slides, culture dishes, broken capillary tubes, broken rigid plastic, and exposed ends
of dental wires.

(7) Toxin means a Division 6.1 material from a plant, animal, or bacterial
source. A toxin containing an infectious
substance or a toxin contained in an infectious substance must be classed as Division 6.2, described as an infectious substance, and assigned to UN 2814 or UN 2900, as appropriate.

(8) Used health care product means a medical, diagnostic, or research device or piece of equipment, or a personalcare product used by consumers, medical professionals, or pharmaceuticalproviders that does not meet the definition of a patient specimen, biological product, or regulated medical waste, iscontaminated with potentially infectious body fluids or materials, and is
not decontaminated or disinfected toremove or mitigate the infectious hazard prior to transportation.

(b) Exceptions. The following are notsubject to the requirements of this subchapter as Division 6.2 materials:

(1) A material that does not contain
an infectious substance or that is unlikely to cause disease in humans or
animals.

(2) Non-infectious biological materials from humans, animals, or plants. Examples include non-infectious cells, tissue cultures, blood or plasma from individuals not suspected of having an infectious disease, DNA, RNA or other non-infectious genetic elements.

(3) A material containing micro-organisms that are non-pathogenic to humans or animals.

(4) A material containing pathogens
that have been neutralized or inactivated such that they no longer pose a
health risk.


### 508 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.134

(5) A material with a low probability of containing an infectious substance,
or where the concentration of the infectious substance is at a level naturally occurring in the environment so it cannot cause disease when exposureto it occurs. Examples of these materials include: Foodstuffs; environmental samples, such as water or a sample of dust or mold; and substances
that have been treated so that thepathogens have been neutralized or deactivated, such as a material treatedby steam sterilization, chemical disinfection, or other appropriate method, so it no longer meets the definition of
an infectious substance.

(6) A biological product, including anexperimental or investigational product or component of a product, subject to Federal approval, permit, review, or licensing requirements, such as thoserequired by the Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services or the U.S. Department of Agriculture.

(7) Blood collected for the purpose of blood transfusion or the preparation of blood products; blood products; plasma; plasma derivatives; blood components; tissues or organs intended for use in transplant operations; and human cell, tissues, and cellular and tissue-based products regulated under authority of the Public Health Service Act (42 U.S.C. 264–272) and/or the Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (21 U.S.C. 332 et seq. ).

(8) Blood, blood plasma, and blood components collected for the purpose of blood transfusion or the preparation of blood products and sent for testing as part of the collection process, except where the person collecting the blood
has reason to believe it contains an infectious substance, in which case thetest sample must be shipped as a Category A or Category B infectious substance in accordance with §173.196 or §173.199, as appropriate.

(9) Dried blood spots or specimens for fecal occult blood detection placed onabsorbent filter paper or other material.

(10) A Division 6.2 material, otherthan a Category A infectious substance, contained in a patient samplebeing transported for research, diagnosis, investigational activities, or disease treatment or prevention, or a biological product, when such materialsare transported by a private or contract carrier in a motor vehicle usedexclusively to transport such materials. Medical or clinical equipmentand laboratory products may be transported aboard the same vehicle provided they are properly packaged andsecured against exposure or contamination. If the human or animal sample or biological product meets the definitionof regulated medical waste in paragraph (a)(5) of this section, it must beoffered for transportation and transported in conformance with the appropriate requirements for regulated medical waste.

(11) A human or animal sample (including, but not limited to, secreta, excreta, blood and its components, tissue and tissue fluids, and body parts) beingtransported for routine testing not related to the diagnosis of an infectiousdisease, such as for drug/alcohol testing, cholesterol testing, blood glucoselevel testing, prostate specific antibody testing, testing to monitor kidney or liver function, or pregnancy testing, or for tests for diagnosis of non-infectious diseases, such as cancer biopsies, and for which there is a low probability the sample is infectious.

(12) Laundry and medical equipmentand used health care products, as follows:

(i) Laundry or medical equipment conforming to the regulations of theOccupational Safety and Health Administration of the Department ofLabor in 29 CFR 1910.1030. This exception includes medical equipment intended for use, cleaning, or refurbishment, such as reusable surgical equipment, or equipment used for testing where the components within which the equipment is contained essentially function as packaging. This exception does not apply to medical equipment being transported for disposal.

(ii) Used health care products not conforming to the requirements in 29 CFR 1910.1030 and being returned to the
manufacturer or the manufacturer’sdesignee are excepted from the requirements of this subchapter when offeredfor transportation or transported in accordance with this paragraph (b)(12). For purposes of this paragraph, a health care product is used when it has


### 509 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.134

been removed from its original packaging. Used health care products contaminated with or suspected of contamination with a Category A infectious substance may not be transported under the provisions of this paragraph.

(A) Each used health care productmust be drained of free liquid to the extent practicable and placed in a watertight primary container designed and
constructed to assure that it remainsintact under conditions normally incident to transportation. For a used health care product capable of cuttingor penetrating skin or packaging material, the primary container must be capable of retaining the product withoutpuncture of the packaging under normal conditions of transport. Each primary container must be marked with a BIOHAZARD marking conforming to 29 CFR 1910.1030(g)(1)(i).

(B) Each primary container must be placed inside a watertight secondary container designed and constructed to
assure that it remains intact underconditions normally incident to transportation. The secondary container
must be marked with a BIOHAZARD marking conforming to 29 CFR 1910.1030(g)(1)(i).

(C) The secondary container must be placed inside an outer packaging withsufficient cushioning material to prevent movement between the secondary container and the outer packaging. Anitemized list of the contents of the primary container and information concerning possible contamination with aDivision 6.2 material, including its possible location on the product, must beplaced between the secondary container and the outside packaging.

(D) Each person who offers or transports a used health care product under the provisions of this paragraph must know about the requirements of this paragraph.

(13) Any waste or recyclable material, other than regulated medical waste, including—

(i) Household waste as defined in §171.8, when transported in accordance with applicable state, local, or tribal requirements.

(ii) Sanitary waste or sewage; (iii) Sewage sludge or compost;(iv) Animal waste generated in animal husbandry or food production; or (v) Medical waste generated fromhouseholds and transported in accordance with applicable state, local, or tribal requirements.

(14) Corpses, remains, and anatomicalparts intended for interment, cremation, or medical research at a college, hospital, or laboratory.

(15) Forensic material transported on behalf of a U.S. Government, state,local or Indian tribal government agency, except that—

(i) Forensic material known or suspected to contain a Category B infectious substance must be shipped in apackaging conforming to the provisions of §173.24.

(ii) Forensic material known or suspected to contain a Category A infectious substance or an infectious substance listed as a select agent in 42 CFR Part 73 must be transported in packaging capable of meeting the test standards in §178.609 of this subchapter. The secondary packaging must be marked with a BIOHAZARD symbol conforming to specifications in 29 CFR 1910.1030(g)(1)(i). An itemized list of
contents must be enclosed between the secondary packaging and the outer packaging.

(16) Agricultural products and food as defined in the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetics Act (21 U.S.C. 332 et seq. ).

(c) Exceptions for regulated medical

waste. The following provisions applyto the transportation of regulated medical waste:

(1) A regulated medical waste transported by a private or contract carrier is excepted from—

(i) The requirement for an ‘‘INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE’’ label if the outerpackaging is marked with a ‘‘BIOHAZARD’’ marking in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1030; and

(ii) The specific packaging requirements of §173.197, if packaged in a rigid non-bulk packaging conforming to the general packaging requirements of§§173.24 and 173.24a and packaging requirements specified in 29 CFR 1910.1030, provided the material does
not include a waste concentrated stock
culture of an infectious substance. Sharps containers must be securely closed to prevent leaks or punctures.

(2) A waste stock or culture of a Category B infectious substance may be


### 510 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.136

offered for transportation and transported as a regulated medical waste when it is packaged in a rigid non-bulk packaging conforming to the general packaging requirements of §§173.24 and 173.24a and packaging requirementsspecified in 29 CFR 1910.1030 and transported by a private or contract carrierin a vehicle used exclusively to transport regulated medical waste. Medical or clinical equipment and laboratory products may be transported aboard the same vehicle provided they are properly packaged and secured against exposure or contamination. Sharps containers must be securely closed to prevent leaks or punctures.

(d) If an item listed in paragraph (b)or (c) of this section meets the definition of another hazard class or if it is a hazardous substance, hazardous waste, or marine pollutant, it must beoffered for transportation and transported in accordance with applicable requirements of this subchapter.

[67 FR 53138, Aug. 14, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003; 70 FR 56098, Sept. 23, 2005; 71 FR 32258, June 2, 2006; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006; 72 FR 55692, Oct. 1, 2007; 73 FR 4718, Jan. 28, 2008; 74 FR 2257, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.136 Class 8—Definitions.

(a) For the purpose of this subchapter, ‘‘corrosive material’’ (Class 8) means a liquid or solid that causes full
thickness destruction of human skin at the site of contact within a specified period of time. A liquid, or a solidwhich may become liquid during transportation, that has a severe corrosion
rate on steel or aluminum based on thecriteria in §173.137(c)(2) is also a corrosive material..

(b) If human experience or other data
indicate that the hazard of a material is greater or less than indicated by theresults of the tests specified in paragraph (a) of this section, PHMSA may
revise its classification or make the determination that the material is notsubject to the requirements of this subchapter.

(c) Skin corrosion test data produced no later than September 30, 1995, using the procedures of part 173, appendix A, in effect on September 30, 1995 (see 49 CFR part 173, appendix A, revised as ofOctober 1, 1994) for appropriate exposure times may be used for classification and assignment of packing group
for Class 8 materials corrosive to skin.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173– 241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997; 69 FR 76155, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006]

§ 173.137 Class 8—Assignment of packing group.
The packing group of a Class 8 material is indicated in Column 5 of the §172.101 Table. When the §172.101 Table provides more than one packing group for a Class 8 material, the packing group must be determined using data
obtained from tests conducted in accordance with the 1992 OECD Guideline for Testing of Chemicals, Number 404,
‘‘Acute Dermal Irritation/Corrosion’’ (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) as
follows:

(a) Packing Group I. Materials that
cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period of up to 60 minutes startingafter the exposure time of three minutes or less.

(b) Packing Group II. Materials other than those meeting Packing Group I
criteria that cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period of up to 14 days starting after the exposure time of
more than three minutes but not more
than 60 minutes.

(c) Packing Group III. Materials, other than those meeting Packing Group I or II criteria—

(1) That cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period of up to 14 days starting after the exposure time of more
than 60 minutes but not more than 4 hours; or

(2) That do not cause full thickness
destruction of intact skin tissue but
exhibit a corrosion on either steel or aluminum surfaces exceeding 6.25 mm (0.25 inch) a year at a test temperature
of 55 ° C (130 ° F) when tested on bothmaterials. The corrosion may be determined in accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) or other equivalent test methods.

N OTE TO §173.137: When an initial test on
either a steel or aluminum surface indicates


### 511 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.150

the material being tested is corrosive, thefollow up test on the other surface is not required.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 76155, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006; 74 FR 2257, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.140 Class 9—Definitions.

For the purposes of this subchapter,
miscellaneous hazardous material (Class 9) means a material which presents a hazard during transportation but which does not meet the definition of any
other hazard class. This class includes:

(a) Any material which has an anesthetic, noxious or other similar property which could cause extreme annoyance or discomfort to a flight crew member so as to prevent the correct performance of assigned duties; or

(b) Any material that meets the definition in §171.8 of this subchapter for an elevated temperature material, a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant.

[Amdt. 173–224, 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52939, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173–233, 58 FR 33305, June 16, 1993]

§ 173.141 Class 9—Assignment of packing group.
The packing group of a Class 9 material is as indicated in column 5 of the §172.101 table.

§ 173.144 Other Regulated Materials (ORM)—Definitions.
For the purpose of this subchapter,
‘‘ORM-D material’’ means a material such as a consumer commodity, which,although otherwise subject to the regulations of this subchapter, presents a limited hazard during transportationdue to its form, quantity and packaging. It must be a material for which exceptions are provided in the §172.101
table. Each ORM-D material and category of ORM-D material is listed in the §172.101 table.

§ 173.145 Other Regulated Materials— Assignment of packing group.
Packing groups are not assigned to
ORM-D materials. § 173.150 Exceptions for Class 3 (flammable and combustible liquids).
(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the §172.101 Table of this subchapter.

(b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of flammable liquids (Class 3) and combustible liquids are excepted fromlabeling requirements, unless the material also meets the definition of Division 6.1 or is offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. For transportation by aircraft, the package must also comply with the applicable requirements of§173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials authorized aboard passenger-carrying aircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. Inaddition, shipments of limited quantities are not subject to subpart F(Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package must conformto the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:

(1) For flammable liquids in Packing Group I, inner packagings not over 0.5 L (0.1 gallon) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings;

(2) For flammable liquids in Packing Group II, inner packagings not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallons) net capacity each, unless the material has a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1, Packing Group II, in which case the inner packagings maynot exceed 100 mL (3.38 ounces) net capacity each, packed in a strong outer packaging.

(3) For flammable liquids in Packing Group III and combustible liquids,inner packagings not over 5.0 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings.

(c) Consumer commodities. Except for a material that has a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1, Packing Group II, a limited quantity which conforms to theprovisions of paragraph (b) of this section and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in 171.8 of this subchapter,


### 512 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.151

may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ and reclassed as ORM–D material. In addition to the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, shipments of ORM–D materials are notsubject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets
the definition of a hazardous substance, hazardous waste, marine pollutant, or are offered for transportation and transported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in §173.156.

(d) Alcoholic beverages. An alcoholic beverage (wine and distilled spirits as defined in 27 CFR 4.10 and 5.11) is notsubject to the requirements of this subchapter if it—

(1) Contains 24 percent or less alcohol by volume;

(2) Is in an inner packaging of 5 L (1.3 gallons) or less, and for transportationon passenger-carrying aircraft conforms to §175.10(a)(4) of this subchapter as checked or carry-on baggage; or

(3) Is a Packing Group III alcoholic beverage in a packaging of 250 L (66 gallons) or less, unless transported by

air.

(e) Aqueous solutions of alcohol. An aqueous solution containing 24 percent or less alcohol by volume and no other
hazardous material—

(1) May be reclassed as a combustible liquid.

(2) Is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter if it contains no less than 50 percent water.

(f) Combustible liquids. (1) A flammable liquid with a flash point at or
above 38 ° C (100 ° F) that does not meet the definition of any other hazard classmay be reclassed as a combustible liquid. This provision does not apply totransportation by vessel or aircraft, except where other means of transportation is impracticable.

(2) The requirements in this subchapter do not apply to a material classed as a combustible liquid in anon-bulk packaging unless the combustible liquid is a hazardous substance, ahazardous waste, or a marine pollutant.

(3) A combustible liquid that is in a bulk packaging or a combustible liquidthat is a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter except those pertaining to:

(i) Shipping papers, waybills, switching orders, and hazardous waste manifests;

(ii) Marking of packages;(iii) Display of identification numbers on bulk packages;

(iv) For bulk packagings only, placarding requirements of subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter;

(v) Carriage aboard aircraft and vessels (for packaging requirements for transport by vessel, see §176.340 of this subchapter);

(vi) Reporting incidents as prescribedby §§171.15 and 171.16 of this subchapter;

(vii) Packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and, in addition, non-bulk packagings must conform with requirements of §173.203;

(viii) The requirements of §§173.1, 173.21, 173.24, 173.24a, 173.24b, 174.1, 177.804, 177.817, 177.834(j), and 177.837(d) of this subchapter;

(ix) The training requirements ofsubpart H of part 172 of this subchapter.

(x) Emergency response information requirements of subpart G of part 172.

(4) A combustible liquid that is not a hazardous substance, a hazardouswaste, or a marine pollutant is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter if it is a mixture of one or more components that—

(i) Has a flash point at or above 93 ° C (200 ° F),

(ii) Comprises at least 99 percent of the volume of the mixture, and

(iii) Is not offered for transportationor transported as a liquid at a temperature at or above its flash point.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990]

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.150, see the List of CFRSections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and
on GPO Access.

§ 173.151 Exceptions for Class 4.

(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the §172.101 table of this subchapter.


### 513 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.152

(b) Limited quantities of Division 4.1. Limited quantities of flammable solids (Division 4.1) in Packing Group II or IIIare excepted from labeling requirements, unless the material also meets
the definition of Division 6.1 or is offered for transportation or transportedby aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapterwhen packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. For transportation by aircraft, the package must also comply with the applicablerequirements of §173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials authorized aboard passenger-carryingaircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments of limited quantities are not subject to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package mustconform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:

(1) For flammable solids in Packing Group II, inner packagings not over 1.0kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each, unless the material has a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1, Packing Group II, in which case the inner packagings may not exceed 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) net capacity each, packed in a strong outer packaging.

(2) For flammable solids in Packing Group III, inner packagings not over 5.0 kg (11 pounds) net capacity each, packed in a strong outer packaging.

(c) Consumer commodities. Except for a material that has a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1, Packing Group II, a limited quantity which conforms to theprovisions of paragraph (b) of this section, and charcoal briquettes in packagings not exceeding 30 kg (66 pounds)gross weight, may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ and reclassed as
ORM–D material if the material is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter. In addition to the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, shipments of ORM–D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the
material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, hazardous waste, marine pollutant, or is offered for transportation and transported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in §173.156.

(d) Limited quantities of Division 4.3.Limited quantities of Division 4.3 (dangerous when wet) solids in PackingGroup II or III are excepted from labeling requirements, unless the material
also meets the definition of Division 6.1 or is offered for transportation ortransported by aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements ofthis subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to thisparagraph. For transportation by aircraft, the package must also comply with the applicable requirements of§173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials authorized aboard passenger-carrying aircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. Inaddition, shipments of limited quantities are not subject to subpart F(Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package must conformto the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:

(1) For Division 4.3 solids in Packing Group II, inner packagings not over 0.5 kg (1.1 pound) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings; and

(2) For Division 4.3 solids in Packing Group III, inner packagings not over 1 kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996; 69 FR 76156, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34398, June 14, 2005; 71 FR 14602, Mar. 22, 2006; 72 FR 55692, Oct. 1, 2007]

§ 173.152 Exceptions for Division 5.1 (oxidizers) and Division 5.2 (organic peroxides).
(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the §172.101 table of this subchapter.

(b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of oxidizers (Division 5.1) in Packing Group II and III and organic peroxides (Division 5.2) are excepted from labeling requirements, unless the


### 514 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.153

material also meets the definition ofDivision 6.1 or is offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, andthe specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. For transportation by aircraft, the package must also comply with the applicablerequirements of §173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials authorized aboard passenger-carryingaircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments of these limited quantities are not subject to subpart F of part 172 (Placarding) of this subchapter. Each package mustconform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:

(1) For oxidizers in Packing Group II,inner packagings not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) net capacity each for liquids ornot over 1.0 kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each for solids, unless the material has a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1, Packing Group II, in which case the inner packagings may not exceed 100 mL (3.38 ounces) for liquids or 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) for solids, packed in a strong outer packaging.

(2) For oxidizers in Packing Group III, inner packagings not over 5 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity each for liquids or not over 5.0 kg (11 lbs) net capacity each for solids, and packed in strong outer packagings.

(3) For organic peroxides which do not require temperature control during transportation—

(i) For Type D, E, or F organic peroxides, inner packagings not over 125 mL(4.22 ounces) net capacity each for liquids or 500 g (17.64 ounces) net capacityfor solids, packed in strong outer packagings.

(ii) For Type B or C organic peroxides, inner packagings not over 25 mL(0.845 ounces) net capacity each for liquids or 100 g (3.528 ounces) net capacityfor solids, packed in strong outer packagings.

(4) For polyester resin kits consisting of a base material component (Class 3,Packing Group II or III) and an activator component (Type C, D, E, or F organic peroxide which does not require temperature control)—

(i) The organic peroxide component must be packed in inner packagingsnot over 125 mL (4.22 ounces) net capacity each for liquids or 500 g (17.64 ounces) net capacity each for solids;

(ii) The flammable liquid component must be packed in inner packagings not over 5 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity each for Packing Group II or III liquid;
and

(iii) The flammable liquid component and the organic peroxide component may be packed in the same strong outer packaging provided they will not interact dangerously in the event of leakage.

(c) Consumer commodities. Except for a material that has a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1, Packing Group II, a limited quantity which conforms to theprovisions of paragraph (b) of this section, and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter,may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ and reclassed as ORM–D. In addition to the exceptions provided byparagraph (b) of this section, shipments of ORM–D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirementsof subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, hazardous waste, marine pollutant, or are offered for transportation andtransported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in §173.156.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45033, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 76156, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 14603, Mar. 22, 2006; 72 FR 55692, Oct. 1, 2007]

§ 173.153 Exceptions for Division 6.1 (poisonous materials).

(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the §172.101 table of this subchapter.

(b) Limited quantities of Division 6.1
materials. The exceptions in this paragraph do not apply to poison-by-inhalation materials. Limited quantities of


### 515 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.154

poisonous materials (Division 6.1) in Packing Group II and III are exceptedfrom the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagingsaccording to this paragraph. For transportation by aircraft, the package must also comply with the applicablerequirements of §173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials authorized aboard passenger-carryingaircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments of these limited quantities are not subject to subpart F of part 172 (Placarding) of this subchapter. Each package mustconform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:

(1) For poisonous materials in Packing Group II, inner packagings not over 100 mL (3.38 ounces) each for liquids or 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) each for solids, packed in a strong outer packaging.

(2) For poisonous materials in Packing Group III, inner packagings not over 4 L (1.0 gallon) each for liquids or 5.0 kg (11 pounds) each for solids, packed in a strong outer packaging.

(c) Consumer commodities. The following provisions apply to consumer
commodities:

(1) A limited quantity of poisonous material in Packing Group III whichconforms to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section, and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ and reclassed
as ORM–D.

(2) A poisonous material which is a drug or medicine and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 of thissubchapter, may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ and reclassed asORM-D material if packaged in a combination packaging not exceeding 30 kg (66 pounds) with inner packagings not over 250 mL (8 ounces) net capacity forliquids or 250 g (8.8 ounces) net capacity for solids packed in strong outerpackagings. Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part.

(3) Packages of ORM-D material areexcepted from the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter and from the labeling requirements ofsubpart E of part 172 of this subchapter. Shipments of ORM-D material are eligible for the exceptions provided in §173.156 and in paragraph (b) of thissection and are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the
material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant or unless offered for transportation or transported by
aircraft.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45033, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 76156, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 14603, Mar. 22, 2006; 71 FR 54938, Sept. 20, 2006]

§ 173.154 Exceptions for Class 8 (corrosive materials).

(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the §172.101 table of this subchapter.

(b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of corrosive materials (Class 8) in Packing Group II and III are excepted from labeling requirements, unless the
material also meets the definition ofDivision 6.1 or is offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, andthe specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. For transportation by aircraft, the package must also comply with the applicablerequirements of §173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials authorized aboard passenger-carryingaircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments of these limited quantities are not subject to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package mustconform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:

(1) For corrosive materials in Packing Group II, inner packagings not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) net capacity each for liquids or not over 1.0 kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each for solids, unless the


### 516 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.155

material has a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1, Packing Group II in whichcase the inner packagings may not exceed 100 mL (3.38 ounces) for liquids or 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) for solids, packed in a strong outer packaging.

(2) For corrosive materials in Packing Group III, in inner packagings not over 5.0 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity each for liquids, or not over 5.0 kg (11 lbs) net capacity each for solids, and packed in strong outer packagings.

(c) Consumer commodities. Except for a material that has a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1, Packing Group II, a limited quantity which conforms to theprovisions of paragraph (b) of this section, and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter,may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ and reclassed as ORM–D. In addition to the exceptions provided byparagraph (b) of this section, shipments of ORM–D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirementsof subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, hazardous waste, marine pollutant, or are offered for transportation andtransported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in §173.156.

(d) Materials corrosive to aluminum or steel only. Except for a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant, a material classed as a Class 8, Packing Group III, material solely
because of its corrosive effect—

(1) On aluminum is not subject toany other requirements of this subchapter when transported by motor vehicle or rail car in a packaging constructed of materials that will not react dangerously with or be degraded by the corrosive material; or

(2) On steel is not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter when transported by motor vehicle orrail car in a bulk packaging constructed of materials that will not react dangerously with or be degraded by the corrosive material.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; 68 FR 45033, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 76157, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 14603, Mar. 22, 2006; 72 FR 55693, Oct. 1, 2007] § 173.155 Exceptions for Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous materials).

(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the §172.101 table of this subchapter.

(b) Limited quantities . Limited quantities of miscellaneous hazardous materials (Class 9) are excepted from labeling, unless offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, andthe specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. For transportation by aircraft, the package must also comply with the applicablerequirements of §173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials authorized aboard passenger-carryingaircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments of these limited quantities are not subject to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package mustconform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:

(1) For liquids, inner packagings not over 5.0 L (1.3 gallons) net capacityeach. packed in strong outer packagings.

(2) For solids, inner packagings not over 5.0 kg (11 pounds) net capacityeach, packed in strong outer packagings.

(c) Consumer commodities. A limitedquantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this sectionand is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’
and reclassed as ORM-D material. In addition to the exceptions provided byparagraph (b) of this section, shipments of ORM-D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirementsof subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant or unless offered for transportation or


### 517 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.158

transported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in §173.156.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173– 253, 61 FR 27174, May 30, 1996; 71 FR 14603, Mar. 22, 2006]

§ 173.156 Exceptions for ORM materials.
(a) Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the §172.101 table or in a packaging section in this part.

(b) ORM-D. Packagings for ORM-D materials are specified according to hazard class in §§173.150 through 173.155and in §173.306. In addition to other exceptions specified for ORM-D materials in this part:

(1) Strong outer packagings as specified in this part, marking requirements specified in subpart D of part 172 of this subchapter, and the 30 kg (66 pounds)gross weight limitation are not required for materials classed as ORM-D
when—

(i) Unitized in cages, carts, boxes or similar overpacks;

(ii) Offered for transportation or transported by:

(A) Rail;(B) Private or contract motor carrier; or

(C) Common carrier in a vehicle under exclusive use for such service;
and

(iii) Transported to or from a manufacturer, a distribution center, or a retail outlet, or transported to a disposal facility from one offeror.

(2) The 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight limitation does not apply to materials
classed as ORM-D when offered for transportation, or transported, byhighway or rail between a manufacturer, a distribution center, and a retail outlet provided—

(i) Inner packagings conform to the quantity limits for inner packagings specified in §§173.150(b), 173.152(b), 173.154(b), 173.155(b) and 173.306 (a) and (b), as appropriate;

(ii) The inner packagings are packedinto corrugated fiberboard trays to prevent them from moving freely; (iii) The trays are placed in a fiberboard box which is banded and secured to a wooden pallet by metal, fabric, or plastic straps, to form a single palletized unit;

(iv) The package conforms to thegeneral packaging requirements of subpart B of this part;

(v) The maximum net quantity of hazardous material permitted on one palletized unit is 250 kg (550 pounds);
and

(vi) The package is properly markedin accordance with §172.316 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996; 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998]



### Subpart E—Non-bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and Class 7

S OURCE : Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise noted.

§ 173.158 Nitric acid.

(a) Nitric acid exceeding 40 percent concentration may not be packaged with any other material.

(b) Nitric acid in any concentration
which does not contain sulfuric acid or hydrochloric acid as impurities, whenoffered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water shall be packaged in specification containers
as follows:

(1) 1A1 stainless steel drums are authorized, subject to the following limitations:

(i) Stainless steel used in drums must conform to the following thicknesses:

Nominal (marked) capacity (in liters) of 1A1 drum Minimum thickness (in mm) of stainless steel

55 0.9

115 1.2

210 1.5

450 2.0

(ii) Drums weighing less than 85 percent of their original tare weight may
not be used.

(iii) Type 304 or other grades of equivalent corrosion-resistant steels in the as-welded condition are permissible for nitric acid concentrations up to and including 78 percent.


### 518 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.158

(iv) For all concentrations of nitric acid, the following are permissible:

(A) Type 304 heat-treated (quenched
in water at 1040 ° C (1900 ° F)),

(B) Stabilized Type 347 in the aswelded condition,

(C) Stabilized Type 347 stress-relieved (845–900 ° C (1550–1650 ° F)),

(D) Stabilized Type 347 heat-treated (quenched in water at 1040 ° C (1900 ° F)),

or (E) Other grades of equivalent corrosion resistance.

(v) All parts of drum exposed to lading must be capable of withstanding
the corrosive effect of nitric acid to the extent that 65 percent boiling nitric acid does not penetrate the metal more than 0.0381 mm (0.002 inches) per month. (ASTM A 262 may be used for a suitable corrosion test procedure.)

(vi) In addition to marking requiredby §178.503 of this subchapter, the following marks, in lettering of at least 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) height, must beplaced on drums used to transport nitric acid:

(A) The type of steel used in body and head sheets as identified by American Iron and Steel Institute type number,and, in addition, the letters ‘‘HT’’ following the steel designation on containers subject to stress relieving or heat treatment during manufacture.

(B) The thickness in mm of metal in thinnest part. When the thickness of metal in the body differs from that in the head, both must be indicated with slanting line between and with the gauge of the body indicated first.

(C) Original tare weight in kilograms, preceded by the letters ‘‘TW.’’ An example of the markings required by paragraphs (b)(1)(vi) (A), (B), and (C)
of this section is ‘‘304HT/1.9/2.7/TW55.’’

(2) 4H1 expanded plastics outer packagings with glass inner receptacles ofnot greater than 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity each. No more than four 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) inner receptacles may be packed in one outer packaging.

(c) Nitric acid of 80 percent or greater
concentration which does not contain sulfuric acid or hydrochloric acid asimpurities, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway,or water may be packaged in 1B1 aluminum drums. (d) Nitric acid of 90 percent or greater concentration, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water may be packaged as
follows:

(1) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes with inner packagings consisting ofglass bottles further individually overpacked in tightly closed metal packagings. Glass bottles must be of 2.5 L(0.66 gallon) or less capacity and cushioned with a non-reactive, absorbent material within the metal packagings.

(2) In combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2 or 4G outer packagings with inner glass packagings of 2.5 L (0.66 gallons) or less capacitycushioned with a non-reactive, absorbent material and packed within a tightly closed intermediate packaging of metal or plastic.

(e) Nitric acid of less than 90 percentconcentration, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water may be packaged in 4G fiberboard boxes or 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4Fwooden boxes with inside glass packagings of not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity each.

(f) Nitric acid of 70 percent or lessconcentration, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water, may be packaged as follows:

(1) In composite packagings 6PA1, 6PA2, 6PB1, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PD1, 6PH1, or6PH2. 6HH1 and 6HA1 composite packaging with plastic inner receptaclesmeeting the compatibility requirements §173.24(e) (e.g., PFA Teflon) are
authorized.

(2) In 4H1 expanded plastic boxes with inner glass packagings of not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) each.

(3) In combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G outer packagings and plastic inner packagings not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity further individually overpacked in tightly closed metal packagings.

(g) Nitric acid of more than 70 percent concentration, when offered for transportation or transported by cargo aircraft only, must be packaged in combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4Gouter packagings with glass or earthenware inner packagings of not over 1


### 519 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.159

L (0.3 gallon) or glass ampoules of not over 0.5 L (0.1 gallon).

(h) Nitric acid of less than 70 percentconcentration, when offered for transportation in cargo aircraft only mustbe packaged in combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G outer packagings with inner packagings of—

(1) Glass or earthenware not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity;

(2) Plastic not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon)capacity further individually overpacked in tightly closed metal packagings; or

(3) Glass ampoule not over 0.5 L (0.1 gallon) capacity.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003]

§ 173.159 Batteries, wet.

(a) Electric storage batteries, containing electrolyte acid or alkaline corrosive battery fluid (wet batteries),may not be packed with other materials except as provided in paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section and in §§173.220 and 173.222; and any battery orbattery-powered device must be prepared and packaged for transport in a manner to prevent:

(1) A dangerous evolution of heat ( i.e. , an amount of heat sufficient to be dangerous to packaging or personalsafety to include charring of packaging, melting of packaging, scorching of packaging, or other evidence);

(2) Short circuits, including, but not
limited to:

(i) Packaging each battery or eachbattery-powered device when practicable, in fully enclosed inner packagings made of non-conductive material;

(ii) Separating or packaging batteries and battery-powered devices in a manner to prevent contact with otherbatteries, devices or conductive materials ( e.g. , metal) in the packagings; or

(iii) Ensuring exposed terminals are protected with non-conductive caps,non-conductive tape, or by other appropriate means; and

(3) Damage to terminals. If not impact resistant, the outer packaging mustnot be used as the sole means of protecting the battery terminals from damage or short circuiting. Batteries must be securely cushioned and packed to prevent shifting which could loosenterminal caps or reorient the terminals. Batteries contained in devices must be securely installed. Terminal protection methods include but are not
limited to:

(i) Securely attaching covers of sufficient strength to protect the terminals;

(ii) Packaging the battery in a rigid plastic packaging; or

(iii) Constructing the battery with
terminals that are recessed or otherwise protected so that the terminals will not be subjected to damage if the package is dropped.

(b) For transportation by aircraft: (1) The packaging for wet batteriesmust incorporate an acid- or alkaliproof liner, or include a supplementary packaging with sufficient strength and adequately sealed to prevent leakage ofelectrolyte fluid in the event of spillage; and

(2) Any battery-powered device, equipment or vehicle must be packaged for transport in a manner to prevent
unintentional activation or must have an independent means of preventing unintentional activation ( e.g. , packaging restricts access to activation switch, switch caps or locks, recessed switches, trigger locks, temperature sensitive circuit breakers, etc.).

(c) The following specification packagings are authorized for batteriespacked without other materials provided all requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, and for transportationby aircraft, paragraph (b) of this section are met:

(1) Wooden box: 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F. (2) Fiberboard box: 4G. (3) Plywood drum: 1D. (4) Fiber drum: 1G. (5) Plastic drum: 1H2. (6) Plastic jerrican: 3H2. (7) Plastic box: 4H2. (d) The following non-specification packagings are authorized for batteriespacked without other materials provided all requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, and for transportationby aircraft, paragraph (b) of this section are met:


### 520 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.159

(1) Electric storage batteries arefirmly secured to skids or pallets capable of withstanding the shocks normally incident to transportation are authorized for transportation by rail, highway, or vessel. The height of the completed unit must not exceed 1 1 ⁄ 2 times the width of the skid or pallet.The unit must be capable of withstanding, without damage, a superimposed weight equal to two times the weight of the unit or, if the weight of the unit exceeds 907 kg (2,000 pounds), a superimposed weight of 1814 kg (4,000 pounds). Battery terminals must not be relied upon to support any part of the superimposed weight and must not
short out if a conductive material is placed in direct contact with them.

(2) Electric storage batteries weighing 225 kg (500 pounds) or more, consisting of carriers’ equipment, may beshipped by rail when mounted on suitable skids. Such shipments may not be offered in interchange service.

(3) One to three batteries not over 11.3 kg (25 pounds) each, packed instrong outer boxes. The maximum authorized gross weight is 34 kg (75 pounds).

(4) Not more than four batteries not over 7 kg (15 pounds) each, packed in strong outer fiberboard or wooden boxes. The maximum authorized gross weight is 30 kg (65 pounds).

(5) Not more than five batteries not over 4.5 kg (10 pounds) each, packed in strong outer fiberboard or wooden boxes. The maximum authorized gross weight is 30 kg (65 pounds).

(6) Single batteries not exceeding 34 kg (75 pounds) each, packed in 5-sidedslip covers or in completely closed fiberboard boxes. Slip covers and boxes
must be of solid or double-faced corrugated fiberboard of at least 91 kg (200 pounds) Mullen test strength. The slip cover or fiberboard box must fit snugly and provide inside top clearance of at least 1.3 cm (0.5 inch) above batteryterminals and filler caps with reinforcement in place. Assembled for shipment, the bottom edges of the slipcover must come to within 2.5 cm (1 inch) ofthe bottom of the battery. The completed package (battery and box or slip cover) must be capable of withstanding a top-to-bottom compression test of atleast 225 kg (500 pounds) without damage to battery terminal caps, cell covers or filler caps.

(7) Single batteries exceeding 34 kg(75 pounds) each may be packed in completely closed fiberboard boxes. Boxesmust be of double-wall corrugated fiberboard of at least 181 kg (400 pounds) test, or solid fiberboard testing at least 181 kg (400 pounds); a box may have hand holes in its ends provided that the hand holes will not materially weaken
the box. Sides and ends of the box must have cushioning between the batteryand walls of the box; combined thickness of cushioning material and walls
of the box must not be less than 1.3 cm(0.5 inch); and cushioning must be excelsior pads, corrugated fiberboard, or other suitable cushioning material.The bottom of the battery must be protected by a minimum of one excelsiorpad or by a double-wall corrugated fiberboard pad. The top of the battery must be protected by a wood frame, corrugated trays or scored sheets of corrugated fiberboard having minimum test of 91 kg (200 pounds), or other equally effective cushioning material. Top protection must bear evenly on connectors and/or edges of the batterycover to facilitate stacking of batteries. No more than one battery maybe placed in one box. The maximum authorized gross weight is 91 kg (200 pounds).

(e) When transported by highway orrail, electric storage batteries containing electrolyte or corrosive batteryfluid are not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter, if all of the following are met:

(1) No other hazardous materials may be transported in the same vehicle;

(2) The batteries must be loaded or braced so as to prevent damage and short circuits in transit;

(3) Any other material loaded in the same vehicle must be blocked, braced,or otherwise secured to prevent contact with or damage to the batteries;
and

(4) The transport vehicle may not carry material shipped by any person other than the shipper of the batteries.

(f) Batteries can be considered as non-spillable provided they are capable of withstanding the following two tests, without leakage of battery fluid from the battery:


### 521 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.159a

(1) Vibration test . The battery must berigidly clamped to the platform of a vibration machine, and a simple harmonic motion having an amplitude of 0.8 mm (0.03 inches) with a 1.6 mm (0.063 inches) maximum total excursion must be applied. The frequency must
be varied at the rate of 1 Hz/min between the limits of 10 Hz to 55 Hz. The entire range of frequencies and return
must be traversed in 95 ± 5 minutes for each mounting position (direction of vibrator) of the battery. The batterymust be tested in three mutually perpendicular positions (to include testing with fill openings and vents, if any, inan inverted position) for equal time periods.

(2) Pressure differential test . Following the vibration test, the battery must be
stored for six hours at 24 ° C ± 4 ° C (75

° F ± 7 ° F) while subjected to a pressure differential of at least 88 kPa (13 psig). The battery must be tested in three mutually perpendicular positions (to include testing with fill openings and vents, if any, in an inverted position) for at least six hours in each position.

(g) Electrolyte, acid or alkaline corrosive battery fluid, packed with batteries wet or dry, must be packed inone of the following specification packagings:

(1) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F wooden boxes with inner receptacles of glass, not over 4.0 L (1 gallon) each with notover 8.0 L (2 gallons) total in each outside container. Inside containers must be well-cushioned and separated frombatteries by a strong solid wooden partition. The completed package mustconform to Packing Group III requirements.

(2) Electrolyte, acid, or alkaline corrosive battery fluid included with electric storage batteries and filling kits may be packed in strong rigid outer packagings when shipments are made by, for, or to the Departments of the Army, Navy, or Air Force of the United States. Packagings must conform tomilitary specifications. The electrolyte, acid, or alkaline corrosive battery fluid must be packed in polyethylenebottles of not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each. Not more than 24 bottles,securely separated from electric storage batteries and kits, may be offered for transportation or transported in each package.

(3) In 4G fiberboard boxes with notmore than 12 inside packagings of polyethylene or other material resistant tothe lading, each not over 2.0 L (0.5 gallon) capacity each. Completed packages must conform to Packing Group III requirements. Inner packagings must be adequately separated from thestorage battery. The maximum authorized gross weight is 29 kg (64 pounds). These packages are not authorized for transportation by aircraft.

(h) Dry batteries or battery chargerdevices may be packaged in 4G fiberboard boxes with inner receptacles containing battery fluid. Completed packagings must conform to Packing Group III requirements. Not more than 12 inner receptacles may be packed in one
outer box. The maximum authorized gross weight is 34 kg (75 pounds).

(i) When approved by the AssociateAdministrator, electric storage batteries, containing electrolyte or corrosive battery fluid in a separate reservoir from which fluid is injected intothe battery cells by a power device cartridge assembled with the battery, and which meet the criteria of paragraph(f) are not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter.

[74 FR 2257, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.159a Exceptions for non-spillable batteries.
(a) Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the §172.101 table or in a packaging section in this part.

(b) Non-spillable batteries offered fortransportation or transported in accordance with this section are subject to the incident reporting requirements.For transportation by aircraft, a telephone report in accordance with §171.15(a) is required if a fire, violentrupture, explosion or dangerous evolution of heat ( i.e. , an amount of heat sufficient to be dangerous to packaging or personal safety to include charring of packaging, melting of packaging,scorching of packaging, or other evidence) occurs as a direct result of a non-spillable battery. For all modes of


### 522 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.160

transportation, a written report in accordance with §171.16(a) is required if afire, violent rupture, explosion or dangerous evolution of heat occurs as a direct result of a non-spillable battery.

(c) Non-spillable batteries are excepted from the packaging requirements of §173.159 under the following
conditions:

(1) Non-spillable batteries must be securely packed in strong outer packagings and meet the requirements of §173.159(a). A non-spillable batterywhich is an integral part of and necessary for the operation of mechanicalor electronic equipment must be securely fastened in the battery holder on the equipment;

(2) The battery and outer packaging must be plainly and durably marked
‘‘NON-SPILLABLE’’ or ‘‘NON-SPILLABLE BATTERY.’’ The requirement to mark the outer package does not apply when the battery is installed in a piece of equipment that is transported unpackaged.

(d) Non-spillable batteries are excepted from all other requirements ofthis subchapter when offered for transportation and transported in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section and the following:

(1) At a temperature of 55 ° C (131 ° F), the battery must not contain any unabsorbed free-flowing liquid, and must be designed so that electrolyte will not flow from a ruptured or cracked case; and

(2) For transport by aircraft, when contained in a battery-powered device, equipment or vehicle must be preparedand packaged for transport in a manner to prevent unintentional activation in conformance with §173.159(b)(2) of this Subpart.

[74 FR 2258, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 FR 72, Jan. 4, 2010]

§ 173.160 Bombs, smoke, non-explosive (corrosive).
Bombs, smoke, non-explosive may beshipped provided they are without ignition elements, bursting charges, detonating fuses or other explosive components. They must be packaged in wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D) or reconstituted wood (4F) boxes, or plywood drums (1D), which meet Packing Group II requirements. § 173.161 Chemical kits and first aid kits.
(a) Chemical kits and First aid kitsmust conform to the following requirements:

(1) The kits may only contain hazardous materials for which packaging exceptions are provided in column 8(A) the §172.101 Table of this subchapter.

(2) The kits must be packed in a strong outer packaging conforming to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this subchapter.

(3) The kits must include sufficientabsorbent material to completely absorb the contents of any liquid hazardous materials contained in the kits. The contents must be separated, placed, or packed, and closed with cushioning material to protect them from damage.

(4) The contents of the kits must be packed so there will be no possibility ofthe mixture of contents causing dangerous evolution of heat or gas.

(5) The packing group assigned to the
kits as a whole must be the most stringent packing group assigned to any individual substance contained in the
kits.

(6) Inner receptacles containing hazardous materials within the kits mustnot contain more than 250 ml for liquids or 250 g for solids per receptacle.

(7) The total quantity of hazardous materials in any one outer package must not exceed either 10 L or 10 kg.

(b) Chemical kits and First aid kits are excepted from the specificationpackaging requirements of this subchapter. Chemical kits and First aidkits are also excepted from the labeling requirements of this subchapter except when offered for transportation ortransported by air. In addition, Chemical kits and First aid kits are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter (Placarding), part 174 (Carriage by rail) of this subchapter except §174.24 (Shipping papers), and part 177(Carriage by highway) of this subchapter except §177.817 (Shipping papers). Kits that meet the definition for a consumer commodity in §171.8 of thissubchapter may be transported in accordance with the exceptions for ORM materials in §173.156.

[Doc. No. 2002–13658, 68 FR 45033, July 31, 2003]


### 523 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.164

§ 173.162 Gallium.

(a) Except when packaged in cylinders or steel flasks, gallium must be packaged in packagings which meet the requirements of part 178 of thissubchapter at the Packing Group I performance level for transportation by aircraft, and at the Packing Group III performance level for transport by highway, rail or vessel, as follows:

(1) In combination packagings intended to contain liquids consisting of glass, earthenware or rigid plastic inner packagings with a maximum net mass of 15 kg (33 pounds) each. The inner packagings must be packed inwood boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F), fiberboard boxes (4G), plastic boxes (4H1, 4H2), fiber drums (1G) or removable head steel and plastic drums or jerricans (1A2, 1H2, 3A2 or 3H2) withsufficient cushioning materials to prevent breakage. Either the inner packagings or the outer packagings must have an inner liner that is leakproof orbags of strong leakproof and punctureresistant material impervious to the contents and completely surroundingthe contents to prevent it from escaping from the package, irrespective of its position.

(2) In packagings intended to contain liquids consisting of semi-rigid plastic inner packagings of not more than 2.5kg (5.5 pounds) net capacity each, individually enclosed in a sealed, leaktight bag of strong puncture-resistant material. The sealed bags must be packed in wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood(4D), reconstituted wood (4F), fiberboard (4G) or plastic (4H1, 4H2) boxes or in fiber (1G) or steel (1A2) drums, whichare lined with leak-tight, puncture-resistant material. Bags and liner material must be chemically resistant to gallium.

(3) Cylinders and steel flasks with
vaulted bottoms are also authorized.

(b) When it is necessary to transport gallium at low temperatures in order to maintain it in a completely solid state, the above packagings may be overpacked in a strong, water-resistant outer packaging which contains dry iceor other means of refrigeration. If a refrigerant is used, all of the above materials used in the packaging of galliummust be chemically and physically resistant to the refrigerant and must have impact resistance at the low temperatures of the refrigerant employed. If dry ice is used, the outer packagingmust permit the release of carbon dioxide gas.

(c) Manufactured articles or apparatuses, each containing not more than 100 mg (0.0035 ounce) of gallium and packaged so that the quantity of gallium per package does not exceed 1g (0.35 ounce) are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.

[64 FR 10777, Mar. 5, 1999; as amemded at 66 FR 33430, June 21, 2001]

§ 173.163 Hydrogen fluoride.

(a) Hydrogen fluoride (hydrofluoric acid, anhydrous) must be packaged as
follows:

(1) In specification 3, 3A, 3AA, 3B, 3BN, or 3E cylinders; or in specification 4B, 4BA, or 4BW cylinders except that brazed 4B, 4BA, and 4BW cylinders are not authorized. The filling density may not exceed 85 percent of the cylinder’s water weight capacity. In place of the periodic volumetric expansion test, cylinders used in exclusive service maybe given a complete external visual inspection in conformance with part 180, subpart C, of this subchapter, at the time such requalification becomes due.

(2) In a UN cylinder, as specified in part 178 of this subchapter, having a minimum test pressure of 10 bar and a maximum filling ratio of 0.84.

(b) A cylinder removed from hydrogen fluoride service must be condemned in accordance with §180.205 of this subchapter. Alternatively, at the direction of the owner, the requalifier may render the cylinder incapable of holding pressure.

[71 FR 33880, June 12, 2006]

§ 173.164 Mercury (metallic and articles containing mercury).
(a) For transportation by aircraft,mercury must be packaged in packagings which meet the requirements ofpart 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, as follows:

(1) In inner packagings of earthenware, glass or plastic containing notmore than 3.5 kg (7.7 pounds) of mercury, or inner packagings which are glass ampoules containing not more


### 524 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.164

than 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) of mercury, oriron or steel quicksilver flasks containing not more than 35 kg (77 pounds) of mercury. The inner packagings or flasks must be packed in steel drums (1A2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden boxes (4C1), (4C2), plywood boxes (4D),reconstituted wood boxes (4F), fiberboard boxes (4G), plastic boxes (4H2), plywood drums (1D) or fiber drums (1G).

(2) [Reserved](3) When inner packagings of earthenware, glass or plastic are used, they must be packed in the outer packaging with sufficient cushioning material to prevent breakage.

(4) Either the inner packagings or theouter packagings must have inner linings or bags of strong leakproof andpuncture-resistant material impervious to mercury, completely surrounding the contents, so that the escape of mercury will be prevented irrespective of the position of the package.

(b) Manufactured articles or apparatuses, each containing not more than 100 mg (0.0035 ounce) of mercury and packaged so that the quantity of mercury per package does not exceed 1 g (0.035 ounce) are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.

(c) Manufactured articles or apparatuses containing mercury areexcepted from the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged as follows:

(1) Manufactured articles or apparatuses of which metallic mercury is a component part, such as manometers, pumps, thermometers,switches, etc. (for electron tubes, mercury vapor tubes and similar tubes, see paragraph (c)(3) of this section), must be in strong outer packagings, having sealed inner liners or bags of strongleakproof and puncture-resistant material impervious to mercury, which will prevent the escape of mercury from the package irrespective of its position.Mercury switches and relays are excepted from these packaging requirements, if they are totally enclosed,leakproof and in sealed metal or plastic units.

(2) Thermometers, switches and relays, each containing a total quantity of not more than 15 g (0.53 ounces) ofmercury, are excepted from the requirements of this subchapter if installed as an integral part of a machine or apparatus and so fitted that shock of impact damage, leading to leakage of mercury, is unlikely to occur underconditions normally incident to transport.

(3) Electron tubes, mercury vaportubes and similar tubes must be packaged as follows:

(i) Tubes which are packed in strong outer packagings with all seams andjoints sealed with self-adhesive, pressure-sensitive tape which will preventthe escape of mercury from the package, are authorized up to a total netquantity of 450 g (15.9 ounces) of mercury per package;

(ii) Tubes with more than 450 g (15.9 ounces) of mercury are authorized onlywhen packed in strong outer packagings, having sealed inner liners orbags of strong leakproof and punctureresistant material impervious to mercury which will prevent escape of mercury from the package irrespective of its position;

(iii) Tubes which do not contain more than 5 g (0.2 ounce) of mercury eachand which are packed in the manufacturer’s original packagings, are authorized up to a total net quantity of 30 g (1.1 ounces) of mercury per package;

(iv) Tubes which are completely jacketed in sealed leakproof metal cases
are authorized in the manufacturer’s original packagings.

(4) A person offering for transportation electron tubes, mercury vapor tubes, and similar tubes shall indicate the quantity of mercury therein on the shipping paper.

(5) Mercurial barometers conforming to paragraph (c)(1) of this section,
which are loaded and unloaded from an aircraft under the supervision of, and accompanied in flight by, a National
Weather Service official or similarUnited States agency official, are excepted from any other requirements of this subchapter.

(d) For transportation by other than aircraft, mercury must be packaged—

(1) In any packaging which meets therequirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group III performance level; or

(2) In non-specification reusable metal packagings.


### 525 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.166

(e) Except for a hazardous substanceor a hazardous waste or for transportation by aircraft or vessel, packages containing less than 0.45 kg (1.0 pound) net weight of mercury are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; 64 FR 10777, 10778, Mar. 5, 1999; 68 FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003]

§ 173.166 Air bag inflators, air bag modules and seat-belt pretensioners.

(a) Definitions. An air bag inflator (consisting of a casing containing an igniter, a booster material, a gas generant and, in some cases, a pressure vessel (cylinder)) is a gas generatorused to inflate an air bag in a supplemental restraint system in a motor vehicle. An air bag module is the air baginflator plus an inflatable bag assembly. A seat-belt pre-tensioner contains similar hazardous materials and is usedin the operation of a seat-belt restraining system in a motor vehicle.

(b) Classification. An air bag inflator, air bag module, or seat-belt pretensioner may be classed as Class 9 (UN3268) if:

(1) The manufacturer has submitted each design type air bag inflator, air bag module, or seat-belt pretensioner to a person approved by the Associate Administrator, in accordance with §173.56(b), for examination and testing.
The submission must contain a detailed description of the inflator or pretensioner or, if more than a single inflator or pretensioner is involved, themaximum parameters of each particular inflator or pretensioner design type for which approval is sought and details on the complete package. Themanufacturer must submit an application, including the test results and report recommending the shipping description and classification for each device or design type to the AssociateAdministrator, and must receive written notification from the Associate Administrator that the device has beenapproved for transportation and assigned an EX number; or,

(2) The manufacturer has submittedan application, including a classification issued by the competent authority of a foreign government to the Associate Administrator, and received written notification from the Associate Administrator that the device has beenapproved for transportation and assigned an EX number.

(c) EX numbers. When offered for transportation, the shipping papermust contain the EX number or product code for each approved inflator, module or pretensioner in association with the basic description required by §172.202(a) of this subchapter. Product codes must be traceable to the specific EX number assigned to the inflator,module or pretensioner by the Associate Administrator. The EX number or product code is not required to be marked on the outside package.

(d) Exceptions. (1) An air bag module or seat-belt pretensioner that has beenapproved by the Associate Administrator and is installed in a motor vehicle, aircraft, boat or other transportconveyance or its completed components, such as steering columns or doorpanels, is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.

(2) An air bag module containing aninflator that has been previously approved for transportation is not required to be submitted for further examination or approval.

(3) An air bag module containing aninflator that has previously been approved as a Division 2.2 material is notrequired to be submitted for further examination to be reclassed as a Class 9
material.

(4) Shipments for recycling. When offered for domestic transportation by highway, rail freight, cargo vessel or cargo aircraft, a serviceable air bagmodule or seat-belt pretensioner removed from a motor vehicle that was manufactured as required for use in theUnited States may be offered for transportation and transported withoutcompliance with the shipping paper requirement prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section. However, the word ‘‘Recycled’’ must be entered on the shipping paper immediately after the basic description prescribed in §172.202 of this subchapter. No more than one device is authorized in the packaging prescribed in paragraph (e)(1), (2) or (3)
of this section. The device must be


### 526 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.168

cushioned and secured within the package to prevent movement during transportation.

(e) Packagings. Rigid, outer packagings, meeting the general packagingrequirements of part 173, and the packaging specification and performance requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group III performance level are authorized as follows. The packagings must be designed and constructed to prevent movementof the articles and inadvertent operation.

(1) 1A2, 1B2, 1G or 1H2 drums. (2) 3A2 or 3H2 jerricans. (3) 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 boxes. (4) Reusable high strength plastic or metal containers or dedicated handling devices are authorized for shipment of air bag inflators, air bag modules, andseat-belt pretensioners from a manufacturing facility to the assembly facility, subject to the following conditions:

(i) The gross weight of the container or handling device may not exceed 1000kg (2205 pounds). The container or handling device structure must provide adequate support to allow them to be stacked at least three high with no damage to the containers or devices.

(ii) If not completely enclosed by design, the container or handling devicemust be covered with plastic, fiberboard, or metal. The covering must be secured to the container by banding or other comparable methods.

(iii) Internal dunnage must be sufficient to prevent shifting of the devices
within the container.

(5) Packagings specified in the approval document issued by the Associate Administrator in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section are also
authorized.

(f) Labeling. Notwithstanding the provisions of §172.402 of this subchapter, each package or handling device mustdisplay a CLASS 9 label. Additional labeling is not required when the package contains no hazardous materials
other than the devices.

[Amdt. 173–230, 57 FR 1878, Jan. 16, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 64 FR 10778, Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 45183, 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45034, July 31, 2003; 68 FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 71 FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006; 71 FR 78632, Dec. 29,2006]

§ 173.168 Chemical oxygen generators.

An oxygen generator, chemical (defined in §171.8 of this subchapter) maybe transported only under the following conditions:

(a) Approval . A chemical oxygen generator that is shipped with an explosive or non-explosive means of initiation attached must be classed and approvedby the Associate Administrator in accordance with the procedures specified in §173.56 of this subchapter.

(b) Impact resistance. A chemical oxygen generator, without any packaging, must be capable of withstanding a 1.8 meter drop onto a rigid, non-resilient,flat and horizontal surface, in the position most likely to cause actuation or
loss of contents.

(c) Protection against inadvertent actuation. A chemical oxygen generator must incorporate one of the followingmeans of preventing inadvertent actuation:

(1) A chemical oxygen generator that is not installed in protective breathing equipment (PBE):

(i) Mechanically actuated devices: (A) Two pins, installed so that each is independently capable of preventing the actuator from striking the primer;

(B) One pin and one retaining ring,each installed so that each is independently capable of preventing the actuator from striking the primer; or

(C) A cover securely installed over the primer and a pin installed so as to prevent the actuator from striking the primer and cover.

(ii) Electrically actuated devices:
The electrical leads must be mechanically shorted and the mechanical short
must be shielded in metal foil.

(iii) Devices with a primer but no actuator: A chemical oxygen generator that has a primer but no actuating mechanism must have a protective


### 527 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.171

cover over the primer to prevent actuation from external impact.

(2) A chemical oxygen generator installed in a PBE must contain a pin installed so as to prevent the actuator from striking the primer, and be placed in a protective bag, pouch, case orcover such that the protective breathing equipment is fully enclosed in such a manner that the protective bag,pouch, case or cover prevents unintentional actuation of the oxygen generator.

(d) Packaging . A chemical oxygengenerator and a chemical oxygen generator installed in equipment, (e.g., a PBE) must be placed in a rigid outer packaging that—

(1) Conforms to the requirements of
either:

(i) Part 178, subparts L and M, of this subchapter at the Packing Group I or II performance level; or

(ii) The performance criteria in AirTransport Association (ATA) Specification No. 300 for a Category I Shipping
Container.

(2) After September 30, 2009, with itscontents, is capable of meeting the following additional requirements when transported by cargo-only aircraft:

(i) The Flame Penetration Resistance Test specified in Appendix E to part 178 of this subchapter.

(ii) The Thermal Resistance Test specified in Appendix D to part 178 of this subchapter.

(e) Equipment marking. The outside surface of a chemical oxygen generatormust be marked to indicate the presence of an oxygen generator (e.g., ‘‘oxygen generator, chemical’’). The outside surface of equipment containing a chemical oxygen generator that is notreadily apparent (e.g., a sealed passenger service unit) must be clearly marked to indicate the presence of the oxygen generator (example: ‘‘Oxygen Generator Inside’’).

(f) Items forbidden in air transportation. (1) A chemical oxygen generator is forbidden for transportation on board a passenger-carrying aircraft.

(2) A chemical oxygen generator is forbidden for transportation by bothpassenger-carrying and cargo-only aircraft after:

(i) The manufacturer’s expiration date; or (ii) The contents of the generator have been expended.

[72 FR 4455, Jan. 31, 2007, as amended at 72 FR 55097, Sept. 28, 2007; 74 FR 2259, Jan. 14, 2009; 74 FR 53188, Oct. 16, 2009]

§ 173.170 Black powder for small arms.

Black powder for small arms that hasbeen classed in Division 1.1 may be reclassed as a Division 4.1 material, fordomestic transportation by motor vehicle, rail freight, and cargo vesselonly, subject to the following conditions:

(a) The powder must be examined and approved for Division 1.1 and Division
4.1 classification in accordance with §§173.56 and 173.58;

(b) The total quantity of black powder in one motor vehicle, rail car, or freight container may not exceed 45.4 kg (100 pounds) net mass, and no more than four freight containers may be on board one cargo vessel;

(c) The black powder must be packedin inner metal or heavy wall conductive plastic receptacles not over 454 g (16 ounces) net capacity each, with no
more than 25 cans in one outer UN 4G fiberboard box. The inner packagings must be arranged and protected so as to prevent simultaneous ignition of the contents. The complete package mustbe of the same type which has been examined as required in §173.56;

(d) Each completed package must be
marked ‘‘BLACK POWDER FOR SMALL ARMS’’ and ‘‘NA 0027’’; and

(e) Each package must bear the
FLAMMABLE SOLID label.

[Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996, as amended at Amdt. 173–255, 62 FR 14338, Mar. 26, 1997]

§ 173.171 Smokeless powder for small

arms. Smokeless powder for small arms
which has been classed in Division 1.3may be reclassed in Division 4.1, for domestic transportation by motor vehicle, rail car, vessel, or cargo-only aircraft, subject to the following conditions:

(a) The powder must be examined and approved for a Division 1.3 and Division
4.1 classification in accordance with §§173.56 and 173.58 of this part.


### 528 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.172

(b) The total quantity of smokeless powder may not exceed 45.4 kg (100 pounds) net mass in:

(1) One rail car, motor vehicle, or cargo-only aircraft; or

(2) One freight container on a vessel, not to exceed four freight containers per vessel.

(c) Only combination packagings with inner packagings not exceeding3.6 kg (8 pounds) net mass are authorized. Inner packagings must be arranged and protected so as to prevent simultaneous ignition of the contents. The complete package must be of the same type which has been examined as required in §173.56 of this part.

(d) Inside packages that have beenexamined and approved by the Associate Administrator may be packaged in UN 4G fiberboard boxes meeting the Packing Group I performance level, provided all inside containers are packed to prevent shifting and the net weight of smokeless powder in any one box does not exceed 7.3 kg (16 pounds).

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 253, 61 FR 27174, May 30, 1996; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 75 FR 53597, Sept. 1, 2010]

§ 173.172 Aircraft hydraulic power unit fuel tank.
Aircraft hydraulic power unit fueltanks containing a mixture of anhydrous hydrazine and monomethyl hydrazine (M86 fuel) and designed for installation as complete units in aircraft are excepted from the specificationpackaging requirements of this subchapter when they conform to either of the following conditions:

(a) The unit must consist of an aluminum pressure vessel made from tubing and having welded heads. Primary
containment of the fuel within this
vessel must consist of a welded aluminum bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 L (12 gallons). The
outer vessel must have a minimum design gauge pressure of 1,275 kPa (185psig) and a minimum burst gauge pressure of 2,755 kPa (400 psig). Each vesselmust be leak-checked during manufacture and before shipment and must be found leakproof. The complete innerunit must be securely packed in noncombustible cushioning material, suchas vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which willadequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per unit and package is 42 L (11 gallons); or

(b) The unit must consist of an aluminum pressure vessel. Primary containment of the fuel within this vessel must consist of a welded hermeticallysealed fuel compartment with an elastomeric bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 L (12 gallons). The pressure vessel must have a minimum design gauge pressure of 5,170 kPa (750psig). Each vessel must be leakchecked during manufacture and before shipment and must be securely packedin non-combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packagingwhich will adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per unit and package is 42 L (11 gallons).

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by 66 FR 45380]

§ 173.173 Paint, paint-related material, adhesives, ink and resins.
(a) When the §172.101 table specifies that a hazardous material be packagedunder this section, the following requirements apply. Except as otherwise provided in this part, the description ‘‘Paint’’ is the proper shipping namefor paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, liquid aluminum, liquid bronze, liquid gold, liquid wood filler,and liquid lacquer base. The description ‘‘Paint-related material’’ is the proper shipping name for a paint thinning, drying, reducing or removing compound. However, if a more specific description is listed in the §172.101table of this subchapter, that description must be used.

(b) Paint, paint-related material, adhesives, ink and resins must be packaged as follows:

(1) As prescribed in §173.202 of thispart if it is a Packing Group II material or §173.203 of this part if it is a Packing Group III material; or

(2) In inner glass packagings of not over 1 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each or inner metal packagings of not over 5 L (1 gallon) each, packed in a strongouter packaging. Packages must conform to the packaging requirements of


### 529 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.183

subpart B of this part but need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994]

§ 173.174 Refrigerating machines.

A refrigerating machine assembled for shipment and containing 7 kg (15 pounds) or less of a flammable liquidfor its operation in a strong, tight receptacle is excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation ortransported by air) and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter. In addition. shipments are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter (Placarding), to part 174 of this subchapter (Carriage by rail) except §174.24 (Shipping papers) and to part 177 (Carriage by highway) of this subchapter except §177.817 (Shipping papers).

§ 173.181 Pyrophoric materials (liquids).
When the §172.101 table specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only the following non-bulk packagings are authorized:

(a) Specification steel or nickel cylinders prescribed for any compressedgas except acetylene having a minimum design pressure of 1206 kPa (175 psig). Cylinders with valves must be:

(1) Equipped with steel valve protection caps or collars, unless overpacked;

or (2) Overpacked in a wooden box (4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F); fiberboard box (4G), or plastic box (4H1 or 4H2). Cylinders must be secured to prevent shifting inthe box and, when offered for transportation or transported, must be so loaded that pressure relief devices remain in the vapor space of the cylinder. (See §177.838(h) of this subchapter.)

(b) Wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) or fiberboard boxes (4G) enclosing not more than four strong, tight metal cans with inner receptacles of glass ormetal, not over 1 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each, having positive screwcap closures adequately gasketed. Inner packagings must be cushioned on all sideswith dry, absorbent, incombustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. The strong, tight metal cans must be closed by positive means, not by friction.

(c) Steel drums (1A2) or fiber drums(1G) not exceeding 220 L (58 gallons) capacity each with strong tight innermetal cans not over 4.0 L (1 gallon) capacity each, closed by positive means,
not friction.

(1) Inner packagings must have noopening exceeding 25 mm (1 inch) diameter and must be surrounded with noncombustible cushioning material.

(2) Net quantity of pyrophoric liquids may not exceed two-thirds of the ratedcapacity of the outer drum. For example, a 220 L (58 gallons) outer drum may contain no more than 147 L (39 gallons) of pyrophoric liquids.

(3) Each layer of inner containersmust be separated by a metal plate separator in addition to cushioning material.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45183, 45380, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 24660, May 8, 2003; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003]

§ 173.182 Barium azide—50 percent or
more water wet.
Barium azide—50 percent or more water wet, must be packed in wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) or fiber drums (1G) with inner glass packagings not over 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) capacity each. Packagings must have rubber stoppers wire tied for securement. If transportation is to take place when and where freezing weather is possible,
a suitable antifreeze solution must beused to prevent freezing. Each packaging must conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level.

§ 173.183 Nitrocellulose base film.

Films, nitrocellulose base, must be packaged in packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group III performance level, as follows:

(a) In steel drums (1A2), aluminum drums (1B2), steel jerricans (3A2),wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D) or reconstituted wood (4F) boxes or plywood drums (1D) with each reel in a tightlyclosed metal can, polypropylene canister, or strong cardboard or fiberboard


### 530 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.184

inner packaging with cover held in place by adhesive tape or paper; or

(b) In fiberboard (4G) boxes or fiber drums (1G) with a single tightly closed metal can, polypropylene canister, or strong cardboard or fiberboard inner packaging with cover held in place by adhesive tape or paper; authorized only for not over 600 m (1969 feet) of film.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50627, Sept. 26, 1996]

§ 173.184 Highway or rail fusee.

(a) A fusee is a device designed to
burn at a controlled rate and to produce visual effects for signaling purposes. The composition of the fuseemust be such that the fusee will not ignite spontaneously or undergo marked decomposition when subjected to a temperature of 75 ° C (167 ° F) for 48 consecutive hours.

(b) Fusees (highway and railway) must be packaged in steel drums (1A2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D) or reconstituted wood (4F) boxes or in fiberboard boxes (4G), plywood (1D) or fiber (1G) drums. If thefusees are equipped with spikes packagings must have reinforced ends to prevent penetration of spikes through the outer packagings; packages mustbe capable of passing drop test requirements (§178.603 of this subchapter), including at least one drop with spike ina downward position, and other requirements of part 178 of this subchapter, at the Packing Group II performance level.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45379]

§ 173.185 Lithium cells and batteries.

(a) Cells and batteries. A lithium cellor battery, including a lithium polymer cell or battery and a lithium-ion cell or battery, must conform to all of the following requirements:

(1) Be of a type proven to meet the requirements of each test in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR; see§171.7 of this subchapter). A cell or battery and equipment containing a cell or battery that was first transported prior to January 1, 2006 and is of a type proven to meet the criteria of Class 9 by testing in accordance with the tests in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, Third Revised Edition, 1999, need
not be retested.

(2) Incorporate a safety venting device or otherwise be designed in a manner that will preclude a violent rupture under conditions normally incident to transportation.

(3) Be equipped with an effective means to prevent dangerous reverse current flow (e.g., diodes, fuses, etc.) if a battery contains cells or series of cells that are connected in parallel.

(4) Be packaged in combination packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178, subparts L and M, of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performance level. The lithium batteryor cell must be packed in inner packagings in such a manner as to prevent short circuits, including movement
which could lead to short circuits. The inner packaging must be packed within one of the following outer packagings: metal boxes (4A or 4B); wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F); fiberboard boxes (4G); solid plastic boxes (4H2); fiber drums (1G); metal drums (1A2 or 1B2); plywood drums (1D); plastic jerricans (3H2); or metal jerricans (3A2 or 3B2).

(5) Be equipped with an effectivemeans of preventing external short circuits.

(6) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, cells and batteries with a liquid cathode containing sulfur dioxide, sulfuryl chloride or thionylchloride may not be offered for transportation or transported if any cell has been discharged to the extent that the open circuit voltage is less than two volts or is less than 2/3 of the voltage of the fully charged cell, whichever is
less.

(b) Lithium cells or batteries packed with equipment. Lithium cells or batteries packed with equipment may be transported as Class 9 materials if the
batteries and cells meet all the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section. The equipment and the packages
of cells or batteries must be further packed in a strong outer packaging. The cells or batteries must be packed in such a manner as to prevent short circuits, including movement that
could lead to short circuits.

(c) Lithium cells or batteries contained in equipment . Lithium cells or batteries


### 531 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.186

contained in equipment may be transported as Class 9 materials if the cellsand batteries meet all the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, except paragraph (a)(4) of this section, and the equipment is packed in astrong outer packaging that is waterproof or is made waterproof through the use of a liner unless the equipment is made waterproof by nature of its construction. The equipment and cells
or batteries must be secured within the outer packaging and be packed so as to prevent movement, short circuits, and accidental operation during transport.

(d) Cells and batteries, for disposal or recycling. A lithium cell or battery offered for transportation or transportedby motor vehicle to a permitted storage facility, disposal site or for purposes of recycling is excepted from the specification packaging requirements of paragraph (a)(4) of this section and the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1)and (a)(6) of this section when protected against short circuits and packed in a strong outer packaging conforming to the requirements of §§173.24 and 173.24a.

(e) Shipments for testing (prototypes). A lithium cell or battery is excepted from the requirements of (a)(1) of thissection when transported by motor vehicle for purposes of testing. The cell or battery must be individually packed in an inner packaging, surrounded bycushioning material that is non-combustible and nonconductive. The cell or battery must be transported as a Class
9 material.

(f) A lithium cell or battery that does not comply with the provisions of this subchapter may be transported onlyunder conditions approved by the Associate Administrator.

(g) Batteries employing a strong, impact-resistant outer casing and exceeding a gross weight of 12 kg (26.5 lbs.), and assemblies of such batteries, may be packed in strong outer packagings, in protective enclosures (for example, in fully enclosed wooden slatted crates)or on pallets. Batteries must be secured to prevent inadvertent movement, and the terminals may not support the weight of other superimposed elements. Batteries packaged in thismanner are not permitted for transportation by passenger aircraft, and may be transported by cargo aircraft only ifapproved by the Associate Administrator prior to transportation.

[72 FR 44949, Aug. 9, 2007]

§ 173.186 Matches.

(a) Matches must be of a type whichwill not ignite spontaneously or undergo marked decomposition when subjected for 8 consecutive hours to a temperature of 93 ° C (200 ° F).

(b) Definitions. (1) Fusee matches arematches the heads of which are prepared with a friction-sensitive ignitercomposition and a pyrotechnic composition which burns with little or no flame, but with intense heat.

(2) Safety matches are matches combined with or attached to the box, book or card that can be ignited by friction only on a prepared surface.

(3) Strike anywhere matches are matches that can be ignited by friction
on a solid surface.

(4) Wax ‘‘Vesta’’ matches are matches that can be ignited by friction eitheron a prepared surface or on a solid surface.

(c) Safety matches and wax ‘‘Vesta’’matches must be tightly packed in securely closed inner packagings to prevent accidental ignition under conditions normally incident to transportation, and further packed in outer fiberboard, wooden, or other equivalenttype packagings. These matches in outer packagings not exceeding 23 kg(50 pounds) gross weight are not subject to any other requirement (except marking) of this subchapter. These matches may be packed in the same outer packaging with materials not subject to this subchapter.

(d) Strike-anywhere matches maynot be packed in the same outer packaging with any material other than safety matches or wax ‘‘Vesta’’matches, which must be packed in separate inner packagings.

(e) Packagings. Strike-anywherematches must be tightly packed in securely closed chipboard, fiberboard, wooden, or metal inner packagings toprevent accidental ignition under conditions normally incident to transportation. Each inner packaging may contain no more than 700 strike-anywhere matches and must be packed in outer steel drums (1A2), aluminum drums


### 532 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.187

(1B2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D), reconstitutedwood (4F) or fiberboard (4G) boxes, plywood (1D) or fiber (1G) drums. Gross weight of fiberboard boxes (4G) must not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds). Gross weight of other outer packagings must not exceed 45 kg (100 pounds).

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 69 FR 76157, Dec. 20, 2004]

§ 173.187 Pyrophoric solids, metals or alloys, n.o.s.
Packagings for pyrophoric solids, metals, or alloys, n.o.s. must conform to the requirements of part 178 of thissubchapter at the packing group performance level specified in the §172.101Table. These materials must be packaged as follows:

(a) In steel boxes (4A) and contain not more than 15 kg (33 pounds) each.

(b) In wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) with inner metal receptacles which have a positive (not friction) means of
closure and contain not more than 15 kg (33 pounds) each.

(c) In fiberboard boxes (4G) with inner metal receptacles which have a positive (not friction) means of closure and contain not more than 7.5 kg (17 pounds) each.

(d) In steel drums (1A1 or 1A2) with a gross mass not exceeding 150 kg (331 pounds) per drum.

(e) In plywood drums (1D) with innermetal receptacles which have a positive (not friction) means of closure and contain not more than 15 kg (33 pounds) each.

(f) In fiber drums (1G) with innermetal receptacles which have a positive (not friction) means of closure and contain not more than 15 kg (33 pounds) each.

(g) In specification cylinders, as prescribed for any compressed gas, except for Specifications 8 and 3HT.

[71 FR 78632, Dec. 29, 2006]

§ 173.188 White or yellow phosphorus.

Phosphorus, white or yellow, whenoffered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water, mustbe packaged in water or dry in packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, as
follows:

(a) When placed in water, it must be packaged in specification packagings
as follows:

(1) Wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F)
with:

(i) Inner hermetically sealed (soldered) metal cans, enclosed in other hermetically sealed (soldered) metal

cans, or

(ii) Inner water-tight metal cans containing not over 0.5 kg (1 pound) of phosphorus with screw-top closures; or

(2) Steel drums (1A1) not over 250 L (66 gallons) capacity each or steel drums (1A2) not over 115 L (30 gallons) capacity each.

(b) When dry, it must be cast solid and shipped in packagings as follows:

(1) Steel drums (1A2) not over 115 L (30 gallons) capacity each, or

(2) In projectiles or bombs when shipped by, for, or to the Departments of the Army, Navy, or Air Force of the United States Government, without bursting elements.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991]

§ 173.189 Batteries containing sodium or cells containing sodium.(a) Batteries and cells may not contain any hazardous material other than sodium, sulfur or polysulfides. Cellsnot forming a component of a completed battery may not be offered for transportation at a temperature at which any liquid sodium is present in the cell. Batteries may only be offered for transportation, or transported, at atemperature at which any liquid sodium present in the battery conformsto the conditions prescribed in paragraph (d) of this section.

(b) Cells must consist of hermeticallysealed metal casings which fully enclose the hazardous materials and
which are so constructed and closed as to prevent the release of the hazardous
materials under normal conditions oftransport. Cells must be placed in suitable outer packagings with sufficient cushioning material to prevent contact
between cells and between cells and theinternal surfaces of the outer packaging, and to ensure that no dangerous shifting of the cells within the outer packaging occurs in transport. Cells


### 533 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.192

must be packaged in 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outerpackagings which meet the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performance
level.

(c) Batteries must consist of cells secured within, and fully enclosed by a metal casing so constructed and closedas to prevent the release of the hazardous materials under normal conditions of transport. Batteries may be offered for transportation, and transported, unpacked or in protective packagings that are not subject to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.

(d) Batteries containing any liquidsodium may not be offered for transportation, or transported, by aircraft. Batteries containing liquid sodium may be transported by motor vehicle, rail car or vessel under the following
conditions:

(1) Batteries must be equipped withan effective means of preventing external short circuits, such as by providingcomplete electrical insulation of battery terminals or other external electrical connectors. Battery terminals or other electrical connectors penetrating the heat insulation fitted in battery casings must be provided with thermal insulation sufficient to prevent the temperature of the exposed surfaces of such devices from exceeding 55 ° C (130

° F).

(2) No battery may be offered for transportation if the temperature at any point on the external surface of the battery exceeds 55 ° C (130 ° F).

(3) If any external source of heatingis used during transportation to maintain sodium in batteries in a moltenstate, means must be provided to ensure that the internal temperature of the battery does not reach or exceed
400 ° C (752 ° F).

(4) When loaded in a transport vehicle or freight container:

(i) Batteries must be secured so as to prevent significant shifting within the transport vehicle or freight container under conditions normally incident to transportation;

(ii) Adequate ventilation and/or separation between batteries must be provided to ensure that the temperature at any point on the external surface of the battery casing will not exceed 240

° C (464 ° F) during transportation; and

(iii) No other hazardous materials, with the exception of cells containing sodium, may be loaded in the same transport vehicle or freight container. Batteries must be separated from all other freight by a distance of not less than 0.5 m (1.6 feet).

(e) Vehicles, machinery and equipment powered by sodium batteries must be consigned under the entry‘‘Battery-powered vehicle or Batterypowered equipment.’’

[Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67511, Dec. 29, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 173–256, 61 FR 51338, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 74 FR 2259, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.192 Packaging for certain toxic gases in Hazard Zone A.
When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies a toxic material must be packaged under this section, only the following cylinders are authorized:

(a) Specification 3A1800, 3AA1800,3AL1800, 3E1800, or seamless UN cylinders with a minimum test pressure in
accordance with P200 of the UN Recommendations (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(1) Specification 3A, 3AA, or 3AL cylinders may not exceed 57 kg (125 lb) water capacity (nominal).

(2) Specification 3AL cylinders may only be offered for transportation or transported by highway and rail.

(b) Packagings must conform to the requirements of §173.40.

(c) For cylinders used for phosgene: (1) The filling density may not exceed 125 percent;

(2) A cylinder may not contain more than 68 kg (150 lb) of phosgene; and

(3) Each cylinder containing phosgene must be tested for leakage before it is offered for transportation or transported and must show no leakage.The leakage test must consist of immersing the cylinder and valve, without the protective cap attached, in abath of water at a temperature of approximately 66 ° C (150 ° F) for at least 30 minutes, during which time frequent
examinations must be made to noteany escape of gas. The valve of the cylinder may not be loosened after this


### 534 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.193

test. Suitable safeguards must be provided to protect personnel and facilities should failure occur during the test. As an alternative, each cylinder containing phosgene may be tested forleakage by a method approved in writing by the Associate Administrator.

[67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 33880, June 12, 2006]

§ 173.193 Bromoacetone, methyl bromide, chloropicrin and methyl bromide or methyl chloride mixtures,
etc. (a) Bromoacetone must be packaged as follows in wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F) with inner glass receptacles ortubes in hermetically sealed metal receptacles in corrugated fiberboard cartons. Bottles may not contain over 500 g (17.6 ounces) of liquid each and must
be cushioned in cans with at least 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) of absorbent material. Total amount of liquid in the outer box must not exceed 11 kg (24 pounds).Packagings must conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level.

(b) Bromoacetone, methyl bromide,chloropicrin and methyl bromide mixtures, chloropicrin and methyl chloride mixtures, and chloropicrin mixturescharged with non-flammable, non-liquefied compressed gas must be packed in Specification 3A, 3AA, 3B, 3C, 3E, 4A, 4B, 4BA, 4BW, or 4C cylinders havingnot over 113 kg (250 pounds) water capacity (nominal). This capacity doesnot apply to shipments of methyl bromide.

(c) Methyl bromide mixtures containing up to 2% chloropicrin must be packaged in 4G fiberboard boxes with inside metal cans containing not over one pound each, or inside metal cans
with a minimum wall thickness of 0.007 inch containing not over 1 3 ⁄ 4 poundseach. The one-pound can must be capable of withstanding an internal pressure of 130 psig without leakage or permanent distortion. Vapor pressure of the contents must not exceed 130 psig
at 55 ° C (130 ° F). The 1 3 ⁄ 4 –pound canmust be capable of withstanding an internal pressure of 140 psig without leakage or permanent distortion. Vapor pressure of the contents must not exceed 140 psig at 55 ° C (130 ° F). Cans must not be liquid full at 130 ° F. Cans must be constructed of tinplate or
lined with suitable material and must have concave or pressure ends.

(d) Cylinders, except those containing methyl bromide, must conform to §173.40 of this part.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992]

§ 173.194 Gas identification sets.

Gas identification sets containing poisonous material must be packagedin packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, as follows:

(a) In glass inner receptacles, hermetically sealed, of not over 40 mL (1.4fluid ounces) each. Each glass inner receptacle must in turn be placed in a sealed fiberboard receptacle, cushioned
with absorbent material. Not more than 12 fiberboard receptacles must in turn be placed in a 4G fiberboard box.No more than four boxes, well-cushioned, may in turn be placed in a steel cylinder. The cylinder must have a wall thickness of at least 3.7 mm (0.146 inch) and must have a hermetically
sealed steel closure.

(b) When the poisonous material is
absorbed in a medium such as activated charcoal or silical gel, gas identification sets may be shipped as follows:

(1) If the poisonous material does not exceed 5 mL (0.2 fluid ounce) if a liquid or 5 g (0.2 ounce) if a solid, it may be packed in glass inner receptacles of not over 120 mL (4.1 fluid ounces) each. Each glass receptacle, cushioned with absorbent material must be packed in a hermetically sealed metal can of not less than 0.30 mm (0.012 inch) wall thickness. Metal cans, surrounded on all sides by at least 25 mm (1 inch) of dry sawdust, must be packed in 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes. Not more than 100 mL (3.4 fluid ounces) or 100 g (3.5 ounces) of poisonous materials may be packed in one outer wooden box.

(2) If the poisonous material does not exceed 5 mL (0.2 fluid ounce) if a liquid or 20 g (0.7 ounce) if a solid, it may be packed in glass inner receptacles with screw-top closures of not less than 60 mL (2 ounces), hermetically sealed. Twelve bottles containing poisonous


### 535 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.196

material, not to exceed 100 mL (3.4 ounces) or 100 g (3.5 ounces), or both, may be placed in a plastic carrying case, each glass receptacle surroundedby absorbent cushioning and each separated from the other by sponge rubber partitions. The plastic carrying casemust be placed in a tightly fitting fiberboard box which in turn must be placed in a tightly fitting 4C1, 4C2, 4D
or 4F wooden box.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45183, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001]

§ 173.195 Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous, stabilized (hydrocyanic acid, aqueous solution). (a) Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous,stabilized, must be packed in specification cylinders or UN pressure receptacles as follows:

(1) As prescribed in §173.192; (2) Specification 3A480, 3A480X, 3AA480, or 3A1800 metal cylinders ofnot over 126 kg (278 pounds) water capacity (nominal);

(3) Shipments in 3AL cylinders are authorized only when transported by highway and rail; or

(4) UN cylinders, as specified in part 178, with a minimum test pressure of 100 bar and a maximum filling ratio of
0.55. The use of UN tubes and MEGCs is
not authorized.

(b) Cylinders may not be charged with more than 0.27 kg (0.6 pound) ofliquid per 0.45 kg (1 pound) water capacity of cylinder. Each filled cylinder must be tested for leakage before beingoffered for transportation or transported and must show absolutely noleakage; this test must consist of passing a piece of Guignard’s sodium picrate paper over the closure of the cylinder, without the protection cap attached, to detect any escape of hydrogen cyanide from the cylinder. Other equally efficient test methods may be used in place of sodium picrate paper.

(c) Packagings for hydrogen cyanide must conform to §173.40.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; 71 FR 33880, June 12, 2006]

§ 173.196 Category A infectious substances.
(a) Category A infectious substances packaging. A packaging for a Division 6.2 material that is a Category A infectious substance must meet the test standards of §178.609 of this subchapter
and must be marked in conformance with §178.503(f) of this subchapter. A packaging for a Category A infectioussubstance is a triple packaging consisting of the following components:

(1) A leakproof primary receptacle. (2) A leakproof secondary packaging. If multiple fragile primary receptaclesare placed in a single secondary packaging, they must be either wrapped individually or separated to prevent contact between them.

(3) A rigid outer packaging of adequate strength for its capacity, mass and intended use. The outer packaging must measure not less than 100 mm (3.9 inches) at its smallest overall external
dimension.

(4) For a liquid infectious substance, an absorbent material placed betweenthe primary receptacle and the secondary packaging. The absorbent material must be sufficient to absorb theentire contents of all primary receptacles.

(5) An itemized list of contents enclosed between the secondary packaging and the outer packaging.

(6) The primary receptacle or secondary packaging used for infectioussubstances must be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internalpressure producing a pressure differential of not less than 95 kPa (0.95 bar, 14 psi).

(7) The primary receptacle or secondary packaging used for infectioussubstances must be capable of withstanding without leakage temperatures in the range of

¥ 40 ° C to +55 ° C (

¥ 40 ° F
to +131 ° F).

(b) Additional requirements for packaging Category A infectious substances. Category A infectious substances must be packaged according to the followingrequirements, depending on the physical state and other characteristics of
the material.

(1) Infectious substances shipped at ambient temperatures or higher. Primary receptacles must be made of glass, metal, or plastic. Positive means of ensuring a leakproof seal must be provided, such as heat seal, skirted stopper, or metal crimp seal. If screw caps are used, they must be secured by positive means,


### 536 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.197

such as with adhesive tape, paraffin sealing tape, or manufactured locking closure. Lyophilized substances mayalso be transported in primary receptacles that are flame-sealed with glass ampoules or rubber-stoppered glass
vials fitted with metal seals.

(2) Infectious substances shipped refrigerated or frozen (ice, pre-frozen packs, dry ice). Ice, dry ice, or other refrigerant must be placed around the secondary packagings or in an overpack with one or more complete packages marked in accordance with §178.503 of this subchapter. Interior supports must be provided to secure the secondary packagings in the original position after the ice or dry ice has dissipated. If ice is used, the outer packaging or overpack must be leakproof. If dry iceis used, the outer packaging or overpack must permit the release of carbon dioxide gas and otherwise meet theprovisions in §173.217. The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging must maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used, as well as the temperatures and pressures of transport by aircraft to which they could be subjected if refrigeration were
lost.

(3) Infectious substances shipped in liquid nitrogen. The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging mustmaintain their integrity at the temperature of the liquid nitrogen as well as the temperatures and pressures of transport by aircraft to which they could be subjected if refrigeration werelost. Refrigerated liquid nitrogen packagings must be metal vacuum insulated vessels or flasks vented to the atmosphere to prevent any increase in pressure within the packaging. The use of safety relief valves, check valves, frangible discs, or similar devices in the vent lines is prohibited. Fill and discharge openings must be protected against the entry of foreign materialsthat might cause an increase in the internal pressure. The package orientation markings specified in §172.312(a) of this subchapter must be marked on thepackaging. The packaging must be designed to prevent the release of any refrigerated liquid nitrogen irrespective of the packaging orientation.

(c) Live animals may not be used to transport infectious substances unless such substances cannot be sent by any other means. An animal containing or
contaminated with an infectious substance must be transported under terms and conditions approved by the
Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.

(d) Body parts, organs or whole bodies meeting the definition of Division6.2 material must be packaged as follows:

(1) In Division 6.2 packaging, as specified in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this
section; or

(2) In packaging meeting the requirements of §173.197.

[67 FR 53140, Aug. 14, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 32260, June 2, 2006; 74 FR 2259, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.197 Regulated medical waste.

(a) General provisions. Non-bulk packagings, Large Packagings, and nonspecification bulk outer packagingsused for the transportation of regulated medical waste or clinical waste or (bio) medical waste must be rigid containers meeting the provisions of subpart B of this part.

(b) Non-bulk packagings. Except as provided in §173.134(c) of this subpart, non-bulk packagings for regulated medical waste or clinical waste or (bio)
medical waste must be UN standardpackagings conforming to the requirements of Part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performance level. A non-bulk packaging used as asharps container must be puncture-resistant for sharps and sharps with residual fluid as demonstrated by conducting the performance tests in Part 178, subpart M, of this subchapter onpackagings containing materials representative of the sharps and fluids (such as sterile sharps) intended to be transported in the packagings. Sharps containers must be securely closed toprevent leaks or punctures in conformance with the instructions provided bythe packaging manufacturer in accordance with §178.2(c) of this subchapter.

(c) Large Packagings. (c) Large Packagings. Large Packagings constructed, tested, and marked in accordance with the requirements specified in subparts P and Q of part 178 of this subchapter and conforming


### 537 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.197

to other requirements of this paragraph (c) may be used for the transportation of regulated medical waste, provided the waste is contained in innerpackagings conforming to the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section. * * * Each Large Packaging designmust be capable of meeting the vibration test specified in §178.819 of this subchapter. Each Large Packaging issubject to the periodic design requalification requirements for IBCs in §178.801(e) of this subchapter, and to the proof of compliance requirementsof §178.801(j) and record retention requirements of §178.801(l) of this subchapter. Inner packagings used for liquids must be rigid.

(1) Authorized packagings. Only thefollowing Large Packagings are authorized for the transportation of liquid or solid regulated medical waste:

(i) Metal: 50A, 50B, or 50N. (ii) Rigid plastic: 50H. (2) Additional requirements. EachLarge Packaging used to transport liquid regulated medical waste must contain absorbent material in sufficient quantity and appropriate location to absorb the entire amount of liquidpresent in the event of an unintentional release of contents. Each Large Packaging design intended for the transportation of sharps containers must be puncture resistant and capable of retaining liquids. The design must also be tested and certified as meetingthe performance tests specified for intermediate bulk containers intendedfor the transportation of liquids in subpart O of part 178 of this subchapter.

(d) Non-specification bulk packaging. Awheeled cart (Cart) or bulk outer packaging (BOP) is authorized as an outer packaging for the transportation of regulated medical waste in accordance with the provisions of this paragraph (d).

(1) General requirements. The following requirements apply to the transportation of regulated medical
waste in Carts or BOPs:

(i) Regulated medical waste in each
Cart or BOP must be contained in nonbulk inner packagings conforming to paragraph (e) of this section.

(ii) Each Cart or BOP must have smooth, non-porous interior surfacesfree of cracks, crevices, and other defects that could damage plastic filminner packagings or impede disinfection operations.

(iii) Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph (d), each Cart or BOPmust be used exclusively for the transportation of regulated medical waste. Prior to reuse, each Cart or BOP must be disinfected by any means effectivefor neutralizing the infectious substance the packaging previously contained.

(iv) Untreated concentrated stock
cultures of infectious substances containing Category A materials may not be transported in a Cart or BOP.

(v) Division 6.1 toxic waste or Class 7 radioactive waste, with the exception of chemotherapeutic waste, may not be transported in a Cart or BOP.

(vi) Division 6.1 or Class 7 chemotherapeutic waste; untreated
concentrated stock cultures of infectious substances containing Category Binfectious substances; unabsorbed liquids; and sharps containers may be transported in a Cart or BOP only if packaged in rigid non-bulk packagingsconforming to paragraph (a) of this section.

(2) Wheeled cart (Cart). A Cart is authorized as an outer packaging for the transportation of regulated medical waste if it conforms to the following requirements:

(i) Each Cart must consist of a solid, one-piece body with a nominal volume not exceeding 1,655 L (437 gallons).

(ii) Each Cart must be constructed of metal, rigid plastic, or fiberglass fitted with a lid to prevent leakage during transport.

(iii) Each Cart must be capable of meeting the requirements of §178.810(drop test) at the Packing Group II performance level.

(iv) Inner packagings must be placed
into a Cart and restrained in such a
manner as to minimize the risk of breakage.

(3) Bulk outer packaging (BOP). A BOP is authorized as an outer packaging for regulated medical waste if it conforms to the following requirements:

(i) Each BOP must be constructed of metal or fiberglass and have a capacity of at least 3.5 cubic meters (123.6 cubic feet) and not more than 45 cubic meters (1,590 cubic feet).


### 538 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.197

(ii) Each BOP must have bottom and side joints of fully welded or seamless construction and a rigid, weatherproof top to prevent the intrusion of water ( e.g., rain or snow).

(iii) Each opening in a BOP must befitted with a closure to prevent the intrusion of water or the release of any liquid during all loading, unloading, and transportation operations.

(iv) In the upright position, each BOP must be leakproof and able to contain a liquid quantity of at least 300 liters (79.2 gallons) with closures open.

(v) Inner packagings must be placed
in a BOP in such a manner as to minimize the risk of breakage. Rigid inner packagings may not be placed in the same BOP with plastic film bag inner packagings unless separated from each other by rigid barriers or dividers to prevent damage to the packagings caused by load shifting during normal conditions of transportation.

(vi) Division 6.1 or Class 7 chemotherapeutic waste, untreated
concentrated stock cultures of infectious substances containing Category Binfectious substances, unabsorbed liquids, and sharps may be transported in a BOP only if separated and secured as required in paragraph (d)(3)(v) of this

section.

(e) Inner packagings authorized for Large Packagings, Carts, and BOPs.After September 30, 2003, inner packagings must be durably marked or tagged with the name and location (city and state) of the offeror, except when the entire contents of the Large Packaging, Cart, or BOP originates at a single location and is delivered to a single location.

(1) Solids. A plastic film bag is authorized as an inner packaging for solid regulated medical waste transported in a Cart, Large Packaging, or BOP. Waste material containing absorbed liquid may be packaged as a solid in aplastic film bag if the bag contains sufficient absorbent material to absorband retain all liquid during transportation.

(i) The film bag may not exceed a volume of 175 L (46 gallons). The film bag must be marked and certified by its manufacturer as having passed the tests prescribed for tear resistance in ASTM D 1922, ‘‘Standard Test Method for Propagation Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Thin Sheeting by Pendulum Method’’ (IBR, §171.7 of this subchapter) and for impact resistancein ASTM D 1709, ‘‘Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method’’ (IBR, §171.7 of this subchapter). Thefilm bag must meet an impact resistance of 165 grams and a tearing resistance of 480 grams in both the parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the bag.

(ii) The plastic film bag must be closed with a minimum of entrappedair to prevent leakage in transportation. The bag must be capable of being held in an inverted position withthe closed end at the bottom for a period of 5 minutes without leakage.

(iii) When used as an inner packaging for Carts or BOPs, a plastic film bag may not weigh more than 10 kg (22 lbs.)
when filled.

(2) Liquids. Liquid regulated medical waste or clinical waste or (bio) medicalwaste transported in a Large Packaging, Cart, or BOP must be packaged in a rigid inner packaging conforming to the provisions of subpart B of this part. conforming to the provisions of subpart B of this part. Liquid materials are not authorized for transportation in inner packagings having a capacity greater than 19 L (5 gallons).

(3) Sharps. Sharps transported in a Large Packaging, Cart, or BOP must be packaged in a puncture-resistant inner packaging (sharps container). Each sharps container must be securely closed to prevent leaks or punctures inconformance with instructions provided by the packaging manufacturer. Each sharps container exceeding 76 L (20 gallons) in volume must be capable of passing the performance tests in Part 178, subpart M, of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performancelevel. A sharps container may be reused only if it conforms to the following criteria:

(i) The sharps container is specifically approved and certified by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration as a
medical device for reuse.

(ii) The sharps container must be permanently marked for reuse.

(iii) The sharps container must be disinfected prior to reuse by any means


### 539 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.199

effective for the infectious substance the container previously contained.

(iv) The sharps container must havea capacity greater than 7.57 L (2 gallons) and not greater than 151.42 L (40 gallons) in volume.

[67 FR 53140, Aug. 14, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003; 71 FR 32261, June 2, 2006; 71 FR 78632, Dec. 29, 2006; 75 FR 60339, Sept. 30, 2010]

§ 173.198 Nickel carbonyl.

(a) Nickel carbonyl must be packedin specification steel or nickel cylinders as prescribed for any compressed gas except acetylene. A cylinder used exclusively for nickel carbonyl may begiven a complete external visual inspection instead of the pressure test required by §180.205 of this subchapter.Visual inspection must be in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C–6 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(b) Packagings for nickel carbonyl must conform to §173.40.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec 21, 1990, as amended at 67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003]

§ 173.199 Category B infectious substances.

(a) Category B infectious substances. Except as provided in this paragraph (a), Category B infectious substancesare excepted from all other requirements of this subchapter when offeredfor transportation or transported in accordance with this section. Category B
infectious substances offered for transportation or transported under the provisions of this section are subject to the incident reporting requirements in §§171.15 and 171.16 of this subchapter and to the requirements in §175.75(b) ofthis subchapter concerning cargo location. Except as provided in paragraph(a)(9) of this section, a Category B infectious substance meeting the definition of a hazard class other than Division 6.2 must be offered for transportation or transported in accordance with applicable requirements of this subchapter.

(1) A Category B infectious substance must be packaged in a triple packaging consisting of a primary receptacle, a secondary packaging, and a rigid outer packaging. (2) Primary receptacles must be packed in secondary packaging in such a way that, under normal conditions oftransport, they cannot break, be punctured, or leak their contents into the secondary packaging.

(3) Secondary packagings must be secured in rigid outer packagings with suitable cushioning material such that any leakage of the contents will not impair the protective properties of thecushioning material or the outer packaging.

(4) The completed package must be designed, constructed, maintained, filled, its contents limited, and closedso that under conditions normally encountered in transportation, including removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent handling, there will be no
release of hazardous material into the environment. Package effectiveness must not be substantially reduced for minimum and maximum temperatures, changes in humidity and pressure, andshocks, loadings and vibrations normally encountered during transportation. The packaging must be capable of successfully passing the drop tests in §§178.609(d) and (h) of this subchapter at a drop height of at least 1.2 meters (3.9 feet). Following the drop tests,there must be no leakage from the primary receptacle, which must remain protected by absorbent material, when required, in the secondary packaging.At least one surface of the outer packaging must have a minimum dimension of 100 mm by 100 mm (3.9 inches).

(5) The following mark must be displayed on the outer packaging on a background of contrasting color. The
width of the line must be at least 2 mm(0.08 inches) and the letters and numbers must be at least 6 mm (0.24 inches) high. The size of the mark must be
such that no side of the diamond is less than 50 mm (1.97 inches) in length. Theproper shipping name ‘‘Biological substances, Category B’’ must be marked on the outer packaging adjacent to the diamond-shaped mark in letters that are at least 6 mm (0.24 inches) high.


### 540 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.199

(6) When packages are placed in anoverpack, the package markings required by this section must be either clearly visible or reproduced on the outside of the overpack.

(7) The name and telephone numberof a person who is either knowledgeable about the material being shippedand has comprehensive emergency response and incident mitigation information for the material, or has immediate access to a person who possesses such knowledge and information, must
be included on a written document (such as an air waybill or bill of lading) or on the outer packaging.

(8) For transportation by aircraft, each package, overpack, pallet, or unitload device containing a Category B infectious substance must be inspected for leakage when it is unloaded from the aircraft. If evidence of leakage is found, the cargo compartment in which the package, overpack, pallet, or unit load device was transported must be disinfected. Disinfection may be by any
means that will make the material released ineffective at transmitting disease.

(9) A packaging containing inner packagings of Category B infectioussubstances may not contain other hazardous materials except—

(i) Refrigerants, such as dry ice or liquid nitrogen, as authorized under paragraph (d) of this section;

(ii) Anticoagulants used to stabilize blood or plasma; or

(iii) Small quantities of Class 3, Class8, Class 9, or other materials in Packing Groups II and III used to stabilize or prevent degradation of the sample,provided the quantity of such materials does not exceed 30 mL (1 ounce) or 30 g (1 ounce) in each inner packaging. Such preservatives are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.

(10) Clear instructions on filling and closing a packaging used to transport a Category B infectious substance mustbe provided by the packaging manufacturer and subsequent distributors to the consignor or person who prepares the package to enable the package to be correctly prepared for transport. Acopy or electronic image of these instructions must be retained by themanufacturer and subsequent distributors for at least one year from the dateof issuance, and made available for inspection by a Federal or state government representative upon request. Packagings must be filled and closed inaccordance with the information provided by the packaging manufacturer or subsequent distributor.

(b) Liquid Category B infectious substances. Liquid Category B infectioussubstances must be packaged in conformance with the following provisions:

(1) The primary receptacle must be leakproof.

(2) Absorbent material must be placed between the primary receptacle and secondary packaging. If several fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they must be either individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between
them. The absorbent material must beof sufficient quantity to absorb the entire contents of the primary receptacles and not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or the outer packaging.

(3) The secondary packaging must be leakproof.

(4) For shipments by aircraft, the primary receptacle or the secondary packaging must be capable of withstanding without leakage an internal pressure producing a pressure differential of not less than 95 kPa (0.95 bar, 14 psi).

(5) For shipments by aircraft, the maximum quantity contained in eachprimary receptacle, including any material used to stabilize or prevent degradation of the sample, may not exceed 1 L (34 ounces), and the maximum


### 541 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.201

quantity contained in each outer packaging, including any material used to stabilize or prevent degradation of the samples, may not exceed 4 L (1 gallon). The outer packaging limitation doesnot include ice, dry ice, or liquid nitrogen when used to maintain the integrity of the material.

(c) Solid Category B infectious substances. Solid Category B infectioussubstances must be packaged in a triple packaging, consisting of a primary receptacle, secondary packaging, andouter packaging, conforming to the following provisions:

(1) The primary receptacle must be siftproof.

(2) If several fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondarypackaging, they must be either individually wrapped or separated to prevent
contact between them.

(3) The secondary packaging must be siftproof.

(4) If residual liquid may be presentin the primary receptacle during transportation, then the material must betransported in accordance with requirements in paragraph (b) of this section. A solid material that may become liquid during transportation must betransported in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section.

(5) Except for packages containing body parts, organs, or whole bodies, forshipment by aircraft, the outer packaging may not contain more than 4 kg (8.8 pounds), including any materialused to stabilize or prevent degradation of the samples. The outer packaging limitation does not include ice, dry ice, or liquid nitrogen when used to maintain the integrity of the material.

(d) Refrigerated or frozen specimens (ice, dry ice, and liquid nitrogen). In addition to complying with the requirements in this paragraph (d), dry ice and liquid nitrogen must be offered fortransportation or transported in accordance with the applicable requirements of this subchapter.

(1) Ice or dry ice must be placed outside the secondary packaging or in an overpack. Interior supports must beprovided to secure the secondary packagings in the original position after the ice or dry ice has dissipated. If ice is used, the outside packaging must be leakproof or must have a leakproof liner. If dry ice is used, the outside packaging must permit the release of carbon dioxide gas and otherwise meet the provisions in §173.217. The primary receptacle and secondary packaging must maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used, as well as the temperatures and pressures of transport by aircraft they could be subjected to if refrigeration were lost,
and sufficient absorbent material mustbe provided to absorb all liquid, including melted ice.

(2) The package is marked ‘‘Carbondioxide, solid’’ or ‘‘Dry ice’’ and an indication that the material being refrigerated is used for diagnostic treatmentpurposes (e.g., frozen medical specimens).

(e) Training. Each person who offers or transports a Category B infectious substance under the provisions of thissection must know about the requirements of this section.

[67 FR 53142, Aug. 14, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 32261, June 2, 2006; 72 FR 55693, Oct. 1, 2007]

§ 173.201 Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group I.
(a) When §172.101 of this subchapterspecifies that a liquid hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed inthis section may be used for its transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, to therequirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the §172.101 table.

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:

Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum:

1N1 or 1N2 Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2


### 542 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.202

Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G Expanded plastic box: 4H1 Solid plastic box: 4H2 Inner packagings: Glass or earthenware receptacles Plastic receptacles Metal receptacles Glass ampoules

(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single packagings are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 Metal drum other than steel, or aluminum:

1N1 or 1N2 Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, fiber

or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HH1Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1 or 6PG1Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2Glass, porcelain or stoneware in solid or expanded plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2 Cylinders, specification or UN standard, as

prescribed for any compressed gas, except 3HT and those prescribed for acetylene.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997; 71 FR 33880, June 12, 2006]

§ 173.202 Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group II.
(a) When §172.101 of this subchapterspecifies that a liquid hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed inthis section may be used for its transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, to therequirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I or IIperformance level (unless otherwise excepted), and to the particular requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the §172.101 table.

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:

Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum:

1N1 or 1N2 Plywood drum: 1D

Fiber drum: 1G

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2

Wooden barrel: 2C2 Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2

Steel box: 4A

Aluminum box: 4B

Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 Plywood box: 4D

Reconstituted wood box: 4F

Fiberboard box: 4G Expanded plastic box: 4H1 Solid plastic box: 4H2

Inner packagings: Glass or earthenware receptacles Plastic receptacles Metal receptacles Glass ampoules

(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single packagings are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum:

1N1 or 1N2

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 Fiber drum: 1G (with liner)

Wooden barrel: 2C1 Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, fiber

or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1 or 6HH1Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1 or 6PG1Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2Glass, porcelain or stoneware in solid or expanded plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2 Plastic receptacle in plywood drum: 6HD1 Glass, porcelain or stoneware in plywood

drum or wickerwork hamper: 6PDl or 6PD2 Cylinders, specification, as prescribed for

any compressed gas, except for Specifications 8 and 3HT

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt 173–241, 59 FR 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997]


### 543 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.206

§ 173.203 Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group III.
(a) When §172.101 of this subchapterspecifies that a liquid hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed inthis section may be used for its transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, to therequirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I, II orIII performance level, and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the §172.101 table.

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:

Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum:

1N1 or 1N2 Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2 Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G Expanded plastic box: 4H1 Solid plastic box: 4H2

Inner packagings: Glass or earthenware receptacles Plastic receptacles Metal receptacles Glass ampoules

(c) The following single packagings
are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum:

1N1 Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 Fiber drum: 1G (with liner)
Wooden barrel: 2C1 Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, fiber

or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1 or 6HH1Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1, or 6PG1 Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2Glass, porcelain or stoneware in solid or expanded plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2 Plastic receptacle in plywood drum: 6HD1 Glass, porcelain or stoneware in plywood

drum or wickerwork hamper: 6PD1 or 6PD2 Cylinders, as prescribed for any compressed

gas, except for Specifications 8 and 3HT

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997]

§ 173.204 Non-bulk, non-specification packagings for certain hazardous materials.
When §172.101 of this subchapterspecifies that a liquid or solid hazardous material be packaged under this section, any appropriate non-bulkpackaging which conforms to the general packaging requirements of subpartB of part 173 may be used for its transportation. Packagings need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.

§ 173.205 Specification cylinders for liquid hazardous materials.
When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material must be packaged under this section,the use of any specification or UN cylinder, except those specified for acetylene, is authorized. Cylinders used for
toxic materials in Division 6.1 or 2.3 must conform to the requirements of §173.40.

[71 FR 33881, June 12, 2006]

§ 173.206 Packaging requirements for chlorosilanes.
(a) When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material bepackaged under this section, only nonbulk packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirementsof subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I or II performance level (unless otherwise excepted), and to the particular requirements of the special provisions of Column (7) of the §172.101 Table.

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:


### 544 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.211

Outer packagings:

Steel drum: 1A2
Plastic drum: 1H2 Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Steel box: 4A
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G Expanded plastic box: 4H1 Solid plastic box: 4H2

Inner packagings: Glass or Steel receptacle

(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single packagings are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 Steel jerrican: 3A1

Plastic receptacle in steel drum:
6HA1Cylinders (for liquids in PG I), specification or UN standard, as prescribed for any compressed gas, except Specification 3HT and those prescribed for acetyleneCylinders (for liquids in PG II), specification, as prescribed for any compressed gas, except Specification 8 and 3HT cylinders.

[74 FR 2259, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 FR 72, Jan. 4, 2010]

§ 173.211 Non-bulk packagings forsolid hazardous materials in Packing Group I.
(a) When §172.101 of this subchapterspecifies that a solid hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed inthis section may be used for its transportation. Each package must conform to the general packaging requirementsof subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the §172.101
table.

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:

Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum:

1N1 or 1N2 Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2 Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G Solid plastic box: 4H2

Inner packagings: Glass or earthenware receptacles Plastic receptacles Metal receptacles Glass ampoules

(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single packagings are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum:

1N1 or 1N2 Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Fiber drum: 1G Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box with liner: 4A
Aluminum box with liner: 4B Natural wood box, sift proof: 4C2Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, plywood, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1 or 6HH1Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, plywood or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1,
6PD1 or 6PG1Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2 Glass, porcelain or stoneware in expanded or

solid plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2 Cylinders, as prescribed for any compressed

gas, except for Specification 8 and 3HT

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67511, 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997; 69 FR 76157, Dec. 20, 2004]

§ 173.212 Non-bulk packagings forsolid hazardous materials in Packing Group II.
(a) When §172.101 of this subchapterspecifies that a solid hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed inthis section may be used for its transportation. Each package must conform to the general packaging requirementsof subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at


### 545 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.213

the Packing Group I or II performance level, and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the §172.101 table.

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:

Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum:

1N1 or 1N2 Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2 Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G Solid plastic box: 4H2

Inner packagings: Glass or earthenware receptacles Plastic receptacles Metal receptacles Glass ampoules

(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single packagings are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 Plywood drum: 1D
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Fiber drum: 1G
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum:

1N1 or 1N2
Wooden barrel: 2C1 or 2C2 Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Steel box with liner: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Aluminum box with liner: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 Natural wood box, sift proof: 4C2 Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G Expanded plastic box: 4H1 Solid plastic box: 4H2 Bag, woven plastic: 5H1, 5H2 or 5H3 Bag, plastic film: 5H4 Bag, textile: 5L1, 5L2 or 5L3 Bag, paper, multiwall, water resistant: 5M2Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, plywood, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1 or 6HH1 Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wood, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, plywood or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1,
6PD1 or 6PG1Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2 Glass, porcelain or stoneware in expanded or

solid plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2 Cylinders, as prescribed for any compressed

gas, except for Specification 8 and 3HT

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67511, 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997; 69 FR 76157, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34398, June 14, 2005]

§ 173.213 Non-bulk packagings forsolid hazardous materials in Packing Group III.
(a) When §172.101 of this subchapterspecifies that a solid hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed inthis section may be used for its transportation. Each package must conform to the general packaging requirementsof subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter atthe Packing Group I, II or III performance level, and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the §172.101 table.

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:

Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum:

1N1 or 1N2 Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2 Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G Solid plastic box: 4H2

Inner packagings: Glass or earthenware receptacles Plastic receptacles Metal receptacles Glass ampoules


### 546 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.214

(c) The following single packagings
are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 Plywood drum: 1D

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2

Fiber drum: 1G
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum:

1N1 or 1N2
Wooden barrel: 2C1 or 2C2 Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Steel box with liner: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Aluminum box with liner: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 Natural wood box, sift proof: 4C2 Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G Expanded plastic box: 4H1 Solid plastic box: 4H2 Bag, woven plastic: 5H1, 5H2 or 5H3 Bag, plastic film: 5H4 Bag, textile: 5L1, 5L2 or 5L3 Bag, paper, multiwall, water resistant: 5M2Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, plywood, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1 or 6HH1 Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wood,

plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, plywood or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1,
6PD1 or 6PG1Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2 Glass, porcelain or stoneware in expanded or

solid plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2 Cylinders, as prescribed for any compressed

gas, except for Specification 8 and 3HT

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67511, 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997; 69 FR 76158, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34398, June 14, 2005]

§ 173.214 Packagings which requireapproval by the Associate Administrator.
When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material bepackaged under this section, packagings and method of shipment mustbe approved by the Associate Administrator prior to the first shipment.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001] § 173.216 Asbestos, blue, brown or white.

(a) Asbestos, blue, brown or white, includes each of the following hydratedmineral silicates: chrysolite, crocidolite, amosite, anthophyllite asbestos, tremolite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, and every product containing any of
these materials.

(b) [Reserved](c) Packagings for asbestos must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of this part but need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. Asbestos must be offered for transportation and transported in—

(1) Rigid, leaktight packagings, suchas metal, plastic or fiber drums, portable tanks, hopper-type rail cars, or hopper-type motor vehicles;

(2) Bags or other non-rigid packagings in closed freight containers, motor vehicles, or rail cars that are loaded by and for the exclusive use ofthe consignor and unloaded by the consignee;

(3) Bags or other non-rigid packagings which are dust and sift proofmust be placed in rigid outer packagings or closed freight containers.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45034, July 31, 2003; 71 CFR 78632, Dec. 29, 2006]

§ 173.217 Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice).
(a) Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice), when offered for transportation or transported by aircraft or water, must be packed in packagings designed and constructed to permit the release of carbon dioxide gas to prevent a buildup of pressure that could rupture the packagings. Packagings must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of this part but need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.

(b) For transportation by vessel: (1) Each transport vehicle and freightcontainer containing solid carbon dioxide must be conspicuously marked on
two sides ‘‘WARNING CO 2 SOLID (DRY ICE).’’


### 547 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.219

(2) Other packagings containing solid
carbon dioxide must be marked ‘‘CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID—DO NOT STOW
BELOW DECKS.’’

(c) For transportation by aircraft: (1) In addition to the applicable marking requirements in subpart D ofpart 172, the net mass of the carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice) must be marked on the outside of the package. Thisprovision also applies to unit load devices (ULDs) when the ULD containsdry ice and is considered the packaging.

(2) The shipper must make arrangements with the operator for each shipment.

(3) The quantity limits per package shown in Columns (9A) and (9B) of the Hazardous Materials Table in §172.101 are not applicable to dry ice being usedas a refrigerant for other than hazardous materials loaded in a unit load device or other type of pallet. In such a case, the unit load device or other type of pallet must allow the venting of the carbon dioxide gas to prevent a dangerous build up of pressure, and be identified to the operator.

(4) Dry ice is excepted from the shipping paper requirements of subpart C ofpart 172 of this subchapter provided alternative written documentation issupplied containing the following information: proper shipping name (Dry ice or Carbon dioxide, solid), class 9,UN number 1845, the number of packages, and the net quantity of dry ice in each package. The information must be included with the description of the
materials.

(5) Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice), in quantities not exceeding 2.5 kg (5.5pounds) per package and used as a refrigerant for the contents of the package is excepted from all other requirements of this subchapter if the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section are complied with and the package is marked ‘‘Carbon dioxide, solid’’ or ‘‘Dry ice’’, is marked with the name of the contents being cooled, and is marked with the net weight of the dry ice or an indication that the net weight is 2.5 kg (5.5 pounds) or less.

(d) Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice), when used to refrigerate materialsbeing shipped for diagnostic or treatment purposes ( e.g. , frozen medical specimens), is excepted from the shipping paper and certification requirements of this subchapter if the requirements of paragraphs (a) and (c)(2) of this section are met and the package is marked ‘‘Carbon dioxide, solid’’ or‘‘Dry ice’’ and is marked with an indication that the material being refrigerated is being transported for diagnostic or treatment purposes.

[73 FR 4718, Jan. 28, 2008]

§ 173.218 Fish meal or fish scrap.

(a) Except as provided in Column (7)of the HMT in §172.101 of this subchapter, fish meal or fish scrap, containing at least 6%, but not more than12% water, is authorized for transportation by vessel only when packaged as
follows:

(1) Burlap (jute) bag; (2) Multi-wall paper bag; (3) Polyethylene-lined burlap or paper bag;

(4) Cargo tank; (5) Portable tank; (6) Rail car; or (7) Freight container. (b) [Reserved](c) When fish scrap or fish meal is offered for transportation by vessel in bulk in freight containers, the fish meal must contain at least 100 ppm of anti-oxident (ethoxyquin) at the time of shipment.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 68 FR 45034, July 31, 2003]

§ 173.219 Life-saving appliances.

(a) A life-saving appliance, self-inflating or non-self-inflating, containingsmall quantities of hazardous materials that are required as part of the life-saving appliance must conform tothe requirements of this section. Packagings must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of this part but need not conform to therequirements of part 178 of this subchapter. The appliances must bepacked, so that they cannot be accidentally activated and, except for life vests, the hazardous materials must be in inner packagings packed so as toprevent shifting within the outer packaging. The hazardous materials must be an integral part of the appliance and in quantities that do not exceed those


### 548 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.220

appropriate for the actual appliance
when in use.

(b) Life saving appliances may contain:

(1) Division 2.2 compressed gases, including oxygen. However, oxygen generators are not permitted;

(2) Signal devices (Class 1), which may include smoke and illumination signal flares;

(3) Electric storage batteries andlithium batteries (Life saving appliances containing lithium batteries must be transported in accordance with §173.185, and Special Provisions188, 189, A101, A103 and A104 as applicable.);

(4) First aid or repair kits conforming to the applicable material and quantity limitations of §173.161 of this subchapter;

(5) Strike-anywhere matches;(6) For self-inflating life saving appliances only, cartridges power device ofDivision 1.4S, for purposes of the selfinflating mechanism provided that the quantity of explosives per appliance does not exceed 3.2 g; or

(7) Limited quantities of other hazardous materials.

(c) Hazardous materials in life savingappliances must be packaged as follows:

(1) Division 2.2 compressed gasesmust be packaged in cylinders in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter;

(2) Signal devices (Class 1) must be in packagings that prevent them from being inadvertently activated;

(3) Strike-anywhere matches must becushioned to prevent movement or friction in a metal or composition receptacle with a screw-type closure in a manner that prevents them from being inadvertently activated;

(4) Limited quantities of other hazardous materials must be packaged in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter; and

(5) For other than transportation byaircraft, life saving appliances containing no hazardous materials other than carbon dioxide cylinders with a capacity not exceeding 100 cm 3 are notsubject to the provisions of this subchapter provided they are overpacked in rigid outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 40 kg.

[69 FR 76158, Dec. 20, 2004, as amended at 72 FR 44950, Aug. 9, 2007; 73 FR 57006, Oct. 1, 2008]

§ 173.220 Internal combustion engines, self-propelled vehicles, mechanicalequipment containing internal combustion engines, and battery powered vehicles or equipment.

(a) Applicability. An internal combustion engine, self-propelled vehicle, mechanized equipment containing aninternal combustion engine, or a battery powered vehicle or equipment issubject to the requirements of this subchapter when transported as cargo on a transport vehicle, vessel, or aircraft
if—

(1) The engine or fuel tank contains a liquid or gaseous fuel. An engine may be considered as not containing fuelwhen the fuel tank, engine components, and fuel lines have been completely drained, sufficiently cleaned ofresidue, and purged of vapors to remove any potential hazard and the engine when held in any orientation will not release any liquid fuel;

(2) It is equipped with a wet battery (including a non-spillable battery), a sodium battery or lithium battery; or

(3) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, it contains otherhazardous materials subject to the requirements of this subchapter.

(b) Requirements. Unless otherwise excepted in paragraph (b)(4) of this section, vehicles, engines and equipmentare subject to the following requirements:

(1) Flammable liquid fuel. A fuel tank containing a flammable liquid fuel must be drained and securely closed, except that up to 500 mL (17 ounces) of residual fuel may remain in the tank,engine components, or fuel lines provided they are securely closed to prevent leakage of fuel during transportation. Self-propelled vehicles containing diesel fuel are excepted from the requirement to drain the fuel tanks, provided that sufficient ullage space has been left inside the tank to allow fuel expansion without leakage, and the tank caps are securely closed.

(2) Flammable liquefied or compressed gas fuel. (i) For transportation by


### 549 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.220

motor vehicle, rail car or vessel, fuel tanks and fuel systems containing flammable liquefied or compressed gasfuel must be securely closed. For transportation by vessel, the requirementsof §§176.78(k) and 176.905 of this subchapter apply.

(ii) For transportation by aircraft: (A) Flammable gas-powered vehicles,machines, equipment or cylinders containing the flammable gas must be completely emptied of flammable gas. Lines from vessels to gas regulators, and gas regulators themselves, must
also be drained of all traces of flammable gas. To ensure that these conditions are met, gas shut-off valves must be left open and connections of lines togas regulators must be left disconnected upon delivery of the vehicle to the operator. Shut-off valves must beclosed and lines reconnected at gas regulators before loading the vehicle aboard the aircraft; or alternatively

(B) Flammable gas powered vehicles, machines or equipment, which have cylinders (fuel tanks) that are equipped with electrically operated valves, maybe transported under the following conditions:

( 1 ) The valves must be in the closed position and in the case of electrically operated valves, power to those valves must be disconnected;

( 2

) After closing the valves, the vehicle, equipment or machinery must be operated until it stops from lack of fuel before being loaded aboard the aircraft;

( 3

) In no part of the closed system shall the pressure exceed 5% of the maximum allowable working pressure of the system or 290 psig (2000 kPa), whichever is less; and

( 4

) There must not be any residual liquefied gas in the system, including
the fuel tank.

(3) Truck bodies or trailers on flat cars—flammable liquid or gas powered.
Truck bodies or trailers with automatic heating or refrigerating equipment of the flammable liquid type may be shipped with fuel tanks filled and equipment operating or inoperative, when used for the transportation of other freight and loaded on flat cars aspart of a joint rail and highway movement, provided the equipment and fuel supply conform to the requirements of §177.834(l) of this subchapter. (4) Modal exceptions. Quantities of flammable liquid fuel greater than 500mL (17 ounces) may remain in self-propelled vehicles and mechanical equipment only under the following conditions:

(i) For transportation by motor vehicle or rail car, the fuel tanks must be securely closed.

(ii) For transportation by vessel, the shipment must conform to §176.905 of this subchapter.

(iii) For transportation by aircraft, when carried in aircraft designed or modified for vehicle ferry operationsand when all of the following conditions are met:

(A) Authorization for this type operation has been given by the appropriate authority in the government of thecountry in which the aircraft is registered;

(B) Each vehicle is secured in an upright position;

(C) Each fuel tank is filled in a manner and only to a degree that will preclude spillage of fuel during loading, unloading, and transportation; and

(D) Each area or compartment in which a self-propelled vehicle is being transported is suitably ventilated toprevent the accumulation of fuel vapors.

(c) Battery-powered or installed . Batteries must be securely installed, and
wet batteries must be fastened in an upright position. Batteries must beprotected against a dangerous evolution of heat, short circuits, and damage to terminals in conformance with§173.159(a) and leakage; or must be removed and packaged separately under§173.159. Battery-powered vehicles, machinery or equipment including battery-powered wheelchairs and mobilityaids are not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter except§173.21 when transported by rail, highway or vessel.

(d) Lithium batteries. Except as provided in §172.102, Special ProvisionA101 of this subchapter, vehicles, engines and machinery powered by lithium metal batteries that are transported with these batteries installed


### 550 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.221

are forbidden aboard passenger-carrying aircraft. Lithium batteries contained in vehicles, engines or mechanical equipment must be securely fastened in the battery holder of the vehicle, engine or mechanical equipment and be protected in such a manner as to prevent damage and short circuits ( e.g. , by the use of non-conductive caps that cover the terminals entirely). Lithium batteries must be of a type that have successfully passed each test
in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria as specified in §173.185, unless approvedby the Associate Administrator. Equipment (other than vehicles, engines or mechanical equipment) containing lithium batteries, must be described as‘‘Lithium batteries contained in equipment’’ and transported in accordance with §173.185 and applicable special provisions.

(e) Other hazardous materials. (1) Items containing hazardous materials, such as, fire extinguishers, compressed gas accumulators, safety devices and
other hazardous materials which areintegral components of the motor vehicle, engine or mechanical equipment and are necessary for the operation of the vehicle, engine or mechanicalequipment, or for the safety of its operator or passengers must be securely installed in the motor vehicle, engine or mechanical equipment. Such items arenot otherwise subject to the requirements of this subchapter. Equipment(other than vehicles, engines or mechanical equipment) containing lithium batteries must be described as‘‘Lithium batteries contained in equipment’’ and transported in accordance with §173.185 and applicable special provisions.

(2) Other hazardous materials mustbe packaged and transported in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.

(f) Additional requirements for internalcombustion engines and vehicles with certain electronic equipment when transported by aircraft or vessel. When an internal combustion engine that is not installed in a vehicle or equipment is offered for transportation by aircraft or vessel, all fuel, coolant or hydraulic systems remaining in the engine must be drained as far as practicable, and alldisconnected fluid pipes that previously contained fluid must be sealed with leak-proof caps that are positivelyretained. When offered for transportation by aircraft, vehicles equipped with theft-protection devices, installed radio communications equipment or navigational systems must have suchdevices, equipment or systems disabled.

(g) Exceptions. Except as provided inparagraph (e)(2) of this section, shipments made under the provisions of
this section—

(1) Are not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter, for transportation by motor vehicle or rail car; and

(2) Are not subject to the requirements of subparts D, E and F (marking, labeling and placarding, respectively) of part 172 of this subchapter or §172.604 of this subchapter (emergency response telephone number) for transportationby vessel or aircraft. For transportation by aircraft, the provisions of§173.159(b)(2) as applicable, other applicable requirements of this subchapter, including shipping papers, emergency response information, notification of pilot-in-command, general packaging requirements, and the requirements specified in §173.27 must be met. Fortransportation by vessel, additional exceptions are specified in §176.905 of this subchapter.

[64 FR 10778, Mar. 5, 1999, as amended at 66 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45035, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 75216, Dec. 15, 2004; 69 FR 76158, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34398, June 14, 2005; 71 FR 14603, Mar. 22, 2006; 71 FR 78632, Dec. 29, 2006; 72 FR 44950, Aug. 9, 2007; 74 FR 2259, Jan. 14, 2009; 75 FR 73, Jan. 4, 2010]

§ 173.221 Polymeric beads, expandable and Plastic molding compound.
(a) Non-bulk shipments of Polymeric beads (or granules), expandable, evolving flammable vapor and Plastic molding compound in dough, sheet or extruded rope form, evolving flammable vapor mustbe packed in: wooden (4C1 or 4C2), plywood (4D), fiberboard (4G), reconstituted wood (4F) boxes, plywood drums (1D) or fiber drums (1G) with sealed inner plastic liners; in vapor tight metal or plastic drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1,1B2, 1H1 or 1H2); or packed in non-specification packagings when transported


### 551 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.223

in dedicated vehicles or freight containers. The packagings need not conform to the requirements for package testing in part 178 of this subchapter, but must be capable of containing anyevolving gases from the contents during normal conditions of transportation.

(b) Bulk shipments of Polymeric beads (or granules), expandable, evolving flammable vapor or Plastic molding compounds in dough, sheet or extruded rope, evolving flammable vapor may bepacked in non-specification bulk packagings. Except for transportation by highway and rail, bulk packagings must be capable of containing anygases evolving from the contents during normal conditions of transportation.

[64 FR 10779, Mar. 5, 1999]

§ 173.222 Dangerous goods in equipment, machinery or apparatus.
Hazardous materials in machinery orapparatus are excepted from the specification packaging requirements ofthis subchapter when packaged according to this section. Hazardous materials in machinery or apparatus mustbe packaged in strong outer packagings, unless the receptacles containing the hazardous materials are afforded adequate protection by the construction of the machinery or apparatus. Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of subpartB of this part, except for the requirements in §§173.24(a)(1) and 173.27(e), and the following requirements:

(a) If the machinery or apparatus
contains more than one hazardous material, the materials must not be capable of reacting dangerously together.

(b) The nature of the containment
must be as follows—

(1) Damage to the receptacles containing the hazardous materials during transport is unlikely. However, in theevent of damage to the receptacles containing the hazardous materials, no leakage of the hazardous materials from the machinery or apparatus is possible. A leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this requirement.

(2) Receptacles containing hazardous
materials must be secured and cushioned so as to prevent their breakage or leakage and so as to control their movement within the machinery or apparatus during normal conditions of transportation. Cushioning material must not react dangerously with the content of the receptacles. Any leakage of the contents must not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material.

(3) Receptacles for gases, their contents and filling densities must conform to the applicable requirements ofthis subchapter, unless otherwise approved by the Associate Administrator.

(c) The total net quantity of hazardous materials contained in one item of machinery or apparatus must not exceed the following:

(1) 1 kg (2.2 pounds) in the case of solids;

(2) 0.5 L (0.1 gallons) in the case of liquids;

(3) 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) in the case of Division 2.2 gases. For transportationby aircraft, Division 2.2 gases with subsidiary risks and refrigerated liquefied gases are not authorized; and

(4) A total quantity of not more than the aggregate of that permitted in paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(3) of this section, for each category of materialin the package, when a package contains hazardous materials in two or more of the categories in paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(3) of this section.

(d) Except for transportation by aircraft, when a package contains hazardous materials in two or more of the categories listed in paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(3) of this section the total quantity required by §172.202(c) of thissubchapter to be entered on the shipping paper must be either the aggregate quantity, or the estimated quantity, of all hazardous materials, expressed as net mass.

[64 FR 10779, Mar. 5, 1999, as amended at 64 FR 44428, Aug. 16, 1999; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 70 FR 56098, Sept. 23, 2005; 71 FR 78633, Dec. 29, 2006; 74 FR 2259, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.223 Packagings for certain flammable solids.
(a) Packagings for ‘‘Musk xylene,’’ ‘‘5-tert-Butyl-2,4,6-trinitro-m-xylene,’’ ‘‘Azodicarbonamide,’’ or ‘‘Isosorbide-5-mononitrate,’’ when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or vessel, must conform to the


### 552 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.224

general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, and to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group III performance level and may only be transported in the following packagings:

(1) Fiberboard box (4G) with a single inner plastic bag, and a maximum net mass of not more than 50 kg (110 lbs).

(2) Fiberboard box (4G) or fiber drum (1G), with a plastic inner packagingnot exceeding 5 kg (11 lbs), and a maximum net mass of not more than 25 kg (55 lbs).

(3) Fiber drum (1G), and a maximum net mass of not more than 50 kg (110 lbs), that may be fitted with a coating or lining.

(b) [Reserved]

[Doc. No. 2002–13658, 68 FR 45035, July 31, 2003; 75 FR 5394, Feb. 2, 2010]

§ 173.224 Packaging and control andemergency temperatures for self-reactive materials.
(a) General. When the §172.101 table ofthis subchapter specifies that a Division 4.1 material be packaged in accordance with this section, only packagings which conform to the provisionsof this section may be used. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B ofthis part and the applicable requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.Non-bulk packagings must meet Packing Group II performance levels. Toavoid unnecessary confinement, metallic non-bulk packagings meeting Packing Group I are not authorized. Self-reactive materials which require temperature control are subject to the provisions of §173.21(f). Packagings required to bear a Class 1 subsidiary label must conform to §§173.60 through
173.62.

(b) Self-Reactive Materials Table. TheSelf-Reactive Materials Table specifies, by technical name, those self-reactive materials that are authorized for transportation and not subject to the approval provisions of §173.124(a)(2)(iii). A self-reactive material identified by technical name in the following table is authorized for transportation only if it conforms to all applicable provisions of the table. The column headings of
the Self-Reactive Materials Table are
as follows:

(1) Technical name. Column 1 specifies
the technical name.

(2) ID number. Column 2 specifies the
identification number which is used to identify the proper shipping name in the §172.101 table.

(3) Concentration of self-reactive material. Column 3 specifies the concentration (percent) limitations, if any, in
mixtures or solutions for the self-reactive material. Limitations are given as minimums, maximums, or a range, as appropriate. A range includes the lower and upper limits (i.e., ‘‘53–100’’ means from, and including, 53 percent to, and including 100 percent).

(4) Packing method. Column 4 specifies the highest packing method which is
authorized for the self-reactive material. A packing method corresponding to a smaller package size may be used, but a packing method corresponding to a larger package size may not be used. The Table of Packing Methods in§173.225(d) defines the packing methods. Bulk packagings for Type F selfreactive substances are authorized by §173.225(f) for IBCs and §173.225(h) forbulk packagings other than IBCs. Additional bulk packagings are authorizedif approved by the Associate Administrator.

(5) Control temperature. Column 5 specifies the control temperature in ° C. Temperatures are specified only when temperature controls are required (see §173.21(f)).

(6) Emergency temperature. Column 6 specifies the emergency temperature in

° C. Temperatures are specified onlywhen temperature controls are required (see §173.21(f)).

(7) Notes. Column 7 specifies other applicable provisions, as set forth in notes following the table.


### 553 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.224

S ELF -R EACTIVE M ATERIALS T ABLE

Self-reactive substance (1) Identification

No. (2) Concentration— (%) (3) Packing method

(4) Control temperature—(

° C) (5) Emergency temperature (6) Notes (7)

Acetone-pyrogallol copolymer 2-diazo-1-

naphthol-5-sulphonate. 3228 100 .................... OP8 ........................ ........................ ............

Azodicarbonamide formulation type B,

temperature controlled. 3232 <100 .................. OP5 ........................ ........................ 1

Azodicarbonamide formulation type C ..... 3224 <100 .................. OP6 ........................ ........................ ........

.... Azodicarbonamide formulation type C,

temperature controlled. 3234 <100 .................. OP6 ........................ ........................ 1

Azodicarbonamide formulation type D ..... 3226 <100 .................. OP7 ........................ ........................ ........

.... Azodicarbonamide formulation type D,

temperature controlled. 3236 <100 .................. OP7 ........................ ........................ 1

2,2 ′ -Azodi(2,4-dimethyl-4-

methoxyvaleronitrile). 3236 100 .................... OP7

¥ 5 ................. +5 .................. ............

2,2 ′ -Azodi(2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) ......... 3236 100 .................... OP7 +10 ................ +15 ................ ............
2,2 ′ -Azodi(ethyl 2-methylpropionate) ....... 3235 100 .................... OP7 +20 ................ +25 ................ ............ 1,1-Azodi(hexahydrobenzonitrile) ............ 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ...

......... 2,2-Azodi(isobutyronitrile) ........................ 3234 100 .................... OP6 +40 ................ +45 ................ ......

...... 2,2 ′ -Azodi(isobutyronitrile) as a water

based paste. 3224 ≤ 50 .................... OP6

2,2-Azodi(2-methylbutyronitrile) ............... 3236 100 .................... OP7 +35 ................ +40 ................ ..........

.. Benzene-1,3-disulphonylhydrazide, as a

paste. 3226 52 ...................... OP7

Benzene sulphohydrazide ........................ 3226 100 .................... OP7 4-(Benzyl(ethyl)amino)-3-

ethoxybenzenediazonium zinc chloride. 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ............

4-(Benzyl(methyl)amino)-3-

ethoxybenzenediazonium zinc chloride. 3236 100 .................... OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

3-Chloro-4-

diethylaminobenzenediazonium zinc
chloride. 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ............

2-Diazo-1-Naphthol sulphonic acid ester

mixture. 3226 <100 .................. OP7 ................... ................... 4

2-Diazo-1-Naphthol-4-sulphonyl chloride 3222 100 .................... OP5 2-Diazo-1-Naphthol-5-sulphonyl chloride 3222 100 .................... OP52,5-Dibutoxy-4-(4-morpholinyl)-Benzenediazonium, tetrachlorozincate (2:1). 3228 100 .................... OP8

2,5-Diethoxy-4-

morpholinobenzenediazonium zinc
chloride. 3236 67–100 .............. OP7 +35 ................ +40 ................ ............

2,5-Diethoxy-4-

morpholinobenzenediazonium zinc
chloride. 3236 66 ...................... OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

2,5-Diethoxy-4-

morpholinobenzenediazonium
tetrafluoroborate. 3236 100 .................... OP7 +30 ................ +35 ................ ............

2,5-Diethoxy-4-

(phenylsulphonyl)benzenediazonium
zinc chloride. 3236 67 ...................... OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

2,5-Diethoxy-4-(4-morpholinyl)-benzenediazonium sulphate. 3226 100 .................... OP7

Diethylene glycol bis(allyl carbonate) +

Diisopropylperoxydicarbonate. 3237 ≥ 88+ ≤ 12 ............ OP8

¥ 10 ............... 0 ..................... ............

2,5-Dimethoxy-4-(4-

methylphenylsulphony)benzenediazonium zinc chloride. 3236 79 ...................... OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

4-Dimethylamino-6-(2-

dimethylaminoethoxy)toluene-2-diazonium zinc chloride. 3236 100 .................... OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

4-(Dimethylamino)-benzenediazonium

trichlorozincate (-1). 3228 100 .................... OP8

N,N ′ -Dinitroso-N, N ′ -dimethylterephthalamide, as a paste. 3224 72 ...................... OP6 ........................ ........................ ............

N,N ′ -Dinitrosopentamethylenetetramine .. 3224 82 ...................... OP6 ........................ ........................ 2 Diphenyloxide-4,4 ′ -disulphohydrazide ..... 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ............ Diphenyloxide-4,4 ′ -disulphonylhydrazide 3226 100 .................... OP7 4-Dipropylaminobenzenediazonium zinc

chloride. 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ............


### 554 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.224

S ELF -R EACTIVE M ATERIALS T ABLE —Continued

Self-reactive substance (1) Identification

No. (2) Concentration— (%) (3) Packing method

(4) Control temperature—(

° C) (5) Emergency temperature (6) Notes (7)

2-(N,N-Ethoxycarbonylphenylamino)-3-

methoxy-4-(N-methyl-Ncyclohexylamino)benzenediazonium
zinc chloride. 3236 63–92 ................ OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

2-(N,N-Ethoxycarbonylphenylamino)-3-

methoxy-4-(N-methyl-Ncyclohexylamino)benzenediazonium
zinc chloride. 3236 62 ...................... OP7 +35 ................ +40 ................ ............

N-Formyl-2-(nitromethylene)-1,3-

perhydrothiazine. 3236 100 .................... OP7 +45 ................ +50 ................ ............

2-(2-Hydroxyethoxy)-1-(pyrrolidin-1-

yl)benzene-4-diazonium zinc chloride. 3236 100 .................... OP7 +45 ................ +50 ................ ............

3-(2-Hydroxyethoxy)-4-(pyrrolidin-1-

yl)benzenediazonium zinc chloride. 3236 100 .................... OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

2-(N,N-Methylaminoethylcarbonyl)-4-(3,4-

dimethyl-phenylsulphonyl)benzene diazonium zinc chloride. 3236 96 ...................... OP7 +45 ................ +50 ................ ............

4-Methylbenzenesulphonylhydrazide ....... 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ .......

..... 3-Methyl-4-(pyrrolidin-1-

yl)benzenediazonium tetrafluoroborate. 3234 95 ...................... OP6 +45 ................ +50 ................ ............

4-Nitrosophenol ........................................ 3236 100 .................... OP7 +35 ................ +40 ................ ..

.......... Self-reactive liquid, sample ...................... 3223 ........................... OP2 ........................ ................. ....... 3 Self-reactive liquid, sample, temperature

control. 3233 ........................... OP2 ........................ ........................ 3

Self-reactive solid, sample ....................... 3224 ........................... OP2 ........................ ................. ....... 3Self-reactive solid, sample, temperature control. 3234 ........................... OP2 ........................ ........................ 3

Sodium 2-diazo-1-naphthol-4-sulphonate 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ........

.... Sodium 2-diazo-1-naphthol-5-sulphonate 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ........

.... Tetramine palladium (II) nitrate ................ 3234 100 .................... OP6 +30 ................ +35 ................ .........

...

N OTES : 1. The emergency and control temperatures must be determined in accordance with § 173.21(f). 2. With a compatible diluent having a boiling point of not less than 150 ° C. 3. Samples may only be offered for transportation under the provisions of paragraph (c)(3) of this section. 4. This entry applies to mixtures of esters of 2-diazo-1-naphthol-4-sulphonic acid and 2-diazo-1-naphthol-5-sulphonic acid.

(c) New self-reactive materials, formulations and samples. (1) Except as provided for samples in paragraph (c)(3) of this section, no person may offer, accept fortransportation, or transport a self-reactive material which is not identified by technical name in the Self-Reactive Materials Table of this section, or a
formulation of one or more self-reactive materials which are identified by technical name in the table, unless theself-reactive material is assigned a generic type and shipping description andis approved by the Associate Administrator under the provisions of §173.124(a)(2)(iii).

(2) Except as provided by an approvalissued under §173.124(a)(2)(iii), intermediate bulk and bulk packagings are
not authorized.

(3) Samples. Samples of new self-reactive materials or new formulations of
self-reactive materials identified in theSelf-Reactive Materials Table in paragraph (b) of this section, for which complete test data are not available,and which are to be transported for further testing or product evaluation,may be assigned an appropriate shipping description for Self-reactive materials Type C, packaged and offered for transportation under the following
conditions:

(i) Data available to the person offering the material for transportation must indicate that the sample would pose a level of hazard no greater than that of a self-reactive material Type B and that the control temperature, if any, is sufficiently low to prevent anydangerous decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous phase separation;

(ii) The sample must be packaged in accordance with packing method OP2;

(iii) Packages of the self-reactive material may be offered for transportation and transported in a quantity not to exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) per transport vehicle; and


### 555 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225

(iv) One of the following shipping descriptions must be assigned:

(A) Self-reactive, liquid, type C, 4.1,
UN3223.

(B) Self-reactive, solid, type C, 4.1,
UN3224.

(C) Self-reactive, liquid, type C, temperature controlled, 4.1, UN3233.

(D) Self-reactive, solid, type C, temperature controlled, 4.1, UN3234.

[Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67511, Dec. 29, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 173–242, 60 FR 26806, May 18, 1995; Amdt. 173–246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 173–256, 61 FR 51338, Oct. 1, 1996; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24734, 24735, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 45702, Aug. 28, 1997; 64 FR 10779, Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 33431, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45035, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 76159, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 78633, Dec. 29,2006]

§ 173.225 Packaging requirements andother provisions for organic peroxides.
(a) General. When the §172.101 table specifies that an organic peroxide mustbe packaged under this section, the organic peroxide must be packaged andoffered for transportation in accordance with the provisions of this section. Each packaging must conform to the general requirements of subpart Bof part 173 and to the applicable requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. Non-bulk packagings must meet Packing Group II performancelevels. To avoid unnecessary confinement, metallic non-bulk packagingsmeeting Packing Group I are not authorized. No used material, other than production residues or regrind from the same production process, may be usedin plastic packagings. Organic peroxides that require temperature control are subject to the provisions of§173.21(f). When an IBC or bulk packaging is authorized and meets the requirements of paragraph (f) or (h) ofthis section, respectively, lower control temperatures than those specifiedfor non-bulk packaging may be required. An organic peroxide not identified in paragraph (c), (e), or (g) of thissection by technical name, or not assigned to a generic type in accordance with the provisions in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, must conform to the provisions of paragraph (c) of §173.128.

(b) New organic peroxides, formulations and samples. (1) Except as provided for samples in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, no person may offer for transportation an organic peroxide that is notidentified by technical name in the Organic Peroxides Table, Organic Peroxide IBC Table, or the Organic Peroxide Portable Tank Table of this section, or a formulation of one or more organic peroxides that are identified by technical name in one of those tables, unless the organic peroxide is assigned a generic type and shipping descriptionand is approved by the Associate Administrator under the provisions of §173.128(d) of this subchapter.

(2) Samples. Samples of new organicperoxides or new formulations of organic peroxides identified in the Organic Peroxides Table in paragraph (c) of this section, for which complete test data are not available, and that are to be transported for further testing or product evaluation, may be assigned anappropriate shipping description for organic peroxide Type C, packaged and offered for transportation, under the following conditions:

(i) Data available to the person offering the material for transportation must indicate that the sample would pose a level of hazard no greater than that of an organic peroxide Type B and that the control temperature, if any, issufficiently low to prevent any dangerous decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous phase separation;

(ii) The sample must be packaged in accordance with packing method OP2, for a liquid or solid, respectively;

(iii) Packages of the organic peroxide may be offered for transportation and transported in a quantity not to exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) per transport vehicle;
and

(iv) One of the following shipping descriptions must be assigned:

(A) Organic peroxide Type C, liquid, 5.2, UN 3103;

(B) Organic peroxide Type C, solid, 5.2, UN 3104;

(C) Organic peroxide Type C, liquid, temperature controlled, 5.2, UN 3113; or

(D) Organic peroxide Type C, solid, temperature controlled, 5.2, UN 3114.

(3) Mixtures. Mixtures of organic peroxides individually identified in the Organic Peroxides Table in paragraph (c) of this section may be classified as the


### 556 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.225

same type of organic peroxide as that of the most dangerous component and be transported under the conditions for transportation given for this type. Ifthe stable components form a thermally less stable mixture, the SADT of
the mixture must be determined andthe new control and emergency temperature derived under the provisions of §173.21(f).

(c) Organic peroxides table. The following Organic Peroxides Table specifies by technical name those organicperoxides that are authorized for transportation and not subject to the approval provisions of §173.128 of this part. An organic peroxide identified by technical name in the following table is authorized for transportation only if it conforms to all applicable provisions of the table. The column headings ofthe Organic Peroxides Table are as follows:

(1) Technical name. The first column specifies the technical name.

(2) ID number. The second column specifies the identification (ID) number which is used to identify the proper shipping name in the §172.101 table. The word ‘‘EXEMPT’’ appearing in the
column denotes that the material is not regulated as an organic peroxide.

(3) Concentration of organic peroxide.The third column specifies concentration (mass percent) limitations, if any, in mixtures or solutions for the organic peroxide. Limitations are given as minimums, maximums, or a range, as appropriate. A range includes the lower and upper limits ( i.e. , ‘‘53–100’’ meansfrom, and including, 53% to, and including 100%). See introductory paragraph of §172.203(k) of this subchapter for additional description requirementsfor an organic peroxide that may qualify for more than one generic listing, depending on its concentration.

(4) Concentration of diluents. The fourth column specifies the type and concentration (mass percent) of diluent or inert solid, when required. Other types and concentrations of diluentsmay be used if approved by the Associate Administrator.

(i) The required mass percent of ‘‘Diluent type A’’ is specified in column 4a. A diluent type A is an organic liquid that does not detrimentally affect the thermal stability or increase the hazard of the organic peroxide and with a boiling point not less than 150 ° C at atmospheric pressure. Type A diluentsmay be used for desensitizing all organic peroxides.

(ii) The required mass percent of ‘‘Diluent type B’’ is specified in column4b. A diluent type B is an organic liquid which is compatible with the organic peroxide and which has a boiling point, at atmospheric pressure, of less
than 150 ° C (302 ° F) but at least 60 ° C (140 ° F), and a flash point greater than
5 ° C (41 ° F). Type B diluents may beused for desensitizing all organic peroxides, when specified in the organicperoxide tables, provided that the boiling point is at least 60 ° C (140 ° F) above the SADT of the peroxide in a 50 kg (110 lbs) package. A type A diluent may be used to replace a type B diluent in equal concentration.

(iii) The required mass percent of ‘‘Inert solid’’ is specified in column 4c.
An inert solid is a solid that does notdetrimentally affect the thermal stability or hazard of the organic peroxide.

(5) Concentration of water. Column 5specifies, in mass percent, the minimum amount of water, if any, which
must be in formulation.

(6) Packing method. Column 6 specifies the highest packing method (largest packaging capacity) authorized for the organic peroxide. Lower numbered packing methods (smaller packagingcapacities) are also authorized. For example, if OP3 is specified, then OP2 and
OP1 are also authorized. The Table of Packing Methods in paragraph (d) ofthis section defines the non-bulk packing methods.

(7) Temperatures. Column 7a specifies the control temperature. Column 7b specifies the emergency temperature. Temperatures are specified only when temperature controls are required. (See §173.21(f)).

(8) Notes. Column 8 specifies other applicable provisions, as set forth in notes following the table.


### 557 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225ORGANICPEROXIDETABLETechnical nameID num-berCon-centration(mass %)Diluent (mass %)Water(mass%)Packing methodTemperature (°C)NotesA B I ControlEmer-gency(1) (2) (3) (4a) (4b) (4c) (5) (6) (7a) (7b) (8)Acetyl acetone peroxide ................................................................................................. UN3105≤42 .........≥48 .... ....≥8 .... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 2Acetyl acetone peroxide [as a paste] ............................................................................. UN3106≤32 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 21Acetyl cyclohexanesulfonyl peroxide .............................................................................. UN3112≤82 ......... .... .... ....≥12 .. OP4 ..................¥10 0 ......Acetyl cyclohexanesulfonyl peroxide .............................................................................. UN3115≤32 ......... ....≥68 .... ...... OP7 ..................¥10 0 ......tert-Amyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................. UN3107≤88 .........≥6 .. .... ....≥6 .... OP8 .................. ...... ......tert-Amyl peroxyacetate .................................................................................................. UN3105≤62 .........≥38 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Amyl peroxybenzoate ............................................................................................... UN3103≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......tert-Amyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate ................................................................................. UN3115≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. +20 +25 ..tert-Amyl peroxy-2-ethylhexyl carbonate ........................................................................ UN3105≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Amyl peroxy isopropyl carbonate ............................................................................. UN3103≤77 .........≥23 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......tert-Amyl peroxyneodecanoate ....................................................................................... UN3115≤77 ......... ....≥23 .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Amyl peroxyneodecanoate ....................................................................................... 3119 ....≤47 .........≥53 ........ ........ .......... OP8 .................. 0 ...... +10.tert-Amyl peroxypivalate ................................................................................................. UN3113≤77 ......... ....≥23 .... ...... OP5 .................. +10 +15 ..tert-Amyl peroxypivalate ................................................................................................. 3119 ....≤32 .........≥68 ........ ........ .......... OP8 .................. +10 +15.tert-Amyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate .................................................................... 3105 ....≤100 ....... ........ ........ ........ .......... OP7.tert-Butyl cumyl peroxide ................................................................................................ UN3107>42–100 .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 9tert-Butyl cumyl peroxide ................................................................................................ UN3108≤52 ......... .... ....≥48 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 9n-Butyl-4,4-di-(tert-butylperoxy)valerate .......................................................................... UN3103 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......n-Butyl-4,4-di-(tert-butylperoxy)valerate .......................................................................... UN3108≤52 ......... .... ....≥48 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................. UN3103 >79–90 ... .... .... ....≥10 .. OP5 .................. ...... ...... 13tert-Butyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................. UN3105≤80 .........≥20 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 4, 13tert-Butyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................. UN3107≤79 ......... .... .... .... >14 .. OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13, 16tert-Butyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................. UN3109≤72 ......... .... .... ....≥28 .. OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13tert-Butyl hydroperoxide [and] Di-tert-butylperoxide ....................................................... UN3103 <82+>9 ... ........ ....≥7 .... OP5 .................. ...... ...... 13tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate ........................................................................................ UN3102 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate ........................................................................................ UN3103≤52 .........≥48 .... .... ...... OP6 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate ........................................................................................ UN3108≤52 ......... .... ....≥48 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate [as a paste] .................................................................... UN3108≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxyacetate .................................................................................................. UN3101 >52–77 ...≥23 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxyacetate .................................................................................................. UN3103 >32–52 ...≥48 .... .... ...... OP6 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxyacetate .................................................................................................. UN3109≤32 ......... ....≥68 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate ............................................................................................... UN3103>77–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate ............................................................................................... UN3105>52–77 ...≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 1tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate ............................................................................................... UN3106≤52 ......... .... ....≥48 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate ............................................................................................... 3109 ....≤32 .........≥68 ........ ........ .......... OP8.tert-Butyl peroxybutyl fumarate ....................................................................................... UN3105≤52 .........≥48 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxycrotonate ............................................................................................... UN3105≤77 .........≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxydiethylacetate ........................................................................................ UN3113≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. +20 +25 ..tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate ................................................................................. UN3113 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP6 .................. +20 +25 ..tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate ................................................................................. UN3117 >32–52 ... ....≥48 .... ...... OP8 .................. +30 +35 ..tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate ................................................................................. UN3118≤52 ......... .... ....≥48 ...... OP8 .................. +20 +25 ..


### 558 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.225ORGANICPEROXIDETABLE—ContinuedTechnical nameID num-berCon-centration(mass %)Diluent (mass %)Water(mass%)Packing methodTemperature (°C)NotesA B I ControlEmer-gency(1) (2) (3) (4a) (4b) (4c) (5) (6) (7a) (7b) (8)tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate ................................................................................. UN3119≤32 ......... ....≥68 .... ...... OP8 .................. +40 +45 ..tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate [and] 2,2-di-(tert-Butylperoxy)butane ...................... UN3106≤12+≤14≥14 ....≥60 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate [and] 2,2-di-(tert-Butylperoxy)butane ...................... UN3115≤31+≤36 ....≥33 .... ...... OP7 .................. +35 +40 ..tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexylcarbonate ......................................................................... UN3105≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxyisobutyrate ............................................................................................ UN3111>52–77 ... ....≥23 .... ...... OP5 .................. +15 +20 ..tert-Butyl peroxyisobutyrate ............................................................................................ UN3115≤52 ......... ....≥48 .... ...... OP7 .................. +15 +20 ..tert-Butylperoxy isopropylcarbonate ............................................................................... UN3103≤77 .........≥23 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......1-(2-tert-Butylperoxy isopropyl)-3-isopropenylbenzene .................................................. UN3105≤77 .........≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......1-(2-tert-Butylperoxy isopropyl)-3-isopropenylbenzene .................................................. UN3108≤42 ......... .... ....≥58 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxy-2-methylbenzoate ................................................................................ UN3103≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate ....................................................................................... UN3115 >77–100 .... .... .... ...... OP7 ..................¥5 .. +5 ....tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate ....................................................................................... UN3115≤77 ......... ....≥23 .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] .................................. UN3119≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water (frozen)] ..................... UN3118≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate ....................................................................................... UN3119≤32 .........≥68 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxyneoheptanoate ...................................................................................... UN3115≤77 .........≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxyneoheptanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] ................................. UN3117≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxypivalate ................................................................................................. UN3113 >67–77 ...≥23 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxypivalate ................................................................................................. UN3115 >27–67 ... ....≥33 .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxypivalate ................................................................................................. UN3119≤27 ......... ....≥73 .... ...... OP8 .................. +30 +35 ..tert-Butylperoxy stearylcarbonate ................................................................................... UN3106≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate ..................................................................... UN3105 >32–100 .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethlyhexanoate .................................................................... 3106 ....≤42 ......... ........ ........≥58 .......... OP7.tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate ..................................................................... UN3109≤32 ......... ....≥68 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid ........................................................................................... UN3102 >57–86 ... .... ....≥14 ...... OP1 .................. ...... ......3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid ........................................................................................... UN3106≤57 ......... .... ....≥3 ..≥40 .. OP7 .................. ...... ......3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid ........................................................................................... UN3106≤77 ......... .... ....≥6 ..≥17 .. OP7 .................. ...... ......Cumyl hydroperoxide ...................................................................................................... UN3107>90–98 ...≤10 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13Cumyl hydroperoxide ...................................................................................................... UN3109≤90 .........≥10 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13, 15Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate ........................................................................................... 3115 ....≤87 .........≥13 ........ ........ .......... OP7 ..................¥10 0.Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate ........................................................................................... UN3115≤77 ......... ....≥23 .... ...... OP7 ..................¥10 0 ......Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] ....................................... UN3119≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 ..................¥10 0 ......Cumyl peroxyneoheptanoate .......................................................................................... UN3115≤77 .........≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 ..................¥10 0 ......Cumyl peroxypivalate ...................................................................................................... UN3115≤77 ......... ....≥23 .... ...... OP7 ..................¥5 .. +5 ....Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) ............................................................................................ UN3104≤91 ......... .... .... ....≥9 .... OP6 .................. ...... ...... 13Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) ............................................................................................ UN3105≤72 .........≥28 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 5Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) [as a paste] ........................................................................ UN3106≤72 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 5, 21Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) ............................................................................................ Exempt≤32 ......... ........ >68 ........ .......... Exempt ............. ......... .......... 29Diacetone alcohol peroxides ........................................................................................... UN3115≤57 ......... ....≥26 ....≥8 .... OP7 .................. +40 +45 .. 5Diacetyl peroxide ............................................................................................................ UN3115≤27 ......... ....≥73 .... ...... OP7 .................. +20 +25 .. 8,13Di-tert-amyl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3107≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......


### 559 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.2252,2-Di-(tert-amylperoxy)-butane ...................................................................................... 3105 ....≤57 .........≥43 ........ ........ .......... OP7.1,1-Di-(tert-amylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3103≤82 .........≥18 .... .... ...... OP6 .................. ...... ......Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... UN3102 >51–100 .... ....≤48 ...... OP2 .................. ...... ...... 3Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... UN3102 >77–94 ... .... .... ....≥6 .... OP4 .................. ...... ...... 3Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... UN3104≤77 ......... .... .... ....≥23 .. OP6 .................. ...... ......Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... UN3106≤62 ......... .... ....≥28≥10 .. OP7 .................. ...... ......Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] ..................................................................................... UN3106 >52–62 ... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 21Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... UN3106 >35–52 ... .... ....≥48 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... UN3107 >36–42 ...≥18 .... ....≤40 .. OP8 .................. ...... ......Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] ..................................................................................... UN3108≤56.5 ...... .... .... ....≥15 .. OP8 .................. ...... ......Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] ..................................................................................... UN3108≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 21Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a stable dispersion in water] ..................................................... UN3109≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... Exempt≤35 ......... ........ ........≥65 .......... Exempt ............. ......... .......... 29Di-(4-tert-butylcyclohexyl)peroxydicarbonate .................................................................. UN3114≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP6 .................. +30 +35 ..Di-(4-tert-butylcyclohexyl)peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] ............. UN3119≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +30 +35 ..Di-tert-butyl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3107 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Di-tert-butyl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3109≤52 ......... ....≥48 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 24Di-tert-butyl peroxyazelate .............................................................................................. UN3105≤52 .........≥48 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......2,2-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)butane ....................................................................................... UN3103≤52 .........≥48 .... .... ...... OP6 .................. ...... ......1,6-Di-(tert-butylperoxycarbonyloxy)hexane ................................................................... UN3103≤72 .........≥28 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3101 >80–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3103 >52–80...≥20 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-cyclohexane ............................................................................. 3103 ....≤72 ......... ........≥28 ........ .......... OP5 .................. ......... .......... 301,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3105 >42–52...≥48 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3106≤42 .........≥13 ....≥45 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3107≤27 .........≥25 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 221,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3109≤42 .........≥58 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-Butylperoxy) cyclohexane ............................................................................. 3109 ....≤37 .........≥63 ........ ........ .......... OP8.1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3109≤25 .........≥25≥50 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3109≤13 .........≥13≥74 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Di-n-butyl peroxydicarbonate .......................................................................................... UN3115 >27–52 ... ....≥48 .... ...... OP7 ..................¥15¥5 ...Di-n-butyl peroxydicarbonate .......................................................................................... UN3117≤27 ......... ....≥73 .... ...... OP8 ..................¥10 0 ......Di-n-butyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water (frozen)] ........................ UN3118≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 ..................¥15¥5 ...Di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate ...................................................................................... UN3113 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP4 ..................¥20¥10 6Di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate ...................................................................................... UN3115≤52 ......... ....≥48 .... ...... OP7 ..................¥15¥5 ...Di-(2-tert-butylperoxyisopropyl)benzene(s) ..................................................................... UN3106 >42–100 .... ....≤57 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 1, 9Di-(2-tert-butylperoxyisopropyl) benzene(s) .................................................................... Exempt≤42 ......... ........ ........≥58 .......... Exempt ............. ......... .......... 29Di-(tert-butylperoxy)phthalate .......................................................................................... UN3105>42–52 ...≥48 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......Di-(tert-butylperoxy)phthalate [as a paste] ..................................................................... UN3106≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 21Di-(tert-butylperoxy)phthalate .......................................................................................... UN3107≤42 .........≥58 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......2,2-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)propane ..................................................................................... UN3105≤52 .........≥48 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......2,2-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)propane ..................................................................................... UN3106≤42 .........≥13 ....≥45 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3101 >90–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3103 >57–90 ...≥10 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3103≤77 ......... ....≥23 .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3103≤90 ......... ........≥10 ........ .......... OP5 .................. ......... .......... 301,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3110≤57 ......... .... ....≥43 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3107≤57 .........≥43 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3107≤32 .........≥26≥42 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate ............................................................................................... UN3116≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. +30 +35 ..Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] .......................................... UN3119≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +30 +35 ..


### 560 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.225ORGANICPEROXIDETABLE—ContinuedTechnical nameID num-berCon-centration(mass %)Diluent (mass %)Water(mass%)Packing methodTemperature (°C)NotesA B I ControlEmer-gencyDicetyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] .......................................... UN3119≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +30 +35 ..Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide ........................................................................................... UN3102≤77 ......... .... .... ....≥23 .. OP5 .................. ...... ......Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide ........................................................................................... Exempt≤32 ......... ........ ........≥68 .......... Exempt ............. ......... .......... 29Di-2,4-dichlorobenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] ................................................................. UN3118≤52 ......... ........ ........ ........ OP8 +20 ................... +25.Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] ....................................................................... UN3106≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 21Dicumyl peroxide ............................................................................................................ UN3110 >52–100 .... ....≤48 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 9Dicumyl peroxide ............................................................................................................ Exempt≤52 ......... ........ ........≥48 .......... Exempt ............. ......... .......... 29Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate ..................................................................................... UN3112 >91–100 .... .... .... ...... OP3 .................. +10 +15 ..Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate ..................................................................................... UN3114≤91 ......... .... .... ....≥9 .... OP5 .................. +10 +15 ..Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] ................................. UN3119≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +15 +20 ..Didecanoyl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3114≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP6 .................. +30 +35 ..2,2-Di-(4,4-di(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexyl)propane ......................................................... UN3106≤42 ......... .... ....≥58 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......2,2-Di-(4,4-di(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexyl)propane ......................................................... UN3107≤22 ......... ....≥78 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Di-2,4-dichlorobenzoyl peroxide ..................................................................................... UN3102≤77 ......... .... .... ....≥23 .. OP5 .................. ...... ......Di-2,4-dichlorobenzoyl peroxide [as a paste with silicone oil] ........................................ UN3106≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......Di-(2-ethoxyethyl) peroxydicarbonate ............................................................................. UN3115≤52 ......... ....≥48 .... ...... OP7 ..................¥10 0 ......Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate ............................................................................... UN3113 >77–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 ..................¥20¥10Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate ............................................................................... UN3115≤77 ......... ....≥23 .... ...... OP7 ..................¥15¥5 ...Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] ........................... 3119 ....≤62 ......... ........ ........ ........ .......... OP8 ..................¥15¥5.Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] ........................... UN3119≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 ..................¥15¥5 ...Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water (frozen)] ............. UN3120≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 ..................¥15¥5 ...2,2-Dihydroperoxypropane .............................................................................................. UN3102≤27 ......... .... ....≥73 ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......Di-(1-hydroxycyclohexyl)peroxide ................................................................................... UN3106≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......Diisobutyryl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3111 >32–52 ... ....≥48 .... ...... OP5 ..................¥20¥10Diisobutyryl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3115≤32 ......... ....≥68 .... ...... OP7 ..................¥20¥10Diisopropylbenzene dihydroperoxide .............................................................................. UN3106≤82 .........≥5 .. .... ....≥5 .... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 17Diisopropyl peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................................ UN3112 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP2 ..................¥15¥5 ...Diisopropyl peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................................ UN3115≤52 ......... ....≥48 .... ...... OP7 ..................¥20¥10Diisopropyl peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................................ UN3115≤28 .........≥72 .... .... ...... OP7 ..................¥15¥5 ...Dilauroyl peroxide ........................................................................................................... UN3106≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......Dilauroyl peroxide [as a stable dispersion in water] ....................................................... UN3109≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Di-(3-methoxybutyl) peroxydicarbonate .......................................................................... UN3115≤52 ......... ....≥48 .... ...... OP7 ..................¥5 .. +5 ....Di-(2-methylbenzoyl)peroxide ......................................................................................... UN3112≤87 ......... .... .... ....≥13 .. OP5 .................. +30 +35 ..Di-(4-methylbenzoyl)peroxide [as a paste with silicone oil] ........................................... UN3106≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......Di-(3-methylbenzoyl) peroxide + Benzoyl (3-methylbenzoyl) peroxide + Dibenzoylperoxide.UN3115≤20+ .......≤18+≤4 .......≥58 .... ...... OP7 .................. +35 +40 ..2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(benzoylperoxy)hexane ................................................................... UN3102 >82–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(benzoylperoxy)hexane ................................................................... UN3106≤82 ......... .... ....≥18 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(benzoylperoxy)hexane ................................................................... UN3104≤82 ......... .... .... ....≥18 .. OP5 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexane .................................................................. UN3105 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexane .................................................................. UN3108≤77 ......... .... ....≥23 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexane .................................................................. UN3109≤52 .........≥48 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexane [as a paste] ............................................. UN3108≤47 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......


### 561 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.2252,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexyne-3 ............................................................... UN3101 >86–100 ........ .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexyne-3 ............................................................... UN3103 >52–86 ...≥14 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexyne-3 ............................................................... UN3106≤52 ......... .... ....≥48 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(2-ethylhexanoylperoxy)hexane ...................................................... UN3113≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. +20 +25 ..2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-dihydroperoxyhexane .......................................................................... UN3104≤82 ......... .... .... ....≥18 .. OP6 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoylperoxy)hexane .......................................... UN3105≤77 .........≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......1,1-Dimethyl-3-hydroxybutylperoxyneoheptanoate ......................................................... UN3117≤52 .........≥48 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate .......................................................................................... UN3116≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. +20 +25 ..Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] ..................................... UN3119≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +20 +25 ..Di-(2-neodecanoylperoxyisopropyl)benzene ................................................................... UN3115≤52 .........≥48 .... .... ...... OP7 ..................¥10 0 ......Di-(2-neodecanoyl-peroxyisopropyl) benzene, as stable dispersion in water ................ 3119 ....≤42 ......... ........ ........ ........ .......... OP8 ..................¥15¥5.Di-n-nonanoyl peroxide ................................................................................................... UN3116≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..Di-n-octanoyl peroxide .................................................................................................... UN3114≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. +10 +15 ..Di-(2-phenoxyethyl)peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................... UN3102 >85–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......Di-(2-phenoxyethyl)peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................... UN3106≤85 ......... .... .... ....≥15 .. OP7 .................. ...... ......Dipropionyl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3117≤27 ......... ....≥73 .... ...... OP8 .................. +15 +20 ..Di-n-propyl peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................................ UN3113≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP3 ..................¥25¥15Di-n-propyl peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................................ UN3113≤77 ......... ....≥23 .... ...... OP5 ..................¥20¥10Disuccinic acid peroxide ................................................................................................. UN3102>72–100 .... .... .... ...... OP4 .................. ...... ...... 18Disuccinic acid peroxide ................................................................................................. UN3116≤72 ......... .... .... ....≥28 .. OP7 .................. +10 +15 ..Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide .............................................................................. UN3115 >38–82...≥18 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide [as a stable dispersion in water] .......................... UN3119≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +10 +15 ..Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide .............................................................................. UN3119≤38 .........≥62 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +20 +25 ..Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-amylperoxy)butyrate ............................................................................. UN3105≤67 .........≥33 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-butylperoxy)butyrate ............................................................................. UN3103 >77–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-butylperoxy)butyrate ............................................................................. UN3105≤77 .........≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-butylperoxy)butyrate ............................................................................. UN3106≤52 ......... .... ....≥48 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......1-(2-ethylhexanoylperoxy)-1,3-Dimethylbutyl peroxypivalate ......................................... UN3115≤52 .........≥45≥10 .... ...... OP7 ..................¥20¥10tert-Hexyl peroxyneodecanoate ...................................................................................... UN3115≤71 .........≥29 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Hexyl peroxypivalate ................................................................................................ UN3115≤72 ......... ....≥28 .... ...... OP7 .................. +10 +15 ..3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate ......................................................... 3115 ....≤77 .........≥23 ........ ........ .......... OP7 ..................¥5 .. +5.3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] .... 3119 ....≤52 ......... ........ ........ ........ .......... OP8 ..................¥5 .. +5.3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate ......................................................... 3117 ....≤52 .........≥48 ........ ........ .......... OP8 ..................¥5 .. +5.Isopropyl sec-butyl peroxydicarbonat +Di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate+Di-isopropylperoxydicarbonate.UN3111≤52+≤28+≤22 ........... .... .... ...... OP5 ..................¥20¥10Isopropyl sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate+Di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate+Di-isopropylperoxydicarbonate.UN3115≤32+≤15¥18 ........+≤12 .......¥15 ........≥38 .... .... ...... OP7 ..................¥20¥10Isopropylcumyl hydroperoxide ........................................................................................ UN3109≤72 .........≥28 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13p-Menthyl hydroperoxide ................................................................................................ UN3105 >72–100 .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 13p-Menthyl hydroperoxide ................................................................................................ UN3109≤72 .........≥28 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Methylcyclohexanone peroxide(s) .................................................................................. UN3115≤67 ......... ....≥33 .... ...... OP7 .................. +35 +40 ..Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s) ...................................................................................... UN3101≤52 .........≥48 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ...... 5, 13Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s) ...................................................................................... UN3105≤45 .........≥55 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 5Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s) ...................................................................................... UN3107≤40 .........≥60 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 7Methyl isobutyl ketone peroxide(s) ................................................................................. UN3105≤62 .........≥19 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 5, 23Methyl isopropyl ketone peroxide(s) ............................................................................... 3109 .... (Seeremark31).≥70 ........ ........ .......... OP8 .................. ......... .......... 31


### 562 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.225ORGANICPEROXIDETABLE—ContinuedTechnical nameID num-berCon-centration(mass %)Diluent (mass %)Water(mass%)Packing methodTemperature (°C)NotesA B I ControlEmer-gencyOrganic peroxide, liquid, sample .................................................................................... UN3103 ............. .... .... .... ...... OP2 .................. ...... ...... 12Organic peroxide, liquid, sample, temperature controlled .............................................. UN3113 ............. .... .... .... ...... OP2 .................. ...... ...... 12Organic peroxide, solid, sample ..................................................................................... UN3104 ............. .... .... .... ...... OP2 .................. ...... ...... 12Organic peroxide, solid, sample, temperature controlled ............................................... UN3114 ............. .... .... .... ...... OP2 .................. ...... ...... 123,3,5,7,7-Pentamethyl-1,2,4-Trioxepane ......................................................................... 3107 ....≤100 ....... ........ ........ ........ .......... OP8.Peroxyacetic acid, type D, stabilized .............................................................................. UN3105≤43 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 13, 20Peroxyacetic acid, type E, stabilized .............................................................................. UN3107≤43 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13, 20Peroxyacetic acid, type F, stabilized .............................................................................. UN3109≤43 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13, 20, 28Peroxyacetic acid or peracetic acid [with not more than 7% hydrogen peroxide] ......... UN3107≤36 ......... .... .... ....≥15 .. OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13, 20, 28Peroxyacetic acid or peracetic acid [with not more than 20% hydrogen peroxide] ....... Exempt≤6 ........... .... .... ....≥60 .. Exempt ............. ...... ...... 28Peroxyacetic acid or peracetic acid [with not more than 26% hydrogen peroxide] ....... UN3109≤17 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13, 20, 28Peroxylauric acid ............................................................................................................. UN3118≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +35 +40 ..Pinanyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................... UN3105>56–100 .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 13Pinanyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................... UN3109≤56 .........≥44 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Polyether poly-tert-butylperoxycarbonate ....................................................................... UN3107≤52 ......... ....≥48 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Tetrahydronaphthyl hydroperoxide ................................................................................. UN3106≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl hydroperoxide ......................................................................... UN3105≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate ......................................................... UN3115≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. +15 +20 ..1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate ............................................................... UN3115≤72 ......... ....≥28 .... ...... OP7 .................. -5 .... +5 ....1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] .......... UN3119≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 ..................¥5 .. +5 ....1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl peroxypivalate .......................................................................... UN3115≤77 .........≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..3,6,9-Triethyl-3,6,9-trimethyl-1,4,7-triperoxonane ........................................................... UN3105≤42 .........≥58 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 26


### 563 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225

N OTES
1. For domestic shipments, OP8 is authorized.

2. Available oxygen must be <4.7%.
3. For concentrations <80% OP5 is allowed. For concentrations of at least 80% but <85%,
OP4 is allowed. For concentrations of at least 85%, maximum package size is OP2.

4. The diluent may be replaced by di-tertbutyl peroxide.

5. Available oxygen must be ≤ 9% with or
without water.

6. For domestic shipments, OP5 is authorized.

7. Available oxygen must be ≤ 8.2% with or
without water.

8. Only non-metallic packagings are authorized.

9. For domestic shipments this material maybe transported under the provisions of paragraph (h)(3)(xii) of this section.

10. [Reserved] 11. [Reserved]12. Samples may only be offered for transportation under the provisions of paragraph (b)(2) of this section.

13. ‘‘Corrosive’’ subsidiary risk label is required.

14. [Reserved] 15. No ‘‘Corrosive’’ subsidiary risk label is required for concentrations below 80%.

16. With <6% di-tert-butyl peroxide.
17. With ≤ 8% 1-isopropylhydroperoxy-4- isopropylhydroxybenzene.

18. Addition of water to this organic peroxide will decrease its thermal stability.

19. [Reserved] 20. Mixtures with hydrogen peroxide, water and acid(s).

21. With diluent type A, with or without

water.

22. With ≥ 36% diluent type A by mass, and in addition ethylbenzene.

23. With ≥ 19% diluent type A by mass, and in addition methyl isobutyl ketone.

24. Diluent type B with boiling point >100
C. 25. No ‘‘Corrosive’’ subsidiary risk label is required for concentrations below 56%.

26. Available oxygen must be ≤ 7.6%. 27. Formulations derived from distillationof peroxyacetic acid originating from peroxyacetic acid in a concentration of notmore than 41% with water, total active oxygen less than or equal to 9.5% (peroxyacetic acid plus hydrogen peroxide).

28. For the purposes of this section, the names ‘‘Peroxyacetic acid’’ and ‘‘Peracetic acid’’ are synonymous.

29. Not subject to the requirements of this subchapter for Division 5.2.

30. Diluent type B with boiling point > 130

° C (266 ° F).

31. Available oxygen ≤ 6.7%.

(d) Packing Method Table. Packagings for organic peroxides and self-reactive
substances are listed in the Maximum Quantity per Packing Method Table. The packing methods are designated OP1 to OP8. The quantities specified for each packing method represent the
maximum that is authorized.

(1) The following types of packagings
are authorized:

(i) Drums: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H1, 1H2;

(ii) Jerricans: 3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2;

(iii) Boxes: 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2, 4A, 4B; or

(iv) Composite packagings with a plastic inner receptacle: 6HA1, 6HA2, 6HB1, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6HH1, 6HH2.

(2) Metal packaging (including inner packagings of combination packagings and outer packagings of combination or composite packagings) are used only for packing methods OP7 and OP8.

(3) In combination packagings, glass receptacles are used only as inner packagings with a maximum content of 0.5 kg for solids or 0.5 L for liquids.

(4) The maximum quantity per packaging or package for Packing Methods
OP1–OP8 must be as follows:

M AXIMUM Q UANTITY P ER P ACKAGING /P ACKAGE

[For Packing Methods OP1 to OP8]

Maximum quantity Packing Method

OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 1 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8

Solids and combination packagings (liquid and

solid) (kg) ........................................................... 0.5 0.5/10 5 5 25 50 50 2 400 Liquids (L) ............................................................. 0.5 ............ 5 ............ 30 60 60 3 225

1 If two values are given, the first applies to the maximum net mass per inner packaging and the second to the maximum net mass of the complete package.

2 60 kg for jerricans/200 kg for boxes and, for solids, 400 kg in combination packagings with outer packagings comprising boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, and 4H2) and with inner packagings of plastics or fiber with a maximum net mass of 25 kg.

3 60 L for jerricans.


### 564 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.225

(e) Organic Peroxide IBC Table. The following Organic Peroxide IBC Tablespecifies, by technical name, those organic peroxides that are authorized for transportation in certain IBCs and not subject to the approval provisions of§173.128 of this part. Additional requirements for authorized IBCs are found in paragraph (f) of this section.

O RGANIC P EROXIDE IBC T ABLE

UN No. Organic peroxide Type of IBC Maximum quantity (litres) Control temperature Emergency temperature

3109 ................. ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, LIQUID. tert-Butyl hydroperoxide, not

more than 72% with water. 31A 1250

tert-Butyl peroxyacetate, not

more than 32% in diluent type A. 31A 1250

.............................................. 31HA1 1000 tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate, not

more than 32% in diluent type A. 31A 1250.

tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-

trimethylhexanoate, not more than 37% in diluent type A. 31A 1250.

31HA1 1000. Cumyl hydroperoxide, not more

than 90% in diluent type A. 31HA1 1250

Dibenzoyl peroxide, not more

than 42% as a stable dispersion. 31H1 1000

Di-tert-butyl peroxide, not more

than 52% in diluent type B. 31A 1250

.............................................. 31HA1 1000 1,1-Di-(tert-Butylperoxy)

cyclohexane, not more than 37% in diluent type A. 31A 1250.

1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)

cyclohexane, not more than 42% in diluent type A. 31H1 1000

Dicumyl peroxide, less than or

equal to 100%. 31A 1250

.............................................. 31HA1 1000 Dilauroyl peroxide, not more

than 42%, stable dispersion,
in water. 31HA1 1000

Isopropyl cumyl hydroperoxide,

not more than 72% in diluent type A. 31HA1 1250

p-Menthyl hydroperoxide, not

more than 72% in diluent type A. 31HA1 1250

Peroxyacetic acid, stabilized,

not more than 17%. 31H1 1500

.............................................. 31HA1 1500

.............................................. 31A 1500

Peroxyacetic acid, with not

more than 26% hydrogen peroxide. 31A 1500

.............................................. 31HA1 1500Peroxyacetic acid, type F, stabilized. 31A 1500

................................................... 31HA1 1500
3110 ................. ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID. Dicumyl peroxide, less than or

equal to 100%. 31A 2000

.............................................. 31H1

.............................................. 31HA1 3119 ................. ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLED.


### 565 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225

O RGANIC P EROXIDE IBC T ABLE —Continued

UN No. Organic peroxide Type of IBC Maximum quantity (litres) Control temperature Emergency temperature

tert-Amyl peroxypivalate, not

more than 32% in diluent type A. 31A 1250 +10 ° C +15 ° C.

tert-Butyl peroxy-2-

ethylhexanoate, not more than 32% in diluent type B. 31HA1 1000 +30 ° C +35 ° C

.............................................. 31A 1250 +30 ° C +35 ° C tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate,

not more than 32% in diluent type A. 31A 1250 0 ° C +10 ° C

tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate,

not more than 52%, stable dispersion, in water. 31A 1250

¥ 5 ° C +5 ° C.

tert-Butyl peroxypivalate, not

more than 27% in diluent type B. 31HA1 1000 +10 ° C +15 ° C

.............................................. 31A 1250 +10 ° C +15 ° C Dicyclohexylperoxydicarbonate,

not more than 42% as a stable dispersion, in water. 31A 1250 +10 ° C +15 ° C

Di-(4-tert-butylcyclohexyl)

peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42%, stable dispersion,
in water. 31HA1 1000 +30 ° C +35 ° C

Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate, not

more than 42%, stable dispersion, in water. 31HA1 1000 +30 ° C +35 ° C

Di-(2-ethylhexyl)

peroxydicarbonate, not more than 62%, staple dispersion,
in water. 31A 1250

¥ 20 ° C

¥ 10 ° C.

Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate,

not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in water. 31HA1 1000 +15 ° C +20 ° C

Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)

peroxide, not more than 38% in diluent type A. 31HA1 1000 +10 ° C +15 ° C

.............................................. 31A 1250 +10 ° C +15 ° C Di-(2-

neodecanoylperoxyisopropyl) benzene, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in

water. 31A 1250

¥ 15 ° C

¥ 5 ° C.

3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl

peroxy-neodecanoate, notmore than 52%, stable dispersion, in water. 31A 1250

¥ 15 ° C

¥ 5 ° C.

Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)

peroxide, not more than 52%, stable dispersion, in

water. 31A 1250 +10 ° C +15 ° C

1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl

peroxyneodecanoate, notmore than 52%, stable dispersion, in water. 31A 1250

¥ 5 ° C +5 ° C

(f) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject
to the conditions and limitations ofthis section if the IBC type is authorized according to paragraph (e) of thissection, as applicable, and the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performance level.Type F organic peroxides or self-reactive substances are not authorized for transportation in IBCs other than those specified, unless approved by the
Associate Administrator.

(1) IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during transportation. The inlet to the pressure relief device shall be sited in the vapor spaceof the IBC under maximum filling conditions during transportation.


### 566 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.225

(2) To prevent explosive rupture of metal IBCs or composite IBCs with acomplete metal casing, the emergencyrelief devices shall be designed to ventall the decomposition products and vapors evolved during self-accelerating decomposition or during a period of notless than one hour of complete fire-engulfment as calculated by the formula in paragraph (h)(3)(v) of this section.The control and emergency temperatures specified in the Organic Peroxide
IBC Table are based on a non-insulated
IBC. (g) Organic Peroxide Portable Tank Table. The following Organic Peroxide Portable Tank Table provides certainportable tank requirements and identifies, by technical name, those organicperoxides that are authorized for transportation in the bulk packagings listed in paragraph (h). Organic peroxides listed in this table, provided they meet the specific packaging requirements found in paragraph (h), are not subject to the approval provisions of §173.128 of this part.


### 567 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225ORGANICPEROXIDEPORTABLETANKTABLEUN No. Hazardous materialMinimumtestpressure(bar)Minimum shellthickness (mm-reference steel)See. . .Bottom opening requirementsSee. . .Pressure-relief requirementsSee. . .Filling limitsControl tempera-tureEmergency tem-perature3109 ......... ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F,LIQUID.tert-Butyl hydroperoxide, notmore than 72% with water.*Provided that steps have beentaken to achieve the safetyequivalence of 65% tert-Butylhydroperoxide and 35% water.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)Cumyl hydro-peroxide, not morethan 90% in diluent type A.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)Di-tert-butyl peroxide, not more32% in diluent type A.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)Dicumyl peroxide, less than orequal to 100% in diluent typeB.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)Isopropyl cumyl hydro-peroxide,not more than 72% in diluenttype A.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)p-Menthyl hydro-peroxide, notmore than 72% in diluent typeA.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)Pinanyl hydro-peroxide, not morethan 56% in diluent type A.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)3110 ......... ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F,SOLID.Dicumyl peroxide less than orequal to 100% with inert solids.*Maximum quantity per portabletank 2,000 kg.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)3119 ......... ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F,LIQUID, TEMPERATURECONTROLLED.tert-Amyl peroxyneodecanoate,not more than 47% in diluenttype A.4 § 178.274 (d)(2) § 178.275 (d)(3) § 178.275 (g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)¥10°C¥5°C.tert-Butyl peroxyacetate, notmore than 32% in diluent typeB.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)+30°C +35°Ctert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, not more than32% in diluent B.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)+15°C +20°C


### 568 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.225ORGANICPEROXIDEPORTABLETANKTABLE—ContinuedUN No. Hazardous materialMinimumtestpressure(bar)Minimum shellthickness (mm-reference steel)See. . .Bottom opening requirementsSee. . .Pressure-relief requirementsSee. . .Filling limitsControl tempera-tureEmergency tem-peraturetert-Butylperoxypivalate, notmore than 27% in diluent typeB.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)+5°C +10°Ctert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate, not more than 32%in diluent type B.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)+35°C +40°CDi-(3,5,5-trimethyl-hexanoyl) peroxide, not more than 38% indiluent type A or type B.4 § 178.274 (d)(2) § 178.275 (d)(3) § 178.275 (g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)0°C +5°C.Peroxyacetic acid, distilled, stabilized, not more than 41%.4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at59°F (15°C)+30°C +35°C


### 569 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225

(h) Bulk packagings other than IBCs.The following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the conditions andlimitations of this section, if the organic peroxide is listed in the Organic
Peroxide Portable Tank Table and bulkpackagings are authorized, or if the organic peroxide is specifically authorized for transport in a bulk packaging by this paragraph (h), and the bulkpackaging conforms to the requirements of this subchapter:

(1) Rail cars. Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 fusion-weld
tank car tanks are authorized. DOT 103W, 111A60F1 and 111A60W1 tank car
tanks must have bottom outlets effectively sealed from inside. Gauging devices are required on DOT 103W tank
car tanks. Riveted tank car tanks are
not authorized.

(2) Cargo tanks. Specification MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles with a tank design pressure of at least 172 kPa (25 psig) are authorized.

(3) Portable tanks. The following requirements apply to portable tanks intended for the transport of organic peroxides or self-reactive substances. DOT 51, 57, IM 101 portable tanks, and UNportable tanks that conform to the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section, are authorized. Type F organicperoxide or self-reactive substance formulations other than those indicated in the Organic Peroxide Portable Tank Table may be transported in portabletanks if approved by the Associate Administrator. The following conditions also apply:

(i) The portable tank must be designed for a test pressure of at least 0.4 MPa (4 bar).

(ii) The portable tank must be fitted with temperature-sensing devices.

(iii) The portable tank must be fittedwith pressure relief devices and emergency-relief devices. Vacuum-relief devices may also be used. Pressure reliefdevices must operate at pressures determined according to both the properties of the hazardous material and
the construction characteristics of the portable tank. Fusible elements are
not allowed in the shell.

(iv) The pressure relief devices must consist of reclosing devices fitted to prevent significant build-up within the portable tank of the decompositionproducts and vapors released at a temperature of 50 ° C (122 ° F). The capacity and start-to-discharge pressure of the
relief devices must be in accordance with the applicable requirements ofthis subchapter specified for the portable tank. The pressure relief devices must not allow liquid to escape in the event the portable tank is overturned
in a loaded condition.

(v)(A) The emergency-relief devices may be of the reclosing or frangibletypes, or a combination of the two, designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapors evolved during a period of not less than one hour of complete fire engulfment as calculated by the following formula:



### q = 70961 F A 0.82

Where: q = heat absorption (W) A = wetted area (m 2 ) F = insulation factor (

¥ )

(B) Insulation factor (F) in the formula in paragraph (h)(3)(v)(A) of thissection equals 1 for non-insulated vessels and for insulated vessels F is calculated using the following formula:



### F T PO



### = − 

# ( ) U 923

47032

Where:

U = K/L = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation (W·m

¥ 2 ·K

¥ 1 ); where K = heat conductivity of insulation layer (W·m

¥ 1 ·K

¥ 1 ), and L = thickness of insulation layer (m).
T PO = temperature of material at relieving

conditions (K).
(vi) The start-to-discharge pressure of emergency-relief devices must behigher than that specified for the pressure relief devices in paragraph(h)(3)(iv) of this section. The emergency-relief devices must be sized anddesigned in such a way that the maximum pressure in the shell never exceeds the test pressure of the portable
tank.

N OTE TO PARAGRAPH (h)(3)(vi): An example
of a method to determine the size of emergency-relief devices is given in Appendix 5 of the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR,see §171.7 of this subchapter). A second example of a test method for venting sizing is given in the American Institute of Chemical Engineers Process Safety Progress Journal,


### 570 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.226

June 2002 issue (Vol. 21, No. 2) (Informationalmaterials not requiring incorporation by reference, see §171.7(b)).

(vii) For insulated portable tanks,the capacity and setting of emergencyrelief devices must be determined assuming a loss of insulation from 1% of
the surface area.

(viii) Vacuum-relief devices and reclosing devices on portable tanks used
for flammable hazardous materials must be provided with flame arresters. Any reduction of the relief capacity caused by the flame arrester must be taken into account and the appropriate relief capacity must be provided.

(ix) Service equipment such as devices and external piping must be designed and constructed so that no hazardous material remains in them after filling the portable tank.

(x) Portable tanks may be either insulated or protected by a sun-shield. If
the SADT of the hazardous material in the portable tank is 55 ° C (131 ° F) orless, the portable tank must be completely insulated. The outer surface must be finished in white or bright
metal.

(xi) The degree of filling must not exceed 90% at 15 ° C (59 ° F).

(xii) DOT 57 metal portable tanks are authorized only for those materials or
mixtures of two or more materials that are provided with a reference to Note 9 in Column 8 of the Organic Peroxide Table, found in paragraph (c) of this section. DOT 57 portable tanks must conform to the venting requirements of paragraph (f) of this section. These portable tanks are not subject to any other requirements of paragraph (h) of
this section.

(4) For tertiary butyl hydroperoxide (TBHP), each tank car, cargo tank or portable tank must contain 7.6 cm (3.0 inches) low density polyethylene (PE) saddles having a melt index of at least 0.2 grams per 10 minutes (for example see, ASTM D1238, condition E) as part of the lading, with a ratio of PE to TBHP over a range of 0.008 to 0.012 by mass. Alternatively, plastic or metal containers equipped with fusible plugs having a melting point between 69 ° C (156 ° F) and 71 ° C (160 ° F) and filled with a sufficient quantity of water to dilute the TBHP to 65% or less by mass may
be used. The PE saddles must be visually inspected after each trip and, at a minimum, once every 12 months, and replaced when discoloration, fracture, severe deformation, or other indication of change is noted.

[69 FR 76159, Dec. 20, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 34398, June 14, 2005; 72 FR 55693, Oct. 1, 2007; 74 FR 2260, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.226 Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A.
Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Zone A poisonous by inhalation (see §173.133) must be packed in non-bulk packagingsin accordance with the following paragraphs:

(a) In seamless specification or UNcylinders conforming to the requirements of §173.40.

(b) In 1A1, 1B1, 1H1, 1N1, or 6HA1 drums further packed in a 1A2 or 1H2
drum. Both inner and outer drums must conform to the performance test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level. The outerdrums may be tested either as a package intended to contain inner packagings (combination package) or as a single packaging intended to containsolids or liquids at a mass corresponding to the mass of the assembled packaging system. All outer drums, even those tested to containinner packaging or as single packagings for solids, must withstand a hydrostatic test pressure of 100 kPa (15 psig). The outer drum must have a minimum thickness of 1.35 mm (0.053 inch) for a 1A2 outer drum or 6.3 mm(0.248 inch) for a 1H2 outer drum. In addition, the inner drum must—

(1) Be capable of satisfactorily withstanding the hydrostatic pressure test in §178.605 of this subchapter at a test pressure of 300 kPa (45 psig);

(2) Satisfactorily withstand the leakproofness test in §178.604 of thissubchapter using an internal air pressure of at least twice the vapor pressure at 55 ° C (131 ° F) of the material to be packaged;

(3) Have screw-type closures that

are—


### 571 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.226

(i) Closed and tightened to a torqueprescribed by the closure manufacturer, using a properly calibrated device that is capable of measuring torque;

(ii) Physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transportation; and

(iii) Provided with a cap seal that is properly applied in accordance with thecap seal manufacturer’s recommendations and is capable of withstanding an internal pressure of at least 100 kPa (15 psig).

(4) Have a minimum thickness as follows:

(i) For a 1A1 or 1N1 drum, 1.3 mm (0.051 inch);

(ii) For a 1B1 drum, 3.9 mm (0.154 inch);

(iii) For a 1H1 drum, 3.16 mm (0.124 inch); and

(iv) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic inner container shall be 1.58 mm (0.0622 inch) and the outer steel drum shall be 0.96 mm (0.0378 inch).

(5) Be isolated from the outer drum by a shock-mitigating, non-reactive material, which completely surrounds the inner packaging on all sides.

(c) In combination packagings, consisting of an inner packaging system and an outer packaging, as follows:

(1) Outer packagings:

Steel drum: 1A2 Aluminum drum: 1B2Metal drum, other than steel or aluminum: 1N2 Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G Expanded plastic box: 4H2 Solid plastic box: 4H2

(2) Inner packaging system. The inner packaging system consists of two packagings:

(i) an impact-resistant receptacle ofglass, earthenware, plastic or metal securely cushioned with a non-reactive, absorbent material, and

(A) Capacity of each inner receptacle may not exceed 4 L (1 gallon). (B) An inner receptacle that has a
closure must have a closure which is physically held in place by any meanscapable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transportation.

(ii) Packed within a leak-tight packaging of metal or plastic.

(iii) This combination packaging inturn is packed within the outer packaging.

(3) Additional requirements:(i) The total amount of liquid contained in the outer packaging must not exceed 16 L (4 gallons).

(ii) The inner packaging system mustconform to the performance test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter, at the PackagingGroup I performance level when subjected to the following tests:

(A) §178.603—Drop Test (B) §178.604—Leakproofness Test (C) §178.605—Hydrostatic Pressure

Test

(iii) The inner packaging system
must meet the above tests without the benefit of the outer packaging.

(iv) The leakproofness and hydrostatic pressure test may be conducted on either the inner receptacle or the outer packaging of the inner packaging system.

(v) The outer package must conform to the performance test requirementsof subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter, at the Packaging Group I performance level as applicable for the type of package being used.

(d) If approved by the Associate Administrator, 1A1, 1B1, 1H1, 1N1, 6HA1 or 6HH1 drums described in paragraph (b) of this section may be used without being further packed in a 1A2 or 1H2 drum if the shipper loads the material, palletizes the drums, blocks and braces the drums within the transport vehicle and seals the transport vehicle used. Drums may not be stacked (double decked) within the transport vehicle. Shipments must be from one origin toone destination only without any intermediate pickup or delivery.

(e) Prior to reuse, all authorized inner drums must be leakproofness
tested and marked in accordance with §173.28 using a minimum test pressure


### 572 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.227

as indicated in paragraph (b)(2) of this

section.

[69 FR 76172, Dec. 20, 2004, as amended at 71 FR 33881, June 12, 2006; 74 FR 2263, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.227 Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone B.
(a) In packagings as authorized in§173.226 and seamless and welded specification cylinders or UN seamless cylinders conforming to the requirements of §173.40.

(b) 1A1, 1B1, 1H1, 1N1, 6HA1, or 6HH1 drums further packed in a 1A2 or 1H2
drum. Both the inner and outer drums must conform to the performance test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level. Both the
inner and outer drums must conform to the performance test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level. The outer drums may be tested either as a package intended to containinner packagings (combination package) or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids at a masscorresponding to the mass of the assembled packaging system. The outer
drum must have a minimum thickness of 1.35 mm (0.053 inches) for a 1A2 outer drum or 6.30 mm (0.248 inches) for a 1H2
outer drum. Outer 1A2 and 1H2 drums must withstand a hydrostatic test pressure of 100 kPa (15 psig). Capacity of the inner drum may not exceed 220 liters. In addition, the inner drummust conform to all of the following requirements:

(1) Satisfactorily withstand the leakproofness test in §178.604 of thissubchapter using an internal air pressure of at least two times the vapor pressure at 55 ° C (131 ° F) of the material to be packaged;

(2) Have screw closures that are— (i) Closed and tightened to a torqueprescribed by the closure manufacturer, using a properly calibrated device that is capable of measuring torque;

(ii) Physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transportation; and (iii) Provided with a cap seal that is properly applied in accordance with thecap seal manufacturer’s recommendations and is capable of withstanding an internal pressure of at least 100 kPa (15 psig).

(3) Have a minimum thickness as follows:

(i) For a 1A1 drum, 0.69 mm (0.027 inch);

(ii) For a 1B1 drum, 2.79 mm (0.110 inch);

(iii) For a 1H1 drum, 1.14 mm (0.045 inch); or

(iv) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic inner container shall be 1.58 mm (0.0625 inch), the outer steel drum shall be 0.70 mm (0.027 inch).

(4) Be isolated from the outer drum by a shock-mitigating, non-reactive material which completely surrounds the inner packaging on all sides.

(5) Prior to reuse, all authorized inner drums must be leakproofness
tested and marked in accordance with §173.28 using a minimum test pressure as indicated in paragraph (b)(1) of this

section.

(c) 1A1, 1B1, 1H1, 1N1, 6HA1 or 6HH1 drums described in paragraph (b) of this section may be used without being further packed in a 1A2 or 1H2 drum if the shipper loads the material, blocks
and braces the drums within the transport vehicle and seals the transport vehicle used. Drums may not be stacked (double decked) within the transport vehicle. Shipments must be from one origin to one destination only without any intermediate pickup or delivery.

[70 FR 34398, June 14, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 33881, June 12, 2006; 73 FR 57006, Oct.1, 2008]

§ 173.228 Bromine pentafluoride or bromine trifluoride.
(a) Bromine pentafluoride and bromine trifluoride are authorized in packagings as follows:

(1) Specification 3A150, 3AA150, 3B240, 3BN150, 4B240, 4BA240, 4BW240, and 3E1800 cylinders.

(2) UN cylinders as specified in part 178 of this subchapter, except acetylene cylinders and non-refillable cylinders, with a minimum test pressure of 10 bar and a minimum outage of 8 percent by
volume. The use of UN tubes and
MEGCs is not authorized.


### 573 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.230

(3) The use of a pressure relief device
is not authorized.

(b) A material in Hazard Zone A mustbe transported in a seamless specification cylinder conforming to the requirements of §173.40. However, a welded cylinder filled before October 1, 2002, in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter in effect at the time offilling, may be transported for reprocessing or disposal of the cylinder’s contents until December 31, 2003. No cylinder may be equipped with a pressure
relief device.

[67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002; 68 FR 24660, May 8, 2003, as amended at 71 FR 33881, June 12, 2006]

§ 173.229 Chloric acid solution or chlorine dioxide hydrate, frozen.
When the §172.101 table specifies that a hazardous material be packaged in accordance with this section, only 4Gfiberboard boxes, with inner packagings of polyethylene or other suitable material, are authorized. Fiberboard boxes must be reinforced and insulated and sufficient dry ice must be used to maintain the hydrate or acid in a frozen state during transportation. Each packaging must conform to thegeneral packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, and to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level. Transportation is authorized only by private or contract carrier by motor
vehicle.

§ 173.230 Fuel cell cartridges containing hazardous material.
(a) Requirements for Fuel Cell Cartridges. Fuel cell cartridges, including when contained in or packed withequipment, must be designed and constructed to prevent fuel leakage under normal conditions of transportation. Fuel cell cartridge design types using liquids as fuels must pass an internal pressure test at a gauge pressure of 100 kPa (15 psig) without leakage. Exceptfor fuel cell cartridges containing hydrogen in metal hydride which must be in conformance with paragraph (d) ofthis section, each fuel cell cartridge design type including when contained in or packed with equipment, must pass a 1.2 meter (3.9 feet) drop test onto an unyielding surface in the orientation most likely to result in the failure of the containment system with no loss of contents. Fuel cell cartridges installed in or integral to a fuel cell system are regarded as contained in equipment.Fuel cell cartridges containing a Division 2.1, Division 4.3 or Class 8 materialmust meet the following additional requirements.

(b) A fuel cell cartridge designed to
contain a Division 4.3 or a Class 8 material may contain an activator provided it is fitted with two independentmeans of preventing unintended mixing with the fuel during transport.

(c) Each fuel cell cartridge designed to contain a liquefied flammable gas

must:

(1) Be capable of withstanding, without leakage or bursting, a pressure of at least two times the equilibrium pressure of the contents at 55 ° C (131

° F);

(2) Contain no more than 200 mL of liquefied flammable gas with a vapor pressure not exceeding 1,000 kPa (150 psig) at 55 ° C (131 ° F); and

(3) Pass the hot water bath test prescribed in accordance with §173.306(a)(3)(v).

(d) Each fuel cell cartridge designed to contain hydrogen in a metal hydride must conform to the following:

(1) Each fuel cell cartridge must have a water capacity less than or equal to 120 mL (4 fluid ounces).

(2) Each fuel cell cartridge must be a design type that has been subjected, without leakage or bursting, a pressureof at least two times the design pressure of the cartridge at 55 ° C (131 ° F) or 200 kPa (30 psig) more than the design pressure of the cartridge at 55 ° C (131

° F), whichever is greater. The pressure
at which the test is conducted is referred to as the ‘‘minimum shell burst pressure.’’ The pressure within the fuel cell cartridge must not exceed 5 MPa (725 psig) at 55 ° C (131 ° F).

(3) Each fuel cell cartridge must be filled in accordance with the procedure provided by the manufacturer. Themanufacturer must provide the following information with each fuel cell cartridge:

(i) Inspection procedures to be carried out before initial filling and before refilling of the fuel cell cartridge;


### 574 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.230

(ii) Safety precautions and potential hazards to be aware of;

(iii) A method of determining when the rated capacity has been achieved;

(iv) Minimum and maximum pressure

range;

(v) Minimum and maximum temperature range; and

(vi) Any other requirements to bemet for initial filling and refilling including the type of equipment to be
used.

(4) Each fuel cell cartridge must bepermanently marked with the following information:

(i) The rated charging pressure in megapascals (MPa);

(ii) The manufacturer’s serial number of the fuel cell cartridges or unique identification number; and

(iii) The expiration date based on the maximum service life (yyyy/mm).

(5) Design type tests: Each fuel cellcartridge design type must be subjected to and pass the following tests (this includes cartridges integral to a fuel cell):

(i) Drop test. A 1.8 m (5.9 feet) drop test onto an unyielding surface mustbe performed. There must be no leakage. Leakage must be determined usinga soap bubble solution or other equivalent means on all possible leak locations, when the fuel cell cartridge is charged to its rated charging pressure. The fuel cell cartridge must then behydrostatically pressurized to destruction. The burst pressure must be greater than 85% of the minimum shellburst pressure. The drop must be performed in the following four different

orientations:

(A) Vertically, on the end containing the shut-off valve assembly;

(B) Vertically, on the end opposite to the shut-off valve assembly;

(C) Horizontally, onto a steel apex with a diameter of 3.8 cm (9.7 in), with the steel apex in the upward position;
and

(D) At a 45 ° angle on the end containing the shut-off valve assembly.

(ii) Fire test. A fuel cell cartridge filled to rated capacity (with hydrogen) must be subjected to a fire engulfment test. The cartridge design (includingdesign types with an integral vent feature) is deemed to pass the fire test if: (A) The internal pressure vents tozero gauge pressure without the rupture of the cartridge; or

(B) The cartridge withstands the fire
for a minimum of 20 minutes without rupture.

(iii) Hydrogen cycling test. A fuel cellcartridge must be subjected to a hydrogen cycling test to ensure that the design stress limits are not exceeded during use. The fuel cell cartridge must be cycled from not more than 5% rated hydrogen capacity to not less than 95% rated hydrogen capacity and back tonot more than 5% rated hydrogen capacity. The rated charging pressuremust be used for charging and temperatures must be within the operating temperature range. The cycling must be continued for at least 100 cycles. Following the cycling test the fuel cell cartridge must be charged and thewater volume displaced by the cartridge must be measured. The cartridge design is deemed to pass the test if the water volume displaced by the cycled cartridge does not exceed the watervolume displaced by an uncycled cartridge charged to 95% rated capacity and pressurized to 75% of its minimum shell burst pressure.

(6) Production leak test. Each fuel cell cartridge must be tested for leaks at 15

° C ± 5 ° C (59 ° F ± 9 ° F) while pressurized to its rated charging pressure. There must be no leakage. Leakage must bedetermined using a soap bubble solution or other equivalent means on all possible leak locations.

(e) The following packagings are authorized provided the general packaging requirements subpart B of part 173 of this subchapter are met:

(1) For fuel cell cartridges, rigidpackagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the packing group II performance level;
and

(2) Strong outer packagings for fuel cell cartridges contained in equipment or packed with equipment. Largeequipment containing fuel cell cartridges may be transported unpackagedif the equipment provides an equivalent level of protection.

(i) Fuel cell cartridges packed withequipment must be packed with cushioning material or divider(s) or inner


### 575 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.230

packagings so that the fuel cell cartridges are protected against damage that may be caused by the shifting orplacement of the equipment and cartridges within the packaging.

(ii) Fuel cell cartridges contained in equipment must be protected against
short circuits and the entire fuel cellsystem must be protected from unintentional activation. The equipment must be securely cushioned in the outer packaging.

(f) For transportation by aircraft, the following additional provisions apply:

(1) The package must comply with the applicable provisions of §173.27 of this subchapter;

(2) For fuel cell cartridges contained in equipment, fuel cell systems must not charge batteries during transport;

(3) For transportation aboard passenger aircraft, for fuel cell cartridges contained in equipment, each fuel cell system and fuel cell cartridge must
conform to IEC PAS 62282–6–1 Ed. 1 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) or astandard approved by the Associate Administrator;

(4) When packed with equipment, fuelcell cartridges must be packed in an intermediate packaging along with the equipment they are capable ofpowering, and the intermediate packagings packed in a strong outer packaging. The maximum number of fuel cell cartridges in the intermediate packaging may not be more than thenumber required to power the equipment, plus two spares;

(5) Large robust articles containing fuel cells may be transportedunpackaged when approved by the Associate Administrator; and

(6) The mass of a fuel cell cartridgecontaining a Division 4.3 or Class 8 materials must be not more than 1 kg (2.2 lbs).

(7) Fuel cell cartridges intended for transportation in carry-on baggage on board passenger aircraft must comply with paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d) in this section and the applicable provisions prescribed in §175.10 of this subchapter.

(g) Limited quantities . Limited quantities of hazardous materials contained in fuel cell cartridges are excepted from the labeling, placarding and the specification packaging requirementsof this subchapter when packaged according to this section. Each packagemust conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. Limited quantities of fuel cell cartridges are not permitted fortransportation by aircraft. For transportation by highway, rail and vessel, the following combination packagings
are authorized:

(1) For flammable liquids, in fuel cell cartridges containing not more than 1.0 L (0.3 gallon), packed in strong outer packaging.

(2) For water-reactive substances (Division 4.3 Dangerous when wet material), in fuel cell cartridges containing not more than 0.5 L (16.9 fluid ounces) for liquids or not over 0.5 kg (1.1 pound)for solids, packed in strong outer packaging.

(3) For corrosive materials, in fuel cell cartridges containing not more than 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) for liquids or not more than 1.0 kg (2.2 pounds) for solids packed in strong outer packaging.

(4) For liquefied (compressed) flammable gas, in fuel cell cartridges notover 120 mL (4 fluid ounces) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packaging.

(5) For hydrogen in metal hydride, in fuel cell cartridges not over 120 mL (4 fluid ounces) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packaging.

(h) Consumer commodities . A limitedquantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (g) of this sectionand is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’
and reclassed as ORM–D. In addition to the exceptions provided in paragraph (g) of this section, shipments of ORM–D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the
material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, hazardous waste, marine pollutant, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in §173.156.

[74 FR 2263, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 FR 73, Jan. 4, 2010]


### 576 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.240



### Subpart F—Bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and Class 7

§ 173.240 Bulk packaging for certain low hazard solid materials.
When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only thefollowing bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements ofsubparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table.

(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 tank car tanks; Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tankcar tanks; and metal non-DOT specification, sift-proof tank car tanks and sift-proof closed cars.

(b) Motor vehicles: Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, MC 330, MC 331, DOT 406, DOT 407,and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles; non-DOT specification, sift-proofcargo tank motor vehicles; and siftproof closed vehicles.

(c) Portable tanks and closed bulk bins. DOT 51, 56, 57 and 60 portable tanks; IMO type 1, 2 and 5, and IM 101 and IM 102 portable tanks; UN portable tanks; marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64; and sift-proof non-DOT Specification portable tanks and closed
bulk bins are authorized.

(d) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject
to the conditions and limitations of this section provided the IBC type isauthorized according to the IBC packaging code specified for the specific hazardous material in Column (7) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapterand the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of thissubchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column(5) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter for the material being transported.

(1) IBCs may not be used for the following hazardous materials:

(i) Packing Group I liquids; and (ii) Packing Group I solids that may become liquid during transportation.

(2) The following IBCs may not be used for Packing Group II and III solidsthat may become liquid during transportation: (i) Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F; (ii) Fiberboard: 11G; (iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 13M2; and

(iv) Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2. (e) Large Packagings. Large Packagings are authorized subject to the
conditions and limitations of this section provided the Large Packaging type is authorized according to the IBCpackaging code specified for the specific hazardous material in Column (7) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter and the Large Packaging conforms to the requirements in subpart Q of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column (5) of the §172.101 Table for the material being transported.

(1) Except as specifically authorized in this subchapter, Large Packagings may not be used for Packing Group I or
II hazardous materials.

(2) Large Packagings with paper or fiberboard inner receptacles may notbe used for solids that may become liquid in transportation.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66274, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–238, 59 FR 38067, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173– 252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 66 FR 33435, June 21, 2001]

E DITORIAL N OTE : Amendments published at66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001, could not be incorporated because of inaccurate amendatory

instruction.

§ 173.241 Bulk packagings for certainlow hazard liquid and solid materials.
When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only thefollowing bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements ofsubparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table.

(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 tank car tanks; Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tanks and AAR Class 203W, 206W,
and 211W tank car tanks.

(b) Cargo tanks: DOT specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, MC 330, MC 331, DOT 406, DOT 407,


### 577 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.242

and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles; and non-DOT specification cargo
tank motor vehicles suitable for transport of liquids.

(c) Portable tanks. DOT Specification 51, 56, 57 and 60 portable tanks; IMO type 1, 2 and 5, and IM 101 and IM 102portable tanks; UN portable tanks; marine portable tanks conforming to 46CFR part 64; and non-DOT Specification portable tanks suitable for transport of liquids are authorized. For transportation by vessel, also see§176.340 of this subchapter. For transportation of combustible liquids by vessel, additional requirements are specified in §176.340 of this subchapter.

(d) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject
to the conditions and limitations of this section provided the IBC type isauthorized according to the IBC packaging code specified for the specific hazardous material in Column (7) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapterand the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of thissubchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column(5) of the §172.101 Table for the material being transported.

(1) IBCs may not be used for the following hazardous materials:

(i) Packing Group I liquids; and (ii) Packing Group I solids that may become liquid during transportation.

(2) The following IBCs may not be used for Packing Group II and III solidsthat may become liquid during transportation:

(i) Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F; (ii) Fiberboard: 11G; (iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 13M2; and

(iv) Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2. (e) Large Packagings. Large Packagings are authorized subject to the
conditions and limitations of this section provided the Large Packaging type is authorized according to the IBCpackaging code specified for the specific hazardous material in Column (7) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter and the Large Packaging conforms to the requirements in subpart Q of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column (5) of the §172.101 Table for the material being transported. (1) Except as specifically authorized in this subchapter, Large Packagings may not be used for Packing Group I or
II hazardous materials.

(2) Large Packagings with paper or fiberboard inner receptacles may notbe used for solids that may become liquid in transportation.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–238, 59 FR 38067, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173– 252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 66 FR 33435, June 21, 2001; 68 FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003; 70 FR 34075, June 13, 2005; 75 FR 5394, Feb. 2, 2010]

E DITORIAL N OTE : Amendments published at66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001, could not be incorporated because of inaccurate amendatory

instruction.

§ 173.242 Bulk packagings for certain medium hazard liquids and solids, including solids with dual hazards.
When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only thefollowing bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements ofsubparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table.

(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 tank car tanks; Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank
car tanks and AAR Class 206W tank car
tanks.

(b) Cargo tanks: Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, MC 330, MC 331, DOT 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles. Cargo tanks used to transport Class 3, Packing Group I or II, or Packing Group III with a flash point of less
than 38 ° C (100 ° F); Class 6, Packing Group I or II; and Class 8, Packing Group I or II materials must conform to the following special requirements:

(1) Pressure relief system: Except as provided by §173.33(d), each cargo tank must be equipped with a pressure relief system meeting the requirements of§178.346–3 or §178.347–4 of this subchapter. However, pressure relief devices on MC 310, MC 311 and MC 312cargo tanks must meet the requirements for a Specification MC 307 cargo tank (except for Class 8, Packing Group I and II). Pressure relief devices on MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must meet


### 578 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.242

the requirement in §178.337–9 of this subchapter.

(2) Bottom outlets: DOT 406, DOT 407 and DOT 412 must be equipped with stop-valves meeting the requirements of §178.345–11 of this subchapter; MC 304, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks must be equipped with stop-valves capable of being remotely
closed within 30 seconds of actuationby manual or mechanic means and (except for Class 8, Packing Group I andII) by a closure activated at a temperature not over 121 ° C (250 ° F); MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must be equipped with internal self-closing stop-valves meeting the requirements in §178.337–11 of this subchapter.

(c) Portable tanks. DOT Specification51, 56, 57 and 60 portable tanks; Specification IM 101, IM 102, and UN portable tanks when a T Code is specified in Column (7) of the §172.101 HazardousMaterials Table for a specific hazardous material; and marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64 areauthorized. DOT Specification 57 portable tanks used for the transport by vessel of Class 3, Packaging Group II
materials must conform to the following:

(1) Minimum design pressure. Each tank must have a minimum design pressure of 62 kPa (9 psig);

(2) Pressure relief devices. Each tank must be equipped with at least onepressure relief device, such as a springloaded valve or fusible plug, conforming to the following:

(i) Each pressure relief device must communicate with the vapor space of
the tank when the tank is in a normal transportation attitude. Shutoff valves may not be installed between the tank opening and any pressure relief device.
Pressure relief devices must be mounted, shielded, or drained to prevent the accumulation of any material that could impair the operation or discharge capability of the device;

(ii) Frangible devices are not authorized;

(iii) No pressure relief device may open at less than 34.4 kPa (5 psig);

(iv) If a fusible device is used for relieving pressure, the device must have a minimum area of 1.25 square inches.The device must function at a temperature between 104 ° C. and 149 ° C. (220 ° F. and 300 ° F.) and at a pressure less than the design test pressure of the tank,
unless this latter function is accomplished by a separate device; and

(v) No relief device may be used which would release flammable vaporsunder normal conditions of transportation (temperature up to and including 54 ° C. (130 ° F.).); and

(3) Venting capacity. The minimum venting capacity for pressure activated vents must be 6,000 cubic feet of free air per hour (measured at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psi) and 15.6 ° C. (60 ° F.)) at not more than 34.4 kPa (5 psi). The total emergency venting capacity (cu. ft./hr.) of each portable tank must be at least that determined from the following
table:

Total surface area square feet 1,2 Cubic feet free air per hour

20 ................................................................... 15,800 30 ................................................................... 23,700 40 ................................................................... 31,600 50 ................................................................... 39,500 60 ................................................................... 47,400 70 ................................................................... 55,300 80 ................................................................... 63,300 90 ................................................................... 71,200 100 ................................................................. 79,100 120 ................................................................. 94,900 140 ................................................................. 110,700 160 ................................................................. 126,500

1 Interpolate for intermediate sizes.

2 Surface area excludes area of legs. (4) Unless provided by §173.32(h)(3), an IM 101, 102 or UN portable tank with a bottom outlet and used to transport a liquid hazardous material that is a Class 3, PG I or II, or PG III with a flash point of less than 38 ° C (100 ° F); Division 5.1 PG I or II; or Division 6.1, PG I or II, must have internal valvesconforming to §178.275(d)(3) of this subchapter.

(d) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject
to the conditions and limitations of this section provided the IBC type isauthorized according to the IBC packaging code specified for the specific hazardous material in Column (7) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapterand the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of thissubchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column(5) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter for the material being transported.

(1) IBCs may not be used for the following hazardous materials:


### 579 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.243

(i) Packing Group I liquids; and (ii) Packing Group I solids that may become liquid during transportation.

(2) The following IBCs may not be used for Packing Group II and III solidsthat may become liquid during transportation:

(i) Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F; (ii) Fiberboard: 11G; (iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 13M2; and

(iv) Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2. (e) Large Packagings. Large Packagings are authorized subject to the
conditions and limitations of this section provided the Large Packaging type is authorized according to the IBCpackaging code specified for the specific hazardous material in Column (7) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter and the Large Packaging conforms to the requirements in subpart Q of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column (5) of the §172.101 Table for the material being transported.

(1) Except as specifically authorized in this subchapter, Large Packagings may not be used for Packing Group I or
II hazardous materials.

(2) Large Packagings with paper or fiberboard inner receptacles may notbe used for solids that may become liquid in transportation.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–238, 59 FR 38067, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173– 243, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 173–246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 173–252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 33435, June 21, 2001; 67 FR 15743, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR 32413, May 30, 2003; 75 FR 5395, Feb. 2, 2010]

E DITORIAL N OTE : Amendments published at66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001, could not be incorporated because of inaccurate amendatory

instruction.

§ 173.243 Bulk packaging for certainhigh hazard liquids and dual hazard materials which pose a moderate hazard.
When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only thefollowing bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements ofsubparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table.

(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105,109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 fusion-welded tank car tanks; and Class 106 or 110
multi-unit tank car tanks.

(b) Cargo tanks. Specification MC 304, MC 307, MC 330, MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles; and MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tankmotor vehicles with tank design pressure of at least 172.4 kPa (25 psig). Cargo tanks used to transport Class 3 or Division 6.1 materials, or Class 8, Packing Group I or II materials mustconform to the following special requirements:

(1) Pressure relief system: Except as provided by §173.33(d), each cargo tank must be equipped with a pressure relief system meeting the requirements of§178.346–3 or 178.347–4 of this subchapter. However, pressure relief devices on MC 310, MC 311 and MC 312cargo tanks must meet the requirements for a Specification MC 307 cargo tank (except for Class 8, Packing Group I and II). Pressure relief devices on MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must meet the requirement in §178.337–9 of this subchapter.

(2) Bottom outlets: DOT 407 and DOT 412 cargo tanks must be equipped with stop-valves meeting the requirements of §178.345–11 of this subchapter; MC 304, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks must be equipped with stop-valves capable of being remotely
closed within 30 seconds of actuationby manual or mechanic means and (except for Class 8, Packing Group I andII) by a closure activated at a temperature not over 121 ° C (250 ° F); MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must be equipped with internal self-closing stop-valves meeting the requirements in §178.337–11 of this subchapter.

(c) Portable tanks. DOT Specification 51 and 60 portable tanks; UN portable tanks and IM 101 and IM 102 portabletanks when a T code is specified in Column (7) of the §172.101 Table of thissubchapter for a specific hazardous material; and marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64 with design pressure of at least 172.4 kPa (25 psig) are authorized. Unless provided by§173.32(h)(3), an IM 101, 102 or UN portable tank, with a bottom outlet, used


### 580 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.244

to transport a liquid hazardous material that is a Class 3, PG I or II, or PG III with a flash point of less than 38 ° C (100 ° F); Division 5.1, PG I or II; or Division 6.1, PG I or II, must have internal valves conforming to §178.275(d)(3) of this subchapter.

(d) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject
to the conditions and limitations of this section provided the IBC type isauthorized according to the IBC packaging code specified for the specific hazardous material in Column (7) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapterand the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of thissubchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column(5) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter for the material being transported.

(1) IBCs may not be used for the following hazardous materials:

(i) Packing Group I liquids; and (ii) Packing Group I solids that may become liquid during transportation.

(2) The following IBCs may not be used for Packing Group II and III solidsthat may become liquid during transportation:

(i) Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F; (ii) Fiberboard: 11G; (iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 13M2; and

(iv) Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2. (e) A dual hazard material may be packaged in accordance with §173.242 if:

(1) The subsidiary hazard is Class 3 with a flash point greater than 38 ° C (100 ° F); or

(2) The subsidiary hazard is Division 6.1, Packing Group III; or

(3) The subsidiary hazard is Class 8, Packaging Group, III.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–138, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173– 238, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173–243, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 173–246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 173–252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 64 FR 10780, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 33435, June 21, 2001; 67 FR 15743, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR 32413, May 30, 2003]

E DITORIAL N OTE : Amendments published at66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001, could not be incorporated because of inaccurate amendatory

instruction. § 173.244 Bulk packaging for certain pyrophoric liquids (Division 4.2), dangerous when wet (Division 4.3) materials, and poisonous liquids with inhalation hazards (Division 6.1).
When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only thefollowing bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements ofsubparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table.

(a) Rail cars: (1) Class DOT 105, 109, 112, 114, or 120 fusion-welded tank car tanks; and Class 106 or 110 multi-unit
tank car tanks. For tank car tanksbuilt prior to March 16, 2009, the following conditions apply:

(i) Division 6.1 Hazard Zone A materials must be transported in tank cars having a test pressure of 34.47 Bar (500 psig) or greater and conform to Classes 105J, 106 or 110.

(ii) Division 6.1 Hazard Zone B materials must be transported in tank cars having a test pressure of 20.68 Bar (300 psig) or greater and conform to Classes 105S, 106, 110, 112J, 114J or 120S.

(iii) Hydrogen fluoride, anhydrousmust be transported in tank cars having a test pressure of 20.68 Bar (300 psig) or greater and conform to Classes 105, 112, 114 or 120.

(2) For materials poisonous by inhalation, single unit tank cars tanksbuilt prior to March 16, 2009 and approved by the Tank Car Committee fortransportation of the specified material. Except as provided in §173.244(a)(3), tank cars built on orafter March 16, 2009 used for the transportation of the PIH materials listedbelow, must meet the applicable authorized tank car specification listed in the following table:

Proper shipping name Authorized tank car specification

Acetone cyanohydrin, stabilized (Note 1) ......... 105J500I
112J500I Acrolein (Note 1) ............................................... 105J600I Allyl Alcohol ....................................................... 105J500I
112J500I

Bromine ............................................................. 105J500I Chloropicrin ........................................................ 105J500I
112J500I
Chlorosulfonic acid ............................................ 105J500I
112J500I


### 581 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.247

Proper shipping name Authorized tank car specification

Dimethyl sulfate ................................................. 105J500I
112J500I Ethyl chloroformate ............................................ 105J500I
112J500I Hexachlorocyclopentadiene ............................... 105J500I
112J500I Hydrocyanic acid, aqueous solution or Hydrogen cyanide, aqueous solution with not more than 20% hydrogen cyanide (Note 2) ............ 105J500I
112J500I Hydrogen cyanide, stabilized (Note 2) .............. 105J600I Hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous ........................... 105J500I
112J500I Poison inhalation hazard, Zone A materials not

specifically identified in this table .................. 105J600I Poison inhalation hazard, Zone B materials not

specifically identified in this table .................. 105J500I
112J500I Phosphorus trichloride ....................................... 105J500I
112J500I Sulfur trioxide, stabilized ................................... 105J500I
112J500I Sulfuric acid, fuming .......................................... 105J500I
112J500I

Titanium tetrachloride ........................................ 105J500I
112J500I

Note 1: Each tank car must have a reclosing pressure relief device having a start-to-discharge pressure of 10.34 Bar (150 psig). Restenciling to a lower test pressure is not authorized.

Note 2: Each tank car must have a reclosing pressure relief device having a start-to-discharge pressure of 15.51 Bar (225 psig). Restenciling to a lower test pressure is not authorized.

(3) As an alternative to the authorized tank car specification listed in the table in paragraph (a)(2) of this section,
a car of the same authorized tank car specification but of the next lower test pressure, as prescribed in column 5 ofthe table at §179.101–1 of this subchapter, may be used provided that both of the following conditions are

met:

(i) The difference between the alternative and the required minimum plate thicknesses, based on the calculationprescribed in §179.100–6 of this subchapter, must be added to the alternative tank car jacket and head shield. When the jacket and head shield are
made from steel with a minimum tensile strength from 70,000 p.s.i. to 80,000 p.s.i., but the required minimum plate
thickness calculation is based on steel with a minimum tensile strength of 81,000 p.s.i., the thickness to be added to the jacket and head shield must be increased by a factor of 1.157. Forming allowances for heads are not required to be considered when calculating
thickness differences.

(ii) The tank car jacket and head
shield are manufactured from carbon steel plate as prescribed in §179.100–7(a) of this subchapter.

(b) Cargo tanks: Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles and, except for Division 4.2 materials, MC 312 and DOT 412 cargo tank motor
vehicles.

(c) Portable tanks: DOT 51 portable tanks and UN portable tanks that meet the requirements of this subchapter, when a T code is specified in Column(7) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter for the specific hazardous material, are authorized. Additionally, a DOT 51 or UN portable tank used for Division 6.1 liquids, Hazard Zone A or B, must be certified and stamped to the ASME Code as specified in §178.273(b)(6) of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 68 FR 45037, July 31, 2003; 72 FR 55693, Oct. 1, 2007; 74 FR 1799, Jan. 13, 2009]

§ 173.245 Bulk packaging for extremelyhazardous materials such as poisonous gases (Division 2.3).
When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only thefollowing bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements ofsubparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table.

(a) Tank car tanks and multi-unit tank car tanks, when approved by the
Associate Administrator.

(b) Cargo tank motor vehicles and portable tanks, when approved by the
Associate Administrator.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]

§ 173.247 Bulk packaging for certain elevated temperature materials.
When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only thefollowing bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements ofsubparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions in column 7 of the §172.101 table. On orafter October 1, 1993, authorized packagings must meet all requirements in


### 582 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.247

paragraph (g) of this section, unless otherwise excepted.

(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 tank car tanks; Class DOT 106, 110 multi-unit tank car tanks; AAR Class 203W, 206W, 211W tank car tanks; and non-DOT specification tank car tanks equivalentin structural design and accident damage resistance to specification packagings.

(b) Cargo tanks: Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312,MC 330, MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles; DOT 406, DOT 407, DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles; and non-DOTspecification cargo tank motor vehicles equivalent in structural design andaccident damage resistance to specification packagings. A non-DOT specification cargo tank motor vehicle constructed of carbon steel which is in elevated temperature material service is excepted from §178.345–7(d)(5) of this subchapter.

(c) Portable tanks. DOT Specification 51, 56, 57 and 60 portable tanks; IM 101 and IM 102 portable tanks; UN portabletanks; marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64; metal IBCs and non-specification portable tanksequivalent in structural design and accident damage resistance to specification packagings are authorized.

(d) Crucibles: Nonspecification crucibles designed and constructed such that the stress in the packaging doesnot exceed one fourth (0.25) of the ultimate strength of the packaging material at any temperature within the design temperature range. Stress is determined under a load equal to the sum of the static or working pressure in combination with the loads developed
from accelerations and decelerations incident to normal transportation. For highway transportation, these forces are assumed to be ‘‘1.7g’’ vertical,‘‘0.75g’’ longitudinal, and ‘‘0.4g’’ transverse, in reference to the axes of the transport vehicle. Each accelerative or decelerative load may be considered separately.

(e) Kettles: A kettle, for the purpose of this section, is a bulk packaging (portable tank or cargo tank) having a capacity not greater than 5678 L (1500gallons) with an integral heating apparatus used for melting various bituminous products such as asphalt. Kettles used for the transport of asphalt or bitumen are subject to the following requirements:

(1) Low stability kettles. Kettles with a ratio of track-width to fully loaded center of gravity (CG) height less than2.5 must meet all requirements of paragraph (g) of this section (track-width is
the distance measured between the outer edge of the kettle tires; CG height is measured perpendicular from the road surface).

(2) High stability kettles. (i) Kettles with a total capacity of less than 2650L (700 gallons) and a ratio of trackwidth to fully loaded CG height of 2.5or more are excepted from all requirements of paragraph (g)(2) of this section and the rollover protection requirements of paragraph (g)(6) of thissection, if closures meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this

section.

(ii) Kettles with a total capacity of 2650 L (700 gallons) or more and a ratio of track-width to fully loaded CG height of 2.5 or more are excepted fromthe ‘‘substantially leak tight’’ requirements of paragraph (g)(2) of this section and the rollover protection requirements of paragraph (g)(6) of thissection if closures meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this

section.

(iii) Closures must be securely closed during transportation. Closures also must be designed to prevent openingand the expulsion of lading in a rollover accident.

(f) Other bulk packagings: Bulk packagings, other than those specified inparagraphs (a) through (e) of this section, which are used for the transport of elevated temperature materials, must conform to all requirements of paragraph (g) of this section on or after October 1, 1993.

(g) General requirements. Bulk packagings authorized or used for transport of elevated temperature materialsmust conform to the following requirements:

(1) Pressure and vacuum control equipment. When pressure or vacuum control equipment is required on a packagingauthorized in this section, such equipment must be of a self-reclosing design,


### 583 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.247

must prevent package rupture or collapse due to pressure, must prevent significant release of lading due to packaging overturn or splashing or surging during normal transport conditions, and may be external to the packaging.

(i) Pressure control equipment is not required if pressure in the packaging would increase less than 10 percent as a result of heating the lading from the lowest design operating temperature to a temperature likely to be encountered if the packaging were engulfed in a fire. When pressure control equipment is required, it must prevent rupture of the packaging from heating, including fire engulfment.

(ii) Vacuum control equipment is not required if the packaging is designed to withstand an external pressure of 100 kPa (14.5 psig) or if pressure in the packaging would decrease less than 10percent as a result of the lading cooling from the highest design operating temperature to the lowest temperature incurred in transport. When vacuum control equipment is required, it must prevent collapse of the packaging from a cooling-induced pressure differential.

(iii) When the regulations require a reclosing pressure relief device, thelading must not render the devices inoperable (i.e. from clogging, freezing, or fouling). If the lading affects the proper operation of the device, the packaging must have:

(A) A safety relief device incorporating a frangible disc or a permanent opening, each having a maximum
effective area of 22 cm 2 (3.4 in. 2 ), for transportation by highway;

(B) For transportation of asphalt byhighway, a safety relief device incorporating a frangible disc or a permanent opening, each having a maximum
effective area of 48 cm 2 (7.4 in 2 ); or(C) For transportation by rail, a nonreclosing pressure relief device incorporating a rupture disc conforming tothe requirements of §179.15 of this subchapter.

(iv) Reclosing pressure relief devices, rupture discs or permanent openings must not allow the release of ladingduring normal transportation conditions (i.e., due to splashing or surging).

(2) Closures. All openings, except permanent vent openings authorized in paragraph (g)(1)(iii) of this section, must be securely closed during transportation. Packagings must be substantially leak-tight so as not to allow any more than dripping or trickling of
a non-continuous flow when overturned. Closures must be designed andconstructed to withstand, without exceeding the yield strength of the packaging, twice the static loading produced by the lading in any packagingorientation and at all operating temperatures.

(3) Strength. Each packaging must be designed and constructed to withstand, without exceeding the yield strength of the packaging, twice the static loadingproduced by the lading in any orientation and at all operating temperatures.

(4) Compatibility. The packaging andlading must be compatible over the entire operating temperature range.

(5) Markings. In addition to any other markings required by this subchapter, each packaging must be durably marked in a place readily accessible for inspection in characters at least 4.8 mm (3/16 inch) with the manufacturer’s name, date of manufacture, design temperature range, and maximum product weight (or ‘‘load limit’’ for tank cars) or volumetric capacity.

(6) Accident damage protection. For transportation by highway, externalloading and unloading valves and closures must be protected from impact damage resulting from collision or overturn. Spraying equipment and theroad oil application portion of a packaging are excepted from this requirement.

(7) New construction. Specificationpackagings that are being manufactured for the transport of elevated temperature materials must be authorized
for current construction.

(h) Exceptions —(1) General. Packagings manufactured for elevated temperature materials service prior to October 1, 1993, which are not in full compliance with the requirements in paragraph (g) of this section, may continue in service if they meet the applicable requirements of subparts A and B ofthis part and meet the closure requirements in paragraph (g)(2) of this section by March 30, 1995.

(2) Kettles. Kettles in service prior to October 1, 1993, which are used to


### 584 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.249

transport asphalt or bitumen, are excepted from specific provisions of this
section as follows:

(i) Kettles with a total capacity of less than 2650 L (700 gallons), which arenot in full compliance with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section, may continue in elevated temperature material service if they meet the applicable requirements of subparts A and B of this part and if, after March 30, 1995, closures are secured duringtransport to resist opening in an overturn.

(ii) Kettles with a total capacity of 2650 L (700 gallons) or more, which arenot in full compliance with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section, may continue in elevated temperature material service if they meet the applicable requirements of subparts A and B of this part and if, after March 30, 1995, closures are secured duringtransport to resist opening in an overturn and no opening exceeds 46 cm 2 (7.1

in 2 ). (3) Molten metals and molten glass.This section does not apply to packagings used for transportation of molten metals and molten glass by railwhen movement is restricted to operating speeds less than 15 miles perhour. (See §172.203(g)(3) of this subchapter for shipping paper requirements.)

(4) Solid elevated temperature materials.
A material which meets the definitionof a solid elevated temperature material is excepted from all requirements of this subchapter except §172.325 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–227, 58 FR 3349, Jan. 8, 1993, as amended by Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 173–237, 59 FR 28493, June 2, 1994; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 33436, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45382, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61013, Sept. 27, 2002]

§ 173.249 Bromine.

When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only thefollowing bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements ofsubparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table. (a) Class DOT 105A300W or 105A500W
tank cars. Class 105A500W tank cars may be equipped with manway cover plates, pressure relief valves, vent valves, and loading/unloading valves that are required on Class 105A–300W
tank cars. Tank cars must conform to the requirements in paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section.

(b) Specification MC 310, MC 311, MC312 or DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles conforming with paragraphs (d) through (f) of this section. Except when transported as a residue, the total quantity in one tank may not be less than 88 percent or more than 96 percent of the volume of the tank. Cargo tanksin bromine service built prior to August 31, 1991, may continue in service under the requirements contained in §173.252(a)(4) of this part in effect on September 30, 1991.

(c) UN portable tanks conforming totank code T22 (see §172.102 of this subchapter) or specification IM 101 portable tanks conforming with paragraphs (d) through (f) of this section. Except when transported as a residue, the total quantity in one tank may not be
less than 88% nor more than 92% of the
volume of the tank.

(d) The tank must be made from nickel-clad or lead-lined steel plate. Nickel cladding or lead lining must be
on the inside of the tank. Nickel cladding must comprise at least 20 percentof the required minimum total thickness. Nickel cladding must conform toASTM B 162 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). Lead lining must be at least 4.763 mm (0.188 inch) thick. All tankequipment and appurtenances in contact with the lading must be lined ormade from metal not subject to deterioration by contact with lading.

(e) Maximum filling density is 300 percent of the tank’s water capacity. Minimum filling density is 287 percent of the tank’s water capacity. Maximum water capacity is 9,253 kg (20,400 pounds) for DOT 105A300W tank cars. Maximum quantity of lading in DOT 105A300W tank cars is 27,216 kg (60,000 pounds). Maximum water capacity is 16,964 kg (37,400 pounds) for DOT
105A500W tank cars and DOT 105A500W tank cars equipped as described in paragraph (a) of this section. Maximum


### 585 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.301

1 Use of existing cylinders is authorized.
New construction is not authorized. quantity of lading in DOT 105A500W tank cars is 49,895 kg (110,000 pounds).

(f) Tank shell and head thickness for cargo tank motor vehicles and portable tanks must be at least 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) excluding lead lining.

(g) Except as provided in §173.244(a)(3), tank cars built on or after March 16, 2009 and used for the transportation of bromine must meet the applicable authorized tank car specification listed in the table in §173.244(a)(2).

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; 68 FR 75745, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 76174, Dec. 20, 2004; 74 FR 1800, Jan. 13, 2009; 75 FR 5395, Feb. 2, 2010]



### Subpart G—Gases; Preparation and Packaging

§ 173.300 [Reserved]

§ 173.301 General requirements for shipment of compressed gases andother hazardous materials in cylinders, UN pressure receptacles and spherical pressure vessels.

(a) General qualifications for use of cylinders. Unless otherwise stated, as usedin this section, the term ‘‘cylinder’’ includes a UN pressure receptacle. As used in this subpart, filled or charged means an introduction or presence of a hazardous material in a cylinder. A cylinder filled with a Class 2 hazardousmaterial (gas) and offered for transportation must meet the requirements in this section and §§173.301a through 173.305, as applicable.

(1) Compressed gases must be in UNpressure receptacles built in accordance with the UN standards or in metalcylinders and containers built in accordance with the DOT and ICC specifications and part 178 of this subchapter in effect at the time of manufacture, and requalified and marked as prescribed in subpart C in part 180 of this subchapter, if applicable. The DOT and ICC specifications authorized for
use are as follows:

Packagings

2P 2Q ICC–3 1
3A
3AA
3AL
3AX
3A480X
3AAX
3B
3BN
3E
3HT
3T
4AA480

4B
4B240ET
4BA
4BW
4D
4DA
4DS

4E
4L
8
8AL
39
(2) A cylinder must be filled in accordance with this part. Before each filling of a cylinder, the person filling the cylinder must visually inspect the outside of the cylinder. A cylinder thathas a crack or leak, is bulged, has a defective valve or a leaking or defective pressure relief device, or bears evidence of physical abuse, fire or heat damage, or detrimental rusting or corrosion,may not be filled and offered for transportation. A cylinder may be repaired and requalified only as prescribed in subpart C of part 180 of this subchapter.

(3) Pressure relief devices must be tested for leaks before a filled cylinder is shipped from the cylinder fillingplant. It is expressly forbidden to repair a leaking fusible plug device where the leak is through the fusible metal or
between the fusible metal and theopening in the plug body, except by removal and replacement of the pressure
relief device.

(4) A cylinder that previously contained a Class 8 material must be requalified in accordance with §180.205(e) of this subchapter.

(5) When a cylinder with a marked pressure limit is prescribed, anothercylinder made under the same specification but with a higher marked pressure limit is authorized. For example, a


### 586 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.301

cylinder marked ‘‘DOT-4B500’’ may be used when ‘‘DOT-4B300’’ is specified.

(6) No person may fill a cylinder overdue for periodic requalification
with a hazardous material and thenoffer it for transportation. The prohibition against offering a cylinder fortransportation that is overdue for periodic requalification does not apply to acylinder filled prior to the requalification due date.

(7) A cylinder with an authorized service life may not be offered for transportation in commerce after its authorized service life has expired. However, a cylinder in transportationor a cylinder filled prior to the expiration of its authorized service life maybe transported for reprocessing or disposal of the cylinder’s contents. Afteremptying, the cylinder must be condemned in accordance with §180.205 of this subchapter.

(8) The pressure of the hazardous material at 55 ° C (131 ° F) may not exceed5/4 of the service pressure of the cylinder. Sufficient outage must be provided so the cylinder will not be liquid
full at 55 ° C (131 ° F).

(9) Specification 2P, 2Q, 3E, 3HT, spherical 4BA, 4D, 4DA, 4DS, and 39 cylinders must be packed in strongnon-bulk outer packagings. The outside of the combination packaging
must be marked with an indication that the inner packagings conform to the prescribed specifications.

(10) Any person who installs a valve into an aluminum cylinder in oxygen service must verify the valve and the cylinder have the same thread type.

(b) Cylinder markings. Required markings on a cylinder must be legible and must meet the applicable requirementsof subpart C of part 180 of this subchapter. Additional information may be marked on the cylinder provided it does not affect the required markings prescribed in the applicable cylinder specification.

(c) Toxic gases and mixtures. Cylinders containing toxic gases and toxic gasmixtures meeting the criteria of Division 2.3 Hazard Zone A or B must conform to the requirements of §173.40 and CGA S–1.1 (compliance with paragraph 9.1.1.1 is not required) (IBR; see §171.7 of this subchapter) and CGA S–7 (IBR; see §171.7 of this subchapter). A DOT 39 cylinder, UN non-refillable cylinder, or a UN composite cylinder certified to ISO–11119–3 may not be used for a toxic gas or toxic gas mixture meeting the criteria for Division 2.3, Hazard Zone A
or B.

(d) Gases capable of combining chemically. A filled cylinder may not containany gas or material capable of combining chemically with the cylinder’scontents or with the cylinder’s material of construction, so as to endanger the cylinder’s serviceability.

(e) Ownership of cylinder. A cylinder filled with a hazardous material may not be offered for transportation unlessit was filled by the owner of the cylinder or with the owner’s consent.

(f) Pressure relief device systems. (1) Except as provided in paragraphs (f)(5),(f)(6), and (l)(2) of this section, a cylinder filled with a gas and offered for transportation must be equipped with one or more pressure relief devices sized and selected as to type, location, and quantity, and tested in accordancewith CGA S–1.1 (compliance with paragraph 9.1.1.1 is not required) and CGA S–7. The pressure relief device must be capable of preventing rupture of thenormally filled cylinder when subjected to a fire test conducted in accordance with CGA C–14 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), or, in the case of an acetylene cylinder, CGA C–12 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(2) After December 31, 2003, a pressure relief device, when installed, must be in communication with the vapor space of a cylinder containing a Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material.

(3) For a specification 3, 3A, 3AA,3AL, 3AX, 3AXX, 3B, 3BN, or 3T cylinder filled with gases in other than Division 2.2 (except oxygen and oxidizing gases transported by aircraft, see §§173.302(f) and 173.304(f)), beginning with the first requalification due after December 31, 2003, the burst pressure of a CG–1, CG–4, or CG–5 pressure relief device must be at test pressure with a tolerance of plus zero to minus 10%. An
additional 5% tolerance is allowed when a combined rupture disk is placed inside a holder. This requirement doesnot apply if a CG–2, CG–3, or CG–9 thermally activated relief device or a CG–7 reclosing pressure valve is used on the cylinder.


### 587 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.301

(4) A pressure relief device is requiredon a DOT 39 cylinder regardless of cylinder size or filled pressure. A DOT 39 cylinder used for liquefied Division 2.1 materials must be equipped with a metal pressure relief device. Fusiblepressure relief devices are not authorized on a DOT 39 cylinder containing a liquefied gas.

(5) A pressure relief device is not required on—

(i) A cylinder 305 mm (12 inches) or less in length, exclusive of neck, and 114 mm (4.5 inches) or less in outside diameter, except when the cylinder is filled with a liquefied gas for which this part requires a service pressure of 1800 psig or higher or a nonliquefied gas to a pressure of 1800 psig or higher at 21

° C (70 ° F);

(ii) A cylinder with a water capacity of less than 454 kg (1000 lbs) filled with a nonliquefied gas to a pressure of 300 psig or less at 21 ° C (70 ° F), except for a DOT 39 cylinder or a cylinder used for acetylene in solution; or

(iii) A cylinder containing a Class 3or a Class 8 material without pressurization, unless otherwise specified for
the hazardous material.

(6) A pressure relief device is prohibited on a cylinder filled with a Division
2.3 or 6.1 material in Hazard Zone A.

(iv) A UN pressure receptacle transported in accordance with paragraph (k) or (l) or this section.

(g) Manifolding cylinders in transportation. (1) Cylinder manifolding is authorized only under conditions prescribed in this paragraph (g).Manifolded cylinders must be supported and held together as a unit by structurally adequate means. Exceptfor Division 2.2 materials, each cylinder must be equipped with an individual shutoff valve that must betightly closed while in transit. Manifold branch lines must be sufficiently flexible to prevent damage to the valves that otherwise might result from the use of rigid branch lines. Each cylinder must be individually equippedwith a pressure relief device as required in paragraph (f) of this section, except that pressure relief devices on manifolded horizontal cylinders that
are mounted on a motor vehicle or framework may be selected as to type, location, and quantity according to the lowest marked pressure limit of an individual cylinder in the manifoldedunit. The pressure relief devices selected for the manifolded unit must
have been tested in accordance with
CGA S–1.1 and CGA S–7. Pressure reliefdevices on manifolded horizontal cylinders filled with a compressed gasmust be arranged to discharge unobstructed to the open air. In addition,for Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material, the pressure relief devices (PRDs) must be arranged to discharge upwardto prevent any escaping gas from contacting personnel or any adjacent cylinders. Valves and pressure relief devices on manifolded cylinders filledwith a compressed gas must be protected from damage by framing, a cabinet or other method. Manifolding is authorized for cylinders containing the following gases:

(i) Nonliquefied (permanent) compressed gases authorized by §173.302.

(ii) Liquefied compressed gases authorized by §173.304. Each manifoldedcylinder containing a liquefied compressed gas must be separately filled and means must be provided to ensure no interchange of cylinder contents can occur during transportation.

(iii) Acetylene as authorized by §173.303.

(2) For the checking of tare weights or replacing solvent, the cylinder must
be removed from the manifold. This requirement is not intended to prohibit filling acetylene cylinders while
manifolded.

(h) Cylinder valve protection. UN pressure receptacles must meet the valve protection requirements in §173.301b(c). A DOT specification cylinder used to transport a hazardous material must meet the requirements specified in this paragraph (h).

(1) The following specification cylinders are not subject to the cylinder valve protection requirements in this paragraph (h):

(i) A cylinder containing only a Division 2.2 material without a Division 5.1 subsidiary hazard;

(ii) A cylinder containing a Class 8 liquid corrosive only to metal;

(iii) A cylinder with a water capacity of 4.8 liters (293 in 3 ) or less containing oxygen, compressed;


### 588 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.301

(iv) A cylinder containing oxygen, refrigerated liquid (cryogenic liquid);

(v) A Medical E cylinder with a water capacity of 4.9 liters (300 in 3 ) or less; (vi) A fire extinguisher; or(vii) A ‘‘B’’ style cylinder with a capacity of 40 ft 3 (1.13 m 3 ) or an ‘‘MC’’ style cylinder with a capacity of 10 ft 3 (0.28m 3 ) containing acetylene. (2) For cylinders manufactured before October 1, 2007, a cylinder must haveits valves protected by one of the following methods:

(i) By equipping the cylinder with securely attached metal caps of sufficient strength to protect valves from damage during transportation;

(ii) By boxing or crating the cylinders so as to protect valves from damage during transportation;

(iii) By constructing the cylinder sothat the valve is recessed into the cylinder or otherwise protected to the extent that it will not be subjected to a blow when the container is dropped onto a flat surface; or

(iv) By loading the cylinders in an upright position and securely bracingthe cylinders in rail cars or motor vehicles, when loaded by the consignor and unloaded by the consignee.

(3) For cylinders manufactured on or after October 1, 2007, each cylinder valve assembly must be of sufficient strength or protected such that no leakage occurs when a cylinder with the valve installed is dropped 1.8 m (6ft.) or more onto a non-yielding surface, such as concrete or steel, impacting the valve assembly or protection device at an orientation most likely tocause damage. The cylinder valve assembly protection may be provided by any method meeting the performance requirement in this paragraph (h)(3). Examples include:

(i) Equipping the cylinder with a securely attached metal cap.

(ii) Packaging the cylinder in a box, crate, or other strong outer packaging conforming to the requirements of §173.25.

(iii) Constructing the cylinder suchthat the valve is recessed into the cylinder or otherwise protected.

(i) Cylinders mounted in motor vehicles
or in frames . (1) MEGCs must conform to the requirements in §173.312. DOT specification cylinders mounted on motor vehicles or in frames must conform to the requirements specified in this paragraph (i).

(2) Seamless DOT specification cylinders longer than 2 m (6.5 feet) are authorized for transportation only whenhorizontally mounted on a motor vehicle or in an ISO framework or otherframework of equivalent structural integrity in accordance with CGA TB–25 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). The pressure relief device must be arranged to discharge unobstructed to the openair. In addition, for Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material, the pressure relief devices must be arranged to discharge upward to prevent any escaping gasfrom contacting personnel or any adjacent cylinders.

(3) Cylinders may not be transported by rail in container on freight car (COFC) or trailer on flat car (TOFC)service except under conditions approved by the Associate Administratorfor Safety, Federal Railroad Administration.

(j) Non-specification cylinders in domestic use. Except as provided in §§171.12(a) and 173.23(g) of this subchapter, a filled cylinder manufactured to other than a DOT specification or a UN standard inaccordance with part 178 of this subchapter, or a DOT exemption or special permit cylinder or a cylinder used as a fire extinguisher in conformance with §173.309(a), may not be transported to, from, or within the United States.

(k) Metal attachments. Metal attachments to cylinders must have rounded or chamfered corners, or be otherwiseprotected, so as to prevent the likelihood of causing puncture or damage to other hazardous materials packages. This requirement applies to anything temporarily or permanently attached to the cylinder, such as metal skids.

(o) Cylinders made of aluminum alloy
6351–T6. A DOT 3AL cylinder manufactured of aluminum alloy 6351–T6 maynot be filled and offered for transportation or transported with pyrophoricgases. The use of UN cylinders manufactured of aluminum alloy 6351–T6 is prohibited.

[67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002]

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.301, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the


### 589 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.301b

Finding Aids section of the printed volume
and on GPO Access.

§ 173.301a Additional general requirements for shipment of specification cylinders.

(a) General. The requirements in thissection are in addition to the requirements in §173.301 and apply to the shipment of gases in specification cylinders.

(b) Authorized cylinders not marked with a service pressure. For authorized cylinders not marked with a servicepressure, the service pressure is designated as follows:

Specification marking Service Pressure

psig

3 ......................................................................... 1800

3E ...................................................................... 1800

8 ......................................................................... 250

(c) Cylinder pressure at 21 ° C (70 ° F). The pressure in a cylinder at 21 ° C (70

° F) may not exceed the service pressure for which the cylinder is marked or designated, except as provided in §173.302a(b). For certain liquefied gases, the pressure at 21 ° C (70 ° F) mustbe lower than the marked service pressure to avoid having a pressure at a temperature of 55 ° C (131 ° F) that is greater than permitted.

(d) Cylinder pressure at 55 ° C (131 ° F). The pressure in a cylinder at 55 ° C (131

° F) may not exceed 5/4 times the service pressure, except:

(1) For a cylinder filled with acetylene, liquefied nitrous oxide, or carbon
dioxide.

(2) For a cylinder filled in accordance with §173.302a(b), the pressure in the cylinder at 55 ° C (131 ° F) may not exceed 5/4 times the filling pressure.

(3) The pressure at 55 ° C (131 ° F) of Hazard Zone A and, after December 31, 2003, Hazard Zone B materials, may notexceed the service pressure of the cylinder. Sufficient outage must be provided so that the cylinder will not be liquid full at 55 ° C (131 ° F).

(e) Grandfather clause. A cylinder in domestic use prior to the date on which the specification for the cylinder was first made effective may be used if the cylinder has been properly tested andotherwise conforms to the requirements applicable to the gas with which it is charged.

[67 FR 51645, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002; 68 FR 24661, May 8, 2003]

§ 173.301b Additional general requirements for shipment of UN pressure receptacles.

(a) General. The requirements of thissection are in addition to the requirements in §173.301 and apply to the shipment of gases in UN pressure receptacles. A UN pressure receptacle, including closures, must conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements specified in parts178 and 180 of this subchapter, as applicable. Bundles of cylinders must conform to the requirements in §178.70(e) of this subchapter.

(1) A UN pressure receptacle may not be filled and offered for transportation when damaged to such an extent thatthe integrity of the UN pressure receptacle or its service equipment may be affected. Prior to filling, the service equipment must be examined and found to be in good working condition (see§178.70(d) of this subchapter). In addition, the required markings must be legible on the pressure receptacle.

(2) The gases or gas mixtures must becompatible with the UN pressure receptacle and valve materials as prescribed
for metallic materials in ISO 11114–1 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) and
for non-metallic materials in ISO11114–2 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(3) A refillable UN pressure receptacle may not be filled with a gas orgas mixture different from that previously contained in the UN pressurereceptacle unless the necessary operations for change of gas service have been performed in accordance with ISO11621 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(4) When a strong outer packaging is prescribed, for example as provided byparagraph (c)(2)(vi) or (d)(1) of this section, the UN pressure receptacles mustbe protected to prevent movement. Unless otherwise specified in this part, more than one UN pressure receptacle may be enclosed in the strong outer packaging.


### 590 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.302

(b) Individual shut-off valves and pressure relief devices. Except for Division 2.2 permanent gases, each UN pressure receptacle must be equipped with an
individual shutoff valve that must be tightly closed while in transit. EachUN pressure receptacle must be individually equipped with a pressure reliefdevice as prescribed by §173.301(f), except that pressure relief devices onbundles of cylinders or manifolded horizontal cylinders must have a set-todischarge pressure that is based on the lowest marked pressure of any cylinder
in the bundle or manifolded unit.

(c) Pressure receptacle valve requirements. (1) When the use of a valve is prescribed, the valve must conform to the requirements in ISO 10297 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(2) A UN pressure receptacle must have its valves protected from damage
that could cause inadvertent release ofthe contents of the UN pressure receptacle by one of the following methods:

(i) By constructing the pressure receptacle so that the valves are recessedinside the neck of the UN pressure receptacle and protected by a threaded plug or cap;

(ii) By equipping the UN pressure receptacle with a valve cap conforming to the requirements in ISO 11117 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). The cap
must have vent-holes of sufficient
cross-sectional area to evacuate the gas if leakage occurs at the valve;

(iii) By protecting the valves by shrouds or guards conforming to the requirements in ISO 11117;

(iv) By using valves designed and
constructed with sufficient inherentstrength to withstand damage in accordance with Annex B of ISO 10297;

(v) By enclosing the UN pressure receptacles in frames, e.g., bundles of cylinders; or

(vi) By packing the UN pressure receptacles in a strong outer package,such as a box or crate, capable of meeting the drop test specified in §178.603 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level.

(d) Non-refillable UN pressure receptacles. Non-refillable UN pressure receptacles must conform to the following requirements: (1) The receptacles must be transported as an inner package of a combination package;

(2) The receptacle must have a water capacity not exceeding 1.25 L when used for a flammable or toxic gas; and

(3) The receptacle is prohibited for
Hazard Zone A material.

(e) Pyrophoric gases. A UN pressure receptacle must have valves equipped with gas-tight plugs or caps when used for pyrophoric or flammable mixtures of gases containing more than 1% pyrophoric compounds.

(f) Hydrogen bearing gases . A steel UN pressure receptacle bearing an ‘‘H’’mark must be used for hydrogen bearing gases or other embrittling gasesthat have the potential of causing hydrogen embrittlement.

(g) Composite cylinders in underwater

use . A composite cylinder certified to ISO–11119–2 or ISO–11119–3 may not be used for underwater applications unlessthe cylinder is manufactured in accordance with the requirements for underwater use and is marked ‘‘UW’’ as prescribed in §178.71(o)(17) of this subchapter.

[71 FR 33882, June 12, 2006, as amended at 71 FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006]

§ 173.302 Filling of cylinders with nonliquefied (permanent) compressed

gases.
(a) General requirements . A cylinder filled with a non-liquefied compressedgas (except gas in solution) must be offered for transportation in accordance with the requirements of this sectionand §173.301. In addition, a DOT specification cylinder must meet the requirements in §§173.301a, 173.302a and173.305, as applicable. UN pressure receptacles must meet the requirements in §§173.301b and 173.302b, as applicable. Where more than one section applies toa cylinder, the most restrictive requirements must be followed.

(b) Aluminum cylinders in oxygen service. Each aluminum cylinder filled with oxygen must meet all of the following
conditions:

(1) Metallic portions of a valve thatmay come into contact with the oxygen in the cylinder must be constructed of brass or stainless steel.


### 591 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.302

(2) Except for UN cylinders, each cylinder opening must be configured with straight threads only.

(3) Each UN pressure receptacle must
be cleaned in accordance with the requirements of ISO 11621 (IBR, see §171.7 or this subchapter). Each DOT cylinder
must be cleaned in accordance with therequirements of GSA Federal Specification RR–C–901D, paragraphs 3.3.1and 3.3.2 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). Cleaning agents equivalent to those specified in Federal Specification RR–C–901D may be used provided they do not react with oxygen. One cylinder selected at random from a group of 200
or fewer and cleaned at the same time
must be tested for oil contamination in accordance with Federal Specification RR–C–901D, paragraph 4.3.2, and meet the specified standard of cleanliness.

(4) The pressure in each cylinder may not exceed 3000 psig at 21 ° C (70 ° F).

(c) Notwithstanding the provisions of §§173.24(b)(1) and paragraph (f) of thissection, an authorized cylinder containing oxygen continuously fed totanks containing live fish may be offered for transportation and transported.

(d) Shipment of Division 2.1 materials in aluminum cylinders is authorized for transportation only by motor vehicle, rail car, or cargo-only aircraft.

(e) DOT 3AL cylinders manufactured of 6351–T6 aluminum alloy. Suitable safeguards should be provided to protect personnel and facilities should failureoccur while filling cylinders manufactured of aluminum alloy 6351–T6 used in self-contained underwater breathing apparatus (SCUBA), self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or oxygen service. The cylinder filler should allow only those individuals essentialto the filling process to be in the vicinity of the cylinder during the filling

process.

(f) Compressed oxygen and oxidizing gases by aircraft. A cylinder containing oxygen, compressed; compressed gas, oxidizing, n.o.s.; or nitrogen trifluorideis authorized for transportation by aircraft only when it meets the following requirements:

(1) Only DOT specification 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3E, 3HT, and 39 cylinders, and UN pressure receptacles ISO 9809–1, ISO 9809–2, ISO 9809–3 and ISO 7866 cylinders
are authorized.

(2) Cylinders must be equipped with a pressure relief device in accordancewith §173.301(f) and, for DOT 39 cylinders offered for transportation afterOctober 1, 2008, for the other DOT specification cylinders with the first requalification due after October 1, 2008, or for the UN pressure receptacles prior
to initial use:

(i) The rated burst pressure of a rupture disc for DOT 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3E, and39 cylinders, and UN pressure receptacles ISO 9809–1, ISO 9809–2, ISO 9809– 3 and ISO 7866 cylinders must be 100% of the cylinder minimum test pressure with a tolerance of plus zero to minus 10%; and

(ii) The rated burst pressure of a rupture disc for a DOT 3HT cylinder must be 90% of the cylinder minimum test pressure with a tolerance of plus zero
to minus 10%.

(3) The cylinder must be placed in a rigid outer packaging that—

(i) Conforms to the requirements of either part 178, subparts L and M of this subchapter at the Packing Group Ior II performance level or the performance criteria in Air Transport Association (ATA) Specification No. 300 for a Category I Shipping Container;

(ii) After September 30, 2009, is capable of passing, as demonstrated by design testing, the Flame Penetration Resistance Test in Appendix E to part 178 of this subchapter; and

(iii) Prior to each shipment, passes a visual inspection that verifies that all features of the packaging are in good condition, including all latches, hinges, seams, and other features, and that the packaging is free from perforations, cracks, dents, or other abrasions thatmay negatively affect the flame penetration resistance and thermal resistance characteristics of the packaging.

(4) After September 30, 2009, the cylinder and the outer packaging must be capable of passing, as demonstrated by design testing, the Thermal Resistance Test specified in Appendix D to part 178 of this subchapter.

(5) The cylinder and the outer packaging must both be marked and labeled in accordance with part 172, subparts Dand E of this subchapter. The additional marking ‘‘DOT31FP,’’ is allowed


### 592 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.302a

to indicate that the cylinder and the outer packaging are capable of passing, as demonstrated by design testing, the Thermal Resistance Test specified inAppendix D to part 178 of this subchapter.

(6) A cylinder of compressed oxygen that has been furnished by an aircraft operator to a passenger in accordance with 14 CFR §§121.574, 125.219, or 135.91 is excepted from the outer packaging requirements of paragraph (f)(3) of this

section.

[67 FR 51646, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002; 68 FR 75745, Dec. 31, 2003; 71 FR 33883; June 12, 2006; 71 FR 51127, Aug. 29, 2006; 72 FR 55098, Sept. 28, 2007]

§ 173.302a Additional requirements forshipment of nonliquefied (permanent) compressed gases in specification cylinders.

(a) Detailed filling requirements. Nonliquefied compressed gases (except gasin solution) for which filling requirements are not specifically prescribed in §173.304a must be shipped subject to the requirements in this section and §§173.301, 173.301a, 173.302, and 173.305 in specification cylinders, as follows:

(1) DOT 3, 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3B, 3E, 4B, 4BA and 4BW cylinders.

(2) DOT 3HT cylinders. These cylinders are authorized for aircraft use only and only for nonflammable gases. They have a maximum service life of 24 years from the date of manufacture. The cylinders must be equipped withfrangible disc type pressure relief devices that meet the requirements of §173.301(f). Each frangible disc musthave a rated bursting pressure not exceeding 90 percent of the minimum required test pressure of the cylinder. Discs with fusible metal backing arenot permitted. Specification 3HT cylinders may be offered for transportation only when packaged in accordance with §173.301(a)(9).

(3) DOT 39 cylinders. When the cylinder is filled with a Division 2.1 material, the internal volume of the cylinder may not exceed 1.23 L (75 in 3 ). (4) DOT 3AX, 3AAX, and 3T cylinders
are authorized for Division 2.1 and 2.2
materials and for carbon monoxide. DOT 3T cylinders are not authorized for hydrogen. When used in methaneservice, the methane must be a nonliquefied gas with a minimum purity of 98.0 percent methane and commercially free of corroding components.

(5) Aluminum cylinders manufactured in conformance with specifications DOT 39 and 3AL are authorized for oxygen only under the conditions specified in §173.302(b).

(b) Special filling limits for DOT 3A, 3AX, 3AA, 3AAX, and 3T cylinders. ADOT 3A, 3AX, 3AA, 3AAX, and 3T cylinder may be filled with a compressed gas, other than a liquefied, dissolved, Division 2.1, or Division 2.3 gas, to a pressure 10 percent in excess of its marked service pressure, provided:

(1) The cylinder is equipped with a frangible disc pressure relief device (without fusible metal backing) having a bursting pressure not exceeding the minimum prescribed test pressure.

(2) The cylinder’s elastic expansion
was determined at the time of the last test or retest by the water jacket
method.

(3) Either the average wall stress or
the maximum wall stress does not exceed the wall stress limitation shown in the following table:

Type of steel Average wall
stress limitation Maximum wall
stress limitation

I. Plain carbon steels over 0.35 carbon and medium manganese steels .............................................. 53,000 58,000II. Steels of analysis and heat treatment specified in spec. 3AA .......... 67,000 73,000III. Steels of analysis and heat treatment specified in spec. DOT-3T .... 87,000 94,000

IV. Plain carbon steels less than 0.35

carbon made prior to 1920 ............ 45,000 48,000

(i)(A) The average wall stress mustbe computed from the elastic expansion data using the following formula:

S = 1.7EE / KV

¥ 0.4P

Where:
S = wall stress, pounds per square inch;EE = elastic expansion (total less permanent) in cubic centimeters;
K = factor × 10

¥ 7 experimentally determined

for the particular type of cylinder being
tested or derived in accordance with CGA C–5 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter); V = internal volume in cubic centimeter (1

cubic inch = 16.387 cubic centimeters); P = test pressure, pounds per square inch.

(B) The formula in paragraph (b)(3)(i)(A) of this section is derived


### 593 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.302b

from the formula in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section and the following:

EE = (PKVD 2 ) / (D 2

¥ d 2 )

(ii) The maximum wall stress must be computed from the formula:

S = (P(1.3D 2 + 0.4d 2 )) / (D 2

¥ d 2 )

Where: S = wall stress, pounds per square inch; P = test pressure, pounds per square inch; D = outside diameter, inches; d = D–2t, where t=minimum wall thickness

determined by a suitable method.
(iii) Compliance with average wall stress limitation may be determined bycomputing the elastic expansion rejection limit in accordance with CGA C–5, by reference to data tabulated in CGA C–5, or by the manufacturer’s marked elastic expansion rejection limit (REE) on the cylinder.

(4) An external and internal visual
examination made at the time of test or retest shows the cylinder to be free from excessive corrosion, pitting, or dangerous defects.

(5) A plus sign (+) is added following the test date marking on the cylinderto indicate compliance with paragraphs (b) (2), (b)(3), and (b)(4) of this

section.

(c) Carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide must be offered in a DOT 3, 3A,3AX, 3AA, 3AAX, 3AL, 3E, or 3T cylinder having a minimum service pressure of 1800 psig. The pressure in a steel cylinder may not exceed 1000 psig at 21

° C (70 ° F), except that if the gas is dry and sulfur free, the cylinder may be filled to 5/6 of the cylinder’s service pressure or 2000 psig, whichever is less. A DOT 3AL cylinder may be filled to its marked service pressure. A DOT 3AL cylinder is authorized only when transported by motor vehicle, rail car, or cargo-only aircraft.

(d) Diborane and diborane mixtures.
Diborane and diborane mixed withcompatible compressed gas must be offered in a DOT 3AL1800 or 3AA1800 cylinder. The maximum filling density of the diborane may not exceed 7 percent.Diborane mixed with compatible compressed gas may not have a pressure exceeding the service pressure of the cylinder if complete decomposition ofthe diborane occurs. Cylinder valve assemblies must be protected in accordance with §173.301(h). (e) Fluorine. Fluorine must be shipped in specification 3A1000, 3AA1000, or3BN400 cylinders without pressure relief devices and equipped with valve protection cap. The cylinder may not be charged to over 400 psig at 21 ° C (70

° F) and may not contain over 2.7 kg (6 lbs) of gas.

[67 FR 51646, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 75745, Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR 34075, June 13, 2005; 71 FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006; 72 FR 4455, Jan. 31, 2007; 72 FR 55098, Sept. 28, 2007]

§ 173.302b Additional requirements forshipment of non-liquefied (permanent) compressed gases in UN pressure receptacles.

(a) General. A cylinder filled with a non-liquefied gas must be offered fortransportation in UN pressure receptacles subject to the requirements in this section and §173.302. In addition, the requirements in §§173.301 and
173.301b must be met.

(b) UN pressure receptacles filling limits. A UN pressure receptacle is authorized for the transportation of non-liquefied compressed gases as specified inthis section. Except where filling limits are specifically prescribed in this section, the working pressure of a UN pressure receptacle may not exceed 2 ⁄ 3 of the test pressure of the receptacle.Alternatively, the filling limits specified for non-liquefied gases in Table 1
of P200 of the UN Recommendations (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) are authorized. In no case may the internal pressure at 65 ° C (149 ° F) exceed the test pressure.

(c) Fluorine, compressed, UN 1045 and Oxygen diflouride, compressed, UN 2190. Fluorine, compressed and Oxygendifluoride, compressed must be packaged in a UN pressure receptacle with a minimum test pressure of 200 bar and amaximum working pressure not to exceed 30 bar. A UN pressure receptaclemade of aluminum alloy is not authorized. The maximum quantity of gas authorized in each UN pressure receptacle is 5 kg.

(d) Diborane and diborane mixtures, UN
1911. Diborane and diborane mixturesmust be packaged in a UN pressure receptacle with a minimum test pressure of 250 bar and a maximum filling ratio dependent on the test pressure not to exceed 0.07. Filling should be further


### 594 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.303

limited so that if complete decomposition of diborane occurs, the pressure of
diborane or diborane mixtures will notexceed the working pressure of the cylinder. The use of UN tubes and MEGCs
is not authorized.

(e) Carbon monoxide, compressed UN
1016. Carbon monoxide, compressed is authorized in UN pressure receptacles. The settled pressure in a steel pressure receptacle containing carbon monoxide may not exceed 1 ⁄ 3 of the pressure receptacle’s test pressure at 65 ° C (149 ° F) except, if the gas is dry and sulfur-free, the settled pressure may not exceed l ⁄ 2 of the marked test pressure.

[71 FR 33883, June 12, 2006]

§ 173.303 Charging of cylinders withcompressed gas in solution (acetylene).
(a) Cylinder, filler and solvent requirements. (Refer to applicable parts of Specification 8 and 8AL). Acetylene gas must be shipped in Specification 8 or 8AL cylinders (§178.59 or §178.60 of thissubchapter). The cylinders shall consist of metal shells filled with a porous material, and this material must be charged with a suitable solvent. Thecylinders containing the porous material and solvent shall be successfully
tested in accordance with CGA C–12 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). Representative samples of cylinderscharged with acetylene must be successfully tested in accordance with
CGA C–12.

(b) Filling limits. For DOT specification cylinders, the pressure in the cylinder containing acetylene gas may not exceed 250 psig at 70 ° F. If cylinders are marked for a lower allowable charging pressure at 70 ° F., that pressure must not be exceeded. For UN cylinders, thepressure in the cylinder may not exceed the limits specified in §173.304b(b)(2).

(c) Data requirements on filler and solvent. Cylinders containing acetylene gas must not be shipped unless they were charged by or with the consent of the owner, and by a person, firm, or company having possession of completeinformation as to the nature of the porous filling, the kind and quantity ofsolvent in the cylinders, and the meaning of such markings on the cylinders as are prescribed by the Department’s regulations and specifications applying to containers for the transportation of acetylene gas.

(d) Verification of container pressure.(1) Each day, the pressure in a container representative of that day’s compression must be checked by the charging plant after the container has cooled to a settled temperature and a record of this test kept for at least 30 days.

(e) Prefill requirements. Before each filling of an acetylene cylinder, theperson filling the cylinder must visually inspect the outside of the cylinder in accordance with the prefill requirements contained in CGA C–13,Section 3 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(f) UN cylinders. (1) UN cylinders and bundles of cylinders are authorized forthe transport of acetylene gas as specified in this section. Each UN acetylene cylinder must conform to ISO 3807–2 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), have a homogeneous monolithic porous mass filler and be charged with acetone or a suitable solvent as specified in the standard. UN acetylene cylinders must have a minimum test pressure of 52 bar and may be filled up to the pressure limits specified in ISO 3807–2. The use
of UN tubes and MEGCs is not authorized.

(2) UN cylinders equipped with pressure relief devices or that aremanifolded together must be transported upright.

[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.303, see the List of CFRSections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and
on GPO Access.

§ 173.304 Filling of cylinders with liquefied compressed gases.

(a) General requirements. A cylinder filled with a liquefied compressed gas (except gas in solution) must be offered for transportation in accordance with the requirements of this section and the general requirements in §173.301. In addition, a DOT specification cylinder must meet the requirement in§§173.301a, 173.304a, and 173.305, as applicable. UN pressure receptacles must be


### 595 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.304

shipped in accordance with the requirements in 173.301b and 173.304b, as applicable.

(1) A DOT 3AL cylinder may not be used for any material with a primary or subsidiary hazard of Class 8.

(2) Shipments of Division 2.1 materials in aluminum cylinders are authorized only when transported by motor vehicle, rail car, or cargo-only
aircraft.

(b) Filling limits. Except for carbon dioxide; 1,1-Difluoroethylene (R–1132A);nitrous oxide; and vinyl fluoride, inhibited, the liquid portion of a liquefiedgas may not completely fill the packaging at any temperature up to and including 55 ° C (131 ° F). The liquid portion of vinyl fluoride, inhibited, may completely fill the cylinder at 55 ° C (131 ° F) provided the pressure at the critical temperature does not exceed 1.25 times the service pressure of the cylinder.

(c) Mixture of compressed gas and other
material. A mixture of compressed gas must be shipped in accordance with §173.305.

(d) Refrigerant and dispersant gases.Nontoxic and nonflammable refrigerant or dispersant gases must be offered for transportation in cylinders prescribed in §173.304a, or in DOT 2P and 2Q containers (§§178.33, 178.33a ofthis subchapter). DOT 2P and 2Q containers must be packaged in a strong
wooden or fiberboard box of such design as to protect valves from damageor accidental functioning under conditions incident to transportation. Pressure in the inside metal containers may not exceed 87 psia at 21 ° C (70 ° F). Each completed metal container filled for shipment must be heated until itscontents reach a minimum temperature of 55 ° C (131 ° F) without evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect. Each outside package must be plainly
marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS’’.

(e) Engine starting fluid. Engine starting fluid containing a flammable compressed gas or gases must be shipped in a cylinder as prescribed in §173.304a or
as follows:

(1) Inside non-refillable metal containers having a capacity not greater than 500 mL (32 in 3 ). The containers must be packaged in strong, tight outer packagings. The pressure in the container may not exceed 145 psia at 54

° C (130 ° F). If the pressure exceeds 145 psia at 54 ° C (130 ° F), a DOT 2P container must be used. In either case, the metal container must be capable ofwithstanding, without bursting, a pressure of 1.5 times the pressure of the
contents at 54 ° C (130 ° F). The liquid content of the material and gas may not completely fill the container at 54

° C (130 ° F). Each container filled for shipment must have been heated until
its contents reach a minimum temperature of 54 ° C (130 ° F), without evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect. Each outside shipping container must be plainly marked, ‘‘INSIDE
CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS’’.

(2) [Reserved] (f) Oxidizing gases by aircraft. A cylinder containing carbon dioxide and oxygen mixture, compressed; liquefied gas, oxidizing, n.o.s.; or nitrous oxide isauthorized for transportation by aircraft only when it meets the following requirements:

(1) Only DOT specification 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3E, 3HT, and 39 cylinders, and UN pressure receptacles ISO 9809–1, ISO 9809–2, ISO 9809–3 and ISO 7866 cylinders
are authorized.

(2) Cylinders must be equipped with a pressure relief device in accordancewith §173.301(f) and, for DOT 39 cylinders offered for transportation afterOctober 1, 2008, for the other DOT specification cylinders with the first requalification due after October 1, 2008, or for the UN pressure receptacles prior
to initial use:

(i) The rated burst pressure of a rupture disc for DOT 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3E and39 cylinders, and UN pressure receptacles ISO 9809–1, ISO 9809–2, ISO 9809– 3 and ISO 7866 cylinders must be 100% of the cylinder minimum test pressure with a tolerance of plus zero to minus 10%; and

(ii) The rated burst pressure of a rupture disc for a DOT 3HT cylinder must be 90% of the cylinder minimum test pressure with a tolerance of plus zero
to minus 10%.

(3) The cylinder must be placed in a rigid outer packaging that—


### 596 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.304a

(i) Conforms to the requirements of either part 178, subparts L and M, of this subchapter at the Packing Group Ior II performance level, or the performance criteria in Air Transport Association (ATA) Specification No. 300 for a Category I Shipping Container;

(ii) After September 30, 2009, is capable of passing, as demonstrated by design testing, the Flame Penetration Resistance Test specified in part III ofAppendix E to part 178 of this subchapter; and

(iii) Prior to each shipment, passes a visual inspection that verifies that all features of the packaging are in good condition, including all latches, hinges, seams, and other features, and the packaging is free from perforations, cracks, dents, or other abrasions thatmay negatively affect the flame penetration resistance and thermal resistance characteristics of the container.

(4) After September 30, 2009, the cylinder and the outer packaging must be capable of passing, as demonstrated by design testing, the Thermal Resistance Test specified in Appendix D to part 178 of this subchapter.

(5) The cylinder and the outer packaging must both be marked and labeled in accordance with part 172, subparts Dand E of this subchapter. The additional marking ‘‘DOT31FP,’’ is allowed to indicate that the cylinder and the outer packaging are capable of passing, as demonstrated by design testing, the Thermal Resistance Test specified inAppendix D to part 178 of this subchapter.

(6) A cylinder of compressed oxygen that has been furnished by an aircraft operator to a passenger in accordance with 14 CFR 121.574, 125.219, or 135.91 isexcepted from the outer packaging requirements of paragraph (f)(3) of this

section.

[67 FR 51647, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 24661, May 8, 2003; 71 FR 33883, June 12, 2006; 72 FR 55098, Sept. 28, 2007; 74 FR 53188, Oct. 16, 2009]

§ 173.304a Additional requirements for shipment of liquefied compressed gases in specification cylinders.

(a) Detailed filling requirements. Liquefied gases (except gas in solution) must be offered for transportation, subject to the requirements in this section and §§173.301 and 173.304, in specification cylinders, as follows:

(1) DOT 3, 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3B, 3BN, 3E, 4B, 4BA, 4B240ET, 4BW, 4E, 39, except that no DOT 4E or 39 packaging may befilled and shipped with a mixture containing a pyrophoric liquid, carbon bisulfide (disulfide), ethyl chloride, ethylene oxide, nickel carbonyl, spiritsof nitroglycerin, or toxic material (Division 6.1 or 2.3), unless specifically authorized in this part.

(2) For the gases named, the following requirements apply (for cryogenic liquids, see §173.316):

Kind of gas Maximum permitted filling density (percent) (see Note 1) Packaging marked as shown in this column or of the same type with higher service pressure must

be used, except as provided in §§ 173.301(l), 173.301a(e), and 180.205(a) (see notes following table)

Anhydrous ammonia ............................................... 54 .................................. DOT-3A480; DOT-3AA480; DOT- 3A480X; DOT4AA480; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT-3AL480.Bromotrifluoromethane (R–13B1 or H–1301) ........ 124 ................................ DOT-3A400; DOT-3AA400; DOT-3B400; DOT4AA480; DOT-4B400; DOT-4BA400; DOT4BW400; DOT-3E1800; DOT-39; DOT3AL400. Carbon dioxide ( see Notes 4, 7, and 8) ................. 68 .................................. DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AX1800; DOT-3AA1800;DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT3T1800; DOT-3HT2000; DOT-39; DOT3AL1800. Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid ( see paragraph

(e) of this section). ....................................... DOT-4L.

Chlorine ( see Note 2) ............................................. 125 ................................ DOT-3A480; DOT-3AA480; DOT-3; DOT3BN480; DOT-3E1800.
Chlorodifluroethane or 1-Chloro-1, 1-

difluoroethane (R–142b). 100 ................................ DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B150; DOT4B150; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT3E1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL150. Chlorodifluoromethane (R–22) ( see Note 8) .......... 105 ................................ DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; DOT4B240; DOT-4BA240; DOT-4BW240; DOT4B240ET; DOT-4E240; DOT-39; DOT-3E1800;
DOT-3AL240.


### 597 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.304a

Kind of gas Maximum permitted filling density (percent) (see Note 1) Packaging marked as shown in this column or of the same type with higher service pressure must

be used, except as provided in §§ 173.301(l), 173.301a(e), and 180.205(a) (see notes following table)

Chloropentafluorethane (R–115) ............................ 110 ................................ DOT-3A225; DOT-3AA225; DOT-3B225; DOT4BA225; DOT-4B225; DOT-4BW225; DOT3E1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL225. Chlorotrifluoromethane (R–13) ( see Note 8) .......... 100 ................................ DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AA1800; DOT-3; DOT3E1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL1800. Cyclopropane ( see Note 8) .................................... 55 .................................. DOT-3A225; DOT-3A480X; DOT-3AA225; DOT3B225; DOT-4AA480; DOT4B225; DOT4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-4B240ET; DOT3; DOT-3E1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL225. Dichlorodifluoromethane (R–12) ( see Note 8) ....... 119 ................................ DOT-3A225; DOT-3AA225; DOT-3B225; DOT4B225; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT4B240ET; DOT-4E225; DOT-39; DOT-3E1800;
DOT-3AL225.

Dichlorodifluoromethane and difluoroethane mixture (constant boiling mixture) (R–500) ( see Note 8). Not liquid full at 131 ° F DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; DOT3E1800; DOT-4B240; DOT-4BA240; DOT4BW240; DOT-4E240; DOT-39. 1,1-Difluoroethane (R–152a) ( see note 8) ............. 79 .................................. DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B150; DOT4B150; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT3E1800; DOT-3AL150. 1,1-Difluoroethylene (R–1132A) ............................. 73 .................................. DOT-3A2200; DOT-3AA2200; DOT-3AX 2200; DOT-3AAX2200; DOT-3T2200; DOT-39. Dimethylamine, anhydrous ..................................... 59 .................................. DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B1 50; DOT4B150; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; ICC–
3E1800. Ethane ( see Note 8) ............................................... 35.8 ............................... DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AX1800; DOT-3AA1800;DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT3T1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL1800. Ethane ( see Note 8) ............................................... 36.8 ............................... DOT-3A2000; DOT-3AX2000; DOT-3AA2000;DOT-3AAX2000; DOT-3T2000; DOT-39; DOT3AL2000. Ethylene ( see Note 8) ............................................ 31.0 ............................... DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AX1800; DOT-3AA1800;DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT3T1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL1800. Ethylene ( see Note 8) ............................................ 32.5 ............................... DOT-3A2000; DOT-3AX2000; DOT-3AA2000;DOT-3AAX2000; DOT-3T2000; DOT-39; DOT3AL2000. Ethylene ( see Note 8) ............................................ 35.5 ............................... DOT-3A2400; DOT-3AX2400; DOT-3AA2400;DOT-3AAX2400; DOT-3T2400; DOT-39; DOT3AL2400. Hydrogen chloride, anhydrous ............................... 65 .................................. DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AA1800; DOT-3AX 1800;DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3T1800; DOT3E1800. Hydrogen sulfide ( see Notes 10 and 14) ............... 62.5 ............................... DOT-3A; DOT-3AA; DOT-3B; DOT-4A; DOT-4B;DOT-4BA; DOT-4BW; DOT-3E1800; DOT3AL. Insecticide, gases liquefied ( see Notes 8 and 12) Not liquid full at 131 ° F DOT-3A300; DOT-3AA300; DOT-3B300; DOT4B300; DOT-4BA300; DOT-4BW300; DOT3E1800.Liquefied nonflammable gases, other than classified flammable, corrosive, toxic & mixtures or solution thereof filled w/nitrogen, carbon dioxide, or air ( see Notes 7 and 8).. Not liquid full at 131 ° F Specification packaging authorized in paragraph (a)(1) of this section and DOT-3HT; DOT 4D; DOT-4DA; DOT-4DS.

Methyl acetylene-propadiene, mixtures, stabilized;

( see Note 5).. Not liquid at 131 ° F ....... DOT-4B240 without brazed seams; DOT4BA240 without brazed seams; DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; DOT-3E1800; DOT-4BW240; DOT-4E240; DOT-4B240ET;
DOT-3AL240. Methyl chloride ....................................................... 84 .................................. DOT-3A225; DOT-3AA225 ; DOT-3B225; DOT4B225; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-3;DOT-3E1800; DOT-4B240ET. Cylinders complying with DOT-3A150; DOT-3B150; and DOT-4B150 manufactured prior to Dec. 7,
1936 are also authorized. Methyl mercaptan ................................................... 80 .................................. DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; D OT-3B240; OT4B240; DOT-4B240ET; DOT-3E1800; DOT4BA240; DOT-4BW240. Nitrosyl chloride ...................................................... 110 ................................ DOT-3BN400 only.


### 598 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.304a

Kind of gas Maximum permitted filling density (percent) (see Note 1) Packaging marked as shown in this column or of the same type with higher service pressure must

be used, except as provided in §§ 173.301(l), 173.301a(e), and 180.205(a) (see notes following table)

Nitrous oxide ( see Notes 7, 8, and 11) .................. 68 .................................. DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AX1800; DOT-3AA1800;DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT3T1800; DOT-3HT2000; DOT-39; DOT3AL1800. Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid ( see paragraph

(e) of this section.). ....................................... DOT-4L.

Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. or Dispersant gas, n.o.s.

( see Notes 8 and 13). Not liquid full at 130 ° F DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; DOT3E1800; DOT-4B240; DOT-4BA240; DOT4BW240; DOT-4E240; DOT-39; DOT-3AL240. Sulfur dioxide ( see note 8) ..................................... 125 ................................ DOT-3A225; DOT-3AA225; DOT-3B225; DOT4B225; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT4B240ET; DOT-3; DOT-39; DOT-3E1800;
DOT-3AL225. Sulfur hexafluoride .................................................. 120 ................................ DOT-3A1000; DOT-3AA1000 ; DOT-AAX2400;DOT-3; DOT-3AL1000; DOT-3E1800; DOT3T1800. Sulfuryl fluoride ....................................................... 106 ................................ DOT-3A480; DOT-3AA48 0; DOT-3E1800; DOT4B480; DOT-4BA480; DOT-4BW480. Tetrafluoroethylene, stabilized ................................ 90 .................................. DOT-3A1200; DOT-3AA1200; DOT -3E1800. Trifluorochloroethylene, stabilized .......................... 115 ................................ DOT-3A300; DOT-3AA300; DOT-3B30 0; DOT4B300; DOT-4BA300; DOT-4BW300; DOT3E1800. Trimethylamine, anhydrous .................................... 57 .................................. DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B1 50; DOT4B150; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT3E1800. Vinyl chloride ( see Note 5) ..................................... 84 .................................. DOT-4B150 without brazed seams; DOT4BA225 without brazed seams; DOT-4BW225; DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3E1800;
DOT-3AL150. Vinyl fluoride, stabilized .......................................... 62 .................................. DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AA1800 ; DOT-3E1800;
DOT-3AL1800. Vinyl methyl ether, stabilized( see Note 5) ............. 68 .................................. DOT-4B150, without brazed seams; DOT4BA225 without brazed seams; DOT-4BW225; DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B1800;
DOT-3E1800.

N OTE 1: ‘‘Filling density’’ means the percent ratio of the weight of gas in a packaging to the weight of water that the container will hold at 16 ° C (60 ° F). (1 lb of water=27.737 in 3 at 60 ° F.).

N OTE 2: Cylinders purchased after Oct. 1, 1944, for the transportation of chlorine must contain no aperture other than that provided in the neck of the cylinder for attachment of a valve equipped with an approved pressure relief device. Cylinders purchased after Nov. 1, 1935, and filled with chlorine may not contain over 68.04 kg (150 lb) of gas.

N OTE 3: [Reserved] N OTE 4: Special carbon dioxide mining devices containing a heating element and filled with not over 2.72 kg (6 lb) of carbon dioxide may be filled to a density of not over 85 percent, provided the cylinder is made of steel with a calculated bursting pr es- sure in excess of 39000 psig, fitted with a frangible disc that will operate at not over 57 percent of that pressure, and is ab le to withstand a drop of 10 feet when striking crosswise on a steel rail while under a pressure of at least 3000 psig. Such devicesmust be shipped in strong boxes or must be wrapped in heavy burlap and bound by 12-gauge wire with the wire completely covered by friction tape. Wrapping must be applied so as not to interfere with the functioning of the frangible disc pressure reli ef de- vice. Shipments must be described as ‘‘liquefied carbon dioxide gas (mining device)’’ and marked, labeled, and certified as pre

- scribed for liquefied carbon dioxide.

N OTE 5: All parts of valve and pressure relief devices in contact with contents of cylinders must be of a metal or other material, suitably treated if necessary, that will not cause formation of any acetylides.

N OTE 6: [Reserved] N OTE 7: Specification 3HT cylinders for aircraft use only, having a maximum service life of 24 years. Authorized only for nonflammable gases. Cylinders must be equipped with pressure relief devices of the frangible disc type that meet the requirementsof § 173.301(f). Each frangible disc must have a rated bursting pressure that does not exceed 90 percent of the minimum required test pressure of the cylinder. Discs with fusible metal backing are not permitted. Cylinders may be offered for transpor

- tation only when packaged in accordance with § 173.301(a)(9).

N OTE 8: See § 173.301(a)(9). N OTE 9: [Reserved] N OTE 10: Each valve outlet must be sealed by a threaded cap or a threaded solid plug. N OTE 11: Must meet the valve and cleaning requirements in § 173.302(b). N OTE 12: For an insecticide gas that is nontoxic and nonflammable, see § 173.305(c). N OTE 13: For a refrigerant or dispersant gas that is nontoxic and nonflammable, see § 173.304(d). N OTE 14: The use of DOT specification cylinder with a marked service pressure of 480 psi is authorized until December 31, 2003.

(b) [Reserved] (c) Verification of content in cylinder. Except as noted in paragraph (d)(4) of this section, the amount of liquefied gas filled into a cylinder must be by weight or, when the gas is lower in pressure than required for liquefaction, a pressure-temperature chart for the


### 599 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.304a

specific gas may be used to ensure that the service pressure at 55 ° C (131 ° F)will not exceed 5/4 of the service pressure at 21 ° C (70 ° F). The weight of liquefied gas filled into the cylinder also must be checked, after disconnecting the cylinder from the filling line, by
the use of an accurate scale.

(d) Requirements for liquefied petroleum gas. (1) Filling density limits are
as follows:

Minimum specific gravity of

liquid material at 60 ° F Maximum the filling density in percent of the water-weight

capacity of the cylinder

0.271 to 0.289 ....................... 26
0.290 to 0.306 ....................... 27
0.307 to 0.322 ....................... 28
0.323 to 0.338 ....................... 29
0.339 to 0.354 ....................... 30
0.355 to 0.371 ....................... 31
0.372 to 0.398 ....................... 32
0.399 to 0.425 ....................... 33
0.426 to 0.440 ....................... 34
0.441 to 0.452 ....................... 35
0.453 to 0.462 ....................... 36
0.463 to 0.472 ....................... 37
0.473 to 0.480 ....................... 38
0.481 to 0.488 ....................... 39
0.489 to 0.495 ....................... 40
0.496 to 0.503 ....................... 41
0.504 to 0.510 ....................... 42
0.511 to 0.519 ....................... 43
0.520 to 0.527 ....................... 44
0.528 to 0.536 ....................... 45
0.537 to 0.544 ....................... 46
0.545 to 0.552 ....................... 47 Minimum specific gravity of liquid material at 60 ° F Maximum the filling density in percent of the water-weight

capacity of the cylinder

0.553 to 0.560 ....................... 48

0.561 to 0.568 ....................... 49

0.569 to 0.576 ....................... 50

0.577 to 0.584 ....................... 51

0.585 to 0.592 ....................... 52

0.593 to 0.600 ....................... 53

0.601 to 0.608 ....................... 54

0.609 to 0.617 ....................... 55

0.618 to 0.626 ....................... 56

0.627 to 0.634 ....................... 57

(2) Subject to §173.301a(d), any filling density percentage prescribed in this section is authorized to be increased by a factor of 2 for liquefied petroleum gasin DOT 3 cylinders or in DOT 3A cylinders marked for 1800 psig, or higher, service pressure.

(3) Liquefied petroleum gas must be shipped in specification cylinders as
follows:

(i) DOT 3, 3A, 3AA, 3B, 3E, 3AL, 4B, 4BA, 4B240ET, 4BW, 4E, or 39 cylinders. Shipments of flammable gases in DOT 3AL cylinders are authorized only when transported by motor vehicle, rail car, or cargo-only aircraft.

(ii) Additional containers may be used within the limits of quantity and pressure as follows:

Type of container Maximum capacity (cubic inches) Maximum filling pressure (psig)

DOT-2P or DOT-2Q (see Note 1) ................................... 31.83 45 psig at 70 ° F and 105 psig at 130 ° F (see Note 2). DOT-2P or DOT-2Q (see Note 1) ................................... 31.83 35 psig at 70 ° F and 100 psig at 130 ° F.

N OTE 1: Containers must be packed in strong wooden or fiber boxes of such design as to protect valves from damage or accidental functioning under conditions normally incident to transportation. Each completed container filled for shipment must have been heated until its contents reach a temperature of 54 ° C (130 ° F), without evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect.Each outside shipping container must be plainly marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS’.

N OTE 2: A container must be equipped with a pressure relief device that will prevent rupture of the container and dangerous projection of a closing device when exposed to fire.

(4) Verification of content. A cylinder with a water capacity of 90.72 kg (200 lb) or more and for use with a liquefied petroleum gas with a specific gravity of 0.504 or greater at 16 ° C (60 ° F) mayhave the quantity of its contents determined by using a fixed length dip tube gauging device. The length of the diptube must be such that when a liquefied petroleum gas, with a specific volume of 0.03051 cu. ft./lb. at a temperature of 40 ° F, is filled into the container, the liquid just reaches the bottom of the tube. The weight of this liquid may not exceed 42 percent of the water capacity of the container, which must be stamped on the cylinder. The length of the dip tube, expressed in inches carried out to one decimal place and prefixed with the letters ‘‘DT’’, must be stamped on the container and on the exterior of removable type diptube. For the purpose of this requirement, the marked length must be expressed as the distance measured along the axis of a straight tube from the top of the boss through which the tube is


### 600 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.304b

inserted to the proper level of the liquid in the container. The length ofeach dip tube must be checked when installed by weighing each container after filling except when installed ingroups of substantially identical containers, in which case one of each 25containers must be weighed. The quantity of liquefied gas in each container must be checked by means of the diptube after disconnecting from the filling line. The outlet from the dip tubemay not be larger than 0.1016 centimeters (0.040 inch; No. 54 drill bit size orifice). A container representative of each day’s filling at each filling plant must have its contents checked by weighing after disconnecting from the filling line.

(e) Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid. (1)The following provisions apply to carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid, and nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid: (i) DOT 4L cylinders conforming tothe provisions of this paragraph are authorized.

(ii) Each cylinder must be protected with at least one pressure relief deviceand at least one frangible disc conforming to §173.301(f) and paragraph(a)(2) of this section. The relieving capacity of the pressure relief device system must be equal to or greater thanthat calculated by the applicable formula in paragraph 5.8.3 of CGA S–1.1 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(iii) The temperature and pressure ofthe gas at the time the shipment is offered for transportation may not exceed

¥ 18 ° C (0 ° F) and 290 psig for carbon dioxide and

¥ 15.6 ° C (+4 ° F) and 290 psig for nitrous oxide. Maximum time in transit may not exceed 120 hours.

(2) The following pressure relief device settings, design service temperatures and filling densities apply:

Pressure relief device setting maximum start—to discharge gauge pressure in psig Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight)

Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid

105 psig ............................................................................................... 108 104 170 psig ............................................................................................... 105 101 230 psig ............................................................................................... 104 99 295 psig ............................................................................................... 102 97 360 psig ............................................................................................... 100 95 450 psig ............................................................................................... 98 83 540 psig ............................................................................................... 92 87 625 psig ............................................................................................... 86 80 Design service temperature ° C( ° F) .....................................................

¥ 196 ° C(

¥ 320 ° F)

¥ 196 ° C(

¥ 320 ° F)

[67 FR 51647, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 24661, May 8, 2003; 68 FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005; 72 FR 4456, Jan. 31, 2007; 72 FR 55098, Sept. 28, 2007; 73 FR 4719, Jan. 28, 2008]

E DITORIAL N OTE : At 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005, §173.304a was amended in the table in paragraph (a)(2) by removing the phrase ‘‘DOT–4A480’’ from the entry ‘‘Hydrogen sulfide’’; however, the amendment could not be incorporated because that phrase does not exist in the entry.

§ 173.304b Additional requirements for shipment of liquefied compressed gases in UN pressure receptacles.

(a) General . Liquefied gases and gasmixtures must be offered for transportation in UN pressure receptacles subject to the requirements in this section and §173.304. In addition, the general requirements applicable to UN pressure receptacles in §§173.301 and 173.301b
must be met.

(b) UN pressure receptacle filling limits. A UN pressure receptacle is authorized for the transportation of liquefied compressed gases and gas mixtures as specified in this section. When a liquefiedcompressed gas or gas mixture is transported in a UN pressure receptacle, thefilling ratio may not exceed the maximum filling ratio prescribed in thissection and the applicable ISO standard. Compliance with the filling limits may be determined by referencing the
numerical values and data in Table 2 of P200 of the UN Recommendations (IBR,


### 601 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.306

see §171.7 of this subchapter). Alternatively, the maximum allowable filling limits may be determined as follows:

(1) For high pressure liquefied gases, in no case may the filling ratio of the settled pressure at 65 ° C (149 ° F) exceedthe test pressure of the UN pressure receptacle.

(2) For low pressure liquefied gases, the filling factor (maximum mass of contents per liter of water capacity) must be less than or equal to 95 percent of the liquid phase at 50 ° C. In addition, the UN pressure receptacle may not be liquid full at 60 ° C. The test pressure of the pressure receptacle must be equal to or greater than the vapor pressure of the liquid at 65 ° C.

(3) For high pressure liquefied gases or gas mixtures, the maximum fillingratio may be determined using the formulas in (3)(b) of P200 of the UN Recommendations.

(4) For low pressure liquefied gases or gas mixtures, the maximum fillingratio may be determined using the formulas in (3)(c) of P200 of the UN Recommendations.

(c) Tetraflouroethylene, stabilized, UN1081 must be packaged in a pressurereceptacle with a minimum test pressure of 200 bar and a working pressure not exceeding 5 bar.

(d) Fertilizer ammoniating solutionwith free ammonia, UN1043 is not authorized in UN tubes or MEGCs.

[74 FR 2265, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.305 Charging of cylinders with a mixture of compressed gas and other material.

(a) Detailed requirements. A mixture ofa compressed gas and any other material must be shipped as a compressed gas if the mixture is a compressed gas as designated in §173.115 and when not in violation of §173.301(a).

(b) Filling limits. (See §173.301.) Formixtures, the liquid portion of the liquefied compressed gas at 131 ° F. plus any additional liquid or solid must not completely fill the container.

(c) Nonpoisonous and nonflammable

mixtures. Mixtures containing compressed gas or gases including insecticides, which mixtures are nonpoisonous and nonflammable under this part must be shipped in cylinders as prescribed in §173.304(a) or as follows:

(1) Specification 2P (§178.33 of this subchapter). Inside metal containers equipped with safety relief devices of atype examined by the Bureau of Explosives and approved by the Associate Administrator, and packed in strong wooden or fiber boxes of such design asto protect valves from damage or accidental functioning under conditions incident to transportation. Pressure in the container may not exceed 85 psia at
70 ° F. Each completed metal container filled for shipment must be heated
until content reaches a minimum temperature of 130 ° F., without evidence of leakage, distortion or other defect. Each outside shipping container mustbe plainly marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS.’’

(2) [Reserved] (d) Poisonous mixtures. A mixture containing any poisonous material (Division 6.1 or 2.3) in such proportions thatthe mixture would be classed as poisonous under §173.115 or §173.132 must be shipped in packagings as authorized for these poisonous materials.

[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. 173–70, 38 FR 5309, Feb. 27, 1973, Amdt. 173–94, 41 FR 16079, Apr. 15, 1976; 45 FR 32697, May 19, 1980; Amdt. 173–224, 56 FR 66275, 66279, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61013, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51651, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 24662, May 8, 2003]

§ 173.306 Limited quantities of compressed gases.
(a) Limited quantities of compressedgases for which exceptions are permitted as noted by reference to this section in §172.101 of this subchapter are excepted from labeling, except when offered for transportation or transported by air, and, unless requiredas a condition of the exception, specification packaging requirements ofthis subchapter when packaged in accordance with the following paragraphs. For transportation by aircraft, the package must also comply with the applicable requirements of §173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardousmaterials authorized aboard passengercarrying aircraft may be transportedas a limited quantity. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F


### 602 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.306

(Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except §174.24, and to part 177 of thissubchapter except §177.817. Each package may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight.

(1) When in containers of not more than 4 fluid ounces capacity (7.22 cubicinches or less) except cigarette lighters. Special exceptions for shipment of certain compressed gases in the ORM-D class are provided in paragraph (i) of
this section.

(2) When in metal containers filled
with a material that is not classed as a
hazardous material to not more than 90 percent of capacity at 70 ° F. and thencharged with nonflammable, nonliquefied gas. Each container must be tested to three times the pressure at 70 ° F. and, when refilled, be retested to three times the pressure of the gas at 70 ° F. Also, one of the following conditions
must be met:

(i) Container is not over 0.95 L (1 quart) capacity and charged to not more than 11.17 bar (482.63 kPa, 170 psig) at 21 ° C (70 ° F), and must be packed in a strong outer packaging, or

(ii) Container is not over 30 gallons capacity and charged to not more than 75 psig at 70 ° F.

(3) When in a metal container for thesole purpose of expelling a nonpoisonous (other than a Division 6.1 Packing Group III material) liquid, paste or powder, provided all of the following conditions are met. Special exceptions for shipment of aerosols in the ORM-D class are provided in paragraph (i) of
this section.

(i) Capacity must not exceed 1 L(61.0 cubic inches).

(ii) Pressure in the container must not exceed 180 psig at 130 ° F. If the pressure exceeds 140 psig at 130 ° F., but does not exceed 160 psig at 130 ° F., a specification DOT 2P (§178.33 of this subchapter) inside metal container must be used; if the pressure exceeds 160 psig at 130 ° F., a specification DOT 2Q (§178.33a of this subchapter) inside metal container must be used. In anyevent, the metal container must be capable of withstanding without bursting a pressure of one and one-half times the equilibrium pressure of the content
at 130 ° F. (iii) Liquid content of the material and gas must not completely fill the
container at 130 ° F.

(iv) The container must be packed in strong outside packagings.

(v) Each container must be subjected to a test performed in a hot water bath; the temperature of the bath and
the duration of the test must be such that the internal pressure reaches that
which would be reached at 55 ° C (131 ° F) (50 ° C (122 ° F) if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the
container at 50 ° C (122 ° F)). If the contents are sensitive to heat, the temperature of the bath must be set at between 20 ° C (68 ° F) and 30 ° C (86 ° F) but, in addition, one container in 2,000 must be tested at the higher temperature. No leakage or permanent deformation of a container may occur.

(vi) Each outside packaging must be
marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS.’’

(4) Gas samples must be transported under the following conditions:

(i) A gas sample may only be transported as non-pressurized gas when itspressure corresponding to ambient atmospheric pressure in the container is not more than 105 kPa absolute (15.22 psia).

(ii) Non-pressurized gases, toxic (or toxic and flammable) must be packed in hermetically sealed glass or metal inner packagings of not more than one L (0.3 gallons) overpacked in a strong outer packaging.

(iii) Non-pressurized gases, flammable must be packed in hermetically sealed glass or metal inner packagings of not more than 5 L (1.3 gallons) andoverpacked in a strong outer packaging.

(5) For limited quantities of Division 2.2 gases with no subsidiary risk, whenin a plastic container for the sole purpose of expelling a liquid, paste or powder, provided all of the following conditions are met. Special exceptions for shipment of aerosols in the ORM–D class are provided in paragraph (i) of
this section.

(i) Capacity must not exceed 1 L (61.0 cubic inches).

(ii) Pressure in the container must not exceed 160 psig at 130 ° F. If the pressure in the container is less than


### 603 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.306

140 psig at 130 ° F, a non-DOT specification container may be used. If the pressure in the container exceeds 140 psig

at 130 ° F but does not exceed 160 psig at

130 ° F, the container must conform to specification DOT 2S. All non-DOT specification and specification DOT 2Scontainers must be capable of withstanding, without bursting, a pressureof one and one-half times the equilibrium pressure of the contents at 130

° F.

(iii) Liquid content of the material and gas must not completely fill the

container at 130 ° F.

(iv) The container must be packed in strong outside packagings.

(v) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(5)(vi) of this section, each container must be subjected to a test performed in a hot water bath; the temperature of
the bath and the duration of the test must be such that the internal pressure
reaches that which would be reached at
55 ° C (131 ° F) or 50 ° C (122 ° F) if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the container at 50 ° C (122

° F). If the contents are sensitive to heat, or if the container is made of plastic material which softens at this test temperature, the temperature of
the bath must be set at between 20 ° C (68 ° F) and 30 ° C (86 ° F) but, in addition, one container in 2,000 must be tested at the higher temperature. No leakage or permanent deformation of a containermay occur except that a plastic container may be deformed through softening provided that it does not leak.

(vi) As an alternative to the hot water bath test in paragraph (a)(5)(v) of this section, testing may be performed
as follows:

(A) Pressure and leak testing before filling. Each empty container must be subjected to a pressure equal to or in excess of the maximum expected in the
filled containers at 55 ° C (131 ° F) (or 50

° C (122 ° F) if the liquid phase does not exceed 95 percent of the capacity of the
container at 50 ° C (122 ° F). This must beat least two-thirds of the design pressure of the container. If any container shows evidence of leakage at a rate equal to or greater than 3.3 × 10

¥ 2mbar L/s at the test pressure, distortion or other defect, it must be rejected; and (B) Testing after filling. Prior to filling, the filler must ensure that thecrimping equipment is set appropriately and the specified propellant is used before filling the container. Once filled, each container must be weighed
and leak tested. The leak detectionequipment must be sufficiently sensitive to detect at least a leak rate of
2.0 × 10

¥ 3 mbar L/s at 20 ° C (68 ° F). Any
filled container which shows evidence of leakage, deformation, or excessive weight must be rejected.

(vi) Each outside packaging must be
marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS.’’

(b) Exceptions for foodstuffs, soap, biologicals, electronic tubes, and audible fire alarm systems . Limited quantities of compressed gases (except Division 2.3gases) for which exceptions are provided as indicated by reference to this section in §172.101 of this subchapter,
when accordance with one of the following paragraphs, are excepted fromlabeling, except when offered for transportation or transported by aircraft,and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter. For transportation by aircraft, the packagemust comply with the applicable requirements of §173.27 of this subchapter; the net quantity per package may not exceed the quantity specifiedin column (9A) of the Hazardous Materials Table in §172.101 of this subchapter; and only hazardous materials authorized aboard passenger-carryingaircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F(Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter, except §174.24, and to part 177 of thissubchapter, except §177.817. Special exceptions for shipment of certain compressed gases in the ORM–D class areprovided in paragraph (i) of this section.

(1) Foodstuffs or soaps in a nonrefillable metal or plastic container not exceeding 1 L (61.0 cubic inches), with soluble or emulsified compressed gas, provided the pressure in the container does not exceed 140 psig at 130 ° F. Plastic containers must only contain Division 2.2 non-flammable soluble or emulsified compressed gas. The metal


### 604 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.306

or plastic container must be capable ofwithstanding, without bursting, a pressure of one and one-half times the equilibrium pressure of the contents at 130

° F.

(i) Containers must be packed in strong outside packagings.

(ii) Liquid content of the material and the gas must not completely fill
the container at 130 ° F.

(iii) Each outside packaging must be
marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS.’’

(2) Cream in refillable metal or plastic containers with soluble oremulsified compressed gas. Plastic containers must only contain Division 2.2
non-flammable soluble or emulsified compressed gas. Containers must be ofsuch design that they will hold pressure without permanent deformation up to 375 psig and must be equipped with a device designed so as to releasepressure without bursting of the container or dangerous projection of itsparts at higher pressures. This exception applies to shipments offered for transportation by refrigerated motor vehicles only.

(3) Nonrefillable metal or plastic containers charged with a Division 6.1Packing Group III or nonflammable solution containing biological products or a medical preparation which couldbe deteriorated by heat, and compressed gas or gases. Plastic containers must only contain 2.2 non-flammable soluble or emulsified compressed gas. The capacity of each container may not exceed 35 cubic inches (19.3 fluid ounces). The pressure in the container may not exceed 140 psig at 130 ° F, and the liquid content of the product andgas must not completely fill the containers at 130 ° F. One completed container out of each lot of 500 or less, filled for shipment, must be heated, until the pressure in the container is equivalent to equilibrium pressure of
the contents at 130 ° F. There must be no evidence of leakage, distortion, or
other defect. The container must be packed in strong outside packagings.

(4) Electronic tubes, each having a
volume of not more than 30 cubicinches and charged with gas to a pressure of not more than 35 psig and packed in strong outside packagings. (5) Audible fire alarm systems powered by a compressed gas contained in an inside metal container when shipped under the following conditions:

(i) Each inside container must havecontents which are not flammable, poisonous, or corrosive as defined under this part,

(ii) Each inside container may not have a capacity exceeding 35 cubic inches (19.3 fluid ounces),

(iii) Each inside container may not have a pressure exceeding 70 psig at 70

° F. and the liquid portion of the gasmay not completely fill the inside container at 130 ° F., and

(iv) Each nonrefillable inside container must be designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than four times its charged pressure at 130

° F. Each refillable inside container must be designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than five times its charged pressure at 130 ° F.

(c)–(d) [Reserved] (e) Refrigerating machines. (1) New (unused) refrigerating machines or components thereof are excepted fromthe specification packaging requirements of this part if they meet the following conditions. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except §174.24 and to part 177 of this subchapter except §177.817.

(i) Each pressure vessel may not contain more than 5,000 pounds of Group A1 refrigerant as classified in ANSI/
ASHRAE Standard 15 or not more than 50 pounds of refrigerant other than Group A1.

(ii) Machines or components having two or more charged vessels may not contain an aggregate of more than 2,000 pounds of Group I refrigerant or more than 100 pounds of refrigerant other than Group I.

(iii) Each pressure vessel must be equipped with a safety device meeting the requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE 15 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(iv) Each pressure vessel must be equipped with a shut-off valve at each opening except openings used for safety
devices and with no other connection. These valves must be closed prior to and during transportation.


### 605 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.306

(v) Pressure vessels must be manufactured, inspected and tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15, or when over 6 inches internal diameter,
in accordance with Section VIII of theASME Code (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(vi) All parts subject to refrigerantpressure during shipment must be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE
15.

(vii) The liquid portion of the refrigerant, if any, may not completely fill any pressure vessel at 130 ° F.

(viii) The amount of refrigerant, if liquefied, may not exceed the filling density prescribed in §173.304.

(f) Accumulators (Articles, pressurizedpneumatic or hydraulic containing nonflammable gas). The following applies toaccumulators, which are hydraulic accumulators containing nonliquefied, nonflammable gas, and nonflammable liquids or pneumatic accumulators containing nonliquefied, nonflammable gas, fabricated from materials which will not fragment upon rupture.

(1) Accumulators installed in motor vehicles, construction equipment, and assembled machinery and designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of notless than five times their charged pressure at 70 ° F., when shipped, are notsubject to the requirements of this subchapter.

(2) Accumulators charged with limited quantities of compressed gas to not more than 200 p.s.i.g. at 70 ° F. areexcepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation by air) and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when shipped under the following conditions. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except §174.24and to part 177 of this subchapter except §177.817.

(i) Each accumulator must be shipped as an inside packaging,

(ii) Each accumulator may not have a gas space exceeding 2,500 cubic inches under stored pressure, and

(iii) Each accumulator must be tested, without evidence of failure or damage, to at least three times its charged pressure of 70 ° F., but not less than 120 p.s.i. before initial shipment and before each refilling and reshipment. (3) Accumulators with a charging pressure exceeding 200 p.s.i.g. at 70 ° F. are excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation by air)and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when shipped under the following conditions:

(i) Each accumulator must be in compliance with the requirements stated in paragraph (f)(2), (i), (ii), and (iii) of this section, and

(ii) Each accumulator must be designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than five times its charged pressure at 70 ° F. when shipped.

(4) Accumulators intended to function as shock absorbers, struts, gassprings, pneumatic springs or other impact or energy-absorbing devices are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter provided each:

(i) Has a gas space capacity not exceeding 1.6 L and a charge pressure not exceeding 280 bar, where the product of the capacity expressed in liters and charge pressure expressed in bars does not exceed 80 (for example, 0.5 L gas space and 160 bar charge pressure);

(ii) Has a minimum burst pressure of 4 times the charge pressure at 20 ° C for products not exceeding 0.5 L gas spacecapacity and 5 times the charge pressure for products greater than 0.5 L gas space capacity;

(iii) Design type has been subjected to a fire test demonstrating that the article relieves its pressure by meansof a fire degradable seal or other pressure relief device, such that the article will not fragment and that the article does not rocket; and

(iv) Accumulators must be manufactured under a written quality assurance program which monitors parameters controlling burst strength, burstmode and performance in a fire situation as specified in paragraphs (f)(4)(i) through (f)(4)(iii) of this section. A copy of the quality assurance program must be maintained at each facility at
which the accumulators are manufactured.

(5) Accumulators not conforming to the provisions of paragraphs (f)(1) through (f) (4) of this section, may only be transported subject to the approval
of the Associate Administrator.


### 606 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.306

(g) Water pump system tank. Waterpump system tanks charged with compressed air or limited quantities of nitrogen to not over 40 psig for singletrip shipment to installation sites are excepted from labeling (transportationby air not authorized) and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when shipped under thefollowing conditions. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F ofthis subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except §174.24 and part 177 except §177.817.

(1) The tank must be of steel, welded with heads concave to pressure, having a rated water capacity not exceeding 120 gallons and with outside diameter not exceeding 24 inches. Safety relief devices not required.

(2) The tank must be pneumatically tested to 100 psig. Test pressure must be permanently marked on the tank.

(3) The stress at prescribed pressuremust not exceed 20,000 psi using formula:

S = Pd / 2t

where:
S = wall stress in psi: P = prescribed pressure for the tank of at

least 3 times charged pressure at 70 ° F or 100 psig, whichever is greater; d = inside diameter in inches; t = minimum wall thickness, in inches.

(4) The burst pressure must be at least 6 times the charge pressure at 70

° F.

(5) Each tank must be overpacked in a strong outer packaging in accordance with §173.301(h).

(h) Lighter refills. (1) Lighter refills (see §171.8 of this subchapter) must not contain an ignition element but must contain a release device. Lighter refills offered for transportation under this section may not exceed 4 fluid ounces capacity (7.22 cubic inches) or contain more than 65 grams of a Division 2.1 fuel. For transportation by highway or rail, lighter refills must be tightly packed and secured against movementin strong outer packagings. For transportation by aircraft or vessel, lighterrefills must be tightly packed and secured against movement in any rigidspecification outer packaging authorized in Subpart L of Part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performance level.

(2) Exceptions. For highway transportation, when no more than 1,500 lighter refills covered by this paragraph are transported in one motor vehicle, the requirements of subparts C through Hof part 172, and Part 177 of this subchapter do not apply. Lighter refills covered under this paragraph must bepackaged in rigid, strong outer packagings meeting the general packaging requirements of subpart B of this part. Outer packagings must be plainly and durably marked, on two opposing sidesor ends, with the word ‘‘LIGHTER REFILLS’’ and the number of devices contained therein in letters measuring atleast 20 mm (0.79 in) in height. No person may offer for transportation or transport the lighter refills or prepare the lighter refills for shipment unlessthat person has been specifically informed of the requirements of this section.

(i) Consumer commodities. A limitedquantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (a)(1), (a)(3), (a)(5),or (b) of this section and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed ‘‘consumer commodity’’ and reclassed as ORM–D material. Each package may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. In addition to the exceptions provided by paragraphs (a) and (b) of
this section—

(1) Outside packagings are not required to be marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS’’;

(2) Shipments of ORM–D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material
meets the definition of a hazardoussubstance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant or unless offered fortransportation or transported by aircraft; and

(3) Shipments of ORM–D materials are eligible for the exceptions provided in §173.156.

(j) Aerosols and receptacles small, containing gas with a capacity of less than 50

mL. Aerosols, as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, and receptacles small,


### 607 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.308

containing gas, with a capacity not exceeding 50 mL (1.7 oz.) and with a pressure not exceeding 970 kPa (141 psig) at
55 ° C (131 ° F), containing no hazardous materials other than a Division 2.2 gas, are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter. The pressure limit may be increased to 2,000 kPa (290 psig)
at 55 ° C (131 ° F) provided the aerosols are transported in outer packages thatconform to the packaging requirements of Subpart B of this part. Thisparagraph (j) does not apply to a selfdefense spray ( e.g. , pepper spray).

(k) Aerosols for recycling or disposal. Aerosols, as defined in §171.8 of thissubchapter, containing a limited quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (a)(3), (a)(5), (b)(1), (b)(2), or (b)(3) of this section are not subject to the 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight limitation when transported by motorvehicle for purposes of recycling or disposal under the following conditions:

(1) The strong outer packaging and its contents must not exceed a gross weight of 500 kg (1,100 pounds);

(2) Each aerosol container must be secured with a cap to protect the valve
stem or the valve stem must be removed; and

(3) The packaging must be offered for transportation or transported by—

(i) Private or contract motor carrier;

or (ii) Common carrier in a motor vehicle under exclusive use for such service.

(l) For additional exceptions, also see §173.307.

(l) For additional exceptions, also see §173.307.

[Amdt. 173–94, 41 FR 16079, Apr. 15, 1976]

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.306, see the List of CFRSections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and
on GPO Access.

§ 173.307 Exceptions for compressed
gases. (a) The following materials are notsubject to the requirements of this subchapter:

(1) Carbonated beverages. (2) Tires when inflated to pressures not greater than their rated inflation pressures. For transportation by air,
tires and tire assemblies must meet the conditions in §175.8(b)(4) of this subchapter.

(3) Balls used for sports. (4) Refrigerating machines, including dehumidifiers and air conditioners, and components thereof, such as precharged tubing containing:

(i) 12 kg (25 pounds) or less of a nonflammable, non-toxic gas;

(ii) 12 L (3 gallons) or less of ammonia solution (UN2672);

(iii) Except when offered or transported by air, 12 kg (25 pounds) or less of a flammable, non-toxic gas;

(iv) Except when offered or transported by air or vessel, 20 kg (44pounds) or less of a Group A1 refrigerant specified in ANSI/ASHRAEStandard 15 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter); or

(v) 100 g (4 ounces) or less of a flammable, non-toxic liquefied gas.

(5) Manufactured articles or apparatuses, each containing not more than 100 mg (0.0035 ounce) of inert gas and packaged so that the quantity of inert gas per package does not exceed 1 g (0.35 ounce).

(b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 173–94, 41 FR 16081, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173–135, 45 FR 13090, Feb. 28, 1980; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, 2000; 68 FR 45038, July 31, 2003; 68 FR 75745, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 76174, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 14604, Mar. 22, 2006; 74 FR 2266, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.308 Lighters.

(a) General requirements. No personmay offer for transportation or transport a lighter (see §171.8 of this subchapter) containing a Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material except under the following conditions:

(1) The lighter must contain a fuel reservoir not exceeding 4 fluid ounces capacity (7.22 cubic inches), and must contain not more than 10 grams (0.35 ounce) of flammable gas.

(2) The maximum filling density may not exceed 85 percent of the volumetric capacity of each fluid reservoir at 15 ° C (59 ° F).

(3) Each lighter design, including closures, must be capable of withstanding, without leakage or rupture, an internalpressure of at least two times the pressure of the flammable gas at 55 ° C (131

° F).


### 608 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.308

(4) Each appropriate lighter design must be examined and successfullytested by a person or agency (authorized testing agency) who is authorizedby the Associate Administrator to perform such examination and testing under the provisions of subpart E of part 107 of this chapter and who—

(i) Has the equipment necessary to perform the testing required to the level of accuracy required;

(ii) Is able to demonstrate, upon request, the knowledge of the testing procedures and requirements of the HMR relative to lighters;

(iii) Does not manufacture or market lighters, is not financially dependent or owned in whole or in part, by any entity that manufactures or markets lighters;

(iv) Is a resident of the United States; and

(v) Performs all examination andtesting in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(3) and (4) of this

section.

(5) The Associate Administrator will assign an identification code to each person who is authorized to examine and test lighters. This identification code must be incorporated into a unique test report identifier for each successfully tested lighter design.

(b) Examination and testing of lighter design types —(1) Lighter design type definition. A new lighter design is one that
has never been examined and tested or one that differs from a previous designin any manner that may affect the escape (leakage) of gas. Lighter characteristics that may affect the escape of gas include changes in materials of construction, ignition mechanism, burner valve design, wall thickness, sealing materials, and type of fuel (e.g., vapor pressure differences).

(2) Lighter samples submitted for examination and testing. Samples of a newlighter design are excepted from the requirements of (a)(4) and (d) of this section and may be offered for transportation and transported under the following conditions:

(i) The samples must be transported only to an authorized testing agency;

(ii) No more than 12 lighters may be packaged in a single outer packaging;

(iii) Inner packagings must conform to the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section. For transportation byaircraft, intermediate or outer packagings must meet the pressure differential requirements of §173.27(c) of this part;

(iv) The outer packaging must conform to the requirements of Subpart M of Part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level and to the requirements of §173.24 of this subpart;

(v) The word ‘‘sample’’ must appear on the shipping paper as part of the proper shipping name or in association with the basic description; and

(vi) In addition to other required markings and labels, the package must
be marked ‘‘SAMPLE FOR EXAMINATION AND TESTING.’’

(vii) All other applicable requirements of this subchapter must be met.

(3) Examination and testing of sample lighters by an authorized testing agency. Each sample lighter must be examined for conformance with paragraph (a) of this section by a person authorized by
the Associate Administrator. In addition, lighters must be subjected to the following leakage test:

(i) A minimum of six lighters must be
examined and tested at one time. Store the lighters in a desiccator for 24 hours. After drying, weigh each lighteron an analytical balance capable of accurately measuring to within 1 ⁄ 10 of a milligram (0.0001 grams).

(ii) After weighing, place the lighterstogether in an explosion-proof, controlled-temperature laboratory oven capable of maintaining 38 ± 1 ° C (100 ±
2 ° F) for 96 continuous hours (4 days). At the end of 96 hours, remove the lighters from the oven and place them
in the same desiccator and allow thelighters to cool to ambient temperature.

(iii) After cooling, weigh each lighterand determine the net weight differences for each lighter tested (subtract the mass after oven exposurefrom the original mass before oven exposure).

(iv) Weight losses must be assessed to determine the quantity of gas that leaked from the lighters and from the weight change as a result of absorbedmoisture. If the net weight has increased, the test facility must run the required test using six empty lighters


### 609 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.308

in parallel with the six filled lighters.The parallel tests are conducted to determine the weight of moisture absorbed in the plastic in order to determine the weight loss of the lighters from gas leakage.

(v) If the net weight loss for any oneof the six lighters exceeds 20 milligrams (0.020 grams), the design must be rejected.

(vi) Lighters manufactured to a rejected lighter design may not be offered for transportation or transportedin commerce unless approved in writing by the Associate Administrator.

(4) Recordkeeping requirements. (i) Following the examination of each new lighter design, the person or agency
that conducted the examination and test must prepare a test report and make that test report available to the manufacturer. At a minimum, the testreport must contain the following information:

(A) Name and address of test facility; (B) Name and address of applicant; (C) A test report identifier, that is,the authorized person or agency identifier code immediately followed by an alpha/numeric identifier of four ormore characters assigned to the specific lighter design by the authorized person or agency (e.g., ‘‘LAA****,’’ where, ‘‘LAA’’ is the identification code assigned to the authorized personor agency by the Associate Administrator and ‘‘ ’’ is replaced with the unique test report identifier assignedto the specific lighter design by the authorized person or agency);

(D) Manufacturer of the lighter. For a foreign manufacturer, the U.S. agent or importer must be identified;

(E) Description of the lighter design type (e.g., model, dimensions, ignition mechanism, reservoir capacity, lot/ batch number) in sufficient detail to ensure conformance with paragraph (b)(4)(iii) of this section; and

(F) A certification by the authorized testing agency that the lighter designconforms to paragraph (a) of this section and passes or does not pass the required leakage test in paragraph (b) of
this section.

(ii) For as long as any lighter design is in production and for at least threeyears thereafter, a copy of each lighter’s test report must be maintained by the authorized testing agency that performed the examination and testing and the manufacturer of the design. For a foreign manufacturer, each testreport must be maintained in accordance with this paragraph by the foreign manufacturer’s U.S. agent or importer.

(iii) Test reports must be traceable to a specific lighter design and must be made available to a representative of the Department upon request.

(5) Transitional provisions . Until January 1, 2012, approval numbers issued by the Associate Administrator prior to January 1, 2007 may continue to be marked on packages and annotated on shipping papers, where applicable.After that time, previously issued approvals ( i.e., T-** *) will no longer be valid and each lighter design currently in production must be re-examined andtested under the provisions of this section.

(c) Packaging requirements —(1) Inner

containment. Lighters must be placed in an inner packaging that is designed to prevent movement of the lighters and inadvertent ignition or leakage. The ignition device and gas control lever ofeach lighter must be designed, or securely sealed, taped, or otherwise fastened or packaged to protect against accidental functioning or leakage ofthe contents during transport. If lighters are packed vertically in a plastictray, a plastic, fiberboard or paperboard partition must be used to prevent friction between the ignition device and the inner packaging.

(2) Outer packaging. Lighters and their inner packagings must be tightly packed and secured against movementin any rigid specification outer packaging authorized in Subpart L of Part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performance level.

(d) Shipping paper and marking requirements. (1) In addition to the requirements of subpart C of part 172, shipping papers must be annotated with the lighter design test report identifier (see paragraph (b)(4)(i)(C) ofthis section) traceable to the test report assigned to the lighters or, if applicable, the previously issued approval number ( i.e., T***), in association with the basic description.

(2) In addition to the requirements of subpart D of part 172, a lighter design


### 610 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.309

test report identifier (see paragraph(b)(4)(i)(C) of this section) or, if applicable, the previously issued approval number ( i.e., T***), must be marked on a package containing lighters.

(3) For transportation by vessel in a closed transport vehicle or a closedfreight container, the following warning must be affixed to the access doors:

WARNING—MAY CONTAIN EXPLOSIVE MIXTURES WITH AIR—KEEP
IGNITION SOURCES AWAY WHEN
OPENING

The warning must be on a contrasting background and must be in letters measuring at least 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) in height.

(e) Exceptions —(1) Common or contract carriage. For highway transportation by common or contract carrier, when no more than 1,500 lighters covered by this section are transported in onemotor vehicle, the requirements of subparts C through H of part 172, and Part 177 of this subchapter do not apply. Lighters transported in accordance with this paragraph are also exceptedfrom the specification packaging, shipping paper, and marking requirements specified in §§173.308(c) and (d). Inner packagings must conform to paragraph (c)(1) of this section. Lighters must be further packaged in rigid, strong outerpackagings meeting the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173. Outer packagings must be plainly and durably marked, on two opposingsides or ends, with the word ‘‘LIGHTERS’’ and the number of devices contained therein in letters measuring atleast 20 mm (0.79 in) in height. In addition, the package must include the test report identifier for each lighter design as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(i)(C) ofthis section or, if applicable, the previously issued approval number ( i.e.,T***). The test report identifier or approval number must be durable, legible, in English, and located in, attached to, or marked directly on thepackage. No person may offer for transportation or transport the lighters orprepare the lighters for shipment unless that person has been specifically informed of the requirements of this

section.

(2) Private carriage. For highway transportation by a private carrier, lighters that have been examined and successfully tested in accordance with this section are not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter under the following conditions:

(i) No person may offer for transportation or transport the lighters or prepare the lighters for shipment unlessthat person has been specifically informed of the requirements of this section;

(ii) Lighters must be placed in an inner packaging that is designed toprevent accidental activation of the ignition device or valve, release of gas, and movement of the lighters ( e.g., tray, blister pack, etc.);

(iii) Inner packagings must be placedin a securely closed rigid outer packaging that limits movement of the inner packagings and protects them from damage;

(iv) The outer package may contain not more than 300 lighters;

(v) A transport vehicle may carry not more than 1,500 lighters at any one
time;

(vi) The lighters may not be placed inan outer packaging with other hazardous materials; and

(vii) Outer packagings must be plainly and durably marked with the words ‘‘LIGHTERS, excepted quantity.’’

[71 FR 3427, Jan. 23, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 57006, Oct. 1, 2008]

§ 173.309 Fire extinguishers.

(a) Fire extinguishers charged with a limited quantity of compressed gas to not more than 1660 kPa (241 psig) at 21

° C (70 ° F) are excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation by air) and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when shipped under the following conditions. In addition, shipments are not subjectto subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapterexcept §174.24 or to part 177 of this subchapter except §177.817.

(1) Each fire extinguisher must havecontents which are nonflammable, nonpoisonous, and noncorrosive as defined under this subchapter.

(2) Each fire extinguisher must be shipped as an inner packaging.

(3) Nonspecification cylinders are authorized subject to the following conditions:


### 611 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.310

(i) The internal volume of each cylinder may not exceed 18 L (1,100 cubicinches). For fire extinguishers not exceeding 900 mL (55 cubic inches) capacity, the liquid portion of the gas plus any additional liquid or solid must not completely fill the container at 55 ° C (130 ° F). Fire extinguishers exceeding 900 mL (55 cubic inches) capacity may not contain any liquefied compressed

gas;

(ii) Each fire extinguisher manufactured on and after January 1, 1976, must be designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than six times its charged pressure at 21 ° C (70

° F) when shipped;

(iii) Each fire extinguisher must be tested, without evidence of failure or damage, to at least three times its charged pressure at 21 ° C (70 ° F) but notless than 825 kPa (120 psig) before initial shipment, and must be marked to indicate the year of the test (within 90 days of the actual date of the original test) and with the words ‘‘MEETS DOT REQUIREMENTS.’’ This marking is
considered a certification that the fireextinguisher is manufactured in accordance with the requirements of this section. The words ‘‘This extinguisher meets all requirements of 49 CFR173.306’’ may be displayed on fire extinguishers manufactured prior to January 1, 1976; and

(iv) For any subsequent shipment,each fire extinguisher must be in compliance with the retest requirements of the Occupational Safety and HealthAdministration Regulations of the Department of Labor, 29 CFR 1910.157.

(4) Specification 2P or 2Q (§§178.33 and 178.33a of this subchapter) innernonrefillable metal packagings are authorized for use as fire extinguishers subject to the following conditions:

(i) The liquid portion of the gas plus any additional liquid or solid may not completely fill the packaging at 55 ° C (130 ° F);

(ii) Pressure in the packaging shall not exceed 1250 kPa (181 psig) at 55 ° C (130 ° F). If the pressure exceeds 920 kPa (141 psig) at 55 ° C (130 ° F), but does not exceed 1100 kPa (160 psig) at 55 ° C (130

° F), a specification DOT 2P inner metal packaging must be used; if the pressure exceeds 1100 kPa (160 psig) at 55 ° C (130

° F), a specification DOT 2Q inner metal packaging must be used. The metalpackaging must be capable of withstanding, without bursting, a pressureof one and one-half times the equilibrium pressure of the contents at 55

° C (130 ° F); and

(iii) Each completed inner packaging filled for shipment must have beenheated until the pressure in the container is equivalent to the equilibrium pressure of the contents at 55 ° C (130

° F) without evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect.

(b) Specification 3A, 3AA, 3E, 3AL, 4B, 4BA, 4B240ET or 4BW (§§178.36, 178.37, 178.42, 178.46, 178.50, 178.51, 178.55 and 178.61 of this subchapter) cylinders
are authorized for use as fire extinguishers.

[Amdt. 173–235, 58 FR 50503, Sept. 27, 1993, as amended by Amdt. 173–138, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173–258, 61 FR 51240, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45380, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 71 FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006]

§ 173.310 Exceptions for radiation detectors.

Radiation detectors, radiation sensors, electron tube devices, or ionization chambers, herein referred to as ‘‘radiation detectors,’’ that contain only Division 2.2 gases, are excepted from the specification packaging in this subchapter and, except when transported by air, from labeling andplacarding requirements of this subchapter when designed, packaged, and transported as follows:

(a) Radiation detectors must be single-trip, hermetically sealed, welded
metal inside containers that will not fragment upon impact.

(b) Radiation detectors must not have a design pressure exceeding 4.83MPa (700 psig) and a capacity exceeding 355 fluid ounces (641 cubic inches). They must be designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than three times the design pressure if the radiation detector is equipped with a pressure relief device, and not less than four times the design pressure if thedetector is not equipped with a pressure relief device.

(c) Radiation detectors must beshipped in a strong outer packaging capable of withstanding a drop test of atleast 1.2 meters (4 feet) without breakage of the radiation detector or rupture


### 612 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.312

of the outer packaging. If the radiation detector is shipped as part of other equipment, the equipment must be packaged in strong outer packaging or the equipment itself must provide an equivalent level of protection.

(d) Emergency response information accompanying each shipment andavailable from each emergency response telephone number for radiationdetectors must identify those receptacles that are not fitted with a pressure relief device and provide appropriate guidance for exposure to fire.

[75 FR 27215, May 14, 2010]

§ 173.312 Requirements for shipment of MEGCs.
(a) General requirements. (1) Unlessotherwise specified, a MEGC is authorized for the shipment of liquefied and non-liquefied compressed gases. Each pressure receptacle contained in a MEGC must meet the requirements in §§173.301, 173.301b, 173.302b and 173.304b, as applicable.

(2) The MEGC must conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements prescribed in §178.75 of this subchapter.

(3) No person may offer or accept a hazardous material for transportation in a MEGC that is damaged to such anextent that the integrity of the pressure receptacles or the MEGC’s structural or service equipment may be affected.

(4) No person may fill or offer for transportation a pressure receptacle in a MEGC if the pressure receptacle orthe MEGC is due for periodic requalification, as prescribed in subpart C to part 180 of this subchapter. However, this restriction does not preclude transportation of pressure receptacles filled and offered for transportation prior to the requalification due date.

(5) Prior to filling and offering a MEGC for transportation, the MEGC’s structural and service equipment mustbe visually inspected. Any unsafe condition must be corrected before the MEGC is offered for transportation. All required markings must be legible.

(6) Except for Division 2.2 permanent gases, each pressure receptacle must be equipped with an individual shutoff valve that must be tightly closed while in transit. For Division 2.1, Division 2.2 liquefied gases and 2.3 gases, the manifold must be designed so that eachpressure receptacle can be filled separately and be kept isolated by a valve capable of being closed during transit.For Division 2.1 gases, the pressure receptacles must be isolated by a valve into assemblies of not more than 3,000

L. (b) Filling. (1) A MEGC may not be filled to a pressure greater than the lowest marked working pressure of any pressure receptacle. A MEGC may not
be filled above its marked maximum permissible gross mass.

(2) After each filling, the shipper must verify the leakproofness of theclosures and equipment. Each fill opening must be closed by a cap or plug.

(c) Damage protection. During transportation, a MEGC must be protectedagainst damage to the pressure receptacles and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning as prescribed in §178.75 of this subchapter.

[71 FR 33884, June 12, 2006]

§ 173.313 UN Portable Tank Table for Liquefied Compressed Gases.
The UN Portable Tank Table for Liquefied Compressed Gases is referenced in §172.102(c)(7)(iii) of this subchapter for portable tanks that are used to transport liquefied compressed gases. The table applies to each liquefied compressed gas that is identified with Special Provision T50 in Column (7) ofthe §172.101 Table. In addition to providing the UN identification number and proper shipping name, the table provides maximum allowable workingpressures, bottom opening requirements, pressure relief device requirements, and degree of filling requirements for liquefied compressed gas permitted for transportation in a T50 portable tank. In the minimum test pressure column, ‘‘small’’ means a portable
tank with a diameter of 1.5 meters or less when measured at the widest partof the shell, ‘‘sunshield’’ means a portable tank with a shield covering at least the upper third of the shell,
‘‘bare’’ means no sunshield or insulation is provided, and ‘‘insulated’’ means a complete cladding of sufficient


### 613 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.313

thickness of insulating material necessary to provide a minimum conductance of not more than 0.67 w/m 2 /k. Inthe pressure relief requirements column, the word ‘‘Normal’’ denotes that a frangible disc as specified in §178.276(e)(3) of this subchapter is not required.

UN P ORTABLE T ANK T ABLE FOR L IQUEFIED C OMPRESSED G ASES

UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied compressed
gases Minimum design pressure (bar) small; bare;sunshield; insulated Openings below liquid

level Pressure relief requirements ( See

§ 178.276(e)) Maximum filling density (kg/l)

1005 ...... Ammonia, anhydrous ............................. 29.0 Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 0.53

25.7
22.0
19.7 1009 ...... Bromotrifluoromethane or Refrigerant gas R 13B1. 38.0 Allowed Normal 1.13

34.0
30.0
27.5 1010 ...... Butadienes, stabilized ............................ 7.5 Allowed Normal 0.55
7.0
7.0
7.0
1011 ...... Butane .................................................... 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.51
7.0
7.0
7.0 1012 ...... Butylene ................................................. 8.0 Allowed Normal 0.53
7.0
7.0
7.0 1017 ...... Chlorine .................................................. 19.0 Not § 178.276(e)(3) 1.25
17.0 Allowed
15.0
13.5 1018 ...... Chlorodifluoromethane or Refrigerant gas R 22. 26.0 Allowed Normal 1.03

24.0
21.0
19.0 1020 ...... Chloropentafluoroethane or Refrigerant gas R 115. 23.0 Allowed Normal 1.06

20.0
18.0
16.0 1021 ...... 1-Chloro-1,2,2,2-tetrafluoroethane or Refrigerant gas R 124. 10.3 Allowed Normal 1.2

9.8
7.9
7.0 1027 ...... Cyclopropane ......................................... 18.0 Allowed Normal 0.53

16.0
14.5
13.0 1028 ...... Dichlorodifluoromethane or Refrigerant gas R 12. 16.0 Allowed Normal 1.15

15.0
13.0
11.5 1029 ...... Dichlorofluoromethane or Refrigerant gas R 21. 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.23

7.0
7.0
7.0 1030 ...... 1,1-Difluoroethane or Refrigerant gas R

152a. 16.0 Allowed Normal 0.79

14.0

12.4
11.0 1032 ...... Dimethylamine, anhydrous .................... 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.59

7.0
7.0
7.0


### 614 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.313

UN P ORTABLE T ANK T ABLE FOR L IQUEFIED C OMPRESSED G ASES —Continued

UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied compressed
gases Minimum design pressure (bar) small; bare;sunshield; insulated Openings below liquid

level Pressure relief requirements ( See

§ 178.276(e)) Maximum filling density (kg/l)

1033 ...... Dimethyl ether ........................................ 15.5 Allowed Normal 0.58
13.8
12.0
10.6 1036 ...... Ethylamine ............................................. 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.61
7.0
7.0
7.0 1037 ...... Ethyl chloride ......................................... 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.8
7.0
7.0
7.0 1040 ...... Ethylene oxide with nitrogen up to a total pressure of 1MPa (10 bar) at 50

° C. Only authorized
in 10 bar insulated portable tanks— Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 0.78

1041 ...... Ethylene oxide and carbon dioxide mixture with more than 9% but not more than 87% ethylene oxide. See MAWP definition in § 178.276(a) Allowed Normal See § 173.32(f)

1055 ...... Isobutylene ............................................. 8.1 Allowed Normal 0.52
7.0
7.0
7.01060 ...... Methyl acetylene and propadiene mixture, stabilized. 28.0 Allowed Normal 0.43

24.5
22.0
20.0 1061 ...... Methylamine, anhydrous ........................ 10.8 Allowed Normal 0.58
9.6
7.8
7.0 1062 ...... Methyl bromide ...................................... 7.0 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.51

7.0
7.0
7.0 1063 ...... Methyl chloride or Refrigerant gas R 40 14.5 Allowed Normal 0.81

12.7
11.3
10.0 1064 ...... Methyl mercaptan .................................. 7.0 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 0.78

7.0
7.0
7.0 1067 ...... Dinitrogen tetroxide ................................ 7.0 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.3

7.0
7.0
7.01075 ...... Petroleum gas, liquefied ........................ See MAWP definition in § 178.276(a) Allowed Normal See § 173.32(f)

1077 ...... Propylene ............................................... 28.0 Allowed Normal 0.43
24.5
22.0
20.01078 ...... Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. ........................... See MAWP definition in § 178.276(a) Allowed Normal See § 173.32(f)

1079 ...... Sulphur dioxide ...................................... 11.6 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.23

10.3
8.5
7.6 1082 ...... Trifluorochloroethylene, stabilized or Refrigerant gas R 1113. 17.0 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.13

15.0
13.1
11.6 1083 ...... Trimethylamine, anhydrous ................... 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.56

7.0


### 615 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.313

UN P ORTABLE T ANK T ABLE FOR L IQUEFIED C OMPRESSED G ASES —Continued

UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied compressed
gases Minimum design pressure (bar) small; bare;sunshield; insulated Openings below liquid

level Pressure relief requirements ( See

§ 178.276(e)) Maximum filling density (kg/l)

7.0
7.0 1085 ...... Vinyl bromide, stabilized ........................ 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.37
7.0
7.0
7.0 1086 ...... Vinyl chloride, stabilized ........................ 10.6 Allowed Normal 0.81
9.3
8.0
7.0 1087 ...... Vinyl methyl ether, stabilized ................. 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.67
7.0
7.0
7.01581 ...... Chloropicrin and methyl bromide mixture. 7.0 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.51

7.0
7.0
7.01582 ...... Chloropicrin and methyl chloride mixture. 19.2 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 0.81

16.9
15.1
13.1 1858 ...... Hexafluoropropylene compressed or Refrigerant gas R 1216. 19.2 Allowed Normal 1.11

16.9
15.1
13.1 1912 ...... Methyl chloride and methylene chloride
mixture. 15.2 Allowed Normal 0.081

13.0
11.6
10.1 NA, 1954 Insecticide gases, flammable , n.o.s. ..... See MAWP definition in § 178.276(a) Allowed Normal § 173.32(f)

1958 ...... 1,2-Dichloro-1,1,2,2-tetrafluoroethane or Refrigerant gas R 114. 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.3

7.0
7.0
7.0 1965 ...... Hydrocarbon gas, mixture liquefied,

n.o.s.. See MAWP definition in 178.276(a) Allowed Normal See § 173.32(f)

1969 ...... Isobutane ............................................... 8.5 Allowed Normal 0.49

7.5
7.0
7.0
1973 ...... Chlorodifluoromethane and chloropentafluoroethane mixture with fixed boiling point, with approximately49% chlorodifluoromethane or Refrigerant gas R 502. 28.3 Allowed Normal 1.05

25.3
22.8
20.3
1974 ...... Chlorodifluorobromomethane or Refrigerant gas R 12B1. 7.4 Allowed Normal 1.61

7.0
7.0
7.0 1976 ...... Octafluorocyclobutane or Refrigerant gas RC 318. 8.8 Allowed Normal 1.34

7.8
7.0
7.0 1978 ...... Propane ................................................. 22.5 Allowed Normal 0.42
20.4


### 616 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.313

UN P ORTABLE T ANK T ABLE FOR L IQUEFIED C OMPRESSED G ASES —Continued

UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied compressed
gases Minimum design pressure (bar) small; bare;sunshield; insulated Openings below liquid

level Pressure relief requirements ( See

§ 178.276(e)) Maximum filling density (kg/l)

18.0
16.51983 ...... 1-Chloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane or Refrigerant gas R 133a. 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.18

7.0
7.0
7.0 2035 ...... 1,1,1-Trifluoroethane compressed or Refrigerant gas R 143a. 31.0 Allowed Normal 0.76

27.5

24.2
21.8 2424 ...... Octafluoropropane or Refrigerant gas R

218. 23.1 Allowed Normal 1.07

20.8
18.6
16.62517 ...... 1-Chloro-1,1-difluoroethane or Refrigerant gas R 142b. 8.9 Allowed Normal 0.99

7.8
7.0
7.0
2602 ...... Dichlorodifluoromethane and difluoroethane azeotropic mixture withapproximately 74% dichlorodifluoromethane or Refrigerant gas R 500. 20.0 Allowed Normal 1.01

18.0
16.0
14.5 3057 ...... Trifluoroacetyl chloride 14.6 Not allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.17

12.9
11.3
9.93070 ...... Ethylene oxide and dichlorodifluoromethane mixture with not more than 12.5% ethylene oxide. 14.0 Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.09

12.0
11.0
9.0 3153 ...... Perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether) ................ 14.3 Allowed Normal 1.14

13.4

11.2
10.2 3159 ...... 1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane or Refrigerant gas R 134a. 17.7 Allowed Normal 1.04

15.7
13.8

12.13161 ...... Liquefied gas, flammable, n.o.s. ............ See MAWP definition in § 178.276(a) Allowed Normal § 173.32(f)

3163 ...... Liquefied gas, n.o.s. .............................. See MAWP definition in § 178.276(a) Allowed Normal § 173.32(f)

3220 ...... Pentafluoroethane or Refrigerant gas R

125. 34.4 Allowed Normal 0.95

30.8
27.5
24.5 3252 ...... Difluoromethane or Refrigerant gas R

32. 43.0 Allowed Normal 0.78

39.0
34.4
30.5 3296 ...... Heptafluoropropane or Refrigerant gas

R 227. 16.0 Allowed Normal 1.2

14.0
12.5
11.0


### 617 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.314

UN P ORTABLE T ANK T ABLE FOR L IQUEFIED C OMPRESSED G ASES —Continued

UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied compressed
gases Minimum design pressure (bar) small; bare; sunshield; insu- lated Openings below liquid

level Pressure relief requirements ( See

§ 178.276(e)) Maximum filling density (kg/l)

3297 ...... Ethylene oxide and chlorotetrafluoroethane mixture, with not more than 8.8% ethylene oxide. 8.1 Allowed Normal 1.16

7.0
7.0
7.0 3298 ...... Ethylene oxide and pentafluoroethane mixture, with not more than 7.9% ethylene oxide. 25.9 Allowed Normal 1.02

23.4
20.9
18.6 3299 ...... Ethylene oxide and tetrafluoroethane mixture, with not more than 5.6% ethylene oxide. 16.7 Allowed Normal 1.03

14.7
12.9

11.2 3318 ...... Ammonia solution, relative density less
than 0.880 at 15 ° C in water, with
more than 50% ammonia. See MAWP definition in § 178.276(a) Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) § 173.32(f)

3337 ...... Refrigerant gas R 404A ......................... 31.6 Allowed Normal 0.84

28.3
25.3
22.5 3338 ...... Refrigerant gas R 407A ......................... 31.3 Allowed Normal 0.95

28.1
25.1

22.4 3339 ...... Refrigerant gas R 407B ......................... 33.0 Allowed Normal 0.95

29.6
26.5
23.6 3340 ...... Refrigerant gas R 407C ......................... 29.9 Allowed Normal 0.95

26.8
23.9
21.3

[69 FR 76174, Dec. 20, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 34399, June 14, 2005]

§ 173.314 Compressed gases in tank cars and multi-unit tank cars.

(a) Definitions. For definitions of compressed gases, see §173.115.

(b) General requirements. (1) Tank car tanks containing compressed gases must not be shipped unless they were loaded by or with the consent of the
owner thereof.

(2) Tank car tanks must not contain gases capable of combining chemically and must not be loaded with any gas which combines chemically with the gas previously loaded therein, until all
residue has been removed and interior of tank thoroughly cleaned.

(3) For tanks of the DOT-106A and 110A class, the tanks must be placed in position and attached to car structure by the shipper.

(4) Wherever the word ‘‘approved’’ is used in this part of the regulations, it means approval by the Association of
American Railroads Committee on Tank Cars as prescribed in §179.3 of this subchapter.

(5) Each tank car used for the transportation of anhydrous ammonia or any material that meets the criteria of Division 2.1 or 2.3 must have gaskets for manway cover plates and formounting of fittings designed (for temperature, application, media, pressure, and size) to create a positive seal sothat, under conditions normally incident to transportation, there will not
be an identifiable release of the material to the environment. The use ofsealants to install gaskets is prohibited.


### 618 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.314

(c) Authorized gases, filling limits for
tank cars. A compressed gas in a tank
car or a multi-unit tank car must beoffered for transportation in accordance with §173.31 and this section. The gases listed below must be loaded andoffered for transportation in accordance with the following table:

Proper shipping name Outage and filling limits (see note 1) Authorized tank car class (see note 11) Authorized tank car specification (see note 12)

Ammonia, anhydrous, or ammonia solutions >

50 percent ammonia. Notes 2, 10 ................ 105, 112, 114, 120 ..... 105J500I, 112J500I

Note 3 ........................ 106. Ammonia solutions with > 35 percent, but ≤

50 percent ammonia by mass. Note 3 ........................ 105, 109, 112, 114,

120. Argon, compressed .......................................... Note 4 ........................ 107. Boron trichloride ............................................... Note 3 ........................ 105, 106. Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid ................... Note 5 ........................ 105.
Chlorine ............................................................ Note 6 ........................ 105 .......................... ... 105J600I

125 ............................. 106. Chlorine trifluoride ............................................ Note 3 ........................ 106, 110. Chlorine pentafluoride ...................................... Note 3 ........................ 106, 110. Dimethyl ether .................................................. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120. Dimethylamine, anhydrous ............................... Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 112. Dinitrogen tetroxide, inhibited .......................... Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 112 ............. 105J500I Division 2.1 materials not specifically identified

in this table. Notes 9, 10 ................ 105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120. Division 2.2 materials not specifically identified

in this table. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 109, 110, 112, 114, 120. Division 2.3 Zone A materials not specifically

identified in this table. None ........................... See § 173.245. ........... 105J600I

Division 2.3 Zone B materials not specifically

identified in this table. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120. 105J600I

Division 2.3 Zone C materials not specifically

identified in this table. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120. 105J500I

Division 2.3 Zone D materials not specifically

identified in this table. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 109, 110, 112, 114, 120. 105J500I, 112J500I

Ethylamine ........................................................ Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120. Helium, compressed ........................................ Note 4 ........................ 107. Hydrogen .......................................................... Note 4 ........................ 107. Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid .............. Note 7 ........................ 105 ............................. 105J600I, 112 S600I Hydrogen sulfide .............................................. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120. 105J600I

Hydrogen sulfide, liquefied ............................... 68 ............................... 106. Methyl bromide ................................................. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106 ..................... 105J5 00I Methyl chloride ................................................. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 112. Methyl mercaptan ............................................. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106 ..................... 105J500 I Methylamine, anhydrous .................................. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 112. Nitrogen, compressed ...................................... Note 4 ........................ 107. Nitrosyl chloride ................................................ 124 ............................. 105 ........................... .. 105J500I

110 ............................. 106. Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid ...................... Note 5 ........................ 105. Oxygen, compressed ....................................... Note 4 ........................ 107. Phosgene ......................................................... Note 3 ........................ 106. Sulfur dioxide, liquefied .................................... 125 ............................. 105, 106, 110 ............. 105J500I Sulfuryl fluoride ................................................ 120 ............................. 105. Vinyl fluoride, stabilized ................................... Note 8 ........................ 105.

N OTES : 1. The percent filling density for liquefied gases is hereby defined as the percent ratio of the mass of gas in the tank to the mass of water that the tank will hold. For determining the water capacity of the tank in kilograms, the mass of 1 L of wate r at 15.5 ° C in air is 1 kg. (the mass of one gallon of water at 60 ° F in air is 8.32828 pounds).

2. The liquefied gas must be loaded so that the outage is at least two percent of the total capacity of the tank at the referen ce temperature of 46 ° C (115 ° F) for a noninsulated tank; 43 ° C (110 ° F) for a tank having a thermal protection system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 ° C (60 ° F) of no more than 10.22 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential; and 41 ° C (105 ° F) for an insulated tank having an insulation system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 ° C (60 ° F) of no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.075 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential.

3. The requirements of § 173.24b(a) apply. 4. The gas pressure at 54.44 ° C (130 ° F.) in any non-insulated tank car may not exceed 7/10 of the marked test pressure, except that a tank may be charged with helium to a pressure 10 percent in excess of the marked maximum gas pressure at 54.44

° C (130 ° F.) of each tank.

5. The liquid portion of the gas at -17.77 ° C (0 ° F.) must not completely fill the tank. 6. The maximum permitted filling density is 125 percent. The quantity of chlorine loaded into a single unit-tank car may not be loaded in excess of the normal lading weights nor in excess of 81.65 Mg (90 tons).

7. 89 percent maximum to 80.1 percent minimum at a test pressure of 6.2 Bar (90 psig). 8. 59.6 percent maximum to 53.6 percent minimum at a test pressure of 7.2 Bar (105 psig).


### 619 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.314

9. For a liquefied petroleum gas, the liquefied gas must be loaded so that the outage is at least one percent of the total capa c- ity of the tank at the reference temperature of 46 ° C (115 ° F) for a noninsulated tank; 43 ° C (110 ° F) for a tank having a thermal protection system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 ° C (60 ° F) of no more than10.22 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential; and 41 ° C (105 ° F) for an insulated tank having an insulation system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an over- all thermal conductance at 15.5 ° C (60 ° F) of no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.075 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential.

10. For liquefied petroleum gas and anhydrous ammonia, during the months of November through March (winter), the following reference temperatures may be used: 38 ° C (100 ° F) for a noninsulated tank; 32 ° C (90 ° F) for a tank having a thermal protection system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 ° C (60 ° F) of no more than 10.22 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differentia l; and 29 ° C (85 ° F) for an insulated tank having an insulation system incorporating a metal jacket and insulation that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 ° C (60 ° F) of no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.075 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential. The winter reference temperatures may only be used for a tank car shipped directly to a consumer for unloading and not stored in transit. The offeror of the tank must inform each customer that the tank car was filled based on winter reference temperatures. The tank must be unloaded as soon as possible after March in order to retain the specified outage and to prevent a release of hazardous material which might occur due to the tank car becoming liquid full at higher temperatures.

11. For materials poisonous by inhalation, the single unit tank car tanks authorized are only those cars approved by the Tank Car Committee for transportation of the specified material and built prior to March 16, 2009.

12. Except as provided by paragraph (d) of this section, for materials poisonous by inhalation, fusion-welded tank car tanks built on or after March 16, 2009 used for the transportation of the PIH materials noted, must meet the applicable authorized ta nk car specification and must be equipped with a head shield as prescribed in § 179.16(c)(1).

(d) Alternative tank car tanks for materials poisonous by inhalation. (1) As an
alternative to the authorized tank car specification noted in the column 4 ofthe table in paragraph (c) of this section, a car of the same authorized tank car specification but of the next lower test pressure, as prescribed in column 5 of the table at §179.101–1, may be usedprovided both of the following conditions are met:

(i) The difference between the alternative and the required minimum plate thicknesses, based on the calculationprescribed in §179.100–6 of this subchapter, is added to the alternative tank car jacket and head shield. When the jacket and head shield are madefrom any authorized steel with a minimum tensile strength from 70,000 p.s.i.to 80,000 p.s.i., but the required minimum plate thickness calculation is
based on steel with a minimum tensile strength of 81,000 p.s.i., the thickness to be added to the jacket and head shield must be increased by a factor of 1.157. Forming allowances for heads arenot required to be considered when calculating thickness differences as prescribed in this paragraph.

(ii) The tank car jacket and head
shield must be manufactured from carbon steel plate as prescribed in §179.100–7(a) of this subchapter.

(e) Verification of content. The amount of liquefied gas loaded into each tankmay be determined either by measurement or calculation of the weight. If by measurement, the weight must bechecked after disconnecting the loading line by the use of proper scales. If by calculation, the weight of liquefied petroleum gas, methylacetylene propadiene, stabilized, dimethylamine, methylamine anhydrous, or trimethylamine may be calculated using the outage tables supplied by the tank car owners and the specific gravities as determined at the plant, and this computation must be checked by determination of specific gravity of product after loading. Carriers may verify calculated weights by use of proper scales. The use of a fixed tubegauge device is authorized for determining the weight of methyl mercaptan in Specification 105A300W tanks instead of weighing.

(f) [Reserved](g) Special requirements for hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid, and vinyl fluoride,stabilized.

(1) The shipper shall notify the Federal Railroad Administration whenevera tank car is not received by the consignee within 20 days from the date of shipment. Notification to the Federal Railroad Administration may be made by e-mail to Hmassist@fra.dot.gov or telephone call to (202) 493–6229.

(2) A tank car containing hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid must havethe auxiliary valve on the pressure relief device closed during transportation.

(3) See §179.102–17 of this subchapter for additional requirements.

(4) Tank cars containing hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid, must be unloaded to such an extent that anyresidue remaining in the tank at a reference temperature of 32 ° C (90 ° F) willnot actuate the reclosing pressure relief device.


### 620 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.314

(h)–(i) [Reserved] (j) Special requirements for materials having a primary or secondary Division 2.1 (flammable gas) hazard. For single unit tank cars, interior pipes of loadingand unloading valves, sampling devices, and gauging devices with an opening for the passage of the lading exceeding 1.52 mm (0.060 inch) diameter must be equipped with excess flowvalves. For single unit tank cars constructed before January 1, 1972, gauging devices must conform to this paragraph by no later than July 1, 2006. Theprotective housing cover must be provided with an opening, with a weatherproof cover, above each pressure relief
valve that is concentric with the discharge of the pressure relief valve and that has an area at least equal to the
valve outlet area. Class DOT 109 tank
cars and tank cars manufactured fromaluminum or nickel plate are not authorized.

(k) Special requirements for chlorine. Tank cars built after September 30, 1991, must have an insulation system consisting of 5.08 cm (2 inches) glass fiber placed over 5.08 cm (2 inches) of
ceramic fiber. Tank cars must have excess flow valves on the interior pipes ofliquid discharge valves. Tank cars constructed to a DOT 105A500W specification may be marked as a DOT 105A300W specification with the size and type ofreclosing pressure relief valves required by the marked specification.

(l) Special requirements for hydrogen sulphide. Each multi-unit tank carmust be equipped with adequate pressure relief devices of the fusible plug type having a yield temperature not
over 76.66 ° C (170 ° F.), and not less than
69.44 ° C (157 ° F.). Each device must be
resistant to extrusion of the fusible alloy and leak tight at 55 ° C (130 ° F.). A threaded solid plug must seal each valve outlet. In addition, a metal cover must protect all valves.

(m) Special requirements for nitrosyl
chloride. Single unit tank cars and their associated service equipment, such as venting, loading and unloading valves, and reclosing pressure relief valves, must be made of metal or clad with a material that is not subject to rapid deterioration by the lading.
Multi-unit tank car tanks must be nickel-clad and have reclosing pressure relief devices incorporating a fusible plug having a yield temperature of
79.44 ° C (175 ° F.). Reclosing pressure relief devices must be vapor tight at 54.44

° C (130 ° F.).

(n) Special requirements for hydrogen. Each tank car must be equipped with one or more pressure relief devices. The discharge outlet for each pressure
relief device must be connected to amanifold having a non-obstructed discharge area of at least 1.5 times thetotal discharge area of the pressure relief devices connected to the manifold.
All manifolds must be connected to asingle common header having a non-obstructed discharge pointing upward and extending above the top of the car. The
header and the header outlet must each have a non-obstructed discharge area at least equal to the total discharge
area of the manifolds connected to the
header. The header outlet must be equipped with an ignition device thatwill instantly ignite any hydrogen discharged through the pressure relief device.

(o) Special requirements for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid and nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid. Each tank car must have an insulation system so that
the thermal conductance is not more than 0.613 kilojoules per hour, per square meter, per degree Celsius (0.03B.t.u. per square foot per hour, per degree Fahrenheit) temperature differential. Each tank car must be equipped with one reclosing pressure relief valve having a start-to-discharge pressure not to exceed 75 percent of the tank test pressure and one non-reclosing pressure relief valve having a rupture disc design to burst at a pressure lessthan the tank test pressure. The discharge capacity of each pressure relief device must be sufficient to prevent building up of pressure in the tank inexcess of 82.5 percent of the test pressure of the tank. Tanks must be equipped with two regulating valves set to open at a pressure not to exceed 24.1 Bar (350 psi) on DOT 105A500W tanks and at a pressure not to exceed 27.6 Bar (400 psi) on DOT 105A600Wtanks. Each regulating valve and pressure relief device must have its final discharge piped to the outside of the protective housing.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52665, Dec. 21, 1990]


### 621 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.315

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.314, see the List of CFRSections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and

on GPO Access.

§ 173.315 Compressed gases in cargo tanks and portable tanks.
(a) Liquefied compressed gases that are transported in UN portable tanks, DOT specification portable tanks, orcargo tanks must be prepared in accordance with this section, §173.32, §173.33 and subpart E or subpart G ofpart 180 of this subchapter, as applicable. For cryogenic liquid in cargotanks, see §173.318. For marking requirements for portable tanks and cargo tanks, see §172.326 and §172.328 of this subchapter, as applicable.

(1) UN portable tanks: UN portable
tanks must be loaded and offered for transportation in accordance with portable tank provision T50 in §172.102 of this subchapter.

(2) Cargo tanks and DOT specification portable tanks: Cargo tanks and DOT specification portable tanks must be loaded and offered for transportation in accordance with the following table:

Kind of gas Maximum permitted filling density Specification container required

Percent by weight

(see Note 1) Percent by volume (see par. (f) of this section) Type (see Note 2) Minimum design pressure (psig)

Ammonia, anhydrous or Ammonia solutions with greater than 50 percent ammonia (see Notes 14 and 17). 56 .......................... 82, See Note 5 ...... DOT-51, MC–330, MC–331; See Notes 12, 17 and

27. 265; See Note 17.

Ammonia solutions with more than 35

percent but not more than 50 percent
ammonia. See par. (c) of this
section. See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, MC–331; see
Note 12. 100; See par. (c) of
this section.

Bromotrifluoromethane (R–13B1 or H–

1301); (See Note 9). 133 ........................ See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. 365.

Butadiene, stabilized .............................. See par. (b) of this
section. See par. (b) of this
section. DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. 100.

Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid ......... See par. (c)(1) of
this section. 95 .......................... ......do .................... 200; see Note 3.

Chlorine .................................................. 125 ........................ See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. 225; See Notes 4
and 8. Chlorodifluoroethane (R–142b) (1-

Chloro 1,1-difluoroethane); (See Note 9). 100 ........................ See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. 100.

Chlorodifluoromethane (R–22); (See

Note 9). 105 ........................ See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. 250.

Chloropentafluoroethane (R–115); (See

Note 9). See par. (c) of this
section. See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. See par. (c) of this
section. Chlorotrifluoromethane (R–13); (See

Note 9). See par. (c) of this
section. See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. See par. (c) of this
section. Dichlorodifluoromethane (R–12); (See

Note 9). 119 ........................ See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. 150.

Difluoroethane (R–152a); (See Note 9) 79 .......................... See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. 150.

Dimethyl ether (see Note 16) ................ 59 .......................... ......do .................... ......do ................... . 200. Dimethylamine, anhydrous .................... 59 .......................... See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. 150.

Division 2.1, materials not specifically

provided for in this table. See par. (c) of this
section. See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. See Note 18.

Division 2.2, materials not specifically

provided for in this table. See par. (c) of this
section. See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. See Note 19.

Division 2.3, Hazard Zone A, materials

not specifically provided for in this
table. See par. (c) of this
section. See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, MC–331; See
Note 23. See Note 20.

Division 2.3, Hazard Zone B, materials

not specifically provided for in this
table. See par. (c) of this
section. See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, MC–331; See
Note 23. See Note 20.

Division 2.3, Hazard Zone C, materials

not specifically provided for in this
table. See par. (c) of this
section. See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, MC–331; See
Note 24. See Note 21.

Division 2.3, Hazard Zone D, materials

not specifically provided for in this
table. See par. (c) of this
section. See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, MC–331; See
Note 25. See Note 22.

Ethane, refrigerated liquid ..................... ................................ See par. (c) of this
section. MC–331, MC–338 100; see Note 11.


### 622 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.315

Kind of gas Maximum permitted filling density Specification container required

Percent by weight

(see Note 1) Percent by volume (see par. (f) of this section) Type (see Note 2) Minimum design pressure (psig)

Ethane-propane mixture, refrigerated

liquid. ................................ See par. (c) of this
section. MC–331, MC–338 275; see Note 11.

Hexafluoropropylene .............................. 110 ........................ See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. 250.

Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid .... 103.0 ..................... See Note 7 ............ MC–331, MC–338 100; see Note 11. 91.6 ....................... ......do .................... ......do .................... 300; see Note 11. 86.7 ....................... ......do .................... ......do .................... 450; see Note 11. Liquefied petroleum gas (see Note 15) See par. (b) of this
section. See par. (b) of this
section. DOT-51, MC–330, MC–331; See
Note 26. See par. (c) of this
section.

Methylacetylene-propadiene, stabilized

(see Note 13). 53 .......................... 90 .......................... DOT 51, MC 330,
MC 331. 200.

Methylamine, anhydrous ........................ 60 .......................... See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331.. Methyl chloride ....................................... 84 .......................... 88.5 ....................... ......do .......... .......... 150. Methyl chloride (optional portable tank

2,000 pounds water capacity, fusible plug). ......do .................... See Note 6 ............ DOT-51 .................. 225.

Methyl mercaptan .................................. 80 .......................... 90 .......................... DOT-51, MC–330, MC–331; See
Note 23. 100.

Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid ............ See par. (c)(1) of
this section. 95 .......................... DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. 200; See Note 3.

Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. or Dispersant

gas, n.o.s. (See Note 9). See par. (c) of this
section. See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. See par. (c) of this
section.Sulfur dioxide (tanks not over 1,200 gallons water capacity). 125 ........................ 87.5 ....................... DOT-51, MC–330, MC–331; See
Note 24. 150; See Note 4.

Sulfur dioxide (tanks over 1,200 gallons

water capacity). 125 ........................ 87.5 ....................... DOT-51, MC–330, MC–331; See
Note 24. 125; See Note 4.

Sulfur dioxide (optional portable tank

1,000–2,000 pounds water capacity, fusible plug). 125 ........................ See Note 6 ............ DOT-51; See Note

24. 225.

Trimethylamine, anhydrous .................... 57 .......................... See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330,
MC–331. 150.

Vinyl chloride .......................................... 84 (see Note 13) ... See Note 7 ............ MC–330, MC–331 150. Vinyl fluoride, stabilized ......................... 66 .......................... ......do .................... ......do ............ ........ 250; see Note 11. Vinyl methyl ether .................................. 68 .......................... See Notes 7 and

13. ......do .................... 100.

N OTE 1: Maximum filling density for liquefied gases is hereby defined as the percent ratio of the weight of gas in the tank to the weight of water that the tank will hold. For determining the water capacity of the tank in pounds, the weight of a gallon ( 231 cubic inches) of water at 60 ° F. in air shall be 8.32828 pounds.

N OTE 2: See § 173.32 for authority to use other portable tanks and for manifolding cargo tanks, see paragraph (q) of this section. Specifications MC 330 cargo tanks may be painted as specified for MC 331 cargo tanks.

N OTE 3: If cargo tanks and portable tank containers for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid, and nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid, are designed to conform to the requirements in Section VIII of the ASME Code for low temperature operation (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), the design pressure may be reduced to 100 psig or the controlled pressure, whichever is greater.

N OTE 4: Material must be steel. Packagings must have a corrosion allowance of 20 percent or 0.10 inch, whichever is less, added to the metal thickness. The minimum wall thickness for chlorine packagings is 0.300 inch for stainless steel or 0.625 inc h for carbon steel, including corrosion allowance.

N OTE 5: Unlagged cargo tanks and portable tank containers for liquid anhydrous ammonia may be filled to 87.5 percent by volume provided the temperature of the anhydrous ammonia being loaded into such tanks is determined to be not lower than 30 ° F. or provided the filling of such tanks is stopped at the first indication of frost or ice formation on the outside surface of th e tank and is not resumed until such frost or ice has disappeared.

N OTE 6: Tanks equipped with fusible plugs must be filled by weight. N OTE 7: Tanks must be filled by weight. N OTE 8: Chlorine packagings may be shipped only if the contents are to be unloaded at one unloading point. N OTE 9: This gas may be transported in authorized cargo tanks and portable tanks marked ‘‘ DISPERSANT GAS ,’’ or

‘‘ REFRIGERANT GAS .’’

N OTE 10: [Reserved] N OTE 11: MC–330, MC–331 and MC–338 cargo tanks must be insulated. Cargo tanks must meet all the following requirements. Each tank must have a design service temperature of minus 100 ° F., or no warmer than the boiling point at one atmosphere of the hazardous material to be shipped therein, whichever is colder, and must conform to the low-temperature requirements in Section VIII of the ASME Code. When the normal travel time is 24 hours or less, the tank’s holding time as loaded must be at least twice the normal travel time. When the normal travel time exceeds 24 hours, the tank’s holding time as loaded must be at least 24 hours greater than the normal travel time. The holding time is the elapsed time from loading until venting occurs under equilibrium conditions. The cargo tank must have an outer jacket made of steel when the cargo tank is used to transport a flammable gas.

N OTE 12: No aluminum, copper, silver, zinc or an alloy of any of these metals shall be used in packaging construction where it comes into contact with the lading.

N OTE 13: All parts of valves and safety devices in contact with contents of tank must be of a metal or other material suitably treated if necessary, which will not cause formation of any acetylides.


### 623 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.315

N OTE 14: Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of other than quenched and tempered steel ‘‘(NQT)’’ are authorized for all grades of anhydrous ammonia. Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of quenched andtempered steel ‘‘(QT)’’ (see marking requirements of § 172.328(c) of this subchapter) are authorized for anhydrous ammonia having a minimum water content of 0.2 percent by weight. Any tank being placed in anhydrous ammonia service or a tank which has been in other service or has been opened for inspection, test, or repair, must be cleaned of the previous product and must be purged of air before loading. See § 172.203(h) of this subchapter for special shipping paper requirements.

N OTE 15: Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of other than quenched and tempered steel (NQT) are authorized for all grades of liquefied petroleum gases. Only grades of liquefied petroleum gases determined to be ‘‘noncorrosiv e’’are authorized in Specification MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of quenched and tempered steel (QT). ‘‘Noncorrosive’’ means the corrosiveness of the gas does not exceed the limitations for classification 1 of the ASTM Copper Strip Classifications when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1838, ‘‘Copper Strip Corrosion by Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). (For (QT) and (NQT) marking requirements, see § 172.328(c) of this subchapter. For special shipping paper requirements, see § 172.203(h) of this subchapter.)

N OTE 16: Openings, inlets, and outlets on MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must conform to § 178.337–8(a) of this subchapter. MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must be equipped with emergency discharge control equipment as specified in § 178.337–11(a) of this subchapter.

N OTE 17: A Specification MC-330 or MC-331 cargo tank or a nonspecification cargo tank meeting, and marked in conformance with, the edition of the ASME Code in effect when it was fabricated, may be used for the transportation of anhydrous ammonia if it: (1) Has a minimum design pressure not lower than 250 psig;

(2) Was manufactured in conformance with the ASME Code prior to January 1, 1981, according to its ASME name plate and manufacturer’s data report;

(3) Is painted white or aluminum; (4) Complies with Note 12 of this paragraph; (5) Has been inspected and tested in accordance with subpart E of part 180 of this subchapter as specified for MC 331 cargo tanks.

(6) Was used to transport anhydrous ammonia prior to January 1, 1981; (7) Is operated exclusively in intrastate commerce (including its operation by a motor carrier otherwise engaged in interstatecommerce) in a state where its operation was permitted by the laws of that State (not including the incorporation of this subchapter) prior to January 1, 1981; and

(8) Is operated in conformance with all other requirements of this subchapter. N OTE 18: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than the vapor pressure at the reference temperature of the lading plus one percent or 173.4 kPa (25 psig), whichever is less.

N OTE 19: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than the vapor pressure at the reference temperature of the lading.

N OTE 20: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than 1.5 times the vapor pressure of the lading at 46 ° C (115 ° F).

N OTE 21: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than 1.3 times the vapor pressure of the lading at 46 ° C (115 ° F).

N OTE 22: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than 1.1 times the vapor pressure of the lading at 46 ° C (115 ° F).

N OTE 23: Packagings must be made of stainless steel except that steel other than stainless steel may be used in accordance with the provisions of § 173.24b(b) of this part. Thickness of stainless steel for shell and heads must be the greater of 7.62 m m (0.300 inch) or the thickness required for the packaging at its minimum design pressure.

N OTE 24: Packagings must be made of stainless steel except that steel other than stainless steel may be used in accordance with the provisions of § 173.24b(b) of this part. Thickness of stainless steel for shell and heads must be the greater of 6.35 m m (0.250 inch) or the thickness required for the packaging at its minimum design pressure. For sulphur dioxide, this Note does no t apply until October 1, 1994.

N OTE 25: Packagings must be made of stainless steel except that steel other than stainless steel may be used in accordance with the provisions of § 173.24b(b) of this part. Thickness for shell and heads must be as calculated for the packaging at its m inimum design pressure.

N OTE 26: Non-specification cargo tanks may be used for the transportation of liquefied petroleum gas, subject to the conditions prescribed in paragraph (k) of this section.

N OTE 27: Non-specification cargo tanks may be used for transportation of Ammonia, anhydrous and ammonia solutions with greater than 50% ammonia, subject to the conditions prescribed in paragraph (m) of this section.

(b) Maximum permitted filling densities for cargo and portable tank containers for transportation of butadiene, stabilized, and liquefied petroleum gas
are as follows:

Maximum specific gravity of the liquid material at 60 ° F. Maximum permitted filling density in percentof the water-weight capacity of the tanks (percent) See Note 1

1200 gallons or less Over 1200 gallons

0.473 to 0.480 ............................... 38 41
0.481 to 0.488 ............................... 39 42
0.489 to 0.495 ............................... 40 43
0.496 to 0.503 ............................... 41 44
0.504 to 0.510 ............................... 42 45
0.511 to 0.519 ............................... 43 46
0.520 to 0.527 ............................... 44 47
0.528 to 0.536 ............................... 45 48
0.537 to 0.544 ............................... 46 49
0.545 to 0.552 ............................... 47 50 Maximum specific gravity of the liquid material at 60 ° F. Maximum permitted filling density in percentof the water-weight capacity of the tanks (percent) See Note 1

1200 gallons or less Over 1200 gallons

0.553 to 0.560 ............................... 48 51

0.561 to 0.568 ............................... 49 52

0.569 to 0.576 ............................... 50 53

0.577 to 0.584 ............................... 51 54

0.585 to 0.592 ............................... 52 55

0.593 to 0.600 ............................... 53 56

0.601 to 0.608 ............................... 54 57

0.609 to 0.617 ............................... 55 58

0.618 to 0.626 ............................... 56 59
0.627 and over .............................. 57 60

N OTE 1: Filling is permitted by volume provided the same filling density is used as permitted by weight, except when using fixed length dip tube or other fixed maximum liquid level indicators (paragraph (f) of this section), in which case the maximum permitted filling density shall not exceed 97 percent of the maximum permitted filling density by weight contained in the table.


### 624 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.315

(1) Odorization. All liquefied petroleum gas shall be effectively odorized as required in Note 2 of this paragraph to indicate positively, by a distinctive odor, the presence of gas down to a
concentration in air of not over onefifth the lower limit of combustibility provided, however, that odorization is not required if harmful in the use orfurther processing of the liquefied petroleum gas, or if odorization will serve no useful purpose as a warning agent in such use or further processing.

N OTE 1: The lower limits of combustibilityof the more commonly used liquefied petroleum gases are: Propane, 2.15 percent; butane, 1.55 percent. These figures represent volumetric percentages of gas-air mixtures
in each case.

N OTE 2: The use of 1.0 pound of ethyl mercaptan, 1.0 pound of thiophane, or 1.4 pounds of amyl mercaptan per 10,000 gallonsof liquefied petroleum gas shall be considered sufficient to meet the requirements of §173.315(b)(1). This note does not exclude theuse of any other odorant in sufficient quantity to meet the requirements of §173.315(b)(1).

(c) Except as otherwise provided, the loading of a liquefied gas into a cargotank or portable tank shall be determined by weight or by a suitable liquidlevel gauging device. The vapor pressure (psig) at 115 ° F. must not exceed the design pressure of the cargo tank or portable tank container. The outage and filling limits for liquefied gases must be as prescribed in §173.24b of this part, except that this requirement does not apply to:

(1) A tank containing carbon dioxide,refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid. Such tank is required tobe equipped with suitable pressure control valves and may not be filled to alevel exceeding 95 percent of the volumetric capacity of the tank.

(2) A tank containing ethane, refrigerated liquid; ethane-propane mixture, refrigerated liquid; or hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid. Such tank must befilled to allow at least two percent outage below the inlet of the pressure relief valve or pressure control valve under conditions of incipient opening,
with the tank in a level attitude.

(d) If the loading of cargo tanks and portable tank containers with liquefied gases is to be determined by weight, the gross weight shall be checked after the filling line is disconnected in eachinstance. The gross weight shall be calculated from the tank capacity and tare weight set forth on the metal plate required by the specification, and the maximum filling density permitted for the material being loaded into thetank as set forth in the table, paragraph (a) of this section.

(e) If the loading of cargo tanks and portable tank containers with liquefied gases is to be determined by adjustable liquid level device, each tank and eachcompartment thereof shall have a thermometer well, so that the internal liquid temperature can easily be determined, and the amount of liquid in the
tank shall be corrected to a 60 ° F. basis. Liquid levels shall not exceed a level corresponding to the maximumfilling density permitted for the material being loaded into the tank as set forth in the table in paragraph (a) of
this section.

(f) When the loading of cargo tanksand portable tank containers with liquefied gases is determined only by fixed length dip tube or other fixed maximum liquid level indicator, the device shall be arranged to function ata level not to exceed the maximum permitted volume prescribed by the table, paragraph (a) of this section. Loadingshall be stopped when the device functions.

(g) Containers, the liquid level of which has been determined by means of a fixed length dip tube gauging device, shall not be acceptable for stowage as cargo on vessels in commerce subject to the jurisdiction of the United States Coast Guard. Nothing contained in thissection shall be so construed as to prohibit the transportation on car floats
or car ferries of motor vehicles laden with containers nor cargo tanks the liquid level of either of which has been determined by means of fixed length dip tube devices.

(h) Each cargo tank and portable tank, except a tank filled by weight, must be equipped with one or more of the gauging devices described in thefollowing table which indicate accurately the maximum permitted liquid level. Additional gauging devices maybe installed but may not be used as primary controls for filling of cargo tanks and portable tanks. Gauge glasses are


### 625 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.315

not permitted on any cargo tank orportable tank. Primary gauging devices used on cargo tanks of less than 3500 gallons water capacity are exemptfrom the longitudinal location requirements specified in paragraphs (h)(2) and (3) of this section provided: The tank length does not exceed three times the tank diameter; and the cargo
tank is unloaded within 24 hours after each filling of the tank.

Kind of gas Gaging device permitted for filling purposes

Anhydrous ammonia ..................... Rotary tube; adjustable slip tube; fixed length dip tube. Anhydrous dimethylamine ............ None. Anhydrous monomethylamine ...... Do. Anhydrous trimethylamine ............ Do.Aqua ammonia solution containing anhydrous ammonia. Rotary tube; adjustable slip tube; fixed length dip tube. Butadiene, stabilized .................... Do. Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid Do.
Chlorine ........................................ None.
Dichlorodifluoromethane ............... Do.
Difluoroethane .............................. Do.
Difluoromonochloroethane ............ Do. Dimethyl ether .............................. Do. Ethane, refrigerated liquid ............ Rotary tube; adjustable slip tube; fixed length dip tube.Ethane-propane mixture, refrigerated liquid. Do.

Hexafluoropropylene ..................... None. Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated

liquid. Do.

Liquefied petroleum gases ........... Rotary tube; adjustable slip tube; fixed length dip tube. Methyl chloride ............................. Fixed length dip tube. Methyl mercaptan ......................... Rotary tube; adjustable slip tube; fixed length dip tube.
Monochlorodifluoromethane ......... None. Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid .. Rotary tube; adjustable slip tube; fixed length dip tube.Methylacetylenepropadiene, stabilized. Do.

Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. or Dispersant gas, n.o.s. None.

Sulfur dioxide ................................ Fixed length dip tube. Vinyl chloride ................................ None. Vinyl fluoride, inhibited ................. Do.

(1) The design pressure of the liquid level gauging devices shall be at least equal to the design pressure of the
tank.

(2) If the primary gauging device isadjustable, it must be capable of adjustment so that the end of the tube will be in the location specified in paragraph (h)(3) of this section for atleast one of the ladings to be transported, at the filling level corresponding to an average loading temperature. Exterior means must be provided to indicate this adjustment. Thegauging device must be legibly and permanently marked in increments not exceeding 20 Fahrenheit degrees (or not exceeding 25 p.s.i.g. on tanks for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid), to indicate
the maximum levels to which the tankmay be filled with liquid at temperatures above 20 ° F. However, if it is notpracticable to so mark the gauging device, this information must be legiblyand permanently marked on a plate affixed to the tank adjacent to the gauging device.

(3) A dip tube gauging device consists of a pipe or tube with a valve at its outer end with its intake limited by anorifice not larger than 0.060 inch in diameter. If a fixed length dip tube isused, the intake must be located midway of the tank both longitudinallyand laterally and at maximum permitted filling level. In tanks for liquefied petroleum gases, the intake must be located at the level reached by thelading when the tank is loaded to maximum filling density at 40 ° F.

(4) Except on a tank used exclusivelyfor the transportation of carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid, each opening for a pressure gauge must be restricted at or inside the tank by an orifice no larger than 0.060 inch in diameter. For carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid ornitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid service, the pressure gauge need only be used during the filling operation.

(i) Each tank must be provided with one or more pressure relief devices which, unless otherwise specified in this part, must be of the spring-loaded type. Each valve must be arranged to discharge upward and unobstructed to the outside of the protective housing to prevent any impingement of escaping gas upon the tank. For each chlorine tank the protective housing must be in compliance with the requirements set forth in the applicable specification.

(1) The safety relief valves on eachtank must meet the following conditions:

(i) The total relieving capacity, asdetermined by the flow formulas contained in Section 5 of CGA S–1.2 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), must be


### 626 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.315

sufficient to prevent a maximum pressure in the tank of more than 120 percent of the design pressure;

(ii) The flow capacity rating, testing and marking must be in accordancewith Sections 5, 6 and 7 of CGA Pamphlet S–1.2.

(iii) For an insulated tank, the required relieving capacity of the relief
devices must be the same as for an uninsulated tank, unless the insulationwill remain in place and will be effective under fire conditions. In this case,except for UN portable tanks, each insulated tank must be covered by a sheet metal jacket of not less than 16 gauge thickness. For UN portable tanks where the relieving capacity of
the valves has been reduced on thebasis of the insulation system, the insulation system must remain effective at all temperatures less than 649 ° C (1200.2 ° F) and be jacketed with a material having a melting point of 700 ° C (1292.0 ° F) or greater.

(iv) An MC 330 cargo tank that hasrelief valves sized by Fetterly’s formula dated November 27, 1928, may be
continued in service.

(2) Each safety relief valve must be arranged to minimize the possibility of tampering. If the pressure setting or adjustment is external to the valve, the safety relief valve must be provided with means for sealing the adjustment
and it must be sealed.

(3) Each safety relief valve on a portable tank, other than a UN portable tank, must be set to start-to-discharge at pressure no higher than 110% of the tank design pressure and no lower thanthe design pressure specified in paragraph (a) of this section for the gas transported. For UN portable tanks used for liquefied compressed gases and
constructed in accordance with the requirements of §178.276 of this subchapter, the pressure relief device(s)must conform to §178.276(e) of this subchapter.

(4) Except for UN portable tanks, each safety relief valve must be plainly and permanently marked with the pressure in p.s.i.g. at which it is set todischarge, with the actual rate of discharge of the device in cubic feet per minute of the gas or of air at 60 ° F (15.6

° C) and 14.7 p.s.i.a., and with the manufacturer’s name or trade name and catalog number. The start-to-discharge valve marking must be visible after the valve is installed. The rated dischargecapacity of the device must be determined at a pressure of 120% of the design pressure of the tank. For UN portable tanks, each pressure relief device must be clearly and permanently marked as specified in §178.274(f)(1) of this subchapter.

(5) Each safety relief valve must have direct communication with the vapor space in the tank.

(6) Each connection to a safety reliefvalve must be of sufficient size to provide the required rate of discharge through the safety relief valve.

(7) [Reserved] (8) Each pressure relief valve outletmust be provided with a protective device to prevent the entrance and accumulation of dirt and water. This device must not impede flow through the
valve. Pressure relief devices must bedesigned to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of liquid andthe development of any dangerous excess pressure.

(9) On tanks for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid each safety relief device must be installed and located so that the cooling effect of the contents will not prevent the effective operation
of the device. In addition to the required safety relief valves, these tanks may be equipped with one or more pressure controlling devices.

(10) Each tank for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid also may be equippedwith one or more non-reclosing pressure relief devices set to function at a pressure not over two times nor less than 1.5 times the design pressure of
the tank.

(11) Each portion of connected liquid piping or hose that can be closed atboth ends must be provided with a safety relief valve without an interveningshut-off valve to prevent excessive hydrostatic pressure that could burst the piping or hose.

(12) Subject to conditions of paragraph (a) of this section for the methyl chloride and sulfur dioxide optional portable tanks, one or more fusibleplugs examined by the Bureau of Explosives and approved by the Associate Administrator may be used on these


### 627 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.315

tanks in place of safety relief valves of the spring-loaded type. The fusible plug or plugs must be in accordance withCGA Pamphlet S–1.2, to prevent a pressure rise in the tank of more than 120 percent of the design pressure. If the tank is over 30 inches long, each end must have the total specified safety discharge area.

(13) A safety relief valve on a chlorine cargo tank must conform to one of the following standards of The Chlorine Institute, Inc.: Type 1 1 ⁄ 2 JQ225, Dwg.H51970 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter); or Type 1 1 ⁄ 2 JQ225, Dwg.H50155 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(j) Storage containers for liquefiedpetroleum gas for permanent installation on consumer premises may be shipped by private motor carrier only under the following conditions:

(1) Each container must be constructed in compliance with the requirements in Section VIII of theASME Code (containers built in compliance with earlier editions starting with 1943 are authorized) and must be marked to indicate compliance in the manner specified by the respective
Code.

(2) Each container must be equipped with safety devices in compliance with the requirements for safety devices on containers as specified in NFPA 58 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(3) The containers must be braced or
otherwise secured on the vehicle toprevent relative motion while in transit. Valves or other fittings must be adequately protected against damage during transportation. (See §177.834(a) of this subchapter.)

(4) Except as provided in paragraph (j)(5) of this section, containers shallnot be shipped when charged with liquefied petroleum gas to more than 5 percent of their water capacity.

(5) Storage containers of less than1,042 pounds water capacity (125 gallons) may be shipped when chargedwith liquefied petroleum gas in compliance with DOT filling density.

(k) A nonspecification cargo tank meeting, and marked in conformance with, the edition of Section VIII of the
ASME Code in effect when it was fabricated may be used for the transportation of liquefied petroleum gas provided it meets all of the following conditions:

(1) It must have a minimum design pressure no lower than 250 psig.

(2) It must have a capacity of 13,247.5 L (3,500 water gallons) or less.

(3) It must have been manufactured
in conformance with Section VIII of the ASME Code prior to January 1, 1981, according to its ASME name plate and manufacturer’s data report.

(4) It must conform to the applicable provisions of NFPA 58, except to the extent that provisions in NFPA 58 are inconsistent with requirements in parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter.

(5) It must be inspected, tested, and equipped in accordance with subpart Eof part 180 of this subchapter as specified for MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles.

(6) Except as provided in this paragraph (k), it must be operated exclusively in intrastate commerce, including its operation by a motor carrierotherwise engaged in interstate commerce, in a state where its operation was permitted by law (not including the incorporation of this subchapter) prior to January 1, 1981. A cargo tankmotor vehicle operating under authority of this section may cross state linesto travel to and from a qualified assembly, repair, maintenance, or requalification facility. The cargo tank need not be cleaned and purged, but it may not contain liquefied petroleum gas inexcess of five percent of the water capacity of the cargo tank. If the vehicle engine is supplied fuel from the cargotank, enough fuel in excess of five percent of the cargo tank’s water capacity may be carried for the trip to or from the facility.

(7) It must have been used to transport liquefied petroleum gas prior to January 1, 1981.

(8) It must be operated in conformance with all other requirements of this subchapter.

(l) Anhydrous ammonia must not beoffered for transportation or transported in specification MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of quenched and tempered (‘‘QT’’) steel except as provided in this paragraph.

(1) The ammonia must have a minimum water content of 0.2 percent by weight. Any addition of water must be


### 628 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.315

made using steam condensate, deionized, or distilled water.

(2) Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph, each person offering fortransportation or transporting anhydrous ammonia shall perform a periodic analysis for prescribed water content in the ammonia. The analysis must be performed:

(i) From a sample of the ammonia in storage taken at least once every 7 days, or each time ammonia is added to the storage tanks, whichever is less frequent; or

(ii) At the time the cargo tanks are loaded, then a sample of the ammonia taken from at least one loaded cargo tank out of each 10 loads, or from one cargo tank every 24 hours, whichever is less frequent; or

(iii) At the same frequency as described in paragraph (l)(2)(ii) of this section, from a sample taken from the loading line to the cargo tank.

(3) If water is added at the time of loading:

(i) The sample for analysis must be taken from a point in the loading line between the water injection equipment and the cargo tank; and

(ii) Positive provisions must be made to assure water injection equipment is operating.

(4) If water injection equipment becomes inoperative, suitable corrective maintenance must be performed after which a sample from the first loadedcargo tank must be analyzed for prescribed water content.

(5) The analysis method for water content must be as prescribed in CGA G–2.2, ‘‘Tentative Standard Method for Determining Minimum of 0.2 percent water in Anhydrous Ammonia,’’ (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(6) Records indicating the results of the analysis taken, as required by this paragraph, must be retained for 2 years and must be open to inspection by a representative of the Department.

(7) Each person receiving anhydrous ammonia containing 0.2 per cent water by weight may offer for transportation or transport that ammonia without performing the prescribed analysis for water content provided:

(i) The ammonia received was certified as containing 0.2 percent water as prescribed in §§172.203(h)(l)(i) and 177.817(a) of this subchapter; and

(ii) The amount of water in the ammonia has not been reduced by any

means.

(m) A cargo tank (commonly known
as a nurse tank and considered an implement of husbandry) transporting anhydrous ammonia, and operated by aprivate carrier exclusively for agricultural purposes does not have to meet the specification requirements of part 178 of this subchapter if it:

(1) Has a minimum design pressure of 250 psig and meets the requirements of
the edition of Section VIII of the
ASME Code in effect at the time it was
manufactured and is marked accordingly;

(2) Is equipped with safety relief valves meeting the requirements of CGA pamphlet S1.2;

(3) Is painted white or aluminum; (4) Has capacity of 3,000 gallons or less;

(5) Is loaded to a filling density no greater than 56 percent;

(6) Is securely mounted on a farm wagon; and

(7) Is in conformance with the requirements of part 172 of this subchapter except that shipping papers are not required; and it need not be marked or placarded on one end if thatend contains valves, fittings, regulators or gauges when those appurtenances prevent the markings and placard from being properly placed and
visible.

(n) Emergency discharge control for cargo tank motor vehicles in liquefied compressed gas service —(1) Required emergency discharge control equipment.Each cargo tank motor vehicle in liquefied compressed gas service must have an emergency discharge control capability as specified in the following
table:


### 629 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.315

§ 173.315(n)(1)(*) Material Delivery service Required emergency discharge control capability

(i) ......................... Division 2.2 materials with no subsidiary hazard, excluding anhydrous ammonia. All ............................................. None.

(ii) ........................ Division 2.3 materials .............. All ............................................. Paragraph (n)(2 ) of this section.

(iii) ........................ Division 2.2 materials with a subsidiary hazard, Division2.1 materials, and anhydrous ammonia. Other than metered delivery
service. Paragraph (n)(2) of this section.

(iv) ....................... Division 2.2 materials with a subsidiary hazard, Division2.1 materials, and anhydrous ammonia in a cargo
tank motor vehicle with a capacity of 13,247.5 L (3,500 water gallons) or less. Metered delivery service ......... Paragraph (n)(3) of this section.

(v) ........................ Division 2.2 materials with a subsidiary hazard, Division2.1 materials, and anhydrous ammonia in a cargo
tank motor vehicle with a capacity greater than 13,247.5 L (3,500 water gallons). Metered delivery service ......... Paragraph (n)(3) of this section, and, forobstructed view deliveries where permitted by § 177.840(p) of this subchapter, paragraph (n)(2) or (n)(4) of
this section.

(vi) ....................... Division 2.2 materials with a subsidiary hazard, Division2.1 materials, and anhydrous ammonia in a cargotank with a capacity of greater than 13,247.5 L (3,500 water gallons). Both metered delivery and other than metered delivery
service. Paragraph (n)(2) of this section, provided the system operates for both
metered and other than metered deliveries; otherwise, paragraphs (n)(2) and (n)(3) of this section.

(2) Cargo tank motor vehicles in other than metered delivery service. A cargotank motor vehicle in other than metered delivery service must have a means to automatically shut off the flow of product without the need for
human intervention within 20 seconds of an unintentional release caused by acomplete separation of a liquid delivery hose (passive shut-down capability).

(i) Designed flow of product through a bypass in the valve is acceptable when authorized by this subchapter.

(ii) The design for the means to automatically shut off product flow mustbe certified by a Design Certifying Engineer. The certification must considerany specifications of the original component manufacturer and must explain how the passive means to shut off the flow of product operates. It must alsooutline the parameters (e.g., temperature, pressure, types of product) within which the passive means to shut off the flow of product is designed to operate.All components of the discharge system that are integral to the design
must be included in the certification. A copy of the design certification must be provided to the owner of the cargotank motor vehicle on which the equipment will be installed.

(iii) Installation must be performed under the supervision of a RegisteredInspector unless the equipment is installed and removed as part of regular operation (e.g., a hose). The RegisteredInspector must certify that the equipment is installed and tested, if it is possible to do so without damaging theequipment, in accordance with the Design Certifying Engineer’s certification. The Registered Inspector must provide the certification to the owner of the cargo tank motor vehicle.

(3) Cargo tank motor vehicles in metered delivery service. When required by thetable in paragraph (n)(1) of this section, a cargo tank motor vehicle must
have an off-truck remote means to close the internal self-closing stop
valve and shut off all motive and auxiliary power equipment upon activationby a qualified person attending the unloading of the cargo tank motor vehicle (off-truck remote shut-off). It must function reliably at a distance of 45.72


### 630 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.315

m (150 feet). The off-truck remote shutoff activation device must not be capable of reopening the internal self-closing stop valve after emergency activation.

(i) The emergency discharge control equipment must be installed under the supervision of a Registered Inspector.
Each wireless transmitter/receiver
must be tested to demonstrate that it will close the internal self-closing stop
valve and shut off all motive and auxiliary power equipment at a distance of91.44 m (300 feet) under optimum conditions. Emergency discharge control equipment that does not employ a
wireless transmitter/receiver must be tested to demonstrate its functioning at the maximum length of the delivery
hose.

(ii) The Registered Inspector mustcertify that the remote control equipment is installed in accordance with the original component manufacturer’sspecifications and is tested in accordance with paragraph (n)(3)(i) of this section. The Registered Inspector must provide the owner of the cargo tank
motor vehicle with this certification.

(4) Query systems. When a transmitter/receiver system is used to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (n)(1)(v) of this section, it must close the internal self-closing stop valve and shut off all motive and auxiliary power equipment unless the qualified personattending the unloading operation prevents it from doing so at least onceevery five minutes. Testing and certification must be as specified in paragraph (n)(3) of this section.

(5) Compliance dates. (i) Each specification MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicle with a certificate of construction issued two or more years after July 1,1999, must have an appropriate emergency discharge control capability as specified in this paragraph (n).

(ii) No MC 330, MC 331, or nonspecification cargo tank motor vehicle authorized under paragraph (k) of this section may be operated unless it has an appropriate emergency discharge control capability as specified in this paragraph (n) no later than the date ofits first scheduled pressure retest required after July 1, 2001. No MC 330, MC 331 or nonspecification cargo tankmotor vehicle authorized under paragraph (k) of this section may be operated after July 1, 2006, unless it hasbeen equipped with emergency discharge control equipment as specified in this paragraph (n).

(iii) No MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicle with a capacity over 13,247 L (3,500 gallons) used in metereddelivery service may be operated unless it has an appropriate discharge control capability as specified in this paragraph (n) no later than July 1, 2003,or the date of its first scheduled pressure retest required after July 1, 2001,
whichever is earlier.

(o) Chlorine cargo tank motor vehicles. Each cargo tank motor vehicle used for the transportation of chlorine mustmeet the requirements in the following:

(1) Any hose, piping, or tubing usedfor loading or unloading that is mounted or carried on the motor vehicle may not be attached to any valve and must be capped at all ends to prevent the entry of moisture, except at the time of loading or unloading. Except at the time of loading and unloading, the pipe connection of each angle valve must be closed with a screw plug which ischained or otherwise fastened to prevent misplacement.

(2) Each chlorine cargo tank motor vehicle angle valve must be tested to be leak free at not less than 225 psigusing dry air or inert gas before installation and thereafter every 2 years when performing the required periodic retest in §180.407(c) of this subchapter. Prior to each loading, the cargo tank motor vehicle must be inspected and the angle valves and gasketed jointsmust be examined and tested at a pressure of not less than 50 psig to determine that they are not leaking and are in proper condition for transportation. Any leaks must be corrected before the cargo tank motor vehicle is offered for transportation.

(3) Excess flow valves on the cargo
tank motor vehicle must meet the requirements of paragraph (n) of this section.

(p) Fusible elements. Each MC 330, MC331, or nonspecification cargo tank authorized under paragraph (k) of this
section must have a thermal means of closure for each internal self-closing


### 631 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.316

stop valve as specified in §178.337– 8(a)(4) of this subchapter.

(q) Manifolding is authorized forcargo tanks containing anhydrous ammonia provided each individual cargo tank is equipped with a pressure relief device or valves and gauging devices as required by paragraphs (h) and (i) ofthis section. Each valve must be tightly closed while the cargo tank is in transit. Each cargo tank must be filled separately.

[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.315, see the List of CFRSections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and
on GPO Access.

§ 173.316 Cryogenic liquids in cylinders.
(a) General requirements. (1) A cylinder may not be loaded with a cryogenic liquid colder than the design service temperature of the packaging.

(2) A cylinder may not be loaded with any material which may combine chemically with any residue in thepackaging to produce an unsafe condition.

(3) The jacket covering the insulation on a cylinder used to transport any flammable cryogenic liquid must be
made of steel.

(4) A valve or fitting made of aluminum with internal rubbing or abrading aluminum parts that may come in contact with oxygen in the cryogenic liquid form may not be installed on any cylinder used to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid unless the parts are
anodized in accordance with ASTM Standard B 580 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). (5) An aluminum valve, pipe or fitting may not be installed on any cylinder used to transport any flammable cryogenic liquid.

(6) Each cylinder must be providedwith one or more pressure relief devices, which must be installed andmaintained in compliance with the requirements of this subchapter.

(7) Each pressure relief device must
be installed and located so that the cooling effect of the contents duringventing will not prevent effective operation of the device.

(8) The maximum weight of the contents in a cylinder with a design service temperature colder than

¥ 320 ° F. may not exceed the design weight marked on the cylinder (see §178.35 of this subchapter).

(b) Pressure control systems. Each cylinder containing a cryogenic liquid must have a pressure control systemthat conforms to §173.301(f) and is designed and installed so that it will prevent the cylinder from becoming liquid
full.

(c) Specification cylinder requirements and filling limits. Specification DOT-4L cylinders (§178.57 of this subchapter) are authorized for the transportation of cryogenic liquids when carried in the vertical position as follows:

(1) For purposes of this section, ‘‘filling density,’’ except for hydrogen, is defined as the percent ratio of the weight of lading in the packaging to the weight of water that the packaging
will hold at 60 ° F. (1 lb. of water = 27.737
cubic inches at 60 ° F.).

(2) The cryogenic liquids of argon, nitrogen, oxygen, helium and neon must be loaded and shipped in accordance with the following table:

Pressure control valve setting (maximum startto-discharge pressure psig) Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight)

Air Argon Nitrogen Oxygen Helium Neon

45 ...................................................................... 82.5 133 76 108 12.5 109

75 ...................................................................... 80.3 130 74 105 12.5 104

105 .................................................................... 78.4 127 72 103 12.5 100

170 .................................................................... 76.2 122 70 100 12.5 92

230 .................................................................... 75.1 119 69 98 12.5 85

295 .................................................................... 73.3 115 68 96 12.5 77

360 .................................................................... 70.7 113 65 93 12.5 ..................

450 .................................................................... 65.9 111 61 91 12.5 ..................

540 .................................................................... 62.9 107 58 88 12.5 ..................

625 .................................................................... 60.1 104 55 86 12.5 ..................

Design service temperature ( ° F.) ....................

¥ 320

¥ 320

¥ 320

¥ 320

¥ 452

¥ 411


### 632 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.318

(3) Hydrogen (minimum 95 percent parahydrogen) must be loaded and shipped as follows:

Column 1 Column 2

Design service temperature .................... Minus 423 ° F. or
colder. Maximum permitted filling density, based

on cylinder capacity at minus 423 ° F (see Note 1). 6.7 percent.

The pressure control valve must be designed and set to limit the pressure in the cylinder to not more than. 17 psig.

N OTE 1: The filling density for hydrogen, cryogenic liquid is defined as the percent ratio of the weight of lading in a packaging to the weight of water that the packaging
will hold at minus 423 ° F. The volume of the packaging at minus 423 ° F is determined in
cubic inches. The volume is converted to pounds of water (1 lb. of water = 27.737 cubic inches).

(i) Each cylinder must be constructed, insulated and maintained so that during transportation the total rate of venting shall not exceed 30 SCF of hydrogen per hour.

(ii) In addition to the marking requirements in §178.35 of this subchapter, the total rate of venting in SCF per hour (SCFH) shall be marked on the top head or valve protection
band in letters at least one-half inch high as follows: ‘‘VENT RATE**SCFH’’ (with the asterisks replaced by the number representing the total rate of venting, in SCF per hour).

(iii) Carriage by highway is subject to the conditions specified in §177.840(a) of this subchapter.

(d) Mixtures of cryogenic liquid. Wherecharging requirements are not specifically prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section, the cryogenic liquid must beshipped in packagings and under conditions approved by the Associate Administrator.

[Amdt. 173–166, 48 FR 27695, June 16, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 173–166, 49 FR 24314, June 12, 1984; Amdt. 173–180, 49 FR 42735, Oct. 24, 1984; Amdt. 173–201, 52 FR 13041, Apr. 20, 1987: Amdt. 173–250, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24741, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 16013, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 54046, Sept. 7, 2004]

§ 173.318 Cryogenic liquids in cargo tanks.
(a) General requirements. (1) A cargotank may not be loaded with a cryogenic liquid colder than the design service temperature of the packaging.

(2) A cargo tank may not be loaded with any material that may combine chemically with any residue in thepackaging to produce an unsafe condition (see §178.338–15).

(3) The jacket covering the insulation on a tank used to transport a cryogenic liquid must be made of steel if the cryogenic liquid:

(i) Is to be transported by vessel (see §176.76(g) of this subchapter); or

(ii) Is oxygen or a flammable material.

(4) A valve or fitting made of aluminum with internal rubbing or abrading aluminum parts that may come in contact with oxygen in the cryogenic liquid form may not be installed onany cargo tank used to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid unless the parts
are anodized in accordance with ASTM Standard B 580 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(5) An aluminum valve, pipe or fitting, external to the jacket that retains lading during transportation may not be installed on any cargo tank used to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid or any flammable cryogenic liquid.

(6) A cargo tank used to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid must be provided with a manhole (see §178.338–6 of this subchapter).

(b) Pressure relief systems and pressure
control valves —(1) Types of pressure relief systems —(i) Tanks in oxygen and flammable cryogenic liquid service. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph, each tank in oxygen and flammablecryogenic liquid service must be protected by two independent pressure relief systems which are not connected in series, namely:

(A) A primary system of one or more pressure relief valves; and

(B) A secondary system of one of more frangible discs or pressure relief
valves. For a tank in carbon monoxide service, the secondary system must be pressure relief valves only.

(ii) Tanks in helium and atmosphericgas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service. For a tank used in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service, the tank must beprotected by at least one pressure relief system consisting of:


### 633 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.318

(A) One or more pressure relief valves; or

(B) A combination of one or more pressure relief valves and one or more frangible discs.

(2) Capacities of pressure relief systems —(i) Tanks in oxygen or flammable cryogenic liquid service. For tanks in oxygen or flammable cryogenic liquid service, the primary system and thesecondary system of pressure relief devices must each have a flow capacityequal to or greater than that calculated by the applicable formula in paragraph 5.3.2 or paragraph 5.3.3 ofCGA S–1.2 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). In addition:

(A) The primary pressure relief system must have a total flow capacity at a pressure not exceeding 120 percent of the tank’s design pressure.

(B) The secondary pressure relief system must have a total flow capacity at a pressure not exceeding 150 percent of the tank’s design pressure.

(C) The flow capacity and rating must be verified and marked by the
manufacturer of the device in accordance with CGA Pamphlet S–1.2.

(ii) Tanks in helium and atmosphericgas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service. For tanks in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenicliquid service, the pressure relief system must have a flow capacity equal to or greater than that calculated by the applicable formula in paragraphs 5.3.2 or 5.3.3 of CGA Pamphlet S–1.2. If the pressure relief system consists of a combination of pressure relief valves and frangible discs, the pressure reliefvalves must have a total venting capacity equal to or greater than that calculated by the applicable formula in paragraph 4.1.10.1.1 of CGA Pamphlet S–1.2. The pressure relief system musthave this total flow capacity at a pressure not exceeding 150 percent of thetank’s design pressure. The flow capacity and rating must be verified andmarked by the manufacturer of the device in accordance with CGA Pamphlet
S–1.2.

(3) Type and construction of pressure
relief devices. (i) Each pressure relief device must be designed and constructed for a pressure equal to or exceeding the tank’s design pressure at the coldest temperature reasonably expected to be
encountered.

(ii) Pressure relief devices must be either spring-loaded pressure reliefvalves or frangible discs. Pressure relief valves must be of a type that automatically open and close at predetermined pressures.

(4) Setting of pressure relief devices. (i) On a tank used in oxygen or flammable cryogenic liquid service, the pressure relief devices must perform as follows.

(A) Each pressure relief valve in theprimary relief system must be set-todischarge at a pressure no higher than110 percent of the tank’s design pressure.

(B) Each pressure relief device in the secondary pressure relief system must be designed to commence functioning at a pressure no lower than 130 percent and no higher than 150 percent of the tank’s design pressure.

(ii) On a tank used in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service, the pressure relief devices in the pressure relief systemmust be designed to commence functioning at no higher than 150 percent of the tank’s design pressure.

(5) Optional pressure relief devices and pressure control valves. In addition to the required pressure relief devices, a cargo tank in cryogenic liquid (except carbon monoxide) service may beequipped with one or both of the following:

(i) One or more pressure control valves set at a pressure below the tank’s design pressure.

(ii) One or more frangible discs set to function at a pressure not less than one
and one-half times or more than two times the tank’s design pressure.

(6) Maximum filling rate. (i) For a tankused in oxygen and flammable cryogenic liquid service, the maximum rate
at which the tank is filled must not exceed the liquid flow capacity of the primary pressure relief system rated at a pressure not exceeding 120 percent of the tank’s design pressure.

(ii) On a tank used in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service, the maximum rate
at which the tank is filled must not exceed the liquid flow capacity of thepressure relief valves rated at 150 percent of the tank’s design pressure.


### 634 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.318

(7) Arrangement and location of pressure relief devices. (i) The discharge from any pressure relief system mustbe directed upward and be unobstructed to the outside of the protective housing in such a manner as to prevent impingement of gas upon thejacket or any structural part of the vehicle.

(ii) Each pressure relief valve must be arranged or protected to prevent theaccumulation of foreign material between the relief valve and the atmospheric discharge opening in any reliefpiping. The arrangement must not impede flow through the device.

(iii) Each pressure relief valve must be designed and located to minimize the possibility of tampering. If thepressure setting or adjustment is external to the valve, the valve adjustment
must be sealed.

(iv) Each pressure relief device must
have direct communication with the vapor space of the tank at the midlength of the top centerline.

(v) Each pressure relief device must
be installed and located so that the cooling effect of the contents during venting will not prevent the effective operation of the device.

(8) Connections. (i) Each connection to a pressure relief device must be of sufficient size to allow the required rate of discharge through the pressure
relief device. The inlet connection
must be not less than one-half inch nominal pipe size.

(ii) A shut-off valve may be installed in a pressure relief system only when the required relief capacity is provided
at all times.

(9) Pressure relief devices for piping hose and vacuum-insulated jackets. (i) Each portion of connected liquid piping
or hose that can be closed at both endsmust be provided with either a hydrostatic pressure relief valve without an intervening shut-off valve, or a check valve permitting flow from the pipe or hose into the tank. If used, the relief valve must be located so as to prevent its discharge from impinging on the tank, piping, or operating personnel.

(ii) On a vacuum-insulated cargo tank the jacket must be protected by a
suitable relief device to release internal pressure. The discharge area of this device must be at least 0.00024 square inch per pound of water capacity of the
tank. This relief device must functionat a pressure not exceeding the internal design pressure of the jacket, calculated in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see §171.7of this subchapter), or 25 psig, whichever is less.

(10) Tank inlet, outlet, pressure reliefdevice and pressure control valve markings. (i) Each tank inlet and outlet, except pressure relief devices and pressure control valves, must be permanently marked to indicate whether itcommunicates with ‘‘vapor’’ or ‘‘liquid’’ when the tank is filled to the maximum permitted filling density.

(ii) Each pressure relief valve must be plainly and permanently marked with the pressure, in psig, at which it is set-to-discharge, the discharge rate of the device in SCF per minute(SCFM) of free air, and the manufacturer’s name or trade name and catalog number. The marked set-to-discharge pressure valve must be visible with the valve in its installed position. The rated discharge capacity of the device must be determined at a pressure of 120 percent of the design pressure of the
tank.

(iii) Each pressure control valve must be plainly and permanently marked with the pressure, in psig, at which it is set-to-discharge.

(c) Weight of lading requirements. The weight of a cryogenic liquid in the tank must be determined by weighing or by the use of a liquid level gauging device authorized in §178.338–14(a) of this subchapter, and may not exceed
the lesser of:

(1) The weight of lading in the tank, based on the water capacity stamped on the nameplate (§178.338–18(a)(4) of this subchapter) and the appropriate maximum permitted filling densityspecified in paragraph (f) of this section; or

(2) The maximum weight of lading for which the cargo tank was designed, as marked on the specification plate (see §178.338–18(b) of this subchapter).

(d) Outage. Except for a cargo tank containing helium, cryogenic liquid, a cargo tank offered for transportation must have an outage of at least two percent below the inlet of the pressure relief device or pressure control valve,


### 635 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.318

under conditions of incipient opening,
with the tank in a level attitude.

(e) Temperature. A flammable cryogenic liquid in a cargo tank at thestart of travel must be at a temperature sufficiently cold that the pressure setting of the pressure control valve or the required pressure relief valve, whichever is lower, will not be reached
in less time than the marked rated holding time for the cryogenic liquid (see paragraph (g)(3) of this section and §178.338–9(b) of this subchapter).

(f) Specification MC–338 (§178.338 of this subchapter) cargo tanks are authorized for the shipment of the following cryogenic liquids subject to the following additional requirements:

(1) For purposes of this section, ‘‘filling density’’ is defined as the percent ratio of the weight of lading in the tank to the weight of water that the tank will hold at the design service temperature (one pound of water=27.737
cubic inches at 60 ° F., or one gallon of
water = 231 cubic inches at 60 ° F. and weighs 8.32828 pounds).

(2) Air, argon, helium, nitrogen, and oxygen, cryogenic liquids must be loadedand shipped in accordance with the following table:

P RESSURE C ONTROL V ALVE S ETTING OR R ELIEF V ALVE S ETTING

Maximum set-todischarge pressure (psig) Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight)

Air Argon Helium Nitrogen Oxygen

26 .......................... ............................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ..........

..................... 30 .......................... 80.3 ....................... 129 ........................ 12.5 ....................... 74 ................ .......... 105
40 .......................... 79.2 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ..............

................. 50 .......................... 78.0 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ..............

................. 55 .......................... 77.3 ....................... 125 ........................ 12.5 ....................... 71 ................ .......... 102
60 .......................... 76.9 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ..............

................. 80 .......................... 75.3 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ..............

................. 85 .......................... 75.1 ....................... 121 ........................ 12.5 ....................... .................. ............. 99
100 ........................ 73.0 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............

................ 105 ........................ 73.7 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... 67 .............

............. 120 ........................ 72.2 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............

................ 140 ........................ 71.4 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............

................ 145 ........................ 70.9 ....................... 115 ........................ 12.5 ....................... 64 ................. ......... 94
180 ........................ 68.3 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............

................ 200 ........................ 67.3 ....................... 110 ........................ 12.5 ....................... 61 ................. ......... 91
250 ........................ 63.3 ....................... 106 ........................ 12.5 ....................... 57 ................. ......... 87
275 ........................ 62.3 ....................... 105 ........................ 12.5 ....................... 56 ................. ......... 86
325 ........................ 59.4 ....................... 101 ........................ ............................... 53 ............. ............. 83

Design service temperature. ¥ 320 ° F ...............

¥ 320 ° F ...............

¥ 452 ° F ...............

¥ 320 ° F ...............

¥ 320 ° F

(3) Carbon monoxide, hydrogen (minimum 95 percent para-hydrogen), ethylene, and methane or natural gas, cryogenic liquids must be loaded and shipped in accordance with the following table:

P RESSURE C ONTROL V ALVE S ETTING OR R ELIEF V ALVE S ETTING

Maximum set-to-discharge pressure (psig) Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight)

Carbon monoxide Ethylene Hydrogen Methane or natural gas

13 .................................. ...................................... ...................................... 6.6 ............

.................... 15 .................................. 75.0 .............................. ...................................... 6.6 ................ ................ 40.5

17 .................................. 74.0 .............................. ...................................... 6.6 ................

................ 20 .................................. ...................................... 53.5 .............................. ................... ................... 40.0

25 .................................. 73.0 .............................. ...................................... ...................

................... 30 .................................. 72.0 .............................. 52.7 .............................. 6.3 .................... ............ 39.1

35 .................................. ...................................... ...................................... ...............

....................... 40 .................................. ...................................... 52.0 .............................. ................... ................... 38.6

45 .................................. 71.5 .............................. ...................................... ...................

................... 50 .................................. ...................................... 51.4 .............................. 6.0 ................ ................ 38.2

55 .................................. ...................................... ...................................... ...............

....................... 60 .................................. ...................................... 50.8 .............................. ...................

................... 70 .................................. ...................................... 50.2 .............................. 5.7 ................ ................ 37.5

90 .................................. ...................................... 49.2 .............................. ...................

...................


### 636 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.318

P RESSURE C ONTROL V ALVE S ETTING OR R ELIEF V ALVE S ETTING —Continued

Maximum set-to-discharge pressure (psig) Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight)

Carbon monoxide Ethylene Hydrogen Methane or natural gas

95 .................................. ...................................... ...................................... ...............

....................... 100 ................................ ...................................... 48.4 .............................. 5.4 ................. ............... 36.6
115 ................................ ...................................... 48.2 .............................. ....................

.................. 125 ................................ ...................................... ...................................... 5.0 .............

................... 150 ................................ ...................................... ...................................... 4.5 .............

................... 175 ................................ 62.5 .............................. 45.8 .............................. ........................

.............. 285 ................................ 56.0 .............................. ...................................... ....................

..................

Design service temperature. ¥ 320 ° F ......................

¥ 155 ° F ......................

¥ 423 ° F ......................

¥ 260 ° F

(4) Mixtures of cryogenic liquid. Wherecharging requirements are not specifically prescribed in this paragraph (f), the cryogenic liquid must be shipped inpackagings and under conditions approved by the Associate Administrator.

(g) One-way travel time; marking. The jacket of a cargo tank to be used to transport a flammable cryogenic liquid must be marked on its right side near the front, in letters and numbers atleast two inches high, ‘‘One-Way-Travel-Time

ll hrs.’’, with the blank filledin with a number indicating the oneway travel time (OWTT), in hours, ofthe cargo tank for the flammable cryogenic liquid to be transported. A cargo tank that is partially unloaded at one
or more locations must have additional marking ‘‘One-Way-Travel-Time

ll hrs.

ll psig to

ll psig at

ll percent filling density,’’ with the secondblank filled in with the pressure existing after partial unloading and the
third blank filled in with the set-to-discharge pressure of the control valve or pressure relief valve, and the fourth blank with the filling density following partial unloading. Multiple OWTT markings for different pressure levels are permitted. The abbreviation ‘‘OWTT’’ may be used in place of the words ‘‘One-way-travel-time’’ in the marking required by this paragraph.

(1) OWTT is based on the marked rated holding time (MRHT) of the cargo tank for the cryogenic liquid to be transported in the cargo tank. If theMRHT for the flammable cryogenic liquid is not displayed on or adjacent to the specification plate, this MRHT may
be derived.

(2) The MRHT is converted to OWTT, in hours, as follows: (i) For a tank with an MRHT of 72 hours or less,

OWTT = (MRHT ¥ 24) / 2

(ii) For a tank with an MRHT greater than 72 hours,

OWTT = MRHT ¥ 48

(3) Each cargo tank motor vehicleused to transport a flammable cryogenic liquid must be examined after each shipment to determine its actual holding time. The record required by §177.840(h) of this subchapter may be
used for this determination. If the examination indicates that the actual holding time of the cargo tank, afteradjustment to reflect an average ambient temperature of 85 ° F, is less than 90 percent of the marked rated holding time (MRHT) for the cryogenic liquid marked on the specification plate or adjacent thereto (see §178.338–18(b) of this subchapter), the tank may not be refilled with any flammable cryogenic liquid until it is restored to its markedrated holding time value or it is remarked with the actual marked ratedholding time determined by this examination. If the name of the flammable cryogenic liquid that was transported and its marked rated holding time is not displayed on or adjacent to the specification plate, this requirement may be met by deriving the MRHT of the cargo tank for that flammable cryogenic liquid and comparing that derived MRHT with the actual holding time after adjustment.

[Amdt. 173–166, 48 FR 27696, June 16, 1983]

E DITORIAL N OTE : For F EDERAL R EGISTER citations affecting §173.318, see the List of CFR


### 637 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.319

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and

on GPO Access.

§ 173.319 Cryogenic liquids in tank

cars. (a) General requirements. (1) A tank car containing a flammable cryogenic liquid may not be shipped unless it was loaded by, or with the consent of, the
owner of the tank car.

(2) The amount of flammable cryogenic liquid loaded into a tank car must be determined, either by direct measurement or by calculation based on weight, to verify that the tank has
not been filled to a level in excess of the limits specified in paragraph (d)(2)of this section. The weight of any flammable cryogenic liquid loaded, except hydrogen, must be checked by use of scales after disconnecting the loading
line.

(3) The shipper shall notify the Federal Railroad Administration whenever a tank car containing any flammable cryogenic liquid is not received by the consignee within 20 days from the dateof shipment. Notification to the Federal Railroad Administration may be made by e-mail to Hmassist@fra.dot.gov or telephone call to (202) 493–6229.

(4) A tank car may not be loaded with any flammable cryogenic liquid:

(i) That may combine chemically with any residue in the tank to produce an unsafe condition,

(ii) That is colder than the design service temperature of the tank, (iii) If the average daily pressure rise in the tank exceeded 3 psig during the prior shipment,

(iv) Unless it is marked with the name of contents, in accordance with §172.330 of this subchapter.

(b) When a tank car containing a flammable cryogenic liquid is offered for transportation:

(1) At least 0.5 percent outage mustbe provided below the inlet of the pressure relief or pressure control valve at the start-to-discharge pressure setting of the valve, with the tank car in a level attitude, and

(2) The absolute pressure in the annular space must be less than 75 microns of mercury.

(c) Temperature. A flammable cryogenic liquid must be loaded into a tankcar at such a temperature that the average daily pressure rise during transportation will not exceed 3 psig (see paragraph (a)(4)(iii) of this section).

(d) A Class DOT-113 tank car is authorized for the shipment of the following cryogenic liquids subject to the following additional requirements:

(1) For purposes of this section, ‘‘filling density’’ is defined as the percent ratio of the weight of lading in the tank to the weight of water that the tank will hold at the design service temperature (one pound of water =
27.737 cubic inches at 60 ° F., or one gallon of water = 231 cubic inches at 60 ° F. and weighs 8.32828 pounds).

(2) Ethylene, and hydrogen (minimum95 percent parahydrogen), cryogenic liquids must be loaded and shipped in accordance with the following table:

P RESSURE C ONTROL V ALVE S ETTING OR R ELIEF V ALVE S ETTING

Maximum start-to-discharge pressure (psig) Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight)

Ethylene Ethylene Ethlyene Hydrogen

17 ........................................................... ................................ ................................ .. .............................. 6.60.
45 ........................................................... 52.8 ....................... ................................ .......

......................... 75 ........................................................... ................................ 51.1 ....................... 51.1 ...

.................... Maximum pressure when offered for

transportation. 10 psig ................... 10 psig ................... 20 psig ...................

Design service temperature ................... Minus 260 ° F ......... Minus 260 ° F ......... Minus 155 ° F ......... Minus 423 ° F. Specification (see § 180.507(b)(3) of

this subchapter). 113D60W ..............
113C60W .............. 113C120W ............ 113D120W ............ 113A175W.
113A60W.

(e) Special requirements for class DOT
113 tank cars —(1) A class DOT-113 tank car need not be periodically pressure tested; however, each shipment must be monitored to determine the average daily pressure rise in the tank car. If the average daily pressure rise during any shipment exceeds 0.2 Bar (3 psig)


### 638 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.320

per day, the tank must be tested forthermal integrity prior to any subsequent shipment.

(2) Thermal integrity test. When required by paragraph (e)(1) of this section, either of the following thermal integrity tests may be used:

(i) Pressure rise test. The pressure rise in the tank may not exceed 0.34 Bar (5 psig) in 24 hours. When the pressure rise test is performed, the absolute pressure in the annular space of theloaded tank car may not exceed 75 microns of mercury at the beginning of the test and may not increase morethan 25 microns during the 24-hour period; or

(ii) Calculated heat transfer rate test.The insulation system must be performance tested as prescribed in §179.400–4 of this subchapter. When the
calculated heat transfer rate test is performed, the absolute pressure in the annular space of the loaded tank car may not exceed 75 microns of mercury at the beginning of the test and may
not increase more than 25 microns during the 24-hour period. The calculated heat transfer rate in 24 hours may not
exceed:

(A) 120 percent of the appropriate standard heat transfer rate specified in§179.401–1 of this subchapter, for DOT113A60W and DOT-113C120W tank cars;

(B) 122.808 joules (0.1164 Btu/day/lb.) of inner tank car water capacity, for DOT-113A175W tank cars;

(C) 345.215 joules (0.3272 Btu/day/lb.) of inner tank car water capacity, for DOT-113C60W and 113D60W tank cars;

or (D) 500.09 joules (0.4740 Btu/day/lb.) of inner tank car water capacity, for
DOT-113D120W tank cars.

(3) A tank car that fails a test prescribed in paragraph (e)(2) of this section must be removed from hazardous
materials service. A tank car removed
from hazardous materials service because it failed a test prescribed in paragraph (e)(2) of this section may notbe used to transport a hazardous material unless the tank car conforms to allapplicable requirements of this subchapter.

(4) Each rupture disc must be replaced every 12 months, and the replacement date must be marked on the car near the pressure relief valve information.

(5) Pressure relief valves and alternate pressure relief valves must betested every five years. The start-todischarge pressure and vapor tight pressure requirements for the pressure relief valves must be as specified in§179.401–1 of this subchapter. The alternate pressure relief device values specified in §179.401–1 of this subchapter for a DOT-113C120W tank car apply to a
DOT-113D120W tank car.

(49 U.S.C. 1803, 1804, 1808; 49 CFR 1.53, app. A to part 1)

[Amdt. 173–166, 48 FR 27698, June 16, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 173–245, Sept. 21, 1995; 65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45184, 45379, 45383, Aug. 28, 2001; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005]

§ 173.320 Cryogenic liquids; exceptions.
(a) Atmospheric gases and helium,cryogenic liquids, in Dewar flasks, insulated cylinders, insulated portabletanks, insulated cargo tanks, and insulated tank cars, designed and constructed so that the pressure in such packagings will not exceed 25.3 psig under ambient temperature conditions during transportation are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter when transported by motor vehicle orrailcar except as specified in paragraphs (a)(1), (a)(2), and (a)(3) of this

section.

(1) Sections 171.15 and 171.16 of this subchapter pertaining to the reporting of incidents, not including a release that is the result of venting through a pressure control valve, or the neck of
the Dewar flask.

(2) Subparts A, B, C, D, G and H of part 172, (§§174.24 for rail and 177.817 for highway) and in addition, part 172 in its entirety for oxygen.

(3) Subparts A and B of part 173, and §§174.1 and 177.800, 177.804, and 177.823 of this subchapter.

(b) The requirements of this subchapter do not apply to atmospheric gases and helium:

(1) During loading and unloading operations (pressure rises may exceed 25.3 psig); or

(2) When used in operation of a process system; such as a refrigeration system (pressure may exceed 25.3 psig).


### 639 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.323

(c) For transportation aboard aircraft, see the ICAO Technical Instructions (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), Packing Instruction 202 and the packaging specifications in part 6, chapter 5.

[Amdt. 173–201, 52 FR 13043, Apr. 20, 1987, as amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 33436, June 21, 2001; 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 48570, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR 75746, Dec. 31, 2003]

§ 173.321 Ethylamine.

Ethylamine must be packaged as follows:

(a) In 1A1 drums which meet PackingGroup I performance level requirements.

(b) In specification cylinders as prescribed for any compressed gas except acetylene.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52667, Dec. 21, 1990]

§ 173.322 Ethyl chloride.

Ethyl chloride must be packaged inany of the following single or combination non-bulk packagings which meetPacking Group I performance level requirements:

(a) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes with glass, earthenware, or metal inner receptacles not over 500 g (17.6 ounces) capacity each;

(b) In 4G fiberboard boxes with glass,earthenware, or metal inner receptacles not over 500 g (17.6 ounces) capacity each. Outer packagings may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight;

(c) In 1A1 drums of not over 100 L (26 gallons) capacity each; or

(d) In specification cylinders as prescribed for any compressed gas exceptacetylene. Cylinders made of aluminum alloy are not authorized.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52667, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 74 FR 2266, Jan. 14, 2009]

§ 173.323 Ethylene oxide.

(a) For packaging ethylene oxide in non-bulk packagings, silver mercury or any of its alloys or copper may not be used in any part of a packaging, valve, or other packaging appurtenance if that part, during normal conditions of transportation, may come in contact with ethylene oxide liquid or vapor. Copper alloys may be used only wheregas mixtures do not contain free acetylene at any concentration that will form copper acetylene. All packaging and gaskets must be constructed of materials which are compatible with ethylene oxide and do not lower the auto-ignition temperature of ethylene
oxide.

(b) Ethylene oxide must be packaged in one of the following:

(1) In hermetically sealed glass ormetal inner packagings suitably cushioned in an outer package authorized by §173.201(b). The maximum quantity permitted in any glass inner packaging is 100 g (3.5 ounces), and the maximum quantity permitted in any metal inner packaging is 340 g (12 ounces). After filling, each inner packaging shall be determined to be leak-tight by placing the inner packaging in a hot water bath at a temperature, and for a periodof time, sufficient to ensure that an internal pressure equal to the vapor pressure of ethylene oxide at 55 ° C is achieved. The total quantity in any outer packaging shall not exceed 100 g (3.5 ounces), and the total quantity in any outer packaging containing onlymetal inner packagings shall not exceed 2.5 kg (5.5 pounds). Each completed package must be capable ofpassing all Packing Group I performance tests.

(2) In specification cylinders or UN pressure receptacles, as authorized for any compressed gas except acetylene. Pressurizing valves and insulation arerequired for cylinders over 4 L (1 gallon) capacity. Eductor tubes must beprovided for cylinders over 19 L (5 gallons) capacity. Cylinders must be seamless or welded steel (not brazed) with a nominal capacity of no more than 115 L (30 gallons) and may not be liquid full below 82 ° C (180 ° F). Before each refilling, each cylinder must be tested for leakage at no less than 103.4 kPa (15 psig) pressure. In addition, each cylinder must be equipped with a fusible type relief device with yield temperature of 69 ° C to 77 ° C (157 ° F to
170 ° F). The capacity of the relief device and the effectiveness of the insulation must be such that the charged cylinder will not explode when tested by the method described in CGA Pamphlet C–14 or other equivalent method.

(3) In 1A1 steel drums of no more than 231 L (61 gallons) and meeting


### 640 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.323

Packing Group I performance standards. The drum must be lagged of all
welded construction with the inner shell having a minimum thickness of 1.7 mm (0.068 inches) and the outer shell having a minimum thickness of 2.4 mm (0.095 inches). Drums must be capable of withstanding a hydrostatictest pressure of 690 kPa (100 psig). Lagging must be of sufficient thickness sothat the drum, when filled with ethylene oxide and equipped with the required pressure relief device, will not rupture when exposed to fire. The drum may not be liquid full below 85 ° C (185

° F), and must be marked ‘‘THIS ENDUP’’ on the top head. Before each refilling, each drum must be tested for leakage at no less than 103 kPa (15 psig) pressure. Each drum must be equipped with a fusible type relief device with yield temperature of 69 ° C to 77 ° C (157

° F to 170 ° F), and the capacity of the
relief device must be such that thefilled drum is capable of passing, without rupture, the test method describedin CGA Pamphlet C–14 or other equivalent method.

(c) When §172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only thefollowing bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements ofsubparts A and B of this part, the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table, and paragraphs (d) through (j) of this section:

(1) Tank cars. Class DOT 105 tank

cars:

(i) Each tank car built before March 16, 2009 must have a tank test pressure of at least 20.7 Bar (300 psig); and

(ii) Except as provided in §173.314(d), tank cars built on or after March 16, 2009 used for the transportation ofethylene oxide must meet the applicable authorized tank car specification listed in the table in §173.314(c).

(2) Cargo tanks. Specification MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles.

(3) Portable tanks. DOT 51 portable
tanks.

(d) The pressure relief devices must be set to function at 517 kPa (75 psig).
Portable tanks fitted with non-reclosing devices made and in use prior to December 31, 1987, may continue to be used in ethylene oxide service. (e) In determining outage, consideration must be given to the lading temperature and solubility of inert gas padding in ethylene oxide as well as the partial pressure exerted by the gas padding.

(f) Each tank, loaded or empty, must be padded with dry nitrogen or other suitable inert gas of sufficient quantity to render the vapor space of the tank nonflammable up to 41 ° C (105 ° F). The gas used for padding must be free ofimpurities which may cause the ethylene oxide to polymerize, decompose orundergo other violent chemical reaction.

(g) Copper, silver, mercury, magnesium or their alloys may not be used in any part of the tank or appurtenances that are normally in contact with the lading.

(h) Neoprene, natural rubber and asbestos gaskets are prohibited. All packing and gaskets must be made of materials which do not react with or lower the autoignition temperature of the lading.

(i) Each tank must be insulated with cork (at least 10 cm (4 inches) thick), or mineral wool, fiberglass or other
suitable insulation material of sufficient thickness so that the thermal
conductance at 16 ° C (60 ° F) is not more than 0.075 Btu per hour per square foot per degree F. temperature differential. Portable tanks made and in use priorto December 31, 1987 equipped with fusible plugs instead of a pressure reliefvalve or rupture disc, must have sufficient insulation so that the tank as filled for shipment will not rupture in a fire. The insulation on portable tanks or cargo tank motor vehicles must be protected with a steel jacket at least2.54 mm (0.100 inch) thick, or as required by the specification.

(j) Tank car tanks built after December 30, 1971 must be equipped with a
thermometer well.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52667, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66279, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–236, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173– 234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173–145, 60 FR 49076, Sept. 21, 1995; 66 FR 45380, 45383, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75746, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 76178, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 33884, June 12, 2006; 74 FR 1801, Jan. 13, 2009]


### 641 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.337

§ 173.334 Organic phosphates mixed with compressed gas.
Hexaethyl tetraphosphate, parathion,tetraethyl dithio pyrophosphate, tetraethyl pyrophosphate, or other Division 6.1 organic phosphates (including a compound or mixture), may be mixed with a non-flammable compressed gas. This mixture may not contain more than 20 percent by weight of organic phosphate and must be packaged in DOT 3A240, 3AA240, 3B240, 4B240,4BA240, 4BW240 or UN cylinders meeting all of the following requirements:

(a) Each cylinder may be filled withnot more than 5 kg (11.0 lb) of the mixture, to a maximum filling density of not more than 80 percent of the water capacity.

(b) No cylinder may be equipped with an education tube or a fusible plug.

(c) No cylinder may be equipped withany valve unless the valve is a type approved by the Associate Administrator.

(d) Cylinders must be overpacked in abox, crate, or other strong outer packaging conforming to the requirements of §173.25 and arranged to protect eachvalve or other closing device from damage. Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, no more than four cylinders may be packed in a strong outer packaging. Each strong outerpackaging with its closing device protection must be sufficiently strong to protect all parts of each cylinder fromdeformation or leakage if the completed package is dropped 1.8 m (6 feet) onto a non-yielding surface, such as concrete or steel, impacting at the packaging’s weakest point.

(e) Cylinders may be packed in strong
wooden boxes with valves or other closing devices protected from damage, with not more than twelve cylinders in
one outside wooden box. An outer fiberboard box may be used when not more than four such cylinders are to be shipped in one packaging. Valves must be adequately protected. Box and valve protection must be of sufficient strength to protect all parts of innerpackagings and valves from deformation or breakage resulting from a dropof at least 1.8 m (6 feet) onto a nonyielding surface, such as concrete or steel, impacting at the weakest point.

[67 FR 51651, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006; 75 FR 5395, Feb. 2, 2010]

E DITORIAL N OTE : At 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27,2002, §173.334(f) was amended, however, paragraph (f) does not exist in this section.

§ 173.335 [Reserved]

§ 173.336 Nitrogen dioxide, liquefied, or dinitrogen tetroxide, liquefied. (a) Nitrogen dioxide, liquefied, or dinitrogen tetroxide, liquefied, must bepackaged in specification or UN cylinders as prescribed in §173.192, except
valves are not authorized. UN tubes
and MEGCs are not authorized for use. Cylinders must be equipped with a
stainless steel valve and valve seat
that will not deteriorate in contactwith nitrogen dioxide. Each valve opening must be closed by a solid metal plug with tapered thread properly luted to prevent leakage. Transportation in DOT 3AL cylinders is authorized only by highway and rail.

(b) Each UN pressure receptacle must
be cleaned in accordance with the requirements of ISO 11621 (IBR, see §171.7of this subchapter). Each DOT specification cylinder must be cleaned according to the requirements of GSAFederal Specification RR–C–901D, paragraphs 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). Cleaning agents equivalent to those specified in RR–C–901D may be used; however, any cleaning agent must not be capable of reacting with oxygen. One cylinder selected at random from a group of 200 or fewer
and cleaned at the same time must be
tested for oil contamination in accordance with Specification RR–C–901D, paragraph 4.3.2 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) and meet the standard of cleanliness specified therein.

[71 FR 33885, June 12, 2006]

§ 173.337 Nitric oxide.

(a) Nitric oxide must be packaged incylinders conforming to the requirements of §173.40 and as follows:

(1) DOT specification cylinder. In a DOT 3A1800, 3AA1800, 3E1800, or 3AL1800 cylinder. A DOT specification cylinder must be charged to a pressure of not more than 5,170 kPa (750 psi) at


### 642 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.338

21 ° C (70 ° F). Transportation of nitricoxide in a DOT 3AL is cylinder is authorized only by highway and rail.

(2) UN cylinder. In a UN cylinder with a minimum test pressure of 200 bar. The maximum working pressure of the cylinder must not exceed 50 bar. The pressure in the cylinder at 65 ° C (149 ° F) may not exceed the test pressure. The
use of UN tubes and MEGCs is not authorized.

(3) Valves. Cylinders must be equipped with a stainless steel valve
and valve seat that will not deteriorate in contact with nitric oxide. Cylinders or valves may not be equipped with pressure relief devices of any type.

(b) Each UN cylinder must be cleaned in accordance with the requirements ofISO 11621 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). Each DOT specification cylinder must be cleaned in compliance with the requirements of GSA Federal Specification RR–C–901D, paragraphs 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 (IBR, see §171.7 of thissubchapter). Cleaning agents equivalent to those specified in Federal Specification RR–C–901D may be used; however, any cleaning agent must not be capable of reacting with oxygen. One cylinder selected at random from a group of 200 or fewer and cleaned at the
same time must be tested for oil contamination in accordance with Federal Specification RR–C–901D paragraph
4.3.2 and meet the standard of cleanliness specified therein.

[71 FR 33885, June 12, 2006]

§ 173.338 Tungsten hexafluoride.

(a) Tungsten hexafluoride must be packaged in specification 3A, 3AA, 3BN, or 3E (§§178.36, 178.37, 178.39, 178.42 of this subchapter) cylinders. Cylindersmust be equipped with a valve protection cap or be packed in a strong outer packaging meeting the provisions of §173.40. Outlets of any valves must be capped or plugged. As an alternative, the cylinder opening may be closed by the use of a metal plug. Specification 3E cylinders must be shipped in an overpack that meets the provisions of §173.40.

(b) In place of the volumetric expansion test, DOT 3BN cylinders used inexclusive service may be given a complete external visual inspection in conformance with part 180, subpart C, of this subchapter, at the time such periodic requalification becomes due. Cylinders that undergo a complete external visual inspection, in place of the volumetric expansion test, must be condemned if removed from tungsten
hexafluoride service.

[ 74 FR 16143, Apr. 9, 2009, as amended at 75 FR 5395, Feb. 2, 2010]

§ 173.340 Tear gas devices.

(a) Packagings for tear gas devicesmust be approved prior to initial transportation by the Associate Administrator.

(b) Tear gas devices may not be assembled with, or packed in the same packaging with, mechanically- or manually-operated firing, igniting, bursting, or other functioning elements unless of a type and design which hasbeen approved by the Associate Administrator.

(c) Tear gas grenades, tear gas candles, and similar devices must be packaged in one of the following packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performance level:

(1) In UN 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F metalstrapped wooden boxes. Functioning elements not assembled in grenades ordevices must be in a separate compartment of these boxes, or in inner or separate outer boxes, UN 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or4F, and must be so packed and cushioned that they may not come in contact with each other or with the walls of the box during transportation. Not more than 50 tear gas devices and 50 functioning elements must be packed in one box, and the gross weight of the outer box may not exceed 35 kg (77 pounds).

(2) In a UN 1A2 metal drum. Functioning elements must be packed in aseparate inner packaging or compartment. Not more than 24 tear gas devices and 24 functioning elements must be packed in one outer drum, and thegross weight of the drum may not exceed 35 kg (77 pounds).

(3) In a UN 4G fiberboard box with inside tear gas devices meeting Specifications 2P or 2Q. Each inside packaging must be placed in fiberboard tubes
fitted with metal ends or a fiber box with suitable padding. Not more than 30 inner packagings must be packed in


### 643 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.403

one outer box, and the gross weight of the outer box may not exceed 16 kg (35 pounds).

(4) In other packagings of a type or design which has been approved by the
Associate Administrator.

(d) Tear gas devices may be shipped completely assembled when offered by or consigned to the U.S. Department ofDefense, provided the functioning elements are so packed that they cannotaccidentally function. Outer packagings must be UN 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F metal-strapped wooden boxes.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52669, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



### Subpart H [ Reserved ]

Subpart I—Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials

S OURCE : Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, unless otherwise noted.

§ 173.401 Scope.

(a) This subpart sets forth requirements for the packaging and transportation of Class 7 (radioactive) materials by offerors and carriers subject tothis subchapter. The requirements prescribed in this subpart are in addition to, not in place of, other requirements set forth in this subchapter for Class 7 (radioactive) materials and those of the Nuclear Regulatory Commission in 10 CFR part 71.

(b) This subpart does not apply to: (1) Class 7 (radioactive) materials produced, used, transported, or stored
within an establishment other thanduring the course of transportation, including storage in transportation.

(2) Class 7 (radioactive) materialsthat have been implanted or incorporated into, and are still in, a personor live animal for diagnosis or treatment.

(3) Class 7 (radioactive) material that is an integral part of the means of transport.

(4) Natural material and ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides which are not intended to beprocessed for use of these radionuclides, provided the activity concentration of the material does not exceed 10 times the values specified in §173.436.

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 69 FR 3670, Jan. 26, 2004]

§ 173.403 Definitions.

For purposes of this subpart—
A 1 means the maximum activity ofspecial form Class 7 (radioactive) material permitted in a Type A package. This value is either listed in §173.435 or may be derived in accordance with the procedures prescribed in §173.433.

A 2 means the maximum activity of Class 7 (radioactive) material, otherthan special form material, LSA material, and SCO, permitted in a Type A package. This value is either listed in§173.435 or may be derived in accordance with the procedures prescribed in §173.433.

Class 7 (radioactive) material See the
definition of Radioactive material in this

section.

Closed transport vehicle means a transport vehicle or conveyance equippedwith a securely attached exterior enclosure that during normal transportation restricts the access of unauthorized persons to the cargo space containing the Class 7 (radioactive) materials. The enclosure may be either temporary or permanent, and in the case ofpackaged materials may be of the ‘‘seethrough’’ type, and must limit access from top, sides, and bottom.

Consignment means a package orgroup of packages or load of radioactive material offered by a person for transport in the same shipment.

Containment system means the assembly of components of the packaging intended to retain the Class 7 (radioactive) material during transport.

Contamination means the presence of
a radioactive substance on a surface in quantities in excess of 0.4 Bq/cm 2 forbeta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters or 0.04 Bq/cm 2 forall other alpha emitters. Contamination exists in two phases.

(1) Fixed radioactive contamination
means radioactive contamination that
cannot be removed from a surface during normal conditions of transport.

(2) Non-fixed radioactive contamination
means radioactive contamination that can be removed from a surface during normal conditions of transport.


### 644 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.403

Conveyance means: (1) For transport by public highway or rail: any transport vehicle or large freight container;

(2) For transport by water: any vessel, or any hold, compartment, or defined deck area of a vessel includingany transport vehicle on board the vessel; and

(3) For transport by aircraft, any aircraft.

Criticality Safety Index (CSI) means a number (rounded up to the next tenth) which is used to provide control overthe accumulation of packages, overpacks or freight containers containing fissile material. The CSI for packagescontaining fissile material is determined in accordance with the instructions provided in 10 CFR 71.22, 71.23, and 71.59. The CSI for an overpack,freight container, or consignment containing fissile material packages is thearithmetic sum of the criticality safety indices of all the fissile materialpackages contained within the overpack, freight container, or consignment.

Design means the description of aspecial form Class 7 (radioactive) material, a package, packaging, or LSA-III, that enables those items to be fully identified. The description may include specifications, engineering drawings,reports showing compliance with regulatory requirements, and other relevant documentation.

Deuterium means, for the purposes of §173.453, deuterium and any deuterium compound, including heavy water, in
which the ratio of deuterium atoms to hydrogen atoms exceeds 1:5000.

Exclusive use means sole use by a single consignor of a conveyance for which all initial, intermediate, and final loading and unloading are carried
out in accordance with the direction ofthe consignor or consignee. The consignor and the carrier must ensure that any loading or unloading is performedby personnel having radiological training and resources appropriate for safehandling of the consignment. The consignor must provide to the initial carrier specific written instructions for maintenance of exclusive use shipment controls, including the vehicle surveyrequirement of §173.443 (c) as applicable, and include these instructions with the shipping paper information provided to the carrier by the consignor.

Exemption value means either an exempt material activity concentration or an exempt consignment activity limit listed in the table in §173.436, ordetermined according to the procedures described in §173.433, and used to determine whether a given physicallyradioactive material is sufficiently radioactive to be subject to the HMR (see definition of radioactive material). An exemption value is different from anexemption, as specified under the definition for special permit in §171.8 of this subchapter.

Fissile material means plutonium 239

, plutonium 241 , uranium 233 , uranium 235

,or any combination of these radionuclides. This term does not apply to material containing fissile nuclides,
unirradiated natural uranium and unirradiated depleted uranium, or to natural uranium or depleted uranium
that has been irradiated in thermal reactors only.

Freight container means a reusable container having a volume of 1.81 cubic meters (64 cubic feet) or more, designedand constructed to permit it being lifted with its contents intact and intended primarily for containment ofpackages in unit form during transportation. A ‘‘small freight container’’ is
one which has either one outer dimension less than 1.5 m (4.9 feet) or an internal volume of not more than 3.0 cubic meters (106 cubic feet). All other freight containers are designated as ‘‘large freight containers.’’

Graphite means, for the purposes of§173.453, graphite with a boron equivalent content less than 5 parts per million and density greater than 1.5 grams per cubic centimeter.

Highway route controlled quantitymeans a quantity within a single package which exceeds:

(1) 3,000 times the A 1 value of the radionuclides as specified in §173.435 forspecial form Class 7 (radioactive) material;

(2) 3,000 times the A 2 value of the radionuclides as specified in §173.435 fornormal form Class 7 (radioactive) material; or

(3) 1,000 TBq (27,000 Ci), whichever is
least.


### 645 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.403

Limited quantity of Class 7 (radioactive)
material means a quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) material not exceeding the material’s package limits specifiedin §173.425 and conforming with requirements specified in §173.421.

Low Specific Activity (LSA) material means Class 7 (radioactive) material with limited specific activity which satisfies the descriptions and limits setforth below. Shielding material surrounding the LSA material may not beconsidered in determining the estimated average specific activity of the package contents. LSA material must be in one of three groups:

(1) LSA-I:(i) Uranium and thorium ores, concentrates of uranium and thorium ores,and other ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides which are intended to be processed for the use of these radionuclides; or

(ii) Solid unirradiated natural uranium or depleted uranium or naturalthorium or their solid or liquid compounds or mixtures; or

(iii) Radioactive material other than fissile material, for which the A 2 value is unlimited; or

(iv) Other radioactive material, excluding fissile material in quantities not excepted under §173.453, in which the activity is distributed throughoutand the estimated average specific activity does not exceed 30 times the values for activity concentration specifiedin §173.436, or 30 times the default values listed in Table 8 of §173.433.

(2) LSA-II: (i) Water with tritium concentration up to 0.8 TBq/L (20.0 Ci/L); or

(ii) Other radioactive material in which the activity is distributedthroughout and the average specific activity does not exceed 10

¥ 4 A 2 /g for solids and gases, and 10

¥ 5 A 2 /g for liquids.

(3) LSA-III. Solids ( e.g., consolidated wastes, activated materials), excluding powders, that meet the requirements of §173.468 and in which:

(i) The radioactive material is distributed throughout a solid or a collection of solid objects, or is essentiallyuniformly distributed in a solid compact binding agent (such as concrete, bitumen, ceramic, etc.);

(ii) The radioactive material is relatively insoluble, or it is intrinsically contained in a relatively insoluble material, so that, even under loss of packaging, the loss of Class 7 (radioactive) material per package by leaching when placed in water for seven days would
not exceed 0.1 A 2 ; and

(iii) The estimated average specific activity of the solid, excluding any shielding material, does not exceed 2 × 10

¥ 3 A 2 /g.

Low toxicity alpha emitters means natural uranium; depleted uranium; natural thorium; uranium-235 or uranium238; thorium-232; thorium-228 and thorium-230 when contained in ores or physical and chemical concentrates; and alpha emitters with a half-life of less than 10 days.

Maximum normal operating pressure means the maximum gauge pressure that would develop in a containment system during a period of one year, in the absence of venting or cooling, under the heat conditions specified in 10 CFR 71.71(c)(1).

Multilateral approval means approval of a package design or shipment by the relevant Competent Authority of the country of origin and of each country through or into which the package orshipment is to be transported. This definition does not include approval froma country over which Class 7 (radioactive) materials are carried in aircraft, if there is no scheduled stop in that country.

Natural thorium means thorium with the naturally occurring distribution ofthorium isotopes (essentially 100 percent by weight of thorium-232).

Normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material means Class 7 (radioactive) which has not been demonstrated to qualify as ‘‘special form Class 7 (radioactive)
material.’’

Package means the packaging together with its radioactive contents as presented for transport.

(1) ‘‘Excepted package’’ means a packaging together with its exceptedClass 7 (radioactive) materials as specified in §§173.421–173.426 and 173.428.

(2) ‘‘Industrial package’’ means a packaging that, together with its lowspecific activity (LSA) material or surface contaminated object (SCO) contents, meets the requirements of


### 646 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.403

§§173.410 and 173.411. Industrial packages are categorized in §173.411 as either:

(i) ‘‘Industrial package Type 1 (IP– 1)’’;

(ii) ‘‘Industrial package Type 2 (IP– 2)’’; or

(iii) ‘‘Industrial package Type 3 (IP– 3)’’.

(3) ‘‘Type A package’’ means a packaging that, together with its radioactive contents limited to A 1 or A 2 as appropriate, meets the requirements of §§173.410 and 173.412 and is designed to retain the integrity of containment and shielding required by this part under normal conditions of transport as demonstrated by the tests set forth in §173.465 or §173.466, as appropriate. AType A package does not require Competent Authority approval.

(4) ‘‘Type B package’’ means a packaging designed to transport greater
than an A 1 or A 2 quantity of radioactive material that, together with itsradioactive contents, is designed to retain the integrity of containment and shielding required by this part when subjected to the normal conditions of transport and hypothetical accident test conditions set forth in 10 CFR part
71.

(i) ‘‘Type B(U) package’’ means a Type B packaging that, together withits radioactive contents, for international shipments requires unilateral approval only of the package design and of any stowage provisions that may be necessary for heat dissipation.

(ii) ‘‘Type B(M) package’’ means aType B packaging, together with its radioactive contents, that for international shipments requires multilateral approval of the package design,and may require approval of the conditions of shipment. Type B(M) packages are those Type B package designswhich have a maximum normal operating pressure of more than 700 kPa/

cm 2 (100 lb/in 2 ) gauge or a relief device
which would allow the release of Class7 (radioactive) material to the environment under the hypothetical accident conditions specified in 10 CFR part 71.

(5) ‘‘Fissile material package’’ means a packaging, together with its fissilematerial contents, which meets the requirements for fissile material packages described in subpart E of 10 CFR 71. A fissile material package may be aType AF package, a Type B(U)F package, or a Type B(M)F package.

Packaging means, for Class 7 (radioactive) materials, the assembly of components necessary to ensure compliance with the packaging requirements of this subpart. It may consist of oneor more receptacles, absorbent materials, spacing structures, thermal insulation, radiation shielding, serviceequipment for filling, emptying, venting and pressure relief, and devices for cooling or absorbing mechanicalshocks. The conveyance, tie-down system, and auxiliary equipment may sometimes be designated as part of the packaging.

Quality assurance means a systematicprogram of controls and inspections applied by each person involved in the transport of radioactive materialwhich provides confidence that a standard of safety prescribed in this subchapter is achieved in practice.

Radiation level means the radiation dose-equivalent rate expressed in millisieverts per hour or mSv/h(millirems per hour or mrem/h). Neutron flux densities may be converted into radiation levels according to
Table 1:

T ABLE 1—N EUTRON F LUENCE R ATES TO BE R E

GARDED AS E QUIVALENT TO A R ADIATION L EVEL OF 0.01 M S V / H (1 MREM / H ) 1

Energy of neutron Flux density equivalent to 0.01 mSv/h (1 mrem/h)

neutrons per square centimeter

per second (n/

cm 2 /s)

Thermal (2.510E–8) MeV ........................ 272.0

1 keV ....................................................... 272.0

10 keV ..................................................... 281.0

100 keV ................................................... 47.0

500 keV ................................................... 11.0

1 MeV ...................................................... 7.5

5 MeV ...................................................... 6.4

10 MeV .................................................... 6.7

1 Flux densities equivalent for energies between those listed in this table may be obtained by linear interpolation.

Radioactive contents means a Class 7 (radioactive) material, together with any contaminated or activated solids, liquids and gases within the packaging.


### 647 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.403

Radioactive instrument or article meansany manufactured instrument or article such as an instrument, clock, electronic tube or apparatus, or similar instrument or article having Class 7 (radioactive) material in gaseous or nondispersible solid form as a component part.

Radioactive material means any material containing radionuclides where both the activity concentration and the total activity in the consignment exceed the values specified in the table in §173.436 or values derived according to the instructions in §173.433.

Special form Class 7 (radioactive) material means either an indispersible solidradioactive material or a sealed capsule containing radioactive materialwhich satisfies the following conditions:

(1) It is either a single solid piece or a sealed capsule containing radioactive material that can be opened only by destroying the capsule;

(2) The piece or capsule has at least one dimension not less than 5 mm (0.2 in); and

(3) It satisfies the test requirements of §173.469. Special form encapsulationsdesigned in accordance with the requirements of §173.389(g) in effect onJune 30, 1983 (see 49 CFR part 173, revised as of October 1, 1982), and constructed prior to July 1, 1985 and special form encapsulations designed in accordance with the requirements of §173.403 in effect on March 31, 1996 (see 49 CFR part 173, revised as of October 1, 1995), and constructed prior to April 1, 1997, may continue to be used. Any other special form encapsulation mustmeet the requirements of this paragraph (3).

Specific activity of a radionuclide means the activity of the radionuclideper unit mass of that nuclide. The specific activity of a material in whichthe radionuclide is essentially uniformly distributed is the activity per
unit mass of the material.

Surface Contaminated Object (SCO) means a solid object which is not itself
radioactive but which has radioactive
material distributed on its surface. SCO exists in two phases:

(1) SCO-I: A solid object on which: (i) The non-fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm 2 (or the area of the surface if less
than 300 cm 2 ) does not exceed 4 Bq/cm 2 (10

¥ 4 microcurie/cm 2 ) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 0.4 Bq/cm 2 (10

¥ 5 microcurie/cm 2 ) for all other alpha
emitters;

(ii) The fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300

cm 2 (or the area of the surface if less
than 300 cm 2 ) does not exceed 4 × 10 4 Bq/

cm 2 (1.0 microcurie/cm 2 ) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 4 × 10 3 Bq/cm 2 (0.1
microcurie/cm 2 ) for all other alpha emitters; and

(iii) The non-fixed contaminationplus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 300

cm 2 (or the area of the surface if less
than 300 cm 2 ) does not exceed 4 × 10 4 Bq/

cm 2 (1 microcurie/cm 2 ) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 4 × 10 3 Bq/cm 2 (0.1
microcurie/cm 2 ) for all other alpha

emitters.

(2) SCO-II: A solid object on which
the limits for SCO-I are exceeded and
on which:

(i) The non-fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300

cm 2 (or the area of the surface if less
than 300 cm 2 ) does not exceed 400 Bq/

cm 2 (10

¥ 2 microcurie/cm 2 ) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 40 Bq/cm 2 (10

¥ 3 microcurie/

cm 2 ) for all other alpha emitters; (ii) The fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300

cm 2 (or the area of the surface if less
than 300 cm 2 ) does not exceed 8 × 10 5 Bq/

cm 2 (20 microcurie/cm 2 ) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 8 × 10 4 Bq/cm 2 (2 microcuries/cm 2 ) for all other alpha emitters; and

(iii) The non-fixed contaminationplus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 300

cm 2 (or the area of the surface if less
than 300 cm 2 ) does not exceed 8 × 10 5 Bq/

cm 2 (20 microcuries/cm 2 ) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 8 × 10 4 Bq/cm 2 (2 microcuries/cm 2 ) for all other alpha

emitters.

Transport index (TI) means the dimensionless number (rounded up to the next tenth) placed on the label of a


### 648 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.410

package, to designate the degree of control to be exercised by the carrier during transportation. The transport index is determined by multiplying the
maximum radiation level in millisieverts (mSv) per hour at 1 m (3.3 ft) from the external surface of thepackage by 100 (equivalent to the maximum radiation level in millirem per hour at 1 m (3.3 ft)).

Type A quantity means a quantity ofClass 7 (radioactive) material, the aggregate radioactivity which does not
exceed A 1 for special form Class 7 (radioactive) material of A 2 for normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material,
where A 1 and A 2 values are given in§173.435 or are determined in accordance with §173.433.

Type B quantity means a quantity ofmaterial greater than a Type A quantity.

Unilateral approval means approval ofa package design solely by the Competent Authority of the country of origin of the design.

Unirradiated thorium means thorium containing not more than 10

¥ 7 grams uranium-233 per gram of thorium-232.

Unirradiated uranium means uranium containing not more than 2 × 10 3 Bq of plutonium per gram of uranium-235,
not more than 9 × 10 6 Bq of fission products per gram of uranium-235 and not
more than 5 × 10

¥ 3 g of uranium-236 per gram of uranium-235.

Uranium—natural, depleted or enriched means the following:

(1)(i) ‘‘Natural uranium’’ meanschemically separated uranium containing the naturally occurring distribution of uranium isotopes (approximately 99.28% uranium-238 and 0.72% uranium-235 by mass).

(ii) ‘‘Depleted uranium’’ means uranium containing a lesser mass percentage of uranium-235 than in natural uranium.

(iii) ‘‘Enriched uranium’’ means uranium containing a greater mass percentage of uranium-235 than 0.72%.

(2) In all cases listed in this definition, a very small mass percentage of uranium-234 is present.

[69 FR 3670, Jan. 26, 2004; 69 FR 55116, Sept. 13, 2004; 69 FR 58843, Oct. 1, 2004; 70 FR 56098, Sept. 23, 2005; 70 FR 73165, Dec. 9, 2005] § 173.410 General design requirements.
In addition to the requirements of subparts A and B of this part, each package used for the shipment of Class7 (radioactive) materials must be designed so that—

(a) The package can be easily handled and properly secured in or on a conveyance during transport.

(b) Each lifting attachment that is a structural part of the package must be designed with a minimum safety factor of three against yielding when used tolift the package in the intended manner, and it must be designed so that failure of any lifting attachment under excessive load would not impair the ability of the package to meet other requirements of this subpart. Any other structural part of the package which could be used to lift the packagemust be capable of being rendered inoperable for lifting the package during transport or must be designed with strength equivalent to that required for lifting attachments.

(c) The external surface, as far aspracticable, will be free from protruding features and will be easily decontaminated.

(d) The outer layer of packaging will avoid, as far as practicable, pockets or crevices where water might collect.

(e) Each feature that is added to the package will not reduce the safety of the package.

(f) The package will be capable ofwithstanding the effects of any acceleration, vibration or vibration resonance that may arise under normalconditions of transport without any deterioration in the effectiveness of theclosing devices on the various receptacles or in the integrity of the package as a whole and without loosening or unintentionally releasing the nuts, bolts, or other securing devices even after repeated use (see §§173.24, 173.24a, and 173.24b).

(g) The materials of construction of the packaging and any components orstructure will be physically and chemically compatible with each other andwith the package contents. The behavior of the packaging and the package
contents under irradiation will be
taken into account.

(h) All valves through which the package contents could escape will be


### 649 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.411

protected against unauthorized operation.

(i) For transport by air— (1) The temperature of the accessible surfaces of the package will not exceed
50 ° C (122 ° F) at an ambient temperature of 38 ° C (100 ° F) with no account taken for insulation;

(2) The integrity of containment willnot be impaired if the package is exposed to ambient temperatures ranging
from

¥ 40 ° C (

¥ 40 ° F) to +55 ° C (131 ° F);
and

(3) Packages containing liquid contents will be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal pressure that produces a pressure differential of not less than 95 kPa (13.8 lb/in 2 ).

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173–244, 61 FR 20750, May 8, 1996; 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999]

§ 173.411 Industrial packagings.

(a) General. Each industrial packaging must comply with the requirements of this section which specifies packaging tests, and record retention applicable to Industrial Packaging Type 1 (IP–1), Industrial Packaging Type 2 (IP–2), and Industrial Packaging Type 3 (IP–3).

(b) Industrial packaging certification
and tests . (1) Each IP–1 must meet the general design requirements prescribed in §173.410.

(2) Each IP–2 must meet the general design requirements prescribed in §173.410 and when subjected to the testsspecified in §173.465(c) and (d) or evaluated against these tests by any of the methods authorized by §173.461(a), must prevent:

(i) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and

(ii) A significant increase in the radiation levels recorded or calculated at
the external surfaces for the condition
before the test.

(3) Each IP–3 packaging must meet the requirements for an IP–1 and an IP–2, and must meet the requirements specified in §173.412(a) through (j).

(4) Tank containers may be used as Industrial package Types 2 or 3 (Type IP–2 or Type IP–3) provided that:

(i) They satisfy the requirements for Type IP–1 specified in paragraph (b)(1);

(ii) They are designed to conform to the standards prescribed in Chapter 6.7, of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), ‘‘Requirements for the Design, Construction, Inspection andTesting of Portable Tanks and Multiple-Element Gas Containers (MEGCs),’’ or other requirements at least equivalent to those standards;

(iii) They are capable of withstanding a test pressure of 265 kPa (37.1 psig);
and

(iv) They are designed so that any additional shielding which is provided shall be capable of withstanding the static and dynamic stresses resulting from handling and routine conditions of transport and of preventing a loss of shielding integrity which would result
in more than a 20% increase in the radiation level at any external surface of
the tank containers.

(5) Tanks, other than tank containers, including DOT Specification IM 101 or IM 102 steel portable tanks, may be used as Industrial package Types 2 or 3 (Type IP–2) or (Type IP–3)for transporting LSA–I and LSA–II liquids and gases as prescribed in Table 6,provided that they conform to standards at least equivalent to those prescribed in paragraph (b)(4) of this section.

(6) Freight containers may be used as Industrial packages Types 2 or 3 (Type IP–2) or (Type IP–3) provided that:

(i) The radioactive contents are restricted to solid materials;

(ii) They satisfy the requirements for Type IP–1 specified in paragraph (b)(1);
and

(iii) They are designed to conform tothe standards prescribed in the International Organization for Standardization document ISO 1496–1: ‘‘Series 1 Freight Containers—Specifications andTesting—Part 1: General Cargo Containers; excluding dimensions and ratings (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).They shall be designed such that if subjected to the tests prescribed in that
document and the accelerations occurring during routine conditions of transport they would prevent:

(A) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and


### 650 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.412

(B) Loss of shielding integrity which
would result in more than a 20% increase in the radiation level at any external surface of the freight containers.

(7) Metal intermediate bulk containers may also be used as Industrial package Type 2 or 3 (Type IP–2 or Type IP–3), provided that:

(i) They satisfy the requirements for Type IP–1 specified in paragraph (b)(1);
and

(ii) They are designed to conform to the standards prescribed in Chapter 6.5
of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of DangerousGoods, (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), ‘‘Requirements for the Construction and Testing of Intermediate Bulk Containers,’’ for Packing Group I or II, and if they were subjected to the tests prescribed in that document, but with the drop test conducted in the most damaging orientation, they would prevent:

(A) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and

(B) Loss of shielding integrity which
would result in more than a 20% increase in the radiation level at any external surface of the intermediate bulk

containers.

(c) Except for IP–1 packagings, each offeror of an industrial package must maintain on file for at least one year after the latest shipment, and shall provide to the Associate Administrator on request, complete documentation of tests and an engineering evaluation or comparative data showing that theconstruction methods, packaging design, and materials of construction comply with that specification.

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173–244, 61 FR 20750, May 8, 1996; 66 FR 45379, 45383, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75747, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 3673, Jan. 26, 2004; 69 FR 55117, Sept. 13, 2004; 69 FR 58843, Oct. 1, 2004; 72 FR 55693, Oct. 1, 2007]

§ 173.412 Additional design requirements for Type A packages.
In addition to meeting the general design requirements prescribed in §173.410, each Type A packaging must be designed so that—

(a) The outside of the packaging incorporates a feature, such as a seal, that is not readily breakable, and that,while intact, is evidence that the package has not been opened. In the case of packages shipped in closed transport vehicles in exclusive use, the cargo compartment, instead of the individual packages, may be sealed.

(b) The smallest external dimension of the package is not less than 10 cm (4 inches).

(c) Containment and shielding is maintained during transportation and storage in a temperature range of

¥ 40

° C (

¥ 40 ° F) to 70 ° C (158 ° F). Special attention shall be given to liquid contents and to the potential degradation of the packaging materials within the temperature range.

(d) The packaging must include a containment system securely closed by a positive fastening device that cannotbe opened unintentionally or by pressure that may arise within the package during normal transport. Special formClass 7 (radioactive) material, as demonstrated in accordance with §173.469, may be considered as a component ofthe containment system. If the containment system forms a separate unit of the package, it must be securely closed by a positive fastening device that is independent of any other part of the package.

(e) For each component of the containment system account is taken,where applicable, of radiolytic decomposition of materials and the generation of gas by chemical reaction and radiolysis.

(f) The containment system will retain its radioactive contents under the reduction of ambient pressure to 25 kPa (3.6 psi).

(g) Each valve, other than a pressurerelief device, is provided with an enclosure to retain any leakage.

(h) Any radiation shield that encloses a component of the packaging specified as part of the containment system will prevent the unintentional escape of that component from the shield.

(i) Failure of any tie-down attachment that is a structural part of thepackaging, under both normal and accident conditions, must not impair the ability of the package to meet other requirements of this subpart.

(j) When evaluated against the performance requirements of this section and the tests specified in §173.465 or using any of the methods authorized by


### 651 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.416

§173.461(a), the packaging will prevent—

(1) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and

(2) A significant increase in the radiation levels recorded or calculated at
the external surfaces for the condition
before the test.

(k) Each packaging designed for liquids will—

(1) Be designed to provide for ullageto accommodate variations in temperature of the contents, dynamic effects and filling dynamics;

(2) Meet the conditions prescribed inparagraph (j) of this section when subjected to the tests specified in §173.466 or evaluated against these tests by any of the methods authorized by §173.461(a); and

(3) Either— (i) Have sufficient suitable absorbent
material to absorb twice the volume ofthe liquid contents. The absorbent material must be compatible with thepackage contents and suitably positioned to contact the liquid in the event of leakage; or

(ii) Have a containment system composed of primary inner and secondaryouter containment components designed to assure retention of the liquid contents within the secondary outercomponent in the event that the primary inner component leaks.

(l) Each package designed for gases, other than tritium not exceeding 40TBq (1080Ci) or noble gases not exceeding the A 2 value appropriate for the noble gas, will be able to prevent lossor dispersal of contents when the package is subjected to the tests prescribed in §173.466 or evaluated against these tests by any of the methods authorized by §173.461(a).

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6, 2003]

§ 173.413 Requirements for Type B packages.
Except as provided in §173.416, each Type B(U) or Type B(M) package must be designed and constructed to meet the applicable requirements specified in 10 CFR part 71. § 173.415 Authorized Type A packages.
The following packages are authorized for shipment if they do not contain quantities exceeding A 1 or A 2 as appropriate:

(a) DOT Specification 7A (see §178.350 of this subchapter) Type A generalpackaging. Each offeror of a Specification 7A package must maintain on file for at least one year after the latest shipment, and shall provide to DOT on request, complete documentation of tests and an engineering evaluation or comparative data showing that theconstruction methods, packaging design, and materials of construction comply with that specification.

(b) Any other Type A packaging that also meets the applicable standards for fissile materials in 10 CFR part 71 and is used in accordance with §173.471.

(c) Any Type B(U) or Type B(M) packaging authorized pursuant to §173.416.

(d) Any foreign-made packaging thatmeets the standards in ‘‘IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material No. TS-R-1’’ (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) and bears the marking ‘‘Type A’’. Such packagings may be used for domestic and exportshipments of Class 7 (radioactive) materials provided the offeror obtains the applicable documentation of tests and engineering evaluations and maintains
the documentation on file in accordance with paragraph (a) of this section. These packagings must conform with requirements of the country of origin(as indicated by the packaging marking) and the IAEA regulations applicable to Type A packagings.

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 3673, Jan. 26, 2004; 69 FR 55117, Sept. 13, 2004]

§ 173.416 Authorized Type B packages.

Each of the following packages is authorized for shipment of quantities exceeding A 1 or A 2 , as appropriate:

(a) Any Type B(U) or Type B(M) packaging that meets the applicable requirements of 10 CFR part 71 andthat has been approved by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission may be shipped pursuant to §173.471.

(b) Any Type B(U) or B(M) packaging that meets the applicable requirements


### 652 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.417

in ‘‘IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material, No.TS-R-1’’ (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) and for which the foreign Competent Authority Certificate has been revalidated by DOT pursuant to§173.473. These packagings are authorized only for export and import shipments.

(c) Continued use of an existing TypeB packaging constructed to DOT Specification 6M, 20WC, or 21WC is authorized until October 1, 2008 if it conforms in all aspects to the requirements of this subchapter in effect on October 1,
2003.

[69 FR 3673, Jan. 26, 2004]

§ 173.417 Authorized fissile materials packages.
(a) Except as provided in §173.453, fissile materials containing not more
than A 1 or A 2 as appropriate, must bepackaged in one of the following packagings:

(1)(i) Any packaging listed in§173.415, limited to the Class 7 (radioactive) materials specified in 10 CFR part 71, subpart C; (ii) Any Type AF, Type B(U)F, or Type B(M)F packaging that meets theapplicable standards for fissile material packages in 10 CFR part 71; or

(iii) Any Type AF, Type B(U)F, or Type B(M)F packaging that meets theapplicable requirements for fissile material packages in Section VI of the International Atomic Energy Agency ‘‘Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material, No. TS-R-1 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter),’’ and forwhich the foreign Competent Authority certificate has been revalidated bythe U.S. Competent Authority, in accordance with §173.473. These packagesare authorized only for export and import shipments.

(2) A residual ‘‘heel’’ of enriched soliduranium hexafluoride may be transported without a protective overpack in any metal cylinder that meets both the requirements of §173.415 and§178.350 of this subchapter for Specification 7A Type A packaging, and the requirements of §173.420 for packagingscontaining greater than 0.1 kg of uranium hexafluoride. Any such shipment
must be made in accordance with Table 2, as follows:

T ABLE 2—A LLOWABLE C ONTENT OF U RANIUM H EXAFLUORIDE (UF 6 ‘‘H EEL ’’ IN A S PECIFICATION 7A C YLINDER )

Maximum cylinder di-
ameter Cylinder volume Maximum Ura- nium 235-en-

richment (weight) percent Maximum ‘‘Heel’’ weight per cylinder

Centimeters Inches Liters Cubic feet UF 6 Uranium-235

kg lb kg lb

12.7 5 8.8 0.311 100.0 0.045 0.1 0.031 0.07
20.3 8 39.0 1.359 12.5 0.227 0.5 0.019 0.04
30.5 12 68.0 2.410 5.0 0.454 1.0 0.015 0.03
76.0 30 725.0 25.64 5.0 11.3 25.0 0.383 0.84 122.0 48 3,084.0 1 108.9 4.5 22.7 50.0 0.690 1.52 122.0 48 4,041.0 2 142.7 4.5 22.7 50.0 0.690 1.52

1 10 ton.

2 14 ton

(3) DOT Specification 20PF–1, 20PF–2,or 20PF–3 (see §178.356 of this subchapter), or Specification 21PF–1A, 21PF–1B, or 21PF–2 (see §178.358 of this subchapter) phenolic-foam insulated overpack with snug fittings innermetal cylinders, meeting all requirements of §§173.24, 173.410, 173.412, and 173.420 and the following:

(i) Handling procedures and packaging criteria must be in accordance
with United States Enrichment Corporation Report No. USEC–651 or ANSI N14.1 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter); and

(ii) Quantities of uranium
hexafluoride are authorized as shown in Table 3 of this section, with eachpackage assigned a minimum criticality safety index as also shown.

(b) Fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials with radioactive content exceeding A 1 or A 2 must be packaged in one of the following packagings:

(1) Type B(U), or Type B(M) packaging that meets the standards for


### 653 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.418

packaging of fissile materials in 10 CFR part 71, and is approved by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission and used in accordance with §173.471;

(2) Type B(U) or Type B(M) packaging that also meets the applicablerequirements for fissile material packaging in Section VI of the International Atomic Energy Agency ‘‘Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material, No. TS-R-1,’’ andfor which the foreign Competent Authority certificate has been revalidatedby the U.S. Competent Authority in accordance with §173.473. These packagings are authorized only for import and export shipments; or

(3) DOT Specifications 20PF–1, 20PF–2, or 20PF–3 (see §178.356 of this subchapter), for DOT Specifications 21PF–1A or 21PF–1B (see §178.356 of this subchapter) phenolic-foam insulated overpack with snug fitting inner metal cylinders, meeting all requirements of§§173.24, 173.410, and 173.412, and the following:

(i) Handling procedures and packaging criteria must be in accordance
with United States Enrichment Corporation Report No. USEC–651 or ANSI N14.1; and

(ii) Quantities of uranium
hexafluoride are authorized as shown in Table 3, with each package assigned a minimum criticality safety index as
also shown:

T ABLE 3—A UTHORIZED Q UANTITIES OF U RANIUM H EXAFLUORIDE

Protective overpack specification number Maximum inner cyclinder diameter Maximum weight of UF6
contents Maximum U–235 enrichment (weight/

percent) Minimum criticality safety

index Centimeters Inches Kilograms Pounds

20PF–1 .......................... 12.7 5 25 55 100.0 0.1
20PF–2 .......................... 20.3 8 116 255 12.5 0.4
20PF–3 .......................... 30.5 12 209 460 5.0 1.1
21PF–1A 1 or 21PF–

1B 1,2 76.0 ................... 2 30 2,250 4,950 5.0 5.0
21PF–1A 1 or 21PF–1B 1 3 76.0 3 30 2,282 5,020 5.0 5.0
21PF–2 1

........................ 2 76.0 2 30 2,250 4,950 5.0 5.0
21PF–2 1

........................ 3 76.0 3 30 2,282 5,020 5.0 5.0

1 For 76 cm (30 in) cylinders, the maximum H/U atomic ratio is 0.088.

2 Model 30A inner cylinder (reference USEC–651).

3 Model 30B inner cylinder (reference USEC–651).

(c) Continued use of an existing fissile material packaging constructed to DOT Specification 6L, 6M, or 1A2, is authorized until October 1, 2008 if itconforms in all respects to the requirements of this subchapter in effect on October 1, 2003.

[69 FR 3673, Jan. 26, 2004; 69 FR 55118, Sept. 13, 2004]

§ 173.418 Authorized packages— pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
Pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) materials, as referenced in the §172.101 table of this subchapter, in quantities not exceeding A 2 per package must be transported in DOT Specification 7A packagings constructed of materialsthat will not react with, nor be decomposed by, the contents. Contents of the package must be— (a) In solid form and must not be fissile unless excepted by §173.453;

(b) Contained in sealed and corrosionresistant receptacles with positive closures (friction or slip-fit covers or stoppers are not authorized);

(c) Free of water and contaminants that would increase the reactivity of the material; and

(d) Inerted to prevent self-ignition during transport by either—

(1) Mixing with large volumes of inerting materials, such as graphite, dry sand, or other suitable inerting material, or blended into a matrix of hardened concrete; or

(2) Filling the innermost receptacle with an appropriate inert gas or liquid.


### 654 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.419

(e) Pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) materials transported by aircraft must be packaged in Type B packages.

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 68 FR 45038, July 31, 2003; 70 FR 56098, Sept. 23, 2005]

§ 173.419 Authorized packages—oxidizing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
(a) An oxidizing Class 7 (radioactive) material, as referenced in the §172.101 table of this subchapter, is authorized in quantities not exceeding an A 2 per package, in a DOT Specification 7A package provided that—

(1) The contents are: (i) Not fissile; (ii) Packed in inside packagings of glass, metal or compatible plastic; and

(iii) Cushioned with a material that will not react with the contents; and

(2) The outside packaging is made of wood, metal, or plastic.

(b) The package must be capable ofmeeting the applicable test requirements of §173.465 without leakage of

contents.

(c) For shipment by air, the maximum quantity in any package may not exceed 11.3 kg (25 pounds).

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]

§ 173.420 Uranium hexafluoride(fissile, fissile excepted and nonfissile).
(a) In addition to any other applicable requirements of this subchapter, quantities greater than 0.1 kg of fissile, fissile excepted or non-fissile uranium
hexafluoride must be offered for transportation as follows:

(1) Before initial filling and duringperiodic inspection and test, packagings must be cleaned in accordance
with American National StandardN14.1 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(2) Packagings must be designed, fabricated, inspected, tested and marked
in accordance with—

(i) American National Standard N14.1 in effect at the time the packaging was manufactured;

(ii) Specifications for Class DOT-106A multi-unit tank car tanks (see §§179.300 and 179.301 of this subchapter); or (iii) Section VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), provided the packaging—

(A) Was manufactured on or before June 30, 1987;

(B) Conforms to the edition of the
ASME Code in effect at the time the packaging was manufactured;

(C) Is used within its original design limitations; and

(D) Has shell and head thicknesses
that have not decreased below the minimum value specified in the following
table:

Packaging model Minimum thickness; millimeters (inches)

1S, 2S ...................................................... 1.58 (0.062) 5A, 5B, 8A ............................................... 3.17 (0.125) 12A, 12B .................................................. 4.76 (0.187) 30B .......................................................... 7.93 (0.312) 48A, F, X, and Y ...................................... 12.70 (0.500) 48T, O, OM, OM Allied, HX, H, and G ... 6.35 (0.250)

(3) Each package shall be designed so
that it will:

(i) withstand a hydraulic test at an internal pressure of at least 1.4 MPa (200 psi) without leakage;

(ii) withstand the test specified in §173.465(c) without loss or dispersal of the uranium hexafluoride; and

(iii) withstand the test specified in 10 CFR 71.73(c)(4) without rupture of the containment system.

(4) Uranium hexafluoride must be in
solid form.

(5) The volume of solid uraniumhexafluoride, except solid depleted uranium hexafluoride, at 20 ° C (68 ° F) may
not exceed 61% of the certified volumetric capacity of the packaging. The volume of solid depleted uranium
hexafluoride at 20 ° C (68 ° F) may not
exceed 62% of the certified volumetric capacity of the packaging.

(6) The pressure in the package at 20

° C (68 ° F) must be less than 101.3 kPa (14.8 psig).

(b) Each packaging for uraniumhexafluoride must be periodically inspected, tested, marked and otherwise
conform with the American National
Standard N14.1.

(c) Each repair to a packaging foruranium hexafluoride must be performed in accordance with the American National Standard N14.1.

(d) Non-fissile uranium hexafluoride, in quantities of less than 0.1 kg, may


### 655 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.424

be shipped in packaging that meets §§173.24, 173.24a, and 173.410.

[69 FR 3675, Jan. 26, 2004; 69 FR 55118, Sept. 13, 2004]

§ 173.421 Excepted packages for limited quantities of Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
(a) A Class 7 (radioactive) material with an activity per package which does not exceed the limited quantity package limits specified in Table 4 in§173.425, and its packaging, are excepted from requirements in this subchapter for specification packaging, labeling, marking (except for the UNidentification number marking requirement described in §173.422(a)), and
if not a hazardous substance or hazardous waste, shipping papers, and the requirements of this subpart if:

(1) Each package meets the general design requirements of §173.410;

(2) The radiation level at any point on the external surface of the package does not exceed 0.005 mSv/hour (0.5 mrem/ hour);

(3) The nonfixed (removable) radioactive surface contamination on the external surface of the package does not exceed the limits specified in §173.443(a);

(4) The outside of the inner packaging or, if there is no inner packaging, the outside of the packaging itself bears the marking ‘‘Radioactive’’;

(5) The package does not contain fissile material unless excepted by §173.453.

(6) The material is otherwise prepared for shipment as specified in accordance with §173.422.

(b) A limited quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) material that is a hazardous substance or a hazardous waste, is not subject to the provisions in §172.203(d) or §172.204(c)(4) of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 69 FR 3675, Jan. 26, 2004; 70 FR 56098, Sept. 23, 2005]

§ 173.422 Additional requirements for excepted packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.An excepted package of Class 7 (radioactive) material that is prepared for shipment under the provisions of §173.421, §173.424, §173.426, or §173.428 isnot subject to any additional requirements of this subchapter, except for the following:

(a) The outside of each package mustbe marked with the four digit UN identification number for the material preceded by the letters UN, as shown in column (4) of the Hazardous Materials Table in §172.101 of this subchapter;

(b) Sections 171.15 and 171.16 of this subchapter, pertaining to the reporting of incidents;

(c) Sections 174.750, 175.700(b), and 176.710 of this subchapter (depending on the mode of transportation), pertaining to the reporting of decontamination;

(d) The training requirements of subpart H of part 172 of this subchapter;
and

(e) For materials that meet the definition of a hazardous substance or ahazardous waste, the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter.

[69 FR 3675, Jan. 26, 2004]

§ 173.423 Requirements for multiplehazard limited quantity Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
(a) Except as provided in §173.4, whena limited quantity radioactive material meets the definition of another hazard class or division, it must be—

(1) Classed for the additional hazard;(2) Packaged to conform with the requirements specified in §173.421(a)(1) through (a)(5) or §173.424(a) through (g), as appropriate; and

(3) Offered for transportation in accordance with the requirements applicable to the hazard for which it is
classed.

(b) A limited quantity Class 7 (radioactive) material which is classed other
than Class 7 in accordance with thissubchapter is excepted from the requirements of §§173.422(a), 172.203(d), and 172.204(c)(4) of this subchapter ifthe entry ‘‘Limited quantity radioactive material’’ appears on the shipping paper in association with the basic description.

§ 173.424 Excepted packages for radioactive instruments and articles.

A radioactive instrument or articleand its packaging are excepted from requirements in this subchapter for specification packaging, labeling, marking


### 656 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.425

(except for the UN identification number marking requirement described in§173.422(a)), and if not a hazardous substance or hazardous waste, shipping papers and the requirements of this subpart if:

(a) Each package meets the general design requirements of §173.410;

(b) The activity of the instrument or
article does not exceed the relevant limit listed in Table 4 in §173.425;

(c) The total activity per package
does not exceed the relevant limit listed in Table 4 in §173.425;

(d) The radiation level at 10 cm (4 in) from any point on the external surfaceof any unpackaged instrument or article does not exceed 0.1 mSv/hour (10 mrem/hour);

(e) The active material is completely enclosed by non-active components (a device performing the sole function of containing radioactive material shall
not be considered to be an instrument or manufactured article); (f) The radiation level at any point on the external surface of a package bearing the article or instrument does not exceed 0.005 mSv/hour (0.5 mrem/ hour), or, for exclusive use domestic shipments, 0.02 mSv/hour (2 mrem/ hour);

(g) The nonfixed (removable) radioactive surface contamination on the external surface of the package does not exceed the limits specified in §173.443(a);

(h) Except as provided in §173.426, the package does not contain more than 15 g of uranium-235; and

(i) The package is otherwise prepared for shipment as specified in §173.422.

[69 FR 3675, Jan. 26, 2004]

§ 173.425 Table of activity limits—excepted quantities and articles.
The limits applicable to instruments, articles, and limited quantities subject to exceptions under §§173.421 and 173.424
are set forth in table 4 as follows:

T ABLE 4—A CTIVITY L IMITS FOR L IMITED Q UANTITIES , I NSTRUMENTS

, AND A RTICLES

Nature of contents Instruments and articles
Limited quantity package limits 1Limits for each instrument or article 1 Package limits 1

Solids: Special form ........................................ 10

¥ 2 A 1 A 1 10

¥ 3 A 1 Normal form ........................................ 10

¥ 2 A 2 A 2 10

¥ 3 A 2 Liquids:
Tritiated water: <0.0037 TBq/L (0.1 Ci/L) ...... 37 TBq (1,000 Ci) 0.0037 TBq to 0.037 TBq/L

(0.1 Ci to 1.0 Ci/L). 3.7 TBq (100 Ci)

>0.037 TBq/L (1.0 Ci/L) ........ 0.037 TBq (1.0 Ci) Other Liquids ....................................... 10

¥ 3 A 2 10

¥ 1 A 2 10

¥ 4 A 2 Gases:
Tritium 2 ............................................... 2 × 10

¥ 2 A 2 2 × 10

¥ 1 A 2 2 × 10

¥ 2 A 2 Special form ........................................ 10

¥ 3 A 1 10

¥ 2 A 1 10

¥ 3 A 1 Normal form ........................................ 10

¥ 3 A 2 10

¥ 2 A 2 10

¥ 3 A 2

1 For mixtures of radionuclides see § 173.433(d).

2 These values also apply to tritium in activated luminous paint and tritium adsorbed on solid carriers.

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173–244, 61 FR 20751, May 8, 1996; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001; 69 FR 3676, Jan. 26, 2004]

§ 173.426 Excepted packages for articles containing natural uranium or thorium.

A manufactured article in which thesole Class 7 (radioactive) material content is natural uranium, unirradiated depleted uranium or natural thorium, and its packaging, are excepted from the requirements in this subchapter for specification packaging, labeling,marking (except for the UN identification number marking requirement described in §173.422(a)), and if not a hazardous substance or hazardous waste, shipping papers and the requirements of this subpart if:

(a) Each package meets the general design requirements of §173.410;


### 657 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.427

(b) The outer surface of the uranium
or thorium is enclosed in an inactive
sheath made of metal or other durable protective material;

(c) The conditions specified in §173.421(a) (2), (3) and (4) are met; and

(d) The article is otherwise prepared for shipment as specified in §173.422.

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173–244, 61 FR 20752, May 8, 1996; 69 FR 3676, Jan. 26, 2004]

§ 173.427 Transport requirements for low specific activity (LSA) Class 7 (radioactive) materials and surface contaminated objects (SCO).
(a) In addition to other applicable requirements specified in this subchapter, LSA materials and SCO, unless excepted by paragraph (c) or (d) ofthis section, must be packaged in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section and must be transported in accordance with the following conditions:

(1) The external dose rate may not
exceed an external radiation level of 10 mSv/h (1 rem/h) at 3 m from the unshielded material;

(2) The quantity of LSA and SCO material in any single conveyance may not exceed the limits specified in Table 5; (3) LSA material and SCO that are or
contain fissile material must conform to the applicable requirements of §173.453;

(4) Packaged and unpackaged Class 7 (radioactive) materials must conform
to the contamination control limits specified in §173.443;

(5) External radiation levels may not exceed those specified in §173.441; and

(6) For LSA material and SCO consigned as exclusive use:

(i) Shipments shall be loaded by theconsignor and unloaded by the consignee from the conveyance or freight container in which originally loaded;

(ii) There may be no loose radioactive material in the conveyance; however, when the conveyance is thepackaging, there may not be any leakage of radioactive material from the

conveyance;

(iii) Packaged and unpackaged Class 7 (radioactive) materials must bebraced so as to prevent shifting of lading under conditions normally incident to transportation; (iv) Specific instructions for maintenance of exclusive use shipment controls shall be provided by the offeror to
the carrier. Such instructions must beincluded with the shipping paper information;

(v) Except for shipments of
unconcentrated uranium or thorium ores, the transport vehicle must be placarded in accordance with subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter;

(vi) For domestic transportation only, packaged and unpackaged Class 7 (radioactive) materials containing less
than an A 2 quantity are excepted from the marking and labeling requirementsof this subchapter. However, the exterior of each package or unpackaged Class 7 (radioactive) materials must be
stenciled or otherwise marked ‘‘RADIOACTIVE—LSA’’ or ‘‘RADIOACTIVE—SCO’’, as appropriate, andpackages or unpackaged Class 7 (radioactive) materials that contain a hazardous substance must be stenciled or
otherwise marked with the letters‘‘RQ’’ in association with the description in this paragraph (a)(6)(vi); and

(vii) Transportation by aircraft is prohibited except when transported in an industrial package in accordance with Table 6 of this section, or in an authorized Type A or Type B package.

(b) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, LSA material and SCO must be packaged as follows:

(1) In an industrial package (IP–1, IP–2 or IP–3; §173.411), subject to the limitations of Table 6;

(2) In a DOT Specification 7A (§178.350 of this subchapter) Type A package;

(3) In any Type B(U) or B(M) packaging authorized pursuant to §173.416;

(4) In a packaging which meets the requirements of §§173.24, 173.24a, and173.410, but only for domestic transportation of an exclusive use shipment
that is less than an A 2 quantity.

(5) For exclusive use transport of liquid LSA-I only, in either:

(i) Specification 103CW, 111A60W7 (§§173.31, and 179.201–1 to 179.201–11 of this subchapter) tank cars. Bottom openings in tanks are prohibited; or

(ii) Specification MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, MC 331 or DOT 412 (§178.348 or §178.337 of this subchapter) cargo tank
motor vehicles. Bottom outlets are not


### 658 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.428

authorized. Trailer-on-flat-car service
is not authorized.

(c) LSA material and SCO in groups LSA-I and SCO-I may be transportedunpackaged under the following conditions:

(1) All unpackaged material, otherthan ores containing only naturally occurring radionuclides, shall be transported in such a manner that under normal conditions of transport there will be no escape of the radioactive contents from the conveyance nor will there be any loss of shielding;

(2) Each conveyance must be underexclusive use, except when only transporting SCO-I on which the contamination on the accessible and the inaccessible surfaces is not greater than 4.0 Bq/cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters and 0.4 Bq/cm 2 for all other alpha emitters;
and

(3) For SCO-I where it is suspected
that non-fixed contamination exists on
inaccessible surfaces in excess of the values specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, measures shall be taken
to ensure that the radioactive material is not released into the conveyance or
to the environment.

(d) LSA and SCO that exceed the packaging limits in this section must be packaged in accordance with 10 CFR part 71.

(e) Tables 5 and 6 are as follows:

T ABLE 5—C ONVEYANCE A CTIVITY L IMITS FOR LSA M ATERIAL AND SCO

Nature of material Activity limit for
conveyances

1. LSA-I ................................................................ No limit. 2. LSA-II and LSA-III; Non-combustible solids .... No limit. 3. LSA-II and LSA-III; Combustible solids and all

liquids and gases. 100 A 2

4. SCO ................................................................. 100 A 2

T ABLE 6—I NDUSTRIAL P ACKAGE I NTEGRITY R EQUIREMENTS FOR LSA M ATERIAL AND SCO

Contents Industrial packaging type

Exclusive

useshipment Nonexclusive

useshipment

1. LSA-I:
Solid ............................................ IP–1 ... IP–1 T ABLE 6—I NDUSTRIAL P ACKAGE I NTEGRITY R E

QUIREMENTS FOR LSA M ATERIAL AND SCO—
Continued

Contents Industrial packaging type

Exclusive

useshipment Nonexclusive

useshipment

Liquid ........................................... IP–1 ... IP–2
2. LSA-II:
Solid ............................................ IP–2 ... IP–2 Liquid and gas ............................ IP–2 ... IP–3
3. LSA-III ................................................... IP–2 ... IP–3
4. SCO-I .................................................... IP–1 ... IP–1
5. SCO-II ................................................... IP–2 ... IP–2

[69 FR 3676, Jan. 26, 2004; 69 FR 55118, Sept. 13, 2004; 69 FR 58843, Oct. 1, 2004; 70 FR 56098, Sept. 23, 2005]

§ 173.428 Empty Class 7 (radioactive) materials packaging.
A packaging which previously contained Class 7 (radioactive) materials and has been emptied of contents as faras practical, is excepted from the shipping paper and marking (except for theUN identification number marking requirement described in §173.422(a)) requirements of this subchapter, provided that—

(a) The packaging meets the requirements of §173.421(a) (2), (3), and (5) of this subpart;

(b) The packaging is in unimpaired condition and is securely closed so thatthere will be no leakage of Class 7 (radioactive) material under conditions normally incident to transportation;

(c) The outer surface of any uranium
or thorium in its structure is covered
with an inactive sheath made of metal or some other substantial material;

(d) Internal contamination does not
exceed 100 times the limits in §173.443(a);

(e) Any labels previously applied in conformance with subpart E of part 172of this subchapter are removed, obliterated, or covered and the ‘‘Empty’’ label prescribed in §172.450 of this subchapter is affixed to the packaging; and

(f) The packaging is prepared for shipment as specified in §173.422.

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173–244, 61 FR 20752, May 8, 1996; 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999; 69 FR 3677, Jan. 26, 2004]


### 659 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.433

§ 173.431 Activity limits for Type A and Type B packages.
(a) Except for LSA material and SCO, a Type A package may not contain aquantity of Class 7 (radioactive) materials greater than A 1 for special form Class 7 (radioactive) material or A 2 fornormal form Class 7 (radioactive) material as listed in §173.435, or, for Class 7 (radioactive) materials not listed in §173.435, as determined in accordance with §173.433.

(b) The limits on activity contained in a Type B(U) or Type B(M) package are those prescribed in §§173.416 and 173.417, or in the applicable approval certificate under §§173.471, 173.472 or
173.473.

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 69 FR 3677, Jan. 26, 2004]

§ 173.433 Requirements for determining basic radionuclide values, and for the listing of radionuclides on shipping papers and labels.
(a) For individual radionuclides listed in the table in §173.435 and §173.436:

(1) A 1 and A 2 values are given in the table in §173.435; and

(2) Activity concentration exemptionvalues and consignment activity exemption values are given in the table in §173.436.

(b) For individual radionuclides
which are not listed in the tables in §173.435 or §173.436:

(1) the radionuclide values in Tables 7 or 8 of this section may be used; or

(2) other basic radionuclide valuesmay be used provided they are first approved by the Associate Administratoror, for international transport, multilateral approval is obtained from the pertinent Competent Authorities.

(c) In calculating A 1 or A 2 values for
a radionuclide not listed in the table in §173.435:

(1) Where the chemical form of each radionuclide is known, it is permissible
to use the A 2 value related to its solubility class as recommended by the
International Commission on Radiological Protection, if the chemical
forms under both normal and accident conditions of transport are taken into
consideration.

(2) A single radioactive decay chain in which the radionuclides are presentin their naturally-occurring proportions, and in which no daughter nuclide has a half life either longer than 10 days or longer than that of the parent nuclide, will be considered as a single radionuclide, and the activity to be
taken into account and the A 1 or A 2value to be applied will be those corresponding to the parent nuclide of that chain. Otherwise, the parent and daughter nuclides will be considered as
a mixture of different nuclides.

(d) Mixtures of radionuclides whose identities and respective activities are known must conform to the following
conditions:

(1) For special form Class 7 (radioactive) material, the activity whichmay be transported in a Type A package must satisfy:



### B(i)

A (i)

1 i 

### ≤ 

# ∑ 1

Where:
B(i) is the activity of radionuclide i in special form; and

A 1 (i) is the A 1 value for radionuclide i.

(2) For normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material, the activity whichmay be transported in a Type A package must satisfy:



### C(j)
A (j)

2 j 

### ≤ 

# ∑ 1

Where:
C(j) is the activity of radionuclide j in normal form; and

A 2 (j) is the A 2 value for radionuclide j.

(3) If the package contains both special and normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material, the activity whichmay be transported in a Type A package must satisfy:



### B(i)

A (i) + C(j)
A (j) 1 2 j i 

# ∑ ∑ ≤ 1

Where:
The symbols are defined as in paragraphs

(d)(2) and (d)(3) of this section.

(4) Alternatively, the A 1 value for a mixture of special form material may
be determined as follows:


### 660 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.433



### A for mixture = f(i)

A 1

1 i 

### 1

( ) i 

# ∑

Where:f(i) is the fraction of activity for radionuclide i in the mixture; and
A 1 (i) is the appropriate A 1 value for radionuclide i.
(5) Alternatively, the A 2 value for mixtures of normal form material may
be determined as follows: 

### A for mixture = f(i)

A 2

2 i 

### 1

( ) i 

# ∑

Where: f(i) is the fraction of activity for normal

form radionuclide i in the mixture; and
A 2 (i) is the appropriate A 2 value for radionuclide i.
(6) The exempt activity concentration for mixtures of nuclides may be
determined as follows:



### Exempt activity concentration limit for mixture = 1

i 

### f i

A i

( )

[ ]( ) 

# ∑

Where: f(i) is the fraction of activity concentration

of nuclide i in the mixture; and [A](i) is the activity concentration for exempt material containing nuclide i. (7) The activity limit for an exempt consignment for mixtures of nuclides may be determined as follows:



### Exempt consignment activity limit for mixture = f(i)

i 

### 1

A i

( ) 

# ∑

Where: f(i) is the fraction of activity of nuclide i in

the mixture; andA(i) is the activity limit for exempt consignments for nuclide i.
(e) When the identity of each nuclide
is known but the individual activities
of some of the radionuclides are not known, the radionuclides may be grouped and the lowest A 1 or A 2 value, as appropriate, for the radionuclides in each group may be used in applying the formulas in paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(5) of this section. Groups may be based on the total alpha activity and the total beta/gamma activity when these are known, using the lowest A 1 or A 2 values for the alpha emitters or beta/gamma emitters, respectively.

(f) When the identity of each nuclide
is known but the individual activities
of some of the radionuclides are not known, the radionuclides may be grouped and the lowest [A] (activity concentration for exempt material) orA (activity limit for exempt consignment) value, as appropriate, for the radionuclides in each group may beused in applying the formulas in paragraphs (d)(6) and (d)(7) of this section. Groups may be based on the total alphaactivity and the total beta/gamma activity when these are known, using the lowest [A] or A values for the alphaemitters or beta/gamma emitters, respectively.

(g) Shipping papers and labeling. Formixtures of radionuclides, the radionuclides (n) that must be shown onshipping papers and labels in accordance with §§172.203 and 172.403 of thissubchapter, respectively, must be determined on the basis of the following
formula:



### a

A a

A (i)

(i) (i)

(i) i=1 n+m

i=1 n 

### ≥ 

# ∑ ∑ 0 95

.


### 661 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.435

Where:
n + m represents all the radionuclides in the

mixture;
m are the radionuclides that do not need to

be considered; a ( i ) is the activity of radionuclide i in the mixture; and
A ( i ) is the A 1 or A 2 value, as appropriate for

radionuclide i.

(h) Tables 7 and 8 are as follows:

T ABLE 7—G ENERAL V ALUES FOR A 1 AND A 2

Radioactive contents A 1 A 2

(TBq) (Ci) (TBq) (Ci)

1. Only beta or gamma emitting nuclides are known to be

present ............................................................................... 1 × 10

¥ 1 2.7 × 10 0 2 × 10

¥ 2 5.4 × 10

¥ 1 2. Only alpha emitting nuclides are known to be present .... 2 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 × 10 0 9 × 10

¥ 5 2.4 × 10

¥ 3
3. No relevant data are available .......................................... 1 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 9 × 10

¥ 5 2.4 × 10

¥ 3

T ABLE 8—G ENERAL E XEMPTION V ALUES

Radioactive contents Activity concentration for exempt material Activity limits for exempt consignments

(Bq/g) (Ci/g) (Bq) Ci)

1. Only beta or gamma emitting nuclides are known to be

present ............................................................................... 1 × 10 1 2.7 × 10

¥ 10 1 × 10 4 2.7 × 10

¥ 7 2. Only alpha emitting nuclides are known to be present .... 1 × 10

¥ 1 2.7 × 10

¥ 12 1 × 10 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 8
3. No relevant data are available .......................................... 1 × 10

¥ 1 2.7 × 10

¥ 12 1 × 10 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 8

[69 FR 3677, Jan. 26, 2004; 69 FR 55119, Sept. 13, 2004]

§ 173.434 Activity-mass relationships for uranium and natural thorium.

The table of activity-mass relationships for uranium and natural thorium are
as follows:

Thorium and uranium enrichment 1 (Wt% 235 U present) Specific activity

TBq/gram Grams/Tbq Ci/gram Grams/Ci

0.45 (depleted) ...................................................................................... 1.9 × 10

¥ 8 5.4 × 10 7 5.0 × 10

¥ 7 2.0 × 10 6 0.72 (natural) ......................................................................................... 2.6 × 10

¥ 8 3.8 × 10 7 7.1 × 10

¥ 7 1.4 × 10 6
1.0 ......................................................................................................... 2.8 × 10

¥ 8 3.6 × 10 7 7.6 × 10

¥ 7 1.3 × 10 6
1.5 ......................................................................................................... 3.7 × 10

¥ 8 2.7 × 10 7 1.0 × 10

¥ 6 1.0 × 10 6
5.0 ......................................................................................................... 1.0 × 10

¥ 7 1.0 × 10 7 2.7 × 10

¥ 6 3.7 × 10 5
10.0 ....................................................................................................... 1.8 × 10

¥ 7 5.6 × 10 6 4.8 × 10

¥ 6 2.1 × 10 5
20.0 ....................................................................................................... 3.7 × 10

¥ 7 2.7 × 10 6 1.0 × 10

¥ 5 1.0 × 10 5
35.0 ....................................................................................................... 7.4 × 10

¥ 7 1.4 × 10 6 2.0 × 10

¥ 5 5.0 × 10 4
50.0 ....................................................................................................... 9.3 × 10

¥ 7 1.1 × 10 6 2.5 × 10

¥ 5 4.0 × 10 4
90.0 ....................................................................................................... 2.1 × 10

¥ 6 4.7 × 10 5 5.8 × 10

¥ 5 1.7 × 10 4
93.0 ....................................................................................................... 2.6 × 10

¥ 6 3.9 × 10 5 7.0 × 10

¥ 5 1.4 × 10 4
95.0 ....................................................................................................... 3.4 × 10

¥ 6 3.0 × 10 5 9.1 × 10

¥ 5 1.1 × 10 4
Natural thorium ...................................................................................... 8.1 × 10

¥ 9 1.2 × 10 8 2.2 × 10

¥ 7 4.6 × 10 6

1 The figures for uranium include representative values for the activity of uranium-234 which is concentrated during the enrichment process. The activity for thorium includes the equilibrium concentration of thorium-228.

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]

§ 173.435 Table of A 1 and A 2 values for radionuclides.

The table of A 1 and A 2 values for radionuclides is as follows:

Symbol of radionuclide Element and atomic number A 1 (TBq) A 1 (Ci) b A 2 (TBq) A 2 (Ci) b Specific activity

(TBq/g) (Ci/g)

Ac-225 (a) ...................... Actinium (89) ............ 8.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.2 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 3 1.6 × 10

¥ 1 2.1 × 10 3 5.8 × 10 4 Ac-227 (a) ...................... ................................... 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 9.0 × 10

¥ 5 2.4 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 7.2 × 10 1
Ac-228 ............................ ................................... 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 8.4 × 10 4 2.2 × 10 6 Ag-105 ............................ Silver (47) ................. 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 3.0 × 10 4 Ag-108m (a) ................... ................................... 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 9.7 × 10

¥ 1 2.6 × 10 1 Ag-110m (a) ................... ................................... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 1.8 × 10 2 4.7 × 10 3 Ag-111 ............................ ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 5.8 × 10 3 1.6 × 10 5 Al-26 ............................... Aluminum (13) .......... 1.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.7 1.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.7 7.0 × 10

¥ 4 1.9 × 10

¥ 2


### 662 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.435

Symbol of radionuclide Element and atomic number A 1 (TBq) A 1 (Ci) b A 2 (TBq) A 2 (Ci) b Specific activity

(TBq/g) (Ci/g)

Am-241 ........................... Americium (95) ......... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 1.3 × 10

¥ 1 3.4 Am-242m (a) .................. ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 3.6 × 10

¥ 1 1.0 × 10 1 Am-243 (a) ..................... ................................... 5.0 1.4 × 10 2 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 7.4 × 10

¥ 3 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 Ar-37 .............................. Argon (18) ................ 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 3.7 × 10 3 9.9 × 10 4
Ar-39 .............................. ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 1.3 3.4 × 10 1
Ar-41 .............................. ................................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 1.5 × 10 6 4.2 × 10 7 As-72 .............................. Arsenic (33) .............. 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 6.2 × 10 4 1.7 × 10 6
As-73 .............................. ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 8.2 × 10 2 2.2 × 10 4
As-74 .............................. ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 3.7 × 10 3 9.9 × 10 4
As-76 .............................. ................................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 5.8 × 10 4 1.6 × 10 6
As-77 .............................. ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 3.9 × 10 4 1.0 × 10 6 At-211 (a) ....................... Astatine (85) ............. 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 7.6 × 10 4 2.1 × 10 6 Au-193 ............................ Gold (79) .................. 7.0 1.9 × 10 2 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 3.4 × 10 4 9.2 × 10 5
Au-194 ............................ ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.5 × 10 4 4.1 × 10 5
Au-195 ............................ ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 6.0 1.6 × 10 2 1.4 × 10 2 3.7 × 10 3
Au-198 ............................ ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 9.0 × 10 3 2.4 × 10 5
Au-199 ............................ ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 7.7 × 10 3 2.1 × 10 5 Ba-131 (a) ...................... Barium (56) .............. 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 3.1 × 10 3 8.4 × 10 4
Ba-133 ............................ ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 9.4 2.6 × 10 2
Ba-133m ......................... ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 2.2 × 10 4 6.1 × 10 5 Ba-140 (a) ...................... ................................... 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 2.7 × 10 3 7.3 × 10 4 Be-7 ................................ Beryllium (4) ............. 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 1.3 × 10 4 3.5 × 10 5
Be-10 .............................. ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 8.3 × 10

¥ 4 2.2 × 10

¥ 2 Bi-205 ............................. Bismuth (83) ............. 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 1.5 × 10 3 4.2 × 10 4
Bi-206 ............................. ................................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.8 × 10 3 1.0 × 10 5
Bi-207 ............................. ................................... 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 1.9 5.2 × 10 1
Bi-210 ............................. ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 4.6 × 10 3 1.2 × 10 5 Bi-210m (a) .................... ................................... 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 2.0 × 10

¥ 2 5.4 × 10

¥ 1 2.1 × 10

¥ 5 5.7 × 10

¥ 4 Bi-212 (a) ....................... ................................... 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 5 1.5 × 10 7 Bk-247 ............................ Berkelium (97) .......... 8.0 2.2 × 10 2 8.0 × 10

¥ 4 2.2 × 10

¥ 2 3.8 × 10

¥ 2 1.0 Bk-249 (a) ...................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 6.1 × 10 1 1.6 × 10 3 Br-76 .............................. Bromine (35) ............ 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 9.4 × 10 4 2.5 × 10 6
Br-77 .............................. ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 2.6 × 10 4 7.1 × 10 5
Br-82 .............................. ................................... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10 4 1.1 × 10 6 C-11 ............................... Carbon (6) ................ 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 3.1 × 10 7 8.4 × 10 8
C-14 ............................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 1.6 × 10

¥ 1 4.5 Ca-41 ............................. Calcium (20) ............. Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 3.1 × 10

¥ 3 8.5 × 10

¥ 2
Ca-45 ............................. ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 6.6 × 10 2 1.8 × 10 4 Ca-47 (a) ........................ ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 2.3 × 10 4 6.1 × 10 5 Cd-109 ........................... Cadmium (48) .......... 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 9.6 × 10 1 2.6 × 10 3
Cd-113m ........................ ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 8.3 2.2 × 10 2 Cd-115 (a) ...................... ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 1.9 × 10 4 5.1 × 10 5
Cd-115m ........................ ................................... 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 9.4 × 10 2 2.5 × 10 4 Ce-139 ........................... Cerium (58) .............. 7.0 1.9 × 10 2 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 2.5 × 10 2 6.8 × 10 3
Ce-141 ........................... ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 2.8 × 10 4
Ce-143 ........................... ................................... 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 2.5 × 10 4 6.6 × 10 5 Ce-144 (a) ...................... ................................... 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 1.2 × 10 2 3.2 × 10 3 Cf-248 ............................ Californium (98) ........ 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 6.0 × 10

¥ 3 1.6 × 10

¥ 1 5.8 × 10 1 1.6 × 10 3
Cf-249 ............................ ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 8.0 × 10

¥ 4 2.2 × 10

¥ 2 1.5 × 10

¥ 1 4.1
Cf-250 ............................ ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 2.0 × 10

¥ 3 5.4 × 10

¥ 2 4.0 1.1 × 10 2
Cf-251 ............................ ................................... 7.0 1.9 × 10 2 7.0 × 10

¥ 4 1.9 × 10

¥ 2 5.9 × 10

¥ 2 1.6 Cf-252 (h) ....................... ................................... 5.0 × 10

¥ 2 1.4 3.0 × 10

¥ 3 8.1 × 10

¥ 2 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 Cf-253 (a) ....................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 4.0 × 10

¥ 2 1.1 1.1 × 10 3 2.9 × 10 4
Cf-254 ............................ ................................... 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 3.1 × 10 2 8.5 × 10 3 Cl-36 ............................... Chlorine (17) ............ 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 1.2 × 10

¥ 3 3.3 × 10

¥ 2
Cl-38 ............................... ................................... 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 4.9 × 10 6 1.3 × 10 8 Cm-240 .......................... Curium (96) .............. 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 2.0 × 10

¥ 2 5.4 × 10

¥ 1 7.5 × 10 2 2.0 × 10 4
Cm-241 .......................... ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 6.1 × 10 2 1.7 × 10 4
Cm-242 .......................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 1.0 × 10

¥ 2 2.7 × 10

¥ 1 1.2 × 10 2 3.3 × 10 3
Cm-243 .......................... ................................... 9.0 2.4 × 10 2 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 1.9 5.2 × 10 1
Cm-244 .......................... ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 2.0 × 10

¥ 3 5.4 × 10

¥ 2 3.0 8.1 × 10 1
Cm-245 .......................... ................................... 9.0 2.4 × 10 2 9.0 × 10

¥ 4 2.4 × 10

¥ 2 6.4 × 10

¥ 3 1.7 × 10

¥ 1
Cm-246 .......................... ................................... 9.0 2.4 × 10 2 9.0 × 10

¥ 4 2.4 × 10

¥ 2 1.1 × 10

¥ 2 3.1 × 10

¥ 1 Cm-247 (a) ..................... ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 3.4 × 10

¥ 6 9.3 × 10

¥ 5
Cm-248 .......................... ................................... 2.0 × 10

¥ 2 5.4 × 10

¥ 1 3.0 × 10

¥ 4 8.1 × 10

¥ 3 1.6 × 10

¥ 4 4.2 × 10

¥ 3 Co-55 ............................. Cobalt (27) ............... 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 5 3.1 × 10 6
Co-56 ............................. ................................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 1.1 × 10 3 3.0 × 10 4
Co-57 ............................. ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 3.1 × 10 2 8.4 × 10 3
Co-58 ............................. ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.2 × 10 3 3.2 × 10 4
Co-58m .......................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 2.2 × 10 5 5.9 × 10 6
Co-60 ............................. ................................... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.2 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 Cr-51 .............................. Chromium (24) ......... 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 3.4 × 10 3 9.2 × 10 4


### 663 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.435

Symbol of radionuclide Element and atomic number A 1 (TBq) A 1 (Ci) b A 2 (TBq) A 2 (Ci) b Specific activity

(TBq/g) (Ci/g)

Cs-129 ............................ Cesium (55) .............. 4.0 1.1 × 10 2 4.0 1.1 × 10 2 2.8 × 10 4 7.6 × 10 5
Cs-131 ............................ ................................... 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 3.8 × 10 3 1.0 × 10 5
Cs-132 ............................ ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 5.7 × 10 3 1.5 × 10 5
Cs-134 ............................ ................................... 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 4.8 × 10 1 1.3 × 10 3
Cs-134m ......................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 3.0 × 10 5 8.0 × 10 6
Cs-135 ............................ ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 4.3 × 10

¥ 5 1.2 × 10

¥ 3 Cs-136 ............................ ................................... 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 3 7.3 × 10 4 Cs-137 (a) ...................... ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 3.2 8.7 × 10 1 Cu-64 ............................. Copper (29) .............. 6.0 1.6 × 10 2 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.4 × 10 5 3.9 × 10 6
Cu-67 ............................. ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 2.8 × 10 4 7.6 × 10 5 Dy-159 ............................ Dysprosium (66) ....... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 2.1 × 10 2 5.7 × 10 3 Dy-165 ............................ ................................... 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 3.0 × 10 5 8.2 × 10 6 Dy-166 (a) ...................... ................................... 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 8.6 × 10 3 2.3 × 10 5 Er-169 ............................ Erbium (68) .............. 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 3.1 × 10 3 8.3 × 10 4
Er-171 ............................ ................................... 8.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.2 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 9.0 × 10 4 2.4 × 10 6 Eu-147 ............................ Europium (63) .......... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 1.4 × 10 3 3.7 × 10 4
Eu-148 ............................ ................................... 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 6.0 × 10 2 1.6 × 10 4
Eu-149 ............................ ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 3.5 × 10 2 9.4 × 10 3 Eu-150 (short lived) ....... ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 6.1 × 10 4 1.6 × 10 6 Eu-150 (long lived) ......... ................................... 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 6.1 × 10 4 1.6 × 10 6
Eu-152 ............................ ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 6.5 1.8 × 10 2
Eu-152m ......................... ................................... 8.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.2 × 10 1 8.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.2 × 10 1 8.2 × 10 4 2.2 × 10 6
Eu-154 ............................ ................................... 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 9.8 2.6 × 10 2
Eu-155 ............................ ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 1.8 × 10 1 4.9 × 10 2
Eu-156 ............................ ................................... 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 2.0 × 10 3 5.5 × 10 4 F-18 ................................ Fluorine (9) ............... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 3.5 × 10 6 9.5 × 10 7 Fe-52 (a) ........................ Iron (26) .................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 2.7 × 10 5 7.3 × 10 6
Fe-55 .............................. ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 8.8 × 10 1 2.4 × 10 3
Fe-59 .............................. ................................... 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 1.8 × 10 3 5.0 × 10 4 Fe-60 (a) ........................ ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 7.4 × 10

¥ 4 2.0 × 10

¥ 2 Ga-67 ............................. Gallium (31) .............. 7.0 1.9 × 10 2 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 2.2 × 10 4 6.0 × 10 5
Ga-68 ............................. ................................... 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 1.5 × 10 6 4.1 × 10 7
Ga-72 ............................. ................................... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 5 3.1 × 10 6 Gd-146 (a) ...................... Gadolinium (64) ........ 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 6.9 × 10 2 1.9 × 10 4
Gd-148 ........................... ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 2.0 × 10

¥ 3 5.4 × 10

¥ 2 1.2 3.2 × 10 1
Gd-153 ........................... ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 9.0 2.4 × 10 2 1.3 × 10 2 3.5 × 10 3
Gd-159 ........................... ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 3.9 × 10 4 1.1 × 10 6 Ge-68 (a) ........................ Germanium (32) ....... 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 2.6 × 10 2 7.1 × 10 3
Ge-71 ............................. ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 5.8 × 10 3 1.6 × 10 5
Ge-77 ............................. ................................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 1.3 × 10 5 3.6 × 10 6 Hf-172 (a) ....................... Hafnium (72) ............ 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 4.1 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3
Hf-175 ............................ ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 3.9 × 10 2 1.1 × 10 4
Hf-181 ............................ ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 6.3 × 10 2 1.7 × 10 4
Hf-182 ............................ ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 8.1 × 10

¥ 6 2.2 × 10

¥ 4 Hg-194 (a) ...................... Mercury (80) ............. 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.3 × 10

¥ 1 3.5 Hg-195m (a) ................... ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 1.5 × 10 4 4.0 × 10 5 Hg-197 ........................... ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 9.2 × 10 3 2.5 × 10 5 Hg-197m ........................ ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 2.5 × 10 4 6.7 × 10 5 Hg-203 ........................... ................................... 5.0 1.4 × 10 2 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 5.1 × 10 2 1.4 × 10 4 Ho-166 ........................... Holmium (67) ............ 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 2.6 × 10 4 7.0 × 10 5
Ho-166m ........................ ................................... 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 6.6 × 10

¥ 2 1.8 I-123 ............................... Iodine (53) ................ 6.0 1.6 × 10 2 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 7.1 × 10 4 1.9 × 10 6
I-124 ............................... ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 9.3 × 10 3 2.5 × 10 5
I-125 ............................... ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 6.4 × 10 2 1.7 × 10 4
I-126 ............................... ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 2.9 × 10 3 8.0 × 10 4
I-129 ............................... ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 6.5 × 10

¥ 6 1.8 × 10

¥ 4
I-131 ............................... ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 4.6 × 10 3 1.2 × 10 5
I-132 ............................... ................................... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 3.8 × 10 5 1.0 × 10 7
I-133 ............................... ................................... 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 4.2 × 10 4 1.1 × 10 6
I-134 ............................... ................................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 9.9 × 10 5 2.7 × 10 7 I-135 (a) ......................... ................................... 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 1.3 × 10 5 3.5 × 10 6 In-111 ............................. Indium (49) ............... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 1.5 × 10 4 4.2 × 10 5
In-113m .......................... ................................... 4.0 1.1 × 10 2 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 6.2 × 10 5 1.7 × 10 7 In-114m (a) .................... ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 8.6 × 10 2 2.3 × 10 4
In-115m .......................... ................................... 7.0 1.9 × 10 2 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 2.2 × 10 5 6.1 × 10 6 Ir-189 (a) ........................ Iridium (77) ............... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 1.9 × 10 3 5.2 × 10 4
Ir-190 .............................. ................................... 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 2.3 × 10 3 6.2 × 10 4 Ir-192 (c) ........................ ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 3.4 × 10 2 9.2 × 10 3
Ir-194 .............................. ................................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.1 × 10 4 8.4 × 10 5 K-40 ................................ Potassium (19) ......... 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 2.4 × 10

¥ 7 6.4 × 10

¥ 6
K-42 ................................ ................................... 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 2.2 × 10 5 6.0 × 10 6
K-43 ................................ ................................... 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 1.2 × 10 5 3.3 × 10 6


### 664 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) § 173.435

Symbol of radionuclide Element and atomic number A 1 (TBq) A 1 (Ci) b A 2 (TBq) A 2 (Ci) b Specific activity

(TBq/g) (Ci/g)

Kr-81 .............................. Krypton (36) ............. 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 7.8 × 10

¥ 4 2.1 × 10

¥ 2
Kr-85 .............................. ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 1.5 × 10 1 3.9 × 10 2
Kr-85m ........................... ................................... 8.0 2.2 × 10 2 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 3.0 × 10 5 8.2 × 10 6
Kr-87 .............................. ................................... 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 1.0 × 10 6 2.8 × 10 7 La-137 ............................ Lanthanum (57) ........ 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 6.0 1.6 × 10 2 1.6 × 10

¥ 3 4.4 × 10

¥ 2
La-140 ............................ ................................... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 2.1 × 10 4 5.6 × 10 5 Lu-172 ............................ Lutetium (71) ............ 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 4.2 × 10 3 1.1 × 10 5
Lu-173 ............................ ................................... 8.0 2.2 × 10 2 8.0 2.2 × 10 2 5.6 × 10 1 1.5 × 10 3
Lu-174 ............................ ................................... 9.0 2.4 × 10 2 9.0 2.4 × 10 2 2.3 × 10 1 6.2 × 10 2
Lu-174m ......................... ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 2.0 × 10 2 5.3 × 10 3
Lu-177 ............................ ................................... 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 4.1 × 10 3 1.1 × 10 5 Mg-28 (a) ....................... Magnesium (12) ....... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 2.0 × 10 5 5.4 × 10 6 Mn-52 ............................. Manganese (25) ....... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 1.6 × 10 4 4.4 × 10 5
Mn-53 ............................. ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 6.8 × 10

¥ 5 1.8 × 10

¥ 3
Mn-54 ............................. ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 2.9 × 10 2 7.7 × 10 3
Mn-56 ............................. ................................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 8.0 × 10 5 2.2 × 10 7 Mo-93 ............................. Molybdenum (42) ..... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 4.1 × 10

¥ 2 1.1 Mo-99 (a) (i) ................... ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 1.8 × 10 4 4.8 × 10 5 N-13 ............................... Nitrogen (7) .............. 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 7 1.5 × 10 9 Na-22 ............................. Sodium (11) .............. 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 2.3 × 10 2 6.3 × 10 3
Na-24 ............................. ................................... 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 3.2 × 10 5 8.7 × 10 6 Nb-93m .......................... Niobium (41) ............. 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 8.8 2.4 × 10 2
Nb-94 ............................. ................................... 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 6.9 × 10

¥ 3 1.9 × 10

¥ 1
Nb-95 ............................. ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.5 × 10 3 3.9 × 10 4
Nb-97 ............................. ................................... 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 9.9 × 10 5 2.7 × 10 7 Nd-147 ........................... Neodymium (60) ....... 6.0 1.6 × 10 2 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 3.0 × 10 3 8.1 × 10 4
Nd-149 ........................... ................................... 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 4.5 × 10 5 1.2 × 10 7 Ni-59 ............................... Nickel (28) ................ Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 3.0 × 10

¥ 3 8.0 × 10

¥ 2
Ni-63 ............................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 2.1 5.7 × 10 1
Ni-65 ............................... ................................... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 7.1 × 10 5 1.9 × 10 7 Np-235 ........................... Neptunium (93) ........ 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 5.2 × 10 1 1.4 × 10 3 Np-236 (short-lived) ....... ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 4.7 × 10

¥ 4 1.3 × 10

¥ 2 Np-236 (long-lived) ........ ................................... 9.0 × 10 0 2.4 × 10 2 2.0 × 10

¥ 2 5.4 × 10

¥ 1 4.7 × 10

¥ 4 1.3 × 10

¥ 2 Np-237 ........................... ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 2.0 × 10

¥ 3 5.4 × 10

¥ 2 2.6 × 10

¥ 5 7.1 × 10

¥ 4 Np-239 ........................... ................................... 7.0 1.9 × 10 2 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 8.6 × 10 3 2.3 × 10 5 Os-185 ........................... Osmium (76) ............ 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 2.8 × 10 2 7.5 × 10 3
Os-191 ........................... ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 1.6 × 10 3 4.4 × 10 4
Os-191m ........................ ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 4.6 × 10 4 1.3 × 10 6
Os-193 ........................... ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 2.0 × 10 4 5.3 × 10 5 Os-194 (a) ...................... ................................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 1.1 × 10 1 3.1 × 10 2 P-32 ................................ Phosphorus (15) ....... 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 4 2.9 × 10 5
P-33 ................................ ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 5.8 × 10 3 1.6 × 10 5 Pa-230 (a) ...................... Protactinium (91) ...... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 2 1.9 1.2 × 10 3 3.3 × 10 4
Pa-231 ............................ ................................... 4.0 1.1 × 10 2 4.0 × 10

¥ 4 1.1 × 10

¥ 2 1.7 × 10

¥ 3 4.7 × 10

¥ 2
Pa-233 ............................ ................................... 5.0 1.4 × 10 2 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 7.7 × 10 2 2.1 × 10 4 Pb-201 ............................ Lead (82) .................. 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 6.2 × 10 4 1.7 × 10 6
Pb-202 ............................ ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 1.2 × 10

¥ 4 3.4 × 10

¥ 3
Pb-203 ............................ ................................... 4.0 1.1 × 10 2 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 4 3.0 × 10 5
Pb-205 ............................ ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 4.5 × 10

¥ 6 1.2 × 10

¥ 4 Pb-210 (a) ...................... ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 2 1.4 2.8 7.6 × 10 1 Pb-212 (a) ...................... ................................... 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 5.1 × 10 4 1.4 × 10 6 Pd-103 (a) ...................... Palladium (46) .......... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 2.8 × 10 3 7.5 × 10 4
Pd-107 ............................ ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 1.9 × 10

¥ 5 5.1 × 10

¥ 4
Pd-109 ............................ ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 7.9 × 10 4 2.1 × 10 6 Pm-143 ........................... Promethium (61) ...... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 1.3 × 10 2 3.4 × 10 3
Pm-144 ........................... ................................... 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 9.2 × 10 1 2.5 × 10 3
Pm-145 ........................... ................................... 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 5.2 1.4 × 10 2
Pm-147 ........................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 3.4 × 10 1 9.3 × 10 2 Pm-148m (a) .................. ................................... 8.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.2 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 7.9 × 10 2 2.1 × 10 4
Pm-149 ........................... ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 1.5 × 10 4 4.0 × 10 5
Pm-151 ........................... ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 4 7.3 × 10 5 Po-210 ............................ Polonium (84) ........... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 2.0 × 10

¥ 2 5.4 × 10

¥ 1 1.7 × 10 2 4.5 × 10 3 Pr-142 ............................ Praseodymium (59) .. 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.3 × 10 4 1.2 × 10 6
Pr-143 ............................ ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 2.5 × 10 3 6.7 × 10 4 Pt-188 (a) ....................... Platinum (78) ............ 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 8.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.2 × 10 1 2.5 × 10 3 6.8 × 10 4
Pt-191 ............................. ................................... 4.0 1.1 × 10 2 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 8.7 × 10 3 2.4 × 10 5
Pt-193 ............................. ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 1.4 3.7 × 10 1
Pt-193m .......................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.8 × 10 3 1.6 × 10 5
Pt-195m .......................... ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 6.2 × 10 3 1.7 × 10 5
Pt-197 ............................. ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 3.2 × 10 4 8.7 × 10 5
Pt-197m .......................... ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 3.7 × 10 5 1.0 × 10 7 Pu-236 ............................ Plutonium (94) .......... 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 3.0 × 10

¥ 3 8.1 × 10

¥ 2 2.0 × 10 1 5.3 × 10 2


### 665 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.435

Symbol of radionuclide Element and atomic number A 1 (TBq) A 1 (Ci) b A 2 (TBq) A 2 (Ci) b Specific activity

(TBq/g) (Ci/g)

Pu-237 ............................ ................................... 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 2.0 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 4.5 × 10 2 1.2 × 10 4
Pu-238 ............................ ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 6.3 × 10

¥ 1 1.7 × 10 1
Pu-239 ............................ ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 2.3 × 10

¥ 3 6.2 × 10

¥ 2
Pu-240 ............................ ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 8.4 × 10

¥ 3 2.3 × 10

¥ 1 Pu-241 (a) ...................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 6.0 × 10

¥ 2 1.6 3.8 1.0 × 10 2
Pu-242 ............................ ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 1.5 × 10

¥ 4 3.9 × 10

¥ 3 Pu-244 (a) ...................... ................................... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.7 × 10

¥ 2 6.7 × 10

¥ 7 1.8 × 10

¥ 5 Ra-223 (a) ...................... Radium (88) ............. 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 7.0 × 10

¥ 3 1.9 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 3 5.1 × 10 4 Ra-224 (a) ...................... ................................... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 2.0 × 10

¥ 2 5.4 × 10

¥ 1 5.9 × 10 3 1.6 × 10 5 Ra-225 (a) ...................... ................................... 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 4.0 × 10

¥ 3 1.1 × 10

¥ 1 1.5 × 10 3 3.9 × 10 4 Ra-226 (a) ...................... ................................... 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 3.0 × 10

¥ 3 8.1 × 10

¥ 2 3.7 × 10

¥ 2 1.0 Ra-228 (a) ...................... ................................... 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 2.0 × 10

¥ 2 5.4 × 10

¥ 1 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 Rb-81 ............................. Rubidium (37) ........... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 8.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.2 × 10 1 3.1 × 10 5 8.4 × 10 6 Rb-83 (a) ........................ ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 6.8 × 10 2 1.8 × 10 4
Rb-84 ............................. ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.8 × 10 3 4.7 × 10 4
Rb-86 ............................. ................................... 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 3.0 × 10 3 8.1 × 10 4
Rb-87 ............................. ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 3.2 × 10

¥ 9 8.6 × 10

¥ 8 Rb(nat) ........................... ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 6.7 × 10 6 1.8 × 10 8 Re-184 ........................... Rhenium (75) ........... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 6.9 × 10 2 1.9 × 10 4
Re-184m ........................ ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 1.6 × 10 2 4.3 × 10 3
Re-186 ........................... ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 6.9 × 10 3 1.9 × 10 5
Re-187 ........................... ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 1.4 × 10

¥ 9 3.8 × 10

¥ 8
Re-188 ........................... ................................... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 3.6 × 10 4 9.8 × 10 5 Re-189 (a) ...................... ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 2.5 × 10 4 6.8 × 10 5 Re(nat) ........................... ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 0.0 2.4 × 10

¥ 8 Rh-99 ............................. Rhodium (45) ........... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 3.0 × 10 3 8.2 × 10 4
Rh-101 ........................... ................................... 4.0 1.1 × 10 2 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 4.1 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3
Rh-102 ........................... ................................... 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 4.5 × 10 1 1.2 × 10 3
Rh-102m ........................ ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 2.3 × 10 2 6.2 × 10 3
Rh-103m ........................ ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 1.2 × 10 6 3.3 × 10 7
Rh-105 ........................... ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 8.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.2 × 10 1 3.1 × 10 4 8.4 × 10 5 Rn-222 (a) ...................... Radon (86) ............... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 4.0 × 10

¥ 3 1.1 × 10

¥ 1 5.7 × 10 3 1.5 × 10 5 Ru-97 ............................. Ruthenium (44) ........ 5.0 1.4 × 10 2 5.0 1.4 × 10 2 1.7 × 10 4 4.6 × 10 5 Ru-103 (a) ...................... ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 1.2 × 10 3 3.2 × 10 4
Ru-105 ........................... ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 2.5 × 10 5 6.7 × 10 6 Ru-106 (a) ...................... ................................... 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 1.2 × 10 2 3.3 × 10 3 S-35 ................................ Sulphur (16) ............. 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 1.6 × 10 3 4.3 × 10 4 Sb-122 ............................ Antimony (51) ........... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 1.5 × 10 4 4.0 × 10 5
Sb-124 ............................ ................................... 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 6.5 × 10 2 1.7 × 10 4
Sb-125 ............................ ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 3.9 × 10 1 1.0 × 10 3
Sb-126 ............................ ................................... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 3.1 × 10 3 8.4 × 10 4 Sc-44 .............................. Scandium (21) .......... 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 6.7 × 10 5 1.8 × 10 7
Sc-46 .............................. ................................... 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 1.3 × 10 3 3.4 × 10 4
Sc-47 .............................. ................................... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 7.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.9 × 10 1 3.1 × 10 4 8.3 × 10 5
Sc-48 .............................. ................................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 5.5 × 10 4 1.5 × 10 6 Se-75 .............................. Selenium (34) ........... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 5.4 × 10 2 1.5 × 10 4
Se-79 .............................. ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 2.6 × 10

¥ 3 7.0 × 10

¥ 2 Si-31 ............................... Silicon (14) ............... 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 1.4 × 10 6 3.9 × 10 7
Si-32 ............................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 3.9 1.1 × 10 2 Sm-145 ........................... Samarium (62) ......... 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 9.8 × 10 1 2.6 × 10 3
Sm-147 ........................... ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 8.5 × 10

¥ 1 2.3 × 10

¥ 8
Sm-151 ........................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 1.0 × 10 1 2.7 × 10 2 9.7 × 10

¥ 1 2.6 × 10 1
Sm-153 ........................... ................................... 9.0 2.4 × 10 2 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 1.6 × 10 4 4.4 × 10 5 Sn-113 (a) ...................... Tin (50) ..................... 4.0 1.1 × 10 2 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 3.7 × 10 2 1.0 × 10 4
Sn-117m ......................... ................................... 7.0 1.9 × 10 2 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 3.0 × 10 3 8.2 × 10 4
Sn-119m ......................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 1.4 × 10 2 3.7 × 10 3 Sn-121m (a) ................... ................................... 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 2.0 5.4 × 10 1
Sn-123 ............................ ................................... 8.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.2 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 3.0 × 10 2 8.2 × 10 3
Sn-125 ............................ ................................... 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 4.0 × 10 3 1.1 × 10 5 Sn-126 (a) ...................... ................................... 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 4.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.1 × 10 1 1.0 × 10

¥ 3 2.8 × 10

¥ 2 Sr-82 (a) ......................... Strontium (38) .......... 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 2.0 × 10

¥ 1 5.4 2.3 × 10 3 6.2 × 10 4
Sr-85 .............................. ................................... 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 2.0 5.4 × 10 1 8.8 × 10 2 2.4 × 10 4
Sr-85m ........................... ................................... 5.0 1.4 × 10 2 5.0 1.4 × 10 2 1.2 × 10 6 3.3 × 10 7
Sr-87m ........................... ................................... 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 3.0 8.1 × 10 1 4.8 × 10 5 1.3 × 10 7
Sr-89 .............................. ................................... 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 6.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.6 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 2.9 × 10 4 Sr-90 (a) ......................... ................................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 5.1 1.4 × 10 2 Sr-91 (a) ......................... ................................... 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 1.3 × 10 5 3.6 × 10 6 Sr-92 (a) ......................... ................................... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 3.0 × 10

¥ 1 8.1 4.7 × 10 5 1.3 × 10 7 T(H-3) ............................. Tritium (1) ................. 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 4.0 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3 3.6 × 10 2 9.7 × 10 3 Ta-178 (long-lived) ......... Tantalum (73) ........... 1.0 2.7 × 10 1 8.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.2 × 10 1 4.2 × 10 6 1.1 × 10 8
Ta-179 ............................ ................................... 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 3.0 × 10 1 8.1 × 10 2 4.1 × 10 1 1.1 × 10 3
Ta-182 ............................ ................................... 9.0 × 10

¥ 1 2.4 × 10 1 5.0 × 10

¥ 1 1.4 × 10 1 2.3 × 10 2 6.2 × 10 3